substitution request - Alliance Construction Solutions
substitution request - Alliance Construction Solutions
substitution request - Alliance Construction Solutions
Create successful ePaper yourself
Turn your PDF publications into a flip-book with our unique Google optimized e-Paper software.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS<br />
FOR<br />
HOMEWOOD HOMEWOOD SUITES<br />
SUITES<br />
AND<br />
AND<br />
HAMPTON HAMPTON INN INN & & & SUITES<br />
SUITES<br />
550 550 15 15<br />
TH STREET<br />
DENVER, DENVER, COLORADO<br />
COLORADO<br />
PREPARED BY:<br />
PPahl ll ARCHITECTURE<br />
RCHITECTURE<br />
303 303 E. E. 17 17<br />
th Avenue, Suite 555<br />
Denver, Denver, Colorado Colorado 80203 80203<br />
80203<br />
10 May 2012
550 550 15 15<br />
th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
Denver, Denver, Colorado<br />
Colorado<br />
TABLE TABLE OF OF CONTENTS<br />
CONTENTS<br />
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
Section 01 1000 Summary<br />
Section 01 2500 Substitution Procedures<br />
Section 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures<br />
Section 01 2900 Payment Procedures<br />
Section 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination<br />
Section 01 3200 <strong>Construction</strong> Progress Documentation<br />
Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures<br />
Section 01 4000 Quality Requirements<br />
Section 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls<br />
Section 01 6000 Product Requirements<br />
Section 01 7300 Execution<br />
Section 01 7700 Closeout Procedures<br />
Section 01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Data<br />
Section 01 7839 Project Record Documents<br />
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS<br />
Section 02 4119 Selective Structure Demolitions<br />
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE<br />
Section 03 1100 Lightweight Geo-Synthetic Fill<br />
Section 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete<br />
DIVISION 04 - MASONRY<br />
Section 04 2000 Unit Masonry<br />
DIVISION 05 – METALS<br />
Section 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing<br />
Section 05 3100 Steel Decking<br />
Section 05 4000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing<br />
Section 05 5000 Metal Fabrications<br />
Section 05 5100 Metal Stairs<br />
Project No. 10145 TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel TOC-1<br />
10 May 2012
DIVISION 06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS<br />
Section 06 1053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry<br />
Section 06 4023 Interior Architectural Woodwork<br />
Section 06 6115 Cast Marble<br />
Section 06 6400 Plastic Paneling<br />
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION<br />
Section 07 1326 Sheet Waterproofing<br />
Section 07 2100 Thermal Insulation<br />
Section 07 4213 Formed Metal Wall Panels<br />
Section 07 5323 EPDM Roofing<br />
Section 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim<br />
Section 07 8100 Applied Fireproofing<br />
Section 07 8413 Penetration Firestopping<br />
Section 07 9200 Joint Sealants<br />
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS<br />
Section 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames<br />
Section 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors<br />
Section 08 3113 Access Doors and Frames<br />
Section 08 4100 Folding Wood and Glass Door Systems<br />
Section 08 4113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts<br />
Section 08 4229 Automatic Entrance Doors<br />
Section 08 7100 Door Hardware<br />
Section 08 7200 Guestroom Locking System<br />
Section 08 8000 Glazing<br />
Section 08 8300 Mirrors<br />
Section 08 9000 Louvers and Vents<br />
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES<br />
Section 09 2116 Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies<br />
Section 09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing<br />
Section 09 2400 Cement Plastering<br />
Section 09 2900 Gypsum Board<br />
Section 09 3000 Tiling<br />
Section 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings<br />
Section 09 6219 Decorative Laminate Flooring<br />
Section 09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories<br />
Section 09 6519 Resilient Tile Flooring<br />
Section 09 6816 Sheet Carpeting<br />
Section 09 7200 Wall Coverings<br />
Section 09 9113 Exterior Painting<br />
Section 09 9123 Interior Painting<br />
Section 09 9300 Staining and Transparent Finishing<br />
Project No. 10145 TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel TOC-2<br />
10 May 2012
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES<br />
Section 10 2113 Toilet Compartments<br />
Section 10 2600 Wall and Door Protection<br />
Section 10 2800 Toilet and Bath Accessories<br />
Section 10 3000 Prefabricated Fireplaces<br />
Section 10 4413 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets<br />
Section 10 4416 Fire Extinguishers<br />
Section 10 5113 Metal Lockers<br />
Section 10 8240 Shower Doors<br />
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT<br />
Section 11 0200 Security Equipment<br />
Section 11 3100 Residential Appliances<br />
Section 11 5213 Projection Screens<br />
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS<br />
Section 12 4813 Entrance Floor Mats and Frames<br />
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION<br />
Section 13 1500 Swimming Pool<br />
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT<br />
Section 14 9100 Facility Chutes<br />
End of Table of Contents<br />
Project No. 10145 TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel TOC-3<br />
10 May 2012
Division Section Title Pages<br />
DIVISION DIVISION 22 22 - PLUMBING<br />
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS GROUP<br />
GROUP<br />
220513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 3<br />
220516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 7<br />
220517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 4<br />
220518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING 2<br />
220519 METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 7<br />
220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 9<br />
220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 13<br />
220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 11<br />
220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 8<br />
220719 PLUMBING INSULATION 9<br />
221116 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING 18<br />
221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 10<br />
221123 PLUMBING PUMPS 7<br />
221223 DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE TANKS 3<br />
221323 SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS 3<br />
221423 SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES 9<br />
223400 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 2<br />
223500 DOMESTIC-WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS 4<br />
224100 PLUMBING FIXTURES 6<br />
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division Section Title Pages<br />
SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS GROUP<br />
GROUP<br />
DIVISION DIVISION DIVISION 23 23 – HEATING HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING<br />
230010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 20<br />
230513 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT 13<br />
230516 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 8<br />
230517 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING 4<br />
230518 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING 2<br />
230519 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING 11<br />
230523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 11<br />
230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 13<br />
230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 12<br />
230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 8<br />
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 13<br />
230713 MECHANICAL INSULATION 12<br />
231113 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING 12<br />
231123 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 8<br />
232113 HYDRONIC PIPING 19<br />
232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS 6<br />
233113 METAL DUCTS 10<br />
233300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 10<br />
233413 HVAC FANS 11<br />
233600 AIR TERMINALS 5<br />
233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 5<br />
235233.19 BOILERS 7<br />
235700 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC 7<br />
238219 FAN COIL UNITS 4<br />
238239 UNIT HEATERS 5<br />
238416 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS 11<br />
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
Division Section Title Pages<br />
DIVISION 26<br />
Electrical<br />
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL<br />
260519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 4<br />
260526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6<br />
260529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 5<br />
260533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 12<br />
260544 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING 4<br />
260553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 4<br />
260923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 7<br />
260933 CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS 9<br />
262200 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 4<br />
262416 PANELBOARDS 9<br />
262726 WIRING DEVICES 11<br />
262813 FUSES 3<br />
262816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 8<br />
265100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 10<br />
265600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 13<br />
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
SECTION 01 1000<br />
SUMMARY<br />
1. Project information.<br />
2. Work covered by Contract Documents.<br />
3. Correlation and intent of the Contract Documents<br />
4. Owner-furnished products.<br />
5. Access to site.<br />
6. Work restrictions.<br />
7. Specification and drawing conventions.<br />
1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION<br />
A. Project Identification: Hampton Inn & Suites and Homewood Suites.<br />
1. Project Location: 550 15 th Street, Denver, Colorado.<br />
B. Owner: Combotel, LLC, 9100 E. Panorama Drive, Suite 300, Englewood, Colorado<br />
80112. Phone (303) 785-3100.<br />
C. Architect: Pahl ARCHITECTURE, 303 E, 17 th Avenue, Suite 555, Denver, Colorado,<br />
80203. Phone: (303) 861-7147. Fax: (303) 861-7227. Web: www.pahlarch.com<br />
D. Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals<br />
who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:<br />
1. Structural: Jirsa/Hedrick & Associates, Inc.<br />
2. Civil/Landscape: Sterling Design Associates, LLC.<br />
E. Contractor: <strong>Alliance</strong> <strong>Construction</strong> <strong>Solutions</strong>, LLC has been engaged as Design-Build<br />
Contractor for this Project.<br />
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:<br />
1. The remodeling of an existing office building into a dual brand Homewood<br />
Suites and Hampton Inn & Suites hotel, containing a total of approximately 300<br />
guestrooms and associated support areas including, but not limited to, lobby<br />
and registration areas, guest dining facilities, meeting spaces and fitness<br />
facilities as well as required back of house spaces. Work shall include all<br />
necessary civil, landscape and structural.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUMMARY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 011000 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
B. Type of Contract:<br />
1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.<br />
1.4 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper<br />
execution and completion of the Work. The Contract Documents are complementary,<br />
and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Anything<br />
mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or shown on the<br />
Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, shall be of like effect as if shown or<br />
mentioned in both; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent<br />
consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being<br />
necessary to produce the indicated results.<br />
B. The Drawings and Specifications have no inherent order of precedence.<br />
C. Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and<br />
arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among<br />
Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade.<br />
D. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known<br />
technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in<br />
accordance with such recognized meanings.<br />
E. <strong>Construction</strong> Documents include:<br />
1. Homewood Suites by Hilton Standards Effective 8/1/2010<br />
2. Hampton USA Standards Effective 8/1/2010<br />
1.5 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS<br />
A. Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading,<br />
handling, storing, protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products and making<br />
building services connections.<br />
1.6 ACCESS TO SITE<br />
A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations<br />
during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's<br />
right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.<br />
B. Condition of Existing Building: Maintain portions of existing building affected by<br />
construction operations in a weathertight condition throughout construction period.<br />
Repair damage caused by construction operations.<br />
1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS<br />
A. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of<br />
entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUMMARY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
011000 - 2
1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS<br />
A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of<br />
language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used<br />
in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:<br />
1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the<br />
Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on<br />
the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.<br />
2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically<br />
stated otherwise.<br />
B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to<br />
the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.<br />
C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on<br />
Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following<br />
are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:<br />
1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms<br />
used in the individual Specifications Sections.<br />
2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published<br />
as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.<br />
3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes<br />
referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 01 1000<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUMMARY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 011000 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 2500<br />
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES<br />
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for <strong>substitution</strong>s.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting<br />
comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction<br />
from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each <strong>request</strong> for consideration. Identify<br />
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification<br />
Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.<br />
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A.<br />
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for <strong>substitution</strong>s and the<br />
following, as applicable:<br />
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation<br />
cannot be provided, if applicable.<br />
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed<br />
to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and<br />
separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed<br />
<strong>substitution</strong>.<br />
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed <strong>substitution</strong> with<br />
those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable<br />
Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as<br />
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design<br />
characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements<br />
indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.<br />
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and<br />
fabrication and installation procedures.<br />
e. Samples, where applicable or <strong>request</strong>ed.<br />
f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or <strong>request</strong>ed.<br />
g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and<br />
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.<br />
h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and<br />
interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
012500 - 1
i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for<br />
Project, from ICC-ES.<br />
j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed<br />
<strong>substitution</strong> with products specified for the Work, including effect on the<br />
overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction<br />
cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from<br />
manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of<br />
purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.<br />
k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract<br />
Sum.<br />
l. Contractor's certification that proposed <strong>substitution</strong> complies with<br />
requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in<br />
<strong>substitution</strong> <strong>request</strong>, is compatible with related materials, and is<br />
appropriate for applications indicated.<br />
m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may<br />
subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed<br />
<strong>substitution</strong> to produce indicated results.<br />
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will <strong>request</strong> additional information or<br />
documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a <strong>request</strong> for<br />
<strong>substitution</strong>. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of<br />
proposed <strong>substitution</strong> within 15 days of receipt of <strong>request</strong>, or seven days of<br />
receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.<br />
a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive, or<br />
Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.<br />
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a<br />
proposed <strong>substitution</strong> within time allocated.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed<br />
<strong>substitution</strong> with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to<br />
perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS<br />
A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit <strong>request</strong>s for <strong>substitution</strong> immediately on discovery of<br />
need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and<br />
review of related submittals.<br />
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's <strong>request</strong> for <strong>substitution</strong> when the<br />
following conditions are satisfied:<br />
a. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> is consistent with the Contract Documents and will<br />
produce indicated results.<br />
b. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> will not adversely affect Contractor's construction<br />
schedule.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 012500 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
c. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> has received necessary approvals of authorities<br />
having jurisdiction.<br />
d. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> is compatible with other portions of the Work.<br />
e. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> has been coordinated with other portions of the<br />
Work.<br />
f. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> provides specified warranty.<br />
g. If <strong>request</strong>ed <strong>substitution</strong> involves more than one contractor, <strong>request</strong>ed<br />
<strong>substitution</strong> has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is<br />
uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is<br />
acceptable to all contractors involved.<br />
B. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider <strong>request</strong>s for <strong>substitution</strong> if<br />
received within 60 days after the Notice to Proceed.<br />
1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's <strong>request</strong> for <strong>substitution</strong> when the<br />
following conditions are satisfied:<br />
a. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time,<br />
energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional<br />
responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities<br />
may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation<br />
services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar<br />
considerations.<br />
b. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> does not require extensive revisions to the Contract<br />
Documents.<br />
c. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> is consistent with the Contract Documents and will<br />
produce indicated results.<br />
d. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> will not adversely affect Contractor's construction<br />
schedule.<br />
e. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> has received necessary approvals of authorities<br />
having jurisdiction.<br />
f. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> is compatible with other portions of the Work.<br />
g. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> has been coordinated with other portions of the<br />
Work.<br />
h. Requested <strong>substitution</strong> provides specified warranty.<br />
i. If <strong>request</strong>ed <strong>substitution</strong> involves more than one contractor, <strong>request</strong>ed<br />
<strong>substitution</strong> has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is<br />
uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is<br />
acceptable to all contractors involved.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 01 2500<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 012500 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
Project:<br />
To:<br />
Re:<br />
Substitution Request Number:<br />
From:<br />
Date:<br />
A/E Project Number:<br />
Contract For:<br />
Specification Title: Description:<br />
Section: Page: Article/Paragraph:<br />
Proposed Substitution:<br />
Manufacturer: Address: Phone:<br />
Trade Name: Model No.:<br />
Installer: Address: Phone:<br />
History: New product 2-5 years old 5-10 yrs old More than 10 years old<br />
Differences between proposed <strong>substitution</strong> and specified product:<br />
Point-by-point comparative data attached - REQUIRED BY A/E<br />
Reason for not providing specified item:<br />
Similar Installation:<br />
Project: Architect:<br />
Address: Owner:<br />
Date Installed:<br />
Proposed <strong>substitution</strong> affects other parts of Work: No Yes; explain<br />
SUBSTITUTION<br />
REQUEST<br />
(After the Bidding Phase)<br />
Savings to Owner for accepting <strong>substitution</strong>: ($ ).<br />
Proposed <strong>substitution</strong> changes Contract Time: No Yes [Add] [Deduct] days.<br />
Supporting Data Attached: Drawings Product Data Samples Tests Reports<br />
Copyright 1996, <strong>Construction</strong> Specification Institute,<br />
601 Madison Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-1791<br />
Page of September 1996<br />
CSI Form 13.1A
SUBSTITUTION<br />
REQUEST<br />
(Continued)<br />
The Undersigned certifies:<br />
• Proposed <strong>substitution</strong> has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product.<br />
• Same warranty will be furnished for proposed <strong>substitution</strong> as for specified product.<br />
• Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available.<br />
• Proposed <strong>substitution</strong> will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule.<br />
• Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted <strong>substitution</strong> which may subsequently become<br />
apparent are to be waived.<br />
• Proposed <strong>substitution</strong> does not affect dimensions and functional clearances.<br />
• Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs caused by the<br />
<strong>substitution</strong>.<br />
• Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted <strong>substitution</strong> will be complete in all respects.<br />
Submitted by:<br />
Signed by:<br />
Firm:<br />
Address:<br />
Telephone:<br />
Attachments:<br />
A/E's REVIEW AND ACTION<br />
Substitution approved - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330.<br />
Substitution approved as noted - Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330.<br />
Substitution rejected - Use specified materials.<br />
Substitution Request received too late - Use specified materials.<br />
Signed by: Date:<br />
Additional Comments: Contractor Subcontractor Supplier Manufacturer A/E<br />
Copyright 1996, <strong>Construction</strong> Specification Institute,<br />
601 Madison Street, Alexandria, VA 22314-1791<br />
Page of September 1996<br />
CSI Form 13.1A
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 2600<br />
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES<br />
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and<br />
processing Contract modifications.<br />
1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK<br />
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work,<br />
not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on "Architect's<br />
Supplemental Instructions" form.<br />
1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS<br />
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Owner will issue a detailed description of<br />
proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the<br />
Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised<br />
Drawings and Specifications.<br />
1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to<br />
stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.<br />
2. Within 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request,<br />
submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the<br />
Contract Time necessary to execute the change.<br />
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit<br />
costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If<br />
<strong>request</strong>ed, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.<br />
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and<br />
amounts of trade discounts.<br />
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.<br />
d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the<br />
effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity<br />
duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available<br />
total float before <strong>request</strong>ing an extension of the Contract Time.<br />
e. Quotation Form: Use forms acceptable to Architect.<br />
B. Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require<br />
modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a <strong>request</strong><br />
for a change to Architect.<br />
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the<br />
change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change.<br />
Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the<br />
Contract Time.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
012600 - 1
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with<br />
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If <strong>request</strong>ed, furnish survey<br />
data to substantiate quantities.<br />
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of<br />
trade discounts.<br />
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.<br />
5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of<br />
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and<br />
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before <strong>request</strong>ing<br />
an extension of the Contract Time.<br />
6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the<br />
proposed change requires <strong>substitution</strong> of one product or system for product or<br />
system specified.<br />
7. Work Change Proposal Request Form: Use form acceptable to Architect.<br />
1.4 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE<br />
A. <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive: Owner may issue a <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive on<br />
AIA Document G714 or other pre-approved form. <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive<br />
instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in<br />
a Change Order.<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the<br />
Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the<br />
Contract Sum or the Contract Time.<br />
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work<br />
required by the <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive.<br />
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data<br />
necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.<br />
1.5 HILTON HOTESL REVIEW<br />
A. Copies of all Change orders shall be submitted to Hilton Hotels.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 01 2600<br />
Project No.: 10145 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 012600 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 2900<br />
PAYMENT PROCEDURES<br />
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and<br />
process Applications for Payment.<br />
1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES<br />
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of<br />
Contractor's construction schedule. Cost-loaded Critical Path Method Schedule may<br />
serve to satisfy requirements for the schedule of values.<br />
1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative<br />
forms and schedules, including the following:<br />
a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.<br />
b. Submittal schedule.<br />
c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's<br />
construction schedule.<br />
2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later<br />
than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for<br />
Payment.<br />
B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line<br />
items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification<br />
Section.<br />
1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of<br />
values:<br />
a. Project name and location.<br />
b. Name of Architect.<br />
c. Architect's project number.<br />
d. Contractor's name and address.<br />
e. Date of submittal.<br />
2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.<br />
3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued<br />
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with<br />
Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal<br />
subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PAYMENT PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 012900 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
a. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts<br />
for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the<br />
Contract Sum and subcontract amount.<br />
4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.<br />
5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work<br />
where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased<br />
or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.<br />
6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials,<br />
for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that<br />
part of the Work.<br />
7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each<br />
allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit<br />
cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract<br />
Documents to determine quantities.<br />
8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be<br />
complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and<br />
profit for each item.<br />
a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of<br />
actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the<br />
schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at<br />
Contractor's option.<br />
9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next<br />
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or <strong>Construction</strong> Change<br />
Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.<br />
1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT<br />
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and<br />
payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.<br />
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial<br />
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.<br />
B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the<br />
Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered<br />
by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.<br />
C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703,<br />
or other pre-approved forms acceptable to Owner and Architect, as form for<br />
Applications for Payment.<br />
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a<br />
person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will<br />
return incomplete applications without action.<br />
1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction<br />
schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.<br />
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directives issued<br />
before last day of construction period covered by application.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PAYMENT PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 012900 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
E. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for<br />
Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of<br />
lien and similar attachments if required.<br />
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording<br />
appropriate information about application.<br />
F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of<br />
mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the<br />
Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.<br />
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount <strong>request</strong>ed in previous<br />
application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.<br />
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or<br />
full waivers.<br />
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must<br />
submit waivers.<br />
4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.<br />
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must<br />
precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the<br />
following:<br />
1. List of subcontractors.<br />
2. Schedule of values.<br />
3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).<br />
4. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).<br />
5. Initial application for payment may not be certified by Architect until all items are<br />
submitted.<br />
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate<br />
of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent<br />
completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.<br />
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete<br />
and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.<br />
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued<br />
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.<br />
I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final<br />
Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously<br />
submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:<br />
1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.<br />
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and<br />
proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.<br />
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.<br />
4. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and<br />
Claims."<br />
5. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."<br />
6. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."<br />
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PAYMENT PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 012900 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar<br />
data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of<br />
and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.<br />
9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 01 2900<br />
Project No.: 10145 PAYMENT PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 012900 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 3100<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION<br />
A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on<br />
Project including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Coordination drawings.<br />
2. Requests for Information (RFIs).<br />
3. Project meetings.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or<br />
clarifications of the Contract Documents.<br />
1.3 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES<br />
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the<br />
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.<br />
Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each<br />
other for proper installation, connection, and operation.<br />
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results<br />
where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other<br />
components, before or after its own installation.<br />
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum<br />
performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.<br />
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later<br />
installation.<br />
B. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required<br />
administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to<br />
ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not<br />
limited to, the following:<br />
1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.<br />
2. Preparation of the schedule of values.<br />
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.<br />
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.<br />
5. Progress meetings.<br />
6. Preinstallation conferences.<br />
7. Project closeout activities.<br />
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013100 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.4 COORDINATION DRAWINGS<br />
A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to<br />
requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop<br />
Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination<br />
is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by<br />
more than one entity.<br />
1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough<br />
to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on<br />
standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:<br />
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of<br />
architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.<br />
b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions<br />
that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum<br />
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating<br />
proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and<br />
difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.<br />
B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:<br />
1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural<br />
elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical<br />
Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical<br />
ceiling grid.<br />
2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems,<br />
mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components<br />
within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on<br />
Drawings.<br />
3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms<br />
showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, firealarm,<br />
and electrical equipment.<br />
4. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is<br />
being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are<br />
Contractor's responsibility.<br />
1.5 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)<br />
A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or<br />
interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI<br />
in the form specified.<br />
1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by<br />
Contractor with no response.<br />
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in<br />
Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.<br />
3. The Contractor shall be responsible for complete review and understanding of<br />
the Contract Documents. RFIs shall not be used to locate information for the<br />
Contractor. The Architect will not respond to <strong>request</strong>s where such information is<br />
available from a careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field<br />
conditions, or prior project correspondence or documentation.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013100 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information<br />
or interpretation and the following:<br />
1. Project name.<br />
2. Project number.<br />
3. Date.<br />
4. Name of Contractor.<br />
5. Name of Architect.<br />
6. RFI number, numbered sequentially.<br />
7. RFI subject.<br />
8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.<br />
9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.<br />
10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.<br />
11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the<br />
Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.<br />
12. Contractor's signature.<br />
13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product<br />
Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary<br />
to fully describe items needing interpretation.<br />
C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated<br />
above, acceptable to Architect. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat<br />
PDF format.<br />
D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and<br />
respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received<br />
by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.<br />
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:<br />
a. Requests for approval of submittals.<br />
b. Requests for approval of <strong>substitution</strong>s.<br />
c. Requests for approval of Contractor’s means and methods.<br />
d. Requests for information already indicated in the Contract Documents.<br />
e. Requests for acceptance of non-conforming Work.<br />
f. Requests for proposed corrective action for non-conforming Work.<br />
g. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.<br />
h. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.<br />
i. Requests for modifications to the Contract Documents.<br />
j. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.<br />
2. Architect's action may include a <strong>request</strong> for additional information, in which case<br />
Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional<br />
information.<br />
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the<br />
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal<br />
according to Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures."<br />
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract<br />
Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of<br />
receipt of the RFI response.<br />
E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI<br />
number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:<br />
Project No.: 10145 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013100 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
1. Project name.<br />
2. Name and address of Contractor.<br />
3. Name and address of Architect.<br />
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.<br />
5. RFI description.<br />
6. Date the RFI was submitted.<br />
7. Date Architect's response was received.<br />
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI<br />
response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if<br />
Contractor disagrees with response.<br />
1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, <strong>Construction</strong> Change<br />
Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.<br />
2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal<br />
Request, as appropriate.<br />
1.6 PROJECT MEETINGS<br />
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose<br />
presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and<br />
Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.<br />
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited<br />
attendees.<br />
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant<br />
discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to<br />
everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the<br />
meeting.<br />
B. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before<br />
each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.<br />
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators<br />
involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with<br />
other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend<br />
the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.<br />
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for<br />
the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the<br />
following:<br />
a. Contract Documents.<br />
b. Options.<br />
c. Related RFIs.<br />
d. Related Change Orders.<br />
e. Purchases.<br />
f. Deliveries.<br />
g. Submittals.<br />
h. Review of mockups.<br />
i. Possible conflicts.<br />
j. Compatibility problems.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
013100 - 4
k. Time schedules.<br />
l. Weather limitations.<br />
m. Manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
n. Warranty requirements.<br />
o. Compatibility of materials.<br />
p. Acceptability of substrates.<br />
q. Temporary facilities and controls.<br />
r. Space and access limitations.<br />
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.<br />
u. Installation procedures.<br />
v. Coordination with other work.<br />
w. Required performance results.<br />
x. Protection of adjacent work.<br />
y. Protection of construction and personnel.<br />
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements,<br />
including required corrective measures and actions.<br />
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other<br />
parties requiring information.<br />
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully<br />
concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to<br />
performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.<br />
C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals.<br />
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each<br />
contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current<br />
progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future<br />
activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting<br />
shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the<br />
Work.<br />
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting.<br />
Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for<br />
discussion as appropriate to status of Project.<br />
a. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Review progress since the last<br />
meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule,<br />
or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule.<br />
Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure<br />
commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule<br />
revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will<br />
be completed within the Contract Time.<br />
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the<br />
following:<br />
1) Interface requirements.<br />
2) Sequence of operations.<br />
3) Status of submittals.<br />
4) Deliveries.<br />
5) Off-site fabrication.<br />
6) Access.<br />
7) Site utilization.<br />
8) Temporary facilities and controls.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
013100 - 5
9) Progress cleaning.<br />
10) Quality and work standards.<br />
11) Status of correction of deficient items.<br />
12) Field observations.<br />
13) Status of RFIs.<br />
14) Status of proposal <strong>request</strong>s.<br />
15) Pending changes.<br />
16) Status of Change Orders.<br />
17) Pending claims and disputes.<br />
18) Documentation of information for payment <strong>request</strong>s.<br />
3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute<br />
the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each<br />
progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or<br />
recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each<br />
meeting.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 01 3100<br />
Project No.: 10145 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013100 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 3200<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION<br />
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the<br />
progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:<br />
1. Contractor's construction schedule.<br />
2. <strong>Construction</strong> schedule updating reports.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.<br />
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor,<br />
but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as<br />
needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.<br />
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:<br />
1. PDF electronic file.<br />
B. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire<br />
construction period. Show logic ties for activities.<br />
C. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire<br />
schedule for entire construction period.<br />
D. <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.<br />
1.4 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of<br />
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.<br />
B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal<br />
schedule, progress reports, payment <strong>request</strong>s, and other required schedules and<br />
reports.<br />
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from<br />
entities involved.<br />
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and<br />
schedule them in proper sequence.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013200 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL<br />
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date<br />
of Substantial Completion.<br />
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that<br />
shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.<br />
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each<br />
main element of the Work. Comply with the following:<br />
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless<br />
specifically allowed by Architect.<br />
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead<br />
items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate<br />
activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to,<br />
submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.<br />
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in<br />
Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal<br />
review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.<br />
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.<br />
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for<br />
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures<br />
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.<br />
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion<br />
of punch list items and final completion.<br />
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract<br />
Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is<br />
affected.<br />
1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.<br />
2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each<br />
contract.<br />
3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work<br />
performed by Owner.<br />
4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:<br />
a. Coordination with existing construction.<br />
b. Limitations of continued occupancies.<br />
c. Uninterruptible services.<br />
d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.<br />
e. Use of premises restrictions.<br />
f. Provisions for future construction.<br />
g. Seasonal variations.<br />
h. Environmental control.<br />
5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion<br />
of the Work.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013200 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
D. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to<br />
occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the<br />
following issues:<br />
1. Unresolved issues.<br />
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.<br />
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.<br />
4. Notations on returned submittals.<br />
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.<br />
E. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar<br />
days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule<br />
indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.<br />
2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)<br />
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Ganttchart-type,<br />
Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the<br />
Notice to Proceed.<br />
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first<br />
workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE<br />
A. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to<br />
reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule before each regularly<br />
scheduled progress meeting.<br />
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions<br />
have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the<br />
report of each such meeting.<br />
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including,<br />
but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and<br />
activity durations.<br />
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.<br />
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect and Owner, separate<br />
contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor<br />
with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.<br />
1. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and<br />
post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have<br />
completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in<br />
performance of construction activities.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 3200<br />
Project No.: 10145 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013200 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 3300<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and<br />
procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and<br />
other submittals.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require<br />
Architect's responsive action.<br />
B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that<br />
do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not<br />
complying with requirements.<br />
1.3 HILTON HOTELS REVIEW<br />
A. Submit the following construction submittals to Hilton Hotels for review and approval:<br />
1. Value engineering considerations.<br />
2. Plumbing fixture cutsheets.<br />
3. Light fixture cutsheets.<br />
4. Door hardware cutsheets and schedule.<br />
5. Roof material sample and cutsheets.<br />
6. Exterior wall finish samples and product data.<br />
7. Swimming pool shop drawings.<br />
8. Vanity and tub surround material.<br />
9. Vanity base shop drawings.<br />
10. Knockdown wall texture for color and texture.<br />
11. Fire sprinkler shop drawings.<br />
12. Front desk shop drawings.<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order<br />
by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering,<br />
manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional<br />
time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and<br />
additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013300 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.5 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE<br />
A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by<br />
dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal,<br />
ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.<br />
1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values,<br />
and Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.<br />
2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong><br />
Schedule.<br />
3. Submit updated schedule to reflect current status and changes in timing for<br />
submittals.<br />
B. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:<br />
1. Scheduled date for first submittal.<br />
2. Specification Section number and title.<br />
3. Submittal category (action or informational).<br />
4. Name of subcontractor.<br />
5. Description of the Work covered.<br />
6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.<br />
1.6 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Architect's Digital Data Files: At Contractor’s written <strong>request</strong>, electronic copies of digital<br />
data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in<br />
preparing submittals, subject to the following conditions:<br />
1. Release of CAD files for the purposes of preparing submittals does not relieve<br />
the Contractor from constructing an accurate and complete project in the event<br />
of a graphic error in the CAD Drawings. Contractor shall be wholly responsible<br />
for full compliance with the scope of work as defined by the complete Contract<br />
Documents.<br />
2. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital<br />
data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.<br />
3. Contractor’s payment of $200.00 per sheet to Architect for time and expenses to<br />
prepare and transfer files.<br />
4. CAD files are limited to availability of Architect’s consultant files.<br />
5. CAD files are limited to files that already exist.<br />
a. Floor plans.<br />
b. Reflected ceiling plans.<br />
B. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as<br />
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No<br />
extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit<br />
submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.<br />
1. Initial Review: Allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow<br />
additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect<br />
will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for<br />
coordination.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013300 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same<br />
manner as initial submittal.<br />
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 14 days for review of each resubmittal.<br />
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's<br />
consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review<br />
of each submittal.<br />
a. Structural Shop Drawings.<br />
5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that<br />
submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's<br />
consultants, allow 15 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be<br />
returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.<br />
C. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for<br />
identification.<br />
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title<br />
block.<br />
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to<br />
record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.<br />
3. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:<br />
a. Project name.<br />
b. Date.<br />
c. Name of Architect.<br />
d. Name of <strong>Construction</strong> Manager.<br />
e. Name of Contractor.<br />
f. Name of subcontractor.<br />
g. Name of supplier.<br />
h. Name of manufacturer.<br />
i. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.<br />
j. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.<br />
k. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.<br />
l. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.<br />
m. Other necessary identification.<br />
D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal<br />
file as follows:<br />
1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating<br />
submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with<br />
links enabling navigation to each item.<br />
2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision<br />
identifier.<br />
3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and<br />
approval markings and action taken by Architect.<br />
4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to<br />
Owner, containing the following information:<br />
a. Project name.<br />
b. Date.<br />
c. Name and address of Architect.<br />
d. Name of <strong>Construction</strong> Manager.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
013300 - 3
e. Name of Contractor.<br />
f. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.<br />
g. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.<br />
h. Category and type of submittal.<br />
i. Submittal purpose and description.<br />
j. Specification Section number and title.<br />
k. Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic<br />
name for each of multiple items.<br />
l. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.<br />
m. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.<br />
n. Related physical samples submitted directly.<br />
o. Indication of full or partial submittal.<br />
p. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.<br />
q. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.<br />
r. Other necessary identification.<br />
s. Remarks.<br />
E. Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.<br />
F. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.<br />
G. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial<br />
submittal.<br />
H. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors,<br />
suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary<br />
for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.<br />
I. Use for <strong>Construction</strong>: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only<br />
final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action<br />
stamp.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements:<br />
1. Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files. Architect will return<br />
annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project<br />
record document file.<br />
2. Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless<br />
otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.<br />
3. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes<br />
signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and<br />
certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign<br />
documents on behalf of that entity.<br />
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of<br />
construction and type of product or equipment.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013300 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard<br />
published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product<br />
Data.<br />
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are<br />
applicable.<br />
3. Include the following information, as applicable:<br />
a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.<br />
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.<br />
c. Standard color charts.<br />
d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.<br />
e. Testing by recognized testing agency.<br />
f. Application of testing agency labels and seals.<br />
g. Notation of coordination requirements.<br />
h. Availability and delivery time information.<br />
4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.<br />
5. Submit Product Data in PDF electronic file format (preferred) or paper copies.<br />
a. Number of Copies: Architect will retain one copy; consultant, if<br />
applicable, will retain one copy; remainder will be returned. Mark up and<br />
retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.<br />
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do<br />
not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard<br />
printed data.<br />
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include<br />
the following information, as applicable:<br />
a. Identification of products.<br />
b. Schedules.<br />
c. Compliance with specified standards.<br />
d. Notation of coordination requirements.<br />
e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.<br />
f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.<br />
g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.<br />
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit<br />
Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by<br />
42 inches.<br />
3. Submit Shop Drawings in PDF electronic file format (preferred) or opaque<br />
copies.<br />
a. Number of Copies: Architect will retain one copy; consultant, if<br />
applicable, will retain one copy; remainder will be returned.<br />
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of<br />
these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics<br />
between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.<br />
1. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the<br />
following:<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013300 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
a. Generic description of Sample.<br />
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.<br />
c. Sample source.<br />
d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.<br />
2. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for<br />
quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity.<br />
Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction<br />
associated with each set.<br />
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in<br />
individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an<br />
undamaged condition at time of use.<br />
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as<br />
Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.<br />
c. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where<br />
color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected<br />
from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with<br />
options selected.<br />
E. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section<br />
013200 "<strong>Construction</strong> Progress Documentation."<br />
F. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply<br />
with requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."<br />
G. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and<br />
personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of<br />
Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms.<br />
Include names of firms and personnel certified.<br />
H. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying<br />
that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where<br />
required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.<br />
I. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead<br />
certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.<br />
Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.<br />
J. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing<br />
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for<br />
compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.<br />
K. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on<br />
testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests<br />
performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers<br />
and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.<br />
L. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field<br />
tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its<br />
final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013300 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW<br />
A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination<br />
with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents.<br />
Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to<br />
Architect.<br />
3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION<br />
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval<br />
stamp and will return them without action.<br />
B. Architect’s review is for general conformance and compliance with the design concept,<br />
drawings and specifications only. Any action noted does not waive any requirements of<br />
the Contract Documents. Verification of details, and/or dimensions, quantities,<br />
coordination of trades, the maintenance of the highest standards of safety and the<br />
satisfactory performance of the work are the Contractor’s complete and total<br />
responsibility.<br />
C. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate<br />
corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with<br />
an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows:<br />
1. Final Unrestricted Release: Where the submittal is marked “No Exception” the<br />
Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with the<br />
Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance.<br />
2. Final-but-Restricted Release: Where the submittal is marked “Make Corrections”<br />
the Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies both with<br />
Architect’s notations and corrections on the submittal and the Contract<br />
Documents. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance.<br />
3. Returned for Resubmittal: Where the submittal is marked “Revise and Resubmit,”<br />
do not proceed with the Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing,<br />
fabrication, delivery, or other activity for the product submitted. Revise or<br />
prepare a new submittal per Architect’s notations and corrections. Do not use, or<br />
allow others to use, submittals marked “Revise and Resubmit” at the Project site<br />
or elsewhere where Work is in progress.<br />
D. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or<br />
will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each<br />
submittal to appropriate party.<br />
E. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be<br />
returned for resubmittal without review.<br />
F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be<br />
discarded.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 3300<br />
Project No.: 10145 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 013300 - 7<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 4000<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and<br />
quality control.<br />
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements<br />
specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for<br />
compliance with the Contract Document requirements.<br />
1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other<br />
quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the<br />
Contract Document requirements.<br />
2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services<br />
required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by<br />
provisions of this Section.<br />
C. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and<br />
during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate<br />
that proposed construction will comply with requirements.<br />
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during<br />
and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the<br />
Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include<br />
contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.<br />
C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are<br />
constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic<br />
effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review<br />
coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and<br />
to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not<br />
Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by<br />
which the Work will be judged.<br />
D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before<br />
products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or<br />
compliance with specified criteria.<br />
E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a<br />
testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having<br />
Project No.: 10145 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
014000 - 1
jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified<br />
requirements.<br />
F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the<br />
source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.<br />
G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for<br />
installation of the Work and for completed Work.<br />
H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both.<br />
Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.<br />
I. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having<br />
successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and<br />
extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having<br />
complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the<br />
standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or<br />
quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting<br />
requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before<br />
proceeding.<br />
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified<br />
shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply<br />
exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum<br />
within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values<br />
are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer<br />
uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.<br />
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities<br />
and responsibilities.<br />
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance"<br />
Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications<br />
in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized<br />
authority.<br />
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN<br />
A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice of<br />
Award, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in<br />
format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions,<br />
tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and<br />
quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.<br />
Project No.: 10145 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 014000 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained<br />
and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control<br />
procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.<br />
1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.<br />
C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements<br />
through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of<br />
personnel responsible for submittal review.<br />
D. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of<br />
Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:<br />
1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed<br />
tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractorelected<br />
tests and inspections.<br />
2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on<br />
the "Statement of Special Inspections."<br />
3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract<br />
Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the<br />
Commissioning Authority.<br />
E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection<br />
during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to<br />
testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to<br />
bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract<br />
requirements and approved mockups.<br />
F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log<br />
of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as<br />
nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming<br />
work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities<br />
having jurisdiction.<br />
1.6 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in<br />
other Sections. Include the following:<br />
1. Date of issue.<br />
2. Project title and number.<br />
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.<br />
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.<br />
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.<br />
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.<br />
7. Complete test or inspection data.<br />
8. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.<br />
9. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and<br />
testing and inspecting.<br />
10. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work<br />
complies with the Contract Document requirements.<br />
11. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.<br />
Project No.: 10145 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 014000 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification<br />
levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.<br />
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems<br />
similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service<br />
performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.<br />
C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those<br />
indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well<br />
as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.<br />
D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or<br />
assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project,<br />
whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service<br />
performance.<br />
E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with<br />
the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as<br />
documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in<br />
individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is<br />
acceptable to authorities.<br />
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.<br />
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary<br />
Laboratory Accreditation Program.<br />
F. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of<br />
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect<br />
installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to<br />
those indicated for this Project.<br />
1.8 QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's<br />
responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.<br />
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of<br />
testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting<br />
they are engaged to perform.<br />
2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated<br />
by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to<br />
Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.<br />
B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are<br />
Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to<br />
verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.<br />
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified<br />
testing agency to perform these quality-control services. Contractor shall not<br />
employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.<br />
Project No.: 10145 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 014000 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that<br />
requires testing or inspecting will be performed.<br />
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit<br />
a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.<br />
4. Testing and inspecting <strong>request</strong>ed by Contractor and not required by the Contract<br />
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.<br />
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having<br />
jurisdiction, when they so direct.<br />
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's<br />
representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's<br />
services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials,<br />
inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.<br />
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were<br />
Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and<br />
reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract<br />
Documents.<br />
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in<br />
performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and<br />
inspections.<br />
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed<br />
in the Work during performance of its services.<br />
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ<br />
tests are conducted.<br />
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether<br />
tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.<br />
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and<br />
similar quality-control service through Contractor.<br />
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements<br />
or approve or accept any portion of the Work.<br />
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.<br />
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections,<br />
and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as<br />
<strong>request</strong>ed. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of<br />
personnel. Provide the following:<br />
1. Access to the Work.<br />
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.<br />
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing<br />
and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.<br />
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.<br />
5. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at<br />
Project site.<br />
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required qualityassurance<br />
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of<br />
removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.<br />
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.<br />
Project No.: 10145 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 014000 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
1.9 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS<br />
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to<br />
conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the<br />
responsibility of Owner, and as follows:<br />
1. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies<br />
observed in the Work during performance of its services.<br />
2. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar qualitycontrol<br />
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
3. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial<br />
Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.<br />
4. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and<br />
inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.<br />
5. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG<br />
A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the<br />
following:<br />
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.<br />
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.<br />
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.<br />
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.<br />
B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access<br />
to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.<br />
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION<br />
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services,<br />
repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.<br />
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other<br />
Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore<br />
patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams<br />
that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document<br />
requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."<br />
B. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of<br />
responsibility for quality-control services.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
END OF SECTION 01 4000<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
014000 - 6
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 5000<br />
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and<br />
protection facilities.<br />
1.2 USE CHARGES<br />
A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be<br />
included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use<br />
temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect,<br />
testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water<br />
system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges.<br />
Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.<br />
C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing<br />
system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges.<br />
Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.<br />
1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas<br />
for construction personnel.<br />
B. Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA<br />
<strong>Construction</strong> General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more<br />
stringent.<br />
C. Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities<br />
having jurisdiction. Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire<br />
prevention program.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for<br />
temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.<br />
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect<br />
each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.<br />
C. Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in ICC/ANSI A117.1.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 015000 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to<br />
assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent<br />
service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of<br />
previously assigned responsibilities.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES<br />
A. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner,<br />
Architect, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate Project<br />
meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly.<br />
B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to<br />
accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.<br />
2.2 EQUIPMENT<br />
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required<br />
by locations and classes of fire exposures.<br />
B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide<br />
vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space<br />
thermostatic control.<br />
1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type<br />
heating units is prohibited.<br />
2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a<br />
qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and<br />
marked for intended location and application.<br />
3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system<br />
for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each<br />
return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC<br />
system as required in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum<br />
interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required<br />
by progress of the Work.<br />
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until<br />
facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed<br />
permanent facilities.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 015000 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.<br />
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service<br />
can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.<br />
B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.<br />
C. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and<br />
maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial<br />
Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.<br />
D. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use<br />
of construction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction<br />
for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.<br />
E. Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or<br />
drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse<br />
effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a<br />
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.<br />
F. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by<br />
construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting<br />
installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will<br />
not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.<br />
Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and<br />
minimize energy consumption.<br />
G. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain<br />
equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.<br />
H. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate<br />
illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic<br />
conditions. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection<br />
requirements without operating entire system.<br />
I. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for<br />
use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.<br />
1. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.<br />
a. Police and fire departments.<br />
b. Ambulance service.<br />
c. Contractor's home office.<br />
d. Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.<br />
e. Architect's office.<br />
f. Engineers' offices.<br />
g. Owner's office.<br />
h. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.<br />
2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use<br />
when away from field office.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 015000 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
J. Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field<br />
office adequate for use by Architect and Owner to access project electronic documents<br />
and maintain electronic communications.<br />
3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion<br />
inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after<br />
Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions<br />
acceptable to Owner.<br />
B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and<br />
utilities.<br />
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.<br />
C. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.<br />
D. Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having<br />
jurisdiction. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.<br />
1. Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or<br />
adjoining properties or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.<br />
2. Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.<br />
E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to<br />
handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities<br />
having jurisdiction. Comply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300<br />
"Execution."<br />
F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.<br />
G. Existing Elevator Use: Use of Owner's existing elevators will be permitted, provided<br />
elevators are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At<br />
Substantial Completion, restore elevators to condition existing before initial use,<br />
including replacing worn cables, guide shoes, and similar items of limited life.<br />
1. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity.<br />
2. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to<br />
protect elevator car and entrance doors and frame. If, despite such protection,<br />
elevators become damaged, engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work<br />
so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be<br />
refinished in field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or<br />
provide new units as required.<br />
H. Existing Stair Usage: Use of Owner's existing stairs will be permitted, provided stairs<br />
are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial<br />
Completion, restore stairs to condition existing before initial use.<br />
1. Provide protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other procedures to<br />
protect stairs and to maintain means of egress. If stairs become damaged,<br />
restore damaged areas so no evidence remains of correction work.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
015000 - 4
3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION<br />
A. Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures,<br />
utilities, and other improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except<br />
those indicated to be removed or altered. Repair damage to existing facilities.<br />
B. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct<br />
construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize<br />
possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable<br />
effects.<br />
C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements of 2003<br />
EPA <strong>Construction</strong> General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more<br />
stringent.<br />
D. Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent<br />
flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.<br />
E. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize<br />
attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform<br />
extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests<br />
and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully,<br />
using environmentally safe materials.<br />
F. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed<br />
areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,<br />
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work<br />
day.<br />
G. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having<br />
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and<br />
lighting.<br />
H. Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as<br />
indicated and as required by authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
I. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in<br />
progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations,<br />
and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.<br />
1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete,<br />
insulate temporary enclosures.<br />
J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of<br />
types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses.<br />
Comply with NFPA 241; manage fire prevention program.<br />
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.<br />
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and<br />
similar sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for<br />
personnel at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish<br />
Project No.: 10145 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
015000 - 5
procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post<br />
warnings and information.<br />
4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a<br />
warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not<br />
to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.<br />
3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL<br />
A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work.<br />
Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.<br />
B. Controlled <strong>Construction</strong> Phase of <strong>Construction</strong>: After completing and sealing of the<br />
building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain<br />
as follows:<br />
1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in<br />
conditions.<br />
2. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured<br />
moisture level within 48 hours.<br />
3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL<br />
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste<br />
and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.<br />
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.<br />
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security<br />
and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.<br />
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service<br />
has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no<br />
later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent<br />
construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary<br />
facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that<br />
cannot be satisfactorily repaired.<br />
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of<br />
Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification<br />
signs.<br />
2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used<br />
during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in<br />
Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."<br />
END OF SECTION 01 5000<br />
Project No.: 10145 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 015000 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 6000<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products<br />
for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard<br />
warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for <strong>request</strong>s for <strong>substitution</strong>s.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for<br />
Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms<br />
"material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.<br />
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including<br />
make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's<br />
published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract<br />
Documents.<br />
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another<br />
project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not<br />
considered new products.<br />
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through<br />
submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function,<br />
dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other<br />
characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific<br />
manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design<br />
product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the<br />
significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance,<br />
physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating<br />
comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit <strong>request</strong> for consideration of each comparable<br />
product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include<br />
Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.<br />
1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will <strong>request</strong> additional information or<br />
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable<br />
product <strong>request</strong>. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of<br />
Project No.: 10145 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
016000 - 1
proposed comparable product <strong>request</strong> within 15 days of receipt of <strong>request</strong>, or<br />
seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is<br />
later.<br />
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."<br />
b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a<br />
comparable product <strong>request</strong> within time allocated.<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section<br />
013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or<br />
more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously<br />
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.<br />
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent<br />
damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Delivery and Handling:<br />
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent<br />
overcrowding of construction spaces.<br />
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for<br />
items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to<br />
deterioration, theft, and other losses.<br />
3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's<br />
original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and<br />
instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.<br />
4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract<br />
Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly<br />
protected.<br />
C. Storage:<br />
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting<br />
of units.<br />
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.<br />
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a<br />
weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent<br />
condensation.<br />
4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for<br />
period of installation and concealment.<br />
5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature,<br />
humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.<br />
6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 016000 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES<br />
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with,<br />
other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and<br />
limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under<br />
requirements of the Contract Documents.<br />
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer<br />
for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.<br />
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to<br />
provide specific rights for Owner.<br />
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and<br />
identification, ready for execution.<br />
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information<br />
and properly executed.<br />
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications,<br />
prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.<br />
3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33. Sections for specific content requirements and<br />
particular requirements for submitting special warranties.<br />
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES<br />
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract<br />
Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of<br />
installation.<br />
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other<br />
items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.<br />
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard<br />
options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been<br />
produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.<br />
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in<br />
conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.<br />
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make<br />
selection.<br />
5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the<br />
Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.<br />
B. Product Selection Procedures:<br />
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide<br />
the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or<br />
<strong>substitution</strong>s for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.<br />
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or<br />
source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies<br />
Project No.: 10145 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 016000 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
with requirements. Comparable products or <strong>substitution</strong>s for Contractor's<br />
convenience will not be considered.<br />
3. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a<br />
product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the<br />
specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other<br />
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles,<br />
dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.<br />
Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of<br />
an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.<br />
C. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample",<br />
provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample.<br />
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.<br />
1. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with<br />
other specified requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500<br />
"Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.<br />
D. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by<br />
Architect from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that<br />
complies with requirements. Architect will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture<br />
from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.<br />
2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS<br />
A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's <strong>request</strong> for<br />
comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following<br />
conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return <strong>request</strong>s without action, except to<br />
record noncompliance with these requirements:<br />
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract<br />
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce<br />
the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.<br />
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those<br />
named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as<br />
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and<br />
requirements indicated.<br />
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.<br />
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and<br />
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if <strong>request</strong>ed.<br />
5. Samples, if <strong>request</strong>ed.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 01 6000<br />
Project No.: 10145 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 016000 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 7300<br />
EXECUTION<br />
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing<br />
execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong> layout.<br />
2. Field engineering and surveying.<br />
3. Installation of the Work.<br />
4. Cutting and patching.<br />
5. Progress cleaning.<br />
6. Starting and adjusting.<br />
7. Protection of installed construction.<br />
8. Correction of the Work.<br />
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to<br />
practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing<br />
land-surveying services of the kind indicated.<br />
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and<br />
patching of construction elements.<br />
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify<br />
Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect<br />
before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting<br />
and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could<br />
change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection<br />
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related<br />
components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as<br />
intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life<br />
or safety.<br />
3. Other <strong>Construction</strong> Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements<br />
or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that<br />
results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in<br />
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.<br />
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in<br />
visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed<br />
construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's<br />
aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and<br />
patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.<br />
Project No.: 10145 EXECUTION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017300 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For<br />
exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the<br />
fullest extent possible.<br />
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when<br />
installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and<br />
functional performance of in-place materials.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and<br />
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework,<br />
investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical<br />
and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.<br />
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of<br />
connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping;<br />
underground electrical services, and other utilities.<br />
2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by<br />
public utilities serving Project site.<br />
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component<br />
of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator<br />
present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances<br />
and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.<br />
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual<br />
locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.<br />
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and<br />
systems are to be installed.<br />
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with<br />
existing finishes or primers.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Owner that is necessary to adjust,<br />
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility<br />
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities<br />
having jurisdiction.<br />
Project No.: 10145 EXECUTION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017300 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly.<br />
Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are<br />
indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field<br />
measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction<br />
progress to avoid delaying the Work.<br />
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown<br />
diagrammatically on Drawings.<br />
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the<br />
need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions<br />
outside the control of Contractor, submit a <strong>request</strong> for information to Architect<br />
according to requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."<br />
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT<br />
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on<br />
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies<br />
are discovered, notify Architect promptly.<br />
B. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements,<br />
grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.<br />
C. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required<br />
lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather<br />
conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and<br />
tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.<br />
3.4 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct<br />
alignment and elevation, as indicated.<br />
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.<br />
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for<br />
maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.<br />
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing<br />
products in applications indicated.<br />
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible<br />
results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial<br />
Completion.<br />
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging<br />
operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of<br />
occupancy.<br />
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of<br />
construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.<br />
Project No.: 10145 EXECUTION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017300 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise<br />
levels.<br />
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to<br />
be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm<br />
that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with<br />
indicated requirements.<br />
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of<br />
adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately<br />
located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of<br />
attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.<br />
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount<br />
components at heights directed by Architect.<br />
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.<br />
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and<br />
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor<br />
bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or<br />
masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.<br />
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not<br />
indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to<br />
form hairline joints.<br />
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not<br />
considered hazardous.<br />
3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING<br />
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and<br />
patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete<br />
without delay.<br />
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or<br />
performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore<br />
surfaces to their original condition.<br />
B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or<br />
damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with<br />
materials so as not to void existing warranties.<br />
C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.<br />
D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent<br />
damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project<br />
that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.<br />
E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding,<br />
and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage<br />
elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures<br />
with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.<br />
Project No.: 10145 EXECUTION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017300 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not<br />
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required,<br />
and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover<br />
openings when not in use.<br />
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed<br />
surfaces.<br />
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw<br />
or a diamond-core drill.<br />
4. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are<br />
complete.<br />
F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar<br />
operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as<br />
invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements<br />
specified in other Sections, where applicable.<br />
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to<br />
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.<br />
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish<br />
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize<br />
evidence of patching and refinishing.<br />
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one<br />
finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new<br />
space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and<br />
appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new<br />
materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.<br />
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an<br />
even-plane surface of uniform appearance.<br />
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores<br />
enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity<br />
of building enclosure.<br />
G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed.<br />
Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.<br />
3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING<br />
A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce<br />
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.<br />
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste<br />
materials and debris.<br />
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or<br />
three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.<br />
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other<br />
waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to<br />
regulations.<br />
B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.<br />
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness<br />
necessary for proper execution of the Work.<br />
Project No.: 10145 EXECUTION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017300 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.<br />
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum<br />
the entire work area, as appropriate.<br />
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to<br />
written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only<br />
cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not<br />
recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and<br />
that will not damage exposed surfaces.<br />
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.<br />
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary<br />
to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.<br />
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste<br />
materials down sewers or into waterways.<br />
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and<br />
adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to<br />
ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.<br />
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary<br />
through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable<br />
components to ensure operability without damaging effects.<br />
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the<br />
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or<br />
otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.<br />
3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING<br />
A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove<br />
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.<br />
B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper<br />
operation without binding.<br />
C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and<br />
safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.<br />
3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION<br />
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without<br />
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 7300<br />
Project No.: 10145 EXECUTION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017300 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 7700<br />
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES<br />
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,<br />
including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Substantial Completion procedures.<br />
2. Final completion procedures.<br />
3. Warranties.<br />
4. Final cleaning.<br />
5. Repair of the Work.<br />
1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Certificates of Occupancy: From authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.<br />
1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items<br />
specified in other Sections.<br />
1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES<br />
A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be<br />
completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on<br />
the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.<br />
B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following prior to <strong>request</strong>ing<br />
inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are<br />
incomplete at time of <strong>request</strong>.<br />
1. Certificates of Occupancy: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having<br />
jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services<br />
and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar<br />
releases.<br />
2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including<br />
project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final<br />
completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement<br />
surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.<br />
3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33<br />
Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service<br />
agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017700 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual<br />
Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials,<br />
and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with<br />
manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.<br />
5. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation,<br />
and maintenance.<br />
C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following prior to <strong>request</strong>ing<br />
inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are<br />
incomplete at time of <strong>request</strong>.<br />
1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.<br />
2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise<br />
Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.<br />
3. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.<br />
4. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local<br />
emergency responders.<br />
5. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with<br />
mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.<br />
6. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.<br />
7. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate<br />
visual defects.<br />
D. Inspection: Submit a written <strong>request</strong> for inspection to determine Substantial Completion<br />
a minimum of seven days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final<br />
inspection and tests. On receipt of <strong>request</strong>, Architect will either proceed with inspection<br />
or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of<br />
Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on<br />
Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or<br />
corrected before certificate will be issued.<br />
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous<br />
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.<br />
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final<br />
completion.<br />
1.5 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES<br />
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before <strong>request</strong>ing final inspection for determining final<br />
completion, complete the following:<br />
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment<br />
Procedures."<br />
2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial<br />
Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list),<br />
endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each<br />
item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.<br />
3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance<br />
coverage complying with insurance requirements.<br />
B. Inspection: Submit a written <strong>request</strong> for final inspection to determine acceptance. On<br />
receipt of <strong>request</strong>, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of<br />
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after<br />
Project No.: 10145 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
017700 - 2
inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected<br />
before certificate will be issued.<br />
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous<br />
inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.<br />
1.6 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)<br />
A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected<br />
by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including,<br />
if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.<br />
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and<br />
proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.<br />
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories<br />
for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.<br />
3. Submit list of incomplete items in one of the following formats:<br />
a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated copy.<br />
b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated copy.<br />
c. Three paper copies unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two<br />
copies.<br />
1.7 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES<br />
A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on <strong>request</strong> of Architect for designated<br />
portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of<br />
Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might<br />
limit Owner's rights under warranty.<br />
B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents<br />
of the Project Manual.<br />
1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf<br />
binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive<br />
8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.<br />
2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate<br />
warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed<br />
description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and<br />
the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.<br />
3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title<br />
"WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.<br />
4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete<br />
warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file<br />
with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of<br />
contents at beginning of document.<br />
C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance<br />
manuals.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017700 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer<br />
or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are<br />
potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 FINAL CLEANING<br />
A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to<br />
comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and<br />
antipollution regulations.<br />
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning.<br />
Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building<br />
cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before <strong>request</strong>ing inspection for<br />
certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated<br />
portion of Project:<br />
a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction<br />
activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste<br />
material, litter, and other foreign substances.<br />
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains,<br />
and other foreign deposits.<br />
c. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material<br />
from Project site.<br />
d. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.<br />
e. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free<br />
condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid<br />
disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective<br />
surfaces to their original condition.<br />
f. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including<br />
roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and<br />
similar spaces.<br />
g. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.<br />
h. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;<br />
clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains<br />
remain.<br />
i. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and<br />
windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, visionobscuring<br />
materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other<br />
damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not<br />
to scratch surfaces.<br />
j. Remove labels that are not permanent.<br />
k. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017700 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK<br />
A. Complete repair and restoration operations before <strong>request</strong>ing inspection for<br />
determination of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing<br />
defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials,<br />
and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot<br />
be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating<br />
components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent<br />
facilities used during construction to specified condition.<br />
1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces,<br />
and other damaged transparent materials.<br />
2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and<br />
surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair<br />
or restoration.<br />
a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification,<br />
including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to<br />
required labels and identification.<br />
3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may<br />
impede operation or reduce longevity.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 7700<br />
Project No.: 10145 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017700 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 7823<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA<br />
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation<br />
and maintenance manuals, including the following:<br />
1. Emergency manuals.<br />
2. Product maintenance manuals.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance<br />
manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.<br />
1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in<br />
individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals.<br />
Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.<br />
1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance<br />
submittals are acceptable.<br />
2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to<br />
revisions and field conditions.<br />
B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:<br />
1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically<br />
indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.<br />
a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with<br />
applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation<br />
and maintenance directory.<br />
b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.<br />
2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory.<br />
Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return<br />
two copies.<br />
C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to <strong>request</strong>ing inspection for<br />
Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and<br />
training. Architect will return copy with comments.<br />
1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit<br />
copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's<br />
comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.<br />
Project No.: 10145 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017823 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS<br />
A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and<br />
maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready<br />
access to desired information.<br />
B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate<br />
section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of<br />
equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in<br />
the order listed:<br />
1. Title page.<br />
2. Table of contents.<br />
3. Manual contents.<br />
C. Title Page: Include the following information:<br />
1. Subject matter included in manual.<br />
2. Name and address of Project.<br />
3. Name and address of Owner.<br />
4. Date of submittal.<br />
5. Name and contact information for Contractor.<br />
6. Name and contact information for Architect.<br />
D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name,<br />
indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section<br />
number in Project Manual.<br />
E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents<br />
alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions<br />
for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.<br />
F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite<br />
electronic PDF file for each manual type required.<br />
1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available.<br />
Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for<br />
minimum readable file size.<br />
2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents<br />
based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem,<br />
and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group<br />
documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite<br />
bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks<br />
reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file<br />
tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.<br />
G. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled<br />
volumes.<br />
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf or post-type binders,<br />
in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch<br />
Project No.: 10145 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
017823 - 2
paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and<br />
with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.<br />
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the<br />
manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and<br />
major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, crossreferenced<br />
to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.<br />
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose<br />
diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.<br />
2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS<br />
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:<br />
1. Type of emergency.<br />
2. Emergency instructions.<br />
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below,<br />
include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment,<br />
and component:<br />
1. Fire.<br />
2. Flood.<br />
3. Gas leak.<br />
4. Water leak.<br />
5. Power failure.<br />
6. Water outage.<br />
7. Chemical release or spill.<br />
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error<br />
messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating<br />
personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain<br />
warranties.<br />
2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS<br />
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and<br />
finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures,<br />
repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.<br />
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name<br />
and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name,<br />
address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,<br />
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.<br />
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:<br />
1. Product name and model number.<br />
2. Manufacturer's name.<br />
3. Color, pattern, and texture.<br />
4. Material and chemical composition.<br />
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.<br />
Project No.: 10145 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017823 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the<br />
following:<br />
1. Inspection procedures.<br />
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.<br />
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.<br />
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.<br />
5. Repair instructions.<br />
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials<br />
and related services.<br />
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of<br />
circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION<br />
A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating<br />
procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for<br />
types of emergencies indicated.<br />
B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data<br />
indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated<br />
into the Work.<br />
C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data,<br />
include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to<br />
identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more<br />
than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from<br />
the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to<br />
information not applicable.<br />
D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate<br />
the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control<br />
sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained<br />
in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.<br />
1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and<br />
maintenance manuals.<br />
E. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting<br />
operation and maintenance documentation.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 7823<br />
Project No.: 10145 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017823 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 01 7839<br />
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record<br />
documents, including the following:<br />
1. Record Drawings.<br />
2. Record Specifications.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and<br />
maintenance manual requirements.<br />
2. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record<br />
documents of the Work in those Sections.<br />
1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:<br />
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.<br />
B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy of Project's Specifications, including<br />
addenda and contract modifications.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS<br />
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings<br />
and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised Drawings as modifications are<br />
issued.<br />
1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation<br />
varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained<br />
record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar<br />
entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up<br />
record prints.<br />
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would<br />
be difficult to identify or measure and record later.<br />
b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.<br />
c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017839 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately.<br />
Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of<br />
marked-up record prints.<br />
3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to<br />
distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same<br />
location.<br />
4. Note <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change<br />
Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.<br />
B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT<br />
RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.<br />
1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into<br />
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include<br />
identification on cover sheets.<br />
2. Identification: As follows:<br />
a. Project name.<br />
b. Date.<br />
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."<br />
d. Name of Architect.<br />
e. Name of Contractor.<br />
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS<br />
A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where<br />
installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract<br />
modifications.<br />
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations<br />
that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.<br />
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials,<br />
and equipment furnished, including <strong>substitution</strong>s and product options selected.<br />
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information<br />
necessary to provide a record of selections made.<br />
4. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.<br />
B. Format: Submit record Specifications as paper copy.<br />
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA<br />
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where<br />
installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.<br />
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations<br />
that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.<br />
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes<br />
in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.<br />
3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.<br />
B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file or scanned PDF<br />
electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
017839 - 2
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for<br />
miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of<br />
the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use<br />
and reference.<br />
B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or scanned PDF<br />
electronic file(s) of marked-up miscellaneous record submittals.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE<br />
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for<br />
project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record<br />
documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.<br />
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and<br />
Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction.<br />
Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record<br />
documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from<br />
deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's<br />
reference during normal working hours.<br />
END OF SECTION 01 7839<br />
Project No.: 10145 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 017839 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
SECTION 02 4119<br />
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION<br />
1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.<br />
2. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.<br />
1.02 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site<br />
unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.<br />
B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent<br />
damage, and deliver to Owner.<br />
C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and<br />
reinstall where indicated.<br />
D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed<br />
and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed<br />
and reinstalled.<br />
1.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS<br />
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.<br />
1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS<br />
A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner<br />
as far as practical.<br />
B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before<br />
proceeding with selective demolition.<br />
C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in<br />
the Work.<br />
1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately<br />
notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under<br />
a separate contract.<br />
D. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 024119 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
E. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them<br />
against damage during selective demolition operations.<br />
1.05 WARRANTY<br />
A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or<br />
damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void<br />
existing warranties.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before<br />
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of<br />
authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition<br />
operations.<br />
B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of<br />
selective demolition required.<br />
C. When unanticipated structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are<br />
encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a<br />
written report to Architect.<br />
3.02 UTILITY SERVICES<br />
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and<br />
protect them against damage.<br />
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,<br />
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services serving areas to be selectively<br />
demolished.<br />
1. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.<br />
2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide<br />
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that<br />
maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 024119 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
3.03 PREPARATION<br />
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal<br />
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other<br />
adjacent occupied and used facilities.<br />
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to<br />
prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.<br />
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as<br />
required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of<br />
construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement<br />
or collapse of construction being demolished.<br />
3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new<br />
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within<br />
limitations of governing regulations and as follows:<br />
1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required.<br />
Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining<br />
construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,<br />
not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces.<br />
Temporarily cover openings to remain.<br />
2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid<br />
marring existing finished surfaces.<br />
3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At<br />
concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of<br />
hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and<br />
portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.<br />
4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to<br />
impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.<br />
5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.<br />
B. Removed and Salvaged Items:<br />
1. Clean salvaged items.<br />
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.<br />
3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.<br />
4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner.<br />
5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.<br />
C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:<br />
1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse.<br />
2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers.<br />
3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.<br />
4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new<br />
materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous<br />
materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 024119 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and<br />
soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to<br />
a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and<br />
reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.<br />
3.05 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged,<br />
reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished<br />
materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.<br />
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.<br />
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent<br />
surfaces and areas.<br />
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device<br />
that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.<br />
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.<br />
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of<br />
them.<br />
3.06 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective<br />
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective<br />
demolition operations began.<br />
END OF SECTION 02 4119<br />
Project No.: 10145 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 024119 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES<br />
A. Lightweight, Geo-Synthetic Fill.<br />
1.2 REFERENCES<br />
SECTION 03 1100<br />
LIGHTWEIGHT GEO-SYNTHETIC FILL<br />
A. ASTM C 165 - Test Method for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal<br />
Insulation<br />
B. ASTM C 203 - Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal<br />
Insulation<br />
C. ASTM C 303 - Test Method for Dimensions and Density of Preformed Block an<br />
Board-Type Thermal Insulation<br />
D. ASTM C 390 - Practice for Sampling and Acceptance of Thermal Insulation lots<br />
E. ASTM D 1621 - Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics<br />
F. ASTM D 1622 - Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics<br />
G. ASTM D 1623 - Tensile and Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics<br />
H. ASTM C 2863 - Test Method for Measuring the Minimum Oxygen Concentration to<br />
Support Candle-Like Combustion of Plastics (Oxygen Index)<br />
I. ASTM D 6817 - Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Geofoam<br />
J. ASTM D 7557 - Standard Practice for Sampling of Expanded Polystyrene Geofoam<br />
Specimens.<br />
1.3 UNIT PRICE - MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT<br />
A. Lightweight, Geo-Synthetic Fill.<br />
1. Basis of Measurement: By cubic yard (cubic meter).<br />
2. Basis of Payment: Includes supplying fill materials, stockpiling, placing and<br />
anchoring.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:<br />
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.<br />
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.<br />
3. Installation methods.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Showing the following:<br />
1. Profile and section view of the proposed embankment.<br />
2. Size, type, location and orientation of all Geofoam blocks.<br />
3. Location and type of connectors.<br />
4. Ballasting or guying techniques.<br />
5. Placement sequence and methods.<br />
Project No.: 10145 LIGHTWEIGHT GEO-SYNTHETIC FILL<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 031100 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
C. Verification Samples: For each product specified, two samples, minimum size 4<br />
inches (102 mm) square, representing actual product.<br />
D. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed the following:<br />
1. Manufacturer's test reports showing the physical properties and standards for<br />
the products specified as tested in accordance with ASTM D 7557.<br />
2. Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for the first 100 yd (376 m3) and for<br />
every 1500 yd3 (1147 m3) thereafter of Geofoam before product is delivered<br />
to the site.<br />
3. Computer generated stress-strain data and the accompanying curves from<br />
compressive testing. Curves and/or data shall clearly indicate the stress at 1<br />
percent strain and the modulus of elasticity.<br />
4. Each delivery shall have the compression test data for each lot attached with<br />
the delivery paperwork.<br />
5. Certificate of Compliance shall include current inspection reports showing that<br />
the Geofoam manufacturer is in compliance with a UL follow-up service<br />
program for both flame and physical properties.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer with a minimum of 5 years documented<br />
experience in the manufacture of lightweight, geo-synthetic fill. Manufacturer must<br />
also have a UL classification in category BRYX. Manufacturer must also maintain a<br />
UL classification in category QORW that ensures physical properties in accordance<br />
with ASTM D 6817. Third-party certifications that only include ASTM C 578 physical<br />
properties will not be considered as an alternative equal and will be rejected.<br />
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Handle and store products in accordance the manufacturer's recommendations until<br />
ready for installation.<br />
B. Prevent damage to the Geofoam blocks during delivery, storage, and construction.<br />
C. Geo-Synthetic Fill that is anticipated to be exposed to sunlight for more than six<br />
months shall be covered with an opaque material to prevent ultraviolet light<br />
degradation. Remove material that is exposed for excessive period beyond six<br />
months.<br />
D. Protect the Geo-Synthetic Fill from: organic solvents such as acetone, benzene, and<br />
paint thinner; petroleum based solvents such as gasoline and diesel fuel; and open<br />
flames.<br />
E. Geo-Synthetic Fill should be considered combustible and should not be exposed to<br />
open flame or any source of ignition.<br />
1.7 SEQUENCING<br />
A. Ensure that placement drawings and other information required for installation of<br />
products of this section are furnished to affected trades in time to prevent<br />
interruption of construction progress.<br />
Project No.: 10145 LIGHTWEIGHT GEO-SYNTHETIC FILL<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 031100 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Insulfoam, a Carlisle Company, which is located at: 6004<br />
N. Westgate Blvd. Suite 120 ; Tacoma, WA 98406; Toll Free Tel: 800-248-5995; Tel:<br />
253-572-5111; Email: <strong>request</strong> info (info@insulfoam.com); Web: www.insulfoam.com<br />
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.<br />
2.2 MATERIALS<br />
A. Geo-Synthetic Fill: InsulFoam GF shall conform to ÅSTM D 6817 and may be<br />
fabricated using material with recycled content. Blocks shall have a height of at least<br />
36 inches (.91 m), a width of at least 48 inches (1.22 m), and length of at least 96<br />
inches (2.44 m). Blocks shall be within tolerances of 0.5 percent of respective<br />
height, width and length dimensions. Additional field and/or shop trimming and<br />
cutting shall be required as necessitated by the geometry of the fill being<br />
constructed.<br />
1. Type EPS15: Physical Properties when tested in accordance with ASTM D<br />
6817 shall be:<br />
a. Density shall be a minimum of 0.90 lb/ft3 (14.4 kg/m3) when tested in<br />
accordance with ASTM D 1622.<br />
b. Compressive Resistance at 1 percent deformation shall be a minimum<br />
of 3.6 psi (25 kPa) when tested in accordance with ÅSTM D 1621.<br />
c. Flexural Strength shall be a minimum of 25.0 psi (172 kPa) when<br />
tested in accordance with ÅSTM C 203.<br />
d. Elastic Modulus shall be a minimum of 360 psi (2500 kPA) when tested<br />
in accordance with ÅSTM C 203.<br />
e. Oxygen Index shall have a minimum volume of 24.0 percent when<br />
tested in accordance with ASTM C 2863.<br />
B. Connectors: Connectors shall be galvanized steel multi-barbed connectors or a<br />
urethane adhesive as recommended by the manufacturer. Each connector shall<br />
have a lateral holding strength of at least 60 lbs (27.22 kg) when tested with an<br />
EPS15 Geofoam.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.<br />
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of<br />
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.<br />
B. Prepare surfaces for uniform bearing using the methods recommended by the<br />
manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project<br />
conditions.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
Project No.: 10145 LIGHTWEIGHT GEO-SYNTHETIC FILL<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 031100 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
B. Geo-Synthetic Fill fill shall be placed to the lines and grades shown in the Drawings<br />
and as directed by the Engineer. The surface of a layer of Geo-Synthetic Fill blocks<br />
to receive additional Geo-Synthetic Fill blocks shall be constructed with a variation in<br />
surface tolerance of no more than 0.05 feet (15 mm) in any 10 foot (3 m) interval.<br />
C. All blocks shall accurately fit relative to adjacent blocks. No gaps greater than 0.07<br />
feet (20 mm) will be allowed on vertical joints.<br />
D. Finished surfaces of the Geo-Synthetic Fill immediately beneath pavement sections<br />
shall be constructed to within the tolerance of zero to minus 60 mm (0.20 ft) of the<br />
indicated grade.<br />
E. Finished surfaces of the Geo-Synthetic Fill on side slopes that receive soil cover<br />
shall be constructed to within a tolerance of plus 0.30 feet (90 mm) to minus 0.30<br />
feet (90 mm) of the indicated grade.<br />
F. Blocks placed in a row in a particular layer shall be offset 2.0 feet (0.6 m) relative to<br />
blocks placed in adjacent rows of the same layer as shown on the Drawing. In order<br />
to avoid continuous joints, each subsequent layer of blocks shall be rotated on the<br />
horizontal plane 90 degrees from the direction of placement of the previous layer<br />
placed.<br />
G. When needed to prevent blocks sliding during embankment construction, InsulGrip<br />
galvanized steel multi-barbed connector plates from Insulfoam or urethane adhesive<br />
should be placed between horizontal layers of blocks. Install a minimum of 2<br />
connectors for each 4 feet (1.22 m) by 8 feet (2.44 m) section of Geofoam material<br />
or as shown on plans or directed by the Engineer. Press firmly into the rigid foam<br />
until the connector is flush with the surface. Position the next foam block as<br />
specified and seat firmly before placing subsequent blocks.<br />
H. Blocks shall be cut using a hot wire.<br />
I. Because of the light unit-weight of the geofoam fill, provide temporary weighting<br />
and/or guying as necessary until all the blocks are built into a homogeneous mass,<br />
and the pavement section as well as any soil cover are in place.<br />
J. Embankment over the side slopes of Geo-Synthetic fills shall be placed starting at<br />
the bottom of the slope in such a manner to prevent damage to the fill. Finished<br />
Geo-Synthetic Fill on side slopes shall have a minimum of 2 feet (0.61 m)<br />
embankment cover.<br />
K. Embankment material, in areas beyond the lateral distances necessary to protect<br />
Geo-Synthetic Fill from damage, shall be compacted according to Section 03215.<br />
L. During placement of the load distribution slab over the top surface of the Geo-<br />
Synthetic Fill, it is permissible to use rebar supports to support the reinforcing steel<br />
during concrete placement.<br />
3.4 PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.<br />
B. Repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
Project No.: 10145 LIGHTWEIGHT GEO-SYNTHETIC FILL<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 031100 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 03 3000<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete<br />
materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.<br />
1.02 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.<br />
C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending,<br />
and placement.<br />
D. Welding certificates.<br />
E. Material certificates.<br />
F. Material test reports.<br />
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete<br />
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities<br />
and equipment.<br />
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete<br />
Production Facilities."<br />
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having<br />
jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.<br />
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to<br />
AWS D1.4/D 1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel."<br />
D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the<br />
Contract Documents:<br />
1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5 and<br />
Section 7, "Lightweight Concrete."<br />
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete <strong>Construction</strong> and Materials."<br />
E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform<br />
material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
033000 - 1
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 FORM-FACING MATERIALS<br />
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true,<br />
and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of<br />
joints.<br />
B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved<br />
material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.<br />
2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 deformed.<br />
B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn<br />
steel wire into flat sheets.<br />
C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.<br />
D. Galvanized-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated<br />
from galvanized-steel wire into flat sheets.<br />
E. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and<br />
fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar<br />
supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of<br />
Standard Practice.<br />
2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS<br />
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand,<br />
and source, throughout Project:<br />
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150 Type I/II, gray. Supplement with the following:<br />
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F<br />
b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.<br />
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, graded.<br />
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch nominal.<br />
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.<br />
C. Lightweight Aggregate: ASTM C 330, 3/4-inch nominal maximum aggregate size.<br />
D. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 033000 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
2.04 ADMIXTURES<br />
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.<br />
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with<br />
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those<br />
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing<br />
calcium chloride.<br />
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.<br />
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.<br />
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.<br />
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.<br />
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,<br />
Type G.<br />
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.<br />
2.05 FIBER REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Monofilament polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed<br />
for use in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1-1/2 inches long,<br />
78 ksi tensile capacity minimum, 1300 ksi modulus of elasticity minimum, and aspect<br />
ratio between 80-100.<br />
2.06 WATERSTOPS<br />
A. Self-Expanding Butyl Strip Waterstops: Manufactured rectangular or trapezoidal strip,<br />
butyl rubber with sodium bentonite or other hydrophilic polymers, for adhesive bonding to<br />
concrete, 3/4 by 1 inch<br />
2.07 VAPOR RETARDERS<br />
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils thick.<br />
2.08 CURING MATERIALS<br />
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for<br />
application to fresh concrete.<br />
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,<br />
weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. when dry.<br />
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene<br />
sheet.<br />
D. Water: Potable.<br />
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1,<br />
Class B, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with<br />
bonding of floor covering.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
033000 - 3
F. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound:<br />
ASTM C 1315, Type 1, Class A.<br />
G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,<br />
Type 1, Class A.<br />
2.09 RELATED MATERIALS<br />
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic<br />
fiber.<br />
2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES<br />
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis<br />
of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.<br />
B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and<br />
silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would<br />
otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.<br />
C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Use water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement<br />
and workability.<br />
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures,<br />
low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.<br />
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use<br />
industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and<br />
concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.<br />
D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: As indicated.<br />
E. Proportion structural lightweight concrete mixture as follows: As indicated<br />
2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."<br />
2.12 CONCRETE MIXING<br />
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to<br />
ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, and furnish batch ticket information.<br />
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time<br />
from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce<br />
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 033000 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 FORMWORK<br />
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support<br />
vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied,<br />
until structure can support such loads.<br />
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,<br />
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.<br />
C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.<br />
3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS<br />
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining<br />
work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings,<br />
templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.<br />
3.03 VAPOR RETARDERS<br />
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to<br />
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Lap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.<br />
3.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.<br />
3.05 JOINTS<br />
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder<br />
before placing concrete.<br />
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of<br />
concrete.<br />
B. <strong>Construction</strong> Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at<br />
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.<br />
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning<br />
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least<br />
one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows:<br />
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and<br />
finishing each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch. Repeat grooving of contraction<br />
joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete<br />
surfaces.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 033000 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof<br />
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch wide joints into concrete when<br />
cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before<br />
concrete develops random contraction cracks.<br />
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at<br />
slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade<br />
beams, and other locations, as indicated.<br />
E. Waterstops: Install in construction joints and at other joints indicated according to<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT<br />
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded<br />
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.<br />
B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no<br />
new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or<br />
planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints<br />
as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.<br />
1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to<br />
ACI 301.<br />
C. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.<br />
D. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.<br />
3.07 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES<br />
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie<br />
holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed<br />
specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.<br />
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view<br />
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material,<br />
arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and<br />
patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits<br />
on formed-surface irregularities.<br />
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.<br />
C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed finished as-cast concrete where<br />
indicated:<br />
1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten<br />
concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until<br />
producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that<br />
created by the rubbing process.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 033000 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of<br />
thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix one part portland cement to<br />
one and one-half parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and<br />
water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color<br />
of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess<br />
grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp<br />
by fog spray for at least 36 hours.<br />
3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix one part<br />
portland cement and one part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and<br />
water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches so color<br />
of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding<br />
surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.<br />
D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed<br />
surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching<br />
adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly<br />
across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3.08 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS<br />
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and<br />
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.<br />
B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bullfloated<br />
or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of<br />
1/4 inch in one direction.<br />
1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated<br />
C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is<br />
small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low<br />
spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth,<br />
granular texture.<br />
1. Apply float finish to surfaces indicated.<br />
D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by<br />
hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is<br />
free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface<br />
defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.<br />
1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces indicated.<br />
2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an<br />
unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- long straightedge resting on two high spots and<br />
placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 1/4 inch.<br />
E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated. While<br />
concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.<br />
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.<br />
F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and<br />
elsewhere as indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
033000 - 7
3.09 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING<br />
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot<br />
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hotweather<br />
protection during curing.<br />
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot,<br />
dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and<br />
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after<br />
placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.<br />
C. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:<br />
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days.<br />
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining<br />
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends<br />
lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not<br />
less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period<br />
using cover material and waterproof tape.<br />
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or<br />
roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to<br />
heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of<br />
coating and repair damage during curing period.<br />
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without<br />
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound<br />
manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere<br />
with bonding of floor covering used on Project.<br />
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a<br />
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written<br />
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial<br />
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain<br />
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.<br />
3.10 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS<br />
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect.<br />
Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.<br />
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to<br />
two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 sieve, using only enough water for<br />
handling and placing.<br />
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,<br />
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface,<br />
and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.<br />
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more<br />
than 1/2 inch in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch in depth.<br />
Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,<br />
and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with<br />
Project No.: 10145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 033000 - 8<br />
19 March 2012
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching<br />
mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.<br />
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and<br />
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match<br />
surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture<br />
and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and<br />
strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.<br />
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and<br />
structural performance as determined by Architect.<br />
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish<br />
and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test<br />
surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.<br />
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,<br />
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that<br />
penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless<br />
of width, and other objectionable conditions.<br />
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.<br />
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing<br />
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish<br />
repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.<br />
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair<br />
underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according<br />
to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and<br />
level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.<br />
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut<br />
out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch to match<br />
adjacent floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer<br />
according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform,<br />
plane, and level surface.<br />
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in<br />
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas<br />
with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch<br />
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete<br />
and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as<br />
original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to<br />
blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.<br />
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter with patching<br />
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off<br />
dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply<br />
bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact<br />
patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area<br />
continuously moist for at least 72 hours.<br />
3.11 POST-INSTALLED ANCHORS<br />
A. Post-installed anchors shall be installed in conformance with all manufacturer’s<br />
instructions.<br />
B. Manufacturer shall provide on-site training for all personnel who will be installing postinstalled<br />
adhesive anchors at the beginning of the work.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 033000 - 9<br />
19 March 2012
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to<br />
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.<br />
B. Inspections:<br />
1. Steel reinforcement placement.<br />
2. Steel reinforcement welding.<br />
3. Headed bolts and studs.<br />
4. Verification of use of required design mixture.<br />
5. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.<br />
6. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.<br />
C. Steel Reinforcement Inspection:<br />
1. Reinforcing shall be inspected prior to placing of concrete. Inspect all reinforcing<br />
for conformance with Contract requirements with regard to bar size, grade,<br />
placement, splice lengths, clearance from soil or formwork, supports, and<br />
attachment of accessories and embedded items. Inspection shall be according to<br />
ACI 318 and IBC, chapter 19. Inspect all reinforcing steel that is welded according<br />
to AWS D1.4, IBC chapter 10, and ACI 318.<br />
2. Inspect all bolts and embedded items that will be cast into concrete. Verify size,<br />
spacing, embedment length, and location according to IBC chapter 19.<br />
D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to<br />
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:<br />
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. or<br />
fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.<br />
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength<br />
tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five<br />
randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.<br />
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite<br />
sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.<br />
Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.<br />
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test<br />
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each<br />
concrete mixture.<br />
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air<br />
temperature is 40 deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for<br />
each composite sample.<br />
5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one<br />
test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of<br />
each concrete mixture.<br />
6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.<br />
a. Cast and laboratory cure four 6” diameter or five 4” standard cylinder<br />
specimens for each composite sample.<br />
7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M;<br />
Project No.: 10145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 033000 - 10<br />
19 March 2012
a. One specimen will be tested at 7 days, 2 specimens (3 specimens for 4”<br />
diameter specimens) will be tested at 28 days, and 1 specimen will be<br />
retained in reserve for later testing if required.<br />
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a<br />
set of 2 specimens (3 specimens for 4” diameter) obtained from the same<br />
composite sample and tested at age indicated.<br />
8. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three<br />
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive<br />
strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive<br />
strength by more than 500 psi.<br />
9. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and<br />
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall<br />
contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name<br />
of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work,<br />
design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and<br />
materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day<br />
tests.<br />
10. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device<br />
may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or<br />
rejection of concrete.<br />
11. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of<br />
concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive<br />
strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect.<br />
Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete<br />
by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as<br />
directed by Architect.<br />
12. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to<br />
determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.<br />
13. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not<br />
comply with the Contract Documents.<br />
END OF SECTION 03 3000<br />
Project No.: 10145 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 033000 - 11<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's).<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
SECTION 04 2000<br />
UNIT MASONRY<br />
1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels for unit masonry.<br />
2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured<br />
reglets installed in masonry joints.<br />
1.02 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING<br />
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing<br />
agency to perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail<br />
to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.<br />
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to<br />
ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.<br />
2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to<br />
ASTM C 780 for compressive strength.<br />
3. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to<br />
ASTM C 1019.<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry<br />
reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete<br />
Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.<br />
C. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units<br />
include data on material properties.<br />
D. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and<br />
proportions of ingredients.<br />
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification.<br />
Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for<br />
water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.<br />
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply<br />
with compressive strength requirement.<br />
Project No.: 10145 UNIT MASONRY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 042000 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by<br />
requirements in the Contract Documents.<br />
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated<br />
with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry<br />
damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction<br />
requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.<br />
B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements<br />
contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL<br />
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of<br />
units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do<br />
not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.<br />
B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for<br />
fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by<br />
equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS<br />
A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints,<br />
headers, bonding, and other special conditions.<br />
B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water<br />
repellent admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength for exposed units.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. ACM Chemistries; RainBloc.<br />
b. BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Rheopel Plus.<br />
c. Grace <strong>Construction</strong> Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block.<br />
C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.<br />
1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area<br />
compressive strength of 2150 psi.<br />
2. Density Classification: Lightweight<br />
Project No.: 10145 UNIT MASONRY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 042000 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
2.03 MASONRY LINTELS<br />
A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam<br />
CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with course grout.<br />
2.04 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS<br />
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather<br />
construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.<br />
C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime<br />
containing no other ingredients.<br />
D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Capital Materials Corporation; Flamingo Color Masonry Cement.<br />
b. Cemex S.A.B. de C.V.; Brikset Type N or Citadel Type S<br />
c. Essroc, Italcementi Group; Brixment or Velvet.<br />
d. Holcim (US) Inc.; Mortamix Masonry Cement<br />
e. Lafarge North America Inc.; Magnolia Masonry Cement or Lafarge Masonry<br />
Cement<br />
f. Lehigh Cement Company; Lehigh Masonry Cement<br />
g. National Cement Company, Inc.; Coosa Masonry Cement.<br />
E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.<br />
1. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing<br />
the No. 16 sieve.<br />
2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone.<br />
3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to<br />
produce required mortar color.<br />
F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.<br />
G. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying<br />
with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in<br />
masonry mortar of composition indicated.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
H. Water: Potable.<br />
a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80.<br />
b. Grace <strong>Construction</strong> Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset.<br />
c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.<br />
Project No.: 10145 UNIT MASONRY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 042000 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
2.05 REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M,<br />
Grade 60.<br />
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.<br />
1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.<br />
2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.<br />
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.<br />
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.<br />
5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.148-inch diameter.<br />
6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.<br />
7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.<br />
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with<br />
single pair of side rods.<br />
2.06 TIES AND ANCHORS<br />
A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials<br />
that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with<br />
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.<br />
2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial<br />
Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.<br />
3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway<br />
through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are<br />
bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer.<br />
C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches wide.<br />
1. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.<br />
D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow<br />
vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular<br />
to plane of wall.<br />
1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- diameter, hot-dip<br />
galvanized steel wire.<br />
2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch of masonry<br />
face, made from 0.187-inch- diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.<br />
E. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod 6<br />
inches long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod<br />
to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.<br />
F. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563<br />
hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with<br />
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 UNIT MASONRY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
042000 - 4
2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1;<br />
compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene or PVC.<br />
B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound,<br />
complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 or PVC, complying with<br />
ASTM D 2287, Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain<br />
lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.<br />
C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,<br />
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).<br />
2.08 MASONRY CLEANERS<br />
A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for<br />
removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new<br />
masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly<br />
approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units<br />
being cleaned.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not<br />
limited to, the following:<br />
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.<br />
b. EaCo Chem, Inc.<br />
c. ProSoCo, Inc.<br />
2.09 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES<br />
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,<br />
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.<br />
2. Use portland cement-lime or masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be<br />
exposed to view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is<br />
consistent.<br />
B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix.<br />
Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend<br />
ingredients before delivering to Project site.<br />
C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the<br />
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.<br />
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type M<br />
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.<br />
3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S.<br />
Project No.: 10145 UNIT MASONRY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 042000 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet<br />
walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and<br />
for other applications where another type is not indicated, use Type N.<br />
D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.<br />
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse)<br />
that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of<br />
grout spaces and pour height.<br />
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, Table 1 or paragraph 4.2.2 for<br />
specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.<br />
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to<br />
ASTM C 143/C 143M.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous<br />
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean,<br />
sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is<br />
specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.<br />
B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors<br />
and textures.<br />
3.02 TOLERANCES<br />
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:<br />
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch<br />
or minus 1/4 inch.<br />
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus<br />
or minus 1/2 inch.<br />
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than<br />
plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.<br />
B. Lines and Levels:<br />
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than<br />
1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.<br />
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not<br />
vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch<br />
maximum.<br />
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10<br />
feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.<br />
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and<br />
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10<br />
feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.<br />
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,<br />
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.<br />
Project No.: 10145 UNIT MASONRY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
042000 - 6
C. Joints:<br />
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8<br />
inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.<br />
2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus<br />
3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.<br />
3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or<br />
minus 1/8 inch.<br />
3.03 LAYING MASONRY WALLS<br />
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint<br />
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and<br />
offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where<br />
possible, at other locations.<br />
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in<br />
running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions<br />
at corners or jambs.<br />
C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other<br />
Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.<br />
D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
E. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts,<br />
and similar items unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3.04 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING<br />
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:<br />
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed<br />
joints.<br />
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.<br />
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on<br />
footings.<br />
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting<br />
course on footings where cells are not grouted.<br />
B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with<br />
sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints<br />
or slush head joints.<br />
C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint<br />
thickness unless otherwise indicated.<br />
D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other<br />
than paint) unless otherwise indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 UNIT MASONRY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 042000 - 7<br />
19 March 2012
3.05 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of<br />
5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6<br />
inches.<br />
1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c.<br />
2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet<br />
walls.<br />
3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and<br />
extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.<br />
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.<br />
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.<br />
3.06 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL STEEL AND CONCRETE<br />
A. Anchor masonry to structural steel and concrete where masonry abuts or faces structural<br />
steel or concrete to comply with the following:<br />
1. Provide an open space not less than 1/2 inch wide between masonry and structural<br />
steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and<br />
other rigid materials.<br />
2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to<br />
structure.<br />
3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches o.c. vertically and 36<br />
inches o.c. horizontally.<br />
3.07 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION<br />
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support<br />
reinforced masonry elements during construction.<br />
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry<br />
as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout.<br />
Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction<br />
and curing of reinforced masonry.<br />
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened<br />
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them<br />
during construction.<br />
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.<br />
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained<br />
enough strength to resist grout pressure.<br />
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for<br />
grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.<br />
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches<br />
Project No.: 10145 UNIT MASONRY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
042000 - 8
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and<br />
inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas,<br />
as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with<br />
specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.<br />
B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."<br />
1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of siteprepared<br />
mortar.<br />
2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of<br />
grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.<br />
3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.<br />
C. Testing Prior to <strong>Construction</strong>: One set of tests.<br />
D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.<br />
E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for<br />
compressive strength.<br />
F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according<br />
to ASTM C 780.<br />
G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.<br />
3.09 PARGING<br />
A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to<br />
a total thickness of 3/4 inch.<br />
B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface. Form a wash at top of<br />
parging and a cove at bottom.<br />
C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.<br />
3.10 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING<br />
A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove<br />
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.<br />
B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as<br />
follows:<br />
1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for<br />
comparison purposes.<br />
2. Protect surfaces from contact with cleaner.<br />
3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by<br />
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.<br />
4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical<br />
Notes 20.<br />
Project No.: 10145 UNIT MASONRY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 042000 - 9<br />
19 March 2012
5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A<br />
applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces.<br />
3.11 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL<br />
A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soilcontaminated<br />
sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with<br />
fill material as fill is placed.<br />
1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.<br />
B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as<br />
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.<br />
END OF SECTION 04 2000<br />
Project No.: 10145 UNIT MASONRY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 042000 - 10<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 05 1200<br />
STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING<br />
A. Section includes structural steel and grout.<br />
1.02 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of<br />
Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."<br />
1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract<br />
Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads<br />
indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.<br />
1. Select and complete connections using schematic details indicated.<br />
2. Use LRFD; data are given at factored-load level.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.<br />
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer fabricator & testing agency.<br />
D. Welding certificates.<br />
E. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.<br />
F. Source quality-control reports.<br />
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricators shall comply with AISC standards.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality<br />
Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE.<br />
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to<br />
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."<br />
Project No.: 10145 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 051200 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:<br />
1. AISC 303.<br />
2. AISC 360.<br />
3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."<br />
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS<br />
A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M, Grade 50.<br />
B. Channels, Angles -Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.<br />
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.<br />
F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.<br />
2.02 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS<br />
A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural<br />
bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1,<br />
hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.<br />
B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex<br />
steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and<br />
ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.<br />
1. Finish: Hot-dip or mechanically deposited zinc coating.<br />
C. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1,<br />
heavy-hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex<br />
carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.<br />
1. Finish: Plain or mechanically deposited zinc coating.<br />
D. Shear Connectors: ASTM A 108, Grades 1015 through 1020, headed-stud type, coldfinished<br />
carbon steel; AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Type B.<br />
E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36<br />
1. Configuration: Straight<br />
2. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.<br />
F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36 straight.<br />
Project No.: 10145 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
051200 - 2
1. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.<br />
G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M<br />
2.03 PRIMER<br />
1. Finish: Plain or Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.<br />
A. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting<br />
primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.<br />
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.<br />
2.04 GROUT<br />
A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic<br />
aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable<br />
for application and a 30-minute working time.<br />
2.05 FABRICATION<br />
A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate<br />
according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and<br />
AISC 360.<br />
B. Shear Connectors: Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear<br />
connectors. Use automatic end welding of headed-stud shear connectors according to<br />
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
2.06 SHOP CONNECTIONS<br />
A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for<br />
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint<br />
specified.<br />
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.<br />
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding<br />
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.<br />
2.07 SHOP PRIMING<br />
A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:<br />
1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded<br />
members to a depth of 2 inches.<br />
2. Surfaces to be field welded.<br />
3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections.<br />
4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing).<br />
Project No.: 10145 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 051200 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
5. Galvanized surfaces.<br />
B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and<br />
spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications<br />
and standards:<br />
1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning."<br />
2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."<br />
C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's<br />
written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film<br />
thickness of 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners,<br />
edges, and exposed surfaces.<br />
2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to<br />
perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.<br />
1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being<br />
fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.<br />
B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with<br />
the Contract Documents.<br />
C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's<br />
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."<br />
D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be<br />
tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection<br />
procedures, at testing agency's option:<br />
1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.<br />
2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished<br />
weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted.<br />
3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.<br />
4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces<br />
and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with<br />
requirements.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
Project No.: 10145 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 051200 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
3.02 ERECTION<br />
A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to<br />
AISC 303 and AISC 360.<br />
B. Base Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing<br />
materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.<br />
1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required.<br />
2. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and<br />
plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge<br />
of plate before packing with grout.<br />
3. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids<br />
remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply<br />
with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.<br />
C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for<br />
Steel Buildings and Bridges."<br />
3.03 FIELD CONNECTIONS<br />
A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for<br />
Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint<br />
specified.<br />
1. Joint Type: Snug tightened<br />
B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding<br />
procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.<br />
1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of<br />
temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.<br />
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency<br />
to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.<br />
B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be inspected according to RCSC's<br />
"Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."<br />
C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to<br />
AWS D1.1/D1.1M.<br />
1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to<br />
AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's<br />
option:<br />
a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165.<br />
b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on<br />
finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not<br />
be accepted.<br />
Project No.: 10145 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
051200 - 5
c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164.<br />
d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.<br />
D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with<br />
the Contract Documents.<br />
END OF SECTION 05 1200<br />
Project No.: 10145 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 051200 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Roof deck.<br />
2. Noncomposite form deck.<br />
1.02 SUBMITTALS<br />
SECTION 05 3100<br />
STEEL DECKING<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing<br />
channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other<br />
construction.<br />
C. Product certificates.<br />
D. Welding certificates.<br />
E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.<br />
F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.<br />
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding<br />
Code - Sheet Steel."<br />
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to<br />
those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency<br />
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and<br />
inspecting agency.<br />
2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing<br />
and inspecting agency.<br />
C. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck<br />
according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel<br />
Structural Members."<br />
Project No.: 10145 STEEL DECKING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 053100 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery,<br />
storage, and handling.<br />
B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a<br />
waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
1. ASC Profiles, Inc.<br />
2. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group.<br />
3. Consolidated Systems, Inc.<br />
4. DACS, Inc.<br />
5. D-Mac Industries Inc.<br />
6. Epic Metals Corporation.<br />
7. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc.<br />
8. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC.<br />
9. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division.<br />
10. Roof Deck, Inc.<br />
11. United Steel Deck, Inc.<br />
12. Valley Joist; Division of EBSCO Industries, Inc.<br />
13. Verco Manufacturing Co.<br />
14. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.<br />
2.02 ROOF DECK<br />
A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with<br />
"SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and<br />
with the following:<br />
1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33<br />
minimum, shop primed with manufacturer's standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive<br />
primer.<br />
a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
2. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 G90<br />
zinc coating.<br />
a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
3. Deck Profile: As indicated.<br />
4. Profile Depth: As indicated.<br />
5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated<br />
Project No.: 10145 STEEL DECKING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
053100 - 2
2.03 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK<br />
A. Noncomposite Steel Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck<br />
panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form<br />
Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, with the minimum section properties indicated, and with<br />
the following:<br />
1. Uncoated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33<br />
minimum.<br />
2. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33<br />
minimum, with underside surface shop primed with manufacturer's standard bakedon,<br />
rust-inhibitive primer.<br />
a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
3. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33G90<br />
zinc coating.<br />
a. Color: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
4. Profile Depth: As indicated.<br />
5. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.<br />
6. Span Condition: As indicated.<br />
2.04 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with<br />
requirements indicated.<br />
B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically<br />
driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.<br />
C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbonsteel<br />
screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.<br />
D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.<br />
E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of<br />
33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and<br />
finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.<br />
F. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary<br />
in SDI Publication No. 30, manufacturer's written instructions, requirements in this Section,<br />
and as indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 STEEL DECKING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 053100 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately<br />
aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not<br />
stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.<br />
C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or<br />
deflection.<br />
D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting<br />
through or adjacent to deck.<br />
E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength,<br />
continuity of deck, and support of other work.<br />
F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding,<br />
appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.<br />
G. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical<br />
fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
H. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-<br />
1/2 inches.<br />
I. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld<br />
or mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space connections not more than 12 inches<br />
apart with at least one connection at each corner.<br />
1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or<br />
mechanically fasten.<br />
J. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end<br />
closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.<br />
1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
K. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting<br />
structure according to SDI recommendations, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
L. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to<br />
deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of<br />
ribs and sides of deck.<br />
3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform<br />
field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.<br />
B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.<br />
C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and<br />
Architect.<br />
Project No.: 10145 STEEL DECKING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 053100 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.<br />
E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance<br />
of corrected work with specified requirements.<br />
3.03 REPAIRS<br />
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces<br />
of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written<br />
instructions.<br />
B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both<br />
surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.<br />
END OF SECTION 05 3100<br />
Project No.: 10145 STEEL DECKING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 053100 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
SECTION 05 4000<br />
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
1. Exterior load-bearing wall framing.<br />
2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.<br />
3. Roof joist framing.<br />
1.02 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product and accessory indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal<br />
framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical<br />
fasteners.<br />
C. Welding certificates.<br />
D. Qualification data.<br />
E. Product test reports.<br />
F. Research/evaluation reports.<br />
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency<br />
indicating steel sheet complies with requirements.<br />
B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding<br />
Code--Sheet Steel."<br />
C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide cold-formed metal framing<br />
identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and<br />
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
D. AISI Specifications and Standards: Comply with AISI's "North American Specification for<br />
the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and its "Standard for Cold-Formed<br />
Steel Framing - General Provisions."<br />
1. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Truss Design."<br />
2. Comply with AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Header Design."<br />
Project No.: 10145 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 054000 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MATERIALS<br />
A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade<br />
and coating weight as follows:<br />
1. Grade: As noted on structural drawings<br />
2. Coating: G60, A60, AZ50, or GF30.<br />
2.02 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING<br />
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated,<br />
punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:<br />
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated<br />
2. Section Properties: As indicated.<br />
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,<br />
unpunched, with straight flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel studs.<br />
C. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form<br />
header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:<br />
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated.<br />
2. Flange Width: As indicated.<br />
3. Section Properties: As indicated<br />
2.03 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING<br />
A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated,<br />
punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows:<br />
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0428 inch<br />
2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.<br />
3. Section Properties: As required.<br />
B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated,<br />
unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and same minimum base-metal thickness as steel<br />
studs.<br />
C. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass or head clips, capable of<br />
accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through<br />
positive mechanical attachment to stud web.<br />
D. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track;<br />
unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free<br />
vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads.<br />
E. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks,<br />
consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.<br />
Project No.: 10145 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
054000 - 2
2.04 ROOF JOIST FRAMING<br />
A. Steel Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel joists, of web depths indicated,<br />
unpunched with stiffened flanges, and as follows:<br />
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated<br />
2. Flange Width: As indicated<br />
3. Section Properties: As indicated<br />
B. Steel Joist Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel joist track, of web depths<br />
indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, and as follows:<br />
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel joists.<br />
2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches minimum.<br />
2.05 FRAMING ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural<br />
Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing<br />
members, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to<br />
ASTM A 123/A 123M.<br />
C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and<br />
carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process<br />
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.<br />
D. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to<br />
sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per<br />
ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.<br />
E. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,<br />
fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a<br />
load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted<br />
by a qualified independent testing agency.<br />
F. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping<br />
steel drill screws.<br />
1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard<br />
elsewhere.<br />
2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or DOD-P-21035.<br />
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand,<br />
ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum<br />
water required for placement and hydration.<br />
C. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching.<br />
Project No.: 10145 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
054000 - 3
D. Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's<br />
standard widths to match width of bottom track or rim track members.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 PREPARATION<br />
A. Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of wall bottom track or rim track<br />
and the top of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations to ensure a uniform<br />
bearing surface on supporting concrete or masonry construction.<br />
B. Install sealer gaskets to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top<br />
of foundation wall or slab at stud or joist locations.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Install cold-formed metal framing according to AISI's "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel<br />
Framing - General Provisions" and to manufacturer's written instructions unless more<br />
stringent requirements are indicated.<br />
B. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and<br />
with connections securely fastened.<br />
C. Install framing members in one-piece lengths.<br />
D. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable<br />
in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in<br />
place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and<br />
permanent connections to framing are secured.<br />
E. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing.<br />
Independently frame both sides of joints.<br />
F. Install insulation, specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior<br />
framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that<br />
are inaccessible on completion of framing work.<br />
G. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's<br />
standard punched openings.<br />
H. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a<br />
maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:<br />
1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan<br />
location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of<br />
sheathing or other finishing materials.<br />
Project No.: 10145 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 054000 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
3.03 LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install continuous top and bottom tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and<br />
securely anchor at corners and ends, and at spacings as follows:<br />
1. Anchor Spacing: As indicated<br />
B. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding of 1/8 inch<br />
between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of<br />
studs to top and bottom tracks. Space studs as follows:<br />
1. Stud Spacing: As indicated.<br />
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or<br />
warped surfaces and similar configurations.<br />
D. Align studs vertically where floor framing interrupts wall-framing continuity. Where studs<br />
cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads.<br />
E. Align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously<br />
reinforce track to transfer loads.<br />
F. Anchor studs abutting structural columns or walls, including masonry walls, to supporting<br />
structure as indicated.<br />
G. Install headers over wall openings wider than stud spacing. Locate headers above<br />
openings as indicated. Fabricate headers of compound shapes indicated or required to<br />
transfer load to supporting studs, complete with clip-angle connectors, web stiffeners, or<br />
gusset plates.<br />
1. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as<br />
indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute<br />
loads.<br />
2. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks<br />
to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as fullheight<br />
wall studs.<br />
H. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support<br />
fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring<br />
attachment to framing.<br />
1. If type of supplementary support is not indicated, comply with stud manufacturer's<br />
written recommendations and industry standards in each case, considering weight<br />
or load resulting from item supported.<br />
I. Install horizontal bridging in stud system, spaced as required. Fasten at each stud<br />
intersection.<br />
1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of<br />
punched studs with a minimum of 2 screws into each flange of the clip angle for<br />
framing members up to 6 inches deep.<br />
Project No.: 10145 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 054000 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
J. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web<br />
stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete<br />
and stable wall-framing system.<br />
3.04 EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor<br />
to supporting structure as indicated.<br />
B. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space<br />
studs as follows:<br />
1. Stud Spacing: As indicated.<br />
C. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or<br />
warped surfaces and similar requirements.<br />
D. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of<br />
vertical loads while providing lateral support.<br />
1. Install single deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.<br />
2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing or infill studs and anchor to primary<br />
building structure.<br />
E. Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but<br />
not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.<br />
1. Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within<br />
[12 inches] [18 inches] of single deflection track. Install a combination of flat, taut,<br />
steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud or stud-track solid<br />
blocking of width and thickness matching studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges<br />
and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.<br />
a. Install solid blocking at centers indicated.<br />
2. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of<br />
punched studs.<br />
F. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip<br />
angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts, to provide a complete and<br />
stable curtain-wall-framing system.<br />
3.05 JOIST INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install perimeter joist track sized to match joists. Align and securely anchor or fasten track<br />
to supporting structure at corners, ends, and spacings indicated on Shop Drawings.<br />
B. Install joists bearing on supporting frame, level, straight, and plumb; adjust to final<br />
position, brace, and reinforce. Fasten joists to both flanges of joist track.<br />
1. Install joists over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches.<br />
Project No.: 10145 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 054000 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
2. Reinforce ends and bearing points of joists with web stiffeners, end clips, joist<br />
hangers, steel clip angles, or steel-stud sections as indicated on Shop Drawings.<br />
C. Space joists not more than 2 inches from abutting walls, and as follows:<br />
1. Joist Spacing: As indicated.<br />
D. Frame openings with built-up joist headers consisting of joist and joist track, nesting joists,<br />
or another combination of connected joists if indicated.<br />
E. Install joist reinforcement at interior supports with single, short length of joist section<br />
located directly over interior support, with lapped joists of equal length to joist<br />
reinforcement, or as indicated on Shop Drawings.<br />
1. Install web stiffeners to transfer axial loads of walls above.<br />
F. Install bridging at intervals indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten bridging at each joist<br />
intersection as follows:<br />
1. Bridging: Joist-track solid blocking of width and thickness indicated, secured to joist<br />
webs.<br />
G. Secure joists to load-bearing interior walls to prevent lateral movement of bottom flange.<br />
H. Install miscellaneous joist framing and connections, including web stiffeners, closure<br />
pieces, clip angles, continuous angles, hold-down angles, anchors, and fasteners, to<br />
provide a complete and stable joist-framing assembly.<br />
3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to<br />
perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.<br />
B. Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.<br />
C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.<br />
D. Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified<br />
requirements.<br />
E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine<br />
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.<br />
3.07 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and<br />
installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to<br />
ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer<br />
and Installer, that ensure that cold-formed metal framing is without damage or<br />
deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.<br />
END OF SECTION 05 4000<br />
Project No.: 10145 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
054000 - 7
PART 1- GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 05 5000<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Rough Hardware<br />
2. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates<br />
3. Loose Steel Lintels<br />
4. Metal Ladders<br />
5. Support Angles for Elevator Door Sills<br />
6. Elevator Sump Pit Cover<br />
7. Pipe Bollards<br />
8. Miscellaneous Metal Trim<br />
9. Steel Framing and Supports for Applications where framing and<br />
supports are not specified in other Sections<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication<br />
indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications<br />
and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates<br />
for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other sections.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal<br />
fabrications similar to that indicated for this Project, with sufficient production<br />
capacity to produce required units without causing delay in the Work.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of metal fabrications specified in<br />
this Section by same firm that fabricated them.<br />
C. Quality welding processes and welding operators in accordance with the<br />
following:<br />
1. AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel"<br />
2. D1.3 "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel"<br />
3. D1.2 "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum"<br />
D. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for<br />
welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.<br />
1.4 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Check actual locations of walls and other construction to<br />
which metal fabrications must fit, by accurate field measurements before<br />
fabrication; show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate<br />
fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of Work.<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 055000 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 FERROUS METALS<br />
A. Metal Surfaces, General: For metal fabrications exposed to view upon<br />
completion of the Work, provide materials selected for their surface flatness,<br />
smoothness, and freedom from surface blemishes. Do not use materials whose<br />
exposed surfaces exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names,<br />
roughness, and, for steel sheet, variations in flatness exceeding those permitted<br />
by reference standards for stretcher-leveled sheet.<br />
B. Welding Rods: Select in accordance with AWS Specifications for the metal alloy<br />
to be welded.<br />
2.2 FASTENERS<br />
A. General: Provide zinc-coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into<br />
exterior walls. Select fasteners for the type, grade, and class required for each<br />
application and complying with applicable standards.<br />
2.3 GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT<br />
A. Nonshrink Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining,<br />
noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout<br />
specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior heavy-duty<br />
loading applications of type specified in this Section.<br />
B. Interior Anchoring Cement: Factory-prepackaged, nonshrink, nonstaining,<br />
hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with water at<br />
Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound.<br />
Use for interior applications only.<br />
C. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-prepackaged, nonshrink,<br />
nonstaining, hydraulic controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with<br />
water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting<br />
compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure<br />
without need for protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and is<br />
recommended for exterior use by manufacturer.<br />
2.4 CONCRETE FILL AND REINFORCING MATERIALS<br />
2.5 PAINT<br />
A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements as shown on<br />
Drawings, with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 PSI, unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A-615, Grade 60, unless noted otherwise.<br />
A. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard, fastcuring,<br />
lead and chromate-free, universal modified alkyd primer selected for<br />
good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with finish<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
055000 - 2
paint systems indicated, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for<br />
field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure complying with performance<br />
requirements of FS TT-P-664.<br />
B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in<br />
galvanized steel, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by<br />
weight, and complying with DOD-P-21035 or SSPC-Paint-20.<br />
2.6 FABRICATION - GENERAL<br />
A. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated<br />
but not less than that needed to comply with performance requirements<br />
indicated. Work to dimensions indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using<br />
proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials indicated or<br />
specified for various components of each metal fabrication.<br />
B. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change<br />
(range) of exterior metalwork in ambient temperature in the design, fabrication,<br />
and installation of installed metal assemblies to prevent buckling, opening up of<br />
joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base design calculations on<br />
actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and nighttime<br />
sky heat loss. Temperature Change (Range): 120 Degrees F., ambient; 130<br />
degrees F., material surfaces.<br />
C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and<br />
straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32<br />
inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius<br />
possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. Form<br />
exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed<br />
fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not<br />
indicated, Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where<br />
least conspicuous.<br />
D. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with AWS recommendations<br />
and the following:<br />
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop<br />
strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.<br />
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.<br />
3. Remove welding flux immediately.<br />
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and<br />
blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour<br />
E. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure.<br />
Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended<br />
use.<br />
F. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to<br />
minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for<br />
shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural<br />
value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated<br />
installation. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated<br />
to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 055000 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or<br />
provide weep holes where water may accumulate.<br />
2.7 ROUGH HARDWARE<br />
A. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers,<br />
dowels, and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing<br />
and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete<br />
or other structures. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes, and dimensions required.<br />
Furnish malleable-iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood<br />
structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.<br />
2.8 METAL LADDERS<br />
A. General: Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings,<br />
and anchorages as indicated.<br />
1. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.<br />
3. Siderails: Continuous, steel, 3/8" x 2-1/2" flat bars, with eased edges,<br />
space 18" apart.<br />
4. Bar Rungs: 7/8" diameter steel bars, spaced 12" o.c.<br />
5. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer<br />
rail faces.<br />
6. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points space<br />
not more than 5' o.c. with welded or bolted steel brackets.<br />
2.9 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES<br />
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or<br />
concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required<br />
thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting<br />
as required. Galvanize after fabrication.<br />
2.10 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS<br />
A. Fabricate loose structural steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size<br />
indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations<br />
indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.<br />
C. Size loose lintels for equal bearing of one inch per foot of clear span but not less<br />
than 8 inches bearing at each side of openings, if not indicated on Drawings.<br />
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS<br />
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated or which<br />
are not a part of structural steel framework, as required to complete work.<br />
B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive<br />
adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from<br />
structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
055000 - 4
2.12 PIPE BOLLARDS<br />
mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware,<br />
hangers, and similar items.<br />
A. ASTM A153 galvanized schedule 40 steel pipe with concrete fill, as detailed on<br />
Drawings. Provide smooth radius for concrete top to prevent accumulation of<br />
rainwater. Provide field painted finish.<br />
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM<br />
A. Provide shapes and sizes indicated for profiles shown. Unless otherwise<br />
indicated, fabricate units from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars, with<br />
continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field<br />
splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as required<br />
for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.<br />
1. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports in exterior locations and<br />
where shown to be painted.<br />
2.14 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES<br />
A. Galvanizing: For those items indicated for galvanizing, apply zinc-coating by<br />
the hot-dip process in compliance with the following requirements:<br />
1. ASTM A-153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware.<br />
2. ASTM A-123 for galvanizing both fabricated and unfabricated iron and<br />
steel products made of uncoated rolled, pressed, and forged shapes,<br />
plates, bars, and strip 0.0299 inch thick and heavier.<br />
B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous metal surfaces to<br />
comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface<br />
preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed<br />
metal fabrications: Interiors (SSPC Zone 1A): SSPC-SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning".<br />
C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal fabrications, except those with<br />
galvanized finish or to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or<br />
masonry, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with requirements of SSPC-PA1<br />
"Paint Application Specification No. 1" for shop painting. Stripe paint all edges,<br />
corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 PREPARATION<br />
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates,<br />
instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages, including concrete<br />
inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and miscellaneous items having integral anchors<br />
that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate<br />
delivery of such items to project site.<br />
B. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations; protect<br />
sleeves from water and concrete entry.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
055000 - 5
A. Fastening to In-Place <strong>Construction</strong>: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners<br />
where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place<br />
construction; include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle<br />
bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required.<br />
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for<br />
installation of miscellaneous metal fabrications. Set metal fabrication accurately<br />
in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true,<br />
and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.<br />
C. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built<br />
into concrete masonry or similar construction.<br />
D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded<br />
metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in<br />
correctly welding work, and the following:<br />
1. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and<br />
blended so that no roughness shows after finishing and contour of<br />
welded surface matches those adjacent.<br />
3.3 SETTING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES<br />
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing materials,<br />
and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.<br />
B. Set leveling and bearing plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nutes. After the<br />
bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts.<br />
Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of<br />
the bearing plate before packing with grout.<br />
1. Use nonmetallic nonshrink grout, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no<br />
voids remain.<br />
3.4 INSTALLING PIPE BOLLARDS<br />
A. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Place concrete and vibrate or<br />
tamp for consolidation. Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has<br />
cured. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.<br />
1. Paint bollards yellow.<br />
3.5 TOUCH-UP PAINTING: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted<br />
connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same<br />
material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA1 requirements for touch-up<br />
of field painted surfaces.<br />
A. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.<br />
B. For galvanized surfaces clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas and<br />
apply galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.<br />
END OF SECTION 05 5000<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 055000 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
SECTION 05 5100<br />
METAL STAIRS<br />
1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads.<br />
2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.<br />
3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.<br />
B. See Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings" for pipe and tube railings not attached to<br />
metal stairs or to walls adjacent to metal stairs.<br />
1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by<br />
a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads<br />
and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.<br />
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft..<br />
2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in..<br />
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.<br />
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in<br />
addition to loads specified above.<br />
5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch,<br />
whichever is less.<br />
C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and<br />
the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.<br />
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:<br />
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. applied in any direction.<br />
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction.<br />
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.<br />
2. Infill of Guards:<br />
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft..<br />
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL STAIRS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 055100 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.03 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For metal stairs.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other<br />
work.<br />
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance<br />
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the<br />
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for<br />
Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair<br />
designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.<br />
1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 METALS<br />
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise<br />
indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials<br />
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.<br />
B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) grade B.<br />
D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with<br />
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.<br />
E. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A 36/A 36M or steel strip, ASTM A 1011/A 1011M<br />
or ASTM A 1018/A 1018M.<br />
F. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A 510.<br />
G. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 25,<br />
unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.<br />
H. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, structural steel, Grade 30,<br />
unless another grade is required by design loads.<br />
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Provide anchors for embedding units in concrete, either integral or applied to units, as<br />
standard with manufacturer.<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL STAIRS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 055100 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
B. Apply bituminous paint to concealed surfaces of cast-metal units set into concrete.<br />
C. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete.<br />
D. Fasteners: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or<br />
ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior<br />
walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.<br />
E. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd<br />
primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.<br />
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich<br />
primer.<br />
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.<br />
G. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section<br />
"Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a<br />
minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.<br />
H. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips,<br />
brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs<br />
and platforms on supporting structure.<br />
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.<br />
B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble<br />
units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations.<br />
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges.<br />
Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.<br />
D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without impairing work.<br />
E. Weld connections to comply with the following:<br />
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and<br />
corrosion resistance of base metals.<br />
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.<br />
3. Remove welding flux immediately.<br />
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.<br />
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed<br />
fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.<br />
G. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide<br />
weep holes where water may accumulate.<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL STAIRS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
055100 - 3
2.04 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
1. Alfab, Inc.<br />
2. American Stair, Inc.<br />
3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The).<br />
B. Stair Framing:<br />
1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels.<br />
2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing<br />
members as indicated.<br />
3. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.<br />
C. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown<br />
from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less<br />
than 0.067 inch.<br />
1. At Contractor's option, provide stair assemblies with metal-pan subtreads filled with<br />
reinforced concrete during fabrication.<br />
D. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from rolledsteel<br />
floor plate of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less<br />
than 1/4 inchForm treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Weld steel<br />
supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets.<br />
E. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Comply with NAAMM MBG 531, "Metal Bar Grating Manual."<br />
1. Fabricate treads and platforms from steel grating with 1-1/4-by-3/16-inch bearing<br />
bars at 15/16 inch o.c. and crossbars at 4 inches o.c.<br />
2. Fabricate grating treads with rolled-steel floor plate nosing and with steel angle or<br />
steel plate carrier at each end for stringer connections. Secure treads to stringers<br />
with bolts.<br />
2.05 STAIR RAILINGS<br />
A. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,<br />
dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post<br />
spacings, and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.<br />
1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- diameter top and bottom rails and 1-1/2-inch- square<br />
posts.<br />
2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- square pickets spaced less than 4 inches clear.<br />
3. Gates: Form gates from steel tube of same size and shape as top rails, with infill to<br />
match guards. Provide with cam-type, self-closing hinges for fastening to wall and<br />
overlapping stop with rubber bumper to prevent gate from opening in direction<br />
opposite egress.<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL STAIRS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 055100 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
B. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at<br />
connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around<br />
at connections, including at fittings.<br />
1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1<br />
welds: no evidence of a welded joint<br />
C. Form changes in direction of railings by bending.<br />
D. Form curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature without buckling.<br />
E. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.<br />
F. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails.<br />
G. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,<br />
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to<br />
other work.<br />
1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding.<br />
H. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, to<br />
transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses.<br />
2.06 FINISHES<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.<br />
C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M<br />
for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron<br />
products.<br />
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with<br />
SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning”<br />
E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components. Comply with SSPC-<br />
PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of<br />
Steel," for shop painting.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing<br />
metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from<br />
established lines and levels and free of rack.<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL STAIRS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 055100 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into<br />
concrete unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that<br />
are not to be left as exposed joints. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units<br />
that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.<br />
D. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.<br />
E. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section<br />
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."<br />
1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete.<br />
F. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer.<br />
G. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for<br />
concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt.<br />
3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and<br />
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for<br />
shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.<br />
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and<br />
repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.<br />
END OF SECTION 05 5100<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL STAIRS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 055100 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
SECTION 06 1053<br />
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY<br />
1. Framing with dimension lumber.<br />
2. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.<br />
3. Wood blocking and nailers.<br />
4. Plywood backing panels.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.<br />
1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer<br />
and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with<br />
requirements.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and<br />
AWPA C27 (plywood).<br />
B. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing<br />
and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
C. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER<br />
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or<br />
attachment of other construction, including the following:<br />
1. Blocking.<br />
2. Nailers.<br />
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.<br />
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide <strong>Construction</strong> or No. 2 grade lumber with<br />
19 percent maximum moisture content of any species.<br />
Project No.: 10145 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 061053 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
2.3 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS<br />
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC, fireretardant<br />
treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 3/4-inch<br />
nominal thickness.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and<br />
fitted. Fit carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.<br />
Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching<br />
other construction.<br />
B. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,<br />
complying with Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building<br />
Code.<br />
END OF SECTION 06 1053<br />
Project No.: 10145 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 061053 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
SECTION 06 4023<br />
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK<br />
1. Interior standing and running trim.<br />
2. Wood trim and wood ceiling closure panel for recessed screen.<br />
3. Flush wood paneling and wainscots.<br />
4. Shelves.<br />
5. Plastic-laminate cabinets.<br />
6. Plastic-laminate countertops.<br />
7. Wood cabinets.<br />
8. Granite countertops.<br />
9. Slatwall display.<br />
10. Shop finishing of woodwork.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 05 Section “Metal Fabrications” for steel supports for countertops.<br />
2. Division 06 Section “Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry” for wood furring and<br />
shims required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction<br />
before woodwork installation.<br />
3. Division 09 Section “Gypsum Board” for blocking and hanging strips required<br />
for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before<br />
woodwork installation.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and<br />
processes.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, largescale<br />
details, attachment devices, and other components.<br />
C. Samples: Lumber and panel products for transparent finish, for each species and cut,<br />
finished on one side and one edge.<br />
D. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification<br />
Program certificates.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural<br />
Woodwork Quality Standards."<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 064023 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is<br />
enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining<br />
temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the<br />
construction period.<br />
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify<br />
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and<br />
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with<br />
construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.<br />
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork<br />
by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on<br />
Shop Drawings.<br />
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without<br />
delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork<br />
without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and<br />
coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to<br />
established dimensions.<br />
1.5 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other<br />
related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural<br />
woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Indicated on Interior Design Drawings.<br />
B. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed-grain hardwood.<br />
C. Wood Products:<br />
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.<br />
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.<br />
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.<br />
4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.<br />
D. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished<br />
with thermally fused, melamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with<br />
LMA SAT-1.<br />
E. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not<br />
indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 064023 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
F. Granite Countertops: With bull nose front edge, 4-inch back and side splashes with<br />
polished and eased edges. See interior finish schedule for specifications and for color,<br />
finish and product details.<br />
G. Slatwall: Paz Systems, Inc. or comparable product.<br />
2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS<br />
A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with<br />
performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use<br />
Exterior Type or Interior Type A. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not<br />
bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Kiln-dry material after treatment.<br />
B. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels made from softwood particles and fire-retardant<br />
chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25<br />
or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.<br />
C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2 medium-density fiberboard panels made<br />
from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at<br />
time of panel manufacture with flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed<br />
index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.<br />
2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES<br />
A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with<br />
architectural woodwork, except for items specified in Division 08 Section "Door<br />
Hardware."<br />
B. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 110 degrees<br />
of opening.<br />
C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.<br />
D. Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9, B05091.<br />
1. Heavy Duty (Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200): Side mounted; fullextension<br />
type; zinc-plated steel ball-bearing slides.<br />
E. Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.<br />
F. Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.<br />
G. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with<br />
BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated.<br />
2.4 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Complete fabrication to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project<br />
site. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide allowance for scribing, trimming, and<br />
fitting.<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 064023 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
1. Interior Woodwork Grade: Custom.<br />
2. Shop cut openings to maximum extent possible. Sand edges of cutouts to<br />
remove splinters and burrs. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat<br />
of varnish.<br />
B. Interior Standing and Running Trim:<br />
1. For transparent-finished trim items wider than available lumber, use veneered<br />
construction. Do not glue for width.<br />
2. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat<br />
members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work.<br />
3. Assemble casings in plant except where limitations of access to place of<br />
installation require field assembly.<br />
C. Plastic-Laminate Cabinets:<br />
1. AWI Type of Cabinet <strong>Construction</strong>: Flush overlay.<br />
2. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate as<br />
follows:<br />
a. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGL.<br />
b. Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.<br />
c. Edges: PVC tape, 0.018-inch minimum thickness, matching laminate in<br />
color, pattern, and finish.<br />
3. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.<br />
D. Plastic-Laminate Countertops:<br />
1. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGP.<br />
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.<br />
3. Core Material at Sinks: Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue or<br />
exterior-grade plywood.<br />
2.5 WOOD CABINETS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH<br />
A. Grade: Custom.<br />
B. AWI Type of Cabinet <strong>Construction</strong>: Flush overlay.<br />
C. Wood Species and Cut for Exposed Surfaces: Indicated on Interior Design drawings.<br />
1. Matching of Veneer Leaves: Book match.<br />
D. Hardwood Plywood: ANSI/HPMA HP hardwood and decorative plywood, Good<br />
Grade (1) or better, of thickness, species, cut, and core construction indicated.<br />
E. Hardwood Lumber: Clear, dry, sound, and free of defects selected from First Grade<br />
lumber (NHLA), of species indicated.<br />
F. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, Class 1, tempered.<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 064023 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
G. Solid Lumber: Dry, sound, selected to eliminate appearance defects, of any species<br />
of hardwood or softwood with color and grain characteristics similar exposed portions.<br />
H. Plywood Face Veneer: Same species as exposed lumber, unless otherwise indicated,<br />
selected for grain and color compatible with exposed solid lumber, no defects.<br />
Edgeband exposed edges with solid wood of same species as face veneer.<br />
I. Style of face construction for base, wall, and full-height units, if any, with drawer<br />
fronts, doors, and fixed panels as follows:<br />
1. Panel, concealing face frames of cabinet body.<br />
2. Panel Door <strong>Construction</strong>: Lumber core plywood, 5-ply with hardwood face<br />
veneer and crossbanding.<br />
3. Drawer Front <strong>Construction</strong>: Same as door or, where standard with manufacturer,<br />
solid or glued-up lumber, not less than 1/2" thick.<br />
J. <strong>Construction</strong> for face frame style casework as follows:<br />
1. Rails and Stiles: Not less than 1-inch by 1-5/8 inch solid lumber with glued<br />
mortise and tendon joints.<br />
2. Exposed Ends: Not less than 1/2 inch thick, medium-density particle board<br />
core with exterior veneer to match door and drawer fronts and not less than<br />
4-mil vinyl laminate on interior surfaces. Connect to stile with pressureglued<br />
tongue and plow joint and supplement by concealed mechanical fasteners.<br />
3. Unexposed Ends: Not less than 1/2 inch thick, medium-density particle<br />
board with not less than 4-mil prefinished vinyl laminate on interior surfaces.<br />
Attach to front frame in same manner as exposed ends.<br />
4. Back, Top, and Bottom Rails: Not less than 3/4 inch by 3 inch solid lumber,<br />
machined to interlock with end panels, and rabbeted to receive top and bottom<br />
panels; with back rails secured under pressure with glue and mechanical<br />
fastening devices.<br />
5. Shelving: Not less than 5/8 inch thick particle board core plywood or 1/2<br />
inch thick medium-density particle board prefinished with not less than 4-mil<br />
vinyl laminate on top, bottom, and exposed (front) edge.<br />
K. <strong>Construction</strong> for wall units with doors and fixed panels as follows:<br />
1. Tops and Bottoms: Not less than 1/2 inch thick particle board or 3/8 inch<br />
thick hardwood plywood, fully supported by and secured in rabbets in end<br />
panels, front frame, and back rail.<br />
2. Backs: Not less than 1/8 inch hardboard or 3/16 inch plywood fastened to<br />
machined rear edge of ends and to top and bottom hanger rails.<br />
L. <strong>Construction</strong> for base units with doors and fixed panels as follows:<br />
1. Front Frame Drawer Rails: Not less than 1 inch by 1-1/4 inch lumber mortised<br />
and fastened into face frame.<br />
2. Bottoms: Not less than 1/2 inch thick particle board with 4-mil vinyl laminate<br />
finish or 3/8 inch thick, 5-ply veneer core plywood, fully supported by<br />
and secured in rabbets in end panels, front frame, and back bottom rail.<br />
3. Back Panels: Not less than 1/8 inch thick hardboard fastened to machine<br />
rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails. Interior surface prefinished<br />
with 4-mil vinyl laminate.<br />
4. Toe Boards: Not less than 5/8 inch particle board core attached between<br />
end panels and extended from bottom panel to floor.<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 064023 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
5. Corner Blocks: Glued and fastened in each of four top corners to maintain<br />
cabinet squareness and rigidity.<br />
M. <strong>Construction</strong> for drawer units as follows:<br />
1. Drawer Body: Not less than 3/8 inch thick vinyl faced particle board<br />
subfront, back, and sides. Provide box-type construction with subfront and<br />
back rabbeted into sides and secured with glue and mechanical fasteners.<br />
Exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws from interior of<br />
body. Drawer bottom of not less than 1/4 inch thick hardboard, set into<br />
rabbets in back, sides, and front.<br />
N. Millwork Hardware:<br />
1. Manufacturers<br />
a. Corbin Russwin Architectural Hardware (800-543-3658)<br />
b. Epco Engineered Products Co. (810-767-2050)<br />
c. Garcy Corp., (708-345-2500)<br />
d. Grant Hardware, Hettich America LP (800-777-1772)<br />
e. H.B. Ives, (203-294-4837)<br />
f. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Co. (800-253-1561) (KV)<br />
g. Stanley Hardware, Div. of the Stanley Works (800-337-4393)<br />
h. Grass America (800-334-3512)<br />
O. Products: Coordinate finishes of exposed cabinet hardware with adjacent finish<br />
hardware as specified in Section 08 7100.<br />
2.6 SHOP FINISHING<br />
A. Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop. Defer only final touchup, cleaning,<br />
and polishing until after installation.<br />
B. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to<br />
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in<br />
installation areas. Examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as<br />
required, including removal of packing and backpriming.<br />
B. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in<br />
Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.<br />
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96<br />
inches. Shim as required with concealed shims.<br />
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair<br />
damaged finish at cuts.<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 064023 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
E. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.<br />
Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for<br />
complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening,<br />
countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent<br />
finish is indicated.<br />
F. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using fulllength<br />
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible.<br />
Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth,<br />
and finish same as wood base if finished.<br />
G. Railings: Install rails with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch variation from a straight<br />
line.<br />
1. Guard Rails: Glue and dowel or pin balusters to treads and railings, and<br />
railings to newel posts.<br />
2. Wall Rails: Support rails on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall<br />
framing.<br />
H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are<br />
accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to<br />
provide unencumbered operation.<br />
I. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or<br />
other supports into underside of countertop. Calk space between backsplash and wall<br />
with sealant specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."<br />
END OF SECTION 06 4023<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 064023 - 7<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 06 6115<br />
CAST MARBLE<br />
A. The following products shall be cast marble: Tub/Shower Surround.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Cast Marble: Cast Polymer, Cultured Marble, Synthetic Marble; synonymous terms.<br />
B. Description: A patterned, non-porous homogeneous mixture of natural minerals and<br />
polyester resins thermally bonded to produce solid fabrications with polished sealed<br />
surfaces. Colors and grain pattern shall run all the way through the base material.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Samples: Submit 6” by 6” samples; indicate full color range and pattern variation for<br />
approval by architect. Approved samples will be standard for all cast marble.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Cast marble manufacturer qualifications:<br />
1. ICPA member one calendar year, minimum, prior to Contract date.<br />
2. Five (5) years experience, minimum, in manufacturing similar type units.<br />
3. Fabricated five (5) Projects, minimum, of comparable magnitude in last three (3)<br />
years.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications:<br />
1. Installed five (5) Projects, minimum, or comparable magnitude in last three (3)<br />
years. Provide reference list of those completed Projects for review and<br />
verifications.<br />
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install units until spaces are enclosed and<br />
weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient<br />
temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels.<br />
A. Field Measurements: Shop drawings are to be filed verified by Contractor to ensure<br />
proper fit of materials.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CAST MARBLE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
066115 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
A. Tub / Shower Surround:<br />
1. Manufacturers:<br />
a. Basis-of-Design: Mincey Marble Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
b. Introsul<br />
c. Project Stone<br />
d. MPL Corporation<br />
2. Model No.: TS-DS<br />
3. Matte finish with diamond design.<br />
4. Provide 2 surface mount soap dishes (including one corner mount) and 2-inch<br />
trim pieces.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of<br />
the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been<br />
corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil,<br />
grease, dirt, and dust.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install units according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Install components in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and plans.<br />
C. All materials to be plumb, level and rigid. Neatly scribe to adjoining surfaces. Field<br />
trim all components as needed to fit field conditions.<br />
D. Immediately replace any material that is cracked, chipped, broken or otherwise<br />
defective.<br />
3.4 CLEANING<br />
A. Contractor to protect all finished work until final acceptance by Owner.<br />
B. Clean installed units not more than 48 hours prior to Date of Substantial Completion.<br />
Repair or replace damaged or stained cast marble work.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
END OF SECTION 06 6115<br />
CAST MARBLE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
066115 - 2
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 06 6400<br />
PLASTIC PANELING<br />
A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Samples: For plastic paneling and trim accessories.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according<br />
to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate<br />
markings of applicable testing agency.<br />
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.<br />
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING<br />
A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with<br />
ASTM D 5319.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available<br />
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,<br />
but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Kemlite Company Inc.<br />
b. Nudo Products, Inc.<br />
c. Sequentia, Inc.<br />
2. Surface Finish: Smooth.<br />
3. Color: White.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PLASTIC PANELING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 066400 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
2.2 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to<br />
retain and cover edges of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside<br />
corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges.<br />
B. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.<br />
C. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant<br />
recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in<br />
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 PREPARATION<br />
A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil,<br />
grease, dirt, and dust.<br />
B. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation<br />
according to manufacturer's written recommendations.<br />
C. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints so that trimmed panels at<br />
corners are not less than 12 inches wide.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive.<br />
C. Install trim accessories with adhesive.<br />
D. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside<br />
corner trim in a bead of sealant.<br />
E. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant.<br />
F. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent<br />
recommended by sealant manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no<br />
residue remains.<br />
END OF SECTION 06 6400<br />
Project No.: 10145 PLASTIC PANELING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 066400 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 07 1326<br />
SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING<br />
A. Section includes self-adhering modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.<br />
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING<br />
A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Minimum 60-mil nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet<br />
consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- thick,<br />
polyethylene-film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side.<br />
1. Physical Properties:<br />
a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C,<br />
modified.<br />
b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified.<br />
c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970.<br />
d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement;<br />
ASTM C 836.<br />
e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154.<br />
f. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour<br />
immersion at 70 deg F; ASTM D 570.<br />
g. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water<br />
Method.<br />
h. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 200 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385.<br />
2.02 AUXILIARY MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for<br />
intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.<br />
B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing<br />
material manufacturer.<br />
C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate<br />
by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 071326 - 1<br />
10 May 2012
D. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforcedasphaltic<br />
core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as<br />
follows:<br />
1. Thickness: 1/8 inch, nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch, nominal,<br />
elsewhere.<br />
2. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer<br />
for protection course type.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION<br />
A. Prepare surfaces and install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing<br />
manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135.<br />
B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that<br />
will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more<br />
than 24 hours.<br />
C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets<br />
and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal<br />
seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.<br />
D. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low to high points of decks to ensure that laps<br />
shed water.<br />
E. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks,<br />
construction, and contraction joints.<br />
F. Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing terminations with mastic.<br />
G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements.<br />
Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches<br />
beyond repaired areas in all directions.<br />
H. Immediately install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane.<br />
3.02 PROTECTION, REPAIR, AND CLEANING<br />
A. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements;<br />
repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.<br />
B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and<br />
procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.<br />
END OF SECTION 07 1326<br />
Project No.: 10145 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 071326 - 2<br />
10 May 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Concealed building insulation.<br />
2. Vapor retarders.<br />
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
SECTION 07 2100<br />
THERMAL INSULATION<br />
A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in ceiling plenums whose<br />
test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing<br />
identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in<br />
UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities<br />
having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking,<br />
peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4<br />
hours at 2500-fpm air velocity.<br />
2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold<br />
growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity,<br />
after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60<br />
days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a<br />
single manufacturer.<br />
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the<br />
fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products<br />
per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency<br />
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate<br />
markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.<br />
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.<br />
2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.<br />
3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.<br />
Project No.: 10145 THERMAL INSULATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 072100 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture,<br />
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with<br />
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during<br />
installation.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION<br />
A. Available Manufacturers:<br />
1. CertainTeed Corporation.<br />
2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc.<br />
3. Johns Manville.<br />
4. Owens Corning.<br />
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without<br />
membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smokedeveloped<br />
indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion<br />
characteristics.<br />
2.2 SLAG-WOOL-FIBER/ROCK-WOOL-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION<br />
A. Available Manufacturers:<br />
1. Fibrex Insulations Inc.<br />
2. Owens Corning.<br />
3. Thermafiber.<br />
B. Unfaced, Slag-Wool-Fiber/Rock-Wool-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I<br />
(blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread<br />
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for<br />
combustion characteristics.<br />
2.3 VAPOR RETARDERS<br />
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, with maximum permeance<br />
rating of 0.13 perm.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for<br />
other conditions affecting performance.<br />
Project No.: 10145 THERMAL INSULATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 072100 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been<br />
corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including<br />
removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with<br />
insulation attachment.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and<br />
application indicated.<br />
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left<br />
exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.<br />
C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and<br />
fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that<br />
interfere with placement.<br />
D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls,<br />
coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and<br />
insulation encapsulates piping.<br />
E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected<br />
from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of<br />
insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise<br />
shown or required to make up total thickness.<br />
3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION<br />
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's<br />
written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with<br />
adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support<br />
of units.<br />
B. Install mineral-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the<br />
following requirements:<br />
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing<br />
members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that<br />
will produce a snug fit between ends.<br />
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit<br />
between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.<br />
3.5 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS<br />
A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor<br />
transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system. Extend vapor<br />
Project No.: 10145 THERMAL INSULATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
072100 - 3
etarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with<br />
loose-fiber insulation.<br />
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than two wall<br />
studs. Fasten vapor retarders to wood framing at top, end, and bottom edges; at<br />
perimeter of wall openings; and at lap joints. Space fasteners 16 inches o.c.<br />
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating<br />
vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating<br />
objects and vapor retarder.<br />
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other<br />
work. Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.<br />
3.6 PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather<br />
exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or<br />
enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected<br />
by permanent construction immediately after installation.<br />
END OF SECTION 07 2100<br />
Project No.: 10145 THERMAL INSULATION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 072100 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 07 4213<br />
FORMED METAL WALL PANELS<br />
A. Section Includes: Concealed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.<br />
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of<br />
edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim,<br />
flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details.<br />
1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Maintenance data.<br />
1.04 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair<br />
or replace components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within<br />
specified warranty period.<br />
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer<br />
agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of<br />
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 CONCEALED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS<br />
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal panels designed to be field assembled by lapping<br />
and interconnecting side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through<br />
panel to supports using concealed fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for<br />
weathertight installation.<br />
B. Extruded-Rib-Profile, Concealed-Fastener Metal Wall Panels: Formed with raised,<br />
trapezoidal ribs; with interlocking joint between panels.<br />
Project No.: 10145 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
074213 - 1
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Berridge<br />
Manufacturing Company, HR-16, or comparable product.<br />
2. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with<br />
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation, or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated<br />
steel sheet complying with ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation;<br />
structural quality. Prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with<br />
ASTM A 755/A 755M.<br />
a. Nominal Thickness: 0.022 inch.<br />
b. Exterior Finish: Finish shall be full strength Kynar 500 PVDF resin-based<br />
coating, applied by the manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line, with<br />
a top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.80 mil over 0.20 to 0.30 mil prime<br />
coat, to provide a total topside dry film thickness of 1.0 plus or minus 0.10<br />
mil. Reverse side shall be coated with primer and wash coat of 0.30 mil plus<br />
or minus 0.05 mil. Finish shall conform to all tests for adhesion, flexibility,<br />
and longevity as specified by the Kynar 500 PVDF resin-based coating<br />
supplier.<br />
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
3. Panel Coverage: 16 inches.<br />
4. Panel Height: 0.875 inch.<br />
2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated<br />
steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M,<br />
Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide<br />
manufacturer's standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel<br />
system.<br />
B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel<br />
system including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings,<br />
sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of<br />
metal panels unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal as metal<br />
panels.<br />
2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from<br />
material recommended by manufacturer.<br />
3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefinfoam<br />
or closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible closure<br />
strips; cut or premolded to match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where<br />
indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight construction.<br />
C. Substrate: Minimum ½ inch plywood, 24-gauge metal deck or open-framed purlins at 4<br />
feet o.c.<br />
D. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels<br />
as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations<br />
include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed<br />
openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim<br />
with same finish system as adjacent metal panels.<br />
Project No.: 10145 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 074213 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
E. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide<br />
exposed fasteners with heads matching color of metal panels by means of plastic caps or<br />
factory-applied coating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.<br />
F. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant type recommended by manufacturer that are compatible<br />
with panel materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish.<br />
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene<br />
compound sealant tape with release-paper backing; 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch<br />
thick.<br />
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; as recommended in writing by metal panel<br />
manufacturer.<br />
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.<br />
2.03 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by<br />
manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated<br />
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated<br />
profiles and with dimensional and structural requirements.<br />
B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer's<br />
recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"<br />
that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.<br />
2.04 FINISHES<br />
A. Panels and Accessories:<br />
1. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less<br />
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.<br />
2. Concealed Finish: White or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 PREPARATION<br />
A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel<br />
support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel<br />
manufacturer's written recommendations.<br />
3.02 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION<br />
A. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped<br />
joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.<br />
B. Watertight Installation: Comply with manufacturers standard instructions and conform to<br />
standards set forth in the Architectural Sheet Metal Manual published by SMACNA, in<br />
order to achieve a watertight installation.<br />
Project No.: 10145 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 074213 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
C. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and<br />
weathertight mounting, and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with<br />
flashings and other components.<br />
D. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written<br />
installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide<br />
concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install<br />
work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently watertight.<br />
3.03 CLEANING<br />
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are<br />
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On<br />
completion of metal panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal<br />
panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.<br />
END OF SECTION 07 4213<br />
Project No.: 10145 FORMED METAL WALL PANELS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 074213 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 07 5323<br />
EPDM ROOFING<br />
A. Section Includes: Adhered ethylene-propylene-diene-monomer (EPDM) roofing system and<br />
roof insulation.<br />
1.02 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA<br />
Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.<br />
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and<br />
attachments to other work.<br />
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:<br />
1. Sheet roofing, of color required.<br />
2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.<br />
1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.<br />
1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by<br />
roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive<br />
manufacturer's special warranty.<br />
Project No.: 10145 EPDM ROOFING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 075323 - 1<br />
10 May 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 EPDM ROOFING<br />
A. EPDM: ASTM D 4637, Type I, nonreinforced, uniform, flexible EPDM sheet.<br />
1. Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.<br />
2. Exposed Face Color: White on black.<br />
2.02 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended<br />
use and compatible with roofing.<br />
B. Sheet Flashing: 60-mil- thick EPDM, partially cured or cured, according to application.<br />
C. Protection Sheet: Epichlorohydrin or neoprene nonreinforced flexible sheet, 55- to 60-mil-<br />
thick, recommended by EPDM manufacturer for resistance to hydrocarbons, non-aromatic<br />
solvents, grease, and oil.<br />
D. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.<br />
E. Seaming Material: Single-component, butyl splicing adhesive and splice cleaner or<br />
manufacturer's standard, synthetic-rubber polymer primer and 3-inch- wide minimum,<br />
butyl splice tape with release film.<br />
F. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with<br />
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening membrane to<br />
substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.<br />
G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide lap sealant, water cutoff mastic, metal termination<br />
bars, metal battens, pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, molded<br />
pipe boot flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, reinforced EPDM<br />
securement strips, T-joint covers, in-seam sealants, termination reglets, cover strips, and<br />
other accessories.<br />
2.03 SUBSTRATE BOARDS<br />
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate,<br />
thickness as required.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck.<br />
b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing.<br />
c. Temple-Inland, Inc; GreenGlass Exterior Sheathing.<br />
d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board.<br />
Project No.: 10145 EPDM ROOFING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 075323 - 2<br />
10 May 2012
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with<br />
corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening substrate panel<br />
to roof deck.<br />
2.04 ROOF INSULATION<br />
A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glassfiber<br />
mat facer on both major surfaces.<br />
B. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4<br />
inch per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes<br />
where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.<br />
2.05 WALKWAYS<br />
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, solid-rubber, slip-resisting,<br />
surface-textured walkway pads or rolls, approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to<br />
roofing system manufacturer.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water<br />
from entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain<br />
is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining<br />
roofing.<br />
C. Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain<br />
weathertightness of transition and to not void warranty for existing roofing system.<br />
3.02 SUBSTRATE BOARD INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof<br />
slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.<br />
1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at<br />
corners, perimeter, and field of roof according to roofing system manufacturers'<br />
written instructions.<br />
3.03 INSULATION INSTALLATION<br />
A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to<br />
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.<br />
Project No.: 10145 EPDM ROOFING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
10 May 2012<br />
075323 - 3
B. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.<br />
C. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall<br />
insulation thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each<br />
succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each<br />
direction.<br />
3.04 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to membrane roofing system<br />
manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll membrane roofing and allow to relax before<br />
installing.<br />
B. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by<br />
manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice<br />
area of roofing.<br />
C. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations,<br />
and perimeters.<br />
D. Spread sealant or mastic bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal<br />
membrane roofing in place with clamping ring.<br />
3.05 WALKWAY INSTALLATION<br />
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations required for equipment and<br />
rooftop access. Adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according<br />
to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
3.06 PROTECTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of<br />
construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing,<br />
inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written<br />
report, with copies to Architect and Owner.<br />
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with<br />
requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a<br />
condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and<br />
according to warranty requirements.<br />
END OF SECTION 07 5323<br />
Project No.: 10145 EPDM ROOFING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 075323 - 4<br />
10 May 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
SECTION 07 6200<br />
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
1. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications.<br />
2. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.<br />
3. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.<br />
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.<br />
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.<br />
2. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.<br />
3. Include identification of finish for each item.<br />
4. Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, expansion joints and<br />
expansion-joint covers, direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and<br />
connections to adjoining work.<br />
C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.<br />
1.03 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal<br />
flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within<br />
specified warranty period.<br />
1. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural<br />
movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to<br />
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.<br />
Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain<br />
watertight.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 076200 - 1<br />
10 May 2012
B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet<br />
Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent<br />
requirements are indicated.<br />
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface<br />
temperature changes.<br />
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.<br />
2.02 SHEET METALS<br />
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by<br />
applying strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.<br />
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, alloy as standard with manufacturer for finish required,<br />
with temper as required to suit forming operations and performance required.<br />
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:<br />
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not<br />
less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat,<br />
and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and<br />
resin manufacturers' written instructions.<br />
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to<br />
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet<br />
according to ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40;<br />
prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.<br />
1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:<br />
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not<br />
less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat,<br />
and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and<br />
resin manufacturers' written instructions.<br />
2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, protective coatings, sealants,<br />
and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim<br />
installation and as recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets<br />
and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and<br />
recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.<br />
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 076200 - 2<br />
10 May 2012
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps<br />
or factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing<br />
washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.<br />
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for<br />
metal being fastened.<br />
2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.<br />
3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet:<br />
Series 300 stainless steel or hot-dip galvanized steel according to<br />
ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.<br />
C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric sealant; of type, grade, class, and use<br />
classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain<br />
watertight.<br />
D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion according to ASTM D 1187.<br />
2.04 FABRICATION, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown<br />
and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions,<br />
geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet<br />
metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.<br />
1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.<br />
2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning,<br />
buckling, and tool marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges<br />
folded back to form hems.<br />
3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed<br />
fasteners on faces exposed to view.<br />
B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.<br />
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,<br />
filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.<br />
2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.<br />
C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to<br />
provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal<br />
standard.<br />
D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored<br />
or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.<br />
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal<br />
standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.<br />
F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with<br />
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended<br />
use.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 076200 - 3<br />
10 May 2012
2.05 ROOF-DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
A. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts to dimensions indicated, complete with<br />
mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers from same material as downspouts and<br />
anchors.<br />
B. Parapet Scuppers: Fabricate scuppers to dimensions required, with closure flange trim to<br />
exterior, 4-inch- wide wall flanges to interior, and base extending 4 inches beyond cant or<br />
tapered strip into field of roof.<br />
C. Conductor Heads: Fabricate conductor heads with flanged back and stiffened top edge<br />
and of dimensions and shape required, complete with outlet tubes.<br />
2.06 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long, sections.<br />
Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to<br />
support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight.<br />
2.07 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- long, but not<br />
exceeding 12-foot- long, sections, under copings, and at shelf angles. Fabricate<br />
discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall<br />
openings; and form with 2-inch- high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:<br />
B. Opening Flashings in Frame <strong>Construction</strong>: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to<br />
extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- high, end<br />
dams. Fabricate from the following materials:<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work<br />
securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners,<br />
solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as<br />
required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.<br />
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide<br />
uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.<br />
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight<br />
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before<br />
fabricating sheet metal.<br />
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two<br />
fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.<br />
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of<br />
buckling and tool marks.<br />
5. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 076200 - 4<br />
10 May 2012
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts<br />
pressure-treated wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or<br />
corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent<br />
separation as recommended by sheet metal manufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.<br />
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space<br />
movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or<br />
intersection.<br />
1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,<br />
filled with sealant concealed within joints.<br />
D. Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate substrate not less than recommended by<br />
fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.<br />
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to<br />
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a<br />
tight installation.<br />
F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to<br />
comply with requirements in Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."<br />
3.02 ROOF-DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install sheet metal roof-drainage items to produce complete roof-drainage<br />
system according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate<br />
installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-drainage system.<br />
B. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. Provide hangers with<br />
fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and<br />
bottom and at approximately 60 inches o.c.<br />
C. Parapet Scuppers: Continuously support scupper, set to correct elevation, and seal flanges<br />
to interior wall face, over cants or tapered edge strips, and under roofing membrane.<br />
D. Conductor Heads: Anchor securely to wall, with elevation of conductor head rim at<br />
minimum of 1 inch below scupper discharge.<br />
3.03 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance<br />
requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet<br />
metal standard. Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and set units true to line,<br />
levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanently<br />
watertight and weather resistant.<br />
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to<br />
recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock<br />
bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate.<br />
C. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in<br />
cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
10 May 2012<br />
076200 - 5
D. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with<br />
top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base<br />
flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.<br />
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with<br />
installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and<br />
clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.<br />
3.04 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture<br />
according to cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate<br />
installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows,<br />
doors, and louvers.<br />
B. Opening Flashings in Frame <strong>Construction</strong>: Install continuous head, sill, and similar<br />
flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.<br />
3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Clean off excess sealants.<br />
B. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and<br />
trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation<br />
instructions.<br />
END OF SECTION 07 6200<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 076200 - 6<br />
10 May 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 07 8100<br />
APPLIED FIREPROOFING<br />
A. Section includes sprayed fire-resistive materials (SFRM).<br />
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product.<br />
1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product certificates.<br />
B. Evaluation reports.<br />
C. Field quality-control reports.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL<br />
A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements<br />
of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.<br />
2.02 SPRAYED FIRE-RESISTIVE MATERIALS<br />
A. SFRM: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed, lightweight, dry formulation, complying<br />
with indicated fire-resistance design, and mixed with water at Project site to form a slurry<br />
or mortar before conveyance and application or conveyed in a dry state and mixed with<br />
atomized water at place of application.<br />
2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates<br />
and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to<br />
authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.<br />
1. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer.<br />
2. Bonding Agent: Product approved by fireproofing manufacturer.<br />
Project No.: 10145 APPLIED FIREPROOFING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 078100 - 1<br />
10 May 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 PREPARATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and<br />
according to each fire-resistance design.<br />
B. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials<br />
during application.<br />
C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in<br />
writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and<br />
is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.<br />
3.02 APPLICATION<br />
A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and<br />
products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers,<br />
sealers, topcoats, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.<br />
B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials,<br />
application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply<br />
fireproofing; as applicable to particular conditions of installation and as required to<br />
achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.<br />
C. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in<br />
each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method<br />
recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.<br />
D. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been<br />
applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.<br />
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform special inspections.<br />
Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.10.<br />
B. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Remove<br />
and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. Apply<br />
additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate<br />
insufficient thickness, and retest.<br />
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.<br />
3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIRING<br />
A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of<br />
Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and<br />
clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.<br />
B. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.<br />
C. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using<br />
manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.<br />
END OF SECTION 07 8100<br />
Project No.: 10145 APPLIED FIREPROOFING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 078100 - 2<br />
10 May 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
SECTION 07 8413<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING<br />
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.<br />
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.<br />
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.<br />
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to<br />
FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found<br />
to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."<br />
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the<br />
following requirements:<br />
1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency<br />
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced<br />
in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing marking of<br />
qualified testing and inspection agency.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
1. Grace <strong>Construction</strong> Products.<br />
2. Hilti, Inc.<br />
3. Johns Manville.<br />
4. 3M Fire Protection Products.<br />
5. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 078413 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
2.02 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING<br />
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire<br />
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and<br />
maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping<br />
systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and<br />
with penetrating items if any.<br />
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or<br />
UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.<br />
1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.<br />
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479,<br />
based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.<br />
1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions<br />
penetrated.<br />
2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions<br />
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.<br />
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined<br />
per UL 1479.<br />
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at<br />
both ambient and elevated temperatures.<br />
E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smokedeveloped<br />
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.<br />
F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are<br />
needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those<br />
components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified<br />
testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other<br />
conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
B. Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation<br />
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.<br />
C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials<br />
during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and<br />
depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 078413 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible<br />
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of<br />
firestopping.<br />
D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:<br />
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and<br />
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.<br />
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and<br />
penetrating items.<br />
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to<br />
produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.<br />
END OF SECTION 07 8413<br />
Project No.: 10145 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 078413 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 07 9200<br />
JOINT SEALANTS<br />
A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those<br />
specified by reference to this Section:<br />
1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.<br />
2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.<br />
3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.<br />
4. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.<br />
B. Compatibility and adhesion test reports.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test<br />
their adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that<br />
is appropriate for the types of Project joints.<br />
1.4 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair<br />
or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other<br />
requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric<br />
sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace<br />
those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this<br />
Section within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
Project No.: 10145 JOINT SEALANTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 079200 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other<br />
Part 2 articles.<br />
2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL<br />
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are<br />
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and<br />
application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field<br />
experience.<br />
B. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for<br />
each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing<br />
ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and<br />
joint substrates.<br />
C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be<br />
nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing<br />
according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for<br />
Project.<br />
2.3 SILICONE SEALANTS<br />
A. Low modulus silicone sealant for exterior expansion joints:<br />
1. Available Products:<br />
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.<br />
b. Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic).<br />
c. Pecora Corporation; 890.<br />
2. Characteristics: Single-component, low modulus silicone rubber:<br />
a. Type S, Grade NS.<br />
b. Class 25.<br />
c. Custom colors as selected by the Architect.<br />
d. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Nonstaining to porous substrates per<br />
ASTM C 1248.<br />
B. Medium modulus silicone sealant at metal framing non-porous substrates and all other<br />
exterior applications:<br />
1. Available Products:<br />
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795.<br />
b. Tremco; Spectrem 2.<br />
c. Pecora Corporation; 895.<br />
Project No.: 10145 JOINT SEALANTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 079200 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
2. Characteristics: Single-component silicone rubber:<br />
a. Type S, Grade NS.<br />
b. Class 25.<br />
c. Custom colors as selected by the Architect.<br />
2.4 SILICONE BATH SEALANT<br />
A. Available Products:<br />
1. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.<br />
2. GE Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.<br />
3. Pecora Corporation; 898.<br />
B. Characteristics: Single-component silicone rubber, mildew-resistant and stain-resistant.<br />
Color as selected by the Architect.<br />
2.5 TWO-PART POLYURETHANE SEALANT<br />
A. Available Products:<br />
1. Tremco; Vulkem 245/255.<br />
2. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200.<br />
3. ChemRex, Sonneborn; SL-2 / NP-2.<br />
B. Characteristics: Two-component polyurethane sealant for horizontal traffic-bearing<br />
surfaces meeting ASTM C 920 classifications:<br />
1. Type M.<br />
2. Grade P or NS; self-leveling for flat surfaces and non-sag for sloped surfaces.<br />
3. Class 25.<br />
4. Colors: Standard colors as selected by Architect.<br />
2.6 ACRYLIC SEALANT<br />
A. Available Products:<br />
1. Bostik; Chem-Calk 600.<br />
2. Tremco; Mono 555.<br />
B. Characteristics: Single-component, acrylic polymer sealant. Standard colors as<br />
selected by Architect.<br />
2.7 ACRYLIC-LATEX CAULKING COMPOUND<br />
A. Available Products:<br />
1. Bostik Findley; Chem-Calk Painter’s Calk.<br />
2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.<br />
3. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; Sonolac.<br />
Project No.: 10145 JOINT SEALANTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 079200 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
4. Tremco; Tremflex 834.<br />
B. Characteristics: Flexible, paintable, non-staining, non-bleeding acrylic emulsion.<br />
2.8 FDA APPROVED SEALANTS<br />
A. Available Products:<br />
1. General Electric Company, <strong>Construction</strong> 1200 Silicone Sealant.<br />
2. Tremco, Inc., Proglaze Silicone <strong>Construction</strong> Sealant.<br />
3. Pecora Corp., #863 Silicone.<br />
B. Characteristics: One-part, moisture-curing silicone rubber; FDA approved for use in<br />
indirect food contact areas.<br />
2.9 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING<br />
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are<br />
compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are<br />
approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience<br />
and laboratory testing.<br />
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a<br />
surface skin) O (open-cell material) B (bicellular material with a surface skin) or any of<br />
the preceding types, as approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer for joint<br />
application indicated, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise<br />
contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:<br />
C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing<br />
complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of<br />
remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low<br />
compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant<br />
depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.<br />
D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant<br />
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler<br />
materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant<br />
failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.<br />
2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for<br />
adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction<br />
joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.<br />
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of<br />
sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances<br />
capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any<br />
way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.<br />
Project No.: 10145 JOINT SEALANTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 079200 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 PREPARATION<br />
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint<br />
sealants.<br />
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with<br />
adhesion of joint sealant.<br />
a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast<br />
cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to<br />
produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond<br />
with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning<br />
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free<br />
compressed air.<br />
2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.<br />
a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do<br />
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with<br />
adhesion of joint sealants.<br />
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant<br />
manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior<br />
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written<br />
instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or<br />
migration onto adjoining surfaces.<br />
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with<br />
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such<br />
contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape<br />
immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use<br />
of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.<br />
B. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at<br />
position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants<br />
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.<br />
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.<br />
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.<br />
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant<br />
application and replace them with dry materials.<br />
C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used<br />
between sealants and backs of joints.<br />
Project No.: 10145 JOINT SEALANTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 079200 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same<br />
time backings are installed:<br />
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.<br />
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.<br />
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that<br />
allow optimum sealant movement capability.<br />
E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning<br />
or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form<br />
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to<br />
ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.<br />
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.<br />
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and<br />
that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.<br />
3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by<br />
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint<br />
sealants and of products in which joints occur.<br />
3.3 SCHEDULE<br />
A. Exterior Joints in Masonry and Stone Veneer: Medium modulus silicone sealant.<br />
B. Exterior and Interior Joints at Perimeter of Skylights, Storefronts, and Windows:<br />
Medium modulus silicone sealant.<br />
C. Exterior and Interior Horizontal Traffic-Bearing Joints, excluding tile joints: Two-part<br />
polyurethane sealant.<br />
D. Interior Concealed Bedding Joints and Thresholds: Acrylic sealant.<br />
E. Typical Interior Joints and Seams at Abutting and Adjacent Materials, except as<br />
specified herein: Acrylic-latex caulking compound.<br />
F. Interior Joints in Conjunction with Vanities, Fixtures and Tile Finishes: Silicone bath<br />
sealant.<br />
G. Interior Joints and Seams at Abutting and Adjacent Materials in Food Service Areas:<br />
FDA Approved Sealant.<br />
H. Tile Expansion and Control Joints: Refer to Section 093000 – Tiling.<br />
I. Firestopped Joints: Refer to Section 078413 – Penetration Firestopping.<br />
END OF SECTION 07 9200<br />
Project No.: 10145 JOINT SEALANTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 079200 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 08 1113<br />
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
A. Section Includes: Standard hollow metal doors and frames.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,<br />
material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings,<br />
and finishes.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:<br />
1. Elevations of each door design.<br />
2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal<br />
thicknesses.<br />
3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal<br />
thicknesses.<br />
4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.<br />
5. Details of each different wall opening condition.<br />
6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.<br />
7. Details of accessories.<br />
8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.<br />
C. Other Action Submittals:<br />
1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the<br />
supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings<br />
as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single<br />
manufacturer.<br />
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and<br />
labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on<br />
testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.<br />
C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.<br />
Project No.: 10145 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 081113 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during<br />
transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.<br />
B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack<br />
welded to jambs and mullions.<br />
C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units<br />
maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4inch-<br />
high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.<br />
1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air<br />
circulation.<br />
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements<br />
before fabrication.<br />
1.6 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting<br />
drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,<br />
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to<br />
Project site in time for installation.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;<br />
suitable for exposed applications.<br />
B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free<br />
of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.<br />
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;<br />
with minimum A40 metallic coating.<br />
1. Provide minimum G60 or A60 metallic coating for doors and frames located in<br />
pool area rooms.<br />
D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating<br />
designation; mill phosphatized.<br />
1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with<br />
ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized<br />
according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.<br />
Project No.: 10145 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 081113 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.<br />
F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured<br />
according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.<br />
2.2 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS<br />
A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated;<br />
fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless<br />
otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.<br />
1. Design: Flush panel.<br />
2. Core <strong>Construction</strong>: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb,<br />
polystyrene, polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steelstiffener<br />
core.<br />
a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection ratings indicated.<br />
b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors<br />
fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 4.0<br />
deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu when tested according to ASTM C 1363.<br />
1) Locations: Exterior doors.<br />
3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end<br />
closures or channels of same material as face sheets.<br />
5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel<br />
Doors and Frames."<br />
B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors<br />
complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level<br />
and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:<br />
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).<br />
C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metalliccoated<br />
sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below<br />
by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for<br />
physical performance level:<br />
1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).<br />
a. Provide doors of metallic-coated sheet steel at pool area rooms.<br />
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing<br />
plates from same material as door face sheets.<br />
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hotrolled<br />
steel sheet.<br />
Project No.: 10145 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 081113 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES<br />
A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and<br />
profile.<br />
B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.<br />
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.<br />
2. Fabricate frames as fully welded unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.<br />
C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.<br />
2. Fabricate frames as fully welded unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3. Provide frames of metallic-coated steel sheet at pool area rooms.<br />
4. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.<br />
5. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.<br />
6. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.042-inch- thick steel sheet.<br />
D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement<br />
plates from same material as frames.<br />
2.4 FRAME ANCHORS<br />
A. Jamb Anchors:<br />
1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame<br />
size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less<br />
than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch<br />
thick.<br />
2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less<br />
than 0.042 inch thick.<br />
3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression<br />
anchors.<br />
4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8inch-<br />
diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from<br />
frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor<br />
location.<br />
B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick,<br />
and as follows:<br />
1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive<br />
fasteners.<br />
2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,<br />
allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at<br />
finish floor surface.<br />
Project No.: 10145 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 081113 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
2.5 FABRICATION<br />
A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle.<br />
Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness<br />
of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure<br />
proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory<br />
assembled before shipment.<br />
B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.<br />
C. Hollow Metal Doors:<br />
1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to<br />
permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water<br />
penetration.<br />
2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.<br />
D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or<br />
handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of<br />
same thickness metal as frames.<br />
1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make<br />
smooth, flush, and invisible.<br />
2. Sidelight Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or<br />
joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at<br />
crossings and to jambs by butt welding.<br />
3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed<br />
fasteners unless otherwise indicated.<br />
4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to<br />
be grouted.<br />
5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four<br />
spot welds per anchor.<br />
6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:<br />
a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and<br />
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as<br />
follows:<br />
1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.<br />
2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.<br />
b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and<br />
bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as<br />
follows:<br />
1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high.<br />
2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high.<br />
3) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and<br />
mounted in metal-stud partitions.<br />
c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb.<br />
d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches<br />
from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches<br />
o.c.<br />
Project No.: 10145 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
081113 - 5
7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door<br />
silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.<br />
a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door<br />
silencers.<br />
b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door<br />
silencers.<br />
E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either<br />
cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.<br />
F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated<br />
mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping<br />
according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in<br />
Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."<br />
1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to<br />
ANSI/SDI A250.8.<br />
2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surfacemounted<br />
door hardware.<br />
3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and<br />
ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for<br />
hardware.<br />
2.6 STEEL FINISHES<br />
A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and<br />
pretreating.<br />
1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free<br />
primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by<br />
primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied<br />
coatings despite prolonged exposure.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of<br />
the Work.<br />
B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations<br />
before frame installation.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
Project No.: 10145 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 081113 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by<br />
grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and<br />
invisible on exposed faces.<br />
B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for<br />
squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness.<br />
C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surfacemounted<br />
door hardware.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely<br />
fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated.<br />
Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.<br />
1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until<br />
permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove<br />
temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.<br />
a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.<br />
b. Install door silencers in frames before grouting.<br />
c. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames<br />
have been properly set and secured.<br />
d. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are<br />
constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.<br />
2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to<br />
floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.<br />
a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of<br />
postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop<br />
Drawings.<br />
3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.<br />
4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling<br />
space between frames and masonry with grout.<br />
5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry <strong>Construction</strong>: Secure frames in place with<br />
postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make<br />
smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.<br />
6. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled<br />
expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors,<br />
and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.<br />
7. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness,<br />
alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:<br />
a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line<br />
90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.<br />
Project No.: 10145 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 081113 - 7<br />
19 March 2012
. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal<br />
line parallel to plane of wall.<br />
c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of<br />
jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.<br />
d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.<br />
C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances<br />
specified below. Shim as necessary.<br />
1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:<br />
a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.<br />
b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch.<br />
c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch.<br />
d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold):<br />
Maximum 3/4 inch.<br />
2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.<br />
3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.<br />
D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and<br />
with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before<br />
final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and<br />
replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or<br />
otherwise unacceptable.<br />
B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged<br />
areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.<br />
C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair<br />
paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 1113<br />
Project No.: 10145 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 081113 - 8<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
SECTION 08 1416<br />
FLUSH WOOD DOORS<br />
1. Solid-core doors with plastic-laminate faces.<br />
2. Hollow-core doors with plastic-laminate faces.<br />
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of door.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of<br />
door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:<br />
1. Dimensions and locations of blocking.<br />
2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.<br />
3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts.<br />
4. Undercuts.<br />
5. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.<br />
C. Samples: For plastic-laminate door faces.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL<br />
A. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a<br />
qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive<br />
pressure according to NFPA 252.<br />
1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection<br />
rating indicated.<br />
2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications<br />
indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed<br />
intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.<br />
B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft<br />
control, based on testing according to UL 1784.<br />
C. Mineral-Core Doors:<br />
Project No.: 10145 FLUSH WOOD DOORS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 081416 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced<br />
quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating<br />
indicated.<br />
2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability<br />
approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate<br />
through-bolting hardware.<br />
3. Edge <strong>Construction</strong>: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with<br />
improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified<br />
requirements for exposed edges.<br />
D. Hollow-Core Doors:<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong>: Standard hollow core.<br />
2.02 PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED DOORS<br />
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:<br />
1. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with<br />
NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.<br />
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate<br />
manufacturer's full range of products.<br />
3. <strong>Construction</strong>: Three plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is<br />
abrasive planed before faces are applied.<br />
B. Interior Hollow-Core Doors:<br />
1. Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with<br />
NEMA LD 3, Grade HGS.<br />
2. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As selected by Architect from laminate<br />
manufacturer's full range of products.<br />
2.03 FABRICATION<br />
A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance<br />
requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.<br />
B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.<br />
C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 7100 "Door Hardware."<br />
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions<br />
and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 FLUSH WOOD DOORS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 081416 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.<br />
2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.<br />
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as<br />
indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or<br />
permitted for fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges<br />
of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.<br />
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors.<br />
Provide 1/8 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering<br />
unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4<br />
inch from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.<br />
a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 1416<br />
Project No.: 10145 FLUSH WOOD DOORS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 081416 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
SECTION 08 3113<br />
ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction<br />
details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames<br />
for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments<br />
to other work.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door(s) and frame(s) through one<br />
source from a single manufacturer.<br />
B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical<br />
to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics and<br />
that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable<br />
to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1.4 COORDINATION<br />
A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain<br />
access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 STEEL MATERIALS<br />
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc-coated, ASTM A 591/A 591M with cold-rolled<br />
steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS),<br />
exposed.<br />
Project No.: 10145 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 083113 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
C. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and<br />
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1,<br />
"Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could<br />
impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel,<br />
complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-<br />
SP 8, "Pickling."<br />
2. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and<br />
pretreating.<br />
2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS<br />
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited<br />
to, the following:<br />
1. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co.<br />
2. Dur-Red Products.<br />
3. Jensen Industries.<br />
4. J. L. Industries, Inc.<br />
5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.<br />
B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet.<br />
1. Locations: Wall and ceiling surfaces.<br />
2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face<br />
flange of frame.<br />
3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-inch- wide, surfacemounted<br />
trim.<br />
4. Hinges: Continuous piano.<br />
C. Fire-Rated, Insulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated<br />
from steel sheet.<br />
1. Locations: Ceiling surfaces.<br />
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.<br />
3. Temperature Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes.<br />
4. Door: Flush panel with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet<br />
metal with a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch.<br />
5. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-inch- wide, surfacemounted<br />
trim.<br />
6. Hinges: Continuous piano.<br />
7. Automatic Closer: Spring type.<br />
8. Latch: Self-latching device with interior release.<br />
D. Fire Rated, Uninsulated, Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim:<br />
Fabricated from steel sheet.<br />
1. Locations: Wall surfaces.<br />
2. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.<br />
3. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, flush construction.<br />
Project No.: 10145 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 083113 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
4. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-inch- wide, surfacemounted<br />
trim.<br />
5. Hinges: Continuous piano.<br />
6. Automatic Closer: Spring type.<br />
7. Latch: Self-latching device with interior release.<br />
2.3 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units<br />
ready for installation.<br />
B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide<br />
materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with<br />
exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.<br />
C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.<br />
Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to<br />
types of supports indicated.<br />
1. Exposed Flanges: As indicated.<br />
2. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood<br />
framing.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.<br />
B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.<br />
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.<br />
B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise<br />
damaged.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 3113<br />
Project No.: 10145 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 083113 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 08 4100<br />
FOLDING WOOD AND GLASS DOOR SYSTEMS<br />
A. Section Includes: Engineered sliding/folding wood and glass door system, including<br />
wood/aluminum frame, threshold, wood panels, sliding/folding and locking<br />
hardware, splines, weather stripping, glass and glazing; designed to provide an<br />
opening glass wall, with sizes and configurations as shown on drawings.<br />
1.2 REFERENCES<br />
A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers<br />
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act<br />
(ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: Manufacturer’s literature including independently tested data listing<br />
performance criteria and Owner’s Manual with installation instructions.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensioning, direction of swing, configuration, swing panels,<br />
typical head jamb, side jambs and sill details, type of glazing material and handle<br />
height.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer: Provide complete, precision built, engineered, pre-fitted unit by a single<br />
source manufacturer with at least 20 years experience in providing folding/sliding door<br />
systems for large openings in the North American market.<br />
1. The manufacturer must have a quality management system registration to the<br />
ISO 9001: 2008 standard.<br />
2. The manufacturer must have an environmental management system registration<br />
to the ISO 14001: 2005 standard.<br />
B. Performance Requirements: Provide from manufacturer that has independently tested<br />
typical units. Testing results to include air infiltration in accordance with ASTM E 283,<br />
water penetration in accordance with ASTM E 547, structural loading in accordance<br />
with ASTM E 330, and forced entry in accordance with AAMA 1303.5 and CAWM<br />
300-96.<br />
C. Thermal Performance U value: Unit to be rated, certified and labeled in accordance<br />
with NFRC 100, shown in manufacturer’s latest published data for the glazing, sill and<br />
direction of opening specified.<br />
Project No.: 10145 FOLDING WOOD AND GLASS DOOR SYSTEMS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084100 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
D. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Unit to rated, certified and labeled in<br />
accordance with NFRC 200, shown in manufacturer’s latest published data for<br />
the glazing, sill, and direction of opening specified.<br />
E. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in the installation of manufacturer’s<br />
products or other similar products for large openings. Installer to provide reference list<br />
of at least 3 projects of similar scale and complexity successfully completed in the last 3<br />
years.<br />
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for folding door<br />
systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop<br />
Drawings.<br />
1.6 WARRANTY<br />
A. Provide manufacturer’s standard warranty against defects in materials and<br />
workmanship.<br />
B. Warranty Period: Ten years for rollers and for seal failure of insulated glass<br />
supplied. For all other components: two years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: WD66, the Standard Wood Framed Folding System as<br />
supplied by NANA WALL SYSTEMS, INC.<br />
B. NANA WALL SYSTEMS, INC.<br />
707 Redwood Highway, Mill Valley, CA 94941<br />
Toll Free: (800) 873-5673<br />
Telephone: (415) 383-3148<br />
Fax: (415) 383-0312<br />
Website: www.nanawall.com<br />
Email: info@nanawall.com<br />
2.2 MATERIALS<br />
A. Frame and Panels: From manufacturer’s standard profiles, provide head track, side<br />
jambs, panels, and glazing stops with dimensions shown on drawings.<br />
B. Aluminum Extrusion: Extrusions with nominal thickness of .078” (2.0 mm). Alloy<br />
specified as AIMgSi0.5 with strength rated as 6063-T5 or F-22 (European standard).<br />
Anodized conforming to AAMA 611.98.<br />
Project No.: 10145 FOLDING WOOD AND GLASS DOOR SYSTEMS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084100 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
C. Glass: Provide manufacturer’s standard glass and dry glazing with EPDM gaskets and<br />
glass stops fixed with hidden nails. Glass to comply with safety glazing requirements of<br />
ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR 1201.<br />
2.3 FABRICATION<br />
A. Use solid, three layer, cross grained frame and panel profiles, hinges and spines,<br />
sliding and folding hardware, locking hardware and handles, threshold and track,<br />
glass and glazing and weather stripping as specified herein to make a folding glass<br />
wall. Factory pre-assemble as is standard for manufacturer and ship with all components<br />
and installation instructions.<br />
B. Sizes and Configurations: See drawings for selected custom dimensions within<br />
maximum frame sizes possible as indicated in manufacturer’s literature. See drawings<br />
for selected number of panels and configuration.<br />
2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS<br />
A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified<br />
in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 ERECTION<br />
A. Because of the large dimensions involved and the weight and movement of the<br />
panels, verify the structural integrity of the header such that the maximum deflection<br />
with live and dead loads is limited to be the lesser of L/720 of the span and 1/4”.<br />
Structural support for lateral loads (both wind load and eccentric load when the panels<br />
are stacked open) must be provided. It is recommended that all building dead loads be<br />
applied to the header prior to installing the NanaWall. If so and if a reasonable amount<br />
of time has been allowed for the effect of this dead load on the header, then only the<br />
building’s live load can be used to meet the above requirements of L/720 or 1/4”. If not,<br />
both the dead and live loads need to be considered.<br />
B. Examine surfaces of openings and verify dimensions; verify rough openings are level,<br />
plumb, and square, with no unevenness, bowing, or bumps on the floor.<br />
C. Installation of units constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.<br />
3.2 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements<br />
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
Project No.: 10145 FOLDING WOOD AND GLASS DOOR SYSTEMS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084100 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General:<br />
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
2. Do not install damaged components.<br />
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.<br />
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.<br />
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and<br />
electrolytic deterioration.<br />
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Install frame in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and installation<br />
instructions. Properly flash and waterproof around the perimeter of the opening.<br />
C. Installer to provide appropriate anchorage devices and to securely and rigidly fit frame<br />
in place, absolutely level, straight, plumb and square. Install frame in proper<br />
elevation, plane and location, and in proper alignment with other work.<br />
D. If necessary, provide drain connections from lower track.<br />
E. Install panels, handles and lock set in accordance with manufacturer’s<br />
recommendations and installation instructions.<br />
F. If necessary, adjust hardware for proper operation.<br />
G. Finishing: seal and finish promptly after installation and prior to exposure to weather<br />
in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.<br />
H. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07<br />
Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.<br />
I. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and<br />
without warp or rack.<br />
J. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to<br />
produce weathertight installation.<br />
3.4 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust operating door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by<br />
manufacturer.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 4100<br />
Project No.: 10145 FOLDING WOOD AND GLASS DOOR SYSTEMS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084100 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
SECTION 08 4113<br />
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS<br />
1. Exterior and interior storefront framing.<br />
2. Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers<br />
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act<br />
(ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the<br />
following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure<br />
due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:<br />
1. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.<br />
2. Failure includes the following:<br />
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.<br />
b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.<br />
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal<br />
and structural movements to glazing.<br />
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural<br />
movements.<br />
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other<br />
components.<br />
f. Sealant failure.<br />
g. Failure of operating units.<br />
B. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through<br />
fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested<br />
according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq.<br />
ft..<br />
C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not<br />
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested<br />
according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of<br />
positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..<br />
Project No.: 10145 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084113 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
D. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal<br />
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and<br />
surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of<br />
materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.<br />
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material<br />
surfaces.<br />
2. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.<br />
E. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and<br />
framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when<br />
tested according to AAMA 1503.<br />
F. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and<br />
framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F<br />
when tested according to AAMA 1503.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,<br />
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes<br />
for aluminum-framed systems.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections,<br />
details, and attachments to other work.<br />
1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for<br />
drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior.<br />
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a<br />
qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with<br />
performance requirements.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
E. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and<br />
approved for installation of units required for this Project.<br />
B. Accessible Entrances: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &<br />
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.<br />
C. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from<br />
single manufacturer.<br />
Project No.: 10145 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084113 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminumframed<br />
systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements<br />
on Shop Drawings.<br />
1.7 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to<br />
repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with<br />
requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.<br />
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.<br />
c. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.<br />
d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.<br />
e. Failure of operating components.<br />
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for aluminum-framed systems is based on EFCO<br />
Corp. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a<br />
comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. Kawneer.<br />
2. Vistawall Architectural Products.<br />
2.2 MATERIALS<br />
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.<br />
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.<br />
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.<br />
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.<br />
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.<br />
B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer,<br />
complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface<br />
preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to<br />
recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable<br />
SSPC standard.<br />
Project No.: 10145 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084113 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.<br />
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.<br />
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS<br />
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of<br />
thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong>: Thermally broken.<br />
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.<br />
3. Glazing Plane: Center.<br />
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with<br />
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.<br />
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,<br />
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.<br />
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out<br />
from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.<br />
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.<br />
D. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,<br />
nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.<br />
E. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by<br />
manufacturer for joint type.<br />
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS<br />
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."<br />
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or<br />
extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.<br />
C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.<br />
2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS<br />
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing<br />
operation.<br />
1. Door <strong>Construction</strong>: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch-<br />
thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten<br />
corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or<br />
that incorporate concealed tie rods.<br />
2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width.<br />
Project No.: 10145 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084113 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10<br />
inches above floor or ground plane.<br />
B. Entrance Door Hardware: Additional hardware specified in Division 08 Section<br />
"Guestroom Locking System."<br />
2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE<br />
A. General: Provide entrance door hardware for each entrance door to comply with<br />
requirements in this Section.<br />
1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color<br />
indicated, and products complying with BHMA standard referenced.<br />
2. Opening-Force Requirements:<br />
a. Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more<br />
than 30 lbf to set the door in motion.<br />
b. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.<br />
B. Opening-Force Requirements:<br />
1. Latches and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf required to release latch.<br />
C. Butt Hinges: BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, radius corner.<br />
1. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into<br />
a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while entrance door is closed.<br />
2. Exterior and Pool Room Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.<br />
3. Quantities:<br />
a. For doors up to 87 inches high, provide 3 hinges per leaf.<br />
D. Panic Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1, listed and labeled by a testing and<br />
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection,<br />
based on testing according to UL 305.<br />
1. See Division 08 Section “Guestroom Locking System.”<br />
E. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated<br />
for aluminum framing.<br />
F. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6.<br />
G. Surface-Mounted Holders: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.<br />
1. Provide with SRI finish at pool room.<br />
2. Provide with overhead stop.<br />
H. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.<br />
1. Compression Type: Made of ASTM D 2000, molded neoprene, or<br />
ASTM D 2287, molded PVC.<br />
Project No.: 10145 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084113 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
2. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile<br />
with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.<br />
I. Weather Sweeps: Manufacturer's standard exterior-door bottom sweep with concealed<br />
fasteners on mounting strip.<br />
J. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than<br />
1:2, with maximum height of 1/2 inch.<br />
2.7 ACCESSORY MATERIALS<br />
A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified<br />
in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."<br />
B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12<br />
requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.<br />
2.8 FABRICATION<br />
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.<br />
B. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the<br />
following characteristics:<br />
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.<br />
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.<br />
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and<br />
moisture migrating within the system to exterior.<br />
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.<br />
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and<br />
framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances.<br />
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.<br />
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to<br />
greatest extent possible.<br />
C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting<br />
stops.<br />
D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door<br />
operation and for installing entrance door hardware.<br />
1. At exterior and pool room doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed<br />
stops.<br />
E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.<br />
1. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.<br />
F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the<br />
greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door<br />
hardware before applying finishes.<br />
Project No.: 10145 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084113 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project<br />
according to Shop Drawings.<br />
2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES<br />
A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film<br />
thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for<br />
cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.<br />
1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements<br />
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General:<br />
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
2. Do not install damaged components.<br />
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.<br />
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.<br />
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and<br />
electrolytic deterioration.<br />
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Metal Protection:<br />
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action<br />
by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by<br />
installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this<br />
purpose.<br />
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by<br />
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.<br />
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing<br />
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.<br />
D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07<br />
Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.<br />
E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and<br />
without warp or rack.<br />
Project No.: 10145 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084113 - 7<br />
19 March 2012
F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."<br />
G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact<br />
points.<br />
1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather<br />
stripping.<br />
2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door<br />
hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written<br />
instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.<br />
H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to<br />
produce weathertight installation.<br />
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES<br />
A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection<br />
tolerances:<br />
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in<br />
12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length.<br />
2. Alignment:<br />
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.<br />
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32<br />
inch.<br />
B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8<br />
inch.<br />
3.4 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by<br />
manufacturer.<br />
1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide<br />
a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open<br />
position to 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 4113<br />
Project No.: 10145 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084113 - 8<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
SECTION 08 4229<br />
SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCE DOORS<br />
1. Exterior and interior, sliding, power-operated automatic entrances.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 08 Section “Guestroom Locking System” for card reader.<br />
2. Division 26 Sections for electrical connections including conduit and wiring for<br />
automatic entrance operators and access-control devices.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. AAADM: American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers.<br />
B. Activation Device: Device that, when actuated, sends an electrical signal to the door<br />
operator to open the door.<br />
C. IBC: International Building Code.<br />
D. Safety Device: Device that, to avoid injury, prevents a door from opening or closing.<br />
E. For automatic door terminology, refer to BHMA A156.10 for definitions of terms.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface<br />
temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to<br />
both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.<br />
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material<br />
surfaces.<br />
B. Operating Temperature Range: Provide automatic entrances that operate within minus<br />
20 to plus 122 deg F.<br />
C. Air Infiltration: Maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 1.25<br />
cfm/sq. ft. of fixed entrance system area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a<br />
minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..<br />
D. Opening-Force Requirements:<br />
Project No.: 10145 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084229 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Not more than 50 lbf required<br />
for a breakaway door or panel to open.<br />
E. Entrapment Force Requirements:<br />
1. Power-Operated Sliding Doors: Not more than 30 lbf required to prevent<br />
stopped door from closing.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,<br />
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes<br />
for automatic entrances. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical<br />
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For automatic entrances. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,<br />
hardware mounting heights, and attachments to other work.<br />
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.<br />
2. Activation and safety devices.<br />
3. Include hardware schedule and indicate hardware types, functions, quantities,<br />
and locations.<br />
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's<br />
standard sizes.<br />
D. Product Certificates: For each type of emergency-exit automatic entrance, from<br />
manufacturer.<br />
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a<br />
qualified testing agency, for automatic entrances.<br />
F. Maintenance Data: For automatic entrances, safety devices, and control systems to<br />
include in maintenance manuals.<br />
G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer with company certificate issued by<br />
AAADM.<br />
B. Source Limitations for Automatic Entrances: Obtain automatic entrances from single<br />
source from single manufacturer.<br />
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in<br />
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and<br />
application.<br />
D. Power-Operated Door Standard: BHMA A156.10.<br />
Project No.: 10145 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084229 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
E. Emergency-Exit Door Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having<br />
jurisdiction for automatic entrances serving as a required means of egress.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings to receive automatic<br />
entrances by field measurements before fabrication.<br />
1.7 COORDINATION<br />
A. Templates: Obtain templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory<br />
prepared for installing automatic entrances, and distribute to parties involved. Check<br />
Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for<br />
locating and installing automatic entrances to comply with indicated requirements.<br />
B. Coordinate hardware with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size,<br />
thickness, hand, function, and finish. Coordinate hardware for automatic entrances<br />
with hardware required for rest of Project.<br />
C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of automatic<br />
entrances with connections to power supplies and access-control system.<br />
1.8 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to<br />
repair or replace components of automatic entrances that fail in materials or<br />
workmanship within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.<br />
b. Faulty operation of operators, controls, and hardware.<br />
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond<br />
normal weathering and use.<br />
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.<br />
2. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.<br />
B. Steel Reinforcement: With manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer<br />
complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00 applied immediately after surface<br />
Project No.: 10145 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
084229 - 3
preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to<br />
recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable<br />
SSPC standard.<br />
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.<br />
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.<br />
C. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276 or ASTM A 666, Type 304.<br />
D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.<br />
E. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcherleveled<br />
standard of flatness, in entrance manufacturer's standard thickness.<br />
F. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."<br />
G. Sealants and Joint Fillers: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."<br />
H. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12<br />
requirements, except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.<br />
I. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,<br />
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.<br />
2.2 SLIDING AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES<br />
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard automatic entrances including<br />
doors, sidelites, framing, headers, carrier assemblies, roller tracks, door operators,<br />
activation and safety devices, and accessories required for a complete installation.<br />
B. Sliding Automatic Entrance:<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide<br />
Stanley, Dura-Glide 3000 or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
a. Biparting-Sliding Units:<br />
1) Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc.; an ASSA ABLOY Group<br />
company.<br />
2) DORMA Automatics; Div. of DORMA Group North America.<br />
3) Stanley Access Technologies; Div. of The Stanley Works.<br />
2. Configuration: Biparting-sliding doors, with two sliding leaves and sidelites on<br />
each side.<br />
a. Traffic Pattern: Two way.<br />
b. Emergency Breakaway Capability: Sliding leaves only.<br />
c. Mounting: Between jambs.<br />
3. Operator Features:<br />
a. Power opening and closing.<br />
Project No.: 10145 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
084229 - 4
. Adjustable opening and closing speeds.<br />
c. Adjustable hold-open time between 0 and 30 seconds.<br />
d. Obstruction recycle.<br />
e. On-off/hold-open switch to control electric power to operator, key<br />
operated.<br />
f. Unlock and activation from remote switch at front desk.<br />
4. Sliding Door Carrier Assemblies and Overhead Roller Tracks: Manufacturer's<br />
standard carrier assembly that allows vertical adjustment; consisting of nylon- or<br />
delrin-covered, ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a continuous roller<br />
track, or ball-bearing-center steel wheels operating on a nylon- or delrincovered,<br />
continuous roller track. Support doors from carrier assembly by<br />
cantilever and pivot assembly.<br />
a. Rollers: Minimum of two ball-bearing roller wheels and two antirise<br />
rollers for each active leaf.<br />
5. Sliding Door Threshold: Manufacturer's standard threshold members and<br />
bottom-guide track system, with stainless-steel, ball-bearing-center roller wheels.<br />
a. Configuration: Saddle-type threshold across door opening and surfacemounted<br />
guide track system at sidelites.<br />
6. Combination Activation and Safety Device: Combination motion/presence<br />
sensor.<br />
7. Activation Device: Motion sensor mounted on each side of door header to<br />
detect pedestrians in activating zone and to open door.<br />
8. Finish: Finish framing, door(s) and header with finish and color matching<br />
adjacent storefront.<br />
2.3 ENTRANCE COMPONENTS<br />
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch<br />
thick and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.<br />
1. Extruded Glazing Stops and Applied Trim: Minimum 0.062-inch wall thickness.<br />
B. Stile and Rail Doors: Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- thick, glazed doors with<br />
minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members.<br />
Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are welded, or incorporate<br />
concealed tie-rods that span full length of top and bottom rails.<br />
1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and<br />
manufacturer's standard preformed gaskets.<br />
2. Stile Design: Wide stile, more than 4-inch nominal width.<br />
3. Rail Design: 5-inch nominal height.<br />
4. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail member for each door; match stile design<br />
and finish.<br />
C. Sidelite(s): Manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- deep sidelite(s) with minimum 0.125inch-<br />
thick, extruded-aluminum tubular stile and rail members matching door design<br />
and finish.<br />
Project No.: 10145 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084229 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
1. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Same materials and design as for stile and rail<br />
door.<br />
2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and<br />
manufacturer's standard preformed gaskets.<br />
3. Muntin Bars: Horizontal tubular rail members for each sidelite; match stile<br />
design.<br />
D. Headers: Fabricated from minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded aluminum and<br />
extending full width of automatic entrance units to conceal door operators and controls.<br />
Provide hinged or removable access panels for service and adjustment of door<br />
operators and controls. Secure panels to prevent unauthorized access.<br />
1. Mounting: Surface mounted.<br />
2. Capacity: Capable of supporting doors up to 175 lb per leaf over spans up to<br />
14 feet without intermediate supports.<br />
E. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with<br />
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.<br />
2.4 HARDWARE<br />
A. General: Provide units in sizes and types recommended by automatic entrance and<br />
hardware manufacturers for entrances and uses indicated. Finish exposed parts to<br />
match door finish.<br />
B. Breakaway Device for Power-Operated Doors: Provide breakaway device that allows<br />
door to swing out in direction of egress to full 90 degrees from any operating position.<br />
Maximum force to open door shall be 50 lbf according to BHMA A156.10. Interrupt<br />
powered operation of door operator while in breakaway mode.<br />
C. Locks: Coordinate with card reader and switch at front desk.<br />
D. Weather Stripping: Manufacturer's standard replaceable components.<br />
1. Sliding Type: AAMA 701, made of wool, polypropylene, or nylon woven pile<br />
with nylon-fabric or aluminum-strip backing.<br />
2.5 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Factory fabricate automatic entrance components to designs, sizes, and<br />
thicknesses indicated and to comply with indicated standards.<br />
1. Form aluminum shapes before finishing.<br />
2. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or<br />
discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed<br />
surfaces by descaling or grinding.<br />
3. Use concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. Where exposed fasteners<br />
are required, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws, finished to<br />
match framing.<br />
a. Where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and<br />
structural movements, wind loads, or vibration, use self-locking devices.<br />
Project No.: 10145 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
084229 - 6
. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.<br />
4. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action<br />
by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape<br />
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.<br />
B. Framing: Provide automatic entrances as prefabricated assemblies. Complete<br />
fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work before shipment<br />
to Project site.<br />
1. Fabricate tubular and channel frame assemblies with manufacturer's standard<br />
welded or mechanical joints. Provide subframes and reinforcement as required<br />
for a complete system to support required loads.<br />
2. Perform fabrication operations in manner that prevents damage to exposed<br />
finish surfaces.<br />
3. Form profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.<br />
4. Provide components with concealed fasteners and anchor and connection<br />
devices.<br />
5. Fabricate components with accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to<br />
produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.<br />
6. Fabricate exterior components to drain water passing joints and condensation<br />
and moisture occurring or migrating within system to the exterior.<br />
7. Provide anchorage and alignment brackets for concealed support of assembly<br />
from building structure.<br />
8. Allow for thermal expansion of exterior units.<br />
C. Doors: Factory fabricated and assembled in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required<br />
to support imposed loads and for installing hardware.<br />
D. Glazing: Fabricate framing with minimum glazing edge clearances for thickness and<br />
type of glazing indicated, according to GANA's "Glazing Manual."<br />
E. Hardware: Factory install hardware to greatest extent possible; remove only as<br />
required for final finishing operation and for delivery to and installation at Project site.<br />
Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before applying finishes.<br />
1. Provide sliding-type weather stripping, mortised into door, at perimeter of doors.<br />
F. Activation and Safety Devices:<br />
1. General: Factory install devices in doors and headers as required by<br />
BHMA A156.10 for type of door and direction of travel.<br />
2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a<br />
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.<br />
Project No.: 10145 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084229 - 7<br />
19 March 2012
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.<br />
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the<br />
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances, header support, and other conditions affecting performance of<br />
automatic entrances.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline<br />
joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints<br />
watertight.<br />
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action<br />
by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape<br />
recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.<br />
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by<br />
painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.<br />
B. Entrances: Install automatic entrances plumb and true in alignment with established<br />
lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members and doors. Anchor<br />
securely in place.<br />
1. Install surface-mounted hardware using concealed fasteners to greatest extent<br />
possible.<br />
2. Set headers, operating brackets, and guides level and true to location with<br />
anchorage for permanent support.<br />
3. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within<br />
framing members, and moisture migrating within system to exterior.<br />
C. Access-Control Devices: Connect access-control devices to access-control system as<br />
specified in Division 08 Section “Guestroom Locking System.”<br />
D. Activation and Safety Devices: Install and adjust devices to provide detection field and<br />
functions indicated.<br />
E. Sealants: Comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to<br />
provide weathertight installation.<br />
1. Setframing members and flashings in full sealant bed.<br />
2. Seal perimeter of framing members with sealant.<br />
F. Signage: Apply signage on both sides of each door as required by referenced door<br />
standards.<br />
Project No.: 10145 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
084229 - 8
G. Wiring within Automatic Entrance Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to<br />
terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's written limitations<br />
on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.<br />
3.3 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust door operators, controls, and hardware for smooth and safe operation and for<br />
weathertight closure; comply with requirements in BHMA A156.10.<br />
B. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts as recommended by<br />
manufacturer.<br />
C. Readjust door operators and controls after repeated operation of completed installation<br />
equivalent to 3 days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware,<br />
operating equipment, and other moving parts.<br />
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Clean glass and metal surfaces promptly after installation. Remove excess glazing and<br />
sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Repair damaged finish to match<br />
original finish.<br />
1. Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" for cleaning and<br />
maintaining glass.<br />
3.5 DEMONSTRATION<br />
A. Engage a certified inspector to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate,<br />
and maintain automatic entrances.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 4229<br />
Project No.: 10145 AUTOMATIC ENTRANCES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 084229 - 9<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
SECTION 08 7100<br />
DOOR HARDWARE<br />
1. Commercial door hardware for the following:<br />
a. Swinging doors.<br />
b. Non-fire-rated sliding doors.<br />
c. Other doors to the extent indicated.<br />
2. Cylinders for doors specified in other Sections.<br />
3. Electrified door hardware.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for astragals provided as part of firerated<br />
labeled assemblies.<br />
2. Division 08 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for entrance<br />
door hardware, except cylinders.<br />
3. Division 08 Section “Guestroom Locking System” for hotel access control<br />
hardware.<br />
4. Division 26 Sections for connections to electrical power system and for lowvoltage<br />
wiring work.<br />
5. Division 28 Sections for connections to building fire alarm system.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions,<br />
dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:<br />
1. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and fire alarm system.<br />
C. Product Certificates: For electrified door hardware, signed by product manufacturer.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance<br />
manuals. Include final hardware and keying schedule.<br />
E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single<br />
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and<br />
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,<br />
for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.<br />
1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall<br />
be established at 40 inches or less above the sill.<br />
C. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a<br />
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended<br />
use.<br />
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware<br />
delivered to Project site.<br />
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door<br />
hardware sets, and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary<br />
fasteners with each item or package.<br />
C. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.<br />
1.5 COORDINATION<br />
A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work<br />
specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of<br />
other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing<br />
door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.<br />
B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door<br />
hardware with connections to power supplies and fire alarm system and detection<br />
devices.<br />
1.6 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to<br />
repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship<br />
within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.<br />
b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.<br />
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond<br />
normal weathering and use.<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion, except as<br />
follows:<br />
a. Exit Devices: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE<br />
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and<br />
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,<br />
and removal and replacement of door hardware.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE<br />
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this<br />
Section and door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.<br />
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and<br />
products equivalent in function and comparable in quality to named products.<br />
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other<br />
distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in "Door Hardware<br />
Sets". Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:<br />
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are<br />
listed for door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum<br />
requirements.<br />
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these<br />
standards and requirements for description, quality, and function.<br />
C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements<br />
apply to product selection:<br />
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,<br />
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,<br />
but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.<br />
2.2 HINGES, GENERAL<br />
A. Hinge Weight: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:<br />
1. Entrance Doors: Heavy-weight hinges.<br />
2. Doors with Closers: Antifriction-bearing hinges.<br />
3. Interior Doors: Standard-weight hinges.<br />
B. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:<br />
1. Exterior Hinges: Stainless steel, with stainless-steel pin.<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
2. Interior Hinges: Steel, with steel pin.<br />
3. Hinges for Fire-Rated Assemblies: Steel, with steel pin.<br />
C. Fasteners: Comply with the following:<br />
2.3 HINGES<br />
1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped<br />
holes.<br />
2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames.<br />
3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors.<br />
4. Screws: Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.<br />
A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1.<br />
B. Available Manufacturers:<br />
1. Hager Companies (HAG).<br />
2. Stanley Commercial Hardware (STH).<br />
2.4 LOCKS AND LATCHES, GENERAL<br />
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements,<br />
comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's<br />
"Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and<br />
Facilities (ADAAG)."<br />
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting<br />
of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.<br />
B. Latches and Locks for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Latches shall<br />
not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key,<br />
tool, or special knowledge for operation.<br />
C. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts required for labeled<br />
fire doors, and as follows:<br />
1. Bored Locks: Minimum 1/2-inch latchbolt throw.<br />
2. Mortise Locks: Minimum 3/4-inch latchbolt throw.<br />
3. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.<br />
D. Backset: 2-3/4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Strikes: Manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latchbolt or lock bolt,<br />
with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, and as<br />
follows:<br />
1. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.<br />
2. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.5.<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES<br />
A. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in door hardware sets<br />
comply with the following:<br />
1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2.<br />
B. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2, Grade 1 unless Grade 2 is indicated; Series 4000.<br />
1. Available Manufacturers:<br />
a. PDQ Manufacturing (PDQ).<br />
b. SARGENT Manf. Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).<br />
c. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).<br />
2.6 AUXILIARY LOCKS AND LATCHES<br />
A. Auxiliary Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.<br />
1. Available Manufacturers:<br />
a. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM).<br />
b. Best Access Systems; Div. of The Stanley Works (BAS).<br />
c. Falcon Lock; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (FAL).<br />
d. PDQ Manufacturing (PDQ).<br />
e. SARGENT Mfg. Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).<br />
f. Schlage Commercial Lock Division; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (SCH).<br />
B. Push-Button Combination Locks: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 for cylindrical locks.<br />
1. Available Manufacturers:<br />
2.7 EXIT DEVICES<br />
a. Kaba Ilco Inc.; a Kaba Group company (KAB).<br />
A. Exit Devices: BHMA A156.3, Grade 1.<br />
B. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating<br />
devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S.<br />
Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities<br />
Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."<br />
1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting<br />
of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf.<br />
C. Exit Devices for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Exit devices shall not<br />
require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks shall not require use of a key, tool,<br />
or special knowledge for operation.<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to<br />
authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to<br />
UL 305.<br />
E. Fire Exit Devices: Devices complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a<br />
testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and<br />
panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.<br />
F. Outside Trim: Lever with cylinder; material and finish to match locksets, unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
G. Available Manufacturers:<br />
1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co. (ARM).<br />
2. DORMA Architectural Hardware (DAH).<br />
3. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (SGT).<br />
4. Von Duprin; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (VD).<br />
2.8 LOCK CYLINDERS<br />
A. Standard Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5, Grade 1.<br />
B. Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze,<br />
stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:<br />
1. Number of Pins: Six.<br />
C. Manufacturer: Same manufacturer as for locks and latches.<br />
2.9 OPERATING TRIM<br />
A. Standard: BHMA A156.6.<br />
B. Materials: Fabricate from stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Available Manufacturers:<br />
1. Hager Companies (HAG).<br />
2. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).<br />
3. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).<br />
4. Trimco (TBM).<br />
2.10 CLOSERS<br />
A. Accessibility Requirements: Where handles, pulls, latches, locks, and other operating<br />
devices are indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S.<br />
Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities<br />
Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
1. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements:<br />
a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to<br />
door.<br />
b. Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
B. Door Closers for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Door closers shall<br />
not require more than 30 lbf to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open<br />
door to minimum required width.<br />
C. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written<br />
recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to<br />
weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to<br />
meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.<br />
D. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1. Provide modern-with-cover type with type of<br />
arm required for closer to be located on non-public side of door, unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Available Manufacturers:<br />
a. DORMA Architectural Hardware (DAH).<br />
b. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (LCN).<br />
c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company<br />
(SGT).<br />
2.11 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS<br />
A. Size: 1-1/2 inches less than door width on push side and 1/2 inch less than door width<br />
on pull side, by height specified in door hardware sets.<br />
B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screws.<br />
C. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled top and 2 sides; fabricated from<br />
the following material:<br />
1. Material: 0.050-inch-thick stainless steel.<br />
2. Available Manufacturers:<br />
a. Hager Companies (HAG).<br />
b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).<br />
c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).<br />
d. Trimco (TBM).<br />
2.12 STOPS AND HOLDERS<br />
A. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1.<br />
1. Provide wall stops for doors unless other type stops are scheduled or indicated.<br />
Floor stops are not permitted. Where wall stops are not appropriate, provide<br />
overhead holders.<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 7<br />
19 March 2012
B. Combination Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1.<br />
C. Electromagnetic Door Holders: BHMA A156.15.<br />
1. Coordinate with fire detectors and interface with fire alarm system for labeled<br />
fire door assemblies.<br />
D. Available Manufacturers:<br />
1. Cal-Royal Products, Inc. (CRP).<br />
2. DORMA Architectural Hardware (DAH).<br />
3. Hager Companies (HAG).<br />
4. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).<br />
5. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company (RIX).<br />
2.13 DOOR GASKETING<br />
A. Standard: BHMA A156.22.<br />
B. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors; and provide<br />
smoke, light, and sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated, scheduled or<br />
required. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and<br />
frame.<br />
2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are<br />
closed.<br />
3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door<br />
is closed.<br />
C. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot of crack length for gasketing other than<br />
for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.<br />
D. Smoke Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by<br />
a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for<br />
smoke-control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.<br />
1. Provide smoke gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled<br />
doors.<br />
E. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and<br />
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,<br />
for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.<br />
1. Test Pressure: After 5 minutes into the test, neutral pressure level in furnace shall<br />
be established at 40 inches or less above the sill.<br />
F. Sound Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting<br />
agency, for sound rating of 30, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408. Provide<br />
evidence that this STC, as well as any requirements for smoke gasketing, can be<br />
maintained under industry allowable tolerances for warp (AWI) and plumb (SDI).<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 8<br />
19 March 2012
G. Gasketing Materials: ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.<br />
H. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Provide a self-adhesive seal at the meeting stiles where an<br />
astragal is not permitted due to the operation of hardware or by code restrictions.<br />
I. Door Bottoms: Provide fully adjustable cap sweep door bottom for interior doors where<br />
designated. Where an undercut is required for HVAC design, provide product that<br />
allows air to pass but still blocks light and offers sound attenuation. Provide brush<br />
sweep door bottom with rain drip for exterior doors.<br />
J. Available Manufacturers:<br />
1. Door and Hardware Systems, Inc. (DHS).<br />
2. Hager Companies (HAG).<br />
3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).<br />
2.14 THRESHOLDS<br />
A. Standard: BHMA A156.21.<br />
B. Accessibility Requirements: Where thresholds are indicated to comply with accessibility<br />
requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance<br />
Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings<br />
and Facilities (ADAAG)."<br />
C. Thresholds for Means of Egress Doors: Comply with NFPA 101. Maximum 1/2 inch<br />
high.<br />
D. Thresholds for Guestroom Doors: Solid color PVC (or equal material) that complies<br />
with ASTM E 648 Class 1 Flammability requirements.<br />
E. Available Manufacturers:<br />
1. Door and Hardware Systems, Inc. (DHS).<br />
2. Hager Companies (HAG).<br />
3. Pemko Manufacturing Co. (PEM).<br />
2.15 SLIDING AND FOLDING DOOR HARDWARE<br />
A. General: BHMA A156.14; consisting of complete sets including rails, hangers,<br />
supports, bumpers, floor guides, and accessories indicated.<br />
B. Bypassing Sliding Door Hardware: Rated for doors weighing up to 75 lb.<br />
2.16 MISCELLANEOUS DOOR HARDWARE<br />
A. Standard: BHMA A156.16.<br />
B. Door Guard: Solid bar door guard with edge guard. Hinged bar 4-3/4 inch length,<br />
can be positioned 180 degrees away from the door when not in use.<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 9<br />
19 March 2012
C. Door Viewer: 200 degree door viewer, permits one-way observation.<br />
D. Rain Drip Cap: 2-1/2 inch overhead drip guard.<br />
E. Knox Box: Hardened steel plate recessed mount lock box. Provide model as required<br />
by local Fire Department, in quantity and locations as directed by the Fire Department.<br />
F. Available Manufacturers:<br />
2.17 FINISHES<br />
a. Hager Companies (HAG).<br />
b. IVES Hardware; an Ingersoll-Rand Company (IVS).<br />
c. Knox Company (KNX).<br />
d. Rockwood Manufacturing Company (RM).<br />
e. Stanley Commercial Hardware; Div. of The Stanley Works (STH).<br />
f. Trimco (TBM).<br />
A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.<br />
1. US26D Satin Chrome, unless otherwise noted.<br />
2. The finish on all hardware must be the same, including hinges.<br />
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a<br />
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 HARDWARE SCHEDULE<br />
A. Manufacturers:<br />
1. Door and Hardware Systems, Inc. DHS<br />
2. IVES Hardware IVS<br />
3. Schlage SCH<br />
4. Falcon FAL<br />
5. Knox Company KNX<br />
6. Kaba Ilco, Inc. KAB<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 1<br />
Guestroom Entry Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Spring Hinges US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer Alum<br />
1 Securing Devices Card Lockset See Section 08720 US26D<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket “Cush-N-Seal” DHS #105 Dark Brown<br />
1 Door Bottom “Cap Sweep” DHS #CS Dark Brown<br />
1 Threshold “Fire Threshold” DHS #FT2.75 Black<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 10<br />
19 March 2012
1 Accessories Door Guard IVS #482 US26D<br />
1* Miscellaneous Items Door Viewer Chrome<br />
* Provide 2 door viewers at accessible guestrooms.<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 2<br />
Guestroom Bathroom and Bedroom Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Privacy Lockset US26D<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 3<br />
Guestroom Connecting Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
4 Hanging Devices Spring Hinges US26D<br />
2 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
2 Securing Devices Exit Latch SCH #AL25D US26D<br />
2 Securing Devices Deadbolt FAL #D-861M US26D<br />
2 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
2 Frame Seal Gasket “Cush-N-Seal” DHS #105 Dark Brown<br />
2 Door Bottom “Cap Sweep” DHS #CS Dark Brown<br />
2 Accessories Door Guard IVS #482 US26D<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 4<br />
Sliding Closet Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
1 set Sliding Door Hardware 9702 Series Hager US26D<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 5<br />
Interior Stair Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Fire Exit Device US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer Alum<br />
1 Protective Trim Kick Plate – 8 inch US32D<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket “Cush-N-Seal” DHS #105 Dark Brown<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 11<br />
19 March 2012
Door Hardware Set No. 6<br />
Exterior Stair Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US32D<br />
1 Securing Devices Exit Device – no trim US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer w/stop Alum<br />
1 Protective Trim Kick Plate – 8 inch US32D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket Weatherstripping<br />
1 Door Bottom Brush Sweep w/rain drip Alum<br />
1 Threshold Thermal Barrier Saddle Alum<br />
1 Miscellaneous Items Rain Drip Cap Alum<br />
1 Miscellaneous Items Knox Box KNX<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 7<br />
Exterior Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
1 Miscellaneous Items Knox Box KNX<br />
Balance of hardware by door supplier.<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 8<br />
Vestibule Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
1 Securing Devices Card Reader See Section 087200<br />
1 Securing Devices Remote Release Switch Door Supplier<br />
Balance of hardware by door supplier.<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 9<br />
Typical Public Exit Exterior Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
1 Securing Devices Exit Device US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Card Reader See Section 087200<br />
Balance of hardware by door supplier.<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 10<br />
Typical Exterior Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US32D<br />
1 Securing Devices Storeroom Lockset US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer w/stop Alum<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket Weatherstripping<br />
1 Door Bottom Brush Sweep w/rain drip Alum<br />
1 Threshold Thermal Barrier Saddle Alum<br />
1 Miscellaneous Rain Drip Cap Alum<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 12<br />
19 March 2012
Door Hardware Set No. 11<br />
Locked Storage, Mechanical, Elev. Equip., Pantry, Linen<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Storeroom Lockset US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer Alum<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
1 * Door Bottom “Cap Sweep” DHS #CS Dark Brown<br />
1 * Threshold Transition Strip DHS #HS2.75 Black<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket Perimeter Gasket<br />
* Provide Door Bottom and Transition Strip at Elevator Equipment and Maintenance Rooms<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 12<br />
Electrical Room<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Exit Device US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer Alum<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket Perimeter Gasket<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 13<br />
Unlocked Storage, Breakroom, Dryer, Meeting Room Closets<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Passage Latch US26D<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 14<br />
Registration, Admin. Area<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Key Pad Lock KAB Simplex L1000 US26D<br />
Series<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer Alum<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket Perimeter Gasket<br />
1 Miscellaneous Items Door Viewer Chrome<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 15<br />
Public Restroom Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Operating Trim Pull Plate US32D<br />
1 Operating Trim Push Plate US32D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer US26D<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 13<br />
19 March 2012
1 Protective Trim Units Kick Plate – 8 inch US32D<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket “Cush-N-Seal” DHS #105 Dark Brown<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 16<br />
Office Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Entry Lockset US26D<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 17<br />
Meeting Room Doors - single<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Exit Device US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer US26D<br />
1 Protective Trim Units Kick Plate – 8 inch US32D<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket “Cush-N-Seal” DHS #105 Dark Brown<br />
1 Door Bottom “Cap Sweep” DHS #CS Dark Brown<br />
1 Miscellaneous Items Door Viewer Chrome<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 18<br />
Unlocked Storage w/closer<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Passage Latch US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer Alum<br />
1 Protective Trim Units Kick Plate – 8 inch US32D<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 19<br />
Laundry Room<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
4 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Storeroom Lockset US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer Alum<br />
2 Protective Trim Units Armor Plates – 36 inch US32D<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket “Cush-N-Seal” DHS #105 Dark Brown<br />
1 Door Bottom “Cap Sweep” DHS #CS Dark Brown<br />
1 Threshold Transition Strip DHS #HS2.75 Black<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 14<br />
19 March 2012
Door Hardware Set No. 20<br />
Linen Chute Termination Room<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
4 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Passage Latch US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer w/stop Alum<br />
1 Protective Trim Units Armor Plate – 36 inch US32D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket Perimeter Gasket<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 21<br />
Employee Restroom<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Privacy Lockset US26D<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 22<br />
Exercise Room , Business Center<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Card Lockset- no deadbolt See Section 087200 US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer Alum<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket Perimeter Gasket<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 22<br />
Pool or Pool Vestibule<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
1 Securing Devices Exit Device See Section 087200<br />
1 Securing Devices Card Reader See Section 087200<br />
1 Threshold Transition Strip DHS #HS2.75 Black<br />
Balance of hardware by door supplier.<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 24<br />
Pool Equipment Room<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US32D<br />
1 Securing Devices Storeroom Lockset US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer SRI<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket “Cush-N-Seal” DHS #105 Dark Brown<br />
1 Door Bottom “Cap Sweep” DHS #CS Dark Brown<br />
1 Threshold Transition Strip DHS #HS2.75 Black<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 15<br />
19 March 2012
Door Hardware Set No. 25<br />
Pool Public Restroom<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US32D<br />
1 Securing Devices Privacy Lockset US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer SRI<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 26<br />
Guest Laundry<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Card Lock – no deadbolt See Section 087200 US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer Alum<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket “Cush-N-Seal” DHS #105 Dark Brown<br />
1 Door Bottom “Cap Sweep” DHS #CS Dark Brown<br />
1 Threshold Transition Strip DHS #HS2.75 Black<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 30<br />
Pool Equipment Storage Door<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
3 Hanging Devices Hinges US32D<br />
1 Securing Devices Storeroom Lockset US26D<br />
1 Closing Devices Surface Closer SRI<br />
1 Protective Trim Units Kickplate – 8 inch US32D<br />
1 Stops and Holders Wall Stop US26D<br />
1 Frame Seal Gasket “Cush-N-Seal” DHS #105 Dark Brown<br />
Door Hardware Set No. 31<br />
Mechanical Room Doors<br />
No. Item Description Manufacturer Finish<br />
6 Hanging Devices Hinges US32D<br />
1 Securing Devices Storeroom Lockset US26D<br />
1 Securing Devices Flush Bolts US32D<br />
2 Closing Devices Surface Closer w/holder Alum<br />
1 Miscellaneous Astragal<br />
1 Miscellaneous Coordinator<br />
END OF SECTION 08 7100<br />
Project No.: 10145 DOOR HARDWARE<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087100 - 16<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 08 7200<br />
GUESTROOM LOCKING SYSTEM<br />
A. This Section includes guestroom locks, exit latch retraction bar, cards, encoders,<br />
computers and hard-wired stand-alone card readers to provide a complete locking<br />
system.<br />
1. See Division 8 Section “Door Hardware” for all other hardware items.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each product specified.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include details of installation, wiring diagrams, and attachments to<br />
other Work.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of<br />
the following:<br />
1. Onity (TESA).<br />
2. ASI (CISA).<br />
3. Kaba Ilco.<br />
4. Safok.<br />
5. Assa Abloy Hospitality.<br />
6. Hotel Resource Group.<br />
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Provide electronic lock system complete with the following components:<br />
1. Mortise lockset, Grade 1 or 2L, ANSI 15613, Series 1000.<br />
2. Deadbolt with a hardened steel insert with a minimum throw of 1 inch.<br />
3. Latch bolt, deadlocking type with a two-piece anti-friction mechanism and a<br />
minimum throw of ¾ inch.<br />
4. Occupancy indicator.<br />
5. Re-key after each guest use.<br />
6. Encoded card key<br />
7. Master key and emergency master key functions.<br />
8. Audit/interrogation feature.<br />
9. Back-up battery power.<br />
Project No.: 10145 GUESTROOM LOCKING SYSTEM<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087200 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
10. Latch bolt operated by inside lever at all times.<br />
11. When deadbolt is projected, all keys except emergency keys must be<br />
inoperable.<br />
12. Emergency key also acts as a lockout key.<br />
13. Inside lever must retract the latch bolt and deadbolt simultaneously.<br />
B. Finish: US26D Satin Chrome.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSPECTION<br />
A. Installer shall inspect doors and areas where equipment is to be applied and notify in<br />
writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with installation until<br />
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions and recommendations for installation<br />
of system components.<br />
B. Install electronic lock units at the following locations and as directed:<br />
1. Guestroom entry doors.<br />
2. Guest use areas.<br />
3. Back of house areas, as indicated.<br />
4. Entry doors, as indicated.<br />
C. Adjust operation of units in place to ensure proper latching and locking.<br />
3.3 DEMONSTRATION<br />
A. Provide instruction to Owner’s personnel to ensure that the system is operated<br />
properly. This training shall be accomplished before owner’s personnel are allowed to<br />
operate the system, and shall occur at project site.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 7200<br />
Project No.: 10145 GUESTROOM LOCKING SYSTEM<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 087200 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 08 8000<br />
GLAZING<br />
A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including<br />
those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference<br />
to this Section:<br />
1. Doors.<br />
2. Glazed entrances.<br />
3. Interior borrowed lites.<br />
4. Storefront framing.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 08 Section "Mirrors."<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass,<br />
or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.<br />
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to<br />
ASTM C 1036.<br />
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air<br />
or a specified gas.<br />
D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is<br />
attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage<br />
and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's<br />
written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or<br />
film on interior surfaces of glass.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement<br />
and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass<br />
breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and<br />
installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight;<br />
deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.<br />
B. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from<br />
the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on<br />
glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on<br />
Project No.: 10145 GLAZING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 088000 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat<br />
loss.<br />
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material<br />
surfaces.<br />
C. All glazing shall meet the requirements of AAMA Specification 603-85.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.<br />
B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass<br />
and of 12-inch- long Samples for sealants. Install sealant Samples between two strips<br />
of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.<br />
C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying<br />
that products furnished comply with requirements.<br />
D. Qualification Data: For installers.<br />
E. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one<br />
source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.<br />
B. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with<br />
NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable<br />
to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing<br />
according to NFPA 252.<br />
C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product<br />
manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are<br />
indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this<br />
Section or in referenced standards.<br />
1. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "Glazing Guidelines<br />
for Sealed Insulating Glass Units."<br />
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as<br />
needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation,<br />
temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.<br />
B. For insulating-glass units that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply<br />
with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing<br />
to avoid hermetic seal ruptures.<br />
Project No.: 10145 GLAZING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 088000 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate<br />
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers<br />
and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other<br />
causes.<br />
1.8 WARRANTY<br />
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form,<br />
made out to Owner and signed by insulating-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace<br />
insulating-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the<br />
nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.<br />
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS<br />
A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent flat glass), Quality-Q3; of<br />
class indicated.<br />
1. Ultra-Clear (Low-Iron) Float Glass: Class I (clear); with a minimum 91 percent<br />
visible light transmission and a minimum solar heat gain coefficient of 0.87.<br />
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3;<br />
of class, kind, and condition indicated.<br />
1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed float glass<br />
where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of<br />
individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in<br />
Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.<br />
2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.<br />
3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other<br />
uncoated glass).<br />
4. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS<br />
(heat-strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated.<br />
C. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of<br />
glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for<br />
Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-<br />
Glass Units" Article.<br />
1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for<br />
insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are<br />
measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.<br />
2. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:<br />
a. Manufacturer's standard sealants.<br />
Project No.: 10145 GLAZING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 088000 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
3. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and<br />
construction.<br />
2.2 FIRE-RATED GLAZING PRODUCTS<br />
A. Monolithic Ceramic Glazing Material: Proprietary product in the form of clear flat<br />
sheets of 3/16-inch nominal thickness weighing 2.5 lb/sq. ft., and as follows:<br />
1. Fire-Protection Rating: As indicated for the fire window in which glazing material<br />
is installed, and permanently labeled by a testing and inspecting agency<br />
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
2. Product: "Standard FireLite" (unpolished on both surfaces) by Nippon Electric<br />
Glass Co., Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products.<br />
2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS<br />
A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following<br />
requirements:<br />
1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and<br />
with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of<br />
insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of<br />
service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on<br />
testing and field experience.<br />
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for<br />
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions<br />
existing at time of installation.<br />
B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements<br />
indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those<br />
referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to<br />
exposure and joint substrates.<br />
C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test<br />
assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating.<br />
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced<br />
glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials<br />
for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces<br />
contacted in installation.<br />
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket<br />
manufacturer.<br />
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85,<br />
plus or minus 5.<br />
Project No.: 10145 GLAZING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 088000 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer<br />
hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation<br />
indicated.<br />
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement<br />
(side walking).<br />
F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test<br />
assembly to obtain fire-resistance rating.<br />
2.5 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS<br />
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with<br />
edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with<br />
written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to<br />
comply with system performance requirements.<br />
2.6 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS<br />
A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units: Class 1 (clear) Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.<br />
1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.<br />
2.7 INSULATING-GLASS UNITS<br />
A. Clear Insulating-Glass Units:<br />
1. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: As indicated.<br />
2. Interspace Content: Air.<br />
3. Outdoor Lite: Class 1 (clear) float glass.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:<br />
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness,<br />
and offsets at corners.<br />
2. Presence and functioning of weep system.<br />
3. Minimum required face or edge clearances.<br />
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
Project No.: 10145 GLAZING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 088000 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately<br />
before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.<br />
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,<br />
and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated,<br />
including those in referenced glazing publications.<br />
B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged<br />
glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass<br />
with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and<br />
impair performance and appearance.<br />
C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined<br />
by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.<br />
D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing<br />
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course<br />
of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.<br />
E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass<br />
lites.<br />
F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as<br />
follows:<br />
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of<br />
glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances,<br />
unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to<br />
maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance<br />
requirements.<br />
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to<br />
sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final<br />
compressed thickness of tape.<br />
G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving<br />
sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and<br />
according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.<br />
H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar<br />
characteristics.<br />
I. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner<br />
recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal<br />
corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.<br />
Project No.: 10145 GLAZING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 088000 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed<br />
streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface.<br />
Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.<br />
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction<br />
operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating<br />
substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as<br />
recommended by glass manufacturer.<br />
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry<br />
surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for<br />
buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing<br />
by glass manufacturer.<br />
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is<br />
damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.<br />
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days<br />
before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.<br />
Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 8000<br />
Project No.: 10145 GLAZING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 088000 - 7<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 08 8300<br />
MIRRORS<br />
A. This Section includes the following types of silvered flat glass mirrors.<br />
1. Annealed monolithic glass mirrors.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 10 Section "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for metal-framed mirrors.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Deterioration of Mirrors: Defects developed from normal use that are attributable to<br />
the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices<br />
for maintaining and cleaning mirrors contrary to mirror manufacturer's written<br />
instructions. Defects include discoloration, black spots, and clouding of the silver film.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Provide mirrors that will not fail under normal usage. Failure includes glass breakage<br />
and deterioration attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For the following:<br />
1. Mirror mastic.<br />
2. Mirror hardware.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include mirror elevations, edge details, mirror hardware, and<br />
attachments to other work.<br />
C. Product Certificates: For each type of mirror and mirror mastic, signed by product<br />
manufacturer.<br />
D. Mirror Mastic Compatibility Test Reports: From mirror manufacturer indicating that<br />
mirror mastic was tested for compatibility and adhesion with mirror backing and<br />
substrates on which mirrors are installed.<br />
E. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.<br />
Project No.: 10145 MIRRORS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 088300 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations for Mirrors: Obtain mirrors from one source for each type of mirror<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Source Limitations for Mirror Glazing Accessories: Obtain mirror glazing accessories<br />
from one source for each type of accessory indicated.<br />
C. Glazing Publications: Comply with the following published recommendations:<br />
1. GANA's "Glazing Manual" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.<br />
Refer to this publication for definitions of glass and glazing terms not otherwise<br />
defined in this Section or in referenced standards.<br />
2. GANA Mirror Division's "Mirrors, Handle with Extreme Care: Tips for the<br />
Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."<br />
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Protect mirrors according to mirror manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to<br />
prevent damage to mirrors from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure<br />
to sun, or other causes.<br />
B. Comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions for shipping, storing, and<br />
handling mirrors as needed to prevent deterioration of silvering, damage to edges, and<br />
abrasion of glass surfaces and applied coatings. Store indoors, protected from<br />
moisture including condensation.<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install mirrors until ambient temperature and<br />
humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy.<br />
1.8 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by<br />
mirror manufacturer agreeing to replace mirrors that deteriorate as defined in<br />
"Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified<br />
warranty period indicated below:<br />
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SILVERED FLAT GLASS MIRROR MATERIALS<br />
A. Clear Glass Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Select Quality.<br />
Project No.: 10145 MIRRORS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 088300 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Type A Shore durometer hardness of 85,<br />
plus or minus 5.<br />
B. Edge Sealer: Coating compatible with glass coating and approved by mirror<br />
manufacturer for use in protecting against silver deterioration at mirrored glass edges.<br />
C. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, produced specifically for setting mirrors<br />
and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with<br />
glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed.<br />
2.3 MIRROR HARDWARE<br />
A. Top and Bottom Aluminum J-Channels: Aluminum extrusions with a return deep<br />
enough to produce a glazing channel to accommodate mirrors of thickness indicated<br />
and in lengths required to cover bottom and top edges of each mirror in a single piece.<br />
1. Bottom Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 3/8<br />
and 7/8 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch.<br />
2. Top Trim: J-channels formed with front leg and back leg not less than 5/8 and<br />
1 inch in height, respectively, and a thickness of not less than 0.04 inch.<br />
B. Fasteners: Fabricated of same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal and matching it<br />
in finished color and texture where fasteners are exposed.<br />
C. Anchors and Inserts: Provide devices as required for mirror hardware installation.<br />
Provide toothed or lead-shield expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors.<br />
Provide galvanized anchors and inserts for applications on inside face of exterior walls<br />
and where indicated.<br />
2.4 FABRICATION<br />
A. Mirror Sizes: To suit Project conditions, cut mirrors to final sizes and shapes.<br />
B. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts for notches and holes in mirrors without marring visible<br />
surfaces. Locate and size cutouts so they fit closely around penetrations in mirrors.<br />
C. Mirror Edge Treatment: Rounded polished edge.<br />
1. Seal edges of mirrors after edge treatment to prevent chemical or atmospheric<br />
penetration of glass coating.<br />
2. Require mirror manufacturer to perform edge treatment and sealing in factory<br />
immediately after cutting to final sizes.<br />
Project No.: 10145 MIRRORS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 088300 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, over which mirrors are to be mounted, with Installer present, for<br />
compliance with installation tolerances, substrate preparation, and other conditions<br />
affecting performance.<br />
1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility of<br />
mirror mastic with existing finishes or primers.<br />
2. Proceed with mirror installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been<br />
corrected and surfaces are dry.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Comply with mastic manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparation of<br />
substrates, including coating surfaces with mastic manufacturer's special bond coating<br />
where applicable.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install mirrors to comply with mirror manufacturer's written instructions and<br />
with referenced GANA publications. Mount mirrors accurately in place in a manner<br />
that avoids distorting reflected images.<br />
B. Provide a minimum air space of 1/8 inch between back of mirrors and mounting<br />
surface for air circulation between back of mirrors and face of mounting surface.<br />
C. For wall-mounted mirrors, install mirrors with mastic and mirror hardware.<br />
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect mirrors from breakage and contaminating substances resulting from<br />
construction operations.<br />
B. Do not permit edges of mirrors to be exposed to standing water.<br />
C. Maintain environmental conditions that will prevent mirrors from being exposed to<br />
moisture from condensation or other sources for continuous periods of time.<br />
END OF SECTION 08 8300<br />
Project No.: 10145 MIRRORS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 088300 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Fixed, aluminum louvers.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
SECTION 08 9000<br />
LOUVERS AND VENTS<br />
1. Division 23 Sections for louvers that are a part of mechanical equipment.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501<br />
apply to this Section unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.<br />
B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are<br />
horizontal.<br />
C. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain<br />
it to channels in jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from<br />
opening.<br />
D. Storm-Resistant Louver: Louver that provides specified wind-driven rain performance,<br />
as determined by testing according to AMCA 500-L.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as<br />
demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except<br />
for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing<br />
specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections,<br />
details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles,<br />
angles, and spacing.<br />
Project No.: 10145 LOUVERS AND VENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 089000 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing<br />
water intrusion.<br />
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of metal finish required.<br />
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed according<br />
to AMCA 500-L by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a<br />
qualified testing agency, for each type of louver and showing compliance with<br />
performance requirements specified.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single<br />
manufacturer where indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color<br />
finish.<br />
B. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet<br />
Metal Manual" for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements<br />
before fabrication.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6.<br />
B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003 or 5005 with temper as required for<br />
forming, or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish.<br />
C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 319.<br />
D. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.<br />
1. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners.<br />
2. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.<br />
E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.<br />
2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units<br />
as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly<br />
and coordinated installation.<br />
B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing to produce uniform appearance.<br />
Project No.: 10145 LOUVERS AND VENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
089000 - 2
C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with<br />
allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material<br />
tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints.<br />
D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly.<br />
2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS<br />
A. Horizontal Storm-Resistant Louver:<br />
1. Louver Depth: 4 inches.<br />
2. AMCA Seal: Mark units with AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.<br />
2.4 LOUVER SCREENS<br />
A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.<br />
1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face.<br />
2. Screening Type: Bird screening.<br />
2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES<br />
A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film<br />
thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for<br />
cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.<br />
1. Color and Gloss: Custom Color Match Architect's sample.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
Project No.: 10145 LOUVERS AND VENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 089000 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for<br />
installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry<br />
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with<br />
adjacent work.<br />
B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to<br />
screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight<br />
connection.<br />
C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured.<br />
D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers,<br />
as indicated.<br />
E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes<br />
so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in<br />
the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide<br />
new units.<br />
F. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with<br />
concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying<br />
a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets<br />
or nonmetallic flashing.<br />
G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation<br />
progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 07<br />
Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.<br />
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary<br />
covering, to remove fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil<br />
accumulate during construction period.<br />
B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent<br />
not harmful to finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry.<br />
C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence<br />
remains of corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by<br />
Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units.<br />
1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color<br />
and gloss of, and is compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
END OF SECTION 08 9000<br />
LOUVERS AND VENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
089000 - 4
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 09 2116<br />
GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. Section Includes: Gypsum board shaft wall assemblies.<br />
1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each component of gypsum board shaft wall assembly.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide<br />
materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to<br />
ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.<br />
2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. Fire-Resistance Rating: 2 hour.<br />
B. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end<br />
members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.<br />
C. Room-Side Finish: Gypsum board.<br />
D. Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design designation.<br />
2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS<br />
A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints<br />
in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.<br />
B. Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's<br />
proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with paper faces.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may<br />
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. American Gypsum; Shaft Liner.<br />
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC, Subsidiary of Georgia Pacific; ToughRock<br />
Fireguard Shaftliner.<br />
Project No.: 10145 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 09211623 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Fire-Shield Shaftliner.<br />
d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Liner Panel.<br />
C. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board."<br />
2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING<br />
A. Steel Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated,<br />
manufacturer's written installation instructions, and ASTM C 754 other than studspacing<br />
requirements.<br />
B. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure, while maintaining<br />
continuity of fire-rated construction.<br />
C. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not<br />
more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.<br />
D. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 2116<br />
Project No.: 10145 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 09211623 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 09 2216<br />
NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING<br />
A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following<br />
applications:<br />
1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring,<br />
etc.).<br />
2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that<br />
incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction<br />
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an<br />
independent testing agency.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL<br />
A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of<br />
steel products such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer<br />
recycled content is not less than 25 percent.<br />
B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.<br />
1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Steel Stud Manufacturer’s Association members.<br />
2. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal,<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3. Protective Coating: G40 or equivalent per ASTM A 1003, unless otherwise<br />
indicated<br />
2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS<br />
A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch-<br />
diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- diameter wire.<br />
Project No.: 10145 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 092216 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch<br />
diameter.<br />
C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of<br />
0.0538 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.<br />
D. Furring Channels (Furring Members):<br />
1. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645. Depth as indicated on Drawings.<br />
2. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.<br />
2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.<br />
1. Equivalent Minimum Base-Metal Thickness:<br />
a. Typical partition: 0.0179 inch.<br />
b. Partition with ceramic tile: 0.0312 inch.<br />
c. Door openings for ballistic-rated or heavyweight doors: 0.0312 inch.<br />
B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:<br />
1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep<br />
flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction<br />
fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the<br />
top of studs to provide lateral bracing.<br />
2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of<br />
finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure<br />
above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to<br />
accommodate depth of studs.<br />
C. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.027 inch or as indicated on Drawings..<br />
D. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.<br />
1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch.<br />
2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.<br />
2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS<br />
A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding<br />
power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.<br />
B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:<br />
1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt),<br />
nonperforated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 092216 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener<br />
penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud<br />
size.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754; except comply with framing sizes and spacing<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that<br />
apply to framing installation.<br />
3.2 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS<br />
A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by<br />
building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.<br />
B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:<br />
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects<br />
within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension<br />
system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset<br />
resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective<br />
means.<br />
2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces<br />
hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support<br />
standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members<br />
and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.<br />
3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or<br />
to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and<br />
appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to<br />
deteriorate or otherwise fail.<br />
4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.<br />
3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at<br />
exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.<br />
B. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to<br />
structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are<br />
indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts<br />
penetrating partitions above ceiling.<br />
1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports,<br />
install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of<br />
finished assemblies.<br />
Project No.: 10145 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 092216 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door<br />
frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb<br />
studs.<br />
a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum<br />
1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint<br />
in finished assembly.<br />
c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of<br />
overhead structure.<br />
3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same<br />
as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below<br />
sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.<br />
4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistancerated<br />
assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions<br />
continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 2216<br />
Project No.: 10145 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 092216 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 09 2400<br />
CEMENT PLASTERING<br />
A. Section Includes: Exterior fiberglass reinforced portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on<br />
metal lath.<br />
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including<br />
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.<br />
C. Samples: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated.<br />
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to<br />
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.<br />
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time<br />
of Substantial Completion.<br />
1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.<br />
B. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for<br />
environmental conditions for applying finishes.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 METAL LATH<br />
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized<br />
zinc coating.<br />
1. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring,<br />
B. Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I, Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CEMENT PLASTERING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 092400 - 1<br />
10 May 2012
2.02 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with<br />
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.<br />
B. Metal Accessories:<br />
1. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet,<br />
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating.<br />
2. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip<br />
galvanized zinc coating.<br />
3. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with<br />
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.<br />
4. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.<br />
5. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; squareedged<br />
style; with expanded flanges.<br />
6. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piecetype,<br />
folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with<br />
perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.<br />
2.03 PLASTER MIXES<br />
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.<br />
1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least<br />
two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber<br />
quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials.<br />
B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat<br />
plasterwork.<br />
C. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 PREPARATION<br />
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful<br />
effects caused by plastering.<br />
B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction<br />
capability required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.<br />
3.02 INSTALLING METAL LATH<br />
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.<br />
Project No.: 10145 CEMENT PLASTERING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 092400 - 2<br />
10 May 2012
3.03 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations as required or indicated on Drawings.<br />
B. Reinforcement for External Corners:<br />
1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.<br />
C. Control Joints: Install control joints in specific locations approved by Architect for visual<br />
effect as follows:<br />
1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum<br />
sizes:<br />
a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft..<br />
b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft.<br />
2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c.<br />
3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios<br />
of not greater than 2-1/2:1.<br />
4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.<br />
5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped<br />
areas (panels) and to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the<br />
dimension change.<br />
3.04 PLASTER APPLICATION<br />
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.<br />
B. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat<br />
plasterwork; 3/4-inch thickness.<br />
C. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and<br />
sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
3.05 PLASTER REPAIRS<br />
A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check<br />
cracking, dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to<br />
substrate has failed.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 2400<br />
Project No.: 10145 CEMENT PLASTERING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 092400 - 3<br />
10 May 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Interior gypsum board.<br />
2. Tile backing panels.<br />
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
SECTION 09 2900<br />
GYPSUM BOARD<br />
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials<br />
and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119<br />
by an independent testing agency.<br />
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction<br />
identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified<br />
according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.<br />
2.02 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
1. American Gypsum.<br />
2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.<br />
3. Lafarge North America Inc.<br />
4. National Gypsum Company.<br />
5. Temple-Inland.<br />
6. USG Corporation.<br />
B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.<br />
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.<br />
2. Long Edges: Tapered.<br />
Project No.: 10145 GYPSUM BOARD<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 092900 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
C. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and<br />
to be more flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.<br />
1. Thickness: 1/4 inch.<br />
2. Long Edges: Tapered.<br />
D. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.<br />
1. Thickness: 1/2 inch.<br />
2. Long Edges: Tapered.<br />
E. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture-<br />
and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.<br />
1. Core: As indicated.<br />
2. Long Edges: Tapered.<br />
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.<br />
2.03 TILE BACKING PANELS<br />
A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's<br />
standard edges.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer.<br />
b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.<br />
2. Core: As indicated on Drawings.<br />
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.<br />
B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's<br />
standard edges.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:<br />
a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement BackerBoard.<br />
b. National Gypsum Company, Permabase Cement Board.<br />
c. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.<br />
2. Thickness: As indicated.<br />
3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.<br />
2.04 TRIM ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.<br />
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paperfaced<br />
galvanized steel sheet.<br />
Project No.: 10145 GYPSUM BOARD<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 092900 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
2.05 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.<br />
B. Joint Tape:<br />
1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.<br />
2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.<br />
C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is<br />
compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.<br />
2.06 AUXILIARY MATERIALS<br />
A. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).<br />
C. Acoustical Joint Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound<br />
transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according<br />
to ASTM E 90.<br />
D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation."<br />
E. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation."<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS<br />
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.<br />
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and<br />
mold damaged.<br />
C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural<br />
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and<br />
trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges<br />
and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.<br />
D. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at<br />
openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical<br />
sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with<br />
ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and<br />
closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing<br />
partitions above acoustical ceilings.<br />
E. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are<br />
readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.<br />
Project No.: 10145 GYPSUM BOARD<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 092900 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
F. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners<br />
used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.<br />
2. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific<br />
locations approved by Architect for visual effect.<br />
G. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.<br />
H. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as<br />
not intended to receive tape.<br />
I. Curved Surfaces: Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to<br />
extent possible, across curved surface plus 12-inch- long straight sections at ends of curves<br />
and tangent to them.<br />
J. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to<br />
ASTM C 840:<br />
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.<br />
2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile.<br />
3. Level 3: Where indicated on Drawings.<br />
4. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.<br />
5. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.<br />
K. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly<br />
remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or<br />
otherwise damaged during drywall application.<br />
L. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 2900<br />
Project No.: 10145 GYPSUM BOARD<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 092900 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Ceramic tile.<br />
2. Stone thresholds.<br />
3. Crack isolation membrane.<br />
4. Metal edge strips.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
SECTION 09 3000<br />
TILING<br />
1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for cementitious tile backer units.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in<br />
ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.<br />
B. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.<br />
C. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products<br />
with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028:<br />
Minimum 0.6.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include<br />
Samples of accessories involving color selection.<br />
C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.<br />
D. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TILING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 093000 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source<br />
or producer.<br />
1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of<br />
consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous<br />
area.<br />
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform<br />
quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and<br />
each aggregate from one source or producer.<br />
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified<br />
in this Section from a single manufacturer for each product:<br />
1. Stone thresholds.<br />
2. Waterproof membrane.<br />
3. Crack isolation membrane.<br />
4. Metal edge strips.<br />
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and<br />
labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling<br />
tile packages.<br />
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry<br />
location.<br />
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained<br />
and contamination can be avoided.<br />
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.<br />
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent<br />
coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact<br />
bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete<br />
and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels<br />
indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products<br />
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with<br />
labels describing contents.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TILING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 093000 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of<br />
amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.<br />
2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each<br />
type, composition, and color indicated.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL<br />
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,<br />
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.<br />
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with<br />
ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards<br />
referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and<br />
other requirements specified.<br />
C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory<br />
and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those<br />
taken from other packages and match approved Samples.<br />
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS<br />
A. Tile products as indicated in Interior Design documents.<br />
B. Threshold: Sealed marble threshold, 2-inch minimum width, not to exceed 5/16-inch<br />
height above bathroom floor level.<br />
2.3 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE<br />
A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.12 for<br />
standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application<br />
indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.<br />
2.4 SETTING MATERIALS<br />
A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.<br />
B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.<br />
2.5 GROUT MATERIALS<br />
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and<br />
white or colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TILING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 093000 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
B. Standard Cement Grout: ANSI A118.6.<br />
C. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.<br />
2.6 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS<br />
A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that<br />
comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in<br />
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."<br />
1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated<br />
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
2. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant<br />
manufacturer.<br />
B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining<br />
sealed joints unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS;<br />
Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated,<br />
O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other<br />
nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and<br />
extreme temperatures.<br />
D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P;<br />
Class 25; Uses T, M, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O.<br />
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland<br />
cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting<br />
materials for installations indicated.<br />
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness,<br />
metallic or combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for<br />
flooring applications; white zinc alloy exposed-edge material.<br />
C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming<br />
tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated<br />
by tile and grout manufacturers.<br />
D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does<br />
not change color or appearance of grout.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TILING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 093000 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer<br />
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other<br />
conditions affecting performance of installed tile.<br />
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are<br />
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other<br />
substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness<br />
tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.<br />
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set<br />
mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations<br />
indicated.<br />
a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been<br />
mechanically scarified.<br />
b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding<br />
or grinding.<br />
3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and<br />
mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been<br />
completed.<br />
4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint<br />
locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with<br />
adhesives or thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound<br />
specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.<br />
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced<br />
mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward<br />
drains.<br />
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended<br />
and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as<br />
those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory<br />
blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.<br />
D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to<br />
prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with<br />
continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile<br />
surfaces.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TILING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 093000 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation<br />
methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108<br />
Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA<br />
installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting<br />
and grouting materials used.<br />
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile<br />
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage:<br />
a. Exterior tile floors.<br />
b. Tile floors in wet areas.<br />
c. Tile swimming pool decks.<br />
d. Tile floors in laundries.<br />
e. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.<br />
f. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.<br />
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form<br />
complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work<br />
neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint<br />
alignments.<br />
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without<br />
marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or builtin<br />
items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures,<br />
and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.<br />
D. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:<br />
1. Ceramic Mosaic Tile: 1/16 inch.<br />
2. Quarry Tile: 1/4 inch.<br />
3. Glazed Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.<br />
4. Decorative Thin Wall Tile: 1/16 inch.<br />
E. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions<br />
indicated.<br />
F. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including<br />
control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during<br />
installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after<br />
installing tiles.<br />
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly<br />
above them.<br />
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with execution requirements in<br />
Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."<br />
G. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
H. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or<br />
other flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TILING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 093000 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
I. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to<br />
grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated<br />
grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.<br />
3.4 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's<br />
written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to<br />
substrate.<br />
B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane<br />
has cured.<br />
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTING<br />
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so<br />
they are free of foreign matter.<br />
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.<br />
2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout<br />
manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation.<br />
Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after<br />
determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other<br />
surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects<br />
of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.<br />
3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating<br />
manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and<br />
remove coating to prevent drain clogging.<br />
B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction<br />
period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer,<br />
apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.<br />
C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is<br />
completed.<br />
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner<br />
from tile surfaces.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 3000<br />
Project No.: 10145 TILING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 093000 - 7<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 09 5113<br />
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS<br />
A. This Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. AC: Articulation Class.<br />
B. CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.<br />
C. LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.<br />
D. NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish<br />
required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below.<br />
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern,<br />
and texture.<br />
2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long<br />
Samples of each type, finish, and color.<br />
C. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting<br />
suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer.<br />
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with<br />
the following requirements:<br />
1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide acoustical panels with the following<br />
surface-burning characteristics complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A<br />
materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84:<br />
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.<br />
Project No.: 10145 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 095113 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project<br />
site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned<br />
space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity,<br />
temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.<br />
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a<br />
stabilized moisture content.<br />
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any<br />
way.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are<br />
enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above<br />
ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained<br />
at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.<br />
1.7 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with<br />
other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light<br />
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.<br />
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are<br />
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing<br />
contents.<br />
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity<br />
installed.<br />
2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to<br />
2.0 percent of quantity installed.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL<br />
A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration<br />
indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types,<br />
patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical<br />
panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits<br />
fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no<br />
Project No.: 10145 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 095113 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and<br />
evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.<br />
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING<br />
A. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern<br />
as follows:<br />
1. As indicated in Interior Design documents; (Public Spaces)<br />
a. Edge/Joint Detail: Angled Tegular.<br />
b. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.<br />
c. Thickness: 3/4 inch.<br />
d. Narrow Grid: 9/16 inch.<br />
2. As indicated in Interior Design documents; (Back of House)<br />
a. Edge/Joint Detail: Square Lay-in.<br />
b. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches.<br />
c. Thickness: 3/4 inch.<br />
d. Standard Grid: 15/16 inch.<br />
3. Type and Form: Type XX, other types; described as high-density, ceramic- and<br />
mineral-base panels with scrubbable finish, resistant to heat, moisture, and<br />
corrosive fumes; Pattern G. (Kitchen and Laundry)<br />
a. Edge/Joint Detail: Square Lay-in.<br />
b. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches.<br />
c. Thickness: 5/8 inch.<br />
d. Aluminum Grid: 15/16 inch.<br />
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL<br />
A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal<br />
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that<br />
comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.<br />
B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for<br />
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating<br />
finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system<br />
indicated.<br />
C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635,<br />
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design<br />
requirements.<br />
D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following<br />
requirements:<br />
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating,<br />
soft temper.<br />
Project No.: 10145 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 095113 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING<br />
A. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners<br />
roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hotdip<br />
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating<br />
designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.<br />
B. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross<br />
runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated,<br />
or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating<br />
designation, with prefinished 9/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges.<br />
C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Aluminum Suspension System: Main and cross<br />
runners roll formed from aluminum sheet, with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide,<br />
aluminum caps on flanges. (Kitchen and Laundry)<br />
2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM<br />
A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if<br />
not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that<br />
comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material,<br />
finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.<br />
1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge<br />
details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and<br />
configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that<br />
forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel<br />
and flange at exposed suspension member.<br />
3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to<br />
diameter required to fit penetration exactly.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which<br />
acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and<br />
anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions<br />
affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.<br />
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been<br />
corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border<br />
widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at<br />
borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.<br />
Project No.: 10145 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
095113 - 4
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic<br />
design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's<br />
"Ceiling Systems Handbook."<br />
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:<br />
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects<br />
within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling<br />
suspension system.<br />
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting<br />
horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.<br />
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces<br />
hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to<br />
support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension<br />
members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices.<br />
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with<br />
a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or<br />
to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for<br />
substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or<br />
elevated temperatures.<br />
5. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing<br />
required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment<br />
of hanger wires.<br />
6. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported<br />
directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more<br />
than 8 inches from ends of each member.<br />
7. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads<br />
within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.<br />
C. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area<br />
and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.<br />
D. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one<br />
another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.<br />
E. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension<br />
system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations<br />
to provide a neat, precise fit.<br />
3.4 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings,<br />
and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for<br />
cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling<br />
components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate<br />
evidence of damage.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 5113<br />
Project No.: 10145 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 095113 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
SECTION 09 6219<br />
DECORATIVE LAMINATE FLOORING<br />
1. High-pressure decorative laminate flooring.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,<br />
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.<br />
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of material indicated.<br />
C. Maintenance Data: For flooring to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
D. Other Informational Submittals:<br />
1. Installation instructions.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Firm experienced in installation or application of systems<br />
similar in complexity to those required for this Project, including specific requirements<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each color, grade, finish, type, and variety of materials and<br />
products from one source.<br />
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver flooring materials in unopened cartons or bundles. Protect flooring from<br />
damage.<br />
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install until spaces are enclosed and<br />
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete,<br />
and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and<br />
humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction<br />
period.<br />
Project No.: 10145 DECORATIVE LAMINATE FLOORING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 096219 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.6 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to<br />
repair or replace high-pressure decorative laminate flooring that fail(s) in materials or<br />
workmanship within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with<br />
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
1. Laminate Flooring: Equal to 1 percent of amount installed.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Wilsonart<br />
or Prego Select, or comparable product.<br />
2.2 FINISHES<br />
A. Provide wood grain appearance.<br />
1. Color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.<br />
2. Plank width selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range.<br />
2.3 PERFORMANCE STANDARDS<br />
A. ASTM E662, Smoke Density, Flaming and non-flaming ≤ 450.<br />
B. ASTM E90, Sound Transmission Class: STC ≥ 53.<br />
C. ASTM E492, Impact Insulation Class: IIC ≥ 57.<br />
D. ASTM D2047, Slip Resistance (neolite sole): µ ≥ 0.7.<br />
2.4 CUSHION<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Wilsonart Commercial Cushion; black polyethylene foam with<br />
black polyethylene moisture barrier filled with sound absorbing molecules and fortified<br />
with antimicrobial agent.<br />
Project No.: 10145 DECORATIVE LAMINATE FLOORING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 096219 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances, manufacturer’s requirements and other conditions affecting<br />
performance of the Work.<br />
B. Verify concrete slabs are dry according to ASTM F 1869 with maximum moisture<br />
emission rate of 5 pounds per 1000 SF per 24 hours. Do not install flooring with high<br />
alkaline content.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install flooring planks in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation<br />
instructions.<br />
3.3 PROTECTION<br />
A. Cover installed flooring to protect from damage or during remainder of construction<br />
period. Use heavy kraft-paper or other suitable covering.<br />
B. Maintain flooring in compliance with Manufacturer’s Maintenance Guidelines.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 6219<br />
Project No.: 10145 DECORATIVE LAMINATE FLOORING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 096219 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Resilient base.<br />
2. Resilient molding accessories.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
SECTION 09 6513<br />
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES<br />
1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring" for resilient floor tile.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's<br />
standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color,<br />
texture, and pattern required.<br />
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces<br />
to receive resilient products.<br />
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range<br />
recommended by manufacturer.<br />
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been<br />
completed.<br />
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with<br />
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof,<br />
of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.<br />
Project No.: 10145 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 096513 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 RESILIENT BASE<br />
A. Products as indicated on Interior Design Drawings.<br />
B. Outside Corners: Preformed.<br />
C. Inside Corners: Job formed or preformed.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements<br />
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,<br />
scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion<br />
of resilient products.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 6513<br />
Project No.: 10145 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 096513 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Vinyl composition floor tile.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
SECTION 09 6519<br />
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING<br />
1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer<br />
strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.<br />
1.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with<br />
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
1. Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type,<br />
color, and pattern of floor tile installed.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE<br />
A. As indicated in Interior Design Drawings.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
Project No.: 10145 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 096519 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements<br />
specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions,<br />
scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion<br />
of resilient products.<br />
3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.<br />
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.<br />
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:<br />
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.<br />
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.<br />
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.<br />
C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from<br />
construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of<br />
construction period.<br />
D. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 6519<br />
Project No.: 10145 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 096519 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
SECTION 09 6816<br />
SHEET CARPETING<br />
1. Preparation of Surfaces to Receive Carpeting.<br />
2. Carpet.<br />
a. Furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor.<br />
b. Stretch-in Installation, unless noted otherwise.<br />
3. Carpet cushion.<br />
a. Furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor<br />
4. Accessories, including tack strips, adhesives tapes and all other required<br />
accessories.<br />
5. Transition edges<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type<br />
of substrate:<br />
1. A copy of the manufacturer's printed installation manual shall accompany Bid for<br />
review and approval by the Owner's Representative.<br />
2. Shop Drawings showing layout and seaming diagrams. Indicate pile or pattern<br />
direction and locations and types of edge strips. Indicate columns, doorways,<br />
enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are<br />
required in carpet. Show installation details at special conditions.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years of experience in installation of<br />
commercial carpeting of type, quantity, and installation methods similar to work of this<br />
Section, or can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.<br />
B. Successful vendor shall be responsible for field measurements to determine carpet<br />
layout.<br />
C. The carpet contractor is responsible for reviewing carpet manufacturer's published<br />
installation instructions prior to installation. This includes understanding dye lots,<br />
pattern sequencing, pattern matching and any special instructions. Failure to abide by<br />
the manufacturer's instructions could result in a backcharge to contractor for corrections<br />
to the installation.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHEET CARPETING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 096816 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
D. Contractor is responsible for damages to work performed by others including but not<br />
limited to telephone or television wires placed in front of the tack-strip running the<br />
perimeter of the room.<br />
E. The installation contractor is responsible for verification of quantities. The contractor<br />
shall provide take-offs of all carpet and padding, as required for a complete<br />
installation. No compensation will be allowed to the installation contractor for<br />
materials and labor that may be required to install additional carpeting because of<br />
incorrect quantity takeoffs.<br />
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. General: Comply with the Carpet and Rug Institute's CRI 104, Section 05: "Storage<br />
and Handling”.<br />
B. Do not deliver carpet until areas of building are ready for carpet installation. Provide<br />
protection from loss or damage.<br />
C. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated,<br />
dry area protected from weather, moisture, soilage, extreme temperatures and<br />
humidity. Lay flat, blocked off ground. Maintain minimum temperature of 68 degrees<br />
F. (20 degrees C.) at least three days prior to and during installation in area where<br />
materials are stored. Never stack carpet more than two rolls high or stand up on roll<br />
ends on job site. Do not bend or fold carpet in storing.<br />
D. Carpet shall never be stacked more than five (5) rolls high.<br />
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 07: "Site Conditions”.<br />
B. Do not commence with carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete<br />
and ceilings and overhead work has been tested, approved, and completed.<br />
C. In areas to receive carpet, room temperatures shall be maintained at 65-90 degrees F<br />
and with relative humidity ranging between 20 and 65 percent minimum for 72 hours<br />
prior to, during, and 72 hours following application. Materials shall be conditioned at<br />
application temperature and humidity at least 24 hours prior to application. Provide<br />
sufficient lighting for carpet installation.<br />
D. Contractor shall provide method approved by the Owner's Representative to<br />
mechanically exhaust all spaces to receive carpet to the exterior during installation and<br />
a minimum of 72 continuous hours, or length of time required by the manufacturer or<br />
Owner after installation.<br />
E. Subfloor Moisture Conditions: Before installing carpet Contractor shall verify that<br />
Moisture emission rate of not more than 3 lb/1000 sq. ft./24 hours when tested by<br />
calcium chloride moisture test in compliance with CRI 104, 6.2.1, with subfloor<br />
temperatures not less than 55 deg F, or as recommended by manufacturer.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHEET CARPETING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 096816 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
F. Subfloor Alkalinity Conditions: Before installing carpet Contractor shall verify that a pH<br />
range of 5 to 9 when subfloor is wetted with potable water and pHydrion paper is<br />
applied.<br />
1.6 WARRANTY<br />
A. Stretch-in installation labor shall be guaranteed for one (1) year. Sixty days after<br />
installation, the Subcontractor is to re-stretch all carpet where necessary and as directed<br />
by Owner’s Representative.<br />
B. It is the carpet Contractor’s responsibility to fill out the adhesive manufacturer<br />
warranties. The warranty must be returned to the adhesive manufacturer and a copy<br />
sent to the Contractor’s representative.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 As indicated in Finish Schedule on Interior Design Drawings.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for<br />
maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other<br />
conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions<br />
are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified.<br />
B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the<br />
following:<br />
1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners,<br />
and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine<br />
adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and<br />
moisture tests recommended by the following:<br />
a. Carpet manufacturer<br />
b. Carpet cushion manufacturer<br />
2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section<br />
“Cast-in-Place Concrete” for slabs receiving carpet.<br />
3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale and foreign deposits.<br />
4. Ensure floors are level with maximum surface variation of ¼” in 10’.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, “Site Conditions; Floor Preparation,”<br />
and carpet manufacturer’s written instructions for preparing substrates indicated<br />
to receive carpet installation.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHEET CARPETING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
096816 - 3
B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer’s<br />
written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.<br />
C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are<br />
incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without<br />
using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following:<br />
1. Carpet manufacturer<br />
2. Carpet cushion manufacturer<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Stretch-In Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 11, “Stretch-In Installation”<br />
1. Install tack strip with adhesive, drill and pin, or nailing, or combination,<br />
where required for adequate strength.<br />
2. Locate Tack strip 1/4 inch from wall to conceal carpet edge between<br />
stripping and base of wall. Strip entire perimeter of each carpeted<br />
space and at obstructions and cutouts.<br />
B. Comply with carpet manufacturer’s written recommendations for seam locations<br />
and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile.<br />
At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position.<br />
1. Level adjoining border edges<br />
C. Cut and fit carpets to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and<br />
built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and<br />
nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer.<br />
1. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there is no visible<br />
variation between cut pieces.<br />
2. Cut carpet, where required, in a manner to allow proper seam and pattern<br />
match. Ensure cuts are straight and true and unfrayed.<br />
D. Carpet shall extend to the back of all toe spaces, under all millwork, cabinetwork,<br />
convectors, bookshelving, and similar items to the limiting planes of the<br />
floor surface. Where carpet terminates at a doorway, termination of carpet shall<br />
occur under the edge of the closed door, or at the side of the threshold where<br />
this is required. Cut and fit carpeting to all obstructions protruding from the<br />
floor surface, such as columns, pipes, thresholds, electrical, and telephone outlets,<br />
etc. All raw edges shall be latexed and securely and neatly tucked into<br />
place.<br />
E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for<br />
future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent,<br />
nonstaining marking device.<br />
F. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.<br />
G. Carpet shall be installed by experienced carpet layers in an approved manner,<br />
using the carpet manufacturer's recommended adhesive and procedures. Install<br />
carpet with pile running in the same direction, unless specifically directed to do<br />
otherwise.<br />
H. Install carpet cushion seams at 90-degree angle with carpet seams.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHEET CARPETING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
096816 - 4
I. The final carpet pattern, layout, edge binding locations shall be as directed and<br />
approved by Owner's Representative. All associated installation shall be by this<br />
Contractor.<br />
3.4 SEALING CUT EDGES<br />
3.5 SEAMING<br />
A. To prevent fraying and raveling at all seams and transition areas, a continuous<br />
bead of seam adhesive must be applied to the first edge where the face yarn enters<br />
the backing.<br />
B. On woven carpet, all cut edges at seams and transition areas must be secured<br />
with a latex seam adhesive immediately following the seam trimming.<br />
A. Install pad and carpet seams in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions.<br />
B. Locate pad seams at right angles to carpet seams. Where not possible to locate<br />
at right angles, locate pad seam minimum 6 inches away from carpet seams.<br />
Butt pad edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Tape pad seams.<br />
C. Maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doors, center seams<br />
under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction at doorways.<br />
D. Orcon Super 3S Wide tape will be used on all public area seams specifying hot<br />
melt tape.<br />
E. The seaming iron with heat shield must be of proper size, matching the hot melt<br />
tape being used.<br />
F. The proper head setting and exposure time must be used to assure proper transfer<br />
without creating damage to backing or pile yarn.<br />
G. Orcon Super 3S tape will be used in Guest Rooms and suites where seams are<br />
specified.<br />
H. Handsewing:<br />
1. An overhand stitch placed no more than 1/2 inch apart and no less than<br />
1/2 inch from the edge of the carpet is required.<br />
2. A latex coating must be applied over the stitching.<br />
3. The seam shall be allowed to dry at least eight (8) hours before stretching.<br />
I. Where conflicts between Owner’s requirements and manufacturer’s requirements<br />
occur, use Owner’s requirements.<br />
3.6 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Provide carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to<br />
substrate. Edge guard shall be used in all doorways or openings where no sill is<br />
installed or as required.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHEET CARPETING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 096816 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
3.7 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Stretch-In Installation: Restretch carpet sixty days after Substantial Completion,<br />
as directed by Owner.<br />
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 15, “Protection of Indoor Installation”.<br />
B. Remove and dispose of debris and unusable scraps daily.<br />
C. Vacuum carpet daily using commercial machine with face-beater element. Remove<br />
spots and replace carpet where spots cannot be removed. Remove any<br />
protruding face yarn using sharp scissors. Knock down tacks at entries to baths<br />
and guest rooms (to protect feet).<br />
D. Maintenance Materials: Deliver specified overrun (if any) and usable scraps of<br />
carpet to Owner's designated storage space, properly packaged (paper<br />
wrapped) and identified. Usable scraps are defined to include roll ends of less<br />
than 9'-0" length, and 3'-0" wide. Dispose of smaller pieces as "construction<br />
waste".<br />
E. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of<br />
equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection<br />
methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 6816<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHEET CARPETING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 096816 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
SECTION 09 7200<br />
WALL COVERINGS<br />
1. Vinyl wall covering; Furnished by Owner, installed by Contractor.<br />
2. Prime Coat on Walls<br />
3. Adhesives and Cleaning of Adjacent Surfaces<br />
4. All accessories for complete installation<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include data on physical<br />
characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and flame-resistance characteristics.<br />
B. Samples for Verification: Full width by 36-inch- long section of wall covering from lot<br />
to be used for each type of wall covering indicated for each color, texture, and pattern<br />
required.<br />
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Contractor is responsible for receiving and handling on site and installing wall covering<br />
material furnished by Owner and will fill out and process all receiving reports furnished<br />
by Owner.<br />
B. Provide strippable adhesive and primer for all wall covering.<br />
C. Contractor shall provide wall covering quantity take-offs to the Owner within 45 days of<br />
award of the contract.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 WALL-COVERING PRODUCTS<br />
A. As indicated in Finish Schedule on Interior Design Drawings.<br />
B. Manufacturer's recommended adhesive, primer, and sealer manufactured expressly for<br />
use with the selected wallcovering. Provide materials that contain mildew inhibitors that<br />
are nonstaining to the wall-covering.<br />
Project No.: 10145 WALL COVERINGS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 097200 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for levelness, wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other<br />
conditions affecting performance of work.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.<br />
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair wall covering's bond, including mold,<br />
mildew, oil, grease, incompatible primers, dirt, and dust.<br />
C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of<br />
flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.<br />
1. Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and<br />
concrete masonry units when tested with an electronic moisture meter.<br />
2. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer recommended by wall-covering<br />
manufacturer.<br />
3. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.<br />
D. Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell<br />
finishes with fine sandpaper.<br />
E. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture<br />
trims, and similar items.<br />
F. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the<br />
installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation.<br />
G. Install wall liner, with no gaps or overlaps, where required by wall-covering<br />
manufacturer. Form smooth wrinkle-free surface for finished installation. Do not begin<br />
wall-covering installation until wall liner has dried.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions<br />
applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent<br />
requirements apply.<br />
B. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition<br />
breaks and corners.<br />
Project No.: 10145 WALL COVERINGS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 097200 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
3.4 CLEANING<br />
A. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.<br />
B. Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.<br />
C. Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.<br />
D. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture<br />
trims, and similar items.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 7200<br />
Project No.: 10145 WALL COVERINGS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 097200 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 09 9113<br />
EXTERIOR PAINTING<br />
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the<br />
following exterior substrates:<br />
1. Steel.<br />
2. Galvanized metal.<br />
3. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).<br />
4. Exterior gypsum board.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of<br />
topcoat indicated.<br />
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.<br />
2. Label each Sample for location and application area.<br />
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:<br />
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same<br />
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.<br />
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category<br />
specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. MPI Standards:<br />
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved<br />
Products List."<br />
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural<br />
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.<br />
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with<br />
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.<br />
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.<br />
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.<br />
Project No.: 10145 EXTERIOR PAINTING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
099113 - 1
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air<br />
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.<br />
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85<br />
percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet<br />
surfaces.<br />
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix)<br />
as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels<br />
describing contents.<br />
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each<br />
material and color applied.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PAINT, GENERAL<br />
A. Material Compatibility:<br />
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one<br />
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as<br />
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.<br />
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by<br />
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.<br />
B. Colors: As indicated in a color schedule.<br />
2.2 BLOCK FILLERS<br />
A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.<br />
2.3 METAL PRIMERS<br />
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.<br />
B. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26.<br />
C. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.<br />
2.4 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS<br />
A. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).<br />
Project No.: 10145 EXTERIOR PAINTING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 099113 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
B. Exterior Latex (Gloss): MPI #119 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at<br />
60 deg).<br />
2.5 EXTERIOR ALKYD PAINTS<br />
A. Exterior Alkyd Enamel (Gloss): MPI #9 (Gloss Level 6).<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting<br />
performance of work.<br />
B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with<br />
existing finishes and primers.<br />
C. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and<br />
surfaces are dry.<br />
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates<br />
and conditions.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI<br />
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to<br />
be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,<br />
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.<br />
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved<br />
to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.<br />
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,<br />
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.<br />
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil,<br />
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.<br />
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as<br />
required to produce paint systems indicated.<br />
D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods<br />
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.<br />
Project No.: 10145 EXTERIOR PAINTING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 099113 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet<br />
metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly<br />
etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.<br />
F. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.<br />
G. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing<br />
compound is dry and sanded smooth.<br />
3.3 APPLICATION<br />
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.<br />
2. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before<br />
final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed items with prime coat<br />
only.<br />
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until<br />
cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.<br />
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush<br />
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in<br />
sharp lines and color breaks.<br />
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded<br />
materials from Project site.<br />
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints<br />
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished<br />
surfaces.<br />
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage<br />
to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved<br />
by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.<br />
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged<br />
or defaced painted surfaces.<br />
3.5 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE<br />
A. Steel Substrates:<br />
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.<br />
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (gloss).<br />
Project No.: 10145 EXTERIOR PAINTING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 099113 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:<br />
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.3B.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.<br />
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (gloss).<br />
C. Aluminum Substrates:<br />
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.4F.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat.<br />
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (gloss).<br />
D. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates:<br />
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 9.2A.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat.<br />
c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).<br />
END OF SECTION 09 9113<br />
Project No.: 10145 EXTERIOR PAINTING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 099113 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 09 9123<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING<br />
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the<br />
following interior substrates:<br />
1. Steel.<br />
2. Galvanized metal.<br />
3. Aluminum (not anodized or otherwise coated).<br />
4. Wood.<br />
5. Gypsum board.<br />
6. Cotton or canvas insulation covering.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent Finishing" for surface preparation<br />
and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood<br />
substrates.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of<br />
topcoat indicated.<br />
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.<br />
2. Label each Sample for location and application area.<br />
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:<br />
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same<br />
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.<br />
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category<br />
specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. MPI Standards:<br />
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved<br />
Products List."<br />
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural<br />
Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR PAINTING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 099123 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with<br />
ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.<br />
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.<br />
2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.<br />
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air<br />
temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.<br />
B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less<br />
than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.<br />
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix)<br />
as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels<br />
describing contents.<br />
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each<br />
material and color applied.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PAINT, GENERAL<br />
A. Material Compatibility:<br />
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one<br />
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as<br />
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.<br />
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by<br />
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.<br />
B. Colors: As indicated in Interior Design schedule.<br />
2.2 PRIMERS/SEALERS<br />
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.<br />
2.3 METAL PRIMERS<br />
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.<br />
B. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26.<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR PAINTING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
099123 - 2
C. Quick-Drying Primer for Aluminum: MPI #95.<br />
2.4 WOOD PRIMERS<br />
A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.<br />
2.5 LATEX PAINTS<br />
A. Interior Latex (Low Sheen): MPI #44 (Gloss Level 2).<br />
B. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).<br />
C. Interior Latex (Gloss): MPI #114 (Gloss Level 6, except minimum gloss of 65 units at<br />
60 deg).<br />
2.6 ALKYD PAINTS<br />
A. Interior Alkyd (Gloss): MPI #48 (Gloss Level 6).<br />
B. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5).<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting<br />
performance of work.<br />
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture<br />
meter as follows:<br />
1. Concrete: 12 percent.<br />
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.<br />
3. Wood: 15 percent.<br />
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.<br />
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with<br />
existing finishes and primers.<br />
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and<br />
surfaces are dry.<br />
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates<br />
and conditions.<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR PAINTING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 099123 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI<br />
Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.<br />
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to<br />
be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item,<br />
provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.<br />
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved<br />
to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.<br />
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,<br />
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.<br />
C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil,<br />
grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.<br />
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as<br />
required to produce paint systems indicated.<br />
D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods<br />
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.<br />
E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet<br />
metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly<br />
etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.<br />
F. Aluminum Substrates: Remove surface oxidation.<br />
G. Wood Substrates:<br />
1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer.<br />
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.<br />
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.<br />
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or<br />
plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.<br />
H. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is<br />
dry and sanded smooth.<br />
I. Cotton or Canvas Insulation Covering Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign<br />
material that might impair bond of paints to substrates.<br />
3.3 APPLICATION<br />
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.<br />
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed<br />
surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed<br />
equipment or furniture with prime coat only.<br />
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and<br />
similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR PAINTING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
099123 - 4
B. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until<br />
cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.<br />
C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush<br />
marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in<br />
sharp lines and color breaks.<br />
D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and<br />
occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Mechanical Work:<br />
a. Uninsulated metal piping.<br />
b. Uninsulated plastic piping.<br />
c. Pipe hangers and supports.<br />
d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.<br />
e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind<br />
air inlets and outlets.<br />
f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation<br />
covering or other paintable jacket material.<br />
g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for<br />
field painting.<br />
2. Electrical Work:<br />
a. Switchgear.<br />
b. Panelboards.<br />
c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for<br />
field painting.<br />
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded<br />
materials from Project site.<br />
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints<br />
by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished<br />
surfaces.<br />
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage<br />
to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved<br />
by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.<br />
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged<br />
or defaced painted surfaces.<br />
3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE<br />
A. Steel Substrates:<br />
1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.1E.<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR PAINTING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 099123 - 5<br />
19 March 2012
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.<br />
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (gloss).<br />
B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:<br />
1. Alkyd System: MPI INT 5.3C.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.<br />
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (gloss).<br />
C. Aluminum (Not Anodized or Otherwise Coated) Substrates:<br />
1. Alkyd Over Quick-Drying Primer System: MPI INT 5.4J.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying primer for aluminum.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.<br />
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (gloss).<br />
D. Wood Panel Substrates: Including painted plywood.<br />
1. Latex System: MPI INT 6.4R.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex-based wood primer.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.<br />
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss).<br />
E. Gypsum Board Substrates:<br />
1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.<br />
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (low sheen) (semigloss).<br />
2. Alkyd Over Latex Primer System: MPI INT 9.2C.<br />
(Suite Bathroom Ceilings and Pool Room)<br />
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat.<br />
c. Topcoat: Interior alkyd (semigloss).<br />
F. Cotton or Canvas Insulation-Covering Substrates: Including pipe and duct coverings.<br />
1. Latex System: MPI INT 10.1A.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat.<br />
c. Topcoat: Interior latex (low sheen).<br />
END OF SECTION 09 9123<br />
Project No.: 10145 INTERIOR PAINTING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 099123 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 09 9300<br />
STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING<br />
A. Section includes surface preparation and application of wood finishes.<br />
1.02 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees,<br />
according to ASTM D 523.<br />
B. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees,<br />
according to ASTM D 523.<br />
C. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.<br />
D. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.<br />
E. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees, according to ASTM D 523.<br />
1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and<br />
application instructions.<br />
B. Samples: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated.<br />
C. Product List: For each product indicated, include printout of current "MPI Approved<br />
Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the product proposed for<br />
use highlighted.<br />
1.04 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that<br />
are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing<br />
contents.<br />
1. Stains and Transparent Finishes: 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each<br />
material and color applied.<br />
Project No.: 10145 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 099300 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify<br />
preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects<br />
and set quality standards for materials and execution.<br />
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application<br />
of each type of finish system and substrate.<br />
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..<br />
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.<br />
2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL<br />
a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional<br />
mockups of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to<br />
Owner.<br />
A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are<br />
listed in its "MPI Approved Products List."<br />
B. Material Compatibility:<br />
1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one<br />
another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as<br />
demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.<br />
2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by<br />
manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.<br />
C. Stain Colors: As indicated in Interior Design schedule.<br />
2.02 WOOD FILLERS<br />
A. Wood Filler Paste: MPI #91.<br />
2.03 STAINS<br />
A. Stain, Semi-Transparent, for Interior Wood: MPI #90.<br />
2.04 POLYURETHANE VARNISHES<br />
A. Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Satin (Gloss Level 4): MPI #57.<br />
B. Varnish, Interior, Polyurethane, Oil-Modified, Gloss (Gloss Level 6): MPI #56.<br />
Project No.: 10145 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 099300 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance<br />
of the Work.<br />
B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing<br />
finishes and primers.<br />
C. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and<br />
conditions.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural<br />
Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.<br />
B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable.<br />
If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied<br />
protection before surface preparation and finishing.<br />
1. After completing finishing operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to<br />
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.<br />
C. Clean and prepare surfaces to be finished according to manufacturer's written instructions<br />
for each particular substrate condition and as specified.<br />
1. Remove dust, dirt, oil, and grease by washing with a detergent solution; rinse<br />
thoroughly with clean water and allow to dry. Remove grade stamps and pencil<br />
marks by sanding lightly. Remove loose wood fibers by brushing.<br />
2. Remove mildew by scrubbing with a commercial wash formulated for mildew<br />
removal and as recommended by stain manufacturer.<br />
3.03 APPLICATION<br />
A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in<br />
"MPI Manual."<br />
B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush<br />
marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.<br />
3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by<br />
cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an<br />
undamaged condition.<br />
Project No.: 10145 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 099300 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
B. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or<br />
defaced finished wood surfaces.<br />
3.05 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE<br />
A. Wood substrates, nontraffic surfaces, including wood trim and architectural woodwork.<br />
1. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System:<br />
a. Stain Coat: Stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood, MPI #90.<br />
b. First Intermediate Coat: Polyurethane varnish matching topcoat.<br />
c. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, satin (Gloss<br />
Level 4), MPI #57.<br />
d. Topcoat: Varnish, interior, polyurethane, oil-modified, gloss (Gloss<br />
Level 6), MPI #56.<br />
END OF SECTION 09 9300<br />
Project No.: 10145 STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 099300 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 10 2113<br />
TOILET COMPARTMENTS<br />
A. This Section includes plastic-laminate units as follows:<br />
1. Toilet Enclosures: Overhead braced.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 10 "Toilet and Bath Accessories" for toilet tissue dispensers, grab bars,<br />
and similar accessories.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,<br />
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other<br />
work.<br />
1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, ceilings, and other<br />
construction contiguous with toilet compartments by field measurements before<br />
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PLASTIC-LAMINATE UNITS<br />
A. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGS, 0.048-inch nominal thickness.<br />
1. Color and Pattern: One color and pattern in each room as selected by Architect<br />
from manufacturer's full range of colors and patterns.<br />
B. Door, Panel, and Pilaster <strong>Construction</strong>: Plastic-laminate facing sheets are pressure<br />
laminated to core material without splices or joints in facings or cores. Laminate is<br />
applied to edges before broad surfaces to seal edges and prevent laminate from being<br />
pried loose. Exposed core material is sealed at cutouts to protect core from moisture.<br />
1. Core Material: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 particleboard with 45-lb density.<br />
2. Doors and Panels: Finished to not less than 1 inch thick.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TOILET COMPARTMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 102113 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
C. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): Stainless steel, ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304, not<br />
less than 0.0312 inch specified thickness and 3 inches high, finished to match<br />
hardware.<br />
D. Brackets (Fittings):<br />
1. Stirrup Type: Ear or U-brackets, chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy<br />
(zamac) or clear anodized aluminum.<br />
2.2 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating<br />
hardware and accessories.<br />
1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clear anodized<br />
aluminum.<br />
B. Overhead Bracing: Manufacturer's standard continuous, extruded-aluminum head rail<br />
with antigrip profile and in manufacturer's standard finish.<br />
C. Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless<br />
steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theft-resistanttype<br />
heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed<br />
anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.<br />
2.3 FABRICATION<br />
A. Overhead-Braced Units: Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant supports,<br />
leveling mechanism, fasteners, and anchors at pilasters to suit floor conditions. Make<br />
provisions for setting and securing continuous head rail at top of each pilaster. Provide<br />
shoes at pilasters to conceal supports and leveling mechanism.<br />
B. Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide in-swinging doors for<br />
standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide out-swinging doors with a minimum<br />
32-inch- wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be accessible to people<br />
with disabilities.<br />
1. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold<br />
doors open at any angle up to 90 degrees.<br />
2. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard latch unit designed for emergency<br />
access and with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper. Provide units<br />
that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at<br />
compartments indicated to be accessible to people with disabilities.<br />
3. Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped<br />
bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TOILET COMPARTMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 102113 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units<br />
rigid, straight, level, and plumb. Secure units in position with manufacturer's<br />
recommended anchoring devices.<br />
1. Maximum Clearances:<br />
a. Pilasters and Panels: 1/2 inch.<br />
b. Panels and Walls: 1 inch.<br />
2. Stirrup Brackets: Secure panels to walls and to pilasters with not less than three<br />
brackets attached at midpoint and near top and bottom of panel.<br />
a. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile<br />
joints.<br />
b. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.<br />
B. Overhead-Braced Units: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten.<br />
Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than two fasteners. Hang<br />
doors to align tops of doors with tops of panels and adjust so tops of doors are parallel<br />
with overhead brace when doors are in closed position.<br />
3.2 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's<br />
written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold doors<br />
open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched.<br />
END OF SECTION 10 2113<br />
Project No.: 10145 TOILET COMPARTMENTS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 102113 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Corner guards.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
SECTION 10 2600<br />
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION<br />
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, firetest-response<br />
characteristics, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and<br />
finishes for each impact-resistant wall-protection unit.<br />
B. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material.<br />
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store impact-resistant wall-protection units in original undamaged packages and<br />
containers inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling,<br />
extreme temperatures, and humidity.<br />
1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during<br />
the period plastic materials are stored.<br />
2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight.<br />
3. Store plastic wall-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until<br />
plastic material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.<br />
a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.<br />
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall-protection<br />
units until building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and<br />
HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than<br />
72 hours before beginning installation and for the remainder of the construction<br />
period.<br />
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, and other construction<br />
contiguous with impact-resistant wall-protection units by field measurements before<br />
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.<br />
Project No.: 10145 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 102600 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are<br />
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing<br />
contents.<br />
1. Corner-Guard Covers: Full-size plastic covers of maximum length equal to 2<br />
percent of each type, color, and texture of units installed, but no fewer than two,<br />
4-foot- long units.<br />
B. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from<br />
same production run as installed units.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Extruded Rigid Plastic: ASTM D 1784, Class 1, textured, chemical- and stain-resistant,<br />
high-impact-resistant PVC or acrylic-modified vinyl plastic with integral color<br />
throughout; thickness as indicated.<br />
1. Impact Resistance: Minimum 25.4 ft-lbf/in. of notch when tested according to<br />
ASTM D 256, Test Method A.<br />
2. Chemical and Stain Resistance: Tested according to ASTM D 543.<br />
3. Self-extinguishing when tested according to ASTM D 635.<br />
4. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.<br />
5. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.<br />
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.<br />
C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws,<br />
bolts, and other fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type<br />
fasteners where exposed to view.<br />
D. Adhesive: Type recommended by manufacturer for use with material being adhered to<br />
substrate indicated.<br />
1. Use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content<br />
when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):<br />
2.2 CORNER GUARDS<br />
a. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.<br />
b. Multipurpose <strong>Construction</strong> Adhesives: 70 g/L.<br />
c. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.<br />
A. Surface-Mounted, Opaque-Plastic Corner Guards: Fabricated from PVC plastic,<br />
acrylic-modified vinyl sheet or opaque polycarbonate sheet; with formed edges;<br />
fabricated with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.<br />
1. Location: Public area corridors.<br />
Project No.: 10145 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
102600 - 2
2. Wing Size: Nominal 1-1/8 by 1-1/8 inches.<br />
3. Mounting: Adhesive.<br />
4. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
B. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from 1-piece, formed or extruded<br />
metal with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.<br />
1. Location: Laundry.<br />
2. Material: Stainless steel, Type 304.<br />
a. Thickness: Minimum 0.0500 inch.<br />
b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.<br />
3. Wing Size: Nominal 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches.<br />
4. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch.<br />
5. Mounting: Flat-head, countersunk screws through factory-drilled mounting<br />
holes.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for installation tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting<br />
performance of work.<br />
1. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for<br />
blocking, grounds, and other solid backing that have been installed in the<br />
locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners.<br />
2. For impact-resistant wall-protection units attached with adhesive, verify<br />
compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with<br />
existing finishes or primers.<br />
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been<br />
corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant<br />
wall-protection system components.<br />
B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install impact-resistant wall-protection units level, plumb, and true to line<br />
without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other<br />
defects that might be visible in the finished Work.<br />
Project No.: 10145 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 102600 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
3.4 CLEANING<br />
A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using<br />
a standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.<br />
B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by<br />
manufacturer.<br />
END OF SECTION 10 2600<br />
Project No.: 10145 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 102600 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
SECTION 10 2800<br />
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES<br />
1. Public-use restroom accessories.<br />
2. Employee-use restroom accessories.<br />
3. Suite bathroom accessories.<br />
4. Food Prep accessories.<br />
5. Underlavatory guards.<br />
6. Custodial accessories.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 08 Section "Mirrors" for frameless mirrors.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong> details and dimensions.<br />
2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in<br />
other work and substrate preparation.<br />
3. Material and finish descriptions.<br />
4. Manufacturer's warranty.<br />
B. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide<br />
products of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.<br />
1.4 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances<br />
required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment,<br />
operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.<br />
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to<br />
prevent delaying the Work.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 102800 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 ACCESSORY SCHEDULE<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated.<br />
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable<br />
product by one of the following:<br />
1. American Specialties, Inc.<br />
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.<br />
3. Bradley Corporation.<br />
4. Franklin Brass.<br />
B. Public-use Restrooms:<br />
1. Automatic battery-operated paper towel dispenser; Bobrick B-2974.<br />
2. Roll-in-reserve toilet tissue dispenser; Bobrick B-2888.<br />
3. Countertop mounted liquid soap dispenser; Bobrick B-822.<br />
4. Grab bars; Bobrick B-6806 series.<br />
5. Napkin / tampon dispenser; Bobrick B-352.<br />
6. Napkin disposal; Bobrick B-354.<br />
C. Employee Restrooms:<br />
1. Semi-recessed combination paper towel dispenser / waste receptacle; Bobrick B-<br />
3944.<br />
2. Roll-in-reserve toilet tissue dispenser; Bobrick B-2888.<br />
3. Wall mounted liquid soap dispenser; Bobrick B-2112.<br />
4. Grab bars; Bobrick B-6806 series.<br />
5. Napkin disposal; Bobrick B-354.<br />
6. Clothes hook; Bobrick B-2116.<br />
7. Channel frame mirror; Bobrick B-165 series.<br />
D. Suite Bathrooms:<br />
1. Recessed reserve roll toilet tissue dispenser; Franklin Brass FB970.<br />
2. Robe hook; Franklin Brass FB1402.<br />
3. Towel shelf / bar; Franklin Brass FB2780SS 24”.<br />
4. Curved shower curtain rod; Bath Unlimited #190-5BS.<br />
(Mounted 6'-8" AFF to the centerline of the rod. The rods must be permanently<br />
secured. ADA showers are to have straight rods equal to Franklin Brass #165.)<br />
5. Grab bar; Franklin Brass FB5724 24”.<br />
6. Recessed facial tissue dispenser; Franklin Brass FB920.<br />
(Accessible suites include the following items as required)<br />
7. Folding shower seats; Bobrick B-508.<br />
8. Grab bars: Bobrick B-6806 series.<br />
E. Food-Prep Area<br />
1. Surface mounted paper towel dispenser; Bobrick B-262.<br />
2. Surface mounted liquid soap dispenser; Bobrick B-2112.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 102800 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
2.2 UNDERLAVATORY GUARDS<br />
A. Underlavatory Guard:<br />
1. Description: Insulating pipe covering for supply and drain piping assemblies,<br />
that prevent direct contact with and burns from piping, and allow service access<br />
without removing coverings.<br />
2. Material and Finish: Antimicrobial, molded-plastic, white.<br />
2.3 CUSTODIAL ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated.<br />
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable<br />
product by one of the following:<br />
1. American Specialties, Inc.<br />
2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.<br />
3. Bradley Corporation.<br />
B. Mop and Broom Holder:<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick, B224.<br />
2. Description: Unit with shelf, hooks, holders, and rod suspended beneath shelf.<br />
3. Length: 36 inches.<br />
4. Hooks: Three.<br />
5. Mop/Broom Holders: Four, spring-loaded, rubber hat, cam type.<br />
6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).<br />
7. Shelf: Not less than nominal 0.05-inch- thick stainless steel.<br />
8. Rod: Approximately 1/4-inch- diameter stainless steel.<br />
2.4 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang<br />
doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed<br />
anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.<br />
B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and<br />
resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners<br />
appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install<br />
units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.<br />
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested<br />
according to method in ASTM F 446.<br />
Project No.: 10145 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 102800 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or<br />
defective items.<br />
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.<br />
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written<br />
recommendations.<br />
END OF SECTION 10 2800<br />
Project No.: 10145 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 102800 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Prefabricated gas fireplace.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
SECTION 10 3000<br />
PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES<br />
1. Division 23 Sections for gas piping and connections.<br />
2. Division 26 Sections for electrical starter and switch connections.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include installation instructions and<br />
details.<br />
B. Operation and maintenance data.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 FIREPLACE AND ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Manufacturer / Model:<br />
1. Basis-of-Design: See Interior Design Drawings/Specifications.<br />
B. Accessories<br />
1. Provide manufacturer’s ceramic cast oak logs with loose embers and cinders.<br />
2. Provide pilot light and key-operated starter. Provide remote on/off switch for<br />
fireplace pilot light behind front desk.<br />
3. Provide black steel mesh spark guard screening with screen pulls.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install in complete accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions and<br />
details.<br />
END OF SECTION 10 3000<br />
Project No.: 10145 PREFABRICATED FIREPLACES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 103000 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
SECTION 10 4413<br />
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS<br />
1. Fire protection cabinets for the following:<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
a. Portable fire extinguishers.<br />
b. Fire hose valves.<br />
1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguishers."<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,<br />
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes<br />
for fire protection cabinets.<br />
1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing<br />
mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction,<br />
door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in<br />
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.<br />
B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer<br />
for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:<br />
1. Sheet: ASTM B 209.<br />
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.<br />
C. Transparent Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), 3 mm thick,<br />
with Finish 1 (smooth or polished).<br />
Project No.: 10145 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
104413 - 1
2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET<br />
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher and extinguisher/hose valve.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may<br />
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar <strong>Construction</strong> Products Group;.<br />
b. Larsen's Manufacturing Company;.<br />
c. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.;.<br />
B. Cabinet <strong>Construction</strong>: Nonrated, 1-hour fire rated, and 2-hour fire rated.<br />
1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated<br />
from 0.0428-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-<br />
thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.<br />
C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.<br />
D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with<br />
exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim<br />
attached to cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached<br />
to box to act as drywall bead.<br />
E. Door Material: Steel sheet.<br />
F. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear) or Acrylic sheet.<br />
G. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for<br />
cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.<br />
1. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.<br />
H. Accessories:<br />
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire<br />
extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities<br />
of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.<br />
I. Finishes:<br />
1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:<br />
a. Exterior of cabinet door except for those surfaces indicated to receive<br />
another finish.<br />
b. Interior of cabinet and door.<br />
Project No.: 10145 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 104413 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
2.3 FABRICATION<br />
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame,<br />
door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.<br />
1. Weld joints and grind smooth.<br />
2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.<br />
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials<br />
indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.<br />
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design,<br />
minimum 1/2 inch thick.<br />
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.<br />
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from<br />
damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.<br />
C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.<br />
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.<br />
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the<br />
range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.<br />
2.5 STEEL FINISHES<br />
A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel,<br />
complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning".<br />
B. Factory Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromatefree,<br />
universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.<br />
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating,<br />
apply manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and<br />
thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for<br />
applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.<br />
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine roughing-in for hose valves and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping<br />
connections before cabinet installation.<br />
Project No.: 10145 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
104413 - 3
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed<br />
cabinets will be installed.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Prepare recesses for recessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of<br />
cabinet and trim style.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated<br />
or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.<br />
1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire protection cabinets. If wall<br />
thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire<br />
protection cabinets.<br />
2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square<br />
and plumb.<br />
3. Fire-Rated, Hose-Valve Cabinets:<br />
a. Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch tolerance between pipe OD<br />
and knockout OD. Center pipe within knockout.<br />
b. Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in<br />
Division 07 Section "Firestopping."<br />
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection<br />
cabinets are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation<br />
instructions.<br />
B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that<br />
integral locking devices operate properly.<br />
C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces<br />
as recommended by manufacturer.<br />
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to<br />
factory-finished appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or<br />
furnished by fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.<br />
E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond<br />
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.<br />
END OF SECTION 10 4413<br />
Project No.: 10145 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 104413 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 10 4416<br />
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS<br />
A. Section includes portable fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire<br />
extinguishers.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification,<br />
material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes<br />
for fire extinguisher.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10,<br />
"Portable Fire Extinguishers."<br />
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an<br />
independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS<br />
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and<br />
mounting bracket indicated.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available<br />
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,<br />
but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar <strong>Construction</strong> Products Group.<br />
b. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.<br />
c. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.<br />
B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 3-A:40-B:C, 5-lb<br />
nominal capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameledsteel<br />
container.<br />
Project No.: 10145 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 104416 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1. Provide 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity a Laundry.<br />
2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS<br />
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher<br />
to wall or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers<br />
indicated, with plated or red baked-enamel finish.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.<br />
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in<br />
compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction:<br />
1. Bracket Locations: Administration, laundry, maintenance, and elevator machine<br />
rooms.<br />
2. Bracket Height: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.<br />
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at<br />
locations indicated.<br />
END OF SECTION 10 4416<br />
Project No.: 10145 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 104416 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
SECTION 10 5113<br />
METAL LOCKERS<br />
1. Knocked-down, standard metal lockers.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Uncoated Steel Sheet Thicknesses: Indicated as the minimum thicknesses.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of<br />
individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of metal locker.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other<br />
work.<br />
1. Show base, sloping tops and other accessories.<br />
2. Include locker identification system.<br />
C. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching<br />
mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain metal lockers and accessories through one source from a<br />
single manufacturer.<br />
B. Regulatory Requirements: Where metal lockers are indicated to comply with<br />
accessibility requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers<br />
Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for<br />
Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."<br />
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Do not deliver metal lockers until spaces to receive them are clean, dry, and ready for<br />
metal locker installation.<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL LOCKERS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 105113 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Verify the following by field measurements before fabrication and<br />
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings:<br />
1. Concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support metal lockers<br />
before they are enclosed.<br />
1.7 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other<br />
related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that metal lockers can be<br />
supported and installed as indicated.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements<br />
apply to product selection:<br />
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may<br />
be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.<br />
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products<br />
specified.<br />
3. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each metal locker specified is based on<br />
the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the<br />
named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers<br />
specified.<br />
2.2 MATERIALS<br />
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS) Type B, suitable for<br />
exposed applications.<br />
B. Fasteners: Zinc- or nickel-plated steel, slotless-type exposed bolt heads, and selflocking<br />
nuts or lock washers for nuts on moving parts.<br />
C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for secure anchorage to each<br />
substrate.<br />
2.3 KNOCKED-DOWN, STANDARD METAL LOCKERS<br />
A. Available Manufacturers:<br />
1. Lyon Workspace Products.<br />
2. Penco Products, Inc., Subsidiary of Vesper Corporation.<br />
3. Republic Storage Systems Company.<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL LOCKERS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 105113 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
B. Locker Arrangement: Double tier.<br />
C. Locker Size: minimum 2.5 cubic feet.<br />
D. Body: Assembled by riveting or bolting body components together. Fabricate from<br />
unperforated, cold-rolled steel sheet with thicknesses as follows:<br />
1. Tops, Bottoms, and Intermediate Dividers: 0.0209 inch, with single bend at<br />
sides.<br />
2. Backs and Sides: 0.0209 inch thick, with full-height, double-flanged<br />
connections.<br />
3. Shelves: 0.0209 inch thick, with double bend at front and single bend at sides<br />
and back.<br />
E. Frames: Channel formed; fabricated from 0.0528-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet;<br />
lapped and factory welded at corners; with top and bottom main frames factory welded<br />
into vertical main frames. Form continuous, integral door strike full height on vertical<br />
main frames.<br />
F. Doors: One-piece; fabricated from 0.0528-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; formed<br />
into channel shape with double bend at vertical edges, and with right-angle single<br />
bend at horizontal edges.<br />
1. Doors less than 12 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.0428-inch- thick, coldrolled<br />
steel sheet.<br />
2. Box lockers less than 15 inches wide may be fabricated from 0.0428-inch- thick,<br />
cold-rolled steel sheet.<br />
3. Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard reinforcing angles, channels, or<br />
stiffeners for doors more than 15 inches wide; welded to inner face of doors.<br />
4. Stiffeners: Manufacturer's standard full-height stiffener fabricated from 0.0428inch-<br />
thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; welded to inner face of doors.<br />
G. Recessed Door Handle and Latch: Stainless-steel cup with integral door pull, recessed<br />
so locking device does not protrude beyond face of door; pry resistant.<br />
H. Combination Padlocks: Provided by Owner.<br />
I. Equipment: Equip each metal locker with identification plate and the following, unless<br />
otherwise indicated:<br />
1. Double-Tier Units: One double-prong ceiling hook and two single-prong wall<br />
hooks.<br />
J. Accessories:<br />
1. Continuous Base: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, manufacturer's<br />
standard thickness, but not less than 0.0528 inch thick.<br />
a. Height: 4 inches.<br />
2. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet,<br />
manufacturer's standard thickness, but not less than 0.0329 inch thick.<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL LOCKERS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
105113 - 3
a. Closures: Vertical-end type.<br />
3. Finished End Panels: Fabricated from 0.0209-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet.<br />
K. Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.<br />
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
2.4 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Fabricate metal lockers square, rigid, and without warp; with metal faces flat<br />
and free of dents or distortion. Make exposed metal edges free of sharp edges and<br />
burrs, and safe to touch.<br />
1. Form body panels, doors, shelves, and accessories from one-piece steel sheet,<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Provide fasteners, filler plates, supports, clips, and closures as required for a<br />
complete installation.<br />
B. Unit Principle: Fabricate each metal locker with an individual door and frame;<br />
individual top, bottom, and back; and common intermediate uprights separating<br />
compartments.<br />
C. Knocked-Down <strong>Construction</strong>: Fabricate metal lockers for nominal assembly at Project<br />
site using nuts, bolts, screws, or rivets. Factory weld frame members together to form a<br />
rigid, one-piece assembly.<br />
D. Hooks: Manufacturer's standard ball-pointed type, aluminum or steel; zinc plated.<br />
E. Identification Plates: Manufacturer's standard etched, embossed, or stamped<br />
aluminum plates; with numbers and letters at least 3/8 inch high.<br />
F. Continuous Base: Formed into channel or Z profile for stiffness, and fabricated in<br />
lengths as long as practicable to enclose base and base ends of metal lockers; finished<br />
to match lockers.<br />
G. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths as long as practicable, without visible<br />
fasteners at splice locations; finished to match lockers.<br />
H. Finished End Panels: Designed for concealing unused penetrations and fasteners,<br />
except for perimeter fasteners, at exposed ends of nonrecessed metal lockers; finished<br />
to match lockers.<br />
2.5 STEEL SHEET FINISHES<br />
A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal<br />
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Factory finish steel surfaces and accessories except stainless-steel and chrome-plated<br />
surfaces.<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL LOCKERS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 105113 - 4<br />
19 March 2012
C. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other<br />
contaminants that could impair paint bond. Use manufacturer's standard methods.<br />
D. Baked-Enamel Finish: Immediately after cleaning, pretreating, and phosphatizing,<br />
apply manufacturer's standard thermosetting baked-enamel finish. Comply with paint<br />
manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film<br />
thickness.<br />
E. Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, electrostatically apply<br />
manufacturer's standard baked-polymer thermosetting powder finish. Comply with<br />
resin manufacturer's written instructions for application, baking, and minimum dry film<br />
thickness.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine walls, floors, and support bases, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of<br />
work.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install level, plumb, and true; shim as required, using concealed shims.<br />
1. Anchor locker runs at ends and at intervals recommended by manufacturer, but<br />
not more than 36 inches o.c. Install anchors through backup reinforcing plates,<br />
channels, or blocking as required to prevent metal distortion, using concealed<br />
fasteners.<br />
2. Anchor single rows of metal lockers to walls near top and bottom of lockers.<br />
B. Knocked-Down Metal Lockers: Assemble knocked-down metal lockers with standard<br />
fasteners, with no exposed fasteners on door faces or face frames.<br />
C. Equipment and Accessories: Fit exposed connections of trim, fillers, and closures<br />
accurately together to form tight, hairline joints, with concealed fasteners and splice<br />
plates.<br />
1. Attach hooks with at least two fasteners.<br />
2. Attach door locks on doors using security-type fasteners.<br />
3. Identification Plates: Identify metal lockers with identification indicated on<br />
Drawings.<br />
a. Attach plates to each locker door, near top, centered, with at least two<br />
aluminum rivets.<br />
4. Attach sloping top units to metal lockers, with closures at exposed ends.<br />
5. Attach finished end panels with fasteners only at perimeter to conceal exposed<br />
ends of nonrecessed metal lockers.<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL LOCKERS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
105113 - 5
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Adjust doors and latches to operate easily<br />
without binding.<br />
B. Protect metal lockers from damage, abuse, dust, dirt, stain, or paint. Do not permit<br />
metal locker use during construction.<br />
C. Touch up marred finishes, or replace metal lockers that cannot be restored to factoryfinished<br />
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished<br />
by metal locker manufacturer.<br />
END OF SECTION 10 5113<br />
Project No.: 10145 METAL LOCKERS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 105113 - 6<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 10 8240<br />
SHOWER DOORS<br />
A. This Section includes swinging shower doors.<br />
B. Related Sections: Division 6 Section “Rough Carpentry” for wood blocking for<br />
mounting brackets.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each product specified.<br />
B. Show Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PRODUCTS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design is based on products indicated. Subject to<br />
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product.<br />
1. Sterling, a Kohler Company; designer pivot shower doors.<br />
2. American Shower Door.<br />
B. Provide a two panel (pivot door) shower door, silver finish with obscure glass.<br />
1. Comply with ANSI Z97.1 (tempered glass).<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Verify placement of<br />
concealed blocking or other supports built into walls; determine that back-up<br />
construction will sustain the securing fasteners. Do not proceed with installation until<br />
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install shower door in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved shop<br />
drawings.<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHOWER DOORS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
108240 - 1
3.3 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust components and accessories for proper operation.<br />
3.4 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean surfaces according to manufacturer’s instruction after installation.<br />
B. Remove surplus materials packaging, rubbish and debris resulting from installation.<br />
Leave installation areas neat, clean, and ready for use.<br />
3.5 PROTECTION<br />
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to<br />
manufacturer and installer that ensure shower doors are without damage at the time<br />
of Substantial Completion.<br />
END OF SECTION 10 8240<br />
Project No.: 10145 SHOWER DOORS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 108240 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUBMITTALS<br />
SECTION 11 0200<br />
SECURITY EQUIPMENT<br />
A. Product data: Indicate material types, finishes and sizes, fabrication and installation details and<br />
requirements.<br />
1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver equipment in protective packaging.<br />
B. Store in packaging to prevent soiling and physical damage.<br />
C. Handle to prevent damage to finished surfaces and operating mechanisms.<br />
1.3 JOB CONDITIONS<br />
A. Protection: Protect prefinished surfaces from damage or staining. Following installation,<br />
provide protective covering for equipment for duration of project.<br />
B. Coordinate installation of equipment required to be installed in other work. Lay out to rough<br />
dimensions provided by specialty manufacturer.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SAFETY DEPOSIT BOXES<br />
A. Acceptable product: Diebold, Inc., Teller Lockers, Model 200-33 and 200-37.<br />
B. Characteristics:<br />
1. Description: Freestanding, 20" depth.<br />
2. Locks: Two (2) keyed access.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install equipment only after all other construction activities are completed in installation area.<br />
Install in accord with manufacturer's product data, plumb, level and true to line and location.<br />
B. Protect prefinished surfaces from damage during remainder of construction period. Clean<br />
surfaces prior to Date of Substantial Completion.<br />
END OF SECTION 11 0200<br />
Project No.: 10145 SECURITY EQUIPMENT<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 110200 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Electric cooktops.<br />
2. Microwave ovens.<br />
3. Refrigerator/freezers.<br />
4. Dishwashers.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
SECTION 11 3100<br />
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES<br />
1. Division 06 Section "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for cabinets and<br />
countertops that receive residential appliances.<br />
2. Mechanical drawings and specifications for kitchen sinks and waste disposals.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include operating characteristics,<br />
dimensions of individual appliances, and finishes for each appliance.<br />
1.3 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of each<br />
appliance specified agrees to repair or replace residential appliances or components<br />
that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Microwave Oven: Five-year limited warranty for defects in the magnetron tube.<br />
2. Refrigerator/Freezer: Five-year limited warranty for in-home service on the<br />
sealed refrigeration system.<br />
3. Dishwasher: 10-year warranty for in-home service against deterioration of tub<br />
and door liner.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 COOKING APPLIANCES<br />
A. Electric Cooktop:<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Dual burner electric cooktop: 21.25” D x 16.625” W.<br />
Project No.: 10145 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 113100 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
B. Microwave Oven:<br />
1. HWS Basis-of-Design Product: 30” W x 15” D x 16.25” H, 1000 watt, 1.6 cubic<br />
foot capacity, under-cabinet model with built-in vent hood and light.<br />
2. HIS Basis-of-Design Product: 17” W x 10-1/8” H x 12-7/8” D, under counter<br />
microwave. Sanyo EM-S2588W/B.<br />
3. Countertop Basis-of-Design Product: 11.75” H x 21.25” W x 15.75” D, 1100<br />
watt, 1.1 cubic foot capacity, countertop model.<br />
2.2 REFRIGERATION APPLIANCES<br />
A. Refrigerator/Freezer:<br />
1. HWS Basis-of-Design Product: 29.75” W x 29.56” D x 61.5” H, 14.4 cubic foot<br />
capacity, frost-free upright refrigerator with separate door for freezer.<br />
2. HIS Basis-of-Design Product: 18-5/8” W x 17-3/4” D x 24-7/8” H, under<br />
counter refrigerator. Sanyo SR-A2480W/K/M.<br />
2.3 CLEANING APPLIANCES<br />
A. Dishwasher:<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: 24” wide, residential model.<br />
2. Type: Under the counter, operable at water pressures from 15 to 120 psi.<br />
2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a<br />
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.<br />
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections<br />
before equipment installation.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
Project No.: 10145 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 113100 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets or countertops with<br />
concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and<br />
rough openings are completely concealed.<br />
C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been<br />
completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate<br />
equipment.<br />
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Test each item of residential appliances to verify proper operation. Make necessary<br />
adjustments.<br />
B. Verify that accessories required have been furnished and installed.<br />
C. Remove packing material from residential appliances and leave units in clean<br />
condition, ready for operation.<br />
3.4 DEMONSTRATION<br />
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance<br />
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain residential appliances. Refer to Division 01<br />
Section "Demonstration and Training."<br />
END OF SECTION 11 3100<br />
Project No.: 10145 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 113100 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 11 5213<br />
PROJECTION SCREENS<br />
A. Section Includes: Electrically operated, front-projection screens and controls.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Section 06 4023 "Interior Architectural Woodwork" for wood trim and wood ceiling<br />
closure panel for recessed screen installation.<br />
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show layouts and types of front-projection screens. Include the following:<br />
1. Anchorage details, including connection to supporting structure for suspended units.<br />
2. Location of wiring connections for electrically operated units.<br />
3. Wiring diagrams for electrically operated units.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED, FRONT-PROJECTION SCREENS<br />
A. General: Manufacturer's standard units consisting of case, screen, motor, controls,<br />
mounting accessories, and other components necessary for a complete installation.<br />
1. Controls: Remote, three-position control switch.<br />
a. Provide key-operated, power-supply switch.<br />
2. Motor in Roller: Instant-reversing motor of size and capacity recommended by<br />
screen manufacturer; with permanently lubricated ball bearings, automatic thermaloverload<br />
protection, and positive-stop action to prevent coasting.<br />
3. Screen Mounting: Top edge securely anchored to rigid metal roller and bottom<br />
edge formed into a pocket holding a 3/8-inch- diameter metal rod with ends of rod<br />
protected by plastic caps.<br />
B. Suspended, Electrically Operated Screens with Automatic Ceiling Closure and without Tab<br />
Tensioning: Motor-in-roller units designed and fabricated for suspended mounting; with<br />
bottom of case composed of two panels, fully enclosing screen, motor, and wiring; one<br />
panel hinged and designed to open and close automatically when screen is lowered and<br />
fully raised, the other removable or openable for access to interior of case.<br />
1. Provide screen case with trim flange to receive millwork finish.<br />
Project No.: 10145 PROJECTION SCREENS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 115213 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
2.02 FRONT-PROJECTION SCREEN MATERIAL<br />
A. Matte-White Viewing Surface: Peak gain of not less than 0.9, and gain of not less than<br />
0.8 at an angle of 50 degrees from the axis of the screen surface.<br />
B. Seamless <strong>Construction</strong>: Provide screens, in sizes indicated, without seams.<br />
C. Edge Treatment: Without black masking borders.<br />
D. Size of Viewing Surface: As indicated on Drawings.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install front-projection screens at locations indicated to comply with screen manufacturer's<br />
written instructions.<br />
B. Install front-projection screens with screen cases in position and in relation to adjoining<br />
construction indicated. Securely anchor to supporting substrate in a manner that produces<br />
a smoothly operating screen with vertical edges plumb and viewing surface flat when<br />
screen is lowered.<br />
1. Install low-voltage controls according to NFPA 70 and complying with<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
a. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway except in accessible ceiling spaces<br />
and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be<br />
used. Use UL-listed plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including<br />
plenum ceilings. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.<br />
2. Test electrically operated units to verify that screen controls, limit switches, closures,<br />
and other operating components are in optimum functioning condition.<br />
END OF SECTION 11 5213<br />
Project No.: 10145 PROJECTION SCREENS<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 115213 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
SECTION 12 4813<br />
ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES<br />
1. Entrance mats in recessed frames.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of<br />
individual components and profiles, and finishes.<br />
B. Maintenance Data: For floor mats and frames to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain floor mats and frames through one source from a single<br />
manufacturer.<br />
B. Accessibility Requirements: Provide installed floor mats that comply with Section 4.5<br />
in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans<br />
with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities<br />
(ADAAG)."<br />
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.<br />
1.5 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate size and location of recesses in concrete with installation of finish floors to<br />
receive floor mats and frames.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 ROLL-UP MATS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: See Interior Design Drawings/Specifications.<br />
Project No.: 10145 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 124813 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
2.2 FABRICATION<br />
A. Floor Mats: Shop fabricate units to greatest extent possible in sizes indicated. Unless<br />
otherwise indicated, provide single unit for each mat installation; do not exceed<br />
manufacturer's recommended maximum sizes for units that are removed for<br />
maintenance and cleaning. Where joints in mats are necessary, space symmetrically<br />
and away from normal traffic lanes. Miter corner joints in framing elements with<br />
hairline joints or provide prefabricated corner units without joints.<br />
B. Recessed Frames: As indicated, for permanent recessed installation, complete with<br />
corner pins or reinforcement and anchorage devices.<br />
1. Fabricate edge-frame members in single lengths or, where frame dimensions<br />
exceed maximum available lengths, provide minimum number of pieces<br />
possible, with hairline joints equally spaced and pieces spliced together by<br />
straight connecting pins.<br />
C. Coat surfaces of aluminum frames that will contact cementitious material with<br />
manufacturer's standard protective coating.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and floor conditions for compliance with requirements for location,<br />
sizes, minimum recess depth, and other conditions affecting installation of floor mats<br />
and frames. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been<br />
corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install recessed mat frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Set<br />
mat tops at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action;<br />
coordinate top of mat surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across mats to provide<br />
clearance between door and mat.<br />
1. Install necessary shims, spacers, and anchorages for proper location and<br />
secure attachment of frames.<br />
2. Install grout and fill around frames and, if required to set mat tops at proper<br />
elevations, in recesses under mats. Finish grout and fill smooth and level.<br />
3.3 PROTECTION<br />
A. After completing frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of<br />
plywood or fiberboard in recesses and cover frames with plywood protective flooring.<br />
Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and Project is near Substantial<br />
Completion.<br />
END OF SECTION 12 4813<br />
Project No.: 10145 ENTRANCE FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 124813 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
SECTION 13 1500<br />
SWIMMING POOL<br />
A. Pool construction shall be provided on a design/build basis for work of this Contract.<br />
All systems shall be designed and installed in strict accordance with local, State and<br />
Federal laws, codes and ordinances in addition to the current Homewood Suites and<br />
Hampton USA Design & <strong>Construction</strong> Standards.<br />
B. Submit complete design/build plans and specifications for pool construction and<br />
systems as required to complete the work. Contractor is responsible for all facets of<br />
design and construction of all pool related systems.<br />
C. All drawings, calculations and submittals required to execute the design/build work of<br />
this Contract shall be sealed by an Engineer licensed in the State of Colorado.<br />
D. Submit one copy of submittals to Architect for information only. Submit additional<br />
submittals to Owner and Hilton for review and approval.<br />
1.2 GENERAL DESIGN CRITERIA<br />
A. Pool shall be constructed in accordance with “Minimum standards for public swimming<br />
pools” as published by the National Spa and Pool Institute.<br />
B. Fiberglass and stainless steel pools/whirlpools are not acceptable.<br />
C. The pool shall have a minimum depth of water in the shallow end of the main<br />
swimming area of between 3’-0” and 3’-6”. The depth of the deep end shall be a<br />
maximum of 5’-0”.<br />
D. Pool shall have at least two sets of ladders, stairs, steps, recessed steps or a<br />
combination thereof, located so as to fully serve both ends of the pool for purposes of<br />
entry and exit. Steps and handrail at the shallow end, ladder at the deep end.<br />
E. Hydraulic therapy lifter, stainless steel frame with a capacity to support 400 pounds<br />
with the horizontal arm fully extended. Provide lifter and all components required for a<br />
complete and operational installation. Provide sleeves in deck at pool.<br />
F. Actual pool depths must be measured and verified prior to marking the pool deck and<br />
sides. Lettering must be at least four inches high. Depths shall be in both English and<br />
metric units, English units shall be shown above the metric units.<br />
G. Pool Safety Equipment: Provide at least on shepherd’s hook or pole with a minimum<br />
length of 12 feet. Provide at two 24-inch life rings that have a United States Coast<br />
Guard approval. In addition, each life ring shall be attached to a line with a minimum<br />
diameter of 3/16-inch; the length of the life line shall be 1½ times greater than the<br />
greatest width of the pool. Provide a 16 unit first aid kit.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
END OF SECTION 13 1500<br />
SWIMMING POOL<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
19 March 2012<br />
131500 - 1
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes laundry chutes.<br />
1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
SECTION 14 9100<br />
FACILITY CHUTES<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For chutes. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, weights,<br />
operational clearances, and attachments to other work. Indicate method of field<br />
assembly.<br />
1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and maintenance data.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and<br />
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for<br />
fire ratings indicated.<br />
1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric (neutral) pressure according to NFPA 252 or<br />
UL 10B.<br />
2. Intake Door: Class B labeled; 1-1/2-hour fire rated.<br />
3. Discharge Door: Class B labeled; 1-hour fire rated.<br />
B. Standard: Provide chutes complying with NFPA 82.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
1. Midland Chutes.<br />
2. U.S. Chutes.<br />
3. Valiant Products, Inc.<br />
4. Wilkinson Hi-Rise, LLC.<br />
Project No.: 10145 FACILITY CHUTES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 149100 - 1<br />
19 March 2012
2.02 CHUTES<br />
A. Chute Metal: Aluminum-coated, cold-rolled, commercial steel sheet;<br />
ASTM A 463/A 463M, Type 1 with not less than T1-40 coating.<br />
B. Size: 24-inch diameter.<br />
2.03 DOORS<br />
A. Intake Door Assemblies: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 stainless-steel, self-closing units<br />
with positive latch and latch handle; as required to provide fire-protection ratings<br />
indicated; and with frame suitable for enclosing chase construction.<br />
1. Door Type: Side hinged, limited access, 180-degree swing, square.<br />
2. Size: Manufacturer's standard size for door type, chute type, and diameter<br />
indicated.<br />
3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard satin or No. 3 directional polish.<br />
4. Locks: Cylinder locks with keys that are removable only when cylinder is locked.<br />
For each chute, key locks to master key system. For each door, furnish four keys.<br />
B. Discharge-Door Assemblies: Aluminum-coated-steel doors as required to provide fireprotection<br />
ratings indicated; equipped with fusible links that cause doors to close in the<br />
event of fire.<br />
1. Horizontal Discharge: Provide top-hinged, self-closing, hopper door with selflatching<br />
hardware; floor-mounted leg brace designed to absorb impact of material<br />
dropping against chute; and minimum NPS 2 drain pipe connection.<br />
2.04 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Fire Sprinklers: Manufacturer's standard NPS 1/2 fire sprinklers ready for piping<br />
connections.<br />
2.05 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Factory assemble chutes to greatest extent practical with continuously welded or<br />
lock-seamed joints without bolts, rivets, or clips projecting on chute interior. Include intake<br />
door assemblies and metal supporting framing at each floor, and chute expansion joints<br />
between each support point.<br />
B. Roof Vent: Fabricate vent unit to extend 48 inches above roof with full-diameter, screened<br />
vent and metal safety cap or glass explosion-release cap. Fabricate with roof-deck flange,<br />
counterflashing, and clamping ring of nonferrous metal compatible with chute metal.<br />
C. Fire Sprinklers: Comply with NFPA 13. Locate fire sprinklers at or above the top service<br />
opening of chutes, within the chute at alternate floor levels in buildings more than two<br />
stories tall, and at the lowest service level.<br />
Project No.: 10145 FACILITY CHUTES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 149100 - 2<br />
19 March 2012
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Comply with NFPA 82 requirements and with chute manufacturer's written<br />
instructions. Assemble components with tight, nonleaking joints. Anchor securely to<br />
supporting structure to withstand impact and stresses on vent units. Install chute and<br />
components to maintain fire-resistive construction of chute and enclosing chase.<br />
B. Install chutes plumb, without offsets or obstructions that might prevent materials from free<br />
falling within chutes.<br />
C. Anchor roof flanges of chute vents before installing roofing and flashing. Install chute-vent<br />
counterflashing after roofing and roof-penetration flashing are installed.<br />
D. Intake and Discharge Doors: Interface door units with throat sections of chutes for safe,<br />
snag-resistant, sanitary depositing of materials in chutes by users.<br />
E. Test chute components after installation. Operate doors, locks, and interlock systems to<br />
demonstrate that hardware is adjusted and electrical wiring is connected correctly.<br />
Complete test operations before installing chase enclosures.<br />
F. After completing chase enclosure, clean exposed surfaces of chute system's components.<br />
Do not remove labels of independent testing and inspecting agencies.<br />
3.02 DEMONSTRATION<br />
A. Demonstrate use of chute and equipment to Owner's personnel.<br />
END OF SECTION 14 9100<br />
Project No.: 10145 FACILITY CHUTES<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel 149100 - 3<br />
19 March 2012
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 0513<br />
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,<br />
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to<br />
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment<br />
manufacturer for field installation.<br />
1.3 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the<br />
following:<br />
1. Motor controllers.<br />
2. Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.<br />
3. Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.<br />
4. Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.<br />
2.2 MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS<br />
A. Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 5280 feet above<br />
sea level.<br />
B. Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads<br />
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,<br />
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.<br />
22 0513 - 1 COMMON MOTOR<br />
REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING<br />
EQUIPMENT
2.3 POLYPHASE MOTORS<br />
A. Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.<br />
B. Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.<br />
C. Service Factor: 1.15.<br />
D. Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.<br />
1. For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.<br />
2. For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.<br />
E. Multispeed Motors: Separate winding for each speed.<br />
F. Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.<br />
G. Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.<br />
H. Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.<br />
I. Insulation: Class F.<br />
J. Code Letter Designation:<br />
1. Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.<br />
2. Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.<br />
K. Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor<br />
frame sizes smaller than 324T.<br />
2.4 POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection<br />
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,<br />
suited to control method.<br />
B. Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Ratings, characteristics, and features<br />
coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.<br />
1. Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and<br />
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by<br />
pulse-width modulated inverters.<br />
2. Energy- and Premium-Efficient Motors: Class B temperature rise; Class F insulation.<br />
3. Inverter-Duty Motors: Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation.<br />
4. Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected<br />
motors.<br />
C. Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0513 - 2 COMMON MOTOR<br />
REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING<br />
EQUIPMENT
2.5 SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS<br />
A. Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and requirements<br />
of specific motor application:<br />
1. Permanent-split capacitor.<br />
2. Split phase.<br />
3. Capacitor start, inductor run.<br />
4. Capacitor start, capacitor run.<br />
B. Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.<br />
C. Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and thrust<br />
loading.<br />
D. Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.<br />
E. Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor when<br />
winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor insulation.<br />
Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns to normal<br />
range.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 0513<br />
22 0513 - 3 COMMON MOTOR<br />
REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING<br />
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 0516<br />
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Flexible-hose packless expansion joints.<br />
2. Metal-bellows packless expansion joints.<br />
3. Rubber packless expansion joints.<br />
4. Grooved-joint expansion joints.<br />
5. Pipe loops and swing connections.<br />
6. Alignment guides and anchors.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures,<br />
and temperatures.<br />
B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with<br />
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the<br />
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.<br />
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and<br />
for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections.<br />
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and<br />
methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.<br />
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.<br />
4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end<br />
connections, and location for each expansion joint.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Welding certificates.<br />
22 0516 - 1 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
B. Product Certificates: For each type of expansion joint, from manufacturer.<br />
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:<br />
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."<br />
2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS<br />
A. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.<br />
b. Flexicraft Industries.<br />
c. Flex Pression Ltd.<br />
d. Metraflex, Inc.<br />
e. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexiblemetal-hose<br />
legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible<br />
hose.<br />
3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths.<br />
4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with solderjoint<br />
end connections.<br />
a. Bronze hoses and single-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340<br />
psig at 450 deg F ratings.<br />
b. Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with 700 psig at 70 deg F and 500<br />
psig at 450 deg F ratings.<br />
5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings with<br />
threaded end connections.<br />
a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 300 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 225 psig at 450 deg F ratings.<br />
b. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 420 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 315 psig at 450 deg F ratings.<br />
6. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Stainless-steel fittings with threaded<br />
end connections.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0516 - 2 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 325 psig at 600 deg F ratings.<br />
b. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 700 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 515 psig at 600 deg F ratings.<br />
7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Stainless-steel fittings with flanged<br />
end connections.<br />
a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 200 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 145 psig at 600 deg F ratings.<br />
b. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 275 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 200 psig at 600 deg F ratings.<br />
8. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 8 to NPS 12: Stainless-steel fittings with flanged end<br />
connections.<br />
a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 125 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 90 psig at 600 deg F ratings.<br />
b. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 165 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 120 psig at 600 deg F ratings.<br />
B. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC.<br />
b. American BOA, Inc.<br />
c. Badger Industries, Inc.<br />
d. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc.<br />
e. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.<br />
f. Flexicraft Industries.<br />
g. Flex Pression Ltd.<br />
h. Flex-Weld, Inc.<br />
i. Flo Fab inc.<br />
j. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.<br />
k. Metraflex, Inc.<br />
l. Unaflex.<br />
m. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
n. Universal Metal Hose; a subsidiary of Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.<br />
2. Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers<br />
Association, Inc."<br />
3. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods.<br />
4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig unless otherwise indicated.<br />
5. Configuration: Single joint, Single joint with base and double joint with base classes<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
6. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Single or multi-ply phosphor-bronze bellows, copper<br />
pipe ends, and brass shrouds.<br />
a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded.<br />
b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: threaded.<br />
c. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0516 - 3 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
C. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.; a div. of Vibration Isolation Products of Texas, Inc.<br />
b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.<br />
c. Flexicraft Industries.<br />
d. Flex-Weld, Inc.<br />
e. Garlock Sealing Technologies.<br />
f. General Rubber Corporation.<br />
g. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co.<br />
h. Metraflex, Inc.<br />
i. Proco Products, Inc.<br />
j. Red Valve Company, Inc.<br />
k. Tozen Corporation.<br />
l. Unaflex.<br />
m. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
2. Standards: ASTM F 1123 and FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints<br />
and Flexible Pipe Connectors."<br />
3. Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber complying with FSA-NMEJ-703.<br />
4. Arch Type: Single or multiple arches with external control rods.<br />
5. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres with external control rods.<br />
6. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 150 psig at 220 deg F.<br />
7. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 5 and NPS 6: 140 psig at 200 deg F.<br />
8. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 8 to NPS 12: 140 psig at 180 deg F.<br />
9. Material for Water: EPDM.<br />
10. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings.<br />
2.2 GROOVED-JOINT EXPANSION JOINTS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Anvil International, Inc.<br />
2. Shurjoint Piping Products.<br />
3. Victaulic Company.<br />
B. Description: Factory-assembled expansion joint made of several grooved-end pipe nipples,<br />
couplings, and grooved joints.<br />
C. Standard: AWWA C606, for grooved joints.<br />
D. Nipples: Galvanized, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, steel pipe with grooved<br />
ends.<br />
E. Couplings: Five, flexible type for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM<br />
gasket suitable for cold and hot water, and bolts and nuts.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0516 - 4 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
2.3 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS<br />
A. Alignment Guides:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC.<br />
b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.<br />
c. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.<br />
d. Flexicraft Industries.<br />
e. Flex-Weld, Inc.<br />
f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.<br />
g. Metraflex, Inc.<br />
h. Senior Flexonics Pathway.<br />
i. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
j. U.S. Bellows, Inc.<br />
2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer<br />
cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to<br />
pipe.<br />
B. Anchor Materials:<br />
1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head.<br />
3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.<br />
4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in<br />
hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for<br />
application.<br />
a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.<br />
b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.<br />
c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.<br />
5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened<br />
portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy<br />
resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be<br />
installed.<br />
b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.<br />
3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0516 - 5 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
B. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint<br />
Manufacturers Association, Inc."<br />
C. Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-NMEJ-702.<br />
D. Install grooved-joint expansion joints to grooved-end steel piping<br />
3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or<br />
compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.<br />
B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including tee in<br />
main.<br />
C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including<br />
tee in riser.<br />
D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including<br />
tee in main.<br />
3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.<br />
B. Install two guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides nearest to<br />
expansion joint not more than four pipe diameters from expansion joint.<br />
C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.<br />
D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9<br />
and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.<br />
E. Anchor Attachments:<br />
1. Anchor Attachment to Black-Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and<br />
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."<br />
2. Anchor Attachment to Galvanized-Steel Pipe: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69,<br />
Type 42, riser clamp welded to anchor.<br />
3. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69,<br />
Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor.<br />
F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with<br />
ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.<br />
1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.<br />
2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0516 - 6 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 0516<br />
22 0516 - 7 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 0517<br />
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Sleeves and Stack-sleeve fittings.<br />
2. Sleeve-seal systems and Sleeve-seal fittings.<br />
3. Grout.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SLEEVES AND STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS<br />
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron<br />
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel<br />
collar; zinc coated.<br />
C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,<br />
with plain ends.<br />
D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded<br />
longitudinal joint<br />
E. Stack-Sleeve Fittings, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring, bolts,<br />
and nuts for membrane flashing.<br />
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
22 0517 - 1 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.<br />
2. CALPICO, Inc.<br />
3. Metraflex Company (The).<br />
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.<br />
5. Proco Products, Inc.<br />
B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space<br />
between piping and sleeve.<br />
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.<br />
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.<br />
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel.<br />
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length<br />
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.<br />
C. Sleeve-Seal Fittings - Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made<br />
for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center<br />
opening to match piping OD.<br />
2.3 GROUT<br />
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,<br />
hydraulic-cement grout.<br />
B. Characteristics: Non-shrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.<br />
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.<br />
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 SLEEVE AND STACK SLEEVE FITTING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.<br />
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to<br />
provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. Sleeves are not<br />
required for core-drilled holes.<br />
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls<br />
are constructed.<br />
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.<br />
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or<br />
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.<br />
2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal<br />
system.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0517 - 2 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.<br />
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.<br />
2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between<br />
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.<br />
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants<br />
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants<br />
specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."<br />
E. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.<br />
1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between<br />
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.<br />
2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane<br />
waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet<br />
Metal Flashing and Trim."<br />
3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.<br />
4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring<br />
is specified.<br />
5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.<br />
F. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe<br />
penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in<br />
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."<br />
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM AND SLEEVE-SEAL FITTING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service<br />
piping entries into building.<br />
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for<br />
sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,<br />
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and<br />
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a<br />
watertight seal.<br />
C. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.<br />
D. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls.<br />
Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.<br />
E. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.<br />
F. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.<br />
3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE<br />
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:<br />
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above and below Grade, all sizes, Cast-iron wall sleeves with<br />
water stop/anchor. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between<br />
piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0517 - 3 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
2. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade and below Grade, all sizes, Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeveseal<br />
system. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and<br />
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.<br />
3. Concrete Slabs above Grade, all sizes, Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.<br />
4. Interior Partitions, all sizes, Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 0517<br />
22 0517 - 4 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 0518<br />
ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Escutcheons.<br />
2. Floor plates.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 ESCUTCHEONS<br />
A. One-Piece, or Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener.<br />
B. One-Piece, or Split Plate Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip<br />
fasteners.<br />
2.2 FLOOR PLATES<br />
A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.<br />
B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors, where<br />
penetration is exposed to view and on exterior of building.<br />
22 0518 - 1 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD<br />
that completely covers opening.<br />
C. Furnish pipe Escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for<br />
unoccupied areas.<br />
D. Escutcheons for Moist Areas: Provide cast brass or sheet brass, solid or split hinged.<br />
E. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.<br />
F. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD<br />
that completely covers opening.<br />
1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.<br />
2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.<br />
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 0518<br />
22 0518 - 2 ESCUTCHEONS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 0519<br />
METERS AND GAGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.<br />
2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.<br />
3. Thermowells.<br />
4. Dial-type pressure gages.<br />
5. Gage attachments.<br />
6. Test plugs.<br />
7. Test-plug kits.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Section 221113 "Facility Water Distribution Piping" for domestic water meters and<br />
combined domestic and fire-protection water-service meters outside the building.<br />
2. Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water meters inside the building.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.<br />
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and<br />
maintenance manuals.<br />
22 0519 - 1 METERS AND GAGES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Ashcroft Inc.<br />
2. Ernst Flow Industries.<br />
3. Marsh Bellofram.<br />
4. Miljoco Corporation.<br />
5. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.<br />
6. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.<br />
7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.<br />
8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.<br />
9. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.<br />
10. Winters Instruments - U.S.<br />
B. Standard: ASME B40.200.<br />
C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch or 5-inch nominal diameter.<br />
D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F and<br />
deg C.<br />
E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle and rigid, bottom, with unified-inch screw<br />
threads.<br />
F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.<br />
G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.<br />
H. Window: Plain glass.<br />
I. Ring: Stainless steel.<br />
J. Element: Bimetal coil.<br />
K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.<br />
L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range.<br />
2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS<br />
A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Flo Fab Inc.<br />
b. Miljoco Corporation.<br />
c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0519 - 2 METERS AND GAGES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.<br />
e. Trerice, H. O. Co.<br />
f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.<br />
g. Winters Instruments - U.S.<br />
2. Standard: ASME B40.200.<br />
3. Case: Cast aluminum, 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.<br />
4. Case Form: Adjustable angle.<br />
5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.<br />
6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings<br />
graduated in deg F and deg C.<br />
7. Window: Glass.<br />
8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.<br />
9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.<br />
10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of<br />
1.5 percent of scale range.<br />
2.3 THERMOWELLS<br />
A. Thermowells:<br />
1. Standard: ASME B40.200.<br />
2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.<br />
3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.<br />
4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA.<br />
5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.<br />
6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.<br />
7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.<br />
8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.<br />
9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.<br />
10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.<br />
11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer<br />
connection.<br />
B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.<br />
2.4 PRESSURE GAGES<br />
A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.<br />
b. Ashcroft Inc.<br />
c. Ernst Flow Industries.<br />
d. Flo Fab Inc.<br />
e. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.<br />
f. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.<br />
g. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.<br />
h. Trerice, H. O. Co.<br />
i. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0519 - 3 METERS AND GAGES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
j. Weiss Instruments, Inc.<br />
k. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.<br />
l. Winters Instruments - U.S.<br />
2. Standard: ASME B40.100.<br />
3. Case: Liquid-filled type(s); cast aluminum; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.<br />
4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.<br />
5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and<br />
bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.<br />
6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.<br />
7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.<br />
8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.<br />
9. Window: Glass.<br />
10. Ring: Metal or Brass or Stainless steel.<br />
11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.<br />
2.5 GAGE ATTACHMENTS<br />
A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and<br />
piston or porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated<br />
piping.<br />
B. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.<br />
2.6 TEST PLUGS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Flow Design, Inc.<br />
2. Miljoco Corporation.<br />
3. National Meter, Inc.<br />
4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.<br />
5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.<br />
6. Trerice, H. O. Co.<br />
7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.<br />
8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.<br />
B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.<br />
C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended<br />
stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.<br />
D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.<br />
E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.<br />
F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0519 - 4 METERS AND GAGES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
2.7 TEST-PLUG KITS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Flow Design, Inc.<br />
2. Miljoco Corporation.<br />
3. National Meter, Inc.<br />
4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.<br />
5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.<br />
6. Trerice, H. O. Co.<br />
7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.<br />
8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.<br />
B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and<br />
carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of<br />
diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install thermowells with socket extending one-third of pipe diameter and in vertical position in<br />
piping tees.<br />
B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if<br />
required to match sizes.<br />
C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.<br />
D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.<br />
E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.<br />
F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect<br />
cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.<br />
G. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the<br />
most readable position.<br />
H. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.<br />
I. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids.<br />
J. Install test plugs in piping tees.<br />
K. Install thermometers in the following locations:<br />
1. Inlet and outlet of each water heater.<br />
2. Inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger.<br />
3. Inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank.<br />
4. Inlet and outlet of each remote domestic water chiller.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0519 - 5 METERS AND GAGES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
L. Install pressure gages in the following locations:<br />
1. Building water service entrance into building.<br />
2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure-reducing valve.<br />
3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump.<br />
3.2 CONNECTIONS<br />
A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance<br />
of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.<br />
3.3 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.<br />
3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE<br />
A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic water heater shall be the following:<br />
1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.<br />
B. Thermometers at inlets and outlets of each domestic water heat exchanger shall be[ one of] the<br />
following:<br />
1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.<br />
C. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each domestic hot-water storage tank shall be[ one of] the<br />
following:<br />
1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.<br />
D. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.<br />
3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE<br />
A. Scale Range for Domestic Cold-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F.<br />
B. Scale Range for Domestic Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F.<br />
3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE<br />
A. Pressure gages at discharge of each water service into building shall be:<br />
1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.<br />
B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each water pressure-reducing valve shall be:<br />
1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0519 - 6 METERS AND GAGES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each domestic water pump shall be:<br />
1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.<br />
3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE<br />
A. Scale Range for Water Service Piping: 0 to 160 psi.<br />
B. Scale Range for Domestic Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 0519<br />
22 0519 - 7 METERS AND GAGES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 220523<br />
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
A. This Section describes general requirements for valves common to most plumbing piping<br />
systems which are specified elsewhere in Division 22.<br />
1.02 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Submit the following Product Data for all valves under provisions of Section 01300: Body<br />
material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details,<br />
seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances,<br />
and installation instructions.<br />
B. Submit operating instructions and maintenance requirements for all valves.<br />
1.03 STANDARDS:<br />
A. All valves shall conform to applicable portions of the following standards and as required<br />
by the appropriate national and local codes.<br />
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)<br />
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)<br />
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)<br />
American Welding Society (AWS)<br />
American Water Works Association (AWWA)<br />
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)<br />
Commercial Standards, National Bureau of Standards (CS)<br />
Compressed Gas Association (CGA)<br />
Copper Development Association (CDA)<br />
Federal Specifications (FS)<br />
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS)<br />
B. Solenoid valves shall be UL listed, FM/AGA/ANSI and CSA approved.<br />
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:<br />
1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rusting and galvanic<br />
corrosion.<br />
2. Protect valve ends against mechanical damage to threads, flange faces, and weld<br />
end preps.<br />
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Globe and gate valves shall be closed to<br />
prevent rattling; ball and plug valves shall be open to minimize exposure of<br />
220523 - 1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
functional surfaces; butterfly valves shall be shipped closed or slightly open; and<br />
swing check valves shall be blocked in either closed or open position.<br />
B. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage:<br />
1. Valves shall be stored and protected against all dirt, debris and foreign material at<br />
all times.<br />
2. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall<br />
for storage.<br />
3. Protect valves against weather. Where practical, store valves indoors. Maintain<br />
valve temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor<br />
storage is necessary, support valves off the ground and protect in watertight<br />
enclosures.<br />
C. Handling: Valves whose size requires handling by a crane or lift shall be slung or rigged<br />
to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Handwheels and stems shall not be used as<br />
lifting or rigging points.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
2.02 VALVE FEATURES:<br />
1. Gate Valves: Nibco, Stockham, Hammond, Milwaukee.<br />
2. Ball Valves: Apollo, Nibco, Watts, Milwaukee, Stockham, Anvil.<br />
3. Eccentric Plug Balancing Valves: Keystone/Tyco, Milliken, DeZurik.<br />
4. Globe Valves: Nibco, Stockham, Hammond, Milwaukee.<br />
5. Swing Check Valves: Nibco, Stockham, Watts (threaded), Apollo, Milwaukee,<br />
Anvil (grooved only).<br />
6. Non-Slam Check Valves: Nibco, Keystone/Tyco, Milwaukee, Stockham,<br />
Centerline, Val-Matic, Metraflex, Technocheck, Golden Anderson, Anvil.<br />
7. Solenoid Valves: Magnatrol Valve Corp., Skinner, General Controls, Asco.<br />
A. General: Comply with MSS-92 1980 "Valve Users Manual."<br />
B. All valves of each type shall be of one manufacturer.<br />
C. Valve Design: Valves shall have rising stem, or rising stem outside screw and yoke design;<br />
except, non-rising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full operation of<br />
rising stem valves.<br />
D. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.<br />
(Control valves shall be sized for required flow, 3 psi pressure drop maximum.)<br />
E. Operators: Provide the following special operator features:<br />
1. Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn type.<br />
220523 - 2 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
2. Lever handle on quarter turn valves 6 inch and smaller, except plug valves.<br />
Provide one wrench for every group of plug valves within a room.<br />
3. Chainwheel operators for valves 2-1/2 inch and larger that are installed 7’-0” or<br />
higher above finished floor elevation. Provide chains to an elevation of 6’-3”<br />
above finished floor elevation.<br />
4. Worm gear operators of an enclosed weather-proof design shall be provided on<br />
all quarter turn valves 8 inches and larger.<br />
F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems to<br />
allow full operation of the valve without interference by the insulation.<br />
G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45.<br />
H. End Connections: As specified in the individual valve specifications.<br />
2.03 GATE VALVES:<br />
1. Threaded: Comply with ANSI B2.1.<br />
2. Flanged: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI<br />
B16.24 for bronze.<br />
3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a<br />
melting point below 840°F for gate, globe, and check valves and below<br />
421°F for ball valves.<br />
A. Gate Valves – 2” and smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 150 Class 200/300, body and bonnet of cast bronze<br />
conforming to ASTM B-62 for 150 psi / B-61 for 200/300 psi, threaded ends, solid wedge disc, union<br />
bonnet, rising stem, bronze gland, non-asbestos TFE impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel.<br />
Stockham Fig. B-120/B-122 B-132/B-145<br />
B. Gate Valves – 2-1/2” and larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125 /Class 250, iron body conforming to ASTM A-<br />
126 C1 B, bronze trim, 0 S & Y design, flanged ends, and non-asbestos TFE-impregnated packing.<br />
2.04 BALL VALVES:<br />
Stockham Fig. G-623 /F-667<br />
A. Ball Valves – 1” and smaller: MSS SP-110, ANSI B16.34, Class 150 WSP / 600 WOG,<br />
rated for 150 psi at 350°F, two-piece end-entry body style, bronze body conforming to<br />
ASTM B-584 (zinc content not exceeding 12%), full-port chrome-plated solid brass ball,<br />
15% glass reinforced RTFE seats, RTFE packing, adjustable packing nut, blow-out proof<br />
stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends or threaded ends to match<br />
piping system.<br />
Apollo 77C-100/200<br />
B. Ball Valves – 1-1/4” through 2” and for all silver soldered or brazed lines: MSS SP-110,<br />
ANSI B16.34, Class 150 WSP / 600 WOG, rated for 150 psi at 350°F. Three-piece body<br />
style, bronze body conforming to ASTM B-584 (zinc content not exceeding 12%), single<br />
220523 - 3 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
full-port stainless steel ball and stem of ASTM A-276 type 316, 15% glass reinforced RTFE<br />
seats, RTFE packing, blow-out proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder<br />
ends or threaded ends to match piping system.<br />
Apollo 82-100/200.<br />
2.05 ECCENTRIC PLUG BALANCING VALVES:<br />
A. All Sizes: 125/150 psi rated; cast iron, corrosion-resistant, permanently lubricated body;<br />
straightway pattern; EPDM encapsulated eccentric plug; lever actuators, except<br />
handwheels where indicated; and flanged ends. Provide memory stop feature.<br />
Milliken 600 series.<br />
B. 2” and smaller: At contractors option, provide combination flow measuring device and<br />
balancing valve, complete with venturi flow meter on P/T port, and ball valve for control;<br />
125/150 psi rated. Provide memory stop feature.<br />
2.06 GLOBE VALVES:<br />
A. Globe Valves - 2” and smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 150/300 body, bonnet, bonnet ring<br />
cast of bronze conforming to ASTM B-62/61, stainless steel 500 BHN disc, union bonnet,<br />
non-asbestos Teflon-impregnated stem packing, copper-silicon bronze stem, brass<br />
packing gland, and malleable iron handle.<br />
Stockham Fig. B-29/B-74<br />
B. Globe Valves – 2-1/2” and larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125/250, cast of bronze conforming<br />
to ASTM B-62/61, bolted bonnet bronze mounted, rising stem / Teflon disc with bronze<br />
disc holder / bronze disc, OS & Y, non-asbestos Teflon-impregnated stem packing, and<br />
cast iron or malleable iron hand wheel.<br />
2.07 CHECK VALVES:<br />
Stockham Fig. G-512/F-532<br />
A. Swing Check Valves – 2-1/2” and smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, cast bronze body and<br />
cap conforming to ASTM B-62, horizontal swing design, Y-pattern, bronze/teflon disc,<br />
stainless steel pin, and threaded or solder ends. Class 150 valves meeting the above<br />
specifications may be used where pressure requires or where Class 125 is not available.<br />
B. Swing Check Valves – 2-1/2” to 3”: MSS SP-71, Class 125, cast of bronze conforming to<br />
ASTM B-62/61, horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring,<br />
and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the<br />
line. For sewage ejector and sump pump discharge swing check valves 2-1/2” and larger,<br />
provide outside lever with weight or spring to assist disc in closing rapidly.<br />
C. Non-Slam Check Valves – 2” and smaller: Bronze body, 200 psi @ 250 degrees F.,<br />
threaded ends, resilient seats, center guided spring-loaded disk.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
220523 - 4 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
D. Non-Slam Check Valves – 2-1/2” and larger: Class 125 cast bronze or stainless steel<br />
body, replaceable lapped bronze seat and balanced twin bronze flappers or bronze center<br />
guided disc and stainless steel trim. Valve shall be designed to open and close at<br />
approximately one foot differential pressure. Twin flappers or center guided disc shall be<br />
loaded with a stainless steel spring to assure even non-slam checking action. Seals shall<br />
be EPDM.<br />
2.08 DRAIN VALVES:<br />
A. For HVAC and plumbing hydronic systems, provide cast bronze ball valve with threaded<br />
hose end and cap with chain.<br />
2.09 SOLENOID VALVES:<br />
Apollo Fig. 78-100/78-200 Series<br />
A. Solenoid valves shall consist of a solenoid (electromagnet) with its core and a valve body<br />
containing one or more orifices. The solenoid shall be mounted directly on the valve<br />
body.<br />
B. Response time from fully open or closed to fully closed or open shall be slow acting.<br />
C. Solenoid valves shall be 2-/3-way type valves.<br />
D. Solenoid valves shall be normally open or normally closed as required for proper<br />
operation of the system, for protection against freezing and fire, and for safety.<br />
E. Solenoid enclosures shall meet the ICS-6 ANSI/NEMA standard and UL standards 429,<br />
508 and/or 1002 as follows:<br />
1. Type 1: General Purpose.<br />
2. Type 2: Drip proof.<br />
3. Type 3 and 3S: Raintight, dust tight and sleet (ice) resistant.<br />
4. Type 3R: Rainproof, sleet (ice) resistant.<br />
5. Type 4: Watertight and dust tight.<br />
6. Type 4X: Watertight, dust tight and corrosion resistant.<br />
7. Type 6: Submersible.<br />
8. Type 6P: Submersible, prolonged submersion at a limited depth.<br />
9. Type 7: Explosion proof, Class I, Division 1, Group A (acetylene); B (hydrogen); C<br />
(ethyl-ether vapors, ethylene or cyclopropane); D (gasoline, hexane, naphtha,<br />
benzene, butane, propane, alcohol, acetone, benzol, lacquer, solvent vapors or<br />
natural gas).<br />
10. Type 9: Dust-ignition proof, Class II, Group E (metal dust); F (carbon black coal<br />
or coke dust); G (flour starch or grain dust).<br />
11. Operating temperatures shall range from 185°F to 842°F for T1 through T6 code<br />
numbers.<br />
F. Parts in contact with fluid shall be brass, bronze, or stainless steel; core tube, 305 stainless<br />
steel; core and plug nut, 430°F stainless steel; seal, BUNA “N"; shading coil, copper; disc,<br />
BUNA “N" and Nylon; spring, 302 stainless steel (General Service).<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
220523 - 5 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
G. Manual reset safety shut-off valve shall open manually and close upon interruption of<br />
current.<br />
H. Electric current shall be AC of voltage shown on Division 16 drawings.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION:<br />
A. Install valves in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, including recommended<br />
lubrication.<br />
B. Examine valve interior through the end ports for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter<br />
and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used which prevent disc<br />
movement during shipping and handling.<br />
C. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally<br />
significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation.<br />
Following examination, return the valve closure member to the position in which it was<br />
shipped.<br />
D. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (out-of-round or local<br />
indentation) and cleanliness.<br />
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions which might cause leakage. Check bolting for<br />
proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size and material,<br />
and for freedom from defects and damage.<br />
F. Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign<br />
materials, and proper alignment.<br />
G. All valves shall be installed so that they are accessible and serviceable, and such that full<br />
length operating handles may be used without interference from structure or other pipes<br />
and/or equipment.<br />
H. Isolation valves shall be installed:<br />
1. In piping at each and every piece of equipment.<br />
2. In piping whenever said pipe enters or leaves an equipment room.<br />
3. At all branch take-offs from mains.<br />
4. Where shown on Drawings.<br />
I. Label all valves with tags indicating service and identification number. Tags shall be 1-<br />
1/2” in diameter, brass, and with 1/4”-high letters. Securely fasten with chain and hook.<br />
Match service abbreviations given on mechanical drawings.<br />
3.02 VALVE SELECTION:<br />
A. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select valves<br />
with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
220523 - 6 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
1. Copper Tube – 2” and smaller: Soldered ends, except in heating hot water and<br />
low pressure steam service, where threaded ends shall be used.<br />
2. Steel Pipe – 2” and smaller: Threaded or grooved-end.<br />
3. Steel Pipe – 2-1/2” and larger: Flanged or grooved-end.<br />
4. At all piping hot taps, provide a gate valve at the hot tap and a butterfly valve for<br />
shut-off service. Hot taps shall be provided only where approved by the Engineer.<br />
3.03 VALVE INSTALLATIONS:<br />
Valve Application Table<br />
SERVICE VALVE TYPE<br />
Plumbing Water Services – 2” and Ball Valve<br />
smaller<br />
Plumbing Water Services – 2-1/2” Butterfly Valve<br />
and larger<br />
Plumbing Pressure Reducing Bypass – Ball Valve<br />
2” and smaller<br />
Plumbing Pressure Reducing Bypass – Butterfly Valve<br />
2-1/2” and larger<br />
Plumbing Balancing – 2” and Calibrated Balancing Valve<br />
smaller<br />
Plumbing Balancing – 2-1/2” Eccentric Plug Balancing Valve<br />
and larger<br />
Plumbing Check Valves – 2” Swing Check<br />
and smaller<br />
Plumbing Pump Discharge Non-Slam Swing Check<br />
Check Valve – all sizes<br />
Sewage Ejector and/or Sump Pump Swing Check<br />
Discharge Check Valve – all sizes<br />
Condensate Piping Shut-off – 2” Ball Valve<br />
and smaller<br />
A. Locate valves for easy access, and provide separate support where necessary.<br />
B. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to allow<br />
equipment removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on flanged<br />
devices.<br />
C. Install 3-valve bypass around each pressure-reducing valve using throttling type valves.<br />
D. Gate and globe valves shall be installed with the stem in the upright position. In overhead<br />
horizontal piping, ball valves shall be installed with the handle at the side or bottom of the<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
220523 - 7 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
piping. Butterfly valves shall be installed with the stem within 45 degrees of the horizontal<br />
position. The handle of quarter turn valves shall point in the direction of flow when the<br />
valve is open. Quarter turn valves with hand wheels or chain wheels shall be located so<br />
that the position indicator is visible from the floor without the use of a ladder or climbing<br />
on equipment or piping.<br />
E. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow and as follows:<br />
1. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin level.<br />
2. Wafer Check Valves: Install between two flanges in horizontal or vertical<br />
upward flow position.<br />
3. Lift Check Valves: Install in piping line with stem upright and plumb.<br />
3.04 SOLDER CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.<br />
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket, using steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire<br />
brush, to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in same manner.<br />
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.<br />
D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.<br />
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves with composition discs.<br />
F. Insert tube into valve socket, ensuring that the end of the tube rests against the shoulder<br />
inside the valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.<br />
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed<br />
solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating of the<br />
valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth<br />
or brush.<br />
3.05 BRAZED CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Protect valves from temperatures which exceed the valve material temperature limitations<br />
as recommended by the valve manufacturer.<br />
B. Disassemble 3-piece ball valves prior to brazing.<br />
3.06 THREADED CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or<br />
wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.<br />
B. Align threads at point of assembly.<br />
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry<br />
seal threading is specified).<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
220523 - 8 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
D. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the<br />
pipe is being threaded.<br />
3.07 FLANGED CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.<br />
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and<br />
gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten<br />
bolts gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench.<br />
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Testing: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final<br />
adjusting and balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop<br />
leaks; replace valve if leak persists.<br />
3.09 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and<br />
prepare to receive finish painting or insulation.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 0523<br />
220523 - 9 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 0529<br />
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT<br />
A. Extent of supports and anchors required by this Section is indicated on drawings and/or<br />
specified in other Division 23 sections.<br />
B. Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following:<br />
1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports.<br />
2. Vertical-Piping Clamps.<br />
3. Hanger-Rod Attachments.<br />
4. Building Attachments.<br />
5. Saddles and Shields.<br />
6. Spring Hangers and Supports.<br />
7. Miscellaneous Materials.<br />
8. Roof Equipment Supports.<br />
9. Anchors.<br />
10. Equipment Supports.<br />
C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as<br />
part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and<br />
anchors of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in<br />
similar service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to<br />
product materials and installation of supports and anchors.<br />
2. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components shall be listed and<br />
labeled by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems.<br />
3. Duct Hangers: Comply with SMACNA Duct Manuals.<br />
4. MSS Standard Compliance:<br />
a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and<br />
manufacture comply with MSS SP-58.<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation<br />
instructions, for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support<br />
22 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each<br />
required pipe hanger and support.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of<br />
support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of<br />
assembly of components.<br />
C. Submit product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying<br />
that their products meet the specified requirements.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and<br />
anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in the Operating and<br />
Maintenance Manual, in accordance with the requirements of Division 23.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
1. Pipe Hangers and Supports: B-Line Systems Inc.; Carpenter and Patterson, Inc.;<br />
Fee & Mason Mfg. Co., Div. of Figgie International; Anvil Corp.; PHD<br />
Manufacturing, Inc.; Elcen Metal Products Company; Michigan Hanger Company;<br />
Unistrut Metal Framing System; Hubbard Enterprises (supports for domestic water<br />
piping); Specialty Products Co. (supports for domestic water piping).<br />
2. Saddles, Shields and Thermal Shield Inserts: Anvil Corp.; Pipe Shields, Inc.; B-<br />
Line; Insulated Saddle Shield Insert Product, Inc.; Michigan Hanger Company;<br />
Value Engineered Products, Inc.<br />
3. Roof Equipment Supports: Custom Curb, Inc.; Pate Co.; Thycurb, Div. of Thybar<br />
Corp.; Vent Products, Inc.<br />
4. Concrete Inserts and Anchors: Phillips Drill Company; Michigan Hanger<br />
Company; Unistrut Metal Framing Systems; Elcen Metal Products Company; ITW<br />
Ramset/Red Head; Hilti; B-Line.<br />
2.02 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS:<br />
A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and<br />
manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58.<br />
1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and<br />
equipment that will not have field-applied finish.<br />
2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where<br />
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.<br />
B. Adjustable Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1.<br />
1. Steel Pipe, sizes 3/8” thru 12”, Anvil fig. 260.<br />
2. Copper Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 4”, Anvil fig. CT-65.<br />
3. Cast Iron Pipe, sizes 4” thru 24”, Anvil fig. 590.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
C. Adjustable Swivel Rings: MSS Type 10.<br />
1. Steel Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 2”, Anvil fig. 69; size 2-1/2” thru 8”, Anvil figs. 69 or<br />
70.<br />
2. Copper Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 4”, Anvil fig. CT-69.<br />
D. Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 8.<br />
1. Steel Pipe, sizes 3/4” thru 20”, Anvil fig. 261.<br />
2. Copper Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 4”, Anvil fig. CT-121.<br />
E. U Bolts: MSS Type 24.<br />
1. Steel Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 36”, Anvil fig. 137.<br />
2. Copper Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 8”, Anvil fig. 137C.<br />
F. Straps: MSS Type 26.<br />
1. Steel Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 4”, Anvil fig. 262.<br />
G. Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37.<br />
1. Steel Pipe, sizes 4” thru 12”, Anvil fig. 259.<br />
H. Yoke & Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43.<br />
1. Sizes 2-1/2” thru 20”, Anvil fig. 181.<br />
2. Hanger Rods: Continuous threaded steel, sizes as specified.<br />
I. Hangers:<br />
1. Hot Pipes:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Sizes 1/2” through 1-1/2”: Adjustable wrought steel ring.<br />
b. Sizes 2” through 5”: Adjustable wrought steel clevis.<br />
c. Sizes 6” and larger: Adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.<br />
2. Cold Pipes:<br />
a. Sizes 1/2” through 1-1/2”: Adjustable wrought steel ring.<br />
b. Sizes 2” and larger: Adjustable wrought steel clevis.<br />
3. Multiple or Trapeze: Structural steel channel (with web vertical), with welded<br />
spacers and hanger rods. Provide cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes six<br />
inches and larger. Provide hanger rods one size larger than required for largest<br />
pipe in trapeze. If the deflection at center of trapeze exceeds 1/360 of the<br />
distance between the end hangers, install an additional hanger at mid-span or<br />
use a larger channel.<br />
J. Wall Supports for Horizontal Pipe:<br />
1. Sizes 1/2” through 3-1/2”: Steel offset hook.<br />
22 0529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
2. Sizes 4” and larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. Provide<br />
adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe 200° F and higher and sizes<br />
six inches and larger.<br />
K. Supports for Vertical Pipe: Steel riser clamp.<br />
L. Upper Attachments:<br />
1. For attaching hanger rods to structural steel I-beams:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Provide adjustable beam clamp, Elcen No. 95, with No. 235 rod socket or<br />
equal. Attach to bottom flange of beam.<br />
2. For attaching hanger rods to bar joists:<br />
a. When bottom chord is constructed of structural steel angles, provide Elcen<br />
No. 84H square washer or equal with nut. Place hanger rod between<br />
backs of the two angles and support with the washer on top of the angles.<br />
Spot weld washer to angles.<br />
3. When bottom chord is constructed of round bars, provide Elcen No. 137 bar joist<br />
washer or equal.<br />
2.03 CONCRETE INSERTS AND ANCHORS:<br />
A. Inserts: Case shall be of galvanized steel with square threaded concrete insert nut for<br />
hanger rod connection; 3/4” lateral adjustment; top lugs for reinforcing rods, and nail<br />
holes for attaching to forms. Michigan Hanger models 355 and 355N or equal by<br />
Unistrut or Elcen. This type of upper attachment is to be used for all areas having pouredin-place<br />
concrete construction.<br />
1. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.<br />
B. Provide fasteners attached to concrete ceilings that are vibration and shock resistant.<br />
Provide hangers for piping and cuts attached to concrete construction with one of the<br />
following types:<br />
1. Concrete insert per MSS SP-58, Type 18.<br />
2. Powder driven fasteners, subject to approval. Each fastener shall be capable of<br />
holding a test load of 1000 pounds, but the actual load shall not exceed 50<br />
pounds.<br />
3. Self-drilling expansion shields. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the<br />
proof test load required.<br />
4. Machine bolt expansion anchor. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the<br />
proof test load required.<br />
C. Anchors: Carbon steel, zinc plated. Installation shall be in holes drilled with carbidetipped<br />
drill bits or by use of self-drilling anchors.<br />
1. Provide anchors suitable for the location of installation and designed to withstand<br />
all forces and movements acting on the anchor. Pipe anchors shall be<br />
manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-58. Provide a safety factor of four for<br />
the anchor installation.<br />
22 0529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
2.04 SADDLES AND THERMAL SHIELD INSERTS:<br />
A. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching<br />
adjoining insulation.<br />
1. Anvil Figs. 160-165.<br />
B. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; 180° arc, minimum 20 ga. galvanized steel, and<br />
minimum 12” long, to prevent crushing of insulation.<br />
1. Anvil Fig. 167.<br />
C. Thermal Shield Inserts: Provide 100-psi minimum compressive strength, waterproof,<br />
asbestos-free calcium silicate, encased with a sheet metal enclosure. Insert and shield<br />
shall cover the entire circumference of the pipe and shall be of length recommended by<br />
the manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation. For cold piping, calcium silicate<br />
shall extend beyond the sheet metal shield to allow overlap of the vapor barrier. Where<br />
piping 4” and larger is supported on trapeze or pipe rollers, provide double thickness<br />
shields. For piping 12” and larger, provide 600 psi calcium silicate structural insert.<br />
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:<br />
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A-36.<br />
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C-150, Type I or Type III) and clean, uniformly<br />
graded, natural sand (ASTM C-404, Size No. 2). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0<br />
parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and<br />
hydration.<br />
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld<br />
steel in accordance with AWS standards.<br />
D. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated<br />
steel, consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding<br />
spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any),<br />
and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated<br />
travel.<br />
2.06 ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:<br />
A. General: Construct roof equipment supports using minimum 18-ga galvanized steel with<br />
fully mitered and welded corners, 3” cant, internal bulkhead reinforcing, integral base<br />
plates, pressure treated wood nailer, 18-ga galvanized steel counter-flashing and rigid<br />
insulation.<br />
B. Configuration: Construct of sizes as indicated, and compensate for slope in roof so that<br />
top of support is dead level.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0529 - 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do<br />
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner<br />
acceptable to Installer.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION:<br />
A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building<br />
structural work has been completed in areas where these items are to be installed. Correct<br />
inadequacies, including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other<br />
building structural attachments. Review Structural Drawings to obtain structural support<br />
limitations.<br />
B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet<br />
at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection<br />
and testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination<br />
with work of this Section, and Architect/Engineer for the purpose of reviewing material<br />
selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with the<br />
requirements specified. Provide Shop Drawings showing methods of installation and<br />
support locations from structure.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS:<br />
A. Install building attachments within concrete or on structural steel. Space attachments<br />
within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional<br />
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion<br />
joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is<br />
placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500<br />
psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.<br />
B. New <strong>Construction</strong>:<br />
1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of<br />
reinforced concrete beams wherever practicable.<br />
2. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in<br />
concrete for inserts carrying pipe larger than 4” or ducts larger than 60” wide.<br />
3. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface.<br />
4. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide rod<br />
with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab if construction above permits.<br />
C. Existing <strong>Construction</strong>:<br />
1. In existing concrete construction, drill into concrete slab and insert and tighten<br />
expansion anchor bolt. Connect anchor bolt to hanger rod. Care must be taken<br />
in existing concrete construction not to sever reinforcement rods or tension wires.<br />
3.04 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0529 - 6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
A. Hangers for single pipes shall be adjustable clevis hangers, zinc-plated for steel pipes and<br />
copper-plated for copper pipes. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be oversized to<br />
accommodate pipe insulation thickness.<br />
B. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from<br />
building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel<br />
runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze<br />
hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-<br />
69. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space<br />
hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe.<br />
Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from<br />
other piping.<br />
C. Install hangers and supports complete with all necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers<br />
and other accessories.<br />
D. Provide electrolysis isolators at all hangers and supports for domestic water, condenser<br />
water, and other water lines which are not insulated.<br />
E. Prevent electrolysis and abrasion in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and<br />
supports which are plastic coated, or with EPDM isolation strips. Duct tape or copper<br />
coated hangers are not acceptable.<br />
F. Support fire water piping independently from other piping systems.<br />
G. Install hangers and supports to allow for controlled movement of piping systems, to permit<br />
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,<br />
expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. Install hangers and supports within<br />
1’– 0” of each horizontal elbow.<br />
H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and<br />
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.<br />
I. Provide vibration isolators on the first three supports upstream and downstream of<br />
equipment equipped with flexible connectors such as pumps, chillers, cooling towers, etc.<br />
J. Pipe Sloping: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe sloping, and so that<br />
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31.9 Building Services Piping Code are not<br />
exceeded.<br />
K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements:<br />
1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps<br />
projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.<br />
2. Saddles: Install protection saddles, MSS Type 39, where supported by pipe rollers.<br />
Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation.<br />
3. Shields:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Install galvanized steel 180° insulation protection shields on all insulated<br />
piping of sizes 2” and smaller, except where required to be clamped.<br />
Where necessary to prevent dislocation, strap shield to pipe with wire ties<br />
or "Zip Strips." Insulation shall be continuous through hanger.<br />
b. Insulation lengths and galvanized steel saddle lengths and gauges<br />
(minimums) shall comply with Table 1 below. Where pipe hanger spacing<br />
22 0529 - 7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
exceeds 10 feet, a second layer (180°) steel shield shall be used for<br />
additional strength.<br />
TABLE 1<br />
Pipe Size 1/2” to 2” 2-1/2” to 5” 6” to 10” 12” to 18” 20” to 24”<br />
Insulation Length (in.) 6 9 9 12 24<br />
Shield Length (in.) 4 6 6 9 18<br />
Gauge of Steel* 24 20 16 16 16<br />
*Bottom saddle only; top saddle may be one gauge lighter.<br />
4. Thermal Inserts: Provide a 360° insert of high density water-proofed calcium<br />
silicate at all supports for all insulated piping larger than 2” and for all piping<br />
required to be clamped. Insulation inserts shall extend one inch beyond sheet<br />
metal shield on all chilled water lines. Provide 180° inserts at clevis and roller<br />
hangers. Provide 360° inserts for all trapeze and clamped supports.<br />
L. Except where governed by more stringent local codes, install piping hangers with the<br />
following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing as indicated in Table 2 below:<br />
Pipe Material Pipe Size<br />
TABLE 2<br />
Max. Hanger<br />
Spacing<br />
Min. Hanger Rod<br />
Diameter<br />
Steel, Schedule 40 & 80, filled with 1/2" 5'-0" 3/8"<br />
water 3/4" 6'-0" 3/8"<br />
1" 7'-0" 3/8"<br />
1-1/4" 8'-0" 3/8"<br />
1-1/2" 9'-0" 3/8"<br />
2" 10'-0" 3/8"<br />
2-1/2" 11'-0" 1/2"<br />
3" 12'-0" 1/2"<br />
4" 14'-0" 5/8"<br />
5" 16'-0" 5/8"<br />
6" 17'-0" 3/4"<br />
8" 19'-0" 7/8"<br />
10" 22'-0" 7/8"<br />
12" 23'-0" 7/8"<br />
Steel, Std. Weight, filled with water 14" 25'-0" 1"<br />
16" 27'-0" 1"<br />
18" 28'-0" 1"<br />
20" to 24" 30'-0" 1-1/2"<br />
Copper, Types K, L, M and DWV 1/2" 6'-0" 3/8"<br />
3/4", 1" 8'-0" 3/8"<br />
22 0529 - 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1-1/4" through 2" 10'-0" 3/8"<br />
2-1/2" through 5" 12'-0" 1/2"<br />
6" through 8" 14'-0" 3/4"<br />
Note: Maximum hanger spacings shown in Table 2 are based on maximum sag of 0.1” between<br />
hangers for straight pipe. Hanger spacing must be reduced to compensate for any valves and/or<br />
fittings installed in the pipe run. Spacing shall limit sag to 0.1” between hangers. Minimum<br />
hanger spacing for fire protection piping shall be per appropriate NFPA requirements.<br />
M. Support cast iron piping, in addition to the requirements of Table 3, as follows:<br />
1. Hub & Spigot – All sizes: One hanger to each joint, minimum.<br />
2. No-Hub – All sizes:<br />
a. With Clamp-All and Anaheim Series 4000 stainless steel couplings and<br />
MG cast iron couplings: one hanger to each joint.<br />
b. With all other stainless steel band-type couplings: one hanger to each<br />
side of joint.<br />
3. Support all horizontal cast iron pipe within 18 inches of each joint.<br />
4. Use hanger rods same size as required for steel.<br />
5. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each story height and at its base. Secure vertical<br />
hub-and-spigot pipe immediately below the hub. Support vertical no-hub pipe so<br />
that the weight is carried from the pipe to the support and not from the joint to the<br />
support.<br />
N. Place a hanger within one foot (0.305 m) of each horizontal elbow.<br />
O. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) minimum after piping<br />
is erected.<br />
P. Support vertical steel and copper piping at every story height, but at not more than 15-foot<br />
intervals for steel and cast iron and 10-foot intervals for copper.<br />
Q. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide trapeze<br />
hangers. All hanger members shall be sized with 5-to-1 safety factor. Verify load bearing<br />
capacity of structure before installation of trapeze hangers.<br />
R. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.<br />
S. Support steam supply and condensate return pipe runs on adjustable roller hangers.<br />
T. Each pipe drop to equipment shall be adequately supported. All supporting lugs or guides<br />
shall be securely anchored to the building structure.<br />
U. Securely anchor and support plumbing domestic water piping in chases or walls. Use<br />
factory manufactured clamps and brackets connected to fixture carriers, wall studs or floor.<br />
Wires or straps will not be permitted.<br />
1. When copper supplies are connected to flush valves, support the tubing by the<br />
studs or by a fixture carrier, not by clamping to waste/vent piping.<br />
22 0529 - 9 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
2. Prevent copper tubing from making contact with steel brackets, using fire retardant<br />
polyethylene inserts or other dielectric insulating material. Duct tape shall not be<br />
used.<br />
V. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the<br />
following:<br />
1. In the event a self-drilling expansion shield or machine bolt expansion shield is<br />
considered to have been installed improperly, the Contractor shall make an<br />
acceptable replacement or demonstrate the stability of the anchor by performing<br />
an on-site test under which the anchor will be subjected to a load equal to twice<br />
the actual load.<br />
2. Powder-driven fasteners may be used only where they will be concealed after<br />
construction is complete. Where an occasional fastener appears to be improperly<br />
installed, additional fastener(s) shall be driven nearby (not closer than 6 inches) in<br />
undisturbed concrete. Where it is considered that many fasteners are improperly<br />
installed, the Contractor shall test load any 50 successively driven fasteners. If 10<br />
percent or more of these fasteners fail, the Contractor shall utilize other fastening<br />
means as approved and at no additional cost to the Owner.<br />
3. Hangers for piping and ductwork shall be attached to cellular steel floor decks<br />
with steel plates and bolted rods conforming to the steel deck manufacturer's<br />
requirements. Where the individual hanger load exceeds the capacity of a single<br />
floor deck attachment, steel angles, beams or channels shall be provided to span<br />
the number of floor deck attachments required.<br />
4. Welding may be used for securing hangers to steel structural members. Welded<br />
attachments shall be designed so that the fiber stress at any point of the weld or<br />
attachment will not exceed the fiber stress in the hanger rod.<br />
3.05 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS:<br />
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by<br />
ANSI B31.9, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.<br />
B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to<br />
structure. Comply with ANSI B31.9 and with AWS Standard D1.1.<br />
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with<br />
expansion unit manufacturer’s written instructions, to control movement to compensators.<br />
D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe<br />
runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make<br />
provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and<br />
contraction of piping.<br />
3.06 SHEET METAL DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:<br />
A. Provide in accordance with SMACNA HVAC duct construction standards.<br />
B. Provide also in the following locations:<br />
1. 2” to 24” from flexible connections of fans.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0529 - 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
2. 2” to 24” from the outlets or flexible connections of VAV control units or mixing<br />
boxes.<br />
3. 12” to 36” from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch ducts.<br />
4. 2” to 12” from the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums.<br />
5. 2” to 24” from fire damper break-away joints.<br />
6. At throat and heel of round or square elbows 48” or greater in width.<br />
3.07 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:<br />
A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support<br />
equipment above floor.<br />
B. All steel work shall be in conformance with the requirements of the AISC Specification for<br />
the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. Material shall<br />
conform to ASTM A-36.<br />
C. Bases and supports shall be constructed as detailed on approved shop drawings provided<br />
by the Contractor.<br />
D. All structural steel shall receive one coat of industrial enamel primer in the shop after all<br />
fabrication welding is complete. Paint all field joints with one coat of industrial enamel<br />
primer. After all steel is properly primed, paint with two coats of exterior grade enamel.<br />
Color to be as selected by the Architect.<br />
E. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment.<br />
F. Concrete bases for mechanical equipment indoors and outdoors will be provided by the<br />
General Contractor only if shown on the architectural or structural drawings. Otherwise,<br />
all bases shall be provided by this Contractor.<br />
G. For inertia bases, see Section 230548.<br />
H. Provide housekeeping bases for all floor-mounted mechanical equipment (pumps, air<br />
handlers, water heaters, boilers, chillers, tanks, etc.). Bases shall be 4” thick minimum,<br />
and extended 6” beyond machinery bedplates. Coordinate location and size with the<br />
General Contractor.<br />
I. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper size and location of all bases and shall<br />
furnish all required anchor bolts and sleeves. If bases are provided by the General<br />
Contractor, furnish him with templates showing the bolt locations.<br />
J. Equipment shall be secured to the bases with anchor bolts of ample size. Bolts shall have<br />
bottom plates and pipe sleeves and shall be securely imbedded in the concrete. All<br />
machinery shall be grouted under the entire bearing surface. After grout has set, all<br />
wedges, shims and jack bolts shall be removed and the space filled with non-shrinking<br />
grout. This Contractor shall provide lead washers at all equipment anchor bolts.<br />
K. Construct equipment supports above floor of structural steel members or steel pipe and<br />
fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.<br />
L. Provide rigid anchors for ducts and pipes immediately after vibration isolation connections<br />
to equipment. See also Section 230548.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0529 - 11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
3.08 PREFABRICATED ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:<br />
A. Equipment Bases:<br />
1. Equipment base shall be solid top equipment base with stepped cant to match<br />
roof insulation. Base shall pitch to match roof pitch and provide level unit<br />
installation.<br />
2. Base shall be constructed of reinforced 18-gauge galvanized steel with all welded<br />
components, full mitered corners, factory installed 1-1/2” thick rigid fiberglass<br />
insulation, wood nailer, and galvanized steel counterflashing. Base shall be<br />
shipped as one piece.<br />
B. Equipment Rails:<br />
1. Equipment rail shall be constructed of 18-gauge galvanized steel shell, base plate,<br />
and counterflashing with factory installed wood nailer, fully mitered end sections,<br />
and stepped cant to match roof insulation. Rails shall pitch to match roof pitch<br />
and provide level installation.<br />
C. All supports shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.<br />
3.09 FLASHING AND SAFING:<br />
A. Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through weather- or waterproofed<br />
walls, floors, or roofs.<br />
B. Provide lead flashing around ducts and pipes passing from equipment rooms, installed<br />
according to manufacturer's data for sound control.<br />
3.10 METAL FABRICATION:<br />
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment<br />
supports. Install and align fabricated anchors at indicated locations.<br />
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that<br />
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.<br />
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc<br />
welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding<br />
work, and the following:<br />
3.11 ADJUSTING:<br />
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and<br />
corrosion resistance of base metals.<br />
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.<br />
3. Remove welding flux immediately.<br />
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and<br />
contours at welded surfaces match adjacent contours.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0529 - 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to<br />
achieve indicated slope of pipe.<br />
B. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds<br />
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for<br />
shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements for touch-up of field-painted<br />
surfaces.<br />
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.<br />
C. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply<br />
galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A-780.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 0529<br />
22 0529 - 13 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
PLUMBING PIPING AND<br />
EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 0548<br />
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
A. Extent of vibration control work required by this Section is indicated on drawings and<br />
schedules, and/or specified in other Division 22 sections.<br />
1. All plumbing equipment and piping as noted or in the specification shall be<br />
mounted on vibration isolators to prevent the transmission of vibration and<br />
mechanically transmitted sound to the building structure. Vibration isolators shall<br />
be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably<br />
uniform deflection.<br />
2. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with component<br />
manufacturer’s and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict occurs<br />
between the manufacturer's or construction standards, the most stringent shall<br />
apply.<br />
3. Any variance from or non-compliance with these specification requirements shall<br />
be corrected by the contractor in an approved manner.<br />
B. The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Vibration isolation for all plumbing systems/equipment, including, but not limited<br />
to, the following: Pumps (all types)<br />
2. Vibration isolation for piping.<br />
3. Equipment isolation bases.<br />
4. Flexible piping connections.<br />
C. Vibration control products furnished as an integral part of factory-fabricated equipment<br />
shall be accepted only if they fully comply with the requirements of this Section.<br />
D. For additional and supplemental requirements, refer to other Division 22 sections for<br />
equipment foundations; hangers; sealants; gaskets; requirements of electrical connections<br />
to equipment isolated on vibration control products;<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration<br />
control products, of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in<br />
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
1. Except as otherwise indicated, vibration control products shall be obtained from a<br />
single manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer.<br />
2. Engage manufacturer to provide technical supervision of installation of support<br />
isolation and associated inertia bases.<br />
22 0548 - 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions<br />
for each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection,<br />
and location for each product furnished.<br />
1. Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness,<br />
natural frequency and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment,<br />
detailing compliance with the specification.<br />
2. For spring units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid-compression<br />
height, operating height, fatigue characteristics, ratio of horizontal to vertical<br />
stiffness, and basis of spring-rating selection for range of loading weights.<br />
3. Include detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing<br />
vibration isolators by referencing numbered descriptive drawings.<br />
4. Include performance certifications from manufacturers.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating<br />
dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.<br />
Detail bases, and show location of equipment anchoring points coordinated with<br />
equipment manufacturer's shop drawings.<br />
1. Submit shop drawings showing structural design and details of inertia bases, steel<br />
beam bases and other custom-fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's<br />
submitted data.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Furnish templates, anchor bolts and sleeves for equipment bases,<br />
foundations and other support systems for coordination of vibration<br />
isolation with other work.<br />
b. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment.<br />
2. Submit shop drawings indicating scope of vibration isolation work and locations of<br />
units and flexible connections. Indicate support isolation points for piping and<br />
ductwork, including risers and inertia bases.<br />
a. Include schedule of units, showing size or manufacturer's part number,<br />
and weight supported and resulting deflection for each unit.<br />
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of vibration control product.<br />
Include this data, product data and shop drawings in the Operating and Maintenance<br />
Manual, in accordance with requirements of Divisions 23.<br />
1.04 CODE AND STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS:<br />
A. Applicable Codes and Standards:<br />
1. The International Building Code (IBC) as published by the International<br />
Conference of Building officials.<br />
2. All State and Local Codes.<br />
3. ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, Sound and Vibration Control.<br />
1.05 MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITY:<br />
A. Manufacturer of vibration isolation equipment shall have the following responsibilities:<br />
22 0548 - 2 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1.06 RELATED WORK:<br />
1. Determine vibration isolator sizes and locations.<br />
2. Provide vibration isolation units as scheduled or otherwise specified.<br />
3. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to ensure<br />
proper installation and performance.<br />
A. Housekeeping Pads: Details and design of housekeeping pad reinforcement and<br />
monolithic pad attachment to the structure shall be prepared by the contractor if not<br />
already indicated on the drawings.<br />
B. Supplementary Support Steel: Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all<br />
equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., including roof mounted equipment, as required or<br />
specified.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the<br />
following:<br />
1. Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
B. Alternate Manufacturer: All vibration isolators described in this Section shall be the<br />
product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industries’ products are the basis of these<br />
specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems<br />
strictly comply with these specifications and have been reviewed by the Engineer.<br />
Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section 1.03.<br />
2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS:<br />
A. The following product descriptions are listed by a letter, which is used as the identifier in<br />
the Equipment Vibration Isolation Schedule and elsewhere in Part 3 of this Specification.<br />
1. Mountings:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Specification “A”: Double deflection neoprene mountings shall have a<br />
minimum static deflection of 0.35”. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene<br />
covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top and bottom so<br />
they need not be bolted to the floor. Bolt holes shall be provided for these<br />
areas where bolting is required. On equipment such as small vent sets<br />
and close coupled pumps, steel rails shall be used above the mountings<br />
to compensate for the overhang. Mountings shall be type ND or rails type<br />
DNR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
b. Specification “B”: Spring type isolators shall be free-standing and laterally<br />
stable without any housing and complete with ¼” neoprene-acoustical<br />
friction pads between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall<br />
have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring<br />
diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring<br />
22 0548 - 3 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid<br />
equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring<br />
diameters, deflections, compressed spring height and solid spring height.<br />
Mountings shall be type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
c. Specification “C”: Equipment with operating weight different from the<br />
installed weight such as chillers, boilers, etc. and equipment exposed to<br />
the wind such as cooling towers shall be mounted on spring mountings as<br />
described in engineering Specification B, except a housing shall be used<br />
that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is<br />
removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection, and<br />
cooling tower mounts shall be located between the supporting steel and<br />
roof or the grillage and dunnage as shown on the drawings. The<br />
installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance<br />
of ½” shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the<br />
housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit<br />
stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Mountings used<br />
out-of-doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. Mountings shall be type SLR<br />
as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
2. Hangers:<br />
a. Specification “D”: Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring, located<br />
in a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent shortcircuiting<br />
of hanger rod, and 0.3” deflection neoprene element in series.<br />
The spring shall be color coded for ease of identification. The neoprene<br />
element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through<br />
the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall<br />
be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc<br />
before contacting the hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall<br />
have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated<br />
deflection. Submittals shall include a scale drawing of the hanger<br />
showing the 30° capability. Hangers shall be type 30N as manufactured<br />
by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
b. Specification “D1”: Vibration hangers shall contain a 0.3” deflection<br />
neoprene element. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod<br />
isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Hangers shall be<br />
type HD as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
c. Specification “E”: Vibration hangers shall be as described in engineering<br />
Specification D, except they shall be precompressed to the rated deflection<br />
so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during<br />
installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to<br />
free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is<br />
subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of<br />
a scale. Hangers shall be type PC30N as manufactured by Mason<br />
Industries, Inc.<br />
d. Specification “F”: Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring located in<br />
a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short-circuiting<br />
of the hanger rod. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to<br />
properly distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion.<br />
Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough<br />
to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the<br />
hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum<br />
additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Hangers<br />
shall be provided with an eye bolt on the spring end and provision to<br />
22 0548 - 4 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
3. Bases:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
attach the housing to the flat iron duct straps. Submittals shall include a<br />
scale drawing of the hanger showing the 30° capability. Hangers shall be<br />
type W30 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
a. Specification “G”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall furnish integral<br />
structural steel bases. Bases shall be rectangular in shape for all<br />
equipment other than centrifugal refrigeration machines and pumps,<br />
which may have ‘T’ or ‘L’ shaped bases. Pump bases for split case pumps<br />
shall include supports for suction and discharge base ells. All perimeter<br />
members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10 th of the<br />
longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14”<br />
provided that the deflection and misalignment are kept within acceptable<br />
limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be<br />
employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of one<br />
inch. Bases shall be type WF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
b. Specification “H”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide steel<br />
members welded to height saving brackets to cradle machines having legs<br />
or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. Members<br />
shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent strains in the equipment. Inverted<br />
saddles shall be type ICS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
c. Specification “J”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall furnish rectangular<br />
structural beam or channel concrete forms for floating foundations. Bases<br />
for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide support for suction<br />
and discharge base ells. The base depth need not exceed 12” unless<br />
specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity.<br />
In general, bases shall have a minimum depth of 1/12 th of the longest<br />
dimension of the base, but no less than 6”. Forms shall include minimum<br />
concrete reinforcement consisting of half-inch bars or angles welded in<br />
place on 6” centers running both ways in a layer 1-1/2” above the<br />
bottom, or additional steel as required by the structural conditions. Forms<br />
shall be furnished with drilled steel members with sleeves welded below<br />
the holes to receive equipment anchor bolts where the anchor bolts fall in<br />
concrete locations. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all<br />
mounting locations to maintain a 1” clearance below the base. Bases<br />
shall be type K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Provide<br />
concrete fill as required for a complete installation.<br />
4. Flexible Connectors:<br />
a. Specification “K”: Spherical flexible connectors shall employ peroxide<br />
cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Kevlar® tire cord frictioning. Any<br />
<strong>substitution</strong>s must have equal or superior physical and chemical<br />
characteristics. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face<br />
rubber flanged ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not<br />
acceptable. Sizes 2" (50mm) and larger shall have two spheres reinforced<br />
with a ductile iron external ring between spheres. Flanges shall be split<br />
ductile iron or steel with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16" (400mm)<br />
to 24" (600mm) may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4" (19mm) to 1½" (38mm)<br />
may have threaded two-piece bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and<br />
cable retention. Connectors shall be rated at 250 psi (1.72MPa) up to<br />
170 o F (77 o C) with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 215 psi<br />
(1.48MPa) at 250 o F (121 o C) in sizes up through 14" (350mm). 16"<br />
22 0548 - 5 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
(400mm) through 24" (600mm) single sphere minimum ratings are 180<br />
psi (1.24MPa) at 170 o F (77 o C) and 150 psi (1.03 MPa) at 250 o F (121 o C).<br />
Higher rated connectors may be used to accommodate service conditions.<br />
All flexible connectors must be factory tested to 150% of rated pressure for<br />
12 minutes before shipment. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout<br />
shall be a minimum of 3/1. Concentric reducers to the above ratings<br />
may be substituted for equal ended connectors.<br />
b. Flexible connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of<br />
the connectors under pressure. Control rods need only be used in<br />
unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the<br />
installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods. If<br />
control rods are used, they must have ½" (12mm) thick Neoprene washer<br />
bushings large enough in diameter to take the thrust at 1000 psi (.7<br />
kg/mm 2 ) maximum on the washer area.<br />
c. Submittals shall include two test reports by independent consultants<br />
showing minimum reductions of 20 dB in vibration accelerations and 10<br />
dB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or<br />
a similar product by the same manufacturer. All flexible connectors shall<br />
be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves. Flexible<br />
connectors shall be SAFEFLEX series, type SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR or SFU and<br />
control rods type CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
5. Flexible Hoses:<br />
a. Specification “L”: Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel<br />
braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3” and larger shall be flanged.<br />
Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Lengths for each pipe size shall be<br />
as tabulated:<br />
Flanged Male Nipples<br />
3 x 14 10 x 26 ½ x 9 1-1/2 x 13<br />
4 x 15 12 x 28 ¾ x 10 2 x 14<br />
5 x 19 14 x 30 1 x 11 2-1/2 x 18<br />
6 x 20 16 x 32 1-1/4 x 12<br />
8 x 22<br />
b. Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves<br />
horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible.<br />
Hoses shall be type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
6. Acoustical Floor, Ceiling, and Wall Seals:<br />
a. Specification “M”: Where piping passes through equipment room walls,<br />
floors or ceilings, the vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide a split<br />
seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with ¾” or thicker neoprene<br />
sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the<br />
pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the<br />
piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with<br />
the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe<br />
prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a<br />
minimum of 1” past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed<br />
240°F, 10 lb./cu.ft. density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge.<br />
Seals shall be type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
22 0548 - 6 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
7. Pipe Anchors:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Specification “N”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide an alldirectional<br />
acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of a telescopic arrangement<br />
of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum half inch thickness of<br />
heavy duty neoprene and duck or neoprene isolation material. Vertical<br />
restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent<br />
vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material<br />
shall not exceed 500 psi, and the design shall be balanced for equal<br />
resistance in any direction. All-directional anchors shall be type ADA as<br />
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
8. Horizontal Thrust Restraints:<br />
a. Specification “X”: Air handling equipment shall be protected against<br />
excessive displacement which might result from high air thrusts in relation<br />
to the equipment weight. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a<br />
spring element in series with a neoprene pad as described in Specification<br />
B, with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers.<br />
The spring element shall be contained within a steel frame and designed<br />
so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to<br />
allow for a maximum of ¼” movement at start and stop. The assembly<br />
shall be furnished with one rod and angle brackets for attachment to both<br />
the equipment and ductwork or the equipment and the structure.<br />
Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and<br />
symmetrically on either side of the unit. Horizontal thrust restraints shall<br />
be type WB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
9. Curb-Mounted Aluminum Bases:<br />
a. Specification “Y”: Curb-mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on<br />
vibration isolation bases that fit over the roof curb and under the isolated<br />
equipment. The extruded aluminum top member shall overlap the bottom<br />
member to provide water runoff independent of the seal. The aluminum<br />
members shall house cadmium plated springs having a 1” minimum<br />
deflection with 50% additional travel to solid. Spring diameters shall be<br />
no less than 0.8 of the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall<br />
be provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum<br />
clearance of ¼” so as not to interfere with the spring action except in high<br />
winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed cell sponge<br />
materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible<br />
ductlike EPDM connection joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum<br />
members. Foam or other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring<br />
cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept to a minimum. Submittals shall<br />
include spring deflections, spring diameters, compressed spring height<br />
and solid spring height as well as seal and wind resistance details. Curb<br />
mounted bases shall be type CMAB as manufactured by Mason Industries,<br />
Inc.<br />
22 0548 - 7 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Do<br />
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS:<br />
A. General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for selection<br />
and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated.<br />
B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with<br />
manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation<br />
materials and units to achieve minimum static deflection and displacement requirements.<br />
3.03 GENERAL:<br />
A. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and<br />
load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do<br />
not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not shortcircuited<br />
by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if<br />
any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation.<br />
B. All vibration isolators must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written<br />
instructions and all certified submittal data.<br />
C. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment,<br />
piping or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.<br />
D. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that<br />
degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified.<br />
E. The contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, ductwork or conduit which makes<br />
rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but<br />
is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls.<br />
F. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact between the building and any<br />
vibrating equipment, piping, ductwork or conduits.<br />
G. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact between the building and<br />
equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be<br />
brought to the Architect's/Engineer's attention prior to installation. Corrective work<br />
necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible contractor's expense.<br />
H. Bring to the Architect's/Engineer's attention any discrepancies between the specifications<br />
and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to<br />
installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the<br />
responsible contractor's expense.<br />
I. All installations which are deemed defective in materials and/or workmanship shall be<br />
corrected at the responsible contractor's expense, at no additional cost to the Owner.<br />
J. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of<br />
equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for<br />
approval. Generally, bracing may occur from:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0548 - 8 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
1. Flanges of structural beams.<br />
2. Upper truss chords in bar joist construction.<br />
3. Cast-in-place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors.<br />
K. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required.<br />
Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project.<br />
L. Install vibration isolation units between substrate and equipment as required for secure<br />
operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces.<br />
M. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible.<br />
N. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim<br />
units as required where substrate is not level.<br />
O. Install inertia base frames on isolator units so that minimum of 1” clearance below base<br />
will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed<br />
and loaded for operation.<br />
P. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading and<br />
operations.<br />
Q. Install flexible connectors and hoses on the equipment side of shut-off valves. Install hoses<br />
horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible.<br />
3.04 VIBRATION ISOLATION:<br />
A. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three pipe hangers for the main lines near the<br />
mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification E. Horizontal runs in all other<br />
locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification<br />
D. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in Specification C. Heat<br />
exchangers shall be considered part of the piping run. All Specification E hangers or the<br />
first three Specification C mounts, as noted above, shall have the same static deflection as<br />
specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. (Note: If piping is connected<br />
to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceiling under occupied spaces, the<br />
first three hangers shall have 0.75” deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3”, 1.5”<br />
deflection for larger pipe sizes up to and including 6”, and 2.5” deflection for pipe sizes<br />
larger than 6”.) All other hangers and mounts shall have a minimum steel spring<br />
deflection of 0.75”.) Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as<br />
practical.<br />
B. Equipment Room Seals: All piping passing through equipment room walls, floors or<br />
ceilings shall be protected against sound leakage by means of an acoustical wall seal as<br />
described in Specification M.<br />
C. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification E hangers or supported by<br />
Specification C mountings, with the piping anchored or guided with Specification N<br />
anchors. Steel spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75” except in those expansion<br />
locations where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to plus or minus<br />
25% of the initial load.<br />
D. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated<br />
by a minimum 1/2” thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height of the guides shall<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0548 - 9 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
e preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction.<br />
Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement.<br />
Guides shall be capable of ± 1-5/8” motion, or as required to meet specific location<br />
requirements. Pipe guides shall be type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
E. Flexible Pipe Connections: All equipment that is supported by or mounted on vibration<br />
isolators shall be piped with flexible connections. Specification “K” or Specification “L”<br />
flexible connections shall be installed parallel to the equipment shaft insofar as practical<br />
and on the equipment side of isolation valves.<br />
F. Equipment Isolation: All mechanical equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolators to<br />
prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building<br />
structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so<br />
as to produce reasonably uniform deflection. Isolator types shall be as noted on the<br />
equipment schedule below.<br />
EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE:<br />
(Not all types of equipment listed below are necessarily used on this project.)<br />
EQUIPMENT TYPE<br />
Floor-Mounted Pumps<br />
(Slab on Grade)<br />
Floor-Mounted Pumps<br />
Above/Below Occupied Spaces<br />
Structure-Hung Pumps<br />
* Omit if internal isolation is provided.<br />
** Omit for FPB without hydronic coil.<br />
*** Use type C mount for outdoor, wind-loaded installations.<br />
3.05 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
ISOLATOR SPECIFICATION<br />
Mount Type A;<br />
Connector Type K<br />
Base Type J; Spring Type B;<br />
Connector Type K<br />
Hanger Type D<br />
Connector Type K<br />
STATIC DEFLECTION<br />
(INCHES)<br />
A. Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe installation of other work related to<br />
vibration isolation work, including work connected to vibration isolation work; and, after<br />
completion of other related work (but before equipment start-up), shall furnish written<br />
report to Engineer listing any observed inadequacies which could prevent proper operation<br />
and performance of vibration isolation work. Report shall cover, but not necessarily be<br />
limited to, the following:<br />
0.75<br />
1.50<br />
0.75<br />
1. Equipment installations (performed as work of other sections) on vibration<br />
isolators.<br />
2. Piping connections, including flexible connections.<br />
3. Ductwork connections, including provisions for flexible connections.<br />
4. Passage of piping and ductwork, which is to be isolated, through walls and floors.<br />
B. Do not start up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected.<br />
22 0548 - 10 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely and that there is<br />
no dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short- circuit unit isolation.<br />
3.07 DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS:<br />
A. Upon completion of vibration isolation work, prepare report showing measured equipment<br />
deflections, theoretical floor deflection and isolation efficiency for each major item of<br />
equipment.<br />
3.08 QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION:<br />
A. Mechanical equipment provided under this contract shall operate under all load conditions<br />
without noise or vibration which is objectionable in the opinion of the Engineer. In the<br />
case of rotating machinery, noise or vibration noticeable outside of the room in which it is<br />
installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room, will be considered objectionable.<br />
Noise or vibration conditions considered objectionable by the Engineer shall be corrected<br />
in an approved manner by the Contractor at his expense. Vibration control shall be<br />
accomplished by means of approved vibration isolators installed in a manner<br />
recommended by the manufacturer of the isolators.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 0548<br />
22 0548 - 11 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING<br />
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 0553<br />
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT<br />
A. Extent of mechanical identification work required by this Section is indicated on the<br />
drawings and/or specified in other Division 23 sections.<br />
B. Types of identification devices specified in this section include the following:<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
1. Painted Identification Materials<br />
2. Plastic Pipe Markers<br />
3. Plastic Tape<br />
4. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker<br />
5. Plastic Duct Markers<br />
6. Valve Tags<br />
7. Valve Schedule Frames<br />
8. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs<br />
9. Plastic Equipment Markers<br />
10. Plasticized Tags<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification<br />
devices of the types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in<br />
similar service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field,<br />
colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions<br />
for each identification material and device required.<br />
B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on<br />
8-1/2” x 11” bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as<br />
shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), size of valve, and variations for<br />
identification (if any). Only tag valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and<br />
similar special uses, such as valves to isolate individual system risers and individual floor<br />
branches, and building system shut-off valves. In addition to mounted copies of the valve<br />
schedules, furnish extra copies for Operating and Maintenance Manuals as specified in<br />
Division 23.<br />
22 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
B. Mechanical Identification:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Allen Systems, Inc.<br />
2. Brady (W.H.) Co., Signmark Div.<br />
3. Brimar Industries, Inc.<br />
4. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.<br />
5. Seton Name Plate Corp.<br />
6. PVC Specialties<br />
2.02 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:<br />
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for<br />
each application as referenced in other Division 23 sections. Where more than a single<br />
type is specified for an application, selection is at Installer's option; but provide single<br />
selection for each product category.<br />
2.03 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:<br />
A. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications, with letter sizes<br />
generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping or to match existing<br />
size in existing building, but not less than 1-1/4” high letters for ductwork and not less<br />
than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions.<br />
B. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise<br />
indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.<br />
C. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise<br />
indicated, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors or match existing building standard<br />
identification.<br />
2.04 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS:<br />
A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, colorcoded<br />
pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.<br />
B. Insulation: Furnish 1” thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe<br />
marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F<br />
(52°C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2” beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.<br />
C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6” (including insulation, if any), provide fullband<br />
pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one<br />
of the following methods:<br />
22 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.<br />
2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than<br />
3/4” wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2”.<br />
D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6” and larger (including insulation, if any), provide<br />
either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times the letter height<br />
(and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods:<br />
1. Steel spring or non-metallic fasteners.<br />
2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than<br />
1-1/2” wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3”.<br />
3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's<br />
standard stainless steel bands.<br />
E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled, shown, or to<br />
match existing building lettering nomenclature system, and abbreviate only as necessary<br />
for each application length.<br />
F. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally<br />
with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit<br />
of plastic.<br />
2.05 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS:<br />
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic duct markers.<br />
B. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.<br />
C. Nomenclature: Include the following:<br />
2.06 PLASTIC TAPE:<br />
1. Direction of airflow.<br />
2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.)<br />
3. Duct origin (from).<br />
4. Duct destination (to).<br />
5. Design cfm.<br />
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive)<br />
vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick.<br />
B. Width: Provide 1-1/2” wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including<br />
insulation, if any) of less than 6”, 2-1/2” wide tape for larger pipes.<br />
C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated.<br />
2.07 UNDERGROUND-TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKERS:<br />
A. General: Manufacturer’s standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic<br />
tape, intended for direct-burial service, not less than 6” wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape<br />
with printing which most accurately indicates type of service of buried pipe.<br />
22 0553 - 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
B. Provide multi-ply tape consisting of solid aluminum foil core between two layers of plastic<br />
tape.<br />
2.08 VALVE TAGS:<br />
A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gauge polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved<br />
piping system abbreviation in 1/4” high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2” high,<br />
and with 5/32” hole for fastener.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Provide 1-1/2” diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Fill tag engraving with black enamel.<br />
OR<br />
Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer’s standard 3/32” thick<br />
engraved plastic laminate valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high<br />
letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2” high, and with 5/32” hole for fastener.<br />
3. Provide 1-1/2” square black tags with white lettering, except as otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
4. Provide size, shape and color combination as specified or scheduled for each<br />
piping system.<br />
OR<br />
Plastic Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard solid plastic valve tags with<br />
printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16”<br />
high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8” high, and with<br />
5/32” hole for fastener.<br />
5. Provide 1-1/8” square white tags with black lettering.<br />
6. Provide size, shape and color combination as specified or scheduled for each<br />
piping system.<br />
B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or<br />
beaded type) and solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags<br />
to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose.<br />
C. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/16” thick engraved plastic<br />
laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to<br />
concealed valve. Include 1/8” center hole to allow attachment.<br />
2.09 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES:<br />
A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for<br />
removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded<br />
aluminum, with non-glare type sheet glass.<br />
2.10 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS:<br />
A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387,<br />
in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the<br />
22 0553 - 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise<br />
indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary<br />
because of substrate.<br />
B. Thickness: 1/8”, except as otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive<br />
where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.<br />
2.11 PLASTICIZED TAGS:<br />
A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention<br />
tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4" x<br />
5-5/8”, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed<br />
wording including large-size primary wording (such as DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT<br />
OPERATE).<br />
2.12 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS:<br />
A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical<br />
identification work with corresponding designations shown, specified, scheduled and<br />
approved by the Owner/Engineer. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated<br />
and approved by the Owner/Engineer for proper identification and<br />
operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.<br />
B. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified,<br />
provide identification which indicates individual system number as designated on the<br />
drawings or schedule as well as service.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:<br />
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation,<br />
painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces,<br />
install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to<br />
installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.<br />
3.02 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION:<br />
A. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork and duct access<br />
doors with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service<br />
and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides the most contrast with<br />
ductwork color). Identification in an existing building shall match the method which exists<br />
in the building.<br />
B. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed or concealed only by a removable<br />
ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into<br />
22 0553 - 5 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 50 ft. spacing<br />
along exposed runs.<br />
C. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork<br />
and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment), other maintenance and<br />
operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information.<br />
D. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar<br />
concealment, plasticized tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs, at<br />
Installer's option.<br />
3.03 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION:<br />
A. General: Install pipe markers of the following type on each system indicated to receive<br />
identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Identification in an<br />
existing building shall match the method which exists in the building.<br />
1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this<br />
section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated<br />
pipes.<br />
OR<br />
Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle, and<br />
contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2” beyond<br />
ends of lettering.<br />
OR<br />
Stenciled markers, with lettering color complying with ANSI A13.1.<br />
OR<br />
Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous colorcoded<br />
painting of piping is provided.<br />
B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in<br />
occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels,<br />
plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations:<br />
1. Near each valve and control device.<br />
2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark<br />
each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.<br />
3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter nonaccessible<br />
enclosures.<br />
4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of<br />
concealed piping.<br />
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.<br />
6. Spaced intermediately at a maximum spacing of 25 ft. along each piping run,<br />
except with spacing reduced to 15 ft. in congested areas of piping and equipment.<br />
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.<br />
22 0553 - 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
3.04 UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION:<br />
A. General: During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground piping system,<br />
install continuous underground type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at<br />
6” to 8” below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench<br />
and do not exceed an overall width of 16”, install single line marker.<br />
3.05 VALVE IDENTIFICATION:<br />
A. General: Provide valve tag on valves in each piping system. List each tagged valve in<br />
valve schedule for each piping system.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Building services main shut-off valves.<br />
2. Each individual system main shut-off valves.<br />
3. Each individual system riser shut-off valves.<br />
4. Each individual system floor shut-off valves.<br />
5. Each individual system major branch shut-off valves.<br />
B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in mechanical equipment rooms where<br />
directed by Architect/Owner/Engineer.<br />
C. Where more than one major mechanical equipment room is shown for the project, install<br />
mounted valve schedule in each major mechanical equipment room, and repeat only the<br />
main valves which are to be operated in conjunction with operations of more than a single<br />
mechanical equipment room.<br />
3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION:<br />
A. General: Install minimum 2 inch x 4 inch, engraved plastic laminate equipment marker<br />
on each individual item of mechanical equipment. Provide signs for the following general<br />
categories of equipment:<br />
1. Main building systems control and operating valves, including safety devices and<br />
hazardous units such as gas outlets.<br />
2. Room thermostats, except gun tag labels are acceptable for room thermostats.<br />
3. Fuel-burning units including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills and absorption<br />
chillers.<br />
4. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers and similar motor-driven units.<br />
5. Heat exchangers, cooling towers, heat recovery units and similar equipment.<br />
6. Fans and blowers.<br />
7. HVAC units.<br />
8. Tanks and pressure vessels.<br />
9. Water treatment systems and similar equipment.<br />
B. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4" high lettering for name of unit.<br />
C. Text of Signs: In addition to the identified unit, inform operator of operational<br />
requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and<br />
improper operations.<br />
3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
22 0553 - 7 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually<br />
blocked by work of this division or other divisions.<br />
B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 0553<br />
22 0553 - 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 0719<br />
MECHANICAL INSULATION<br />
A. The work covered by this Specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment,<br />
materials, accessories, and performance of all operations necessary for the installation of<br />
all insulation on all hot and cold surfaces of plumbing, piping, space heating and air<br />
conditioning systems in strict accordance with the specifications and applicable drawings.<br />
B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following:<br />
1. Piping System Insulation:<br />
a. Fiberglass.<br />
b. Cellular Glass.<br />
c. Calcium Silicate.<br />
d. Thermal Ceramic.<br />
2. Equipment Insulation:<br />
a. Fiberglass.<br />
b. Calcium Silicate.<br />
c. 25/50 Rated Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric.<br />
C. Refer to other Division 22 sections for requirements related to protection saddles,<br />
protection shields, thermal hanger shields, mechanical identification, and duct linings,<br />
which are not part of the work of this section.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical<br />
insulation products and systems, of the types and sizes required, whose products have<br />
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.<br />
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on<br />
projects with mechanical insulation. All insulation shall be installed per manufacturer’s<br />
recommendations by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work.<br />
C. Furnish insulation systems to the project site bearing the manufacturer’s label with product<br />
identification.<br />
1.03 FIRE HAZARD RATING:<br />
A. All insulation products (including insulation, jacket, and adhesive used to adhere the jacket<br />
to the insulation) shall have composite Fire and Smoke Hazard ratings, as tested under<br />
procedures defined by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding:<br />
22 0719 - 1 PLUMBING INSULATION
Flame Spread 25<br />
Smoke Developed 50<br />
B. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements and cloth for fittings shall have the same<br />
component ratings as listed above. Paper laminate jackets shall be permanently fire and<br />
smoke resistant. Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water<br />
soluble and shall be unaffected by water and humidity.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and<br />
maintenance requirements for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule<br />
showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, density, and furnished<br />
accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. Submit detailed product<br />
information and installation information for all jacketing systems specified in this section.<br />
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with<br />
manufacturer's stamp or label affixed, showing fire hazard indexes of products.<br />
1.06 PROTECTION:<br />
A. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, or mechanical damage before, during, and<br />
after installation. Any such insulation or covering damaged prior to final acceptance of<br />
the work shall be satisfactorily replaced.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
1. Mechanical Insulation: Johns Manville; Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.;<br />
CertainTeed Corp.; Knauf Fiberglass; Manson; Armstrong World Industries Inc.;<br />
Pittsburgh Corning Corp.; PABCO, Inc.; Rubatex Corp.<br />
2. Jacketing & Covering Products: Childers; Ceel-Co; Zeston; Alpha Associates, Inc.<br />
2.02 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS:<br />
A. Specification “A”, Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C-547, Class I or Class II unless<br />
otherwise indicated. “k” factor shall be maximum of 0.24 at 75° F mean temperature.<br />
Insulation shall have jacket with tensile strength of 35 lbs/in and factory applied vapor<br />
barrier jacket with permeability of 0.02 perm with adhesive self-sealing lap joint.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0719 - 2 PLUMBING INSULATION
B. Specification “B”, Cellular Glass Piping Insulation: ASTM C-552, Type II, Class 2. “k”<br />
factor shall be maximum of 0.29 at 75° F mean temperature.<br />
C. Specification “C”, Calcium Silicate Piping Insulation: ASTM C-533, Type I. “k” factor shall<br />
be maximum of 0.45 at 500° F mean temperature, compression strength of 200 psi for<br />
5% compression, transverse strength of 200 psi for 5% compression, and minimum<br />
flexural strength of 60 psi.<br />
D. Specification “D”, Thermal Ceramic Insulation: “k” factor shall be a maximum of 1.5 at<br />
1500° F mean temperature, 2000° F temperature limit.<br />
E. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C-921, Type I for piping with temperatures below<br />
ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all<br />
piping at Installers option.<br />
1. Fitting Covers: UV-resistant PVC, premolded, with maximum flame spread rating<br />
of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50. Use PVC tape for cold<br />
systems, serrated tacks or PVC tape for hot systems.<br />
2. Aluminum Jacketing: Manufactured from T3003 (or T5005) H14 to H19<br />
aluminum alloy with 3/16” corrugations, and having a factory-attached 1 mil thick<br />
polyethylene moisture barrier continuously laminated across the full width of the<br />
jacketing. Jacketing shall be .016” thick minimum. Provide matching factoryfabricated<br />
covers for 90° and 45° elbows, tee fittings, flange fittings, valve bodies,<br />
blind ends, reducers and other fittings as necessary to make the covering system<br />
complete, waterproof and weatherproof. All jacketing shall have color coated<br />
baked-on polyester finish, with color selected by Architect.<br />
3. PVC Jacketing: UV-resistant PVC, 20 mil thick, maximum flame spread rating of<br />
25, maximum smoke developed rating of 50, factory cut and curled to fit O.D. of<br />
insulated pipe. Solvent weld adhesive for sealing joints and seams.<br />
4. Cloth Jacketing Material: Not less than 8 oz. per square yard, with adhesives,<br />
cement and sealer as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the intended<br />
application. PVC premolded fitting covers shall not be provided.<br />
F. Piping Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, cements and similar<br />
accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the applications indicated.<br />
G. Piping Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, sealers, protective finishes and similar<br />
compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the applications indicated,<br />
and additional finishes as specified.<br />
2.03 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS:<br />
A. Specification “A”, Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-612, Class 2. “k” factor<br />
shall be a maximum of 0.28 at 200° F mean temperature, 6 lbs. per cu. ft. density, 450° F<br />
temperature limit.<br />
B. Specification “B”, Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-612, Class 2. “k” factor<br />
shall be a maximum of 0.28 at 200° F mean temperature, 6 lbs.per cu. ft. density, 450° F<br />
temperature limit. The insulation shall have factory applied FSK vapor barrier facing<br />
laminate of aluminum foil and kraft paper with reinforced fiberglass scrim.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0719 - 3 PLUMBING INSULATION
C. Specification “C”, Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-553, Type I, 1.5 lb.<br />
per cu. ft. density. “k” factor shall be a maximum of 0.45 at 250° F mean temperature,<br />
450° F temperature limit.<br />
D. Specification “D”, Calcium Silicate Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-533, Type I, block-type.<br />
“k” factor shall be a maximum of 0.87 at 1000° F mean temperature, compression<br />
strength of 200 psi for 5% compression, and minimum transverse strength 60 psi.<br />
E. Specification “E”, Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation: ASTM C-534, Type I. “k”<br />
value shall be a maximum of 0.27 at 75° F mean temperature, 220° F temperature limit,<br />
and water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm or less.<br />
F. Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide presized glass cloth jacketing<br />
material, not less than 7.8 ounces per square yard, or metal jacket at Installer's option,<br />
except as otherwise indicated.<br />
G. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and<br />
protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the applications<br />
indicated.<br />
H. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape, corner<br />
angles, anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the<br />
applications indicated.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do<br />
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner<br />
acceptable to Installer.<br />
B. Workmanship shall be first class and of the highest quality. Poor installation or<br />
unacceptable appearance, as determined by the Engineer, shall be due cause to reject the<br />
entire project in whole, and retainage will be withheld until corrective action is completed<br />
to the Engineer's satisfaction.<br />
3.02 PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION:<br />
A. All portions of the following piping systems shall be insulated with Specification “A”<br />
Fiberglass Piping Insulation. See Table 1 for minimum insulation thicknesses required.<br />
1. Piping systems to be insulated:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Domestic cold water piping.<br />
b. Non-potable cold water piping.<br />
c. Domestic chilled water piping.<br />
d. Domestic hot water: supply, recirculated and tempered.<br />
e. Interior horizontal storm water and overflow drain piping below roofline,<br />
including roof drain bodies.<br />
f. Pumped storm water piping exposed to weather, horizontal and vertical.<br />
22 0719 - 4 PLUMBING INSULATION
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
g. Steam and condensate lines.<br />
h. Sanitary waste piping exposed to weather.<br />
2. Piping Systems on which insulation is not required:<br />
Piping System Type<br />
a. Indoor/outdoor vertical storm water piping.<br />
b. Chrome-plated exposed plumbing piping to sinks, toilets, etc. (except for<br />
handicapped accessible lavatories).<br />
c. Flexible connectors, air chambers, strainer and check valve bodies, drain<br />
lines from water coolers, condensate lines, balancing cocks and flow<br />
regulators located in conditioned spaces maintained above 50°F (chilled<br />
water systems not included).<br />
Minimum Insulation Thickness (in.) for Pipe Sizes<br />
up to 1" 1-1/4"- 2" 2-1/2"- 4” 5"- 6" 8" & up<br />
Domestic cold water piping. 0.5 0.5 1 1 1.5<br />
Non-potable cold water piping 0.5 0.5 1 1 1.5<br />
Domestic chilled water piping. 0.5 N/A N/A N/A N/A<br />
Domestic hot water: supply,<br />
recirculated and tempered.<br />
Interior horizontal storm water<br />
and overflow drain piping below<br />
roofline, including roof drain<br />
bodies.<br />
Pumped storm water piping<br />
exposed to weather, horizontal<br />
and vertical.<br />
1 1 1 1.5 2<br />
0.5 0.5 0.5 1 1<br />
1 1 1 1.5 1.5<br />
Steam and condensate lines. 2 3 3 4 4<br />
Sanitary waste piping exposed to<br />
weather.<br />
1.5 1.5 2 2 2<br />
Note: For any piping not noted above to be exposed to outdoor ambient<br />
temperatures, increase insulation thickness by 0.5 inches where installed in such<br />
exposed locations.<br />
3.03 EQUIPMENT INSULATION:<br />
Table 1<br />
Piping Insulation Schedule<br />
A. Insulate equipment specified in Table 3 with the type and thickness of insulation shown:<br />
Table 3<br />
Equipment Insulation Schedule<br />
22 0719 - 5 PLUMBING INSULATION
Item Specification Thickness<br />
Pumps, tanks, and all<br />
cold equipment not<br />
factory insulated.<br />
Cold water storage<br />
tanks<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
Vapor Seal<br />
Required<br />
B 2" Yes<br />
B 2" Yes<br />
Air separators B 2"<br />
Boilers not factory<br />
insulated<br />
Yes (only on chilled<br />
water)<br />
A 2" No<br />
Hot water storage tanks A 2" No<br />
Heat exchangers A 3" No<br />
Condensate pumps A 2" No<br />
3.04 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION:<br />
A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions<br />
and in accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that insulation serves its<br />
intended purpose.<br />
B. Install insulation on piping systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, testing, and<br />
acceptance of tests.<br />
C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of<br />
piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use<br />
cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.<br />
D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to<br />
ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.<br />
E. Where factory premolded, one-piece, PVC insulated fitting covers are to be used, the<br />
proper factory precut insulation shall be applied to the fitting using two layers for pipe<br />
temperatures above 250°F or below 35°F, and single-layer insulation for pipe<br />
temperatures between 35°F and 250°F. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly<br />
into the throat of the fitting and the edges adjacent to the pipe covering, tufted and tucked<br />
in, fully insulating the pipe fitting. Covers shall overlap the adjoining pipe insulation and<br />
jackets, and on cold pipes shall be sealed at all seam edges with vapor barrier adhesive.<br />
The circumferential edges of all covers shall be sealed with pressure sensitive type. The<br />
tape shall overlap the jacket and cover by at least 1”.<br />
22 0719 - 6 PLUMBING INSULATION
F. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier jackets on cold pipe insulation, and protect to prevent<br />
puncture or other damage.<br />
1. Do not use staples or tacks on vapor barrier jackets.<br />
2. Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier finish recommended by the<br />
manufacturer.<br />
3. Seal fitting covers with PVC tape.<br />
4. Cover all unions, check valves, and other in-line devices. Mark outer covering<br />
with indelible marker to identify item covered.<br />
G. Neatly bevel insulation at all exposed edges, and seal with finishing cement.<br />
H. At locations where PVC covers are prohibited, the Contractor shall insulate fittings, etc.,<br />
using one coat of insulation cement, premolded fiberglass fitting covers and/or segments<br />
of pipe insulation. Finish shall be ASJ jacket or glass fabric embedded in fire retardant<br />
mastic. Raw ends shall be coated with vinyl acrylic mastic (CP-10/11) for hot piping or<br />
shall be coated with vapor barrier mastic (CP-30 or Fosters 30-35) for cold piping.<br />
I. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and<br />
composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut<br />
or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.<br />
J. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through walls and floor openings except where walls<br />
and floors are required to be firestopped.<br />
K. Insulation on all cold surfaces shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal.<br />
Supports, anchors, etc. that are secured directly to cold surfaces shall be adequately<br />
insulated and vapor-sealed to prevent condensation.<br />
L. Piping installed below grade shall be spiral wrapped with 10 mil PVC tape (Scotchwrap<br />
No. 50 or equal) with 50% overlap, and laid in bed of sand with 3” minimum cover on all<br />
sides. Fittings shall be double-wrapped with second layer extended a minimum of 12”<br />
beyond fittings.<br />
M. See Section 220529 for insulation inserts and shields. Butt pipe insulation against pipe<br />
hanger insulation inserts. For all piping, apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on<br />
butt joints and seal all joints and seams with 3” wide vapor barrier tape or band.<br />
N. Cellular Glass Insulation:<br />
1. Apply in a single layer. Secure to pipe with 1/2” wide aluminum bands.<br />
2. For indoor applications, apply all-purpose Kraft paper/aluminum foil/vinyl coating<br />
jacket. Seal all lap and butt joints with self-sealing vapor barrier tape.<br />
O. Calcium Silicate Insulation:<br />
1. Secure 3/4" high rib lath by wire on 16” centers with ribs turned to create 3/4” air<br />
space. Secure metal lath to outstanding ribs by welding or wire on 16” centers to<br />
serve as insulation base. Secure insulation to metal lath with 14-gauge<br />
galvanized wire ties on 16” centers. Stretch 1” hexagonal, 20-gauge mesh<br />
smoothly and securely over insulation. Apply 1/2” thick coat of insulating and<br />
finishing cement to exterior surface, and finish smooth. Allow cement to dry, and<br />
cover with 8-oz. canvas applied with lagging adhesive. Brush with one final coat<br />
of lagging adhesive.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0719 - 7 PLUMBING INSULATION
P. Piping Exposed to Weather: All insulation on piping exposed to weather shall have vapor<br />
barrier and shall be protected with weather-proof aluminum jacket.<br />
1. Jacketing shall be secured by 1/2” wide stainless steel bands on 24” centers. All<br />
joints and seams shall be caulked with clear silicone. Locate all longitudinal<br />
seams at the bottom of piping to minimize joint exposure to weather. Contractor<br />
may propose pre-fabricated sealing and fastening systems, for which samples and<br />
product data must be submitted to the Engineer for approval.<br />
3.05 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION:<br />
A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
written instructions and in compliance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that<br />
insulation serves its intended purpose. Complete finishes as specified.<br />
B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces.<br />
Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gaping joints and<br />
excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship.<br />
C. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier on equipment insulation, and protect to prevent<br />
puncture and other damage.<br />
D. Do not apply insulation to equipment, mufflers, breechings, or stacks while hot.<br />
E. Apply insulation using staggered joint method and double layer construction; apply each<br />
layer of insulation separately.<br />
F. Insulation board shall be cut and mitered to fit the contour of the vessel and shall be<br />
applied with edges tightly butted, joints staggered where two or more layers are necessary<br />
(due to available thickness of insulation), and secured with 1/2” x 0.015” galvanized steel<br />
bands on 12” centers or with weld pins or stick clips with washers on 18” centers.<br />
G. Coat insulation surfaces with layer of insulating cement, and cover the insulation with 1”<br />
galvanized wire mesh tightly stretched in place with edges tied together. Finish with two<br />
coats of insulating cement troweled to a hard finish.<br />
H. Do not insulate over ASME stamp or manufacturer's nameplate on hot equipment. Provide<br />
neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation.<br />
I. Cold equipment requiring access: Provide removable section of insulation, fabricated<br />
from flexible elastomeric insulation, adhered to an aluminum jacket, and joined with<br />
velcro strips around entire perimeter. Reinforce removable section and adjoining<br />
insulation at attachment points. Removable insulation shall be provided for all equipment<br />
requiring periodic inspection, access or maintenance, including:<br />
1. Strainer basket access.<br />
2. Heat exchanger tube access.<br />
3. Handhole/cleanout covers.<br />
J. Hot equipment requiring access: Provide removable section of insulation, fabricated from<br />
rigid fiberglass insulation board, adhered to an aluminum jacket, and fastened to the<br />
equipment with stainless steel bands. At Contractor's option, provide pre-fabricated,<br />
canvas-jacketed, lace-up insulation blankets.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 0719 - 8 PLUMBING INSULATION
Provide removable insulation for hot equipment requiring access with accessible<br />
components over 100 square inches or any component operating over 200°F, including:<br />
K. Equipment Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of<br />
aluminum jacketing, as recommended by manufacturer. On flexible elastomeric<br />
insulation, apply two (2) coats of manufacturer's approved U.V. resistant finish.<br />
3.06 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR:<br />
A. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, both previously damaged or<br />
damaged during this construction period. Use insulation of same thickness as existing<br />
insulation; install new jacket lapping and seal over existing.<br />
3.07 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT:<br />
A. Replace all damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units<br />
with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.<br />
B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation<br />
work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 0719<br />
22 0719 - 9 PLUMBING INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
SECTION 22 1116<br />
BASIC PLUMBING PIPING<br />
A. This Section specifies piping materials, testing and installation methods common to<br />
Division 22 and includes joining materials, piping specialties, and basic piping installation<br />
instructions.<br />
B. Related Sections: Refer to other Division 21 sections for fire protection systems, piping<br />
specialties, valves, expansion compensation, supports and anchors, mechanical<br />
identification, mechanical insulation, meters and gauges, and fire barrier penetration<br />
seals.<br />
C. Standards: Piping materials and installation methods shall meet the requirements of the<br />
applicable sections of the latest standards of the following organizations listed below:<br />
Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)<br />
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)<br />
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)<br />
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)<br />
American Welding Society (AWS)<br />
American Water Works Association (AWWA)<br />
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI)<br />
Commercial Standards, National Bureau of Standards (CS)<br />
Compressed Gas Association (CGA)<br />
Copper Development Association (CDA)<br />
Federal Specifications (FS)<br />
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS)<br />
National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau (NCPWB)<br />
Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI)<br />
Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI)<br />
D. All piping shall conform to applicable portions of the above standards and as required by<br />
the appropriate national and local codes.<br />
1.02 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Refer to Division 1 and Basic Plumbing Requirements for administrative and procedural<br />
requirements for submittals.<br />
B. Product Data: Submit industry standard and manufacturer’s technical product data,<br />
installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe and pipe fitting.<br />
C. Submit piping schedule showing pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each<br />
piping system.<br />
D. Submit Welder’s certifications.<br />
22 1116 - 1 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
E. Submit data on Joining Materials.<br />
F. Submit welding Procedures Specifications.<br />
G. Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work.<br />
H. Grooved Joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals<br />
and shall be specifically identified with the applicable Victaulic style or series number.<br />
1.03 SCHEDULING:<br />
A. Plan the work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other trades. Inform<br />
the General Contractor of openings required in the building structure and coordinate<br />
mechanical equipment locations with the Structural Shop Drawings.<br />
B. Install pipe and duct sleeves and pipe support inserts before concrete is poured.<br />
C. Cutting and patching made necessary by failure to plan the work shall be the responsibility<br />
of this Contractor.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pipes and pipe<br />
fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar<br />
service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and<br />
Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.<br />
C. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with the latest revisions of the applicable<br />
sections of B31 of the ANSI/ASME standard codes for pressure piping, noted as follows:<br />
B31.1 – Pressure Piping Code / B31.2 – Fuel Gas Piping Code / B31.5 – Refrigeration<br />
Piping / B31.9 – Building Service Piping Code.<br />
D. Before any welding is performed, the contractor shall submit to the owner, or his<br />
authorized representative, a copy of the Manufacturer's Record of Welder or Welding<br />
Operator Qualification Tests and his Welding Procedure Specification together with the<br />
Procedure Qualification Record as required by Section IX of ASME Boiler and Pressure<br />
Vessel Code.<br />
E. The types and extent of non-destructive examinations required for pipe welds are as shown<br />
in Table 136.4 of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.1 – Power Piping.<br />
If requirements for non-destructive examination are to be other than that stated above, the<br />
degree of examination and basis for rejection shall be a matter of prior written agreement<br />
between the fabricator or contractor and the purchaser.<br />
F. All welding performed on the mechanical systems shall be done following acceptable<br />
procedures by operators qualified for the type of welding and materials being welded.<br />
Each manufacturer or contractor shall be responsible for the quality of welding done by his<br />
organization, whether performed at the job site or in the fabrication shop, and shall repair<br />
or replace any work not in accordance with these specifications.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
22 1116 - 2 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
G. Soldering and brazing materials and procedures shall conform to applicable sections of<br />
the CDA Copper Tube Handbook and applicable sections of the latest published version of<br />
the ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.<br />
H. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved piping systems,<br />
all grooved products utilized shall be supplied by a single manufacturer including gaskets,<br />
valves, and straining devices. Grooving tools shall be supplied by the same manufacturer<br />
as the grooved components.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 GENERAL:<br />
A. Piping Materials: Provide piping and tubing of type, pressure and temperature ratings,<br />
capacities, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall thickness or class) indicated for each<br />
service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, provide proper selection as<br />
determined by Installer for installation requirements, and comply with governing<br />
regulations and industry standards.<br />
B. Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and<br />
pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching<br />
the pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwise<br />
indicated, comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and<br />
with pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable.<br />
2.02 STEEL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:<br />
A. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B, type E, electric resistance welded.<br />
B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B.<br />
C. Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B, type S or A106 high temperature.<br />
D. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.1, including bolting (Class 125 and 250).<br />
E. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4 (Class 125 and 250).<br />
F. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated (Class<br />
125 and 300).<br />
G. Malleable-Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.30, Class 150, 250 or 300; selected by<br />
Installer for proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end<br />
connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as<br />
indicated (Class 150, 250 and 300).<br />
H. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14.<br />
I. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, ASTM A-234 (Fire Protection) including bolting and<br />
gasketing of the following material group, end connections and facings, except as<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
22 1116 - 3 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
Material Group: Group 1.1.<br />
End Connections: Buttwelding.<br />
Facings: Raised-face.<br />
J. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius<br />
elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe.<br />
K. Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.12.<br />
L. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use<br />
less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2” and<br />
where pipe size is less than 1-1/2”, and do not thread nipples full length (no closenipples).<br />
M. Stainless-Steel Vic Press 304 Fittings: Use with ½” through 2” Schedule 10S, Type<br />
304/304L stainless steel piping system up to a maximum of 500 psig. Precision cold<br />
drawn stainless steel fittings with Grade “H” HNBR suitable for potable water and up to<br />
210 deg. F or Grade “E” EPDM suitable for hot water up to 250 deg. F and pressuresealed<br />
ends.<br />
N. Stainless-Steel Grooved End Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C606<br />
2.03 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS:<br />
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B-88; Type K or L as indicated for each service; hard-drawn<br />
tempered, except as otherwise indicated.<br />
B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B-306.<br />
C. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.18.<br />
D. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.<br />
E. Cast-Copper Solder-joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23 (drainage and vent with DWV<br />
or tube).<br />
F. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29.<br />
G. Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26.<br />
H. Bronze Pipe Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.24 (Class 150 and 300).<br />
I. Copper-Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use<br />
in service indicated.<br />
J. Grooved End Copper-Tube Dimensioned Couplings and Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C606.<br />
2.04 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS:<br />
A. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B-43<br />
B. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.15, Class 125 or 250<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
22 1116 - 4 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
C. Cast-Bronze Threadless Fittings: ASTM B-61 or B-62, brazed joints.<br />
2.05 CAST-IRON PRESSURE PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:<br />
A. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Class 52, ANSI A21.51; AWWA C-151; 350 psi pressure rating.<br />
B. Cast-Iron Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C-110/A21.10.<br />
C. Ductile-Iron Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C-110/A21.10.<br />
D. Rubber-Gasket Joints: ANSI/AWWA C-111/A21.11.<br />
2.06 CAST-IRON SOIL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:<br />
A. General: All cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark<br />
of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI).<br />
B. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: FS WW-P-401 and CISPI Standard 301 piping with CISPI 310<br />
couplings.<br />
C. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe: ASTM A-74.<br />
D. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Couplings: Neoprene gasket complying with ASTM C-564,<br />
CISPI Standard 310, and stainless steel clamp holding band.<br />
E. Cast-Iron Hub-and-Spigot Soil Pipe Fittings: Match soil pipe units; comply with ASTM A-<br />
74.<br />
F. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C-564.<br />
2.07 PLASTIC PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:<br />
A. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe: ASTM D-1527, 3” thru 12"; SDR-23.5,<br />
4” and 6”; SDR-35, 3”, 4” and 6"; SDR-42, 8", 10” and 12".<br />
B. ABS Pipe Fittings:<br />
Schedule 40 Socket: ASTM D-2468.<br />
Schedule 80 Socket: ASTM D-2469.<br />
Schedule 80 Threaded: ASTM D-2465.<br />
Solvent Cement: ASTM D-2235.<br />
Solvent Cement (to join ABS to PVC): ASTM D-3138.<br />
C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Sewer Pipe: ASTM D-2729, 2" thru 6"; ASTM D-2665, 1-1/2”<br />
thru 8”.<br />
2.08 GROOVED PIPING PRODUCTS:<br />
A. General: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be used for piping systems<br />
having operating conditions not exceeding 230 deg. F (110 deg. C), excluding steam<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
22 1116 - 5 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
piping and any other service not recommended by manufacturer, in lieu of welded,<br />
flanged, or threaded methods.<br />
B. Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536.<br />
C. Flexible Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages<br />
grooved pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create<br />
seal. Cast in two or more parts, and secured together during assembly with nuts and<br />
bolts. Permits degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest<br />
published literature.<br />
D. Rigid Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved<br />
pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in<br />
two or more parts with angled mating pads which grip the pipe rigidly and force the pipe<br />
ends to their maximum separation. Secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts.<br />
E. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure-responsive so that internal<br />
pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as<br />
designated by ASTM D-2000.<br />
1. Water Services: EDPM Grade E, with green color code identification.<br />
2. Other Services: As recommended by Manufacturer.<br />
F. Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A-183, minimum tensile strength of<br />
110,000 psi. Provide tamper-resistant nuts in exposed locations.<br />
G. Branch Fittings: Similar to coupling, with full circumference gasket and integral branch<br />
outlet in both the housing and gasket.<br />
H. Fittings: Grooved end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings.<br />
1. Ductile Iron: ASTM A-536.<br />
2. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A-53, carbon steel, Schedule 40, Type F, for 3/4” to<br />
4”; Type E or S, Grade B, for 5” to 20”.<br />
3. Steel: ASTM A-234.<br />
4. Wrought Copper and Bronze: ASTM B-75 tube and ASTM B-584 bronze castings.<br />
5. Galvanized: ASTM A-106, ASTM A-46 or A-536. Couplings for use with AWWAdimensioned<br />
piping shall conform to AWWA C-606.<br />
I. Grooves: Conform to the following:<br />
1. Standard Steel: Square cut or roll grooved in accordance with manufacturer’s<br />
specifications.<br />
2. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved.<br />
3. Cast Iron: Radius cut grooved, AWWA C-606.<br />
J. All other pipe products shall conform to the requirements of the Division 23 sections.<br />
Acceptance of grooved pipe systems does not imply acceptance of the coupling<br />
manufacturer’s valves, flow measuring stations, strainers, or other specialties.<br />
K. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products<br />
by one of the following:<br />
Anvil International – Gruvlok.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
22 1116 - 6 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
2.09 JOINING MATERIALS:<br />
Grinnell Mechanical Products, Div. of Tyco.<br />
Victaulic Company of America.<br />
A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide lead- and zinc-free welding<br />
materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.<br />
1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding<br />
materials.<br />
B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide silver soldering materials.<br />
1. Above Ground: 95-5 Tin-Antimony, ASTM B-32, Grade 95TA (lead-free type).<br />
2. All refrigeration piping and all below-ground water piping: Silver-Tin-Copper<br />
Alloy, ASTM B-32 (NSF).<br />
C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials to comply with<br />
installation requirements.<br />
1. Comply with AWSA 5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for<br />
brazing filler metal materials.<br />
a. Copper phosphorus – BCuP.<br />
b. Silver – BAg<br />
D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for<br />
steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non-Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or<br />
elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for<br />
exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code.<br />
F. Pipe Thread Sealant Material: Except as otherwise indicated, provide all pipe threads with<br />
the sealant material as recommended by the manufacturer for the service.<br />
2.10 PIPING APPLICATION:<br />
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping thread<br />
sealant material. “Tyte-Unyte” for general use and Acorn no. 3500 for cleanouts.<br />
A. Domestic Hot and Cold Water:<br />
1. Above Grade, Inside Building:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
a. Type “L” hard drawn copper tube with wrought copper or bronze fittings,<br />
95-5 tin-antimony / silver brazed soldered joints. Type 304 stainless steel<br />
schedule 10S roll grooved pipe with T304 stainless steel fittings may be<br />
used as an alternate (230 deg. F max.).<br />
2. Below Grade, Inside and Outside Building:<br />
22 1116 - 7 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
a. 3” and smaller: Type K soft drawn copper with wrought copper fittings,<br />
silver brazed solder joints.<br />
b. 4” and larger: Ductile iron, tar coated outside, cement mortar lined<br />
inside. Full lengths of pipe shall be utilized to the greatest extent possible.<br />
Fittings for ductile iron pipe shall be 350 psi pressure rated, tar coated<br />
outside and cement lined inside. Utilize rubber gasket joints.<br />
B. Sanitary Drainage and Vents – Inside Building:<br />
1. Above Grade: CISPI 301 cast iron, no-hub type, with neoprene gaskets and 300<br />
series stainless steel clamps; or DWV copper with wrought copper or cast brass<br />
fittings.<br />
2. Below Grade: For sizes 2” to 20”, ASTM A-74 service weight cast iron, hub-andspigot<br />
type only, with neoprene compression gaskets; or, for sizes 12” and larger,<br />
ductile cast iron with neoprene gasket joints.<br />
C. Sanitary Sewer – Beyond 5 feet Outside Building: ASTM D-2665 SDR-35 PVC Sewer Pipe;<br />
ductile cast iron with neoprene gaskets for sizes 12” and larger; or service weight cast iron,<br />
hub-and-spigot type, with neoprene gaskets.<br />
D. Roof Drainage – Inside Building:<br />
1. Above Grade: CISPI 301 cast iron, no-hub type, with neoprene gaskets and 300<br />
series stainless steel clamps; or schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with galvanized<br />
cast iron drainage fittings and threaded joints. Full lengths of pipe shall be<br />
utilized to the greatest extent possible.<br />
2. Below Grade: For sizes 2” to 20”, ASTM A-74 service weight cast iron, hub-andspigot<br />
type, with neoprene compression gaskets; or, for sizes 12” and larger,<br />
ductile cast iron with neoprene gasket joints.<br />
E. Storm Sewer – Beyond 5 feet Outside Building: ASTM D-3034 SDR-35 PVC sewer pipe;<br />
ductile cast iron with neoprene gasket joints for sizes 12” and larger; or service weight cast<br />
iron soil pipe, hub-and-spigot type, with neoprene gaskets.<br />
F. Natural Gas Piping:<br />
1. Above Grade:<br />
a. Exposed locations:<br />
i. 2” and smaller: Schedule 40 black steel pipe, beveled ends, with<br />
150 psi malleable iron fittings and threaded joints.<br />
ii. Larger than 2”: Schedule 40 black steel pipe with seamless steel<br />
butt-weld fittings and welded joints.<br />
b. Inaccessible Locations:<br />
2. Below Grade:<br />
i. All sizes: Schedule 40 seamless black steel pipe, beveled ends,<br />
with socket-weld fittings same thickness as pipe, and welded<br />
joints.<br />
22 1116 - 8 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
a. Within Building: Schedule 40 seamless black steel with 150 psi forged<br />
steel fittings and welded joints. Provide piping with machine-applied<br />
coating and wrapping in accordance with local code and utility company<br />
requirements. Provide cathodic protection as called for on the drawings.<br />
b. Outside of Building: Polyethylene (PE) pipe, as approved by local utility<br />
company and code authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
G. Equipment Drains, Condensate Drains and Overflows:<br />
1. Type “M” or “DWV” copper.<br />
H. Sump Pump Discharge:<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION:<br />
1. Schedule 40 galvanized steel with 125 psi cast iron or 150 psi malleable iron<br />
galvanized threaded fittings; or Type L, seamless, hard drawn copper tube with<br />
ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper or bronze solder-joint pressure fittings.<br />
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all water distribution piping may<br />
be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, original design, and the<br />
referenced standards.<br />
B. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having water<br />
connections in order to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.<br />
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION:<br />
A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices<br />
which will achieve permanently leak-proof piping systems, capable of performing each<br />
indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and<br />
couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and<br />
maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use<br />
of reducing fittings. Make pipe runs straight and true. Align piping accurately at<br />
connections, within 1/16” misalignment tolerance.<br />
1. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.<br />
2. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and<br />
other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. Only piping<br />
serving this type of equipment space shall be allowed.<br />
3. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams)<br />
indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and<br />
arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss,<br />
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical,<br />
install piping as indicated.<br />
4. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.<br />
22 1116 - 9 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
5. Install piping at right angles, parallel or at right angles to the building walls, and<br />
as high as possible. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.<br />
6. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings,<br />
and below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.<br />
7. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent<br />
elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation application, with 1”<br />
clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling<br />
panels to allow for panel removal.<br />
8. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit application of<br />
insulation and servicing of valves.<br />
9. Provide for complete drainage of water systems. At all low points in mains, risers,<br />
and branch lines, provide drains consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4” ball valve, and<br />
short 3/4” threaded-end nipple and cap with chain.<br />
10. Install all piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to<br />
permit proper insulation application.<br />
11. Fire and Smoke Wall Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire and smoke<br />
rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire and smoke rated<br />
integrity. Refer to Division 15, Sections 15120 and 15050 for materials.<br />
12. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using<br />
sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals (see Section 15120). Pipe sleeves smaller<br />
than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal.<br />
13. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.<br />
14. Coordinate penetrations through foundation and all other structural penetrations<br />
with structural engineer.<br />
15. Install hangers and guides as necessary to provide piping systems which are selfsupporting<br />
and not dependent upon connection to equipment. All piping shall be<br />
adequately supported from the building structure with adjustable hangers to<br />
maintain uniform grading where required and to prevent sagging and pocketing.<br />
16. Allow flexibility in the erection of the piping system in order to prevent excessive<br />
stresses in materials and joints due to thermal expansion or equipment vibration.<br />
Provide sufficient swing joints, anchors, expansion loops, expansion joints, and/or<br />
other devices as necessary, and install so as to permit free expansion and<br />
contraction without causing undue stresses. Make all changes in direction with<br />
fittings. Support piping independently at all equipment so that its weight shall not<br />
be supported by the equipment. Provide bracing where necessary to prevent<br />
swaying.<br />
17. At high points of all piping, install manual air vents consisting of a line size nipple<br />
6 inches long for an air collection chamber, pipe cap on top of nipple with 1/4<br />
inch top, and 1/4 inch copper tubing with gauge cock. Locate gauge cock at<br />
accessible location and anchor to adjacent pipe or wall. Provide access panels as<br />
required for access.<br />
18. Provide shutoff valves and unions or flanges to isolate each item of equipment,<br />
branch circuit, or section of piping. Unions shall be provided at each threaded<br />
valve (manual or automatic) and at all equipment having threaded connections.<br />
19. Arrange piping and valves near each piece of equipment to allow for complete<br />
service and maintenance of the equipment without disturbing the shutoff valves.<br />
20. Provide dielectric unions or "Clearflow" fittings at all junctions of dissimilar metals<br />
in fresh water systems.<br />
21. Use full lengths of pipe; short lengths with couplings will not be permitted. All<br />
pipe sections shall be de-burred to full I.D. before joining.<br />
22. Extend chains for valve operators to 6'-3" above the floor or platform. Brace<br />
extension handles and provide a means of indicating open and closed positions.<br />
23. All piping installed below grade (unless factory pre-insulated) shall be spiral<br />
wrapped with 10 mil PVC tape (Scotchwrap No. 50 or equal) with 50% overlap,<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
22 1116 - 10 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
and laid in bed of sand with 3” minimum cover on all sides unless otherwise<br />
noted. Compaction per Division 2.<br />
a. Fittings shall be double-wrapped with second layer extended a minimum<br />
of 12” beyond fittings.<br />
B. Sanitary Waste and Vent; Roof Drain and Storm Drain Piping:<br />
1. Verify all invert elevations of existing waste and storm drain piping prior to any<br />
new work.<br />
2. Install plumbing drainage piping with minimum 1/4” per foot (2%) downward<br />
slope in direction of drain for piping 3” and smaller. Install 4” and larger piping<br />
with minimum 1/8” per foot (1%) downward slope unless otherwise indicated on<br />
drawings and when approved by Administrative Authorities where 2% slope is<br />
impractical due to depth of street sewer or building structural limitations. Install<br />
cast iron pipe in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Handbook.<br />
3. Install 1” thick extruded polystyrene over underground drainage piping above frost<br />
line and not under building. Provide width to extend minimum of 12" beyond<br />
each side of pipe. Install directly over pipe, centered on pipe center line.<br />
4. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45<br />
degree wyes, half-wyes, or long-sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends.<br />
SANITARY CROSSES OR SHORT QUARTER BENDS SHALL NOT BE USED IN<br />
DRAIN PIPING. Where two fixtures are installed back to back, they may be served<br />
by a common vertical drain pipe with each fixture wasting separately into an<br />
approved double fitting having inlet openings at the same level.<br />
5. Provide thrust restraints (bracing to structure or rodded joints) at branches and<br />
changes in direction for cast iron pipe 5” and larger suspended within the<br />
building.<br />
6. Where cast iron piping is suspended in excess of 18” on single rod hangers, sway<br />
bracing shall be provided to prevent shear at the joints.<br />
7. Install underground drain piping to conform with the plumbing code, and in<br />
accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute Engineering Manual.<br />
8. Lay piping beginning at low point of system, true to grades and alignment<br />
indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert.<br />
9. Place bell ends or groove ends of piping facing upstream.<br />
10. Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of<br />
lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements.<br />
11. Grade trench bottoms to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation, free from<br />
rock, throughout the length of the pipe.<br />
12. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at the surface upon which pipes<br />
shall be laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated invert<br />
elevation.<br />
13. Shape bottom of trench to fit the bottom 1/4 of the circumference of pipe. Fill<br />
unevenness with tamped sand. At each pipe joint, dig bell holes to relieve the bell<br />
of the pipe of all loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on<br />
the foundation.<br />
14. No-hub cast iron pipe couplings shall be torqued to 100-125 inch-pounds.<br />
15. Grade vent piping for proper ventilation (minimum 1/8” per foot) and to allow<br />
piping to free itself quickly of condensation of water.<br />
C. Condensate Drain Piping:<br />
1. Condensate drain piping from air conditioning unit coil condensate drain pans<br />
shall be of the sizes shown on the drawings.<br />
22 1116 - 11 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
2. Slope condensate lines minimum 1/4 inch per foot.<br />
D. Natural Gas Piping:<br />
1. Provide 6” drip leg for piping trapped by change of grade and at final connection<br />
to equipment.<br />
3.03 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS:<br />
A. General: Provide joints of type indicated for each piping system.<br />
B. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.<br />
Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint<br />
compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer,<br />
on male threads at each joint, and tighten joint to leave not more than three threads<br />
exposed.<br />
C. Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints in accordance with ASME B-31.<br />
D. Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints with silver solder or 95-5 tin-antimony solder. Cut<br />
tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and<br />
inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full<br />
depth into fitting, and solder in a manner which will draw solder to full depth and<br />
circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.<br />
E. Welding:<br />
1. All welding on piping, including tack welding, shall be performed by welders currently<br />
qualified and certified for the applicable welding process. A file shall be<br />
maintained, for examination upon <strong>request</strong>, of all qualified welding procedures<br />
and the names of the qualified welders performing this work.<br />
2. Examine the inside of each length of piping to ensure it is free from dirt and<br />
obstructions. If obstructed in any way, the pipe shall be swabbed out before being<br />
incorporated into the system.<br />
3. Before and after piping fabrication, all flanges, threaded connections, and<br />
beveled pipe ends shall be protected with end protectors and suitable grease to<br />
prevent corrosion and damage until installed into the system.<br />
4. Before welding, the end of the pipe and fittings shall be cleaned of rust, scale, dirt,<br />
grease, protective coating, or other foreign matter which might affect the quality of<br />
the welds.<br />
5. When pipes of different wall thicknesses are to be welded together, the end of the<br />
thicker pipe shall be smoothly tapered to the wall thickness of the thinner pipe.<br />
The taper angle shall not be more than 30° from the axis of the pipe.<br />
6. Before welding, the piping shall be aligned as required in ASME Code for Pressure<br />
Piping B-31.<br />
7. Pipe, flanges, and fittings damaged during fabrication or shipment shall be<br />
replaced. Any damaged sections shall be removed from the job site.<br />
8. The necessity of preheating of welds and the temperature used are requirements<br />
of the welding procedure. If the metal temperature is below 32°F, local<br />
preheating to a temperature warm to the hand is required for materials which<br />
otherwise do not require preheating.<br />
9. The preparation of butt-welded ends of pipe, welding neck flanges, pipe fittings,<br />
and any other piping component, including valves which are butt-welded into the<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
22 1116 - 12 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
piping system, shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.25 with the following<br />
exceptions:<br />
a. No permanent backing rings shall be used.<br />
b. Use of consumable inserts is permitted and encouraged as a means of<br />
obtaining required weld quality.<br />
10. Spacers may be used in fitting up pipe and weld fittings for tack welding to a<br />
proper gap for full penetration welds. Small tack welds which penetrate to the<br />
bottom of the welding groove shall be used. Tack welds lacking full penetration<br />
are not acceptable and shall be removed.<br />
11. All pipe welds that allow visual inspection on the inside and that can be reached<br />
by hand shall be inspected by the welder immediately after welding, and the<br />
following actions shall be taken:<br />
a. Weld spatter, flux, and debris shall be removed.<br />
b. Excessive penetration shall be removed by grinding.<br />
c. Areas without penetration or fusion shall be ground to sound metal and<br />
repair welded.<br />
12. Cleaning of excessive flux shall be performed between welding passes using wire<br />
brushing or grinding.<br />
13. Flanges welded to pipe spools shall be oriented with the bolt-holes straddling the<br />
centerlines established on the piping drawings. Take precautions throughout<br />
fabrication not to mar the gasket face on flanges.<br />
F. Domestic water Piping: Provide dielectric unions at all junctions of dissimilar metals.<br />
G. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and<br />
equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform<br />
compression of gaskets.<br />
H. Hubless Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's installation instructions.<br />
3.04 EXPOSED PIPING IN FINISHED AREAS:<br />
A. Plumbing piping and fittings which are exposed (and uninsulated) in finished areas<br />
generally occupied by people, shall be installed with a smooth, high polish, durable<br />
chrome-plated finish.<br />
3.05 GROOVED PIPING SYSTEMS:<br />
A. All changes in direction shall be made with radius type elbows.<br />
1. Use long radius (R=1.5D) fittings wherever possible.<br />
2. Angles less than 22-1/2° may be made with pre-manufactured mitered fittings.<br />
3. Use of the angular deflection capabilities of grooved pipe couplings for intentional<br />
changes of direction shall not be allowed.<br />
B. All changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings, not bushings or reducing<br />
couplings.<br />
22 1116 - 13 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
C. All branch outlets shall be made with Victaulic Style 920/920N Mechanical-T® bolted<br />
branch outlets for branches more than four pipe sizes smaller than the main, or Victaulic<br />
No. 25 or W25 grooved end reducing tees.<br />
D. Pipe shall be adequately laterally supported to prevent "pipe squirm." Provide a minimum<br />
of one hanger per pipe section. No pipe section shall be left unsupported between any<br />
two couplings.<br />
E. Risers more than 8’ high shall be made with rigid type couplings.<br />
F. Rigid style couplings shall be used in mechanical rooms, except where flexible style<br />
couplings are specifically allowed for thermal expansion compensation and/or vibration<br />
isolation, and to accommodate seismic movement.<br />
G. Flanges shall be standard welded slip-on or weld neck with a spool piece to a grooved<br />
end joint. "Flange adapters" are not allowed.<br />
H. Grooved pipe systems shall not be considered to be electrically conductive.<br />
1. Provide wire jumpers across all couplings where the piping system is required to<br />
be electrically conductive.<br />
I. Flexible couplings may be used for vibration elimination.<br />
1. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations.<br />
2. Provide 3 degrees of freedom by installing sufficient flexible couplings in different<br />
orientations.<br />
3. Use spring hangers for all sections of pipe intended for deflection.<br />
4. Roll-grooved fittings and pipe shall be considered to have 1/2 the deflection of<br />
cut-grooved fittings and pipe.<br />
J. Victaulic Style 177, 77 or W77 flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors<br />
for vibration isolation at equipment connections. Three (3) couplings, for each connector,<br />
shall be placed in close proximity to the source of vibration.<br />
K. Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's<br />
guidelines and recommendations. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties<br />
shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same<br />
manufacturer as the grooved components.<br />
L. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the<br />
intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by Victaulic.<br />
M. Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the<br />
area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing.<br />
N. A Victaulic factory-trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor's<br />
field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved piping<br />
products. Factory-trained representative shall periodically review the product installation.<br />
Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.<br />
3.06 PIPING TESTS:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
22 1116 - 14 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
A. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Test<br />
piping system before insulation is installed, wherever feasible; and remove control devices<br />
before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not<br />
use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure<br />
rating. Fill each section with water, and pressurize for indicated pressure and time<br />
duration.<br />
B. Test all piping systems as specified. Correct leaks by remaking joints. Remove equipment<br />
not able to withstand test procedure during test.<br />
C. Work to be installed shall remain uncovered until the required tests have been completed.<br />
D. Piping which is to be concealed shall be tested before being permanently enclosed.<br />
E. When work has been completed, conduct preliminary tests to ascertain compliance with<br />
specified requirements. Make repairs or replacements as required.<br />
F. Give a minimum of twenty-four hours notice to Engineer of dates when acceptance test will<br />
be conducted. Conduct tests as specified for each system in presence of representative of<br />
agency having jurisdiction or his representative.<br />
G. Submit three (3) copies of successful test report to the Engineer for his review. Report shall<br />
state the following: Date of test, lines tested, test medium, length of time, test pressure<br />
held, pressure drop or rise, and extent of venting or repressurizing.<br />
H. Contractor shall obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance with<br />
regulations of agencies having jurisdiction. Work shall not be considered complete until<br />
such certificates have been delivered by the Engineer to the Owner.<br />
I. All costs involved in these tests shall be borne by Contractor. Should contractor refuse or<br />
neglect to make any test necessary to satisfy the Architect/Engineer, such test may be made<br />
by an independent testing company and Contractor charged for all expenses.<br />
J. System Tests<br />
1. Hydrostatic Test: The test shall be accomplished by hand pumping the system to<br />
the specified water pressure, and maintaining that pressure until the entire system<br />
has been inspected for leaks, but in no case for a time period of less than eight<br />
hours.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
a. Domestic water systems: 100 psig or 150% of system pressure, whichever<br />
is greater.<br />
b. Condenser water system: 100 psig or 150% of system pressure,<br />
whichever is greater.<br />
c. Gas: 100 psig air test.<br />
2. Compressed Air or Nitrogen Test: Compressed air tests may be substituted for<br />
hydrostatic tests only when ambient conditions or existing building conditions<br />
prohibit safe use of hydrostatic testing and must be reviewed by the Engineer prior<br />
to any testing. For tests of this type, the piping system shall be subjected to the<br />
gas pressure indicated for that specific system. The piping shall be capped or<br />
plugged and water-pumped with oil-free air, or nitrogen from a bottle shall be<br />
introduced into the entire system to the pressure specified. The system shall<br />
maintain that pressure for the duration of a soapy water test of each joint.<br />
22 1116 - 15 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
3. Waste, Drain and Vent Piping: All waste and vent piping, including building<br />
drain, roof drain and building sewer, shall be subjected to a water test. All<br />
openings in the piping system shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening,<br />
and the system filled with water to the point of overflow. The water shall be kept<br />
in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before inspection<br />
starts; the system shall then be tight to all points. No section shall be tested with<br />
less than a ten foot head of water. Roof drain piping shall be closed at the lowest<br />
point and filled with water to the point of overflow.<br />
4. Sump Pump Discharge: With water in sump and pump running at full capacity,<br />
check for leaks until satisfied that system is tight.<br />
5. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and<br />
re-installation, using new materials to extent required to eliminate leakage. Do<br />
not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair<br />
methods.<br />
6. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been<br />
completed.<br />
3.07 UNDERGROUND PIPE INSTALLATION:<br />
A. Clean fittings, nipples and other field joints thoroughly before coating.<br />
B. Protect ductile cast iron pipe installed below grade with polyethylene encasement applied<br />
in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C-105/A21.5.<br />
C. Install ductile iron pipe below grade as prescribed by AWWA C-600.<br />
D. Provide concrete thrust block and 3/4” threaded steel tie bar at each change of direction<br />
on underground pressure pipe. Imbed tie bar in thrust block and connect to upstream<br />
fitting. Paint tie bar with two coats of bitumastic #50 paint.<br />
E. Bury all outside domestic water, waste, and storm piping minimum 5’-0” below grade<br />
(earth cover below finish grade) to top of pipe.<br />
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Preparation for testing: Prepare hydronic piping in accordance with ASME B-31.9 and as<br />
follows:<br />
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during the<br />
test.<br />
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the<br />
reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate<br />
expansion joints from testing.<br />
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.<br />
4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping.<br />
If a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing<br />
against the test pressure without damage to the valve.<br />
5. Install relief valve set at a pressure not more than 1/3 higher than the test<br />
pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of<br />
overpressurization during the test.<br />
B. Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
22 1116 - 16 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
1. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium, except where there is a risk<br />
of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workmen<br />
and compatible with the piping system components.<br />
2. Use vents, installed at high points in the direction of flow, in the system to release<br />
trapped air while filling the system. Use drains installed at low points for complete<br />
removal of the liquid.<br />
3. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test<br />
pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight<br />
and that low-pressure filling lines are disconnected.<br />
4. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the<br />
system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not<br />
exceed the maximum pressure rating for any vessel, pump, valve, or other<br />
component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to<br />
pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of<br />
specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the “SE” value in Appendix A of<br />
ASME B31.9, Code For Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping.<br />
5. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least four hours,<br />
examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by<br />
tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat<br />
hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.<br />
6. “Stop-Leak” compounds shall not be added to the system at any time.<br />
3.09 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and<br />
prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with clean<br />
water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for<br />
completion of joints, supports and accessory items.<br />
1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31.<br />
B. Disinfect all potable water mains and water service piping in accordance with local health<br />
department requirements. Submit test results report.<br />
C. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing<br />
has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.<br />
3.10 STERILIZATION:<br />
A. Each unit of domestic water supply and distribution system shall be sterilized with liquid<br />
chlorine or hypochlorite before acceptance for operation, in accordance with American<br />
Water Works Association G601 “Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.” Work shall be<br />
done by contractor, and, unless otherwise required by legally constituted authorities having<br />
jurisdiction, sterilization shall conform to the following:<br />
B. Materials:<br />
1. Liquid Chlorine: U.S. Army Specification No. 4-1.<br />
2. Hypochlorite: Liquid shall conform to FS 0-C-114a, and Int. Amendment 3,<br />
Grade D.<br />
3. Method: Amount of chlorine used shall provide a concentration of not less than<br />
50 parts per million.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
22 1116 - 17 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
3.11 COMMISSIONING:<br />
4. Introduce chlorination material into lines and distribution system in manner<br />
approved by the Architect/ Engineer.<br />
5. After a contact period of not less than 24 hours, during which period chlorine<br />
residual shall be maintained at not less than five parts per million, flush out<br />
systems with clean water until residual content is not greater than 0.2 parts per<br />
million.<br />
6. Flush entire system, including all hose bibs, fixture outlets, dead ends, and other<br />
points where stagnant water may collect.<br />
7. Open and close valves in lines being sterilized several times during contact period.<br />
8. Furnish a copy of test report of complete and adequate sterilization to the<br />
Architect/Engineer before final acceptance of work. Certificates shall bear<br />
signature of an official of laboratory responsible for test.<br />
A. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.<br />
B. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is<br />
completely full of water.<br />
C. Before operating the system, perform the following steps:<br />
1. Open valves to full open position. Close heat exchanger bypass valves.<br />
2. Remove and clean strainers.<br />
3. Check pump for proper rotation and proper wiring.<br />
4. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.<br />
5. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and<br />
operating freely (automatic type) or able to bleed air completely (manual type).<br />
6. Check operation of automatic bypass valve.<br />
7. Check and set operating temperatures of water heaters to design requirements.<br />
8. Lubricate motors and bearings.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
12/23/2011<br />
END OF SECTION 22 1116<br />
22 1116 - 18 BASIC PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 221119<br />
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES<br />
A. This Section specifies the water distribution piping system, including potable cold, hot, and<br />
recirculated hot water piping, fittings, and specialties within the building to a point five feet<br />
outside the building.<br />
B. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include water meters which will be<br />
provided by the local utility, to the site, ready for installation. The following is the name<br />
and address of the local utility:<br />
Denver Water<br />
1600 W. 12 th Ave.<br />
Denver, CO 80204-3412<br />
C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:<br />
1.02 DEFINITIONS:<br />
1. Refer to Division 2 and/or Division 22 for below-grade water service piping from<br />
public utility water main to building.<br />
2. Refer to Division 2 and/or Division 22 for materials and methods of trenching and<br />
backfilling for underground piping installations.<br />
3. Refer to other Division 22 sections for piping materials; methods for sealing pipe<br />
penetrations through basement walls and fire and smoke barriers; thermometers,<br />
flow meters and pressure gauges; mechanical identification; plumbing pumps;<br />
and dielectric unions, strainers and pressure regulating valves.<br />
A. Water Distribution Piping: Piping within the building or on the premises which conveys<br />
water from the water service piping or meter to the points of usage.<br />
B. Water Service Piping: Piping from the water main or other source of potable water supply<br />
to the water distribution system of the building served.<br />
C. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Refer to Division 1 and Basic Mechanical Requirements for administrative and procedural<br />
requirements for submittals. Submit the following:<br />
1. Data for each piping specialty and valve specified.<br />
2. Certification of Compliance with ASME and UL fabrication requirements.<br />
3. Test reports specified in Part 3 of this Section.<br />
4. Manufacturer and product data for lead-free solder, with material breakdown.<br />
221119 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING<br />
SPECIALTIES
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
5. Maintenance data for each piping specialty and valve specified, for inclusion in<br />
the Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 22.<br />
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following:<br />
1. ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials, products and installation.<br />
Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.<br />
2. ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing<br />
Qualification," for Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators.<br />
3. Local Plumbing Code and Utility Department requirements.<br />
4. Colorado cross connection control manual.<br />
5. Latest edition of the Engineering Standards of the Denver Board of Water<br />
Commissioners.<br />
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Store piping in such a manner as to prevent sagging and bending.<br />
B. Cap ends of piping when being stored.<br />
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:<br />
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts<br />
into pad. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division<br />
3.<br />
B. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations.<br />
1.07 EXTRA STOCK:<br />
A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish one valve key for each key-operated wall hydrant, hose bibb<br />
and faucet installed.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
1. Hose Bibbs and Faucets:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Watts Regulator<br />
b. Woodford<br />
c. Nibco<br />
d. Crane<br />
221119 - 2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING<br />
SPECIALTIES
e. Chicago<br />
2. Wall and Yard Hydrants:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Josam<br />
b. Jay R. Smith<br />
c. Zurn<br />
d. Woodford<br />
e. Wade<br />
3. Hose Stations:<br />
a. Leonard<br />
b. T & S Brass<br />
c. Duco<br />
4. Backflow Preventers:<br />
a. Febco<br />
b. Wilkins<br />
c. Watts Regulator<br />
d. Ames<br />
e. Apollo<br />
5. Water Meters:<br />
a. Badger<br />
b. Hersey<br />
c. Neptune<br />
d. Rockwell Int’l.<br />
e. Hays<br />
6. Relief Valves:<br />
a. A.W. Cash<br />
b. Watts Regulator<br />
c. Apollo<br />
d. Wilkins<br />
7. Shock Arresters – Bellows Type:<br />
a. Josam<br />
b. Jay R. Smith<br />
c. Wade<br />
d. Zurn<br />
8. Shock Arresters – Piston Type:<br />
a. Precision Plumbing Products<br />
b. Sioux Chief<br />
c. Watts Regulator<br />
9. Water Tempering Valves<br />
221119 - 3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING<br />
SPECIALTIES
a. Powers<br />
b. Leonard<br />
c. Rada<br />
d. Apollo<br />
10. Pressure Reducing Valves:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Watts Regulator<br />
b. Mueller<br />
c. Apollo<br />
d. Wilkins<br />
11. Vacuum Breakers for Hose Connections:<br />
a. A.W. Cash<br />
b. Apollo<br />
c. Watts Regulator<br />
12. Domestic Hot Water Expansion Tanks<br />
a. Amtrol<br />
b. State Industries<br />
c. Taco<br />
d. Apollo<br />
2.02 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS:<br />
A. General: Provide pipe material and pipe fittings complying with Division 22, Section<br />
22116.<br />
2.03 BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS:<br />
A. General: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division 22, Section 220529.<br />
2.04 GENERAL DUTY VALVES:<br />
A. General: Provide valves complying with Division 22, Section 220523.<br />
2.05 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES:<br />
A. Calibrated Balancing Valves: Refer to Section 220523.<br />
B. Balancing Cocks: Ball valve complying with Section 220523, with memory stop device.<br />
2.06 PIPING SPECIALTIES:<br />
A. Provide water distribution components as scheduled on the drawings and listed below,<br />
including, but not limited to, hose bibs, wall hydrants, yard hydrants, hose stations and<br />
backflow preventers.<br />
221119 - 4 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING<br />
SPECIALTIES
B. Shock Arresters – Bellows Type: Stainless steel casing and bellows, rated for 250 psi,<br />
200ºF, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201.<br />
C. Shock Arresters – Piston Type: 60 psi precharge, sealed from system water with free<br />
sliding piston and EPDM O-rings, threaded connections, and suitable for up to 150 psi<br />
and 180°F.<br />
D. Pressure Reducing Valves – Direct Acting:<br />
1. Low and Medium Capacity (15 to 120 GPM): All-bronze pressure reducing valve,<br />
with sensitive spring and diaphragm for accurate pressure control, manual<br />
adjustment for outlet pressure, integral strainer, and female thread connections.<br />
See detail on mechanical plans for size, capacity and piping arrangement.<br />
Watts Model UB5<br />
Watts Model N223BS<br />
2. High Capacity (50 to 1800 GPM): Epoxy-coated cast iron body pressure<br />
reducing/sustaining valve, with stainless steel seats; sensitive spring and large<br />
Buna-N diaphragm area for accurate pressure control; pilot valve with manual<br />
adjustment for outlet water pressure; female thread connections for sizes up to 2-<br />
1/2” and flanged connections for sizes 3” and larger. Provide in-line inlet water<br />
strainer, inlet and outlet valves, and threaded or flanged connections for easy<br />
valve removal. See detail on mechanical plans for size, capacity and piping<br />
arrangement.<br />
Watts Model N223BS<br />
E. Water Tempering Valves (Pressure-Equalizing with Thermometer): Concealed-type, 3-port,<br />
all-bronze, pressure-balancing mixing valve with integral angle check stops, maximum<br />
temperature limit stop, stainless steel balancing piston, chrome-plated finished wall plate<br />
with hot and cold water marking, and volume control. Unit to hold temperature steady<br />
and constant with pressure fluctuations of up to 85 percent. Unit shall have integral or<br />
separate flush-with-wall, 3-color dial thermometer with scale from 70º F to 130º F and<br />
chrome-plated trim ring for separate thermometer.<br />
Watts Model L111<br />
F. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Exposed type, all-bronze, thermostatically-controlled mixing<br />
valve with stainless steel piston, fail-safe automatic shutdown if either hot or cold water<br />
pressure fails, union connection, and polished chrome finish. Valve to deliver 1 to 225<br />
gpm at a pressure differential of 12 psi; 3 in. hot and cold water inlet pipe sizes, 3 in.<br />
tempered water outlet pipe size.<br />
Leonard Model TM-186 (High-Low)<br />
G. Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves: Fully automatic, all-bronze pressure/temperature<br />
relief valve with test lever and extension thermostatic element; temperature relief setting at<br />
210º F and pressure relief setting at 150 psig. Valve shall meet ASME Standards and<br />
comply with the latest AGA ratings. Relief opening to be piped to an indirect connection at<br />
nearest floor drain.<br />
H. Domestic Water Filter (In-Line Type): "Filtrine" Model 10-DUP-TM Duplex Water Filter with<br />
type 304 stainless steel housing, F-13 activated carbon replaceable filter sheet, and 1”<br />
inlet and outlet. Provide connections with dielectric unions, inlet and outlet valves, and full<br />
size bypass with valve.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
221119 - 5 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING<br />
SPECIALTIES
I. Backflow Preventer for carbonated water beverage dispensing equipment: Stainless steel<br />
body and parts, positive double check valve rated for 150 psi at 140º F. Heavy duty<br />
rubber seats shall comply with FDA food additive regulations.<br />
1/2” – Watts Model SD-2.<br />
2.07 WATER METERS:<br />
A. General: Provide water meters with registration in gallons.<br />
1. Water Meters – 2” size and smaller: Disc type conforming to AWWA C700.<br />
2. Water Meters – 3” size and larger: Compound type, conforming to AWWA C702.<br />
B. Remote registration system shall be per local utility standards.<br />
2.08 DOMESTIC HOT WATER EXPANSION TANKS:<br />
A. Fabricated of steel, designed and constructed in accordance with ASME Section VIII,<br />
Division I.<br />
B. Heavy duty removable Butyl bladder.<br />
C. Working pressure of 55 psig.<br />
D. Maximum operating temperature of 240ºF.<br />
E. Tank liner of FDA approved materials.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all water distribution piping may<br />
be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and<br />
the referenced standards.<br />
B. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having water<br />
connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.<br />
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION:<br />
A. Refer to Section 221116, "Basic Plumbing Piping," for installation of piping.<br />
B. Install backflow preventers on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may<br />
occur and on boiler make-up lines, hose bibbs and flush valves.<br />
C. Install pressure reducing valves to limit maximum static pressure at plumbing fixtures to 60<br />
psig.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
221119 - 6 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING<br />
SPECIALTIES
D. Install water hammer arresters in domestic water piping system at each set of flush valves<br />
and in other locations where hydrostatic shock pressures could occur.<br />
E. Install yard hydrants as shown on plans.<br />
3.03 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:<br />
A. Refer to Section 220529, "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment," for<br />
supports and anchors.<br />
3.04 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION:<br />
A. Refer to Section 221116, "Basic Plumbing Piping," for pipe joints.<br />
3.05 INSTALLATION OF WATER METER:<br />
A. Install water meter in accordance with local utility’s installation instructions and<br />
requirements.<br />
B. Set meter on concrete pad as indicated. Refer to Division 3 for concrete, formwork, and<br />
reinforcing requirements.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
OR<br />
C. Mount meter on wall brackets as indicated.<br />
D. Size meter and arrange piping and specialties to comply with utility company's<br />
requirements.<br />
3.06 ROUGH-IN FOR WATER METER:<br />
A. Install rough-in piping and specialties for water meter installation in accordance with local<br />
utility’s instructions and requirements.<br />
3.07 VALVE APPLICATIONS:<br />
A. General Duty Valve Applications: The drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where<br />
specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:<br />
1. Shut-off duty: Use ball or butterfly valves.<br />
2. Throttling duty: Use globe, ball, or butterfly valves.<br />
3.08 INSTALLATION OF VALVES:<br />
A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where<br />
branch or riser serves two or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and<br />
elsewhere as indicated. For sectional valves 2” and smaller, use ball valves; for sectional<br />
valves 2½” and larger, use butterfly valves.<br />
221119 - 7 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING<br />
SPECIALTIES
B. Shut-off Valves: Install shut-off valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, on inlet<br />
of each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. For shut-off valves 2” and smaller,<br />
use ball valves; for shut-off valves 2½” and larger, use butterfly valves.<br />
C. Drain Valves: Install hose-end drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to<br />
completely drain equipment for service or repair. Install hose-end drain valves at the base<br />
of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to completely<br />
drain distribution piping system. For drain valves use ball valves.<br />
D. Check Valves: Install swing check valves on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere<br />
as indicated.<br />
E. Balancing Cocks: Install in each hot water recirculating loop, at discharge side of each<br />
pump, and elsewhere as indicated.<br />
F. Hose Bibbs: Install on exposed piping where indicated, with vacuum breaker.<br />
G. Wall Hydrants: Install where indicated, with vacuum breaker.<br />
3.09 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES:<br />
A. Install backflow preventers at each connection to mechanical equipment and systems, and<br />
in compliance with the plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Locate in same<br />
room as equipment being connected. Pipe relief outlet, through air gap and without<br />
valves, to nearest floor drain.<br />
B. Install pressure regulating valves with inlet and outlet shut-off valves, and balancing cock<br />
bypass. Install pressure gauge on valve outlet.<br />
C. Install shock arresters in locations shown on drawings and at all water connections to<br />
equipment or groups of equipment with quick closing valves, including, but not limited to,<br />
water closet and urinal flush valves, dishwashers, clothes washers, ice makers, autoclaves,<br />
pre-rinse spray hoses, etc. Install in accessible location, and provide isolation valve.<br />
Provide access doors in accordance with architectural recommendations.<br />
1. Units shall be sized in accordance with the following schedule:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
Drawing Designation Fixture Unit Rating P.D.I. Size<br />
SA-1 1 – 11 A<br />
SA-2 12 – 32 B<br />
SA-3 33 – 60 C<br />
SA-4 61 – 113 D<br />
SA-5 114 – 154 E<br />
SA-6 155 – 330 F<br />
3.10 INSTALLATION OF DOMESTIC HOT WATER EXPANSION TANKS:<br />
A. Install expansion tanks in compliance with the Plumbing Code and the authority having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
221119 - 8 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING<br />
SPECIALTIES
B. Locate expansion tanks in the same room as the water heaters or storage tanks, and connect to<br />
the cold water supply line as close to the water heater or storage tank as possible. Installation is<br />
to be between the water heater or storage tank and backflow preventer, check valve, pressure<br />
reducing valve and/or meter.<br />
C. Provide independent support for in-line mounted tanks.<br />
D. Precharge tank to 40 psi gauge pressure at the tank location.<br />
3.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS<br />
A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes<br />
indicated, but in no case smaller than required by Plumbing Code.<br />
B. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical<br />
equipment as indicated. Provide shut-off valve and union for each water connection, and<br />
provide drain valve on drain connection. For connections 2½” and larger, use flanges instead of<br />
unions.<br />
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows:<br />
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it<br />
has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.<br />
2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having<br />
jurisdiction at least 48 hours prior to the time that each of the following<br />
inspections must be made:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before<br />
being concealed or closed in after system is roughed in, and prior to<br />
setting fixtures.<br />
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to<br />
observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the<br />
requirements of the Plumbing Code.<br />
3. Reinspections: Whenever the plumbing official finds that the piping system will not<br />
pass the test or inspection, make the required corrections and arrange for<br />
reinspection by the plumbing official.<br />
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official.<br />
B. Test water distribution piping as follows:<br />
1. Refer to Section 221116, "Basic Plumbing Piping," for piping test.<br />
3.13 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:<br />
1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems which<br />
have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use.<br />
221119 - 9 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING<br />
SPECIALTIES
2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by the authority having<br />
jurisdiction, or in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure<br />
described in AWWA C651, AWWA C652, or as described below:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until the water coming<br />
from the points of outlet is free of visible dirt and debris.<br />
b. Fill the system, or part thereof, with a water/chlorine solution containing at<br />
least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system, or<br />
part thereof, and allow to stand for 24 hours.<br />
c. Drain the system, or part thereof, of the previous solution, and refill with a<br />
water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of<br />
chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.<br />
d. Following the aforementioned standing time, flush the system with clean<br />
potable water until the water coming from the system is free of chlorine.<br />
e. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having jurisdiction.<br />
Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority<br />
shows evidence of contamination.<br />
B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities.<br />
3.14 COMMISSIONING:<br />
A. Fill the system.<br />
B. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is<br />
completely full of water.<br />
C. Before operating the system, perform the following steps:<br />
1. Open indoor fixture valves to full open position. Close drain valves, hydrants, and<br />
sill cocks.<br />
2. Remove and clean strainers.<br />
3. Check pumps for proper direction of rotation. Correct improper wiring.<br />
4. Lubricate pump motors and bearings.<br />
END OF SECTION 22 1119<br />
221119 - 10 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING<br />
SPECIALTIES
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 221123<br />
PLUMBING PUMPS<br />
A. Plumbing pump types and capacities are as indicated on the drawings and schedules, and<br />
by requirements of this Section.<br />
B. Types of pumps specified in this Section include the following:<br />
1. In-Line Circulation Pumps.<br />
2. Water Pressure Booster Systems.<br />
3. Pedestal Type Sump Pumps.<br />
4. Submersible Sump Pumps.<br />
C. Pumps furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of<br />
equipment assembly in other Division 22 sections.<br />
D. Refer to other Division 22 sections for insulation of pump housings and vibration control of<br />
plumbing pumps.<br />
E. Provide the following electrical work as work of this Section, complying with requirements<br />
of Division 26 sections:<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and pump<br />
control panels.<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing<br />
pumps with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in<br />
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1. HI Compliance: Design, manufacture, and installation of plumbing pumps shall<br />
be in accordance with HI (Hydraulic Institute) standards.<br />
2. UL Compliance: Design, manufacture, and installation of plumbing pumps shall<br />
be in accordance with UL 778, "Motor Operated Water Pumps."<br />
3. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide pumps with electric motors and components<br />
which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA<br />
standards.<br />
4. SSPMA Compliance: Testing and rating of sump and sewage pumps shall be in<br />
accordance with Sump and Sewage Pump Manufacturers Association (SSPMA)<br />
standards. Pumps shall be provided with certified rating seal.<br />
5. National Electrical Code (NEC).<br />
6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).<br />
221123 - 1 PLUMBING PUMPS
C. Certification of Pump Performance: Provide pumps whose performance, under specified<br />
operating conditions, is certified by manufacturer.<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up<br />
instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves, including pump<br />
curve and system curves, with selection points clearly indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating<br />
dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of<br />
components.<br />
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring<br />
to plumbing pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and<br />
control wiring. Diagrams shall clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are<br />
factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of pump,<br />
control, and accessory, including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data,<br />
product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in the Operating and Maintenance<br />
Manual, in accordance with the requirements of Division 15.<br />
E. Submit sequence of operation (domestic water booster system).<br />
F. Submittals must be specific to this project. Generic submittals will not be accepted.<br />
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Handle plumbing pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting<br />
and scoring. Do not install damaged plumbing pumps or components; replace with new.<br />
B. Store plumbing pumps and components in a clean, dry location. Protect from weather,<br />
dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.<br />
C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading plumbing<br />
pumps and moving them to final location.<br />
1.05 DESIGN CRITERIA<br />
A. The drawings indicate sizes, profiles, connections, and dimensional requirements of<br />
plumbing pumps and are based on specific manufacturer types and models indicated.<br />
Pumps having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be submitted<br />
on, provided that any deviations in dimensions and profiles and efficiencies do not change<br />
the design concept or intended performance, as judged by the Architect/Engineer.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 GENERAL<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
221123 - 2 PLUMBING PUMPS
A. Provide factory-tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned and painted with one coat of machinery<br />
enamel prior to shipment.<br />
B. Provide all pumps of same type by the same manufacturer.<br />
C. Casings shall be fabricated in such a manner as to allow removal and replacement of<br />
impellers without necessity of disconnecting piping.<br />
D. Motors shall conform to NEMA Standard MG-1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design<br />
B (except Design C where required for high starting torque); single, multiple, or variable<br />
speed, with type of enclosure and electrical characteristics as indicated, and greaselubricated<br />
ball bearings.<br />
1. Motors shall be selected that are non-overloading within the full range of the<br />
pump performance curve.<br />
2. Motors shall be selected for continuous duty at site altitude; Class F insulation shall<br />
be provided where required to meet ambient/altitude operating requirements at<br />
1.0 service factor.<br />
3. Built-in overload protection shall be provided.<br />
E. All pump motors 1 HP or larger shall be of the high-efficiency type.<br />
F. Vibration: Pumps shall be factory balanced such that vibration amplitude, velocity, and<br />
acceleration values do not exceed ISO General Machinery Vibration Chart “Very Good”<br />
curves or manufacturer’s standards, whichever is more stringent.<br />
2.02 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
1. In-Line Circulation Pumps:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Bell & Gossett ITT, Fluid Handling Div.<br />
b. Grundfos Pumps Corp.<br />
c. Taco, Inc.<br />
d. Peerless Pumps<br />
e. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.<br />
f. Dunham-Bush, Inc.<br />
2. Water Pressure Booster Systems:<br />
a. Grundfos Pumps Corp.<br />
b. Bell & Gossett ITT, Fluid Handling Div.<br />
c. Syncroflo, Inc.<br />
d. Paco Pumps<br />
e. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.<br />
f. PSF, Div. of Messco, Inc.<br />
g. Peerless Pumps<br />
3. Pedestal Type Sump Pumps:<br />
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.<br />
221123 - 3 PLUMBING PUMPS
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
b. Ingersoll-Rand Co.<br />
c. Peerless Pump.<br />
d. Weil Pump Co.<br />
e. Weinman Pump LFE Corp., Fluids Control Div.<br />
4. Submersible Sump Pumps:<br />
2.03 IN-LINE CIRCULATION PUMPS:<br />
a. Hydromatic Pumps<br />
b. Goulds Pumps, Inc.<br />
c. Kenco Pump Div., American Crucible Products Co.<br />
d. Peabody Barnes.<br />
e. Weil Pump Co.<br />
f. Weinman Pump LFE Corp., Fluids Control Div.<br />
g. Zoeller Co.<br />
h. Peerless Pumps<br />
A. General: Provide in-line circulation pumps where indicated, and of capacities as<br />
scheduled.<br />
B. Type: Horizontal, oil-lubricated, designed for 125 psi working pressure, 225°F (107°C)<br />
continuous water temperature, and specifically designed for quiet operation.<br />
C. Body: Bronze or stainless steel construction.<br />
D. Shaft: Steel, ground and polished, with integral thrust collar.<br />
E. Bearings: Two horizontal sleeve bearings designed to circulate oil.<br />
F. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal face rotating against ceramic seat.<br />
G. Coupling: Self-aligning, flexible coupling.<br />
2.04 PEDESTAL TYPE SUMP PUMPS:<br />
A. General: Provide pedestal type sump pumps as indicated, of sizes and capacities as<br />
scheduled.<br />
B. Pump: Centrifugal, semi-open impeller type sump pump, complete with galvanized-steel<br />
strainer, cast-iron base plate, suction plate and casing, and cast-iron or bronze impeller.<br />
C. Shaft: Stainless steel of length to suit depth of basin, connected with flexible coupling to<br />
motor, and intermediate sleeve bearing for lengths over 4 ft.<br />
D. Motor: Open drip-proof, with electrical characteristics as scheduled.<br />
E. Basin: Fiberglass construction of indicated dimensions, with inlet connections of sizes and<br />
locations as indicated. Maintain minimum of 3 ft. depth below lowest inlet invert.<br />
F. Cover: Cast-iron or steel circular cover with manhole or handhole opening, depending on<br />
diameter. Provide openings for pump, control rod, and discharge piping.<br />
221123 - 4 PLUMBING PUMPS
G. Controls: Provide NEMA 1 motor-mounted float switch complete with float, float rod, and<br />
rod buttons.<br />
2.05 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS:<br />
A. General: Provide submersible sump pumps as indicated, of sizes and capacities as<br />
scheduled.<br />
B. Pump: Cast-iron shell, cast-iron impeller, stainless steel shaft, factory-sealed grease<br />
lubricated ball bearings, ceramic mechanical seal, and perforated steel strainer.<br />
C. Motor: Hermetically sealed, capacitor-start, with built-in overload protection and electrical<br />
characteristics as scheduled. Provide 10 ft. of 3-conductor PVC cord and molded<br />
grounding plug.<br />
D. Controls: Float-operated mercury switch.<br />
E. Control Panel: Duplex panel in NEMA 1 enclosure. Panel shall have hinged door and<br />
shall include:<br />
1. Fused disconnect switches with lock-out handles through cover.<br />
2. Magnetic starters with OL and LV protection.<br />
3. Test-off-automatic selector switches.<br />
4. Electric Alternator.<br />
5. Control circuit transformers.<br />
6. Green pump running lights.<br />
7. OL reset buttons.<br />
8. Alarm silencing switch.<br />
9. Terminal switch.<br />
F. Provide remote alarm panel for high-water condition, with alarm bell and alarm light with<br />
flasher.<br />
G. Provide submersible sewage ejectors with quick-remove system including floor discharge<br />
elbow, stainless steel lifting rope and upper guide pipe bracket.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions under which plumbing pumps are to be installed. Do not<br />
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner<br />
acceptable to Installer.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS:<br />
A. General: Install plumbing pumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
published installation instructions and in compliance with recognized industry practices, to<br />
ensure that plumbing pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
221123 - 5 PLUMBING PUMPS
B. Access: Provide access space around plumbing pumps for service as indicated, but in no<br />
case less than that recommended by manufacturer.<br />
C. Support:<br />
1. Install base-mounted pumps on minimum of 4” high concrete housekeeping pad,<br />
with anchor bolts inserted in place. Set and level pump, and grout under pump<br />
base with non-shrink grout.<br />
2. Install in-line pumps supported from piping system.<br />
3. Refer to Division 15 section "Vibration Control" for additional supporting and<br />
mounting requirements for plumbing pumps.<br />
D. Basins: Install sump pump basins in indicated locations, and connect to sewer lines.<br />
Brace interior of basin in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, to prevent distortion<br />
or collapse during concrete placement. Refer to Division 3 for concrete work. Set cover<br />
over basin, and fasten to top flange of basin. Install so that cover is flush with finished<br />
floor.<br />
E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to<br />
be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical<br />
Installer.<br />
1. Power wiring, as required, shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor.<br />
All wiring shall be performed per manufacturer’s instructions and applicable state,<br />
federal and local codes.<br />
2. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer’s<br />
submittal and installation requirements of Division 16 sections. Do not proceed<br />
with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment<br />
installer.<br />
F. Piping Connections: Refer to Division 15 plumbing piping sections. Provide piping,<br />
valves, accessories, gauges, supports, and flexible connections as indicated.<br />
3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. Alignment: Check alignment, and, where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps<br />
to within manufacturer’s recommended tolerances, in the presence of manufacturer’s<br />
service representative, prior to system start-up.<br />
B. Start-up: Lubricate pumps before start-up. Provide start-up in accordance with<br />
manufacturer's instructions.<br />
C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with<br />
manufacturer's touch-up paint.<br />
3.04 DEMONSTRATION:<br />
A. The system manufacturer or factory-trained representative shall provide start-up of<br />
packaged pumping systems. This start-up shall include verification of proper installation,<br />
system initiation, adjustment and fine tuning. Start-up shall not be considered complete<br />
until the sequence of operation, including all alarms, has been sufficiently demonstrated to<br />
the Owner or Owner’s designated representative. This jobsite visit shall occur only after all<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
221123 - 6 PLUMBING PUMPS
hook-ups, tie-ins, and terminations have been completed and signed off on the<br />
manufacturer’s start-up <strong>request</strong> form.<br />
B. The system manufacturer or factory-trained representative shall provide on-site training for<br />
Owner’s personnel. This training shall fully cover operation and maintenance of all system<br />
components.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 1123<br />
221123 - 7 PLUMBING PUMPS
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 1223<br />
DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE TANKS<br />
A. Extent of storage tanks work is indicated on the drawings and in provisions of this Section,<br />
including schedules and equipment lists associated with either the drawings or this Section.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of storage tanks<br />
of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service<br />
for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firms with at least 3 years of successful installation experience<br />
on projects with storage tank work similar to that required for this project.<br />
C. Codes and Standards:<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
1. ASME Code Symbol Stamps: Tanks shall comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure<br />
Vessel Vode requirements for storage tank construction and shall be stamped with<br />
ASME Code symbol requirements.<br />
2. AWWA Compliance: Tanks shall comply with applicable requirements of<br />
American Water Works Association standards pertaining to steel water tanks.<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data, including size, capacity, and<br />
weight of selected model; furnished specialties and accessories; and installation and startup<br />
instructions.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s assembly type shop drawings indicating<br />
dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components.<br />
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of storage tank,<br />
including “trouble-shooting” maintenance guides. Include this data, product data, and<br />
shop drawings in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with<br />
requirements of Division 22.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
22 1223 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE<br />
TANKS
1. Steel Water Tanks:<br />
2.02 STEEL WATER TANKS:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. A.O. Smith<br />
b. Raypak<br />
c. State<br />
d. PVI Industries<br />
e. Patterson-Kelley<br />
A. General: Provide steel water tanks of size, capacity, and orientation (vertical) as indicated<br />
on drawings.<br />
B. <strong>Construction</strong>: Hot-dipped galvanized steel, constructed with nontoxic welded joints, and<br />
rated for 125 psi working pressure.<br />
C. Lining: Interior of tanks shall be glass-lined and shall meet requirements of applicable<br />
regulatory standards for potable water tank linings.<br />
D. Support: Horizontal tanks shall be provided with steel saddles; vertical tanks with steel<br />
legs.<br />
E. Manholes: Manholes and covers shall be provided for tanks over 36” diameter, of sizes<br />
and locations as indicated.<br />
F. Tappings: Tappings shall be provided in sizes and locations as indicated; threaded<br />
female for 3” and smaller, flanged for 4” and larger.<br />
G. Accessories: Provide relief valve; pressure gauge; air volume operated controls; air<br />
charging connections; and gauge glass, brass fittings, compression stops, and heavy<br />
guard.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION:<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions under which storage tanks are to be installed, and substrate<br />
which will support storage tanks. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions<br />
have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION OF WATER TANKS:<br />
A. General: Install water tanks as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer’s installation<br />
instructions, and in compliance with applicable codes.<br />
B. Support: Set units on concrete pads, level and plumb.<br />
C. Make connections between water tanks and domestic water piping with isolation valves<br />
and dielectric unions or flanges, as indicated.<br />
22 1223 - 2 DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE<br />
TANKS
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Testing: Upon completion of installation, pressure-test water tanks hydrostatically to<br />
ensure structural integrity and freedom from leaks, in accordance with applicable sections<br />
of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.<br />
3.04 CLEANING:<br />
A. Flushing: Flush water tanks upon completion of installation in accordance with<br />
manufacturer’s instructions, and comply with applicable health codes.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 1223<br />
22 1223 - 3 DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE<br />
TANKS
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 1323<br />
SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS<br />
A. Extent of interceptors work is indicated on the drawings and in provisions of this Section,<br />
including schedules and equipment lists associated with either the drawings or this Section.<br />
B. Refer to other Division 22 sections for drainage piping which is required external to<br />
interceptors; not work of this section.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of interceptors, of<br />
types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar<br />
service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
1. Plumbing & Drainage Institute Compliance: Grease interceptors shall be tested<br />
and rated in accordance with PDI Standard G101, "Testing and Rating Procedure<br />
for Grease Interceptors."<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities of<br />
selected models indicated, weights, furnished specialties and accessories, and installation<br />
and start-up instructions.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating<br />
dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of all components.<br />
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems<br />
products, in accordance with requirements of Division 22.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of interceptor.<br />
Include "trouble-shooting" maintenance guides. Include this data, product data, and shop<br />
drawings in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with requirements of<br />
Division 22.<br />
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Handle interceptors carefully to prevent damage and/or breakage. Do not install<br />
damaged or broken interceptors; replace with new.<br />
B. Store interceptors in a clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, water, construction<br />
debris, and physical damage.<br />
22 1323 - 1 SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Interceptors:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Copeland Precast<br />
b. Rockford<br />
c. Jay R. Smith<br />
d. Wade<br />
e. Zurn<br />
2.02 OIL AND SAND INTERCEPTORS:<br />
A. General: Provide oil and sand interceptors of type, size and capacity as indicated on the<br />
drawings.<br />
B. <strong>Construction</strong>: Cast iron, coated with acid resisting rubber on outside and inside. Provide<br />
flow control fitting.<br />
C. Variations: Provide the following variations as required:<br />
1. Steel extension.<br />
2. Anchor flange.<br />
3. Flashing flange and flashing device.<br />
2.03 SOLIDS INTERCEPTORS:<br />
A. General: Provide solids interceptors of type, size and capacity as indicated on the<br />
drawings.<br />
B. <strong>Construction</strong>: Cast-iron body, aluminum cover, aluminum sediment basket, and<br />
removable bronze screws.<br />
2.04 COMMERCIAL CLOTHES WASHER LINT TRAP:<br />
A. General: Provide lint trap of type, size and capacity as indicated on the drawings.<br />
B. <strong>Construction</strong>: Aluminum plate construction.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION:<br />
22 1323 - 2 SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS
A. Examine areas and conditions under which interceptors are to be installed, as well as<br />
substrate which will support interceptors. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory<br />
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION OF INTERCEPTORS:<br />
A. General: Install interceptors as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installation<br />
instructions, and in compliance with applicable codes.<br />
B. Support: Anchor interceptors securely to substrate, and locate so adequate clearance is<br />
provided for removal of covers and sediment baskets. Set recessed units so top of cover is<br />
flush with finished floor.<br />
C. Piping: Connect inlet and outlet piping to interceptors.<br />
3.03 PROTECTION:<br />
A. Protect interceptors during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with<br />
construction materials and debris, and to prevent damage from construction debris and<br />
traffic.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 1323<br />
22 1323 - 3 SANITARY WASTE INTERCEPTORS
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 1423<br />
STORM DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES<br />
A. This Section specifies building sanitary drainage, storm drainage and vent piping systems,<br />
including drains and drainage specialties.<br />
B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:<br />
1.02 DEFINITIONS:<br />
1. Refer to Division 2 and/or other Division 22 sections for materials and methods of<br />
trenching and backfilling for underground piping installations, not work of this<br />
Section.<br />
2. Refer to Division 2 and/or other Division 22 sections for storm water drainage<br />
piping beginning from 5’-0” outside the building, sanitary drainage piping<br />
beginning from 5’-0” outside the building, and foundation drain piping; not work<br />
of this Section.<br />
3. Refer to other Division 22 sections for piping materials and methods, sealing of<br />
pipe penetrations through basement and foundation walls and fire and smoke<br />
barriers, and mechanical identification.<br />
A. Building Drain: That part of the lowest piping of a drainage system which receives the<br />
discharge from soil, waste, and other drainage pipes within the confines of the building<br />
and conveys it to the building sewer to a point 5’-0” outside the building wall.<br />
B. Building Sewer: That part of the horizontal piping of a drainage system which extends<br />
from the end of the building drain and conveys its discharge to a public sewer, private<br />
sewer, individual sewage disposal system, or other point of disposal.<br />
C. Drainage System: Includes all the piping within a public or private premises which conveys<br />
sewage, rain water or other liquid wastes to a point of disposal. It does not include the<br />
mains of public sewer systems or a private or public sewage treatment or disposal plant.<br />
D. Vent System: A pipe or pipes installed to provide flow of air to or from a drainage system,<br />
or to provide circulation of air within such system to protect trap seals from siphonage and<br />
back pressure.<br />
E. See legend on drawings for additional information.<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for all plumbing items<br />
including model, clearly indicated; operating weights; furnished specialties and<br />
accessories; and installation instructions.<br />
22 1423 - 1 SANITARY & STORM DRAINAGE<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating<br />
dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.<br />
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems<br />
products, in accordance with requirements of Division 15.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of drain and<br />
accessory, including "troubleshooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data<br />
and shop drawings in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with<br />
requirements of Division 15.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Regulatory Requirements:<br />
1. Plumbing Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of International<br />
Plumbing Code.<br />
2. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI standards pertaining to<br />
materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems.<br />
3. ASSE Compliance: Comply with applicable ASSE standards pertaining to<br />
materials, products, and installation of soil and waste systems.<br />
4. PDI Compliance: Comply with applicable PDI standards pertaining to products<br />
and installation of soil and waste systems.<br />
5. PVC, PP and ABS Piping: Only Contractor's personnel which have received<br />
training in the installation of these materials and meet the manufacturer’s<br />
qualifications shall perform the assembly of such materials.<br />
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:<br />
A. Coordinate the installation of roof drains, flashing, and roof penetrations.<br />
B. Coordinate flashing materials installation with roofing, waterproofing, and adjoining<br />
substrate work.<br />
C. Coordinate the installation of drains in poured-in-place concrete slabs to include proper<br />
drain elevations, installation of flashing, and slope of slab to drains.<br />
D. Coordinate with installation of sanitary and storm sewer systems as necessary to interface<br />
building drains with drainage piping systems.<br />
E. Coordinate all penetrations of structural elements with Structural Engineer.<br />
F. Coordinate all installations with other trades.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 1423 - 2 SANITARY & STORM DRAINAGE<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES
1. Drainage Piping Specialties, including backwater valves, expansion joints, drains,<br />
cleanouts, trap primers, flashing flanges and vent flashing sleeves:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Josam<br />
b. Jay R. Smith<br />
c. Zurn<br />
d. Wade<br />
e. Woodford<br />
f. Precision Plumbing Products<br />
g. Sioux Chief<br />
2. Non-Metallic Trench Drains:<br />
a. ACO<br />
b. Quazite<br />
c. Josam<br />
3. Precast Concrete Basins and Manholes:<br />
a. Arco<br />
b. Copeland<br />
c. Amcor<br />
2.02 SANITARY AND STORM DRAINAGE, VENT AND SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE PIPE AND FITTINGS:<br />
A. General: Provide piping and pipe fittings complying with Division 22, Section 221116.<br />
2.03 BASIC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS:<br />
A. General: Provide supports and anchors complying with Division 22, Section 220529.<br />
2.04 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES:<br />
A. Provide drainage piping specialties as scheduled on the Drawings.<br />
B. Backwater Valves: Valve assembly shall be bronze-fitted cast iron, with bolted cover.<br />
Design shall provide for a maximum 1/4” clearance between flapper and seat for air<br />
circulation. Valve ends shall suit piping. Jay R. Smith Fig. 7012.<br />
C. Trap Primers: Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker, with 1/2” connections<br />
matching piping system, and in compliance with ASSE 1018.<br />
1. Valves shall be easily adjusted to high or low pressure and shall be automatically<br />
activated whenever any faucet is opened in the building, causing a pressure drop.<br />
2. Connections: 1/2" NPT male inlet; 1/2" NPT female outlet.<br />
3. Valves shall be "Prime-Rite" Trap Primer Valve as manufactured by Precision<br />
Plumbing Products, Inc., or approved equal.<br />
4. When more than one (1) trap is to be primed, provide one or more distribution<br />
units as required by the manufacturer.<br />
22 1423 - 3 SANITARY & STORM DRAINAGE<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES
D. Expansion Joints: Cast-iron body with adjustable bronze sleeve and bronze bolts with<br />
wing nuts.<br />
E. Flashing Flanges: Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring.<br />
Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required.<br />
F. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron caulking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks, cast-iron<br />
threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks, and cast-bronze stack flashing sleeve for<br />
copper tubing.<br />
2.05 CLEANOUTS:<br />
A. Cleanout Plugs: Cast brass, with threads complying with ANSI B2.1 and local plumbing<br />
code.<br />
B. Floor Cleanouts: Round, with cast-iron body, recessed bronze closure plug, scoriated<br />
polished bronze frame, and cover plate.<br />
C. Wall Cleanouts: Cleanout tee with raised-head brass plug tapped for 1/4-20 thread, flat<br />
style chrome-plated wall cover plate with hole for 1/4” bolt, and 1/4-20 threaded bolt with<br />
chrome-plated flat head.<br />
D. Surface Cleanouts: Cast-iron body ferrule with raised-head brass plug. Medium duty<br />
cast-iron manhole cover and 12” diameter ring to be set in concrete pad. Neenah No. R-<br />
1791-A.<br />
E. Line Cleanouts: Cast-iron tapped cleanout ferrule with raised-head brass plug.<br />
2.06 FLOOR DRAINS, FLOOR SINKS, AND AREA DRAINS:<br />
A. Floor drain, floor sink, and area drain type designations and sizes are indicated on<br />
Drawings.<br />
2.07 CATCH BASINS:<br />
A. Catch basin type designations and sizes are indicated on Drawings.<br />
2.08 TRENCH DRAINS:<br />
A. Trench drain type designations and sizes are indicated on Drawings.<br />
B. Cast-Iron Trench Drains: Cast-iron shallow hub body and grate with end plates and<br />
gaskets, assembled in standard lengths for total length and width as indicated, with the<br />
following features:<br />
1. Sediment bucket.<br />
2. Flashing device.<br />
3. Heel-proof, vandal-proof, convex grate.<br />
4. Dome bottom strainer.<br />
5. Bottom outlet, inside caulk.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 1423 - 4 SANITARY & STORM DRAINAGE<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES
C. Non-Metallic Trench Drains: Polyester resin and quartz aggregate, precast, interlocking<br />
design, with bottom radius and 0.6 percent slope.<br />
2.09 ROOF DRAINS:<br />
1. Precast Material: Load pressure of 14,500 psi, bending pressure of 2,900 psi,<br />
frost-proof, salt-proof, inert under dilute acid and alkali conditions, and less than<br />
1.0 percent water absorption rate.<br />
2. Grates: Cast iron or steel as indicated, for heavy-duty truck traffic, with openings<br />
designed to prevent entry of bicycle or wheelchair tires.<br />
A. Roof drain type designations and sizes are indicated on Drawings.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION:<br />
1. Standard Roof Drain: Cast-iron body with sump, removable cast-iron vandalproof<br />
dome strainer, cast-iron flashing flange and cast-iron ring with integral<br />
gravel stop, and underdeck clamp.<br />
2. Overflow Drain: Cast-iron body with sump, removable cast-iron vandal-proof<br />
dome strainer, cast-iron flashing flange and cast-iron clamp with integral gravel<br />
stop, cast-iron underdeck clamp, and standpipe with inlet flow line two (2) inches<br />
above the low point of the roof under dome strainer.<br />
A. General: Install piping in accordance with governing authorities having jurisdiction, except<br />
where more stringent requirements are indicated.<br />
B. Inspect piping before installation to detect any apparent defects. Mark defective materials<br />
with white paint and promptly remove from site.<br />
C. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all drainage and vent piping and<br />
specialties may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the<br />
original design, and the referenced standards.<br />
D. Verify all existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to<br />
installations.<br />
E. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having drain<br />
connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.<br />
F. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and<br />
specialties are to be installed.<br />
G. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 FOUNDATION PREPARATION FOR UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAINS:<br />
A. Refer to Division 2 for trenching and backfilling requirements.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 1423 - 5 SANITARY & STORM DRAINAGE<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES
3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION:<br />
A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams)<br />
indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and<br />
arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. So far as<br />
practical, install piping as indicated.<br />
B. Install overflow roof drains with the inlet flow line located a maximum of 2” above the<br />
lowest point of the roof.<br />
C. All floor drains are to be provided with P-trap the same size as the floor drain outlet,<br />
unless otherwise noted on Drawings.<br />
D. Provide flashing membrane for all floor drains in structure above slab on grade level.<br />
E. Lubricate cleanout plugs with a mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Prior to building<br />
turnover, remove cleanout plugs, relubricate, and reinstall using only enough force to<br />
ensure permanent leakproof joint.<br />
F. Provide flashing for all floor drains, floor cleanouts and shower drains above grade.<br />
Make watertight with Chloraloy 240 underslab moisture vapor barrier as manufactured by<br />
the Nobel Co. of Grand Haven, Michigan. Flashing shall extend at least 24” from drain<br />
rim into floor membrane or on structural floor. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device and<br />
make watertight, durable joint. Provide flashing collar extension with all drains and<br />
cleanouts installed above grade.<br />
3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:<br />
A. General: Refer to Section 220529 for supports and anchors.<br />
3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES:<br />
A. Install backwater valves in sanitary building drain piping as indicated, and as required by<br />
the plumbing code. For interior installation, provide minimum 13” dia. cleanout cover<br />
flush to floor centered over backwater valve cover and of adequate size to remove valve<br />
cover for service.<br />
B. Install expansion joints on vertical risers at every 75 feet or as otherwise indicated on<br />
plans, and as required by the plumbing code.<br />
C. Above-Ground Cleanouts: Install in building drain piping as indicated, and:<br />
1. As required by plumbing code;<br />
2. At each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees below slab;<br />
3. At minimum intervals of 100 feet;<br />
4. At base of each vertical soil or waste stack;<br />
5. At sinks and urinals on grade;<br />
6. At each upper terminal;<br />
7. At egress of building (surface cleanout);<br />
8. At each water closet or toilet group.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 1423 - 6 SANITARY & STORM DRAINAGE<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES
D. Cleanouts Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types as<br />
indicated, in accessible locations.<br />
E. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and<br />
cleanout passing through waterproof membranes.<br />
F. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing<br />
in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
3.06 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION:<br />
A. Install pipes and pipe joints in accordance with Section 221116.<br />
3.07 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS:<br />
A. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set tops of<br />
drains flush with finished floor.<br />
C. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer with minimum trap size same as outlet size<br />
of drain connected.<br />
D. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and<br />
adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.<br />
E. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.<br />
3.08 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS:<br />
A. Install trap primers with piping pitched towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8” per foot (1<br />
percent). Adjust trap primer for proper flow.<br />
3.09 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAINS:<br />
A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof membrane<br />
manufacturer’s installation instructions.<br />
B. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain and<br />
adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.<br />
C. Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.<br />
3.10 SERVICE CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Provide new sanitary/storm sewer services. Before commencing work, check invert<br />
elevations required for sewer connections, confirm inverts, and ensure that these<br />
connections can be properly made with slope for drainage and adequate cover to avoid<br />
freezing.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 1423 - 7 SANITARY & STORM DRAINAGE<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES
B. Provide all necessary piping and connections from building drain/storm drain system to<br />
connection with city sewer systems in location shown on civil site plan.<br />
3.11 CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures<br />
and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by<br />
the plumbing code.<br />
B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or<br />
drains.<br />
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Inspections:<br />
1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until<br />
it has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction.<br />
2. During the progress of the installation, notify the plumbing official having<br />
jurisdiction at least 48 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made.<br />
Perform tests specified in Section 15055 in the presence of the plumbing official.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before<br />
being concealed or closed in after system is roughed in, and prior to<br />
setting fixtures.<br />
b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection by the plumbing official to<br />
observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the<br />
requirements of the plumbing code.<br />
3. Reinspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or inspection,<br />
make the required corrections, and arrange for reinspection.<br />
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports, signed by the plumbing official.<br />
B. Piping System Test: Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of<br />
the authority having jurisdiction, or, in the absence of a published procedure, as described<br />
in Section 15055.<br />
3.13 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.<br />
B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris.<br />
3.14 PROTECTION:<br />
A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and<br />
debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.<br />
B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops. Piping<br />
shall not be left open-ended during construction.<br />
22 1423 - 8 SANITARY & STORM DRAINAGE<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES
C. Exposed ABS or PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with two coats of<br />
water-based latex paint. Color selection shall be by Architect.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 1423<br />
22 1423 - 9 SANITARY & STORM DRAINAGE<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 3400<br />
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS<br />
A. Provide a complete plumbing system as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein,<br />
consisting of, but not limited to, water heaters and associated accessories, installation, and<br />
connections.<br />
1.02 DOMESTIC HOT WATER:<br />
A. Domestic hot water is to be supplied from gas-fired water heaters.<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Product Data: Submit Product Data and installation instructions for each water heater and<br />
accessory specified; clearly indicate rated capacities of selected models of water heaters.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit rough-in drawings with brand names for each item on each<br />
sheet. Detail dimensions, rough-in requirements, required clearances, and methods of<br />
assembly of components and anchorages.<br />
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements and wiring diagrams for<br />
power supply to water heaters. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are<br />
factory installed and portions that are field installed.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts list for each type of water<br />
heater and accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in the<br />
Operating and Maintenance Manual in accordance with the requirements of Division 23.<br />
E. Submit certification of compliance with specified AGA, UL, NSF, and ASHRAE<br />
requirements.<br />
F. Submit certification of compliance with performance verification requirements specified in<br />
this Section.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 GAS-FIRED WATER HEATER (COMMERCIAL):<br />
A. Approved manufacturers are State, Rudd, Rheem, A.O. Smith, Bradford-White, and<br />
Lochinvar.<br />
B. The water heater shall be gas-fired with automatic controls, including 100% shut-off in<br />
case of loss of pilot and/or excessive tank water temperature. The design shall be certified<br />
22 3400 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
y the AGA and shall have approval of the National Sanitation Foundation for supplying<br />
180°F water both as a booster and as a storage heater.<br />
C. The storage capacity and recovery capacity shall be as shown on the drawings.<br />
D. Tank shall be of heavy gauge steel rated for 150 psi working pressure with inner lining of<br />
glass. Tank shall have insulation completely around tank except at the bottom. There<br />
shall be a hose thread drain valve at bottom of tank and a handhole cleanout.<br />
E. Water heater shall have magnesium anode rod suspended in tank to minimize internal<br />
tank corrosion.<br />
F. The water heater shall have a jacket of cold rolled steel with baked-on enamel finish.<br />
Jacket shall have provisions for access to all controls and burners.<br />
G. Temperature/pressure relief valve shall be provided with AGA temperature steam rating in<br />
excess of the input rating of the water heater.<br />
H. Water heater shall have a ten-year warranty.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION:<br />
A. Make connections between water heaters and domestic water piping with isolation valves<br />
and dielectric unions.<br />
B. Pipe relief valve discharge to within 4” of the floor. Anchor end of pipe to adjacent<br />
surface.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 3400<br />
22 3400 - 2 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 3500<br />
DOMESTIC WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS<br />
A. Extent of heat exchangers work required by this section is indicated on drawings and<br />
schedules, and by requirements of this section.<br />
B. Types of heat exchangers specified in this section include the following:<br />
1. Water-to-Water U-Tube Heat Exchangers.<br />
2. Water-to-Water Plate and Frame Heat Exchanger.<br />
C. Refer to other Division 22 sections for insulation of heat exchangers; piping, valves,<br />
specialties, and controls required in conjunction with heat exchangers; not work of this<br />
section.<br />
1.02 OUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of heat<br />
exchangers, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in<br />
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
1. ASME Compliance: Construct heat exchangers in accordance with ASME Boiler<br />
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII "Pressure Vessels", Division 1.<br />
2. TEMA Compliance: Construct and install heat exchangers in accordance with<br />
"Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association".<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for heat exchangers including<br />
performance data, materials, dimensions, weights, and installation data. Submit<br />
Manufacturer’s Data Report f or Pressure Vessels, Form U- 1, as required by provisions of<br />
ASME code rules.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating<br />
dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of<br />
components.<br />
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems<br />
products in accordance with requirements of Division 22.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each heat exchanger<br />
including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data and product data in<br />
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 22.<br />
22 3500 - 1 DOMESTIC WATER HEAT<br />
EXCHANGERS
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Handle heat exchangers carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting, and scoring. Do<br />
not install damaged units or components; replace with new.<br />
B. Store heat exchangers in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,<br />
construction debris, and physical damage.<br />
C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading heat<br />
exchangers, and moving them to final location.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Water-to-Water U-Tube Heat Exchangers:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Amtrol, Inc.<br />
b. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.<br />
c. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.<br />
d. Dunham-Bush Inc.<br />
e. Patterson-Kelley Co; Div. of Harsco.<br />
f. Precision Heat Exchanger Co.<br />
g. Taco, Inc.<br />
2. Water-to-Water Plate and Frame Heat Exchangers:<br />
a. Paul Mueller Co.<br />
b. Tranter, Inc.<br />
c. APV<br />
d. Alfa Laval<br />
2.02 WATER-TO-WATER U-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS:<br />
A. General: Provide water-to-water U-tube heat exchangers as indicated, of capacity as<br />
scheduled, and as specified herein.<br />
B. Type: Shell and tube, U-bend removable tube bundle, heating water in shell, heated<br />
water in tubes.<br />
C. Materials:<br />
1. Shell: Steel.<br />
2. Tubes: ¾” O.D. copper.<br />
3. Heads: Cast iron or steel.<br />
4. Tube Sheets: Steel.<br />
5. Baffles, Tie-Rods, Spacers: Steel.<br />
22 3500 - 2 DOMESTIC WATER HEAT<br />
EXCHANGERS
D. <strong>Construction</strong>: ASME construction for 125 psi design pressure at 300 deg. F.<br />
2.03 WATER-TO-WATER PLATE HEAT EXCHANGER:<br />
A. This Contractor shall provide plate heat exchanger of capacity as scheduled and where<br />
shown on the drawings with embossed heat transfer plates, perimeter gaskets, guide rails,<br />
and frames and compression bolts.<br />
B. Units shall be ASME rated for 125 psig operating pressure, 300 deg. F. maximum<br />
temperature, have a heat transfer area to be produce the conditions scheduled on the<br />
drawing.<br />
C. Plates shall be Type 316L stainless steel and copper brazed.<br />
D. Nozzles shall be 150 lb. ASA rated loose flange type, of the size called for on the<br />
drawings.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions under which heat exchangers are to be installed. Do not<br />
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner<br />
acceptable to Installer.<br />
3.02 WATER-TO-WATER U-TUBE HEAT EXCHANGERS:<br />
A. General- Install water-to-water U-tube heat exchangers as indicated, and as specified<br />
herein.<br />
B. Mounting: Mount heat exchangers on steel floor stands as indicated, located for required<br />
clearance for tube bundle removal.<br />
C. Mounting: Mount heat exchangers on trapeze hangers as indicated, located for required<br />
clearance for tube bundle removal.<br />
D. Water Piping: Provide piping as indicated, including union, shutoff valve, and<br />
thermometer on each inlet and outlet connection; relief valve on tube bundle outlet, with<br />
outlet piped to floor drain; and ½” drain valve on shell drain connection.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION OF WATER-TO-WATER PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGERS:<br />
A. General: Comply with water-to-water plate and frame heat exchanger manufacturer's<br />
instructions for installation.<br />
B. Install water-to-water plate and frame heat exchangers, piping and accessories in<br />
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 3500 - 3 DOMESTIC WATER HEAT<br />
EXCHANGERS
C. Water Piping: Provide piping as indicated, including shutoff valves (ball valve with infinite<br />
memory stop where required for balancing), thermometers and pressure gauges at each<br />
inlet and outlet, and hose-end drain valve at lowest connectors, or unit side of valves.<br />
D. Insulate areas of heat exchanger which would exceed 120°F.<br />
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with<br />
manufacturer's touch-up paint.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 3500<br />
22 3500 - 4 DOMESTIC WATER HEAT<br />
EXCHANGERS
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 22 4100<br />
PLUMBING FIXTURES<br />
A. Provide a complete plumbing system as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein,<br />
consisting of, but not limited to, plumbing fixtures and trim, rough-in, setting, and<br />
connections.<br />
1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:<br />
A. Permits, Tap Fees, and Basic Piping Materials and Methods.<br />
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Codes and Standards:<br />
1. Local plumbing code and/or ordinances.<br />
2. International Plumbing Code.<br />
3. Regulations of water and/or sewer agencies having jurisdictional control of the<br />
area in which the project is to be constructed.<br />
4. ASHRAE Standard 18: “Method of Testing for Rating Drinking-Water Coolers with<br />
Self-Contained Mechanical Refrigeration Systems.”<br />
5. ARI Standard 1010: “Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically-<br />
Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers.”<br />
6. ANSI Standard A117.1: “Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities<br />
Accessible To and Usable By Physically Handicapped People.”<br />
7. Public Law 90-480: “Architectural Barriers Act of 1968.”<br />
8. UL Standard 399: “Drinking-Water Coolers.”<br />
9. Public Law 101-336: “Americans with Disabilities Act” (ADA).<br />
10. NSF Standard 61: “Drinking Water Components.”<br />
11. Energy Conservation Act – 1992: “Energy Conservation Standards.”<br />
B. Where fixtures are specified as handicapped-accessible, it shall be the sole responsibility of<br />
all manufacturers and/or suppliers to provide plumbing fixtures and related trim which<br />
meet or exceed the ADA requirements.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Product Data: Submit Product Data and installation instructions for each fixture, faucet,<br />
specialty, accessory and trim specified; clearly indicate rated capacities of selected models<br />
of water coolers.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit rough-in drawings with brand names for each item on each<br />
sheet. Detail dimensions, rough-in requirements, required clearances, and methods of<br />
assembly of components and anchorages. Coordinate requirements with Architectural<br />
22 4100 - 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES
Woodwork shop drawings specified in Division 6 for fixtures installed in countertops and<br />
cabinets. Furnish templates for use in woodwork shop.<br />
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer’s electrical requirements and wiring diagrams for<br />
power supply to units. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory<br />
installed and portions that are field installed.<br />
D. Color Charts: Submit manufacturer’s standard color charts for cabinet finishes and fixture<br />
colors.<br />
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts list for each type of<br />
manufactured plumbing fixture, valve, and trim. Include this data, product data, and shop<br />
drawings in the Operating and Maintenance Manual in accordance with the requirements<br />
of Division 15.<br />
F. Submit certification of compliance with specified ANSI, UL, and ASHRAE requirements.<br />
G. Submit certification of compliance with performance verification requirements specified in<br />
this Section.<br />
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Store fixtures where environmental conditions are uniformly maintained within the<br />
manufacturer’s recommended temperature range to prevent damage.<br />
B. Store fixtures and trim in manufacturer’s original shipping containers. Do not stack<br />
containers or store in such a matter as to cause damage to the fixtures or trim.<br />
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:<br />
A. Schedule rough-in installations with the installation of other building components.<br />
1.07 MAINTENANCE:<br />
A. Extra Stock:<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
1. Furnish special wrenches and other devices necessary for servicing plumbing<br />
fixtures and trim to Owner, with receipt, in a quantity of one device for each 10<br />
fixtures, minimum of one wrench and one device.<br />
2. For each type of faucet, furnish faucet repair kits complete with all necessary<br />
washers, springs, pins, retainers, packings, O-rings, sleeves, and seats in a<br />
quantity of one kit for each 40 faucets, minimum of one repair kit per faucet type.<br />
2.01 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND TRIM:<br />
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following<br />
approved manufacturers in each category. (The following list is not necessarily all-<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 4100 - 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES
inclusive, nor are all fixture types listed necessarily used on this project; refer to drawings<br />
and schedules.)<br />
1. Water Closets – Kohler, American Standard, Crane, Universal Rundle, Eljer.<br />
2. Urinals – Kohler, American Standard, Crane, Universal Rundle, Eljer.<br />
3. Lavatories – Kohler, American Standard, Universal Rundle, Eljer.<br />
4. Sinks (cast iron) – Kohler, American Standard, Universal Rundle, Eljer.<br />
5. Sinks (stainless steel) – Just, Elkay.<br />
6. Bathtubs – Kohler, American Standard, Universal Rundle, Eljer.<br />
7. Mop Basins and Receptors – Fiat, Arco, Stern-Williams.<br />
8. Drinking Fountains – Kohler, American Standard, Universal Rundle, Eljer, Cordley.<br />
9. Electric Water Coolers – Elkay, Oasis, Halsey Taylor, Sunroc, Haws.<br />
10. Faucets – Delta, Chicago, Moen.<br />
11. Shower Valves – Symmons, Powers, Speakman, Lawler, Leonard.<br />
12. Flush Valves – Delany, Sloan, Zurn, Moen.<br />
13. Water Closet Seats – Furnished with fixture or equal by Olsonite, Beneke, Sperzel,<br />
Bemis.<br />
14. Fixture Carriers – Josam, Smith, Zurn, Wade.<br />
15. Wash Fountains and Group Showers – Bradley.<br />
16. Floor Drains/Sinks – Josam, Smith, Zurn, Wade, Sioux Chief.<br />
B. Where possible, fixtures of the same type and fittings of the same type shall be the product<br />
of one manufacturer.<br />
C. All exposed trim shall be chrome-plated brass unless otherwise specified in schedule.<br />
2.02 FIXTURE CARRIERS AND SUPPORTS:<br />
A. Wall Mounted Lavatory Supports: Commercial grade adjustable cast iron type, with thin<br />
concealed arms and sleeves, and complete with escutcheons and mounting fasteners.<br />
B. Wall Mounted Lavatory Supports: Commercial grade cast iron type, having tubular steel<br />
uprights with concealed arms and sleeves, mounted on adjustable headers, and complete<br />
with heavy cast iron short feet bolted to floor, alignment trusses, and mounting fasteners.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
OR<br />
C. Water Closet and Clinical Service Sink Supports: Commercial grade adjustable type,<br />
factory painted; with cast iron face plate, support base, and appropriate type waste fitting<br />
having face plate gasket; zinc-plated steel fixture studs and fasteners; coated and threaded<br />
adjustable wall coupling with neoprene closet outlet gasket; and chrome plated fixture cap<br />
nuts and fiber fixture washers. Provide an appropriate model to suit deep or shallow<br />
rough-in, siphon jet or blow-out action, and type of sanitary piping system to which it is<br />
connected. For wheelchair water closets, provide unit with elevated fixture mounting<br />
height as required.<br />
D. Urinal Supports: Commercial grade type; with steel top and bottom plates with bolts to<br />
support fixture independently from the wall; adjustable sleeves, steel tubular uprights<br />
bolted to floor, and alignment trusses; and steel plates with adjustable holes, bolts, nuts,<br />
and chrome plated cap nuts and washers. Top supporting plates shall have cutouts when<br />
used with back inlet urinals.<br />
22 4100 - 3 PLUMBING FIXTURES
2.03 FITTINGS, TRIM, AND ACCESSORIES:<br />
A. Supplies and stops for Lavatories and Sinks: Polished chrome-plated, loose-keyed, angle<br />
stop having 1/2” inlet, 3/8” O.D. x 12” long flexible tubing outlet, wall flange and<br />
escutcheon. Quantity to match trim specified.<br />
B. Supplies and Stops for Water Closets: Polished chrome-plated, loose-keyed, angle stop<br />
having 1/2” inlet, 3/8” O.D. x 12” long flexible tubing outlet with collar, wall flange and<br />
escutcheon.<br />
C. Traps for Drinking Fountains, Lavatories and Bidets: 17-gauge tubular brass, 1-1/4”<br />
adjustable “P” trap and waste to wall.<br />
D. Traps for Sinks: Cast brass, 1-1/2” adjustable “P” and waste to wall.<br />
E. Tub waste and Overflow Fittings: 17-gauge brass bath waste and overflow, having<br />
chrome-plated waste spud with universal type outlet connection suitable for 1-1/2” I.P.S.<br />
or 1-1/2” O.D. tubing, or 1-1/2” solder-joint outlet connection on waste tee.<br />
F. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated cast brass with set screw.<br />
G. For all ADA accessible lavatories, supplies and waste shall be insulated with molded vinyl<br />
covers. Use Truebro, Inc. Lav-Guard insulation kit, or approved equivalent.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION:<br />
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all plumbing fixtures may be<br />
installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the<br />
referenced standards.<br />
B. Examine rough-in for potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations of<br />
piping connections prior to installing fixtures.<br />
C. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be<br />
installed.<br />
D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION:<br />
A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer’s written<br />
instructions, rough-in drawings, pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and<br />
the referenced standards. Provide connections to individual fixtures not less than the sizes<br />
scheduled on the drawings, unless specifically noted otherwise.<br />
B. Fixture mounting height and rough-in dimensions shall be as indicated on the architectural<br />
drawings and specifications.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 4100 - 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES
C. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind<br />
or within wall construction to provide rigid installation. Provide rigid bracing for each flush<br />
valve stub-out.<br />
D. Set shower receptors and mop basins on a leveling bed of cement grout.<br />
E. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture.<br />
F. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished<br />
locations and within cabinets and millwork.<br />
G. Seal fixtures to walls, countertops and floors using General Electric silicone sealant or<br />
equal. Match sealant color to fixture color.<br />
H. Visible parts of fixture brass and accessories shall be chrome-plated. (Trim with external<br />
finish of chrome-plated plastic shall not be used.)<br />
I. Install hose end faucets and hose connections with vacuum breakers.<br />
J. Provide chrome-plated anchor bolts and washers for all lavatories and china bolt caps for<br />
all floor-mounted water closets. Solidly attach floor-mounted water closets to floor with<br />
hex expansion shield of cast iron closet flanges.<br />
3.03 ADA ACCESSIBILITY:<br />
A. Review Mechanical and Architectural drawings to determine fixtures requiring ADA<br />
accessibility. Notify Architect/Engineer of any physical conflicts preventing full dimensional<br />
compliance prior to beginning work.<br />
B. Comply with the installation requirements of ANSI A117.1 and Public Law 90-480 with<br />
respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped. Arrange flush valve/flush tank<br />
handles with proper orientation to meet ADA requirements.<br />
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after<br />
units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest.<br />
B. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures.<br />
3.05 ADJUSTING:<br />
A. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, shower valves, and flush valves to<br />
provide proper flow and stream.<br />
B. Replace washers of leaking or dripping faucets and stops.<br />
3.06 CLEANING:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
22 4100 - 5 PLUMBING FIXTURES
A. Remove all labels, and clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer’s<br />
recommended cleaning methods and materials. Leave installation ready for use.<br />
3.07 PROTECTION:<br />
A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures, water coolers, and trim.<br />
B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless expressly approved in writing by<br />
the Owner.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 22 4100<br />
22 4100 - 6 PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 0010<br />
BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and<br />
Supplementary Conditions, and Division 01 Conditions and specification sections, apply to<br />
this section.<br />
B. Related Sections: Refer to all sections in Division 21, 22, 23, and 26 specifications and<br />
drawings.<br />
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
A. The work included under this Division, consists of furnishing all materials, supplies,<br />
equipment, tools, transportation, and facilities, and performing all labor and services<br />
required in connection with, or properly incidental to, mechanical work as described in<br />
Division 23 Sections of the Specifications, as shown on the Contract Drawings, or<br />
reasonably implied there-from.<br />
B. While all work is in progress, except for short designated intervals during which<br />
connections are to be made, continuity of service to all existing systems shall be<br />
maintained. Contractor shall be directly responsible for any interruptions to service and<br />
shall be required to repair any damages to existing systems which are caused by his<br />
operations.<br />
C. Any work which will affect the Building Occupants, including, but not limited to, work<br />
which generates excessive noise, dust, smoke, or inconvenience to Building Occupants,<br />
shall be performed after business hours, unless prior approval has been obtained from the<br />
Building Manager.<br />
D. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with Owner at all times for all new-toexisting<br />
connections, system shutdowns, restart-up, and flushing and filling of both new<br />
and existing affected systems.<br />
E. Provide temporary piping services where required to maintain existing areas operable, as<br />
shown on the drawings.<br />
1.03 WORK NOT INCLUDED:<br />
A. Painting of exposed piping and unfinished portions of fixtures and equipment, except as<br />
otherwise specified within this Division.<br />
B. Concrete work including miscellaneous metal in connection with foundations, pits, sumps,<br />
and/or concrete housekeeping pads under heat exchangers, pumps, and other<br />
mechanical equipment; however, furnish template for spacing and sizes of concrete pads<br />
and anchor bolts under the Mechanical Sections of these Specifications.<br />
23 0010 - 1 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
Exception: Concrete inertia bases for mechanical equipment.<br />
C. Temporary heat will be provided by the General Contractor. Use of the permanent<br />
heating system will not be allowed without written authorization.<br />
D. Lintels over wall openings.<br />
E. Cutting and patching of new and existing work.<br />
F. Temporary water and toilet facilities will be provided by the General Contractor.<br />
1.04 PREPURCHASED EQUIPMENT:<br />
A. The Owner has prepurchased certain items of equipment as indicated on the drawings<br />
and specified in this Division. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to include in<br />
his bid his costs for state and local taxes, rigging and installation of equipment and all<br />
accessories, piping connections to equipment, isolation (if required), installation of motors<br />
where required, and any other items required which are not furnished with equipment and<br />
are necessary for a complete and operable system.<br />
B. All responsibility for the above equipment as outlined in Division 23 will be assigned to the<br />
successful bidder, including, but not limited to, start-up, training for operating personnel,<br />
administration of warranties provided by equipment supplier, etc.<br />
1.05 EXAMINATION OF SITE:<br />
A. The contractor shall visit and examine the premises and/or job site so as to ascertain, prior<br />
to bidding, the existing conditions in which he will be obliged to operate in performing his<br />
part of the contract. No extras will be allowed due to lack of knowledge of these<br />
conditions.<br />
B. Field verify all existing conditions prior to submitting bids.<br />
C. Report any existing damaged equipment or systems to the Owner prior to any work.<br />
1.06 ACCESSIBILITY:<br />
A. Install all equipment and materials in such a manner as to provide required access for<br />
servicing and maintenance. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and<br />
devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allow<br />
ample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. In the event<br />
that changes of indicated locations and arrangements are deemed necessary by the<br />
Architect/Engineer, they shall be made by the Contractor without additional charges,<br />
provided the change is ordered before work is performed and no extra materials are<br />
required.<br />
B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location.<br />
C. Furnish hinged steel access doors with concealed latch, whether shown on drawings or<br />
not, in all walls and ceilings where required for access to all concealed valves, shock<br />
absorbers, air vents, motors, fans, balancing cocks, and other operating devices requiring<br />
adjustment or servicing.<br />
23 0010 - 2 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
D. The minimum size of any access door shall not be less than the size of the equipment to be<br />
removed, or 24” x 24” if used for service only.<br />
E. Furnish access doors to trades performing work on equipment or fixtures in which they are<br />
to be built, in ample time for building in as the work progresses.<br />
F. Whenever possible, group valves, cocks, etc. in such a manner as to permit use of a<br />
minimum number of access doors within a given room or space.<br />
G. Factory manufactured access doors shall be of a type compatible with the finish on the<br />
equipment or fixtures on which they are to be installed.<br />
H. Access doors in fire-rated walls and ceilings shall have equivalent UL label and fire rating.<br />
1.07 ROUGH-IN:<br />
A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of<br />
the actual equipment to be connected.<br />
B. Refer to equipment shop drawings and manufacturer's requirements for actual provided<br />
equipment for rough-in requirements.<br />
1.08 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES:<br />
A. Chemical and physical properties of all materials, and the design, performance<br />
characteristics and methods of construction of all items of equipment shall be in<br />
accordance with the following applicable regulations, references and standards of current<br />
editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA)<br />
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)<br />
3. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)<br />
4. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers<br />
(ASHRAE)<br />
5. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)<br />
6. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)<br />
7. American Water Works Association (AWWA)<br />
8. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL)<br />
9. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI)<br />
10. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)<br />
11. Factory Insurance Association (FIA)<br />
12. Factory Mutual Laboratories (FM)<br />
13. Manufacturers Standards Institute (MSI)<br />
14. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)<br />
15. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)<br />
16. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI)<br />
17. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)<br />
B. All work, materials and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes<br />
and ordinances of the local, state and federal authorities having jurisdiction. Such codes,<br />
when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and specifications. As a<br />
minimum, the installation shall comply with the latest published version of the following<br />
codes:<br />
23 0010 - 3 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. International Building Code (IBC)<br />
2. International Fire Code (IFC)<br />
3. National Electric Code (NEC)<br />
4. National Fire Code (NFC)<br />
5. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)<br />
6. International Mechanical Code (IMC)<br />
7. International Plumbing Code (IPC)<br />
8. Applicable state and local codes and amendments.<br />
C. Comply with standards in effect at the date of these Contract Documents, except where a<br />
different standard or specific date or edition is indicated.<br />
D. The handling, removal and disposal of regulated refrigerants shall be in accordance with<br />
U.S. EPA, state and local regulations.<br />
E. After entering into contract, Contractor will be held responsible for completing all work<br />
necessary to meet these requirements without additional expense to the Owner.<br />
1.09 REQUIREMENTS OF LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES:<br />
A. Comply with rules and regulations of local utility companies. Include in bid the cost of all<br />
valves, valve boxes, meter boxes, meters and such accessory equipment which will be<br />
required for the project.<br />
1.10 DEFINITIONS:<br />
A. It is the intention of these specifications and drawings to call for finished work, tested and<br />
ready for operation. Wherever the word "provide" is used, it shall mean "furnish and install<br />
complete and ready for use."<br />
B. "Contractor" shall mean any contractor performing work under this Division of the<br />
Specifications.<br />
C. Where this Division of the Specifications states work to be performed by the use of the<br />
words "shall" or "secure" or other performance terms, it shall be assumed that such work<br />
shall be performed by the Mechanical Contractor unless stated otherwise.<br />
D. The word "Mechanical" applies to all work specified herein wherever applicable<br />
1.11 PERMITS AND TAP FEES:<br />
A. Secure and pay for all permits, tap fees, taxes, royalties, licenses, and inspections in<br />
connection with the work specified under this Division and indicated on the drawings,<br />
unless otherwise noted in the General and Supplementary Conditions and/or Division 1.<br />
B. File all necessary plans, prepare all documents, and obtain all necessary approvals<br />
required by all governmental departments having jurisdiction.<br />
C. Upon completion of work, furnish to the Architect/Engineer a certificate of inspection and<br />
final approval of the local inspection authority.<br />
23 0010 - 4 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.12 DRAWINGS:<br />
A. Drawings are diagrammatic in character and do not necessarily indicate every required<br />
offset, valve, fitting, etc.<br />
B. All drawings relating to this structure, together with these specifications, shall be<br />
considered in bidding and construction. The drawings and specifications are<br />
complementary, and what is called for in either of these shall be binding as though called<br />
for by both. Should any conflict or omissions arise between the drawings and<br />
specifications, such conflict shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for<br />
resolution.<br />
C. Drawings shall not be scaled for rough-in measurements or used as shop drawings.<br />
Where drawings are required for these purposes or must be made from field<br />
measurement, Contractor shall take the necessary measurements and prepare the<br />
drawings.<br />
D. Before any equipment is installed, determine that said equipment will properly fit within the<br />
space allocated, that required piping grades can be maintained, and that ductwork can be<br />
run as intended without interferences with other systems, structural elements or the work of<br />
other trades.<br />
E. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above and below<br />
ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other building components. All<br />
components shall be located as tight to structure as possible. Coordinate ceiling cavity<br />
space carefully with all trades. In the event of conflict, install mechanical and electrical<br />
systems within the cavity space allocation in the following order of priority:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Plumbing waste and vent piping and roof drain mains and leaders.<br />
2. Supply, return and exhaust ductwork.<br />
3. Fire sprinkler mains and leaders.<br />
4. Electrical conduit.<br />
5. Domestic hot and cold water.<br />
6. Fire sprinkler branch piping and sprinkler runouts.<br />
F. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.<br />
G. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for<br />
mechanical installations.<br />
H. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in pouredin-place<br />
concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.<br />
I. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installation of mechanical materials and equipment<br />
for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring<br />
positioning prior to closing in the building.<br />
J. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate the<br />
installation of mechanical equipment and materials.<br />
K. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and<br />
overhead equipment in such a manner as to provide the maximum headroom possible.<br />
23 0010 - 5 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
L. Install all mechanical equipment in such a manner as to facilitate maintenance and repair<br />
or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for<br />
ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.<br />
M. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead<br />
utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised<br />
service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each<br />
service.<br />
N. The Contractor shall provide all labor and material required for all necessary ancillary<br />
work, including, but not limited to, the starting/stopping of all mechanical equipment,<br />
opening/closing of all valves, draining/refilling of all mechanical systems and<br />
operating/verifying the operation of all mechanical systems and controls as required to<br />
accomplish all work necessary to meet construction document requirements.<br />
O. Drawings are not intended to show complete or accurate details of buildings, equipment,<br />
ductwork and piping in every respect. They indicate general layout, approximate<br />
locations, relations and arrangements and are not intended to show details of<br />
manufacturer’s equipment. Details of equipment shall be furnished by manufacturer and<br />
Contractor for Architect/Engineer’s review.<br />
P. Not all details of piping systems are shown on drawings nor are they specified herein.<br />
Piping shall be such as to legally pass all inspections by the local Inspection Department,<br />
State and Federal Authorities and Insurance Company having jurisdiction. Any changes or<br />
additions which may be necessary to obtain such inspection and approval shall be made<br />
by the Contractor as a part of this Contract without additional cost to the Owner.<br />
Q. Unless otherwise indicated, all equipment and performance data listed is for job site<br />
conditions (elevation 5,280 ft.).<br />
1.13 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING:<br />
A. General:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Provide all necessary excavation and backfill for installation of mechanical work in<br />
accordance with Division 21,22 and 23 (beneath building and 5’-0” beyond)<br />
B. Contact Owners of all underground utilities to have them located and marked, at least 2<br />
business days before excavation is to begin. Also, prior to starting excavation, brief<br />
employees on marking and color codes, and train employees on excavation and safety<br />
procedures for natural gas lines. When excavation approaches gas lines, expose lines by<br />
carefully probing and hand digging.<br />
1.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING:<br />
A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components, and<br />
materials and includes removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, and<br />
equipment.<br />
B. Portable ventilation fans shall be provided for any procedure which generates smoke, dust,<br />
dirt, etc.<br />
23 0010 - 6 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
C. When coring requirements are identified, an x-ray of the area is to be taken prior to the<br />
performance of the work operation.<br />
D. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and processes of cutting<br />
and patching.<br />
E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a result<br />
of mechanical installations.<br />
F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work that is<br />
necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.<br />
G. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials as required<br />
to:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work;<br />
2. Remove and replace defective work;<br />
3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract<br />
Documents;<br />
4. Remove samples of installed work for testing as specified;<br />
5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures;<br />
6. Uncover and restore work to provide for Architect’s or Engineer’s observation of<br />
concealed work, upon written instructions from the Architect or Engineer.<br />
H. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and<br />
materials as indicated, including, but not limited to, removal of mechanical piping, heating<br />
units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new<br />
work.<br />
I. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or<br />
scheduled to be removed.<br />
J. Provide and maintain approved type of temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to<br />
prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. The Contractor shall coordinate<br />
electrical power with the Engineer.<br />
K. Locate, identify, and protect mechanical and electrical services passing through<br />
remodeling or demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained<br />
operational. When transit services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for the<br />
affected areas and notify the Owner prior to changeover.<br />
1.15 TEMPORARY FACILITIES:<br />
A. Light, Heat, Power, etc.<br />
1. The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing temporary electricity,<br />
heat and other facilities.<br />
2. Permanent building equipment shall not be used without written permission from<br />
the Owner. If this equipment is used for temporary heating or cooling, it shall be<br />
adequately maintained per manufacturer's instructions and protected with filters,<br />
strainers, controls, reliefs, etc. The guarantee period shall not start until the<br />
equipment is turned over to the Owner for his use.<br />
23 0010 - 7 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.16 MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Certain materials and/or equipment in this specification are specified by manufacturer and<br />
catalog numbers. The design is based on the specified equipment, which establishes a<br />
standard of quality, performance, physical configuration, etc. If the Contractor should<br />
elect to use equipment other than the equipment specified and used as a basis for design,<br />
but is listed as "acceptable" in the specifications, he shall be responsible for space requirements,<br />
configuration, changes in performance, bases, supports, vibration isolators,<br />
structural members, openings in structure, and effects on other apparatus due to its use.<br />
B. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between reviewed<br />
submittals and/or shop drawings and the contract documents (design drawings and specifications)<br />
are discovered after submittals and/or shop drawings are processed by the<br />
Contracting Officer, the design drawings and/or specifications shall control and shall be<br />
followed unless modified by addenda or change order.<br />
C. Where no specific manufacturer is listed, a first-class item of cataloged manufacture shall<br />
be furnished.<br />
1.17 INSTALLATION:<br />
A. All materials and equipment shall be new, free of defects, and installed in accordance with<br />
manufacturer’s current published recommendations in a neat manner and in accordance<br />
with standard practice of the Industry. Maintain maximum headroom and space<br />
conditions at all points.<br />
1.18 SUBSTITUTION APPROVALS:<br />
A. Equipment and/or materials manufactured by any one of the manufacturers listed in this<br />
specification or on the drawings shall be acceptable.<br />
B. Approval Prior to Bidding: Materials or equipment specified by manufacturer’s name is<br />
used as a basis of standard. Materials of equal quality may be used if approved prior to<br />
bidding. Requests for approval shall be received at the Architect/Engineer’s office at least<br />
ten (10) calendar days before bid opening.<br />
C. Substitution Requests after Execution of Contract: If Contractor wishes to furnish or use a<br />
substitute item of material and/or equipment after execution of the contract, he must<br />
submit a change order <strong>request</strong> to the Architect/Engineer. The <strong>request</strong> for change order<br />
shall itemize each of the proposed <strong>substitution</strong>s identified by applicable specification<br />
section, paragraph number and/or drawing number. A price change (increase or<br />
decrease) shall be listed for each item along with compete data showing performance over<br />
entire range, physical dimensions, electrical characteristics, material construction,<br />
operating weight and other applicable data. The change order <strong>request</strong> will be reviewed<br />
for equality, suitability and reasonableness of price differential. A single <strong>substitution</strong><br />
change order listing the approved items will be issued, with the net cost of the change<br />
order being the sum of the approved item costs less the sum of the corresponding<br />
specified item costs. No subsequent <strong>substitution</strong> change orders will be considered. The<br />
Architect/Engineer’s decision will be final.<br />
D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the substitute material and/or<br />
equipment fits into the space provided. The Contactor shall pay for all extra costs incurred<br />
by other trades for any and all changes necessitated by these <strong>substitution</strong>s.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0010 - 8 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
E. Contractor shall submit shop drawings for all substitute materials and equipment, showing<br />
any changes required in piping, ducting, electrical wiring, space allocation, etc.<br />
Contractor shall be responsible for making these changes at his expense without any<br />
additional cost to Owner.<br />
1.19 MECHANICAL SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary), Division 1.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. All mechanical submittals shall be packaged by specification section. "Piece-meal"<br />
or "partial" submittals will be returned, unless prior approval from the Engineer<br />
has been obtained –- NO EXCEPTIONS.<br />
2. The Contractor shall identify any "long lead time" items which may impact the<br />
overall project schedule. If these submittal requirements affect the schedule, the<br />
Contractor shall identify the impacts and confer with the Engineer within two<br />
weeks of entering into the Contract.<br />
3. The first submittal package shall be provided in expandable, 3-post, hard-back<br />
binders, sized to fit all future submittals for this job. The cover shall be identified<br />
with the job name, Owner's project number, date, prime contractor's name, etc.<br />
4. Each submittal shall be tabbed by the mechanical specification section in which it<br />
is specified.<br />
5. An index shall be provided which includes:<br />
a. Product<br />
b. Plan Code (if applicable)<br />
c. Specification Section<br />
d. Manufacturer and Model Number<br />
6. Coordination drawings do not apply to the above. These drawings may be<br />
submitted in a separate submittal.<br />
B. The manufacturer's material or equipment listed in the schedule or identified by name on<br />
the drawings are the types to be provided for the establishment of size, capacity, grade<br />
and quality. If alternates are used in lieu of the scheduled names, the cost of any changes<br />
in construction required by their use shall be borne by Contractor.<br />
C. All equipment shall conform to the State and/or local Energy Conservation Standards.<br />
D. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only when<br />
submitted by and stamped by the General Contractor. Data submitted from<br />
subcontractors and material suppliers directly to the Engineer will not be processed unless<br />
prior written approval is obtained by the Contractor.<br />
E. Before starting work, Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect/Engineer four<br />
(4) sets of all shop drawings and descriptive equipment data required for the project.<br />
Unless each item is identified with specification section and sufficient data is provided to<br />
determine its compliance with the specifications and drawings, the submittal will be<br />
returned without action and marked "Revise and Resubmit." Where an entire submittal<br />
package is returned for action by the Contractor, the Engineer will mark up two sets, keep<br />
one, and return the remainder. Contractor shall continue to submit four (4) sets of any<br />
individual shop drawings, product data or samples which were returned without a "Make<br />
Corrections Noted" or "No Exceptions Taken" action, until they are so marked. When a<br />
"Make Corrections Noted" marking is received, Contractor shall make the required<br />
23 0010 - 9 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
corrections for inclusion in the Operating and Maintenance Manual. Submittals marked<br />
"Make Corrections Noted" shall not be resubmitted during the submittal process.<br />
F. Submittals shall include the following specified materials and, in addition, any materials<br />
not listed below but which are specified in the individual sections of Division 23 which<br />
follow:<br />
Pipe Markers.<br />
Water treatment equipment, including water softeners.<br />
Valves, including pressure relief and pressure regulating.<br />
Pumps.<br />
Tanks, including expansion and fuel storage.<br />
Thermometers and pressure gauges.<br />
Boilers, burners, trim and feed equipment.<br />
Piping specialties, including hot water and steam.<br />
Supports, anchors and seals.<br />
Expansion compensators.<br />
Flexible pipe connectors.<br />
Water flow meters.<br />
Vibration isolators.<br />
Insulation, including plastic pipe fitting insulation covers and manufacturer's<br />
installation instructions.<br />
Heat exchangers.<br />
Terminal heat transfer units.<br />
Air conditioning equipment and specialties.<br />
Fans, ductwork, dampers, louvers, grilles, registers and diffusers.<br />
Automatic control systems.<br />
Wiring diagrams, control panelboards, motor test data, motors, starters and<br />
controls for electrically operated equipment furnished by mechanical trades.<br />
Identify each item with specification section and sufficient data to certify its compliance with the<br />
specifications.<br />
1.20 JOB SITE PERSONNEL:<br />
A. Furnish the services of an experienced superintendent who shall be constantly in charge of<br />
all installation work and shall supervise all skilled workmen, plumbers, fitters, metal<br />
workers, welders, helpers, and labor required to unload, transfer, erect, connect-up,<br />
adjust, start, operate, and test each system.<br />
1.21 WORKMANSHIP:<br />
A. The appearance of the finished work shall be of equal importance with its mechanical<br />
efficiency. All work shall be done in accordance with acceptable commercial practices.<br />
1.22 QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION:<br />
A. Mechanical equipment provided under this contract shall operate under all load conditions<br />
without noise or vibration which is objectionable in the opinion of the Engineer. In the<br />
case of rotating machinery, noise or vibration noticeable outside of the room in which it is<br />
installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room, will be considered objectionable.<br />
Noise or vibration conditions considered objectionable by the Engineer shall be corrected<br />
23 0010 - 10 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
in an approved manner by the Contractor at his expense. Vibration control shall be<br />
accomplished by means of approved vibration eliminators installed in a manner<br />
recommended by the manufacturer of the eliminators.<br />
1.23 MECHANICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS:<br />
A. Prepare and submit a set of coordination drawings as necessary or as required by the<br />
Engineer, showing major elements, components, and systems of mechanical equipment<br />
and materials in relationship with other building components. Prepare drawings to an<br />
accurate scale of 1/4” =1’-0” or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and<br />
materials, including clearances for installing and maintaining insulation, servicing and<br />
maintaining equipment, valve stem movement, and similar requirements. Indicate<br />
movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.<br />
B. Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively<br />
coordinate and integrate all installations. Indicate locations where space is limited and<br />
where sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow<br />
of the work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:<br />
1.24 PRODUCT LISTING:<br />
1. Mechanical equipment room layouts.<br />
2. Specific equipment installations, including:<br />
a. Chillers<br />
b. Cooling towers<br />
c. Boilers<br />
d. Pumps and compressors<br />
e. Tanks and heat exchangers<br />
f. Furnaces<br />
g. Air-handling units<br />
3. Work in pipe spaces, chases, trenches, and tunnels.<br />
4. Exterior wall penetrations.<br />
5. Ceiling plenums which contain piping, ductwork, or equipment in congested<br />
arrangement.<br />
6. Installations in mechanical riser shafts, at typical sections and crucial offsets and<br />
junctures.<br />
7. Pipe expansion loops.<br />
8. Numbered valve location diagrams.<br />
9. Exterior underground lines in common excavation.<br />
10. Manifold piping for multiple equipment units.<br />
A. Prepare listing of major mechanical equipment and materials for the project within (2) two<br />
weeks of signing the Contract Documents, and transmit to the Mechanical Engineer. A<br />
sample schedule is included at the end of this section to aid in completing this<br />
requirement.<br />
B. Unless otherwise specified, all materials and equipment shall be of domestic (USA)<br />
manufacture and shall be of the best quality used for the purpose in commercial<br />
application.<br />
C. Provide all information <strong>request</strong>ed.<br />
23 0010 - 11 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
D. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in Division 1,<br />
"PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION."<br />
E. When two or more items of the same type of equipment are required (e.g., plumbing<br />
fixtures, pumps, valves, air conditioning units, etc.), they shall be of the same<br />
manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk<br />
materials, piping, tubing, fittings (except flanged and grooved types), sheet metal, wire,<br />
steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment, and<br />
similar items used in work, except as otherwise indicated.<br />
F. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected items.<br />
1.25 NAMEPLATE DATA:<br />
A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of mechanical equipment,<br />
indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity,<br />
operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential<br />
data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location.<br />
1.26 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades,<br />
compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications. Products<br />
shall be adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage,<br />
and handling.<br />
B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing.<br />
Protect stored equipment and materials from damage, dirt, dust and moisture.<br />
C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction site<br />
congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantities<br />
needed for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.<br />
D. Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube, except for<br />
concrete, corrugated metal, hub-and-spigot, and clay pipe. Maintain end-caps through<br />
shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt,<br />
debris, and moisture.<br />
E. Protect stored pipes and tubes. Elevate above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof<br />
wrapping. When stored inside, do not exceed structural capacity of the floor.<br />
F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt by inside storage and<br />
enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping.<br />
1.27 RECORD DOCUMENTS:<br />
A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.<br />
B. Keep a complete set of record document prints in custody during entire period of<br />
construction at the construction site.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0010 - 12 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
C. Mark Drawing Prints to indicate revisions to size and location of piping and ductwork, both<br />
exterior and interior; location of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, boxes,<br />
and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations,<br />
dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping;<br />
concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping<br />
systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located,<br />
and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion<br />
compensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders; concealed control system devices. Changes<br />
to be noted on the drawings shall include final location of any piping or ductwork<br />
relocated from where shown on the drawings.<br />
D. At the completion of the project, mark all valve tag numbers on the drawings and turn<br />
these drawings over to the General Contractor for his submission to the Architect. This<br />
contract will not be considered completed until these record drawings have been received<br />
and reviewed by the Engineer.<br />
1.28 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA:<br />
A. The Contractor shall prepare an Operating and Maintenance Manual covering all systems<br />
and equipment installed under this Division.<br />
B. The Operating and Maintenance Manual shall be 8-1/2” x 11” in size and assembled in<br />
loose leaf three-ring or post binder. The manual shall be adequately indexed and contain<br />
the following information:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Contractors’ names, addresses, and telephone numbers.<br />
2. Alphabetical list of all system components, with the name and address and 24hour<br />
phone number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the<br />
first year of operation.<br />
3. Guarantees and warranties of all equipment whenever applicable.<br />
4. All manufacturers’ data applicable to the installed equipment, such as the<br />
following:<br />
a. Shop drawings<br />
b. Installation instructions<br />
c. Lubrication instructions<br />
d. Wiring diagrams<br />
5. A simplified description of the operation of all systems, including the function of<br />
each piece of equipment within each system. These descriptions shall be<br />
supported with a schematic flow diagram when applicable.<br />
6. Temperature control diagrams, including an explanation of the control sequence<br />
of each system along with the following instructions wherever applicable:<br />
a. Emergency procedures for fire or failure of major equipment.<br />
b. Normal starting, operating and shutdown.<br />
c. Summer or winter shutdown.<br />
7. System balancing report.<br />
8. Valve tag list when applicable.<br />
9. An outline of a preventative maintenance program for each system, which shall<br />
include a schedule of inspection and maintenance. It shall suggest the<br />
23 0010 - 13 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.29 SCHEMATIC FLOW DIAGRAM:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
maintenance and inspection that should be performed by the Owner and that<br />
which should be done with outside service.<br />
A. Prepare a schematic flow diagram for each system showing all component parts, including<br />
all main isolation valves. The schematic flow diagrams presented in the contract drawings<br />
may be used for this purpose, provided they are properly edited to reflect as-built<br />
conditions. Relate all valve tag numbers to this diagram where applicable.<br />
B. The schematic flow diagrams and the temperature control diagrams are to be wallmounted<br />
under glass in an accessible location, preferably in the main mechanical equipment<br />
room.<br />
1.30 INITIAL LUBRICATION OF EQUIPMENT, ADJUSTING, AND FILLING OF SYSTEMS:<br />
A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.<br />
B. Contractor shall properly lubricate all mechanical pieces of equipment which he has<br />
provided before turning the building over to the Owner. He shall attach a linen tag or<br />
heavy duty shipping tag on each piece of equipment showing the date of lubrication and<br />
the type and brand of lubricant used.<br />
C. Furnish the Engineer with a typewritten list, in quadruplicate, of each item lubricated and<br />
type of lubricant used, no later than two (2) weeks before completion of the project, or at<br />
time of acceptance by the Owner of a portion of the building and the mechanical systems<br />
involved.<br />
D. Before operating any mechanical systems, all equipment bearings shall be lubricated, and<br />
bolts, pulleys and other moving parts shall be checked for alignment and tolerances in<br />
accordance with manufacturer’s operating instructions. All piping and liquid systems shall<br />
be flushed out and filled with operating fluids under the supervision of the Water<br />
Treatment Contractor.<br />
E. After tests, valves and other parts of work shall be adjusted for quiet operation. All<br />
strainers shall be cleaned out by removing and washing basket or screen. Compressors<br />
shall have lubricating oil changed. Vibrations and noise shall be suppressed.<br />
1.31 DEMOLITION:<br />
A. Refer to Division 1. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.<br />
Any demolition process shall require a detailed Method of Procedure.<br />
B. During the demolition phase of this contract, it is the responsibility of this Contractor to<br />
carefully remove existing equipment, piping, ductwork and related items, either as shown<br />
on the demolition drawings as being removed, or as required for the work. These items<br />
shall be tagged, protected from damage, and stored as directed by the Architect or<br />
Engineer. A list of all items stored shall be turned over to the Architect or Engineer. At the<br />
completion of the remodeling work or when directed by the Architect, all stored items not<br />
reused or wanted by the Owner shall be removed from the premises.<br />
23 0010 - 14 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
C. The location of existing equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., shown on the drawings has<br />
been taken from existing drawings and is, therefore, only as accurate as that information.<br />
All existing conditions shall be verified from field measurements with necessary adjustment<br />
being made to the drawing information.<br />
D. If asbestos material, in any form, is discovered by this contractor in the process of his work,<br />
he shall report such occurrence to the Architect or Engineer immediately. The Architect or<br />
Engineer will determine the action to be taken for the asbestos removal, which is not a part<br />
of the work to be done under this Division.<br />
1.32 WARRANTIES:<br />
A. Refer to the Division 1 for procedures and submittal requirements for warranties.<br />
B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 15 into the Operating and<br />
Maintenance Manual.<br />
C. Provide complete warranty information for each item, which shall include name of product<br />
or equipment; date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and<br />
names, addresses, and telephone numbers of manufacturing/servicing personnel as well<br />
as procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty services.<br />
D. The Contractor shall warrant all materials, workmanship and the successful operation of<br />
all equipment and apparatus installed for a period of one (1) year from the date of final<br />
acceptance of the entire work as identified in the General Conditions, and shall guarantee<br />
to repair or replace at his own expense any part of the apparatus that may show defect<br />
during that time, provided such defect is, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, due to<br />
imperfect material or workmanship and not due to carelessness or improper use on the<br />
part of the owner/operator.<br />
E. Include repair of damage to any part of the premises caused by water and gas leaks or<br />
breaks in piping, fixtures or equipment furnished and installed under this Division which<br />
occur within the warranty period.<br />
F. Include repair of damage to or replacement of any part of the equipment and replacement<br />
of refrigerant and oil caused by leaks or breaks in piping and equipment within the<br />
warranty period.<br />
1.33 OWNER ACCEPTANCE:<br />
A. At the time of acceptance of the building by the Owner, all Division 23 systems shall be in<br />
first-class operating condition in all respects and satisfactory to the Architect/Engineer.<br />
1.34 CLEANING OF EQUIPMENT, MATERIALS AND PREMISES:<br />
A. Clean equipment and materials thoroughly. Leave surfaces to be painted smooth and<br />
clean, ready for painters. Clean entire premises of unused materials, rubbish, debris,<br />
grease spots and dirt left by each Subcontractor. Remove, clean and replace pipeline<br />
strainers after systems have been in operation for a period of thirty (30) calendar days.<br />
B. Provide detergents, solvents and other cleaning agents that are compatible with materials<br />
used in fabrication of systems. They shall not adversely affect materials or mechanisms in<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0010 - 15 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
systems and must be acceptable to equipment manufacturers. Detergents, solvents and<br />
other cleaning agents shall be compatible with process streams to be handled by systems<br />
in which they are used.<br />
C. After each section of piping and equipment has been flushed clean, remove strainers.<br />
Clean and reinstall permanent strainers in system. Reconnect vessels, equipment and<br />
piping and reinstall control valves, safety valves, controllers, rupture discs, orifice plates<br />
and other instruments and with new gaskets, thread lubricants, etc. If a subsequent<br />
pressure test is required, it may be necessary to leave some such items out of the system<br />
until after completion of pressure test. For systems which must be hydrostatically tested<br />
and dried, hydrostatic test may be connected prior to cleaning and drying.<br />
D. Clean each vessel separately. If vessel or equipment is large enough to have a manhole,<br />
use clean water to wash down all internal surfaces. Leave bottom open for trash and dirt<br />
to drain thoroughly. If vessel is too small for flushing through a manhole, connect clean<br />
water line to inlet and flush with a continuous flow of water in the same direction flow<br />
would be if in service. The vessel should be full of water in order to have maximum<br />
turbulence. Shut off flow and allow to drain. With drain still open, allow more water to<br />
enter vessel for a short time to flush any remaining trash from the bottom.<br />
E. Any filters used during construction shall be replaced with new filters during final cleanup.<br />
1.35 SAFETY:<br />
A. Refer to Division 1. Comply with the latest OSHA requirements as well as any additional<br />
state and local regulations and any requirements of the Owner.<br />
1.36 MAINTENANCE:<br />
A. Twice during the warranty period, the Temperature Controls Contractor shall check all<br />
controls in the building to ascertain that they are functioning as designed. This shall apply<br />
to all thermostats, aquastats, humidistats, freezestats, and firestats. This portion of the<br />
work shall be performed by the Contractor that installed the controls.<br />
1.37 COORDINATION AND COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES:<br />
A. The Contractor for this work shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts<br />
of the work, and if headroom or space conditions appear inadequate or if any<br />
discrepancies occur between the plans for his work and the plans for the work of others,<br />
he shall report such discrepancies to the Architect/Engineer and shall obtain written<br />
instructions for any changes necessary to accommodate his work with the work of others.<br />
Any changes in the work covered by this specification made necessary by the failure or<br />
neglect of the Contractor to report such discrepancies shall be made by and at the<br />
expense of this Contractor.<br />
1.38 RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR:<br />
A. The Contractor is responsible for the complete and satisfactory installation of the work in<br />
accordance with the true intent of the drawings and specifications. He shall provide,<br />
without extra charge, all incidental items required, as a part of his work. The installation<br />
23 0010 - 16 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
shall be so made that its several component parts will function together as a workable<br />
system and shall be left with all parts adjusted and in working order.<br />
1.39 PROJECT CLOSEOUT:<br />
A. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, complete the requirements listed<br />
below.<br />
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the following Mechanical Checklist by performing<br />
and/or coordinating such items prior to applying for certification of substantial completion.<br />
1. Refer to individual specification sections for additional requirements.<br />
C. Mechanical Checklist:<br />
23 0010 - 17 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
ITEM<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SUBMITTALS<br />
SHOP<br />
DRAWINGS<br />
PRODUCT<br />
DATA<br />
TEST/REPORT<br />
REQUIREMENTS<br />
FACTORY REP<br />
SUPERVISION<br />
AT SITE<br />
TRAINING<br />
REQ'D AT SITE<br />
EXTRA<br />
MATERIAL<br />
EQUIPMENT WARRANTIES X<br />
O & M MANUALS X<br />
COORDINATION DRAWINGS X<br />
RECORD DRAWINGS<br />
MOTORS, STARTERS AND<br />
X X<br />
DRIVES X X X X X<br />
PIPE X X X<br />
PIPE FLUSH/CLEAN<br />
PIPE DISINFECTION<br />
X X<br />
(POTABLE H2O) X X X<br />
WELDERS CERTIFICATE X<br />
SPECIAL PIPING SYSTEMS X X X X X<br />
SPECIAL PIPING SYSTEMS X X X X X<br />
VALVES X X<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES X X<br />
PIPE EXPANSION JOINTS X X<br />
METERS AND GAUGES X X X<br />
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS<br />
MECHANICAL<br />
X X X<br />
IDENTIFICATION X X X<br />
VIBRATION CONTROL X X X X<br />
MECHANICAL INSULATION X<br />
FIRE PROTECTION X X X X X X X<br />
FIRE PUMPS<br />
WATER DISTRIBUTION<br />
X X X X<br />
PIPING X X X X X<br />
DRAINAGE & VENT SYSTEMS X X X X<br />
PLUMBING FIXTURES X X X<br />
PLUMBING PUMPS X X<br />
STORAGE TANKS X X X<br />
WATER TREATMENT X X X X X X X<br />
23 0010 - 18 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
O & M
TREATMENT X<br />
TREATMENT CHEMICALS X<br />
WATER HEATERS X X X<br />
INTERCEPTORS X X X<br />
COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS X X<br />
FUEL OIL SYSTEMS X X X X X<br />
MEDICAL GAS SYSTEMS X X X X<br />
NATURAL GAS SYSTEMS X X X X X<br />
GLYCOL SYSTEMS X X X X X X<br />
STEAM PIPING X X X X<br />
STEAM SPECIALTIES<br />
CONDENSATE PUMP & REC.<br />
X X<br />
SETS X X<br />
HVAC PUMPS X X<br />
BOILERS X X X X X<br />
BOILER ACCESSORIES<br />
BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS &<br />
X X<br />
STACKS X X X<br />
FEEDWATER EQUIPMENT X X X X<br />
DEAERATORS X X X X<br />
FORCED AIR FURNACES X X 1 X<br />
FUEL-FIRED HEATERS X X<br />
CONDENSING UNITS X X 1 X X X<br />
ABSORPTION CHILLERS X X 2 (RECIPROCATING)(SCROLL)C<br />
X X X<br />
HILLERS X X 1 CENTRIFUGAL CHILLER-H2O<br />
X X X<br />
COOLED X X 1 X X X<br />
COOLING TOWERS X X X X X<br />
EVAPORATIVE CONDENSERS X X X X X<br />
AIR-COOLED CONDENSERS X X 1 X X X<br />
HEAT EXCHANGERS X X X<br />
PACKAGED A/C UNITS X X X<br />
ROOFTOP A/C UNITS X X 1 X X X<br />
HEAT PUMPS X X 1 COMPUTER ROOM A/C<br />
X X X<br />
UNITS X X 1 X X X<br />
HUMIDIFIERS X X 1 X<br />
TERMINAL UNITS X X<br />
ELECTRIC HEATING CABLES X X<br />
ENERGY RECOVERY UNITS X X X X X<br />
AIR HANDLING FANS X X 3 X X X<br />
AIR HANDLING UNITS X X X X X<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0010 - 19 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
AIR CLEANING X X X X<br />
METAL DUCTWORK X X X X X<br />
NON-METAL DUCTWORK X X X X X X<br />
HVAC CASINGS X X X<br />
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES X X X X<br />
SOUND ATTENUATORS X X X<br />
AIR OUTLETS & INLETS X X X<br />
AIR TERMINALS X X<br />
DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL<br />
SYSTEMS X X X X X X<br />
ELECTRIC CONTROL<br />
SYSTEMS X X X X X X<br />
PNEUMATIC CONTROL<br />
SYSTEMS X X X X X X<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND<br />
BALANCING X<br />
MECHANICAL<br />
COMMISSIONING X<br />
1 Warranty – 5 years<br />
2 Warranty Report/Warranty<br />
3 Kitchen Exhaust Hood<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE)<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 0010<br />
23 0010 - 20 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 0513<br />
MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are either<br />
separate components or are an integral part of all mechanical equipment. These<br />
components include, but are not limited to, factory-installed motors, starters, variable<br />
frequency drives and disconnect switches furnished as an integral part of packaged<br />
mechanical equipment.<br />
B. This Section includes wiring of field-mounted switches and similar mechanical/electrical<br />
devices provided for mechanical systems to equipment control panels.<br />
C. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for<br />
mechanical equipment are scheduled on the Electrical Drawings. In case of conflict,<br />
Electrical Drawings shall take precedence. Do not purchase motors or electrical<br />
equipment until power characteristics available at building site location have been<br />
confirmed by Contractor.<br />
D. Related sections: Refer to all sections in Division 23. Refer to Division 26 Specification<br />
Section and Division 26 drawings.<br />
E. The Electrical service to this project is 480/277 volt, three phase, four wire with 208/120<br />
volt, three phase, four-wire step-down transformer.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motors, motor starters and<br />
drives of types, ratings and characteristics required, whose products have been in<br />
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Single Manufacturer: Provide all motors, starters and variable frequency drives for the<br />
project by a single manufacturer except when part of factory packaged equipment.<br />
C. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on<br />
projects utilizing motors, motor starters, capacitors and drives similar to that required for<br />
this project.<br />
D. All equipment covered by this specification shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and<br />
installed in accordance with all currently approved or accepted provisions of the following<br />
codes, standards, and regulations, and as specified herein.<br />
1. IEEE 51 - Harmonic Distortion Standards.<br />
2. NEC – National Electrical Code.<br />
3. NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association.<br />
4. UL and/or ETL Testing Laboratory.<br />
5. NFPA 70E.<br />
23 0513 - 1 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
E. Coordination with Electrical Work: Wherever possible, match elements of electrical<br />
provisions of mechanical work with similar elements of electrical work specified in Division<br />
26 sections. Comply with applicable requirements of Division 26 sections for electrical<br />
work of this section which are not otherwise specified.<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Refer to Division 1 and Basic Mechanical Requirements for administrative and procedural<br />
requirements for submittals.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensional drawings of VFD's showing accurately scaled<br />
equipment layouts. Drawings shall include, as a minimum, the following: physical<br />
dimensions of each unit, weight, general arrangements with incoming and outgoing<br />
conduit locations, schematic, and connection diagram sufficient to install system.<br />
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit schematic power and control wiring diagrams, prepared for this<br />
project, of complete VFD and soft-start starter assemblies. Terminals and conductor<br />
identification shall correspond to power and control schematics submitted under other<br />
sections. General wiring diagrams with various non-applicable options shown are not<br />
acceptable. Clearly differentiate between factory and field wiring.<br />
D. Listing of Motors for Mechanical Work: Concurrently with submittal of mechanical<br />
products listing, submit separate listing showing rating, power characteristics, efficiencies,<br />
power factors, application and general location of every motor to be provided with<br />
mechanical work. Also include notations of whether motor starter is furnished or installed<br />
integrally with motor or equipment containing motor. Submit updated information<br />
promptly when and if initial data is revised.<br />
E. Motor Submittal Data: The following data shall be submitted for all motors:<br />
1. Full load current and service factor running current at operating voltage.<br />
2. Locked rotor current, starting power factor and power factor at full load.<br />
3. Efficiency at full load.<br />
4. Data to substantiate Class F insulation with Class B temperature rise at 100%<br />
load.<br />
5. Capacitor size (KVAR) for maximum power factor correction at 95% lagging.<br />
6. Synchronous and full load speeds (rpm).<br />
7. Enclosure type (ODP, TEFC, EXP, TENV, WPI, etc.).<br />
Note: All tests (except locked rotor current) shall be made at full voltage and rated frequency.<br />
1.04 PRODUCT STORAGE:<br />
A. All variable frequency drives shall be protected from dirt, debris, and moisture at all times.<br />
Variable frequency drives shall be wrapped air and water tight with dust-tight and<br />
moisture-proof material until factory start-up of variable frequency drives is initiated.<br />
Exception: Drives may be opened only during wiring terminations by temperature controls<br />
contractor and/or electrical contractors.<br />
B. All motors not designed for exposure to water or moisture shall be protected at all times.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0513 - 2 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following<br />
manufacturers for each type of product:<br />
2.02 MOTORS:<br />
1. Motors: Century/MagneTek, Baldor, Reliance, Westinghouse, Siemens-Allis,<br />
General Electric.<br />
2. Starters: Cutler Hammer, Allen-Bradley, S & S, Square D.<br />
3. Variable Frequency Drives: Robicon, ABB, Reliance, Cutler Hammer, Allen-<br />
Bradley, Square D, Toshiba, Graham, Motor Drive Inc. (MDI).<br />
A. The following are basic specifications for motors:<br />
1. Larger than 1/2 HP shall be three-phase, except where specifically noted<br />
otherwise.<br />
2. Motor construction:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. NEMA Standard MG-1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design “B,”<br />
except “C” where required for high starting torque.<br />
b. Copper windings, 40°C ambient with Class F insulation, Class B<br />
temperature rise at 100% load, unless otherwise noted.<br />
c. Frames per NEMA standards as required by application.<br />
d. Bearings:<br />
i. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals; minimum<br />
40,000-hour L-10 life.<br />
ii. Permanently sealed, except regreasable for 360T and larger<br />
frames.<br />
iii. Designed to resist thrust loading.<br />
e. Enclosure Type:<br />
i. Open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily<br />
housed and properly ventilated during operation.<br />
ii. Weather protected Type I for outdoor use when enclosed or<br />
housed with adequate ventilation, or TEFC when exposed to<br />
weather or moist locations.<br />
f. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts not less than NEMA standard (two<br />
cold starts and one hot start per hour).<br />
g. Service Factor: 1.15 for three-phase motors and 1.35 for single-phase<br />
motors, except 1.0 for inverter-rated motors.<br />
h. Efficiency: All motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled in<br />
Table 1 in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B and NEMA<br />
Chart 12-10. If efficiency is not specified, motors shall have a higher<br />
efficiency than the “minimum efficiency standard," in accordance with IEEE<br />
Standard 112, test method B and NEMA Chart 12-10.<br />
23 0513 - 3 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
i. Noise Rating: NEMA standard (90 dBA maximum for single or two-pole,<br />
85 dBA maximum for three-pole).<br />
i. Motor Connections: Flexible conduit, except where plug-in<br />
electrical cords are specifically indicated or furnished as OEM<br />
equipment with motor.<br />
Motor<br />
Horse-<br />
Power Open Motors, ODP Enclosed Motors, TEFC<br />
1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM 1200 RPM 1800 RPM 3600 RPM<br />
1 80.0 82.5 - 80.0 82.5 75.5<br />
1.5 84.0 84.0 82.5 85.5 84.0 82.5<br />
2 85.5 84.0 84.0 86.5 84.0 84.0<br />
3 85.5 86.5 84.0 87.5 87.5 85.5<br />
5 87.5 87.5 85.5 87.5 87.5 87.5<br />
7.5 88.5 88.5 87.5 89.5 89.5 88.5<br />
10 90.2 89.5 88.5 89.5 89.5 89.5<br />
15 90.2 91.0 89.5 90.2 91.0 90.2<br />
20 91.0 91.0 90.2 90.2 91.0 90.2<br />
25 91.7 91.7 91.0 91.7 92.4 91.0<br />
30 92.4 92.4 91.0 91.7 92.4 91.0<br />
40 93.0 93.0 91.7 93.0 93.0 91.7<br />
50 93.0 93.0 91.4 93.0 93.0 92.4<br />
60 93.6 93.6 93.0 93.6 93.6 93.0<br />
75 93.6 94.1 93.0 93.6 94.1 93.0<br />
100 94.1 94.1 93.0 94.1 94.5 93.6<br />
125 94.1 94.5 93.6 94.1 94.5 94.5<br />
150 94.5 95.0 93.6 95.0 95.0 94.5<br />
200 94.5 95.0 94.5 95.0 95.0 95.0<br />
(Table 1-cont’d ↑)<br />
Note: For other types of motors, including, but not limited to, multi-speed motors, explosion proof<br />
motors and/or special hermetic motors packaged with equipment, efficiency and power factors<br />
may vary from above values. For these special applications, motors shall be high-efficiency type<br />
and are subject to review by the Engineer.<br />
B. Inverter Duty Motors:<br />
Nominal Full-Load Efficiency (Table 1)<br />
1. Motors 7-1/2 HP and larger supplied for use with Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)<br />
shall be rated for inverter duty and must include a stainless steel nameplate for<br />
identification as “Inverter Duty Motor.”<br />
2. Nameplate shall also show that motor is suitable for variable torque operation on<br />
VFD power from 6 to 60 hz and show rated torque in lb-ft on inverter power in<br />
addition to the standard nameplate data specified in NEMA standards.<br />
23 0513 - 4 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
3. Motor insulation shall be an “Inverter Grade” system designed to meet the voltage<br />
spike limits defined by NEMA MG-1. Insulation systems shall use triple layer<br />
magnet or shall use magnet wire which has a Pulse Endurance Index (PEI) greater<br />
than 50. Insulation systems utilizing heavy film and two-film wire with a Pulse<br />
Endurance Index less than 50 are not acceptable. Complete insulation of the slot,<br />
cell, and phase groups is required. The system shall be rated for Class F<br />
temperature rise or better.<br />
4. Inverter Duty stator core designs shall be of high rigidity type with reinforced end<br />
turn construction to minimize mechanical fatigue of the winding, and to reduce<br />
resonant noise. Single dip and bake cycles are not acceptable.<br />
5. Motor manufacturer shall supply certification with submittals that the motor is<br />
constructed to meet all requirements of NEMA MG-1.<br />
6. Rotor cores and/or assemblies shall be of a low vibration design that meets 1/2 of<br />
the NEMA MG-1 recommended levels for balance.<br />
7. Inverter duty motors shall include a normally closed winding over temperature<br />
thermostat suitable to be wired to the VFD panel for drive shutdown.<br />
8. Motor Selection Criteria:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the<br />
driven loads.<br />
b. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven loads will not require<br />
the motor to operate in the service factor range. Minimum horsepower<br />
ratings are shown or scheduled on the drawings.<br />
c. Motors shall be selected so that operating limits (temperature rise, service<br />
factor, etc.) are not exceeded at operating altitude and rated load.<br />
9. Pump motors shall be “non-overloading,” i.e., shall not operate within service<br />
factor range at any point on pump curve.<br />
10. Provide reduced voltage starting for motors 25 HP and larger or when required by<br />
local regulations, except when motor is controlled by a VFD. Maximum allowable<br />
in-rush current shall not exceed 300% of motor full load amps unless specified<br />
otherwise.<br />
11. Power Factor Correction: (Disregard this item if motor is controlled by VFD.)<br />
2.03 DISCONNECT SWITCHES:<br />
a. Capacitors shall be installed on all motors 25 HP and larger that have an<br />
uncorrected power factor of less than 90% at rated load. KVAR size shall<br />
be as required to correct motor power factor to 95% lagging.<br />
b. Capacitors shall have:<br />
i. Individual unit cells.<br />
ii. All welded steel housings.<br />
iii. Non-flammable synthetic liquid impregnant.<br />
iv. Craft tissue insulation.<br />
v. Aluminum foil electrodes.<br />
c. Each capacitor shall be internally fused.<br />
A. See Division 26 for requirements.<br />
B. Provide safety disconnect switches for all mechanical equipment unless specifically shown<br />
on Division 26 requirements.<br />
23 0513 - 5 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
2.04 STARTERS:<br />
A. Furnish individual combination type full NEMA rated starters with HMCP or fused<br />
disconnect switch for all motors provided (except for starters that are shown to be provided<br />
in motor control centers). All combination starters shall be adequately braced for the fault<br />
current available. 42,000 AIC @ 480V, three phase and 65,000 AIC @ 208V, threephase<br />
shall be the minimum ratings.<br />
1. Enclosures: NEMA Type 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except<br />
in wet locations, where NEMA Type 3R enclosures with conduit hubs shall be used.<br />
Units in hazardous locations shall have enclosure of proper NEC class and<br />
division appropriate for the application.<br />
2. All starters for three-phase motors shall be of magnetic type, complete with the<br />
following accessories:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Three-leg Class 10 trip-free overload protection with externally operated<br />
manual reset and visual trip indicator.<br />
b. Separate three-phase voltage monitor to provide quick-trip on single<br />
phasing or phase reversal, with automatic reset.<br />
c. Control transformers with fused primary and secondary.<br />
d. 120-volt holding coils.<br />
e. Integral Hand-Off-Auto switch for single-speed motors.<br />
f. Integral High-Low-Off-Auto switch for two-speed motors.<br />
g. High-to-low speed time delay relay for two-speed starters.<br />
h. Auxiliary contacts, one N.O. and one N.C. minimum.<br />
i. “Run” pilot light.<br />
3. Two-speed, two-winding starters shall incorporate both mechanical and electrical<br />
interlocks between the high and low speed contactors and shall have individual<br />
overload current protection and auxiliary contacts for each speed.<br />
4. Starters for single-phase motors shall have horsepower rated thermal overload<br />
switches.<br />
5. All starters shall be full NEMA rated. IEC rated and/or NEMA equivalent rated<br />
starters are not acceptable. All starters shall be listed and labeled by NEMA, UL,<br />
and CSA.<br />
6. Provide complete submittal data for all single and three-phase starters.<br />
7. Approved manufacturers are Allen-Bradley, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric,<br />
Square D, and S & S.<br />
B. Furnish all necessary control devices such as speed controls, transformers, and relays as<br />
required for proper operation for all equipment furnished under this Division.<br />
C. Furnish all remote switches and/or push-button stations required for manually operated<br />
equipment, complete with low energy pilot lights of an approved type.<br />
D. Motors, starters, and other electrical control equipment installed in moist areas or in areas<br />
of special conditions, such as areas where explosive gases are present, shall be designed<br />
and approved for installation in such areas.<br />
E. Furnish circuit and purpose identification for each remote manual switch and/or pushbutton<br />
station furnished herein. Identification may be by means of either an engraved<br />
plastic sign for permanent mounting to wall below switch or a stamping on switch cover<br />
plate. All such identification signs and/or switch covers in finished areas shall match other<br />
hardware in the immediate areas.<br />
23 0513 - 6 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
2.05 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES:<br />
A. Variable frequency drive (VFD) and associated fixed-speed bypass panel shall be in a<br />
single enclosure and shall be suitable for control of a standard NEMA MG-1 parts 30 & 31<br />
Design B three-phase induction motor.<br />
B. Variable Frequency Motor Control:<br />
1. The control shall be PWM type and shall produce a three-phase output capable of<br />
providing efficient operation of standard NEMA MG-1 parts 30 & 31 Design B<br />
induction motors.<br />
2. The control shall consist of a power section made up of a fixed AC-to- DC converter,<br />
a fused DC bus, storage network, and an inverter, using IGBT’s in the<br />
power switching section. The drive shall incorporate AC line reactors as required<br />
to provide for a power factor of .95 or better at design load. The power section<br />
shall be isolated from the control section between the driver output of the printed<br />
control circuit card and the power switching devices.<br />
3. Drives shall have a logic control section which is microprocessor based, using a<br />
32-bit processor and LSI for minimum part count and maximum reliability.<br />
4. Each VFD shall be provided with a two-line backlit liquid crystal display with a<br />
minimum of 32 characters. During normal operation, the display shall simultaneously<br />
show the VFD mode of operation, VFD status, VFD speed, and VFD load<br />
(amps). If a fault occurs, the reason shall be displayed as an English message<br />
such as “OUTPUT OVERLOAD” rather than fault codes. A digital keypad shall be<br />
provided to facilitate entry of all adjustments. All parameters shall be selected by<br />
clear English messages on the LCD screen, and shall be entered in Engineering<br />
units. VFD’s utilizing LED displays or displays with fewer than 32 characters will<br />
not be considered equal to the type specified.<br />
5. The drive shall use the latest available technology for motor noise and line<br />
harmonic reduction.<br />
C. Specification:<br />
1. NEMA 1 cabinet enclosure with a steel gasketed hinged door. Manual control<br />
and programming devices shall be door-mounted or accessible without opening<br />
door. NEMA 3R for outdoor from 32°F to 104°F. (Provisions should be made if<br />
above or below temperature range.)<br />
2. Input power: 460V, three-phase, 60 Hz or as noted on drawings.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Nominal input voltage +/- 10%<br />
b. +/- 3% input frequency stability<br />
3. Voltage harmonic and current distortion requirements:<br />
a. All VFD’s shall meet the requirements as outlined in IEEE-519-1992 for<br />
individual and total harmonic voltage distortion. Individual or simultaneous<br />
operation of the VFD’s shall not add more than 3% total harmonic<br />
voltage distortion to the normal bus. The point of common coupling shall<br />
be at the MCC bus or panelboard bus to which the VFD is connected.<br />
The short circuit current at point of common coupling under utility<br />
operation is 42,000 AIC.<br />
b. If harmonic filters are required to meet the above requirements, the VFD<br />
manufacturer must provide the filters and is responsible for the design<br />
and manufacturing of the filters. A full harmonic analysis must be<br />
23 0513 - 7 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
submitted by the VFD manufacturer with the submittal package, which<br />
includes all harmonics up to the 50th. Analysis shall include computergenerated<br />
waveforms, a statement of all assumptions, a one-line diagram<br />
of the system as analyzed, and a spectrum analysis showing individual<br />
harmonics along with a statement showing compliance with the<br />
standards.<br />
4. Manufacturer shall guarantee that harmonic voltage and current distortion on the<br />
line side (input terminals) of the VFD does not exceed 5% total voltage harmonic<br />
distortion and 15% total current harmonic distortion.<br />
5. Comply with FCC Subpart J of Part 15 for Class A computing devices from 7 MHz<br />
to 30 MHz for conduction limit without external modification.<br />
6. Output Power: Three-phase, 1.5 to 60 Hz, with variable voltage to provide proper<br />
and efficient operation of variable torque load, and capable of providing up to<br />
110% startup torque.<br />
7. Overload capacity minimum of 110% for 1 minute.<br />
D. The VFD shall be operable in two modes. In the "HAND" mode, the unit shall start and run<br />
at a speed as set on the manual speed adjuster. In the "AUTO" mode, the unit shall start<br />
in response to a contact closure and run at a speed established by a remote analog<br />
control signal.<br />
E. Minimum Requirements for Control Operation and Service:<br />
1. Door-interlocked disconnect switch (or MCB, 65,000 AIC minimum) for the entire<br />
unit.<br />
2. Isolated 120 VAC control transformer<br />
3. Digital annunciated fault and limit functions for:<br />
a. Thermal overload relay trip.<br />
b. Microprocessor self-check function.<br />
c. Output overcurrent trip.<br />
d. DC bus overvoltage trip.<br />
e. Inverse time overload trip.<br />
f. Heat sink overtemperature trip.<br />
g. DC bus fuse open.<br />
h. DC bus overvoltage (regen. limit).<br />
i. Output ground fault.<br />
j. Output line-to-line fault.<br />
4. Last 8 faults shall be retained in memory for operator recall.<br />
5. Isolated Binary Input Circuits:<br />
a. External safety lockout device.<br />
b. Remote Run/Stop command.<br />
6. Isolated Binary Output Circuits:<br />
a. Remote VFD fault trip alarm.<br />
b. VFD Run/Stop status.<br />
c. VFD Auto/Manual mode status.<br />
7. Analog Output Signals:<br />
23 0513 - 8 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. 4-20 mA or 0-10 vdc output for VFD speed.<br />
b. 4-20 mA or 0-10 vdc output for VFD load.<br />
F. Minimum Required Standard Features:<br />
1. Door-mounted or visible components:<br />
a. Power-on light.<br />
b. Safety lockout indication.<br />
c. Inverter run indication.<br />
d. Bypass run light.<br />
e. VFD fault indication.<br />
f. 32-Character (minimum) alphanumeric liquid crystal display.<br />
g. Input keypad for parameter input and display selection.<br />
h. Manual speed adjustment means.<br />
i. Hand/Off/Auto VFD selector.<br />
2. Furnish only non-filament type indicating lights.<br />
3. Provide the following features:<br />
a. Adjustable current limit circuit to prevent nuisance tripping during<br />
acceleration or run conditions.<br />
b. Active regeneration limit circuit to prevent nuisance overcurrent tripping<br />
during deceleration.<br />
c. Input power single phasing and/or reverse phasing protection.<br />
d. Minimum and maximum speed adjustments, separate and noninteractive.<br />
e. Power loss restart selectable for Auto Restart in auto mode only.<br />
f. Automatic restart from undervoltage, power failure, or control fault.<br />
g. Critical frequency lockout for up to 2 points, available from 10% to 100%<br />
speed with an adjustable band width.<br />
h. Provide I2t fuses or other protection for power-handling components.<br />
Control shall survive load side short circuits without component failure,<br />
and shall annunciate output phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground faults.<br />
i. Volts-per-hertz ratio shall be automatic, tracking motor load requirements<br />
to achieve most efficient operation within the parameters selected.<br />
4. To reduce possible acoustical noise and electrical interference, drive control shall<br />
have an automatically variable carrier frequency of at least 800 to 2,500 hertz.<br />
There shall be no sudden frequency shifts which cause acoustical noise increases<br />
during shifts in the motor.<br />
5. Control shall be capable of starting into a spinning motor, and also switching<br />
from inverter to bypass back to inverter without tripping off line. Control shall also<br />
be capable of stopping a motor rotating in the reverse direction and then<br />
accelerating that motor in the proper direction.<br />
6. Control shall have a 4 - 20 mADC or 0 - 10 VDC isolated instrument control<br />
signal follower. Isolation shall be either optical or transformer type. The<br />
manufacturer shall include documentation with submittals that confirm the<br />
follower is of the isolated type.<br />
7. All components shall be supplied in an integral NEMA 1 or better metal enclosure;<br />
separate enclosures are not allowed.<br />
8. All drives shall carry ETL or UL nationally recognized testing laboratory approval.<br />
23 0513 - 9 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
2.06 BYPASS PANEL:<br />
9. Provide with the VFD a Lonworks or Bacnet type communication card and required<br />
interface components and software necessary to forward VFD data information to<br />
and from the BAS/VFD.<br />
A. The fixed speed bypass panel shall be mounted and wired in a compartment separated<br />
from the VFD, and shall allow constant speed operation of the controlled motor while the<br />
VFD is out of service. Both VFD and bypass components shall be mounted in a single<br />
NEMA 1 enclosure with terminals for field connection to the three-phase power, the<br />
controlled motor, and the temperature control interface.<br />
1. Cabinet door(s) where either door dimension is greater than 30" shall be<br />
constructed of 14-gauge or heavier steel with at least three hinges and one lock<br />
per door.<br />
2. VFD and bypass manual control and programming devices shall be doormounted<br />
or accessible without opening main door.<br />
3. The prewired bypass panel compartment shall include:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. A VFD output contactor and a constant speed bypass contactor.<br />
b. A three-pole thermal motor overload relay with heaters connected to shut<br />
down the motor in both the VFD and bypass modes.<br />
c. A door-interlocked VFD disconnect switch, circuit breaker or contactor<br />
which shall allow power-off maintenance of the VFD while the motor<br />
operates in bypass mode, with a full sheet metal barrier between the<br />
bypass and VFD compartments. Bypass circuitry in the same<br />
compartment as the VFD will not be allowed, and an input contactor to<br />
the VFD will not be considered equal to the VFD disconnect switch<br />
specified. This disconnect is in addition to the fused disconnect for the<br />
entire unit, specified previously in para. 2.05, E-1.<br />
d. A 120-volt control power transformer with fused secondary.<br />
e. Control relays or control logic as necessary to allow for remote start/stop,<br />
and remote safety interlocks.<br />
f. An interlock to allow a controlled VFD deceleration ramp to stop.<br />
g. An adjustable delay function (1 to 30 seconds) to prevent rapid switching<br />
between bypass and VFD modes.<br />
4. A manual selector switch shall provide for the following operating mode:<br />
2.07 EQUIPMENT FABRICATION:<br />
a. A manual “VFD-OFF-BYPASS” control selector switch shall be provided on<br />
the bypass compartment door. In VFD mode, the output of the VFD shall<br />
be connected to the motor, allowing variable speed operation. OFF shall<br />
inhibit all motor operation. BYPASS shall start the motor across the line.<br />
A. General: Fabricate mechanical equipment for secure mounting of motors and other<br />
electrical items included in work. Provide either permanent alignment of motors with<br />
equipment, or adjustable mountings as applicable for belt drives, special couplings and<br />
similar indirect coupling of equipment. Provide safe, secure, durable, and removable<br />
guards for motor drives, arranged to allow for lubrication and similar runningmaintenance<br />
without removal of guards.<br />
23 0513 - 10 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 TEST AND TEST DATA:<br />
A. A factory load test shall be performed on each motor of 1000 watt input or greater to<br />
assure compliance with the energy-efficiency section of this specification.<br />
B. Typical test data on every motor to be used on this project shall be made available upon<br />
<strong>request</strong>.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION:<br />
A. Install motors on motor mounting systems in accordance with motor manufacturer's<br />
instructions, securely anchored to resist torque, drive thrusts, and other external forces<br />
inherent in mechanical work. Secure sheaves and other drive units to motor shafts with<br />
keys and Allen set screws. For motors of 1/3 hp and less, sheaves and drive components<br />
may be secured with Allen set screws on flat surface of shaft. Unless otherwise indicated,<br />
set motor shafts parallel with machine shafts.<br />
B. Deliver starters and wiring devices which have not been factory-installed on equipment to<br />
electrical installer for installation.<br />
C. Install power and control connections for motors to comply with NEC and applicable<br />
provisions of Division 26 sections. Install grounding except where non-grounded isolation<br />
of motor is indicated.<br />
D. Provide 4” high concrete housekeeping pad for floor-mounted variable frequency drives.<br />
E. Where a separate disconnect switch is provided in the motor feeders between a VFD and<br />
the motor, provide an end switch at the disconnect to open the remote interlock shutdown<br />
circuit power circuit.<br />
3.03 VFD START-UP SERVICES:<br />
A. The variable frequency drive (VFD) vendor shall provide, as a minimum, the following<br />
services:<br />
1. Service of certified factory-trained representative to supervise startup, adjustment,<br />
and fine-tuning of all VFD’s and to instruct Owner on proper operation and<br />
maintenance procedures.<br />
2. Training of user personnel in basic troubleshooting. Training shall be on-site,<br />
shall be a minimum of 1 day's duration, and shall be performed in addition to<br />
startup of system.<br />
3. Each VFD manufacturer shall have a local representative specifically trained in<br />
troubleshooting, service and repair of its VFD’s. A statement of the length and<br />
extent of experience of the local service organization shall be included with the<br />
submittals.<br />
3.04 VFD HARMONIC DISTORTION TESTING:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0513 - 11 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
A. After installation is complete, measure the harmonic voltage and current distortion of each<br />
VFD with the drive assembly in bypass mode, with the VFD running at 50% operating<br />
speed, and with the VFD running at highest operating speed. Take measurements on<br />
each phase (L-L) on the line side (input terminals) of the VFD.<br />
B. If measurements exceed the limits as specified in Part 2, install corrective reactors or filters<br />
at no additional cost to the owner, and retake measurements after corrective equipment is<br />
installed.<br />
C. Include all measurements (before and after installation of corrective equipment) in the<br />
harmonic distortion report. Provide the Engineer with a copy of the harmonic distortion<br />
report.<br />
D. The Harmonic Distortion Test and Report shall be conducted by an approved independent<br />
testing agency.<br />
3.05 VFD NOISE TEST:<br />
A. Measure the dBA sound level of the motor with the drive in bypass mode and with the<br />
drive operating from 25% to 100% speed output.<br />
B. If the measurements exceed the limits specified in part 2, correct as required at no cost to<br />
the Owner, and retake measurements.<br />
C. Report all tests to the Engineer.<br />
3.06 VFD INDUCED SHAFT VOLTAGE TEST:<br />
A. After installation is complete and system is operating under normal conditions, measure<br />
and report any voltage potential between the motor shaft and the motor frame. This test<br />
may occur anytime between substantial completion of the project and the end of the<br />
overall project warranty period. Report findings to the Engineer. Costs for any corrective<br />
measures required shall be included in the bid.<br />
3.07 MECHANICAL WIRING:<br />
A. Provide all temperature control wiring, all interlock wiring, and equipment that is to be<br />
provided under this Division unless specifically shown on Electrical drawings.<br />
B. All line voltage interlock and control wiring shall be not less than No. 14 insulated, color<br />
coded wire in conduit or raceway.<br />
C. Electrical wiring in connection with the automatic temperature control system, where shown<br />
on the Division 26 drawings, shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor. All other<br />
wiring, including 120V required for proper operation of the automatic temperature control<br />
system, shall be performed by the Mechanical Contractor.<br />
3.08 INSTALLATION COORDINATION:<br />
A. Furnish equipment requiring electrical connections to operate properly and to deliver full<br />
capacity at electrical service available.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0513 - 12 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
B. Immersion thermostats, remote bulb thermostats, motorized valves, floor controls, duct<br />
detectors, etc. which are integral parts of the mechanical equipment or directly attached to<br />
ducts, pipes, equipment, etc. shall be set in place by mechanical Contractor.<br />
C. It is the intent of this specification that one "General" Contractor enters into an agreement<br />
with the Owner. The use and coordination of subcontractors is at the option of the<br />
General Contractor. All mechanical equipment, motors and controls shall be furnished,<br />
set in place, and wired. The exact furnishing and installation of the equipment shall be<br />
coordinated by the Contractors involved. Contractor should note that the intent is for the<br />
Division 23 and 26 Contractors to be responsible for coordinating all control wiring as<br />
outlined, whether or not specifically called for by the mechanical or electrical drawings and<br />
specifications. Comply with the applicable requirements of Division 26 for all electrical<br />
work which is not otherwise specified. No extras will be allowed for Contractor's failure to<br />
provide for these required items. The Contractor shall refer to the Division 26 and Division<br />
23 specifications and plans for all power and control wiring requirements and shall advise<br />
the Architect/Engineer of any discrepancies prior to bidding.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 0513<br />
23 0513 - 13 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL REQ.<br />
FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 0516<br />
EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Flexible, ball-joint, packed expansion joints.<br />
2. Expansion-compensator packless expansion joints.<br />
3. Flexible-hose packless expansion joints.<br />
4. Metal-bellows packless expansion joints.<br />
5. Rubber packless expansion joints.<br />
6. Grooved-joint expansion joints.<br />
7. Pipe loops and swing connections.<br />
8. Alignment guides and anchors.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Compatibility: Products shall be suitable for piping service fluids, materials, working pressures,<br />
and temperatures.<br />
B. Capability: Products to absorb 200 percent of maximum axial movement between anchors.<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For each anchor and alignment guide indicated to comply with<br />
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the<br />
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.<br />
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for thermal expansion of piping systems and<br />
for selecting and designing expansion joints, loops, and swing connections.<br />
2. Anchor Details: Detail fabrication of each anchor indicated. Show dimensions and<br />
methods of assembly and attachment to building structure.<br />
3. Alignment Guide Details: Detail field assembly and attachment to building structure.<br />
4. Schedule: Indicate type, manufacturer's number, size, material, pressure rating, end<br />
connections, and location for each expansion joint.<br />
23 0516 - 1 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Welding certificates.<br />
B. Product Certificates: For each type of expansion joint, from manufacturer.<br />
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Maintenance Data: For expansion joints to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:<br />
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."<br />
2. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PACKED EXPANSION JOINTS<br />
A. Flexible, Ball-Joint, Packed Expansion Joints:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
a. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.<br />
b. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.<br />
2. Standards: ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section II, "Materials"; and<br />
ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials and design of pressure-containing<br />
parts and bolting.<br />
3. Material: Carbon-steel assembly with asbestos-free composition packing.<br />
4. Design: For 360-degree rotation and angular deflection.<br />
5. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig at 400 deg F.<br />
6. Angular Deflection for NPS 6 and Smaller: 30 degree minimum.<br />
7. Angular Deflection for NPS 8 and Larger: 15 degree minimum.<br />
8. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.<br />
9. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged.<br />
2.2 PACKLESS EXPANSION JOINTS<br />
A. Metal, Expansion-Compensator Packless Expansion Joints:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0516 - 2 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
. Flexicraft Industries.<br />
c. Flex Pression Ltd.<br />
d. Flex-Weld, Inc.<br />
e. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.<br />
f. Metraflex, Inc.<br />
g. Senior Flexonics Pathway.<br />
2. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3. Configuration for Copper Tubing: Two-ply, phosphor-bronze bellows with copper pipe<br />
ends.<br />
a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded.<br />
b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Threaded.<br />
4. Configuration for Steel Piping: Two-ply, stainless-steel bellows; steel-pipe end<br />
connections; and carbon-steel shroud.<br />
a. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.<br />
b. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged Weld.<br />
B. Rubber, Expansion-Compensator Packless Expansion Joints:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.; a div. of Vibration Isolation Products of Texas, Inc.<br />
b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.<br />
c. Flexicraft Industries.<br />
d. General Rubber Corporation.<br />
e. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co.<br />
f. Proco Products, Inc.<br />
g. Tozen Corporation.<br />
h. Unaflex.<br />
i. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
2. Material: Twin reinforced-rubber spheres with external restraining cables.<br />
3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig at 170 deg F unless otherwise indicated.<br />
4. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.<br />
C. Flexible-Hose Packless Expansion Joints:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.<br />
b. Flexicraft Industries.<br />
c. Flex Pression Ltd.<br />
d. Metraflex, Inc.<br />
e. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
2. Description: Manufactured assembly with inlet and outlet elbow fittings and two flexiblemetal-hose<br />
legs joined by long-radius, 180-degree return bend or center section of flexible<br />
hose.<br />
3. Flexible Hose: Corrugated-metal inner hoses and braided outer sheaths.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0516 - 3 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
4. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Copper-alloy fittings with solderjoint<br />
end connections.<br />
a. Bronze hoses and double-braid bronze sheaths with 450 psig at 70 deg F and 340<br />
psig at 450 deg F ratings.<br />
5. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Copper-alloy fittings with<br />
threaded end connections.<br />
a. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 420 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 315 psig at 450 deg F ratings.<br />
6. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2 and Smaller: Carbon-steel fittings with threaded<br />
end connections.<br />
a. Stainless-steel hoses and single-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 450 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 325 psig at 600 deg F ratings.<br />
7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged or<br />
weld end connections.<br />
a. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 275 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 200 psig at 600 deg F ratings.<br />
8. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 8 to NPS 12: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged or<br />
weld end connections.<br />
a. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 165 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 120 psig at 600 deg F ratings.<br />
9. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping NPS 14 and Larger: Carbon-steel fittings with flanged or<br />
weld end connections.<br />
a. Stainless-steel hoses and double-braid, stainless-steel sheaths with 165 psig at 70<br />
deg F and 120 psig at 600 deg F ratings.<br />
D. Metal-Bellows Packless Expansion Joints:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC.<br />
b. American BOA, Inc.<br />
c. Badger Industries, Inc.<br />
d. Expansion Joint Systems, Inc.<br />
e. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.<br />
f. Flexicraft Industries.<br />
g. Flex Pression Ltd.<br />
h. Flex-Weld, Inc.<br />
i. Metraflex, Inc.<br />
j. U.S. Bellows, Inc.<br />
k. WahlcoMetroflex.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0516 - 4 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
2. Standards: ASTM F 1120 and EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint Manufacturers<br />
Association, Inc."<br />
3. Type: Circular, corrugated bellows with external tie rods.<br />
4. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig unless otherwise indicated.<br />
5. Configuration: Single joint Single joint with base and double joint with base classes unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
6. Expansion Joints for Copper Tubing: Single or multi-ply phosphor-bronze bellows, copper<br />
pipe ends, and brass shrouds.<br />
a. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder joint or threaded.<br />
b. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: threaded.<br />
c. End Connections for Copper Tubing NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged.<br />
7. Expansion Joints for Steel Piping: Single or multi-ply stainless-steel bellows, steel pipe<br />
ends, and carbon-steel shroud.<br />
a. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.<br />
b. End Connections for Steel Pipe NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged or Weld.<br />
E. Rubber Packless Expansion Joints:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Amber/Booth Company, Inc.; a div. of Vibration Isolation Products of Texas, Inc.<br />
b. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.<br />
c. Flexicraft Industries.<br />
d. Flex-Weld, Inc.<br />
e. Garlock Sealing Technologies.<br />
f. General Rubber Corporation.<br />
g. Mason Industries, Inc.; Mercer Rubber Co.<br />
h. Metraflex, Inc.<br />
i. Proco Products, Inc.<br />
j. Red Valve Company, Inc.<br />
k. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
2. Standards: ASTM F 1123 and FSA's "Technical Handbook: Non-Metallic Expansion Joints<br />
and Flexible Pipe Connectors."<br />
3. Material: Fabric-reinforced rubber complying with FSA-NMEJ-703.<br />
4. Arch Type: Single or multiple arches with external control rods.<br />
5. Spherical Type: Single or multiple spheres with external control rods.<br />
6. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 4: 150 psig at 220 deg F.<br />
7. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 5 and NPS 6: 140 psig at 200 deg F.<br />
8. Minimum Pressure Rating for NPS 8 to NPS 12: 140 psig at 180 deg F.<br />
9. Material for Water: EPDM.<br />
10. End Connections: Full-faced, integral steel flanges with steel retaining rings.<br />
2.3 GROOVED-JOINT EXPANSION JOINTS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Anvil International, Inc.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0516 - 5 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
2. Shurjoint Piping Products.<br />
3. Victaulic Company.<br />
B. Description: Factory-assembled expansion joint made of several grooved-end pipe nipples,<br />
couplings, and grooved joints.<br />
C. Standard: AWWA C606, for grooved joints.<br />
D. Nipples: Galvanized, ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, steel pipe with grooved<br />
ends.<br />
E. Couplings: flexible type for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM<br />
gasket suitable for cold and hot water, and bolts and nuts.<br />
2.4 ALIGNMENT GUIDES AND ANCHORS<br />
A. Alignment Guides:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Adsco Manufacturing LLC.<br />
b. Advanced Thermal Systems, Inc.<br />
c. Flex-Hose Co., Inc.<br />
d. Flexicraft Industries.<br />
e. Flex-Weld, Inc.<br />
f. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.<br />
g. Metraflex, Inc.<br />
h. Senior Flexonics Pathway.<br />
i. Unisource Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
j. U.S. Bellows, Inc.<br />
2. Description: Steel, factory-fabricated alignment guide, with bolted two-section outer<br />
cylinder and base for attaching to structure; with two-section guiding spider for bolting to<br />
pipe.<br />
B. Anchor Materials:<br />
1. Steel Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, steel hex head.<br />
3. Washers: ASTM F 844, steel, plain, flat washers.<br />
4. Mechanical Fasteners: Insert-wedge-type stud with expansion plug anchor for use in<br />
hardened portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for<br />
application.<br />
a. Stud: Threaded, zinc-coated carbon steel.<br />
b. Expansion Plug: Zinc-coated steel.<br />
c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.<br />
5. Chemical Fasteners: Insert-type-stud, bonding-system anchor for use with hardened<br />
portland cement concrete, with tension and shear capacities appropriate for application.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0516 - 6 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
a. Bonding Material: ASTM C 881/C 881M, Type IV, Grade 3, two-component epoxy<br />
resin suitable for surface temperature of hardened concrete where fastener is to be<br />
installed.<br />
b. Stud: ASTM A 307, zinc-coated carbon steel with continuous thread on stud unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
c. Washer and Nut: Zinc-coated steel.<br />
3.1 EXPANSION-JOINT INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install expansion joints of sizes matching sizes of piping in which they are installed.<br />
B. Install packed-type expansion joints with packing suitable for fluid service.<br />
C. Install metal-bellows expansion joints according to EJMA's "Standards of the Expansion Joint<br />
Manufacturers Association, Inc."<br />
D. Install rubber packless expansion joints according to FSA-NMEJ-702.<br />
E. Install grooved-joint expansion joints to grooved-end steel piping<br />
3.2 PIPE LOOP AND SWING CONNECTION INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install pipe loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to partly absorb tension or<br />
compression produced during anticipated change in temperature.<br />
B. Connect risers and branch connections to mains with at least five pipe fittings including tee in<br />
main.<br />
C. Connect risers and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including<br />
tee in riser.<br />
D. Connect mains and branch connections to terminal units with at least four pipe fittings including<br />
tee in main.<br />
3.3 ALIGNMENT-GUIDE AND ANCHOR INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install alignment guides to guide expansion and to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.<br />
B. Install [one] [two] guide(s) on each side of pipe expansion fittings and loops. Install guides<br />
nearest to expansion joint not more than [four] pipe diameters from expansion<br />
joint.<br />
C. Attach guides to pipe and secure guides to building structure.<br />
D. Install anchors at locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9<br />
and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.<br />
E. Anchor Attachments:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0516 - 7 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Pipe: Attach by welding. Comply with ASME B31.9 and ASME<br />
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."<br />
2. Anchor Attachment to Copper Tubing: Attach with pipe hangers. Use MSS SP-69,<br />
Type 24, U-bolts bolted to anchor.<br />
F. Fabricate and install steel anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars. Comply with<br />
ASME B31.9 and AWS D1.1/D1.1M.<br />
1. Anchor Attachment to Steel Structural Members: Attach by welding.<br />
2. Anchor Attachment to Concrete Structural Members: Attach by fasteners. Follow fastener<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
G. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for guides and anchors attached to concrete.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 0516<br />
23 0516 - 8 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND<br />
LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 0517<br />
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Sleeves and Stack-sleeve fittings.<br />
2. Sleeve-seal systems and Sleeve-seal fittings.<br />
3. Grout.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SLEEVES AND STACK-SLEEVE FITTINGS<br />
A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Cast or fabricated of cast or ductile iron and equivalent to ductile-iron<br />
pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Galvanized-Steel Wall Pipes: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, with plain ends and welded steel<br />
collar; zinc coated.<br />
C. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated,<br />
with plain ends.<br />
D. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded<br />
longitudinal joint<br />
E. Stack-Sleeve Fittings, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring, bolts,<br />
and nuts for membrane flashing.<br />
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
23 0517 - 1 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.<br />
2. CALPICO, Inc.<br />
3. Metraflex Company (The).<br />
4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.<br />
5. Proco Products, Inc.<br />
B. Description: Modular sealing-element unit, designed for field assembly, for filling annular space<br />
between piping and sleeve.<br />
1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber or NBR interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.<br />
Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.<br />
2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel or Stainless steel.<br />
3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length<br />
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.<br />
C. Sleeve-Seal Fittings - Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made<br />
for imbedding in concrete slab or wall. Unit has plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center<br />
opening to match piping OD.<br />
2.3 GROUT<br />
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,<br />
hydraulic-cement grout.<br />
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.<br />
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi , 28-day compressive strength.<br />
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 SLEEVE AND STACK SLEEVE FITTING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install sleeves for piping passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.<br />
B. For sleeves that will have sleeve-seal system installed, select sleeves of size large enough to<br />
provide 1-inch annular clear space between piping and concrete slabs and walls. Sleeves are not<br />
required for core-drilled holes.<br />
C. Install sleeves in concrete floors, concrete roof slabs, and concrete walls as new slabs and walls<br />
are constructed.<br />
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.<br />
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or<br />
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level.<br />
2. Using grout, seal the space outside of sleeves in slabs and walls without sleeve-seal<br />
system.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0517 - 2 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
D. Install sleeves for pipes passing through interior partitions.<br />
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.<br />
2. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between<br />
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.<br />
3. Seal annular space between sleeve and piping or piping insulation; use joint sealants<br />
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements for sealants<br />
specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."<br />
E. Install stack-sleeve fittings in new slabs as slabs are constructed.<br />
1. Install fittings that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between<br />
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.<br />
2. Secure flashing between clamping flanges for pipes penetrating floors with membrane<br />
waterproofing. Comply with requirements for flashing specified in Section 076200 "Sheet<br />
Metal Flashing and Trim."<br />
3. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level.<br />
4. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring<br />
is specified.<br />
5. Using grout, seal the space around outside of stack-sleeve fittings.<br />
F. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe<br />
penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements for firestopping specified in<br />
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."<br />
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM AND SLEEVE-SEAL FITTING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at service<br />
piping entries into building.<br />
B. Select type, size, and number of sealing elements required for piping material and size and for<br />
sleeve ID or hole size. Position piping in center of sleeve. Center piping in penetration,<br />
assemble sleeve-seal system components, and install in annular space between piping and<br />
sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make a<br />
watertight seal.<br />
C. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.<br />
D. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls.<br />
Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.<br />
E. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.<br />
F. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.<br />
3.3 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL SCHEDULE<br />
A. Use sleeves and sleeve seals for the following piping-penetration applications:<br />
1. Exterior Concrete Walls above and below Grade, all sizes, Cast-iron wall sleeves with<br />
water stop/anchor. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between<br />
piping and sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0517 - 3 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
2. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade and below Grade, all sizes, Cast-iron wall sleeves with sleeveseal<br />
system. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between piping and<br />
sleeve for installing sleeve-seal system.<br />
3. Concrete Slabs above Grade, all sizes, Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.<br />
4. Interior Partitions, all sizes, Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 0517<br />
23 0517 - 4 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 0518<br />
ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Escutcheons.<br />
2. Floor plates.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 ESCUTCHEONS<br />
A. One-Piece, or Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With rough-brass finish and setscrew fastener.<br />
B. One-Piece or Split Plate Stamped-Steel Type: With chrome-plated finish and spring-clip<br />
fasteners.<br />
2.2 FLOOR PLATES<br />
A. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.<br />
B. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and finished floors, where<br />
penetration is exposed to view and on exterior of building.<br />
23 0518 - 1 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
B. Install escutcheons with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD<br />
that completely covers opening.<br />
C. Furnish pipe Escutcheons with nickel or chrome finish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for<br />
unoccupied areas.<br />
D. Escutcheons for Moist Areas: Provide cast brass or sheet brass, solid or split hinged.<br />
E. Install floor plates for piping penetrations of equipment-room floors.<br />
F. Install floor plates with ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of piping and with OD<br />
that completely covers opening.<br />
1. New Piping: One-piece, floor-plate type.<br />
2. Existing Piping: Split-casting, floor-plate type.<br />
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Replace broken and damaged escutcheons and floor plates using new materials.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 0518<br />
23 0518 - 2 ESCUTCHEONS FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 0519<br />
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Bimetallic-actuated thermometers.<br />
2. Liquid-in-glass thermometers.<br />
3. Thermowells.<br />
4. Dial-type pressure gages.<br />
5. Gage attachments.<br />
6. Test plugs.<br />
7. Test-plug kits.<br />
8. Orifice flowmeters.<br />
9. Turbine flowmeters.<br />
10. Venturi flowmeters.<br />
11. Impeller-turbine, thermal-energy meters.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.<br />
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Certificates: For each type of meter and gage, from manufacturer.<br />
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For meters and gages to include in operation and<br />
maintenance manuals.<br />
23 0519 - 1 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 BIMETALLIC-ACTUATED THERMOMETERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Ernst Flow Industries.<br />
2. Marsh Bellofram.<br />
3. Miljoco Corporation.<br />
4. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.<br />
5. Trerice, H. O. Co.<br />
6. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.<br />
7. Weiss Instruments, Inc.<br />
8. WIKA Instrument Corporation - USA.<br />
B. Standard: ASME B40.200.<br />
C. Case: Liquid-filled and sealed type(s); stainless steel with 3-inch or 5-inch nominal diameter.<br />
D. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings and scales in deg F and<br />
deg C.<br />
E. Connector Type(s): Union joint, adjustable angle, bottom, with unified-inch screw threads.<br />
F. Connector Size: 1/2 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.<br />
G. Stem: 0.25 or 0.375 inch in diameter; stainless steel.<br />
H. Window: Plain glass.<br />
I. Ring: Stainless steel.<br />
J. Element: Bimetal coil.<br />
K. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.<br />
L. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1percent of scale range.<br />
2.2 LIQUID-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS<br />
A. Metal-Case, Industrial-Style, Liquid-in-Glass Thermometers:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Flo Fab Inc.<br />
b. Miljoco Corporation.<br />
c. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.<br />
d. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.<br />
e. Trerice, H. O. Co.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0519 - 2 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
f. Weiss Instruments, Inc.<br />
g. Winters Instruments - U.S.<br />
2. Standard: ASME B40.200.<br />
3. Case: Cast aluminum 9-inch nominal size unless otherwise indicated.<br />
4. Case Form: Adjustable angle.<br />
5. Tube: Glass with magnifying lens and blue or red organic liquid.<br />
6. Tube Background: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings<br />
graduated in deg F and deg C.<br />
7. Window: Glass.<br />
8. Stem: Aluminum and of length to suit installation.<br />
9. Connector: 1-1/4 inches, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.<br />
10. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of scale range or one scale division, to a maximum of<br />
1.5 percent of scale range.<br />
2.3 DUCT-THERMOMETER MOUNTING BRACKETS<br />
A. Description: Flanged bracket with screw holes, for attachment to air duct and made to hold<br />
thermometer stem.<br />
2.4 THERMOWELLS<br />
A. Thermowells:<br />
1. Standard: ASME B40.200.<br />
2. Description: Pressure-tight, socket-type fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.<br />
3. Material for Use with Copper Tubing: CNR or CUNI.<br />
4. Material for Use with Steel Piping: CRES or CSA.<br />
5. Type: Stepped shank unless straight or tapered shank is indicated.<br />
6. External Threads: NPS 1/2, NPS 3/4, or NPS 1, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.<br />
7. Internal Threads: 1/2, 3/4, and 1 inch, with ASME B1.1 screw threads.<br />
8. Bore: Diameter required to match thermometer bulb or stem.<br />
9. Insertion Length: Length required to match thermometer bulb or stem.<br />
10. Lagging Extension: Include on thermowells for insulated piping and tubing.<br />
11. Bushings: For converting size of thermowell's internal screw thread to size of thermometer<br />
connection.<br />
B. Heat-Transfer Medium: Mixture of graphite and glycerin.<br />
2.5 PRESSURE GAGES<br />
A. Direct-Mounted, Metal-Case, Dial-Type Pressure Gages:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge.<br />
b. Ashcroft Inc.<br />
c. Ernst Flow Industries.<br />
d. Flo Fab Inc.<br />
e. Palmer Wahl Instrumentation Group.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0519 - 3 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
f. REOTEMP Instrument Corporation.<br />
g. Tel-Tru Manufacturing Company.<br />
h. Trerice, H. O. Co.<br />
i. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.<br />
j. Weiss Instruments, Inc.<br />
2. Standard: ASME B40.100.<br />
3. Case: Liquid-filled, cast aluminum or drawn steel; 4-1/2-inch nominal diameter.<br />
4. Pressure-Element Assembly: Bourdon tube unless otherwise indicated.<br />
5. Pressure Connection: Brass, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 , ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and<br />
bottom-outlet type unless back-outlet type is indicated.<br />
6. Movement: Mechanical, with link to pressure element and connection to pointer.<br />
7. Dial: Nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in psi.<br />
8. Pointer: Dark-colored metal.<br />
9. Window: Glass.<br />
10. Ring: Metal or Brass or Stainless steel.<br />
11. Accuracy: Grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.<br />
2.6 GAGE ATTACHMENTS<br />
A. Snubbers: ASME B40.100, brass; with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads and<br />
piston or porous-metal-type surge-dampening device. Include extension for use on insulated<br />
piping.<br />
B. Siphons: Loop-shaped section of brass pipe with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 pipe threads.<br />
C. Valves: Brass or stainless-steel needle, with NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe threads.<br />
2.7 TEST PLUGS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Flow Design, Inc.<br />
2. National Meter, Inc.<br />
3. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.<br />
4. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.<br />
5. Trerice, H. O. Co.<br />
6. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.<br />
7. Weiss Instruments, Inc.<br />
B. Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.<br />
C. Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include extended<br />
stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.<br />
D. Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2 ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.<br />
E. Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.<br />
F. Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic and EPDM self-sealing rubber.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0519 - 4 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
2.8 TEST-PLUG KITS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Flow Design, Inc.<br />
2. Miljoco Corporation.<br />
3. National Meter, Inc.<br />
4. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.<br />
5. Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.<br />
6. Trerice, H. O. Co.<br />
7. Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.<br />
8. Weiss Instruments, Inc.<br />
B. Furnish one test-plug kit(s) containing one thermometer(s), one pressure gage and adapter, and<br />
carrying case. Thermometer sensing elements, pressure gage, and adapter probes shall be of<br />
diameter to fit test plugs and of length to project into piping.<br />
2.9 FLOWMETERS<br />
A. Orifice Flowmeters:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. ABB; Instrumentation and Analytical.<br />
b. Bell & Gossett; ITT Industries.<br />
c. Meriam Process Technologies.<br />
d. Preso Meters; a division of Racine Federated Inc.<br />
e. S. A. Armstrong Limited; Armstrong Pumps Inc.<br />
2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor, hoses or tubing, fittings, valves, indicator, and<br />
conversion chart.<br />
3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system<br />
served.<br />
4. Sensor: Wafer-orifice-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation between<br />
pipe flanges.<br />
a. Design: Differential-pressure-type measurement for water.<br />
b. <strong>Construction</strong>: Cast-iron body, brass valves with integral check valves and caps, and<br />
calibrated nameplate.<br />
c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig.<br />
d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F.<br />
5. Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for<br />
connected sensor and having 6-inch- diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings and copper<br />
tubing for connecting to sensor.<br />
a. Scale: Gallons per minute.<br />
b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range.<br />
6. Portable Indicators: Hand-held, differential-pressure type, calibrated for connected sensor<br />
and having two 12-foot hoses, with carrying case.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0519 - 5 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
a. Scale: Gallons per minute.<br />
b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range.<br />
7. Display: Shows rate of flow with register to indicate total volume in gallons.<br />
8. Conversion Chart: Flow rate data compatible with sensor and indicator.<br />
9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.<br />
B. Turbine Flowmeters:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. ABB; Instrumentation and Analytical.<br />
b. Data Industrial Corp.<br />
c. EMCO Flow Systems; a division of Spirax Sarco, Inc.<br />
d. ERDCO Engineering Corp.<br />
e. Hoffer Flow Controls, Inc.<br />
f. Liquid Controls; a unit of IDEX Corporation.<br />
g. McCrometer, Inc.<br />
h. Midwest Instruments & Controls Corp.<br />
i. ONICON Incorporated.<br />
2. Description: Flowmeter with sensor and indicator.<br />
3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system<br />
served.<br />
4. Sensor: Impeller turbine; for inserting into pipe fitting or for installing in piping and<br />
measuring flow directly in gallons per minute.<br />
a. Design: Device or pipe fitting with inline turbine and integral direct-reading scale<br />
for water.<br />
b. <strong>Construction</strong>: Bronze or stainless-steel body, with plastic turbine or impeller.<br />
c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig.<br />
d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 180 deg F.<br />
5. Indicator: Hand-held meter; either an integral part of sensor or a separate meter.<br />
6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1-1/2 percent.<br />
7. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons.<br />
8. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.<br />
C. Venturi Flowmeters:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. ABB; Instrumentation and Analytical.<br />
b. Gerand Engineering Co.<br />
c. Hyspan Precision Products, Inc.<br />
d. Preso Meters; a division of Racine Federated Inc.<br />
e. S. A. Armstrong Limited; Armstrong Pumps Inc.<br />
f. Victaulic Company.<br />
2. Description: Flowmeter with calibrated flow-measuring element, hoses or tubing, fittings,<br />
valves, indicator, and conversion chart.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0519 - 6 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
3. Flow Range: Sensor and indicator shall cover operating range of equipment or system<br />
served.<br />
4. Sensor: Venturi-type, calibrated, flow-measuring element; for installation in piping.<br />
a. Design: Differential-pressure-type measurement for water.<br />
b. <strong>Construction</strong>: Bronze, brass, or factory-primed steel, with brass fittings and<br />
attached tag with flow conversion data.<br />
c. Minimum Pressure Rating: 250 psig.<br />
d. Minimum Temperature Rating: 250 deg F.<br />
e. End Connections for NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded.<br />
f. End Connections for NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Flanged or welded.<br />
g. Flow Range: Flow-measuring element and flowmeter shall cover operating range of<br />
equipment or system served.<br />
5. Permanent Indicators: Meter suitable for wall or bracket mounting, calibrated for<br />
connected flowmeter element, and having 6-inch- diameter, or equivalent, dial with fittings<br />
and copper tubing for connecting to flowmeter element.<br />
a. Scale: Gallons per minute.<br />
b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range.<br />
6. Portable Indicators: Hand-held, differential-pressure type, calibrated for connected<br />
flowmeter element and having two 12-foot hoses, with carrying case.<br />
a. Scale: Gallons per minute.<br />
b. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2 percent between 20 and 80 percent of scale range.<br />
7. Display: Shows rate of flow, with register to indicate total volume in gallons.<br />
8. Conversion Chart: Flow rate data compatible with sensor.<br />
9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each flowmeter.<br />
2.10 THERMAL-ENERGY METERS<br />
A. Impeller-Turbine, Thermal-Energy Meters:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Data Industrial Corp.<br />
b. Hoffer Flow Controls, Inc.<br />
c. ISTEC Corporation.<br />
d. ONICON Incorporated.<br />
2. Description: System with strainer, flow sensor, temperature sensors, transmitter, indicator,<br />
and connecting wiring.<br />
3. Flow Sensor: Impeller turbine with corrosion-resistant-metal body and transmitter; for<br />
installing in piping.<br />
a. Design: Total thermal-energy measurement.<br />
b. Minimum Pressure Rating: 150 psig.<br />
c. Minimum Temperature Range: 40 to 250 deg F.<br />
4. Temperature Sensors: Insertion-type transducer.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0519 - 7 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
5. Indicator: Solid-state, integrating-type meter with integral battery pack; for wall mounting.<br />
a. Data Output: Six-digit electromechanical counter with readout in kilowatts per hour<br />
or British thermal units.<br />
b. Battery Pack: Five-year lithium battery.<br />
6. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent.<br />
7. Display: Visually indicates total fluid volume in gallons and thermal-energy flow in<br />
kilowatts per hour or British thermal units.<br />
8. Strainer: Full size of main line piping.<br />
9. Operating Instructions: Include complete instructions with each thermal-energy meter<br />
system.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install thermowells with socket extending a minimum of 2 inches into fluid or one-third of pipe<br />
diameter or to center of pipe and in vertical position in piping tees.<br />
B. Install thermowells of sizes required to match thermometer connectors. Include bushings if<br />
required to match sizes.<br />
C. Install thermowells with extension on insulated piping.<br />
D. Fill thermowells with heat-transfer medium.<br />
E. Install direct-mounted thermometers in thermowells and adjust vertical and tilted positions.<br />
F. Install remote-mounted thermometer bulbs in thermowells and install cases on panels; connect<br />
cases with tubing and support tubing to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.<br />
G. Install duct-thermometer mounting brackets in walls of ducts. Attach to duct with screws.<br />
H. Install direct-mounted pressure gages in piping tees with pressure gage located on pipe at the<br />
most readable position.<br />
I. Install remote-mounted pressure gages on panel.<br />
J. Install valve and snubber in piping for each pressure gage for fluids (except steam).<br />
K. Install valve and syphon fitting in piping for each pressure gage for steam.<br />
L. Install test plugs in piping tees.<br />
M. Install flow indicators in piping systems in accessible positions for easy viewing.<br />
N. Assemble and install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow-measuring elements and<br />
flowmeters according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
O. Install flowmeter elements in accessible positions in piping systems.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0519 - 8 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
P. Install differential-pressure-type flowmeter elements, with at least minimum straight lengths of<br />
pipe, upstream and downstream from element according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
Q. Install permanent indicators on walls or brackets in accessible and readable positions.<br />
R. Install connection fittings in accessible locations for attachment to portable indicators.<br />
S. Mount thermal-energy meters on wall if accessible; if not, provide brackets to support meters.<br />
T. Install thermometers in the following locations:<br />
1. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.<br />
2. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler.<br />
3. Two inlets and two outlets of each chiller.<br />
4. Inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units.<br />
5. Two inlets and two outlets of each hydronic heat exchanger.<br />
6. Inlet and outlet of each thermal-storage tank.<br />
7. Outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts.<br />
U. Install pressure gages in the following locations:<br />
1. Discharge of each pressure-reducing valve.<br />
2. Inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection.<br />
3. Suction and discharge of each pump.<br />
3.2 CONNECTIONS<br />
A. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow service and maintenance<br />
of meters, gages, machines, and equipment.<br />
3.3 ADJUSTING<br />
A. After installation, calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.<br />
3.4 THERMOMETER SCHEDULE<br />
A. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone shall be the following:<br />
1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.<br />
B. Thermometers at inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler, chiller, heat exchanger, each hydronic<br />
coil in air-handling units and built-up central systems shall be the following:<br />
1. Industrial-style, liquid-in-glass type.<br />
C. Thermometers at outside-, return-, supply-, and mixed-air ducts shall be the following:<br />
1. Liquid-filled, bimetallic-actuated type.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0519 - 9 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
D. Thermometer stems shall be of length to match thermowell insertion length.<br />
3.5 THERMOMETER SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE<br />
A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F and minus 20 to plus 50 deg C.<br />
B. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 0 to 100 deg F and minus 20 to plus 50 deg C.<br />
C. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 30 to 240 deg F and 0 to plus 115 deg C.<br />
D. Scale Range for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: 30 to 240 deg F and 0 to plus 115<br />
deg C.<br />
3.6 PRESSURE-GAGE SCHEDULE<br />
A. Pressure gages at discharge of each pressure-reducing valve shall be:<br />
1. Liquid-filled, direct-mounted, metal case.<br />
B. Pressure gages at inlet and outlet of each chiller chilled-water and condenser-water connection<br />
shall be:<br />
1. Liquid-filled, direct -mounted, metal case.<br />
2. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.<br />
C. Pressure gages at suction and discharge of each pump shall be:<br />
1. Liquid-filled, direct -mounted, metal case.<br />
2. Test plug with chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing rubber inserts.<br />
3.7 PRESSURE-GAGE SCALE-RANGE SCHEDULE<br />
A. Scale Range for Chilled-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.<br />
B. Scale Range for Condenser-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.<br />
C. Scale Range for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: 0 to 160 psi and 0 to 1100 kPa.<br />
3.8 FLOWMETER SCHEDULE<br />
A. Flowmeters for Chilled-Water Piping: Venturi type.<br />
B. Flowmeters for Condenser-Water Piping: Venturi type.<br />
C. Flowmeters for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: Venturi type.<br />
D. Flowmeters for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: Venturi type.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0519 - 10 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
3.9 THERMAL-ENERGY METER SCHEDULE<br />
A. Thermal-Energy Meters for Chilled-Water Piping: Impeller-turbine type.<br />
B. Thermal-Energy Meters for Condenser-Water Piping: Impeller-turbine type.<br />
C. Thermal-Energy Meters for Heating, Hot-Water Piping: Impeller-turbine type.<br />
D. Thermal-Energy Meters for Steam and Steam-Condensate Piping: Impeller-turbine type.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 0519<br />
23 0519 - 11 METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC<br />
PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 0523<br />
GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
A. This Section describes general requirements for valves common to most mechanical piping<br />
systems which are specified elsewhere in Division 23.<br />
1.02 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Submit the following Product Data for all valves under provisions of Section 01300: Body<br />
material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details,<br />
seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances,<br />
and installation instructions.<br />
B. Submit operating instructions and maintenance requirements for all valves.<br />
1.03 STANDARDS:<br />
A. All valves shall conform to applicable portions of the following standards and as required<br />
by the appropriate national and local codes.<br />
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)<br />
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)<br />
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)<br />
American Welding Society (AWS)<br />
American Water Works Association (AWWA)<br />
Canadian Standards Association (CSA)<br />
Commercial Standards, National Bureau of Standards (CS)<br />
Compressed Gas Association (CGA)<br />
Copper Development Association (CDA)<br />
Federal Specifications (FS)<br />
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS)<br />
B. Solenoid valves shall be UL listed, FM/AGA/ANSI and CSA approved.<br />
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:<br />
1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rusting and galvanic<br />
corrosion.<br />
2. Protect valve ends against mechanical damage to threads, flange faces, and weld<br />
end preps.<br />
3. Set valves in best position for handling. Globe and gate valves shall be closed to<br />
prevent rattling; ball and plug valves shall be open to minimize exposure of<br />
23 0523 - 1 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
functional surfaces; butterfly valves shall be shipped closed or slightly open; and<br />
swing check valves shall be blocked in either closed or open position.<br />
B. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage:<br />
1. Valves shall be stored and protected against all dirt, debris and foreign material at<br />
all times.<br />
2. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall<br />
for storage.<br />
3. Protect valves against weather. Where practical, store valves indoors. Maintain<br />
valve temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor<br />
storage is necessary, support valves off the ground and protect in watertight<br />
enclosures.<br />
C. Handling: Valves whose size requires handling by a crane or lift shall be slung or rigged<br />
to avoid damage to exposed valve parts. Handwheels and stems shall not be used as<br />
lifting or rigging points.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
2.02 VALVE FEATURES:<br />
1. Gate Valves: Nibco, Stockham, Hammond, Milwaukee.<br />
2. Ball Valves: Apollo, Nibco, Watts, Milwaukee, Stockham, Anvil.<br />
3. Eccentric Plug Balancing Valves: Keystone/Tyco, Milliken, DeZurik.<br />
4. Globe Valves: Nibco, Stockham, Hammond, Milwaukee.<br />
5. Butterfly Valves: Keystone/Tyco, Nibco, Milwaukee, Apollo, Stockham, Anvil.<br />
6. Swing Check Valves: Nibco, Stockham, Watts (threaded), Apollo, Milwaukee,<br />
Anvil (grooved only).<br />
7. Non-Slam Check Valves: Nibco, Keystone/Tyco, Milwaukee, Stockham,<br />
Centerline, Val-Matic, Metraflex, Technocheck, Golden Anderson, Anvil.<br />
8. Lift Check Valves: Apollo, Nibco, Milwaukee, Metraflex, Stockham.<br />
9. Solenoid Valves: Magnatrol Valve Corp., Skinner, General Controls, Asco.<br />
A. General: Comply with MSS-92 1980 "Valve Users Manual."<br />
B. All valves of each type shall be of one manufacturer.<br />
C. Valve Design: Valves shall have rising stem, or rising stem outside screw and yoke design;<br />
except, non-rising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full operation of<br />
rising stem valves.<br />
D. Sizes: Unless otherwise indicated, provide valves of same size as upstream pipe size.<br />
(Control valves shall be sized for required flow, 3 psi pressure drop maximum.)<br />
E. Operators: Provide the following special operator features:<br />
23 0523 - 2 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
1. Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn type.<br />
2. Lever handle on quarter turn valves 6 inch and smaller, except plug valves.<br />
Provide one wrench for every group of plug valves within a room.<br />
3. Chainwheel operators for valves 2-1/2 inch and larger that are installed 7’-0” or<br />
higher above finished floor elevation. Provide chains to an elevation of 6’-3”<br />
above finished floor elevation.<br />
4. Worm gear operators of an enclosed weather-proof design shall be provided on<br />
all quarter turn valves 8 inches and larger.<br />
F. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems to<br />
allow full operation of the valve without interference by the insulation.<br />
G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45.<br />
H. End Connections: As specified in the individual valve specifications.<br />
2.03 GATE VALVES:<br />
1. Threaded: Comply with ANSI B2.1.<br />
2. Flanged: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI<br />
B16.24 for bronze.<br />
3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a<br />
melting point below 840°F for gate, globe, and check valves and below<br />
421°F for ball valves.<br />
4. Grooved: Comply with manufacturer’s standards.<br />
A. Gate Valves – 2” and smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 150, body and bonnet of cast bronze conforming to<br />
ASTM B-62 for 150 psi, threaded ends, solid wedge disc, union bonnet, rising stem, bronze gland, nonasbestos<br />
TFE impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel.<br />
Stockham Fig. B-120/B-122<br />
B. Gate Valves – 2-1/2” and larger: MSS SP-70, Class 125, iron body conforming to ASTM<br />
A-126 C1 B, bronze trim, 0 S & Y design, flanged ends, and non-asbestos TFEimpregnated<br />
packing.<br />
2.04 BALL VALVES:<br />
Stockham Fig. G-623<br />
A. Ball Valves – 1” and smaller: MSS SP-110, ANSI B16.34, Class 150 WSP / 600 WOG,<br />
rated for 150 psi at 350°F, two-piece end-entry body style, bronze body conforming to<br />
ASTM B-584 (zinc content not exceeding 12%), full-port chrome-plated solid brass ball,<br />
15% glass reinforced RTFE seats, RTFE packing, adjustable packing nut, blow-out proof<br />
stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends or threaded ends to match<br />
piping system.<br />
Apollo 77C-100/200<br />
23 0523 - 3 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
B. Ball Valves – 1-1/4” through 2” and for all silver soldered or brazed lines: MSS SP-110,<br />
ANSI B16.34, Class 150 WSP / 600 WOG, rated for 150 psi at 350°F. Three-piece body<br />
style, bronze body conforming to ASTM B-584 (zinc content not exceeding 12%), single<br />
full-port stainless steel ball and stem of ASTM A-276 type 316, 15% glass reinforced RTFE<br />
seats, RTFE packing, blow-out proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder<br />
ends or threaded ends to match piping system.<br />
Apollo 82-100/200.<br />
2.05 ECCENTRIC PLUG BALANCING VALVES:<br />
A. All Sizes: 125 psi rated; cast iron, corrosion-resistant, permanently lubricated body;<br />
straightway pattern; EPDM encapsulated eccentric plug; lever actuators, except<br />
handwheels where indicated; and flanged ends. Provide memory stop feature.<br />
Milliken 600 series.<br />
B. 2” and smaller: At contractors option, provide combination flow measuring device and<br />
balancing valve, complete with venturi flow meter on P/T port, and ball valve for control;<br />
125 psi rated. Provide memory stop feature. Refer to Section 230519, “Meters and<br />
Gages for HVAC Piping.”<br />
2.06 GLOBE VALVES:<br />
A. HVAC Systems – 2” and smaller: MSS SP-80, Class 150 body, bonnet, bonnet ring cast of<br />
bronze conforming to ASTM B-62, stainless steel 500 BHN disc, union bonnet, nonasbestos<br />
Teflon-impregnated stem packing, copper-silicon bronze stem, brass packing<br />
gland, and malleable iron handle.<br />
Stockham Fig. B-29/B-74<br />
B. HVAC Systems – 2-1/2” and larger: MSS SP-85, Class 125, body of cast iron conforming<br />
to ASTM A-126 Class B, bolted bonnet bronze mounted, rising stem / Teflon disc with<br />
bronze disc holder or bronze disc, OS & Y, non-asbestos Teflon-impregnated stem<br />
packing, and cast iron or malleable iron hand wheel.<br />
2.07 BUTTERFLY VALVES:<br />
Stockham Fig. G-512/F-532<br />
A. Hydronic Service Butterfly Valves – 2-1/2” to 12”: MSS SP-67; Class 150 cast iron or<br />
ductile iron body conforming to ASTM A-126 or ASTM A-536 Class B; aluminum bronze<br />
ASTM B-148 disc; single-piece 416 stainless steel stem; 316 stainless steel taper pin discto-stem<br />
connection; ten-position lever locking handle for 6” and smaller sizes, worm gear<br />
actuator for 8” and larger sizes; EPDM replaceable seat and full FDA-approved EPDM<br />
lining; upper and lower bronze bearing, nonmetallic bushing and stem seal; ANSI class<br />
150 flange rated for 200 psi pressure differential; 250 psi bi-directional drop-tight shut-off<br />
dead end service with downstream flange removed; 250°F service temperature rating; and<br />
extended neck for 2” thick insulation. All valves shall be factory tested to 110% of pressure<br />
rating. All butterfly valves shall have fully lugged body, drilled and tapped.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0523 - 4 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
2.08 CHECK VALVES:<br />
Keystone/Tyco Fig. 222<br />
Anvil Gruvlok Series 7700<br />
A. Swing Check Valves – 2-1/2” and smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125/150 WSP, cast bronze<br />
body and cap conforming to ASTM B-62, horizontal swing design, Y-pattern, bronze or<br />
teflon disc, stainless steel pin, and threaded or solder ends. Class 150 valves meeting the<br />
above specifications may be used where pressure requires or where Class 125 is not<br />
available.<br />
B. Swing Check Valves – 2-1/2” to 3”: MSS SP-71, Class 125, cast iron body and bolted cap<br />
conforming to ASTM A-126, Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc<br />
with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. For sewage ejector and sump pump discharge<br />
swing check valves 2-1/2” and larger, provide outside lever with weight or spring to assist<br />
disc in closing rapidly.<br />
C. Non-Slam Check Valves – 2” and smaller: Bronze body, 200 psi @ 250 degrees F.,<br />
threaded ends, resilient seats, center guided spring-loaded disk.<br />
D. Non-Slam Check Valves – 2-1/2” and larger: Class 125 cast iron or stainless steel body,<br />
replaceable lapped bronze seat and balanced twin bronze flappers or bronze center<br />
guided disc and stainless steel trim. Valve shall be designed to open and close at<br />
approximately one foot differential pressure. Twin flappers or center guided disc shall be<br />
loaded with a stainless steel spring to assure even non-slam checking action. Seals shall<br />
be EPDM.<br />
E. Lift Check Valves – 2” and smaller: Class 125 cast bronze body and cap conforming to<br />
ASTM B-62, horizontal or angle pattern, lift type valve with stainless steel spring, bronze<br />
disc holder with renewable "Teflon" disc, and threaded ends.<br />
2.09 DRAIN VALVES:<br />
A. For HVAC and plumbing hydronic systems, provide ball valve with threaded hose end and<br />
cap with chain.<br />
2.10 SOLENOID VALVES:<br />
Apollo Fig. 78-100/78-200 Series<br />
A. Solenoid valves shall consist of a solenoid (electromagnet) with its core and a valve body<br />
containing one or more orifices. The solenoid shall be mounted directly on the valve<br />
body.<br />
B. Response time from fully open or closed to fully closed or open shall be slow acting.<br />
C. Solenoid valves shall be 2- or 3- way type valves.<br />
D. Solenoid valves shall be normally open or normally closed as required for proper<br />
operation of the system, for protection against freezing and fire, and for safety.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0523 - 5 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
E. Solenoid enclosures shall meet the ICS-6 ANSI/NEMA standard and UL standards 429,<br />
508 and/or 1002 as follows:<br />
1. Type 1: General Purpose.<br />
2. Type 2: Drip proof.<br />
3. Type 3 and 3S: Raintight, dust tight and sleet (ice) resistant.<br />
4. Type 3R: Rainproof, sleet (ice) resistant.<br />
5. Type 4: Watertight and dust tight.<br />
6. Type 4X: Watertight, dust tight and corrosion resistant.<br />
7. Type 6: Submersible.<br />
8. Type 6P: Submersible, prolonged submersion at a limited depth.<br />
9. Type 7: Explosion proof, Class I, Division 1, Group A (acetylene); B (hydrogen); C<br />
(ethyl-ether vapors, ethylene or cyclopropane); D (gasoline, hexane, naphtha,<br />
benzene, butane, propane, alcohol, acetone, benzol, lacquer, solvent vapors or<br />
natural gas).<br />
10. Type 9: Dust-ignition proof, Class II, Group E (metal dust); F (carbon black coal<br />
or coke dust); G (flour starch or grain dust).<br />
11. Operating temperatures shall range from 185°F to 842°F for T1 through T6 code<br />
numbers.<br />
F. Parts in contact with fluid shall be brass, bronze, or stainless steel; core tube, 305 stainless<br />
steel; core and plug nut, 430°F stainless steel; seal, BUNA “N"; shading coil, copper; disc,<br />
BUNA “N" and Nylon; spring, 302 stainless steel (General Service).<br />
G. Manual reset safety shut-off valve shall open manually and close upon interruption of<br />
current.<br />
H. Electric current shall be AC of voltage shown on Division 26 drawings.<br />
2.11 Electric Valve Actuators:<br />
1. The valve actuator shall consist of a 120 volt, single phase, permanent split<br />
capacitor, reversible type electric motor which drives a compound epicyclic gear.<br />
A manual override handwheel shall be integral to the unit. The electric actuator<br />
shall have visual mechanical position indication, readable from a distance of 25<br />
feet, showing output shaft and valve position. Unit shall be capable of mounting<br />
directly to butterfly valve without brackets or adapters.<br />
2. The actuator shall have an integral terminal strip for wiring to power supplies.<br />
Cable entry shall be by means of two (2) 1” NPT threaded connections. Cable<br />
entries shall have UL recommended gland stops within the NPT hole to prevent<br />
glands from being screwed in too far and damaging cable.<br />
3. The actuator shall be constructed to withstand high shock and vibrations without<br />
operations failure. The actuator cover shall have captive bolts to eliminate loss of<br />
bolts when removing the cover from the base. One copy of the wiring diagram<br />
shall be provided with the actuator.<br />
4. Actuators with 600 in-lbs or more output torque shall have two adjustable factory<br />
calibrated mechanical torque limit switches of the single pole, double-throw type.<br />
Motor rotor shaft shall run in ball bearings at each end of the motor.<br />
5. The actuator housing shall be manufactured to NEMA 4 Standards and shall be<br />
UL recognized.<br />
6. The environmental temperature range of the actuator shall be -20ºF to +140ºF (-<br />
30°C to +60°C).<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0523 - 6 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION:<br />
7. For two-position service, the actuator shall be rated at a 20% duty cycle (i.e., 12<br />
minutes extended duty in every hour, or alternatively, one complete cycle every two<br />
minutes). For frequent cycling and modulating service, the actuator shall be rated<br />
for continuous duty, capable of operating 100% of the time at an ambient<br />
temperature of 104ºF (40°C).<br />
8. The actuator shall have a permanently lubricated, self-locking gear train. Motor<br />
brakes shall not be required to maintain desired valve position. Levers or latches<br />
shall not be required to engage or disengage the manual override. Mechanical<br />
travel stops, adjustable to 15º in each direction of 90º rotation, shall be standard,<br />
as well as two adjustable travel limit switches with electrically isolated contacts.<br />
Additional adjustable switches shall be provided where required to meet the<br />
sequence of operation.<br />
9. The motor shall have Class B insulation capable of withstanding locked rotor<br />
current for 25 seconds without overheating. Wiring shall also have Class B<br />
insulation. An auto-reset thermal cut-out protector shall be embedded in the<br />
motor windings. The motor shall be UL recognized and CSA approved.<br />
Disassembly of gears shall not be required to remove the motor.<br />
10. Materials:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. The electric actuator shall have a pressure die-cast, hard-anodized<br />
aluminum base and cover. The compound gear shall be made of diecast,<br />
hard-anodized aluminum or steel. An alloy steel worm gear shall be<br />
provided for manual override and torque limiting. Bearings for gears<br />
shall be of the ball and needle type; bronze bearings shall be used on the<br />
shafting parts.<br />
11. Electric Valve Actuator Accessories:<br />
a. Provide thermostatically controlled heaters for all exterior valves.<br />
b. Provide potentiometer or 4-20 mA transmitter for providing continuous<br />
feedback of actuator position where required to meet the sequence of<br />
operations.<br />
c. Provide an electronic servo amplifier and speed control module capable<br />
of accepting a 0-5 Kohm, 4-20 mA DC or other input signal for all<br />
modulating control valves.<br />
A. Install valves in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, including recommended<br />
lubrication.<br />
B. Examine valve interior through the end ports for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter<br />
and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used which prevent disc<br />
movement during shipping and handling.<br />
C. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally<br />
significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation.<br />
Following examination, return the valve closure member to the position in which it was<br />
shipped.<br />
23 0523 - 7 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
D. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (out-of-round or local<br />
indentation) and cleanliness.<br />
E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions which might cause leakage. Check bolting for<br />
proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size and material,<br />
and for freedom from defects and damage.<br />
F. Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign<br />
materials, and proper alignment.<br />
G. All valves shall be installed so that they are accessible and serviceable, and such that full<br />
length operating handles may be used without interference from structure or other pipes<br />
and/or equipment.<br />
H. Isolation valves shall be installed:<br />
1. In piping at each and every piece of equipment.<br />
2. In piping whenever said pipe enters or leaves an equipment room.<br />
3. At all branch take-offs from mains.<br />
4. Where shown on Drawings.<br />
I. Label all valves with tags indicating service and identification number. Tags shall be 1-<br />
1/2” in diameter, brass, and with 1/4”-high letters. Securely fasten with chain and hook.<br />
Match service abbreviations given on mechanical drawings.<br />
3.02 VALVE SELECTION:<br />
A. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select valves<br />
with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:<br />
1. Copper Tube – 2” and smaller: Soldered ends, except in heating hot water and<br />
low pressure steam service, where threaded ends shall be used.<br />
2. Steel Pipe – 2” and smaller: Threaded or grooved-end.<br />
3. Steel Pipe – 2-1/2” and larger: Flanged or grooved-end.<br />
4. At all piping hot taps, provide a gate valve at the hot tap and a butterfly valve for<br />
shut-off service. Hot taps shall be provided only where approved by the Engineer.<br />
3.03 VALVE INSTALLATIONS:<br />
Valve Application Table<br />
SERVICE VALVE TYPE<br />
HVAC Hydronic Piping – 2” and smaller Ball Valve<br />
HVAC Hydronic Piping – 2-1/2” and larger Butterfly Valve<br />
HVAC Hydronic Pressure Globe Valve<br />
Reducing Valve Bypass – all sizes<br />
HVAC Hydronic Balancing Valve – 2” Calibrated Balancing Valve<br />
and smaller<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0523 - 8 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
HVAC Hydronic Balancing Valve – 2-1/2” Eccentric Plug Balancing Valve<br />
and larger<br />
HVAC Check Valves – 2” Swing Check<br />
and smaller<br />
HVAC Pump Discharge Non-Slam Spring Loaded<br />
Check Valve – all sizes<br />
Steam and Condensate Piping Shut-off – 2” Ball Valve<br />
and smaller<br />
Steam and Condensate Piping Shut-off – Steam Butterfly Valve<br />
2-1/2” and larger<br />
Steam and Condensate Piping Pressure Globe Valve<br />
Reducing – all sizes<br />
Steam and Condensate Piping Check Valves – Swing Check<br />
all sizes<br />
A. Locate valves for easy access, and provide separate support where necessary.<br />
B. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment in a manner to allow<br />
equipment removal without system shut-down. Unions are not required on flanged<br />
devices.<br />
C. Install 3-valve bypass around each pressure-reducing valve using throttling type valves.<br />
D. Gate and globe valves shall be installed with the stem in the upright position. In overhead<br />
horizontal piping, ball valves shall be installed with the handle at the side or bottom of the<br />
piping. Butterfly valves shall be installed with the stem within 45 degrees of the horizontal<br />
position. The handle of quarter turn valves shall point in the direction of flow when the<br />
valve is open. Quarter turn valves with hand wheels or chain wheels shall be located so<br />
that the position indicator is visible from the floor without the use of a ladder or climbing<br />
on equipment or piping.<br />
E. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow and as follows:<br />
1. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position with hinge pin level.<br />
2. Wafer Check Valves: Install between two flanges in horizontal or vertical<br />
upward flow position.<br />
3. Lift Check Valves: Install in piping line with stem upright and plumb.<br />
3.04 SOLDER CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.<br />
B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket, using steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire<br />
brush, to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in same manner.<br />
C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0523 - 9 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
D. Open gate and globe valves to fully open position.<br />
E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves with composition discs.<br />
F. Insert tube into valve socket, ensuring that the end of the tube rests against the shoulder<br />
inside the valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.<br />
G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed<br />
solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating of the<br />
valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth<br />
or brush.<br />
3.05 BRAZED CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Protect valves from temperatures which exceed the valve material temperature limitations<br />
as recommended by the valve manufacturer.<br />
B. Disassemble 3-piece ball valves prior to brazing.<br />
3.06 THREADED CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or<br />
wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.<br />
B. Align threads at point of assembly.<br />
C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where dry<br />
seal threading is specified).<br />
D. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the<br />
pipe is being threaded.<br />
3.07 FLANGED CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Align flange surfaces parallel.<br />
B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and<br />
gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten<br />
bolts gradually and uniformly using a torque wrench.<br />
3.08 GROOVED CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Make connections to valves with grooved ends in accordance with manufacturer’s<br />
published instructions.<br />
B. Clean pipe ends from indentations, projections, burrs and roll marks from pipe to groove.<br />
C. Provide gasket, flanges, fittings, bolts, nuts, and lubrication applied per manufacturer’s<br />
instructions for intended service.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0523 - 10 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
3.09 BUTTERFLY VALVE MOTORIZED ACTUATORS:<br />
A. Coordinate with the control system installer to set up all end switches, pilot valves, and<br />
control panels.<br />
B. Provide power for electric valve actuators in accordance with Division 26.<br />
C. Locate pilot positioners and valve position indicators so that they will be visible from the<br />
floor or roof surface, without the need of a ladder or climbing over equipment and piping.<br />
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Testing: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final<br />
adjusting and balancing, inspect each valve for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop<br />
leaks; replace valve if leak persists.<br />
3.11 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and<br />
prepare to receive finish painting or insulation.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 0523<br />
23 0523 - 11 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 0529<br />
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT<br />
A. Extent of supports and anchors required by this Section is indicated on drawings and/or<br />
specified in other Division 23 sections.<br />
B. Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following:<br />
1. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports.<br />
2. Vertical-Piping Clamps.<br />
3. Hanger-Rod Attachments.<br />
4. Building Attachments.<br />
5. Saddles and Shields.<br />
6. Spring Hangers and Supports.<br />
7. Miscellaneous Materials.<br />
8. Roof Equipment Supports.<br />
9. Anchors.<br />
10. Equipment Supports.<br />
C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as<br />
part of equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports and<br />
anchors of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in<br />
similar service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
1. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to<br />
product materials and installation of supports and anchors.<br />
2. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components shall be listed and<br />
labeled by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems.<br />
3. Duct Hangers: Comply with SMACNA Duct Manuals.<br />
4. MSS Standard Compliance:<br />
a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and<br />
manufacture comply with MSS SP-58.<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installation<br />
instructions, for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support<br />
23 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each<br />
required pipe hanger and support.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of<br />
support and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of<br />
assembly of components.<br />
C. Submit product certificates signed by the manufacturer of hangers and supports certifying<br />
that their products meet the specified requirements.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support and<br />
anchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in the Operating and<br />
Maintenance Manual, in accordance with the requirements of Division 23.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
1. Pipe Hangers and Supports: B-Line Systems Inc.; Carpenter and Patterson, Inc.;<br />
Fee & Mason Mfg. Co., Div. of Figgie International; Anvil Corp.; PHD<br />
Manufacturing, Inc.; Elcen Metal Products Company; Michigan Hanger Company;<br />
Unistrut Metal Framing System; Hubbard Enterprises (supports for domestic water<br />
piping); Specialty Products Co. (supports for domestic water piping).<br />
2. Saddles, Shields and Thermal Shield Inserts: Anvil Corp.; Pipe Shields, Inc.; B-<br />
Line; Insulated Saddle Shield Insert Product, Inc.; Michigan Hanger Company;<br />
Value Engineered Products, Inc.<br />
3. Roof Equipment Supports: Custom Curb, Inc.; Pate Co.; Thycurb, Div. of Thybar<br />
Corp.; Vent Products, Inc.<br />
4. Concrete Inserts and Anchors: Phillips Drill Company; Michigan Hanger<br />
Company; Unistrut Metal Framing Systems; Elcen Metal Products Company; ITW<br />
Ramset/Red Head; Hilti; B-Line.<br />
2.02 PIPE HANGERS & SUPPORTS:<br />
A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and<br />
manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58.<br />
1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and<br />
equipment that will not have field-applied finish.<br />
2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where<br />
attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.<br />
B. Adjustable Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1.<br />
1. Steel Pipe, sizes 3/8” thru 12”, Anvil fig. 260.<br />
2. Copper Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 4”, Anvil fig. CT-65.<br />
3. Cast Iron Pipe, sizes 4” thru 24”, Anvil fig. 590.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
C. Adjustable Swivel Rings: MSS Type 10.<br />
1. Steel Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 2”, Anvil fig. 69; size 2-1/2” thru 8”, Anvil figs. 69 or<br />
70.<br />
2. Copper Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 4”, Anvil fig. CT-69.<br />
D. Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 8.<br />
1. Steel Pipe, sizes 3/4” thru 20”, Anvil fig. 261.<br />
2. Copper Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 4”, Anvil fig. CT-121.<br />
E. U Bolts: MSS Type 24.<br />
1. Steel Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 36”, Anvil fig. 137.<br />
2. Copper Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 8”, Anvil fig. 137C.<br />
F. Straps: MSS Type 26.<br />
1. Steel Pipe, sizes 1/2” thru 4”, Anvil fig. 262.<br />
G. Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37.<br />
1. Steel Pipe, sizes 4” thru 12”, Anvil fig. 259.<br />
H. Yoke & Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43.<br />
1. Sizes 2-1/2” thru 20”, Anvil fig. 181.<br />
2. Hanger Rods: Continuous threaded steel, sizes as specified.<br />
I. Hangers:<br />
1. Hot Pipes:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Sizes 1/2” through 1-1/2”: Adjustable wrought steel ring.<br />
b. Sizes 2” through 5”: Adjustable wrought steel clevis.<br />
c. Sizes 6” and larger: Adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.<br />
2. Cold Pipes:<br />
a. Sizes 1/2” through 1-1/2”: Adjustable wrought steel ring.<br />
b. Sizes 2” and larger: Adjustable wrought steel clevis.<br />
3. Multiple or Trapeze: Structural steel channel (with web vertical), with welded<br />
spacers and hanger rods. Provide cast iron roll and stand for hot pipe sizes six<br />
inches and larger. Provide hanger rods one size larger than required for largest<br />
pipe in trapeze. If the deflection at center of trapeze exceeds 1/360 of the<br />
distance between the end hangers, install an additional hanger at mid-span or<br />
use a larger channel.<br />
J. Wall Supports for Horizontal Pipe:<br />
1. Sizes 1/2” through 3-1/2”: Steel offset hook.<br />
23 0529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2. Sizes 4” and larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. Provide<br />
adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe 200° F and higher and sizes<br />
six inches and larger.<br />
K. Supports for Vertical Pipe: Steel riser clamp.<br />
L. Upper Attachments:<br />
1. For attaching hanger rods to structural steel I-beams:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Provide adjustable beam clamp, Elcen No. 95, with No. 235 rod socket or<br />
equal. Attach to bottom flange of beam.<br />
2. For attaching hanger rods to bar joists:<br />
a. When bottom chord is constructed of structural steel angles, provide Elcen<br />
No. 84H square washer or equal with nut. Place hanger rod between<br />
backs of the two angles and support with the washer on top of the angles.<br />
Spot weld washer to angles.<br />
3. When bottom chord is constructed of round bars, provide Elcen No. 137 bar joist<br />
washer or equal.<br />
2.03 CONCRETE INSERTS AND ANCHORS:<br />
A. Inserts: Case shall be of galvanized steel with square threaded concrete insert nut for<br />
hanger rod connection; 3/4” lateral adjustment; top lugs for reinforcing rods, and nail<br />
holes for attaching to forms. Michigan Hanger models 355 and 355N or equal by<br />
Unistrut or Elcen. This type of upper attachment is to be used for all areas having pouredin-place<br />
concrete construction.<br />
1. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rods.<br />
B. Provide fasteners attached to concrete ceilings that are vibration and shock resistant.<br />
Provide hangers for piping and cuts attached to concrete construction with one of the<br />
following types:<br />
1. Concrete insert per MSS SP-58, Type 18.<br />
2. Powder driven fasteners, subject to approval. Each fastener shall be capable of<br />
holding a test load of 1000 pounds, but the actual load shall not exceed 50<br />
pounds.<br />
3. Self-drilling expansion shields. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the<br />
proof test load required.<br />
4. Machine bolt expansion anchor. The load applied shall not exceed one-fourth the<br />
proof test load required.<br />
C. Anchors: Carbon steel, zinc plated, and coated with a clear chromate finish. Installation<br />
shall be in holes drilled with carbide-tipped drill bits or by use of self-drilling anchors.<br />
1. Provide anchors suitable for the location of installation and designed to withstand<br />
all forces and movements acting on the anchor. Pipe anchors shall be<br />
manufactured in accordance with MSS SP-58. Provide a safety factor of four for<br />
the anchor installation.<br />
23 0529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2.04 SADDLES AND THERMAL SHIELD INSERTS:<br />
A. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matching<br />
adjoining insulation.<br />
1. Anvil Figs. 160-165.<br />
B. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; 180° arc, minimum 20 ga. galvanized steel, and<br />
minimum 12” long, to prevent crushing of insulation.<br />
1. Anvil Fig. 167.<br />
C. Thermal Shield Inserts: Provide 100-psi minimum compressive strength, waterproof,<br />
asbestos-free calcium silicate, encased with a sheet metal enclosure. Insert and shield<br />
shall cover the entire circumference of the pipe and shall be of length recommended by<br />
the manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation. For cold piping, calcium silicate<br />
shall extend beyond the sheet metal shield to allow overlap of the vapor barrier. Where<br />
piping 4” and larger is supported on trapeze or pipe rollers, provide double thickness<br />
shields. For piping 12” and larger, provide 600 psi calcium silicate structural insert.<br />
2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS:<br />
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A-36.<br />
B. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C-150, Type I or Type III) and clean, uniformly<br />
graded, natural sand (ASTM C-404, Size No. 2). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0<br />
parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and<br />
hydration.<br />
C. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld<br />
steel in accordance with AWS standards.<br />
D. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricated<br />
steel, consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding<br />
spider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any),<br />
and cylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated<br />
travel.<br />
2.06 ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:<br />
A. General: Construct roof equipment supports using minimum 18-ga galvanized steel with<br />
fully mitered and welded corners, 3” cant, internal bulkhead reinforcing, integral base<br />
plates, pressure treated wood nailer, 18-ga galvanized steel counterflashing and rigid<br />
insulation.<br />
B. Configuration: Construct of sizes as indicated, and compensate for slope in roof so that<br />
top of support is dead level.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0529 - 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do<br />
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner<br />
acceptable to Installer.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION:<br />
A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required building<br />
structural work has been completed in areas where these items are to be installed. Correct<br />
inadequacies, including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and other<br />
building structural attachments. Review Structural Drawings to obtain structural support<br />
limitations.<br />
B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meet<br />
at project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspection<br />
and testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordination<br />
with work of this Section, and Architect/Engineer for the purpose of reviewing material<br />
selections and procedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with the<br />
requirements specified. Provide Shop Drawings showing methods of installation and<br />
support locations from structure.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS:<br />
A. Install building attachments within concrete or on structural steel. Space attachments<br />
within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional<br />
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion<br />
joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is<br />
placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2500<br />
psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.<br />
B. New <strong>Construction</strong>:<br />
1. Use inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of<br />
reinforced concrete beams wherever practicable.<br />
2. Set inserts in position in advance of concrete work. Provide reinforcement rod in<br />
concrete for inserts carrying pipe larger than 4” or ducts larger than 60” wide.<br />
3. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, finish inserts flush with slab surface.<br />
4. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide rod<br />
with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab if construction above permits.<br />
C. Existing <strong>Construction</strong>:<br />
1. In existing concrete construction, drill into concrete slab and insert and tighten<br />
expansion anchor bolt. Connect anchor bolt to hanger rod. Care must be taken<br />
in existing concrete construction not to sever reinforcement rods or tension wires.<br />
3.04 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0529 - 6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Hangers for single pipes shall be adjustable clevis hangers, zinc-plated for steel pipes and<br />
copper-plated for copper pipes. Hangers for insulated pipes shall be oversized to<br />
accommodate pipe insulation thickness.<br />
B. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from<br />
building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel<br />
runs of horizontal piping to be supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze<br />
hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-<br />
69. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space<br />
hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipe.<br />
Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do not support piping from<br />
other piping.<br />
C. Install hangers and supports complete with all necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers<br />
and other accessories.<br />
D. Provide electrolysis isolators at all hangers and supports for domestic water, condenser<br />
water, and other water lines which are not insulated.<br />
E. Prevent electrolysis and abrasion in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and<br />
supports which are plastic coated, or with EPDM isolation strips. Duct tape or copper<br />
coated hangers are not acceptable.<br />
F. Support fire water piping independently from other piping systems.<br />
G. Install hangers and supports to allow for controlled movement of piping systems, to permit<br />
freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints,<br />
expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. Install hangers and supports within<br />
1’– 0” of each horizontal elbow.<br />
H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and<br />
stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.<br />
I. Provide vibration isolators on the first three supports upstream and downstream of<br />
equipment equipped with flexible connectors such as pumps, chillers, cooling towers, etc.<br />
J. Pipe Sloping: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe sloping, and so that<br />
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31.9 Building Services Piping Code are not<br />
exceeded.<br />
K. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements:<br />
1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps<br />
projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.<br />
2. Saddles: Install protection saddles, MSS Type 39, where supported by pipe rollers.<br />
Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation.<br />
3. Shields:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Install galvanized steel 180° insulation protection shields on all insulated<br />
piping of sizes 2” and smaller, except where required to be clamped.<br />
Where necessary to prevent dislocation, strap shield to pipe with wire ties<br />
or "Zip Strips." Insulation shall be continuous through hanger.<br />
b. Insulation lengths and galvanized steel saddle lengths and gauges<br />
(minimums) shall comply with Table 1 below. Where pipe hanger spacing<br />
23 0529 - 7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
exceeds 10 feet, a second layer (180°) steel shield shall be used for<br />
additional strength.<br />
TABLE 1<br />
Pipe Size 1/2” to 2” 2-1/2” to 5” 6” to 10” 12” to 18” 20” to 24”<br />
Insulation Length (in.) 6 9 9 12 24<br />
Shield Length (in.) 4 6 6 9 18<br />
Gauge of Steel* 24 20 16 16 16<br />
*Bottom saddle only; top saddle may be one gauge lighter.<br />
4. Thermal Inserts: Provide a 360° insert of high density water-proofed calcium<br />
silicate at all supports for all insulated piping larger than 2” and for all piping<br />
required to be clamped. Insulation inserts shall extend one inch beyond sheet<br />
metal shield on all chilled water lines. Provide 180° inserts at clevis and roller<br />
hangers. Provide 360° inserts for all trapeze and clamped supports.<br />
L. Except where governed by more stringent local codes, install piping hangers with the<br />
following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing as indicated in Table 2 below:<br />
Pipe Material Pipe Size<br />
TABLE 2<br />
Max. Hanger<br />
Spacing<br />
Min. Hanger Rod<br />
Diameter<br />
Steel, Schedule 40 & 80, filled with 1/2" 5'-0" 3/8"<br />
water 3/4" 6'-0" 3/8"<br />
1" 7'-0" 3/8"<br />
1-1/4" 8'-0" 3/8"<br />
1-1/2" 9'-0" 3/8"<br />
2" 10'-0" 3/8"<br />
2-1/2" 11'-0" 1/2"<br />
3" 12'-0" 1/2"<br />
4" 14'-0" 5/8"<br />
5" 16'-0" 5/8"<br />
6" 17'-0" 3/4"<br />
8" 19'-0" 7/8"<br />
10" 22'-0" 7/8"<br />
12" 23'-0" 7/8"<br />
Steel, Std. Weight, filled with water 14" 25'-0" 1"<br />
16" 27'-0" 1"<br />
18" 28'-0" 1"<br />
20" to 24" 30'-0" 1-1/2"<br />
Copper, Types K, L, M and DWV 1/2" 6'-0" 3/8"<br />
3/4", 1" 8'-0" 3/8"<br />
23 0529 - 8 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1-1/4" through 2" 10'-0" 3/8"<br />
2-1/2" through 5" 12'-0" 1/2"<br />
6" through 8" 14'-0" 3/4"<br />
Note: Maximum hanger spacings shown in Table 2 are based on maximum sag of 0.1” between<br />
hangers for straight pipe. Hanger spacing must be reduced to compensate for any valves and/or<br />
fittings installed in the pipe run. Spacing shall limit sag to 0.1” between hangers. Minimum<br />
hanger spacing for fire protection piping shall be per appropriate NFPA requirements.<br />
M. Support cast iron piping, in addition to the requirements of Table 3, as follows:<br />
1. Hub & Spigot – All sizes: One hanger to each joint, minimum.<br />
2. No-Hub – All sizes:<br />
a. With Clamp-All and Anaheim Series 4000 stainless steel couplings and<br />
MG cast iron couplings: one hanger to each joint.<br />
b. With all other stainless steel band-type couplings: one hanger to each<br />
side of joint.<br />
3. Support all horizontal cast iron pipe within 18 inches of each joint.<br />
4. Use hanger rods same size as required for steel.<br />
5. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each story height and at its base. Secure vertical<br />
hub-and-spigot pipe immediately below the hub. Support vertical no-hub pipe so<br />
that the weight is carried from the pipe to the support and not from the joint to the<br />
support.<br />
N. Place a hanger within one foot (0.305 m) of each horizontal elbow.<br />
O. Use hangers which are vertically adjustable 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm) minimum after piping<br />
is erected.<br />
P. Support vertical steel and copper piping at every story height, but at not more than 15-foot<br />
intervals for steel and cast iron and 10-foot intervals for copper.<br />
Q. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide trapeze<br />
hangers. All hanger members shall be sized with 5-to-1 safety factor. Verify load bearing<br />
capacity of structure before installation of trapeze hangers.<br />
R. Where practical, support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.<br />
S. Support steam supply and condensate return pipe runs on adjustable roller hangers.<br />
T. Each pipe drop to equipment shall be adequately supported. All supporting lugs or guides<br />
shall be securely anchored to the building structure.<br />
U. Securely anchor and support plumbing domestic water piping in chases or walls. Use<br />
factory manufactured clamps and brackets connected to fixture carriers, wall studs or floor.<br />
Wires or straps will not be permitted.<br />
1. When copper supplies are connected to flush valves, support the tubing by the<br />
studs or by a fixture carrier, not by clamping to waste/vent piping.<br />
23 0529 - 9 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2. Prevent copper tubing from making contact with steel brackets, using fire retardant<br />
polyethylene inserts or other dielectric insulating material. Duct tape shall not be<br />
used.<br />
V. Install anchors and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and the<br />
following:<br />
1. In the event a self-drilling expansion shield or machine bolt expansion shield is<br />
considered to have been installed improperly, the Contractor shall make an<br />
acceptable replacement or demonstrate the stability of the anchor by performing<br />
an on-site test under which the anchor will be subjected to a load equal to twice<br />
the actual load.<br />
2. Powder-driven fasteners may be used only where they will be concealed after<br />
construction is complete. Where an occasional fastener appears to be improperly<br />
installed, additional fastener(s) shall be driven nearby (not closer than 6 inches) in<br />
undisturbed concrete. Where it is considered that many fasteners are improperly<br />
installed, the Contractor shall test load any 50 successively driven fasteners. If 10<br />
percent or more of these fasteners fail, the Contractor shall utilize other fastening<br />
means as approved and at no additional cost to the Owner.<br />
3. Hangers for piping and ductwork shall be attached to cellular steel floor decks<br />
with steel plates and bolted rods conforming to the steel deck manufacturer's<br />
requirements. Where the individual hanger load exceeds the capacity of a single<br />
floor deck attachment, steel angles, beams or channels shall be provided to span<br />
the number of floor deck attachments required.<br />
4. Welding may be used for securing hangers to steel structural members. Welded<br />
attachments shall be designed so that the fiber stress at any point of the weld or<br />
attachment will not exceed the fiber stress in the hanger rod.<br />
3.05 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS:<br />
A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by<br />
ANSI B31.9, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.<br />
B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and to<br />
structure. Comply with ANSI B31.9 and with AWS Standard D1.1.<br />
C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with<br />
expansion unit manufacturer’s written instructions, to control movement to compensators.<br />
D. Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principal pipe<br />
runs and at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make<br />
provisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and<br />
contraction of piping.<br />
3.06 SHEET METAL DUCT HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:<br />
A. Provide in accordance with SMACNA HVAC duct construction standards.<br />
B. Provide also in the following locations:<br />
1. 2” to 24” from flexible connections of fans.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0529 - 10 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
2. 2” to 24” from the outlets or flexible connections of VAV control units or mixing<br />
boxes.<br />
3. 12” to 36” from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch ducts.<br />
4. 2” to 12” from the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums.<br />
5. 2” to 24” from fire damper break-away joints.<br />
6. At throat and heel of round or square elbows 48” or greater in width.<br />
3.07 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:<br />
A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support<br />
equipment above floor.<br />
B. All steel work shall be in conformance with the requirements of the AISC Specification for<br />
the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. Material shall<br />
conform to ASTM A-36.<br />
C. Bases and supports shall be constructed as detailed on approved shop drawings provided<br />
by the Contractor.<br />
D. All structural steel shall receive one coat of industrial enamel primer in the shop after all<br />
fabrication welding is complete. Paint all field joints with one coat of industrial enamel<br />
primer. After all steel is properly primed, paint with two coats of exterior grade enamel.<br />
Color to be as selected by the Architect.<br />
E. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment.<br />
F. Concrete bases for mechanical equipment indoors and outdoors will be provided by the<br />
General Contractor only if shown on the architectural or structural drawings. Otherwise,<br />
all bases shall be provided by this Contractor.<br />
G. For inertia bases, see Section 230548.<br />
H. Provide housekeeping bases for all floor-mounted mechanical equipment (pumps, air<br />
handlers, water heaters, boilers, chillers, tanks, etc.). Bases shall be 4” thick minimum,<br />
and extended 6” beyond machinery bedplates. Coordinate location and size with the<br />
General Contractor.<br />
I. This Contractor shall be responsible for the proper size and location of all bases and shall<br />
furnish all required anchor bolts and sleeves. If bases are provided by the General<br />
Contractor, furnish him with templates showing the bolt locations.<br />
J. Equipment shall be secured to the bases with anchor bolts of ample size. Bolts shall have<br />
bottom plates and pipe sleeves and shall be securely imbedded in the concrete. All<br />
machinery shall be grouted under the entire bearing surface. After grout has set, all<br />
wedges, shims and jack bolts shall be removed and the space filled with non-shrinking<br />
grout. This Contractor shall provide lead washers at all equipment anchor bolts.<br />
K. Construct equipment supports above floor of structural steel members or steel pipe and<br />
fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.<br />
L. Provide rigid anchors for ducts and pipes immediately after vibration isolation connections<br />
to equipment. See also Section 230548.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0529 - 11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
3.08 PREFABRICATED ROOFTOP EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS:<br />
A. Equipment Bases:<br />
1. Equipment base shall be solid top equipment base with stepped cant to match<br />
roof insulation. Base shall pitch to match roof pitch and provide level unit<br />
installation.<br />
2. Base shall be constructed of reinforced 18-gauge galvanized steel with all welded<br />
components, full mitered corners, factory installed 1-1/2” thick rigid fiberglass<br />
insulation, wood nailer, and galvanized steel counterflashing. Base shall be<br />
shipped as one piece.<br />
B. Equipment Rails:<br />
1. Equipment rail shall be constructed of 18-gauge galvanized steel shell, base plate,<br />
and counterflashing with factory installed wood nailer, fully mitered end sections,<br />
and stepped cant to match roof insulation. Rails shall pitch to match roof pitch<br />
and provide level installation.<br />
C. All supports shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.<br />
3.09 FLASHING AND SAFING:<br />
A. Flash and counterflash where mechanical equipment passes through weather- or waterproofed<br />
walls, floors, or roofs.<br />
B. Provide lead flashing around ducts and pipes passing from equipment rooms, installed<br />
according to manufacturer's data for sound control.<br />
3.10 METAL FABRICATION:<br />
A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment<br />
supports. Install and align fabricated anchors at indicated locations.<br />
B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that<br />
cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.<br />
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc<br />
welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding<br />
work, and the following:<br />
3.11 ADJUSTING:<br />
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and<br />
corrosion resistance of base metals.<br />
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.<br />
3. Remove welding flux immediately.<br />
4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and<br />
contours at welded surfaces match adjacent contours.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0529 - 12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to<br />
achieve indicated slope of pipe.<br />
B. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field welds<br />
and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for<br />
shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements for touch-up of field-painted<br />
surfaces.<br />
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.<br />
C. For galvanized surfaces, clean welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply<br />
galvanizing repair paint to comply with ASTM A-780.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 0529<br />
23 0529 - 13 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 0548<br />
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT<br />
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
A. Extent of vibration control work required by this Section is indicated on drawings<br />
and schedules, and/or specified in other Division 23 sections.<br />
1. All mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork as noted or in the<br />
specification shall be mounted on vibration isolators to prevent the<br />
transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the<br />
building structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with<br />
the weight distribution so as to produce reasonably uniform deflection.<br />
2. All such systems must be installed in strict accordance with component<br />
manufacturer’s and building construction standards. Whenever a conflict<br />
occurs between the manufacturer's or construction standards, the most<br />
stringent shall apply.<br />
3. Any variance from or non-compliance with these specification<br />
requirements shall be corrected by the contractor in an approved manner.<br />
B. The work of this Section includes, but is not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Vibration isolation for all mechanical systems/equipment, including, but<br />
not limited to, the following:<br />
AC Units<br />
Air Handling Units<br />
Chillers<br />
Compressors<br />
Computer Room Units<br />
Condensers<br />
Condensing Units<br />
Cooling Towers<br />
2. Vibration isolation for piping and ductwork.<br />
3. Equipment isolation bases.<br />
4. Flexible piping connections.<br />
Fan-Powered Boxes<br />
Fans (all types, including life<br />
safety fans)<br />
Pumps (all types)<br />
Rooftop HVAC Units<br />
Unit Heaters<br />
Heat Pum<br />
C. Vibration control products furnished as an integral part of factory-fabricated equipment<br />
shall be accepted only if they fully comply with the requirements of this Section.<br />
D. For additional and supplemental requirements, refer to other Division 23 sections for<br />
equipment foundations; hangers; sealants; gaskets; requirements of electrical connections<br />
to equipment isolated on vibration control products; and requirements of duct connections<br />
to air handling equipment isolated on vibration control products.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
23 0548 - 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration<br />
control products, of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in<br />
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
1. Except as otherwise indicated, vibration control products shall be obtained from a<br />
single manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer.<br />
2. Engage manufacturer to provide technical supervision of installation of support<br />
isolation and associated inertia bases.<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions<br />
for each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection,<br />
and location for each product furnished.<br />
1. Include data for each type and size of unit, showing isolation efficiency, stiffness,<br />
natural frequency and transmissibility at lowest operating speed of equipment,<br />
detailing compliance with the specification.<br />
2. For spring units, show wire size, spring diameter, free height, solid-compression<br />
height, operating height, fatigue characteristics, ratio of horizontal to vertical<br />
stiffness, and basis of spring-rating selection for range of loading weights.<br />
3. Include detailed schedules of flexible and rigidly mounted equipment, showing<br />
vibration isolators by referencing numbered descriptive drawings.<br />
4. Include performance certifications from manufacturers.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating<br />
dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.<br />
Detail bases, and show location of equipment anchoring points coordinated with<br />
equipment manufacturer's shop drawings.<br />
1. Submit shop drawings showing structural design and details of inertia bases, steel<br />
beam bases and other custom-fabricated work not covered by manufacturer's<br />
submitted data.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Furnish templates, anchor bolts and sleeves for equipment bases,<br />
foundations and other support systems for coordination of vibration<br />
isolation with other work.<br />
b. Provide all details of suspension and support for ceiling hung equipment.<br />
2. Submit shop drawings indicating scope of vibration isolation work and locations of<br />
units and flexible connections. Indicate support isolation points for piping and<br />
ductwork, including risers and inertia bases.<br />
a. Include schedule of units, showing size or manufacturer's part number,<br />
and weight supported and resulting deflection for each unit.<br />
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of vibration control product.<br />
Include this data, product data and shop drawings in the Operating and Maintenance<br />
Manual, in accordance with requirements of Divisions 23.<br />
1.04 CODE AND STANDARDS REQUIREMENTS:<br />
23 0548 - 2 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
A. Applicable Codes and Standards:<br />
1. The International Building Code (IBC) as published by the International<br />
Conference of Building officials.<br />
2. All State and Local Codes.<br />
3. ASHRAE HVAC Applications Handbook, Sound and Vibration Control.<br />
1.05 MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITY:<br />
A. Manufacturer of vibration isolation equipment shall have the following responsibilities:<br />
1.06 RELATED WORK:<br />
1. Determine vibration isolator sizes and locations.<br />
2. Provide vibration isolation units as scheduled or otherwise specified.<br />
3. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to ensure<br />
proper installation and performance.<br />
A. Housekeeping Pads: Details and design of housekeeping pad reinforcement and<br />
monolithic pad attachment to the structure shall be prepared by the contractor if not<br />
already indicated on the drawings.<br />
B. Supplementary Support Steel: Contractor shall supply supplementary support steel for all<br />
equipment, piping, ductwork, etc., including roof mounted equipment, as required or<br />
specified.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the<br />
following:<br />
1. Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
B. Alternate Manufacturer: All vibration isolators described in this Section shall be the<br />
product of a single manufacturer. Mason Industries’ products are the basis of these<br />
specifications; products of other manufacturers are acceptable provided their systems<br />
strictly comply with these specifications and have been reviewed by the Engineer.<br />
Submittals and certification sheets shall be in accordance with Section 1.03.<br />
2.02 PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS:<br />
A. The following product descriptions are listed by a letter, which is used as the identifier in<br />
the Equipment Vibration Isolation Schedule and elsewhere in Part 3 of this Specification.<br />
1. Mountings:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Specification “A”: Double deflection neoprene mountings shall have a<br />
minimum static deflection of 0.35”. All metal surfaces shall be neoprene<br />
23 0548 - 3 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
covered to avoid corrosion and have friction pads both top and bottom so<br />
they need not be bolted to the floor. Bolt holes shall be provided for these<br />
areas where bolting is required. On equipment such as small vent sets<br />
and close coupled pumps, steel rails shall be used above the mountings<br />
to compensate for the overhang. Mountings shall be type ND or rails type<br />
DNR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
b. Specification “B”: Spring type isolators shall be free-standing and laterally<br />
stable without any housing and complete with ¼” neoprene-acoustical<br />
friction pads between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall<br />
have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring<br />
diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring<br />
at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid<br />
equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring<br />
diameters, deflections, compressed spring height and solid spring height.<br />
Mountings shall be type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
c. Specification “C”: Equipment with operating weight different from the<br />
installed weight such as chillers, boilers, etc. and equipment exposed to<br />
the wind such as cooling towers shall be mounted on spring mountings as<br />
described in engineering Specification B, except a housing shall be used<br />
that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is<br />
removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection, and<br />
cooling tower mounts shall be located between the supporting steel and<br />
roof or the grillage and dunnage as shown on the drawings. The<br />
installed and operating heights shall be the same. A minimum clearance<br />
of ½” shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the<br />
housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Limit<br />
stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Mountings used<br />
out-of-doors shall be hot dipped galvanized. Mountings shall be type SLR<br />
as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
2. Hangers:<br />
a. Specification “D”: Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring, located<br />
in a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent shortcircuiting<br />
of hanger rod, and 0.3” deflection neoprene element in series.<br />
The spring shall be color coded for ease of identification. The neoprene<br />
element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through<br />
the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall<br />
be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc<br />
before contacting the hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall<br />
have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated<br />
deflection. Submittals shall include a scale drawing of the hanger<br />
showing the 30° capability. Hangers shall be type 30N as manufactured<br />
by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
b. Specification “D1”: Vibration hangers shall contain a 0.3” deflection<br />
neoprene element. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod<br />
isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Hangers shall be<br />
type HD as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
c. Specification “E”: Vibration hangers shall be as described in engineering<br />
Specification D, except they shall be precompressed to the rated deflection<br />
so as to keep the piping or equipment at a fixed elevation during<br />
installation. The hangers shall be designed with a release mechanism to<br />
free the spring after the installation is complete and the hanger is<br />
subjected to its full load. Deflection shall be clearly indicated by means of<br />
23 0548 - 4 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
3. Bases:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a scale. Hangers shall be type PC30N as manufactured by Mason<br />
Industries, Inc.<br />
d. Specification “F”: Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring located in<br />
a neoprene cup manufactured with a grommet to prevent short-circuiting<br />
of the hanger rod. The cup shall contain a steel washer designed to<br />
properly distribute the load on the neoprene and prevent its extrusion.<br />
Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough<br />
to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30° arc before contacting the<br />
hole and short-circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum<br />
additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Hangers<br />
shall be provided with an eye bolt on the spring end and provision to<br />
attach the housing to the flat iron duct straps. Submittals shall include a<br />
scale drawing of the hanger showing the 30° capability. Hangers shall be<br />
type W30 as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
a. Specification “G”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall furnish integral<br />
structural steel bases. Bases shall be rectangular in shape for all<br />
equipment other than centrifugal refrigeration machines and pumps,<br />
which may have ‘T’ or ‘L’ shaped bases. Pump bases for split case pumps<br />
shall include supports for suction and discharge base ells. All perimeter<br />
members shall be beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10 th of the<br />
longest dimension of the base. Beam depth need not exceed 14”<br />
provided that the deflection and misalignment are kept within acceptable<br />
limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be<br />
employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of one<br />
inch. Bases shall be type WF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
b. Specification “H”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide steel<br />
members welded to height saving brackets to cradle machines having legs<br />
or bases that do not require a complete supplementary base. Members<br />
shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent strains in the equipment. Inverted<br />
saddles shall be type ICS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
c. Specification “J”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall furnish rectangular<br />
structural beam or channel concrete forms for floating foundations. Bases<br />
for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide support for suction<br />
and discharge base ells. The base depth need not exceed 12” unless<br />
specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity.<br />
In general, bases shall have a minimum depth of 1/12 th of the longest<br />
dimension of the base, but no less than 6”. Forms shall include minimum<br />
concrete reinforcement consisting of half-inch bars or angles welded in<br />
place on 6” centers running both ways in a layer 1-1/2” above the<br />
bottom, or additional steel as required by the structural conditions. Forms<br />
shall be furnished with drilled steel members with sleeves welded below<br />
the holes to receive equipment anchor bolts where the anchor bolts fall in<br />
concrete locations. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all<br />
mounting locations to maintain a 1” clearance below the base. Bases<br />
shall be type K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc. Provide<br />
concrete fill as required for a complete installation.<br />
4. Flexible Connectors:<br />
a. Specification “K”: Spherical flexible connectors shall employ peroxide<br />
cured EPDM in the covers, liners and Kevlar® tire cord frictioning. Any<br />
23 0548 - 5 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
<strong>substitution</strong>s must have equal or superior physical and chemical<br />
characteristics. Solid steel rings shall be used within the raised face<br />
rubber flanged ends to prevent pullout. Flexible cable bead wire is not<br />
acceptable. Sizes 2" (50mm) and larger shall have two spheres reinforced<br />
with a ductile iron external ring between spheres. Flanges shall be split<br />
ductile iron or steel with hooked or similar interlocks. Sizes 16" (400mm)<br />
to 24" (600mm) may be single sphere. Sizes 3/4" (19mm) to 1½" (38mm)<br />
may have threaded two-piece bolted flange assemblies, one sphere and<br />
cable retention. Connectors shall be rated at 250 psi (1.72MPa) up to<br />
170 o F (77 o C) with a uniform drop in allowable pressure to 215 psi<br />
(1.48MPa) at 250 o F (121 o C) in sizes up through 14" (350mm). 16"<br />
(400mm) through 24" (600mm) single sphere minimum ratings are 180<br />
psi (1.24MPa) at 170 o F (77 o C) and 150 psi (1.03 MPa) at 250 o F (121 o C).<br />
Higher rated connectors may be used to accommodate service conditions.<br />
All flexible connectors must be factory tested to 150% of rated pressure for<br />
12 minutes before shipment. Safety factors to burst and flange pullout<br />
shall be a minimum of 3/1. Concentric reducers to the above ratings<br />
may be substituted for equal ended connectors.<br />
b. Flexible connectors shall be installed in piping gaps equal to the length of<br />
the connectors under pressure. Control rods need only be used in<br />
unanchored piping locations where the manufacturer determines the<br />
installation exceeds the pressure requirement without control rods. If<br />
control rods are used, they must have ½" (12mm) thick Neoprene washer<br />
bushings large enough in diameter to take the thrust at 1000 psi (.7<br />
kg/mm 2 ) maximum on the washer area.<br />
c. Submittals shall include two test reports by independent consultants<br />
showing minimum reductions of 20 dB in vibration accelerations and 10<br />
dB in sound pressure levels at typical blade passage frequencies on this or<br />
a similar product by the same manufacturer. All flexible connectors shall<br />
be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves. Flexible<br />
connectors shall be SAFEFLEX series, type SFDEJ, SFEJ, SFDCR or SFU and<br />
control rods type CR as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
5. Flexible Hoses:<br />
a. Specification “L”: Flexible stainless steel hose shall have stainless steel<br />
braid and carbon steel fittings. Sizes 3” and larger shall be flanged.<br />
Smaller sizes shall have male nipples. Lengths for each pipe size shall be<br />
as tabulated:<br />
Flanged Male Nipples<br />
3 x 14 10 x 26 ½ x 9 1-1/2 x 13<br />
4 x 15 12 x 28 ¾ x 10 2 x 14<br />
5 x 19 14 x 30 1 x 11 2-1/2 x 18<br />
6 x 20 16 x 32 1-1/4 x 12<br />
8 x 22<br />
b. Hoses shall be installed on the equipment side of the shut-off valves<br />
horizontally and parallel to the equipment shafts wherever possible.<br />
Hoses shall be type BSS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
6. Acoustical Floor, Ceiling, and Wall Seals:<br />
23 0548 - 6 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Specification “M”: Where piping passes through equipment room walls,<br />
floors or ceilings, the vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide a split<br />
seal consisting of two bolted pipe halves with ¾” or thicker neoprene<br />
sponge bonded to the inner faces. The seal shall be tightened around the<br />
pipe to eliminate clearance between the inner sponge face and the<br />
piping. Concrete may be packed around the seal to make it integral with<br />
the floor, wall or ceiling if the seal is not already in place around the pipe<br />
prior to the construction of the building member. Seals shall project a<br />
minimum of 1” past either face of the wall. Where temperatures exceed<br />
240°F, 10 lb./cu.ft. density fiberglass may be used in lieu of the sponge.<br />
Seals shall be type SWS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
7. Pipe Anchors:<br />
a. Specification “N”: Vibration isolator manufacturer shall provide an alldirectional<br />
acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of a telescopic arrangement<br />
of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum half inch thickness of<br />
heavy duty neoprene and duck or neoprene isolation material. Vertical<br />
restraints shall be provided by similar material arranged to prevent<br />
vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material<br />
shall not exceed 500 psi, and the design shall be balanced for equal<br />
resistance in any direction. All-directional anchors shall be type ADA as<br />
manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
8. Horizontal Thrust Restraints:<br />
a. Specification “X”: Air handling equipment shall be protected against<br />
excessive displacement which might result from high air thrusts in relation<br />
to the equipment weight. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a<br />
spring element in series with a neoprene pad as described in Specification<br />
B, with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers.<br />
The spring element shall be contained within a steel frame and designed<br />
so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to<br />
allow for a maximum of ¼” movement at start and stop. The assembly<br />
shall be furnished with one rod and angle brackets for attachment to both<br />
the equipment and ductwork or the equipment and the structure.<br />
Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and<br />
symmetrically on either side of the unit. Horizontal thrust restraints shall<br />
be type WB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
9. Curb-Mounted Aluminum Bases:<br />
a. Specification “Y”: Curb-mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on<br />
vibration isolation bases that fit over the roof curb and under the isolated<br />
equipment. The extruded aluminum top member shall overlap the bottom<br />
member to provide water runoff independent of the seal. The aluminum<br />
members shall house cadmium plated springs having a 1” minimum<br />
deflection with 50% additional travel to solid. Spring diameters shall be<br />
no less than 0.8 of the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall<br />
be provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum<br />
clearance of ¼” so as not to interfere with the spring action except in high<br />
winds. The weather seal shall consist of continuous closed cell sponge<br />
materials both above and below the base and a waterproof flexible<br />
ductlike EPDM connection joining the outside perimeter of the aluminum<br />
23 0548 - 7 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
members. Foam or other contact seals are unacceptable at the spring<br />
cavity closure. Caulking shall be kept to a minimum. Submittals shall<br />
include spring deflections, spring diameters, compressed spring height<br />
and solid spring height as well as seal and wind resistance details. Curb<br />
mounted bases shall be type CMAB as manufactured by Mason Industries,<br />
Inc.<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Do<br />
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS:<br />
A. General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for selection<br />
and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated.<br />
B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with<br />
manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation<br />
materials and units to achieve minimum static deflection and displacement requirements.<br />
3.03 GENERAL:<br />
A. Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and<br />
load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do<br />
not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not shortcircuited<br />
by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if<br />
any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation.<br />
B. All vibration isolators must be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written<br />
instructions and all certified submittal data.<br />
C. Installation of vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment,<br />
piping or ductwork resulting in stresses or misalignment.<br />
D. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that<br />
degrades the noise and vibration control system herein specified.<br />
E. The contractor shall not install any equipment, piping, ductwork or conduit which makes<br />
rigid connections with the building unless isolation is not specified. "Building" includes, but<br />
is not limited to, slabs, beams, columns, studs and walls.<br />
F. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact between the building and any<br />
vibrating equipment, piping, ductwork or conduits.<br />
G. Any conflicts with other trades which will result in rigid contact between the building and<br />
equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions should be<br />
brought to the Architect's/Engineer's attention prior to installation. Corrective work<br />
necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the responsible contractor's expense.<br />
23 0548 - 8 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
H. Bring to the Architect's/Engineer's attention any discrepancies between the specifications<br />
and the field conditions or changes required due to specific equipment selection, prior to<br />
installation. Corrective work necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the<br />
responsible contractor's expense.<br />
I. All installations which are deemed defective in materials and/or workmanship shall be<br />
corrected at the responsible contractor's expense, at no additional cost to the Owner.<br />
J. Overstressing of the building structure must not occur because of overhead support of<br />
equipment. Contractor must submit loads to the structural engineer of record for<br />
approval. Generally, bracing may occur from:<br />
1. Flanges of structural beams.<br />
2. Upper truss chords in bar joist construction.<br />
3. Cast-in-place inserts or wedge type drill-in concrete anchors.<br />
K. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as required.<br />
Independent steel rails are not permitted on this project.<br />
L. Install vibration isolation units between substrate and equipment as required for secure<br />
operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces.<br />
M. Air handling equipment and high pressure axial and centrifugal fans shall be protected<br />
against excessive displacement which results from high air thrust in relation to the<br />
equipment weight.<br />
N. For air handling equipment, install thrust restraints as indicated, and also wherever thrust<br />
exceeds 10% of equipment weight.<br />
O. Locate isolation hangers as near to the overhead support structure as possible.<br />
P. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim<br />
units as required where substrate is not level.<br />
Q. Install inertia base frames on isolator units so that minimum of 1” clearance below base<br />
will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has been installed<br />
and loaded for operation.<br />
R. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading and<br />
operations.<br />
S. Install flexible connectors and hoses on the equipment side of shut-off valves. Install hoses<br />
horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible.<br />
3.04 VIBRATION ISOLATION:<br />
A. Horizontal Pipe Isolation: The first three pipe hangers for the main lines near the<br />
mechanical equipment shall be as described in Specification E. Horizontal runs in all other<br />
locations throughout the building shall be isolated by hangers as described in Specification<br />
D. Floor supported piping shall rest on isolators as described in Specification C. Heat<br />
exchangers shall be considered part of the piping run. All Specification E hangers or the<br />
first three Specification C mounts, as noted above, shall have the same static deflection as<br />
specified for the mountings under the connected equipment. (Note: If piping is connected<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0548 - 9 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
to equipment located in basements and hangs from ceiling under occupied spaces, the<br />
first three hangers shall have 0.75” deflection for pipe sizes up to and including 3”, 1.5”<br />
deflection for larger pipe sizes up to and including 6”, and 2.5” deflection for pipe sizes<br />
larger than 6”.) All other hangers and mounts shall have a minimum steel spring<br />
deflection of 0.75”.) Hangers shall be located as close to the overhead structure as<br />
practical.<br />
B. Equipment Room Seals: All piping passing through equipment room walls, floors or<br />
ceilings shall be protected against sound leakage by means of an acoustical wall seal as<br />
described in Specification M.<br />
C. Riser Isolation: Risers shall be suspended from Specification E hangers or supported by<br />
Specification C mountings, with the piping anchored or guided with Specification N<br />
anchors. Steel spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75” except in those expansion<br />
locations where additional deflection is required to limit load changes to plus or minus<br />
25% of the initial load.<br />
D. Pipe guides shall consist of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated<br />
by a minimum 1/2” thickness of 60 durometer neoprene. The height of the guides shall<br />
be preset with a shear pin to allow vertical motion due to pipe expansion or contraction.<br />
Shear pin shall be removable and reinsertable to allow for selection of pipe movement.<br />
Guides shall be capable of ± 1-5/8” motion, or as required to meet specific location<br />
requirements. Pipe guides shall be type VSG as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.<br />
E. Duct Isolation: All discharge runs for a distance of 50 feet from the connected equipment<br />
shall be isolated from the building structure by means of Specification F hangers or<br />
Specification C floor supports. Spring deflection shall be a minimum of 0.75”.<br />
F. Flexible Pipe Connections: All equipment that is supported by or mounted on vibration<br />
isolators shall be piped with flexible connections. Specification “K” or Specification “L”<br />
flexible connections shall be installed parallel to the equipment shaft insofar as practical<br />
and on the equipment side of isolation valves.<br />
G. Equipment Isolation: All mechanical equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolators to<br />
prevent the transmission of vibration and mechanically transmitted sound to the building<br />
structure. Vibration isolators shall be selected in accordance with the weight distribution so<br />
as to produce reasonably uniform deflection. Isolator types shall be as noted on the<br />
equipment schedule below.<br />
EQUIPMENT VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE:<br />
(Not all types of equipment listed below are necessarily used on this project.)<br />
EQUIPMENT TYPE<br />
Air Handling Units – Floor-Mounted<br />
Air Handling Units – Structure-Hung<br />
Condensers/Condensing Units<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
ISOLATOR SPECIFICATION<br />
Mount Type B;<br />
Connector Type K*<br />
Hanger Type D;<br />
Connector Type K*<br />
Mount Type C;<br />
Connector Type K<br />
STATIC DEFLECTION<br />
(INCHES)<br />
0.75<br />
23 0548 - 10 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
Fan-Powered Boxes – Structure-Hung<br />
Floor-Mounted Fans<br />
Fan Heads and Axial or Centrifugal Fans<br />
(where air thrust exceeds 10% of equipment weight)<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
Hanger Type D;<br />
Connector Type K**<br />
Mount Type B***;<br />
Base Type G<br />
0.75<br />
1.50<br />
Thrust Restraint Type X 1.50<br />
Structure-Hung Fans Hanger Type D 0.75<br />
Floor-Mounted Pumps<br />
(Slab on Grade)<br />
Floor-Mounted Pumps<br />
Above/Below Occupied Spaces<br />
Structure-Hung Pumps<br />
Rooftop HVAC Units<br />
Unit Heaters<br />
* Omit if internal isolation is provided.<br />
** Omit for FPB without hydronic coil.<br />
*** Use type C mount for outdoor, wind-loaded installations.<br />
3.05 EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK:<br />
Mount Type A;<br />
Connector Type K<br />
Base Type J; Spring Type B;<br />
Connector Type K<br />
Hanger Type D<br />
Connector Type K<br />
Mount Type Y;<br />
Connector Type K<br />
Hanger Type D1;<br />
Connector Type K<br />
A. Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe installation of other work related to<br />
vibration isolation work, including work connected to vibration isolation work; and, after<br />
completion of other related work (but before equipment start-up), shall furnish written<br />
report to Engineer listing any observed inadequacies which could prevent proper operation<br />
and performance of vibration isolation work. Report shall cover, but not necessarily be<br />
limited to, the following:<br />
0.75<br />
1.50<br />
0.75<br />
0.75<br />
1. Equipment installations (performed as work of other sections) on vibration<br />
isolators.<br />
2. Piping connections, including flexible connections.<br />
3. Ductwork connections, including provisions for flexible connections.<br />
4. Passage of piping and ductwork, which is to be isolated, through walls and floors.<br />
B. Do not start up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected.<br />
3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely and that there is<br />
no dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short- circuit unit isolation.<br />
3.07 DEFLECTION MEASUREMENTS:<br />
23 0548 - 11 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
A. Upon completion of vibration isolation work, prepare report showing measured equipment<br />
deflections, theoretical floor deflection and isolation efficiency for each major item of<br />
equipment.<br />
3.08 QUIET OPERATION AND VIBRATION:<br />
A. Mechanical equipment provided under this contract shall operate under all load conditions<br />
without noise or vibration which is objectionable in the opinion of the Engineer. In the<br />
case of rotating machinery, noise or vibration noticeable outside of the room in which it is<br />
installed, or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room, will be considered objectionable.<br />
Noise or vibration conditions considered objectionable by the Engineer shall be corrected<br />
in an approved manner by the Contractor at his expense. Vibration control shall be<br />
accomplished by means of approved vibration isolators installed in a manner<br />
recommended by the manufacturer of the isolators.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 0548<br />
23 0548 - 12 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC<br />
CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 0553<br />
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Extent of mechanical identification work required by this Section is indicated on the<br />
drawings and/or specified in other Division 23 sections.<br />
B. Types of identification devices specified in this section include the following:<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
1. Painted Identification Materials<br />
2. Plastic Pipe Markers<br />
3. Plastic Tape<br />
4. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker<br />
5. Plastic Duct Markers<br />
6. Valve Tags<br />
7. Valve Schedule Frames<br />
8. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs<br />
9. Plastic Equipment Markers<br />
10. Plasticized Tags<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of identification<br />
devices of the types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in<br />
similar service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field,<br />
colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions<br />
for each identification material and device required.<br />
B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on<br />
8-1/2” x 11” bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as<br />
shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), size of valve, and variations for<br />
identification (if any). Only tag valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and<br />
similar special uses, such as valves to isolate individual system risers and individual floor<br />
branches, and building system shut-off valves. In addition to mounted copies of the valve<br />
schedules, furnish extra copies for Operating and Maintenance Manuals as specified in<br />
Division 23.<br />
23 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
B. Mechanical Identification:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Allen Systems, Inc.<br />
2. Brady (W.H.) Co., Signmark Div.<br />
3. Brimar Industries, Inc.<br />
4. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.<br />
5. Seton Name Plate Corp.<br />
6. PVC Specialties<br />
2.02 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:<br />
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for<br />
each application as referenced in other Division 23 sections. Where more than a single<br />
type is specified for an application, selection is at Installer's option; but provide single<br />
selection for each product category.<br />
2.03 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS:<br />
A. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications, with letter sizes<br />
generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping or to match existing<br />
size in existing building, but not less than 1-1/4” high letters for ductwork and not less<br />
than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions.<br />
B. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise<br />
indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.<br />
C. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise<br />
indicated, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors or match existing building standard<br />
identification.<br />
2.04 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS:<br />
A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid, snap-on, colorcoded<br />
pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.<br />
B. Insulation: Furnish 1” thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipe<br />
marker to be installed on uninsulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F<br />
(52°C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2” beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.<br />
C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6” (including insulation, if any), provide fullband<br />
pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one<br />
of the following methods:<br />
23 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.<br />
2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than<br />
3/4” wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2”.<br />
D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6” and larger (including insulation, if any), provide<br />
either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times the letter height<br />
(and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods:<br />
1. Steel spring or non-metallic fasteners.<br />
2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than<br />
1-1/2” wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3”.<br />
3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's<br />
standard stainless steel bands.<br />
E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled, shown, or to<br />
match existing building lettering nomenclature system, and abbreviate only as necessary<br />
for each application length.<br />
F. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally<br />
with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit<br />
of plastic.<br />
2.05 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS:<br />
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic duct markers.<br />
B. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.<br />
C. Nomenclature: Include the following:<br />
2.06 PLASTIC TAPE:<br />
1. Direction of airflow.<br />
2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.)<br />
3. Duct origin (from).<br />
4. Duct destination (to).<br />
5. Design cfm.<br />
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive)<br />
vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick.<br />
B. Width: Provide 1-1/2” wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including<br />
insulation, if any) of less than 6”, 2-1/2” wide tape for larger pipes.<br />
C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated.<br />
2.07 UNDERGROUND-TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKERS:<br />
A. General: Manufacturer’s standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic<br />
tape, intended for direct-burial service, not less than 6” wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape<br />
with printing which most accurately indicates type of service of buried pipe.<br />
23 0553 - 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
B. Provide multi-ply tape consisting of solid aluminum foil core between two layers of plastic<br />
tape.<br />
2.08 VALVE TAGS:<br />
A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gauge polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved<br />
piping system abbreviation in 1/4” high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2” high,<br />
and with 5/32” hole for fastener.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Provide 1-1/2” diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Fill tag engraving with black enamel.<br />
OR<br />
Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer’s standard 3/32” thick<br />
engraved plastic laminate valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high<br />
letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2” high, and with 5/32” hole for fastener.<br />
3. Provide 1-1/2” square black tags with white lettering, except as otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
4. Provide size, shape and color combination as specified or scheduled for each<br />
piping system.<br />
OR<br />
Plastic Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard solid plastic valve tags with<br />
printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16”<br />
high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8” high, and with<br />
5/32” hole for fastener.<br />
5. Provide 1-1/8” square white tags with black lettering.<br />
6. Provide size, shape and color combination as specified or scheduled for each<br />
piping system.<br />
B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or<br />
beaded type) and solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags<br />
to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose.<br />
C. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/16” thick engraved plastic<br />
laminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding to<br />
concealed valve. Include 1/8” center hole to allow attachment.<br />
2.09 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES:<br />
A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws for<br />
removable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extruded<br />
aluminum, with non-glare type sheet glass.<br />
2.10 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS:<br />
23 0553 - 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387,<br />
in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the<br />
sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise<br />
indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary<br />
because of substrate.<br />
B. Thickness: 1/8”, except as otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesive<br />
where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.<br />
2.11 PLASTICIZED TAGS:<br />
A. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-prevention<br />
tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4" x<br />
5-5/8”, with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed<br />
wording including large-size primary wording (such as DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT<br />
OPERATE).<br />
2.12 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS:<br />
A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanical<br />
identification work with corresponding designations shown, specified, scheduled and<br />
approved by the Owner/Engineer. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated<br />
and approved by the Owner/Engineer for proper identification and<br />
operation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.<br />
B. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified,<br />
provide identification which indicates individual system number as designated on the<br />
drawings or schedule as well as service.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS:<br />
A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation,<br />
painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces,<br />
install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to<br />
installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.<br />
3.02 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION:<br />
A. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork and duct access<br />
doors with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service<br />
and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides the most contrast with<br />
ductwork color). Identification in an existing building shall match the method which exists<br />
in the building.<br />
B. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed or concealed only by a removable<br />
ceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues into<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0553 - 5 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
concealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 50 ft. spacing<br />
along exposed runs.<br />
C. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork<br />
and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment), other maintenance and<br />
operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information.<br />
D. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similar<br />
concealment, plasticized tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs, at<br />
Installer's option.<br />
3.03 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION:<br />
A. General: Install pipe markers of the following type on each system indicated to receive<br />
identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow. Identification in an<br />
existing building shall match the method which exists in the building.<br />
1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this<br />
section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated<br />
pipes.<br />
OR<br />
Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle, and<br />
contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2” beyond<br />
ends of lettering.<br />
OR<br />
Stenciled markers, with lettering color complying with ANSI A13.1.<br />
OR<br />
Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous colorcoded<br />
painting of piping is provided.<br />
B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in<br />
occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels,<br />
plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations:<br />
1. Near each valve and control device.<br />
2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark<br />
each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.<br />
3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter nonaccessible<br />
enclosures.<br />
4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of<br />
concealed piping.<br />
5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.<br />
6. Spaced intermediately at a maximum spacing of 25 ft. along each piping run,<br />
except with spacing reduced to 15 ft. in congested areas of piping and equipment.<br />
7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings.<br />
23 0553 - 6 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
3.04 UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION:<br />
A. General: During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground piping system,<br />
install continuous underground type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at<br />
6” to 8” below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench<br />
and do not exceed an overall width of 16”, install single line marker.<br />
3.05 VALVE IDENTIFICATION:<br />
A. General: Provide valve tag on valves in each piping system. List each tagged valve in<br />
valve schedule for each piping system.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1. Building services main shut-off valves.<br />
2. Each individual system main shut-off valves.<br />
3. Each individual system riser shut-off valves.<br />
4. Each individual system floor shut-off valves.<br />
5. Each individual system major branch shut-off valves.<br />
B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in mechanical equipment rooms where<br />
directed by Architect/Owner/Engineer.<br />
C. Where more than one major mechanical equipment room is shown for the project, install<br />
mounted valve schedule in each major mechanical equipment room, and repeat only the<br />
main valves which are to be operated in conjunction with operations of more than a single<br />
mechanical equipment room.<br />
3.06 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION:<br />
A. General: Install minimum 2 inch x 4 inch, engraved plastic laminate equipment marker<br />
on each individual item of mechanical equipment. Provide signs for the following general<br />
categories of equipment:<br />
1. Main building systems control and operating valves, including safety devices and<br />
hazardous units such as gas outlets.<br />
2. Room thermostats, except gun tag labels are acceptable for room thermostats.<br />
3. Fuel-burning units including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills and absorption<br />
chillers.<br />
4. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers and similar motor-driven units.<br />
5. Heat exchangers, cooling towers, heat recovery units and similar equipment.<br />
6. Fans and blowers.<br />
7. HVAC units.<br />
8. Tanks and pressure vessels.<br />
9. Water treatment systems and similar equipment.<br />
B. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4" high lettering for name of unit.<br />
C. Text of Signs: In addition to the identified unit, inform operator of operational<br />
requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and<br />
improper operations.<br />
3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
23 0553 - 7 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device which has become visually<br />
blocked by work of this division or other divisions.<br />
B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices and glass frames of valve charts.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 0553<br />
23 0553 - 8 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING<br />
AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 0593<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC<br />
A. This section covers testing and balancing of environmental systems described herein and<br />
specified under Division 23. The testing and balancing of all environmental systems shall<br />
be the responsibility of one Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB) firm.<br />
1. Test, adjust and balance the following mechanical systems and the mechanical<br />
equipment associated with these systems:<br />
a. Air Side Systems and Equipment<br />
i. Supply/Return Air Systems<br />
ii. General Exhaust/Supply Fans<br />
iii. Air Handling Units<br />
iv. General Exhaust Systems<br />
v. Cabinet/Unit Heaters<br />
vi. Unit Ventilators/Furnaces/Packaged Air Conditioning Units<br />
b. Hydronic Systems and Equipment<br />
i. Heating/Chilled Water Systems<br />
ii. Condenser Water Systems and Equipment<br />
iii. Hydronic Coils<br />
iv. Radiators/Convectors<br />
v. Heat Exchangers<br />
vi. Hydronic Pumps<br />
vii. Heating Water Boilers<br />
c. Refrigeration Systems and Equipment<br />
i. Condensing Units (Air-Cooled)<br />
ii. Chillers<br />
iii. Cooling Towers<br />
iv. Evaporator Coils<br />
d. Gas-Fired Systems and Equipment<br />
i. General<br />
e. Electrical Components<br />
i. Electric Resistance Heating and Equipment<br />
ii. Manual and Magnetic Starters<br />
iii. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD’s)<br />
f. Control Systems and Equipment<br />
23 0593 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
i. General<br />
ii. TC Compressed Air Systems and Equipment<br />
g. Life Safety Systems and Equipment<br />
1.02 QUALIFICATIONS OF CONTRACTOR:<br />
i. Smoke Control Pressurization and Exhaust Systems<br />
ii. Fire/Smoke Dampers and Detection Systems<br />
iii. Emergency Generator Systems and Equipment<br />
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall procure the services of an independent testing and<br />
balancing agency specializing in the testing, adjusting and balancing of environmental<br />
systems to perform the above-mentioned work. An independent contractor is defined as<br />
an organization that is not engaged in engineering design and is not a division of a<br />
mechanical contracting entity which installs mechanical systems.<br />
B. The actual field work shall be performed by qualified technicians who are currently<br />
certified by the Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB), the National<br />
Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), or the Associated Air Balance Council (AABC).<br />
C. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall have a minimum of three (3) years experience in<br />
testing and balancing mechanical systems.<br />
1.03 APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR:<br />
A. Following are firms acceptable to perform the work:<br />
1. Air Right, Inc.<br />
2. Complete Mechanical Balancing, Inc.<br />
3. Controlled Air, Inc.<br />
4. Denver Test and Balance, Inc.<br />
5. Griffith Engineering Service<br />
6. JPG Engineering<br />
7. Midwest Engineering<br />
8. TAB Services, Inc.<br />
9. Western Test and Balance, Inc.<br />
1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS:<br />
A. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook; Systems Volume; Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.<br />
B. NEBB: "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental<br />
Systems."<br />
C. SMACNA: “HVAC Systems – Testing, Adjusting & Balancing.”<br />
1.05 PRELIMINARY SUBMITTALS:<br />
23 0593 - 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
A. Within ten (10) days of award of the contract, the Mechanical Contractor shall submit the<br />
name of the Test and Balance Contractor who will be performing the work. The submittal<br />
shall include a complete list of all technicians who will be performing the field work and<br />
include a photocopy of their current certification by either NEBB, AABC, or TABB. Only<br />
those technicians included in the submittal shall perform the work. The use of any<br />
personnel or staff to perform the work without prior approval of the Engineer, who are not<br />
included in the submittal, shall be grounds for rejecting the test and balance report and<br />
the project in whole.<br />
B. Meet all requirements of Section 230010 as applicable.<br />
C. Submit a list of all instrumentation to be used on this project, and include calibration<br />
dates. Submit calibration curves. If more than one instrument of a similar type is used, a<br />
comparison of individual readings should be made. The variation between instrument<br />
readings should not exceed plus or minus 5%.<br />
D. Prior to the start of any test and balance work of the mechanical system, the Contractor<br />
shall submit six (6) copies of a Preliminary Systematic Procedure. This shall include all<br />
preliminary information <strong>request</strong>ed in Part 3 of this Section.<br />
1.06 FINAL REPORTS:<br />
A. Refer to Division 1 for supplemental requirements.<br />
B. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall submit six (6) bound copies of the final testing<br />
and balancing report at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to substantial completion of<br />
project, unless noted otherwise in Division 1. Contents of report shall be per Part 3 of this<br />
Section.<br />
C. Meet all requirements of Section 230010 as applicable.<br />
D. If more than two reports are made by the Contractor, the Owner reserves the right to<br />
charge the Contractor for subsequent reviews by their consultants. Such extra fees shall be<br />
deducted from payments by the Owner to the Contractor.<br />
1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:<br />
A. Notify Contractor/Engineer/Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper<br />
completion of the test and balance work. Provide the Contractor/Architect/Engineer with a<br />
copy of the notification.<br />
B. Prepare a project schedule and coordinate with all related contractors. Schedule shall<br />
indicate critical path of the balancing process and shall incorporate both requirements of<br />
other contractors necessary to meet test and balance commitments and process flow of test<br />
and balance work. Coordinate with general and mechanical contractors, and insert<br />
critical steps into project master schedule. Mechanical, Electrical, Temperature Controls<br />
and Test & Balance Contractors are to coordinate efforts to start, test, and balance major<br />
components (i.e. chillers, boilers, etc.) at the same time, in order to avoid duplication of<br />
efforts.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0593 - 3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
2.01 BELTS, SHEAVES, IMPELLERS:<br />
A. Refer to specific equipment sections and Section 230010 for additional requirements.<br />
B. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor to<br />
supply correctly sized drive belts and sheaves. Impellers shall be trimmed or replaced by<br />
the Mechanical Contractor and shall be correctly resized and coordinated by the Testing &<br />
Balancing Contractor per the hydronics systems and equipment portion of this Section.<br />
C. The Test & Balance Contractor shall determine the fan belt and sheave replacement<br />
necessary for final balance condition at the specified air quantity when the VFD is<br />
operating in the bypass mode for final field conditions, without placing the motor over its<br />
nameplate amp rating. Coordinate VFD start-up with Section 15040 vendor.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES:<br />
A. Testing and balancing shall not begin until the system has been completed and is in full<br />
working order and the following project conditions have been determined suitable for start<br />
of work.<br />
1. Preliminary Testing & Balancing Contractor requirements shall be ascertained<br />
prior to the commencement of work through a review of the project plans and<br />
specifications. Testing and Balancing contractor to meet with Engineer prior to<br />
beginning work. In addition, visual observations at the site during construction<br />
shall be made to determine the location of required balancing devices and that<br />
they are installed properly in an accessible location for the need. Report in writing<br />
any deficiencies to the Contractor/Engineer/Architect immediately.<br />
2. Before any air balance work is done, check the system for duct leakage (obtain<br />
pressure test results), assure that filters are installed, verify that filters are changed<br />
if they are dirty, check for correct fan rotation, check for equipment vibration, and<br />
check automatic dampers for proper operation. All volume control dampers and<br />
outlets shall be wide open at this time.<br />
3. Before any hydronic, domestic water or applicable system balancing work is done,<br />
the systems shall be checked for plugged strainers, proper pump rotation, proper<br />
control valve installation and operation, air locks, proper system static pressure to<br />
assure a full system, and proper flow meter and check valve installation. All<br />
throttling devices and control valves shall be open at this time.<br />
4. Verify that systems do not exhibit excessive sound and/or vibration levels. Report<br />
in writing any deficiencies to the Contractor/Engineer/Architect immediately.<br />
B. Testing and balancing shall not begin until a Preliminary Systematic Procedure has been<br />
completed. This procedure shall be developed from manufacturers’ data, shop drawings,<br />
and construction documents and shall be submitted before the start of installation of the<br />
mechanical system. This procedure shall be coordinated with the Mechanical Contractor.<br />
Preparatory work includes the planning and scheduling of all TAB procedures, collecting<br />
necessary data, reviewing data, studying the systems to be balanced, recording the<br />
published data on the test report forms, and making preliminary field checks of the HVAC<br />
equipment and systems.<br />
C. Submit the following data for the Preliminary Systematic Procedure, bound in a 3-ring<br />
binder:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0593 - 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
1. Preliminary Testing and Balancing Schedule:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Prepare a project schedule. Schedule shall indicate critical path of the<br />
balancing process and shall incorporate both requirements of other<br />
contractors (including joint efforts) necessary to meet test and balance<br />
commitments and process flow of test and balance work. Coordinate with<br />
GC and insert critical steps into project master schedule.<br />
2. Data to be Procured:<br />
a. Fan and pump curves, including performance data.<br />
b. Manufacturer's performance data for all equipment to be balanced: Data<br />
shall include air and hydronic pressure differences, the direction of air<br />
and water flow, temperature differentials, capacities, operating<br />
temperatures and pressures, and limit of safety temperatures and<br />
pressures.<br />
c. Fan and pump motor nameplate data.<br />
d. Motor starters, including sizes, locations and thermal overload protection<br />
ratings.<br />
e. Drives: Sheave data, pitch diameters, belt sizes and quantities, limits of<br />
adjustment, types of belt guards, etc.<br />
f. Effective areas (K factors) for all air terminal devices for the velocitymeasuring<br />
instrument recommended. Also obtain air pattern adjustment<br />
and sound data.<br />
g. Manufacturer's data and test procedures for all air handling devices, such<br />
as variable air volume boxes, constant volume regulators, static pressure<br />
dampers, etc.<br />
h. Manufacturer's data for air pressure drop across louvers, filter banks,<br />
sound traps, remote coils and other devices in the air distribution system.<br />
Note whether louvers are provided with screening and whether filter<br />
pressure drop data is for clean, partially dirty, or dirty filters.<br />
i. Temperature Control Diagrams: Obtain necessary data required for TAB<br />
work.<br />
j. Assemble manufacturer's catalog data for all HVAC equipment, including<br />
pumps, air moving equipment and air terminal devices. This requirement<br />
is in addition to shop drawings and submittal data where possible. Only<br />
include performance data which pertains to the T&B work. <strong>Construction</strong><br />
technical data is not required.<br />
k. All data shall be compared to the information on the construction<br />
documents. Discrepancies shall be identified for review by the Engineer.<br />
All data shall be recorded in the design columns of NEBB report forms.<br />
3. System Schematic Drawings:<br />
a. Submit reduced drawings of each HVAC duct system. The test and<br />
balance contractor can obtain drawing files from MDP& Associates for<br />
development of these drawings.<br />
b. Submit similar drawings for extensive piping systems.<br />
c. For large buildings or where there is more than one system, submit a<br />
separate layout for each floor or for each system. Identify test locations,<br />
outlets, etc. on these drawings.<br />
d. All test locations, which include dampers, regulating devices, terminal<br />
units, supply outlets, return and exhaust inlets, etc., shall be numbered.<br />
23 0593 - 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
e. Indicate the sizes, velocities and flow (CFM or gpm) for main and branch<br />
circuits and ducts. Include outside air intakes, exhaust air and relief air<br />
louvers.<br />
f. For rapid identification and for reporting purposes, all outlets shall be<br />
numbered. The same applies to fan-coil and/or heating/cooling units in<br />
hydronic systems.<br />
g. Clearly indicate thermostat locations and other special conditions needed<br />
by the TAB team in the field.<br />
4. Report Forms:<br />
a. Report forms shall be standard NEBB forms. Generate custom forms that<br />
contain the information required by this Section when a standard NEBB<br />
form does not exist for certain types of equipment. All design column<br />
spaces shall be fully filled out for this submittal. When additional<br />
information is required by this Section, it shall be written in on the NEBB<br />
form.<br />
b. If terminal airflows are to be determined by velocity readings, calculate<br />
and submit the terminal velocities using the manufacturer's K factors.<br />
c. Submit locations where pitot traverses of duct mains and branches are to<br />
be made. Determine the number of readings, calculate velocities and set<br />
up the duct pitot traverse test reports.<br />
3.02 GENERAL SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES:<br />
A. Balance all air and water flows at terminals to within +10% to –5% of design flow<br />
quantities. Notify Contractor/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper<br />
completion of the test and balance work. Provide the Contractor/Architect/Engineer with a<br />
copy of the notification.<br />
B. Pressure relationships indicated on drawings shall take priority over air quantities.<br />
C. Mark equipment settings with paint, including damper control positions, balancing cocks,<br />
circuit setters, valve indicators, fan speed control settings and similar controls and devices,<br />
to show final settings at completion of test-adjust-balance work.<br />
D. Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test<br />
purposes, in a manner recommend by the original installer.<br />
E. Measure, adjust and report equipment running motor amps and power factor, KW, rated<br />
motor amperage, listed motor power factor, voltage, and all other nameplate data.<br />
Perform these measurements for all equipment operational modes.<br />
F. Check and adjust equipment belt tensioning.<br />
G. Check keyway and setscrew tightness. Report any loose screws and notify Mechanical<br />
Contractor prior to equipment balancing.<br />
H. Record and include in report all equipment nameplate data.<br />
I. Verify that all equipment safety and operating controls are in place, tested, adjusted and<br />
set prior to balancing.<br />
23 0593 - 6 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
J. Verify that manufacturer start-up has occurred per specification prior to balancing.<br />
3.03 AIR SIDE SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT PROCEDURES:<br />
A. In addition to the procedures identified under each specific heading below, provide<br />
general data required by 3.02 above.<br />
B. Filters shall be restricted to increase pressure drop to 50% of span between initial pressure<br />
drop and final recommended pressure drop for setting final airflows for fans. Check fan<br />
motor amps with clean filters and simulated loaded filters, and report for each piece of<br />
equipment. Equipment shall be supplied with clean filters upon completion of balancing.<br />
Balance and report air quantities.<br />
C. Supply/Return Air Systems:<br />
1. Balance and report supply and return diffuser/grille quantities. Air diffusion<br />
patterns shall be set as noted on drawings and to minimize objectionable drafts<br />
and noise.<br />
2. Provide full pitot traverses in duct mains downstream of supply fans, upstream of<br />
return fans, and in each zone duct downstream of a multizone unit. For VAV<br />
systems, perform these at the system diversity condition (if any). Balance and<br />
report air quantities.<br />
3. Provide full pitot traverses at each air terminal or duct coil. For VAV systems,<br />
perform these at zone maximum air condition. Balance and report air quantities.<br />
4. Report design air device inlet and outlet sizes, actual inlet and outlet sizes, and<br />
design and actual velocities through the orifice for each terminal in the system.<br />
5. Balance and report the above measurements in all system operational modes:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Minimum outside air and 100% outside air economizer modes.<br />
b. VAV maximum zone air condition and system diversity condition.<br />
c. Unoccupied mode.<br />
d. Both speeds of two-speed fan system.<br />
e. VFD bypass mode and full system demand.<br />
D. General Exhaust/Supply Fans:<br />
1. Adjust CFM to system requirements. For belt drive, include sheave and belt<br />
exchange to deliver airflow within limits of installed motor horsepower and<br />
mechanical stress limits of the fan. Determine the limiting fan tip speed before<br />
increasing RPM. Final fan speed setting shall allow for filter loading (as<br />
applicable) and shall establish proper duct pressures for operation of zone CFM<br />
regulators. For direct drive fans with speed taps, set fan speed on tap which most<br />
closely approaches design CFM, and then adjust the speed control. After<br />
adjustment, check fan’s ability to restart after powering down. Increase setting if<br />
required for proper starting.<br />
2. Measure and report static pressures upstream and downstream of all fans.<br />
3. Measure and report fan RPM.<br />
4. Report design fan inlet and outlet sizes, actual inlet and outlet sizes, and design<br />
and actual velocities through the orifice.<br />
E. Air Handling Units:<br />
23 0593 - 7 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
1. On outdoor units, verify that positively or negatively pressurized curbs are free of<br />
leaks.<br />
2. For units with integral outside air intake and relief dampers, measure, adjust, set<br />
and report outside air, return air and relief air quantities. Perform this as specified<br />
under supply air systems portions of this Section.<br />
3. Balance and report supply and return fan CFM’s, as well as upstream and<br />
downstream static pressures for each.<br />
4. Measure and report static pressure upstream and downstream of all AHU<br />
components such as coils, filters (clean and simulated dirty), dampers, etc.<br />
5. After system and fan balance is complete, perform pitot traverses on all coils in<br />
100% heating and cooling modes.<br />
6. Units with economizers shall have all measurements performed and reported at<br />
minimum outside air, a 50/50% mixed air condition, and 100% outside air.<br />
7. Units with operational modes for smoke evacuation and/or pressurization shall<br />
have all measurements performed and reported for all modes.<br />
8. Balance variable air volume AHU fans for system design diversity. Supply and<br />
return fan static pressures shall be optimized for VAV system terminal device<br />
pressure requirements. Report fan, motor and VFD information as previously<br />
indicated. Verify that an overload condition does not exist when all system VAV<br />
boxes are 100% open.<br />
9. Balance all air handling unit coils, and report per hydronic, gas-fired, steam or<br />
refrigeration equipment portions of this Section.<br />
10. Report design fan inlet and outlet sizes, actual inlet and outlet sizes, and design<br />
and actual velocities through the orifice.<br />
11. Balance and report all temperatures of air side and hydronic systems in normal<br />
operating modes.<br />
12. Measure, adjust, set, balance and report outside air, return air and exhaust/relief<br />
air quantities for all air handling systems.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Air quantities shall be determined by pitot traverse/direct airflow<br />
measuring procedures wherever possible.<br />
b. Where duct/inlet conditions do not allow for accurate direct measurement<br />
of outside air, the following method shall be used:<br />
Outside Air CFM = Supply Fan Total CFM - Return Fan Total CFM<br />
c. In addition to the direct measuring of airflow quantities, measure and<br />
record outside air, return air and mixed air temperatures; determine<br />
thermal/mass energy balance; and provide calculations to verify<br />
measured airflow quantities. Adjusting and setting the outside air quantity<br />
as a percentage of damper position will not be acceptable.<br />
F. General Exhaust Systems:<br />
1. Balance and report exhaust grille quantities. Report objectionable noise.<br />
2. Provide full pitot traverses at each individual exhaust riser and at each exhaust fan.<br />
Balance and report.<br />
3. Report design air device inlet and outlet sizes, actual inlet and outlet sizes, and<br />
design and actual velocities through the orifice for each terminal in the system.<br />
G. Cabinet/Unit Heaters:<br />
1. Balance and report entering and leaving air temperatures. Report airflow.<br />
2. Balance all coils per hydronic, gas-fired or steam equipment portions of this<br />
Section.<br />
23 0593 - 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
H. Unit Ventilators/Furnaces/Packaged Air Conditioning Units:<br />
1. Report static pressure across each unit component.<br />
2. Balance and report supply air, return air and outside air quantities.<br />
3. Report mixed air temperature, and balance coils per hydronic, steam, electric<br />
resistance, gas-fired or refrigeration portions of this Section.<br />
3.04 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT:<br />
A. Heating/Chilled Water Systems:<br />
1. Hydronic Systems With Meters: The system shall be balanced proportionally using<br />
the flow meters. On completion of the balance, the following information shall be<br />
recorded in the report: Flow meter size and brand, required flow rate and<br />
pressure drop, valve settings on meters with a readable scale, and flow rate in<br />
both full coil flow and full bypass modes. Contractor shall verify that the meters<br />
are installed per the manufacturer's recommendations and shall notify the<br />
Mechanical Contractor of any deficiencies before utilizing meter.<br />
2. Hydronic Systems Without Meters (thermal or terminal rated pressure drop<br />
balance): The system shall be balanced proportionally to the terminal ratings.<br />
On completion of the balance, the following information shall be recorded in the<br />
report: Design entering and leaving water temperatures/pressures, and final<br />
balanced entering and leaving water temperatures/pressures.<br />
3. For 3-way valve terminals/heat exchangers, set bypass flow to equal coil flow.<br />
4. For primary/secondary systems, set crossover/bridle to have constant flow at all<br />
conditions.<br />
5. Sample chilled and heating water and report on freeze and burst temperatures of<br />
the glycol water solution. Report gylcol percentage.<br />
6. Perform similar operations for hydronic heat reclaim systems.<br />
B. Condenser Water Systems and Equipment:<br />
1. Measure and record system static pressure with pumps off.<br />
2. Where 3-way bypass is used to control condenser water temperature, set the<br />
control valve pressure value to equal tower pressure drop in full bypass mode.<br />
3. Measure, set and record system gpm at all flow measurement stations.<br />
C. Hydronic Coils:<br />
1. Balance, measure and report inlet and outlet air temperatures for cooling and/or<br />
heating design air quantities.<br />
2. Balance, measure and report coil water flow and inlet and outlet water pressures<br />
and temperatures.<br />
3. Evaporative cooling coils: Measure and report inlet and outlet wet bulb and dry<br />
bulb temperatures. Measure and report inlet and outlet pressures.<br />
4. Calculate and report face velocities across chilled water and evaporative cooling<br />
coils.<br />
D. Radiators and Convectors:<br />
1. Balance, measure and report gpm, inlet temperature and outlet<br />
temperature/pressure at full heating.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0593 - 9 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
E. Heat Exchangers:<br />
1. Balance, measure and report water flow for full heating.<br />
2. Report inlet and outlet water pressures and temperatures for full heating.<br />
3. For steam-to-water heat exchangers, see steam equipment portion of this Section<br />
for additional requirements.<br />
F. Hydronic Pumps:<br />
1. Adjust and balance pumps to provide design system flow rate and design flow to<br />
most remote system location. Trim or replace impellers as necessary to achieve<br />
this. Do not induce false head to achieve balance results without the prior<br />
approval of the Engineer. See Part 2 "Products" of this Section.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Prior to trimming of impellers, notify the Architect, Contractor, or Engineer<br />
in writing of performance of pumps with and without false head induced.<br />
2. Report impeller size, flow rate, inlet and outlet water pressures, and pump shut-off<br />
head. Provide pump curve and operating point in final report. Include<br />
compensations for temperature and glycol percentage.<br />
G. Heating Water Boilers:<br />
1. Verify that the boiler has been properly cleaned and flushed and that the burner is<br />
operating properly prior to balancing.<br />
2. Check and report on proper operation of boiler feed pumps.<br />
3. Confirm that automatic and manual air vents work properly. Vent system as<br />
necessary.<br />
4. Balance, measure and report boiler water flow rate and inlet and outlet<br />
temperatures and pressures.<br />
5. Confirm that temperature and pressure safety relief valves are located properly<br />
and in working order.<br />
6. Verify proper operation of emergency power OFF switches.<br />
3.05 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT:<br />
A. Condensing Units (Air-Cooled):<br />
1. Measure and report ambient temperature at installed location (e.g. roof),<br />
refrigerant suction and discharge pressures, oil pressure, compressor and fan<br />
KW’s, and compressor and fan amps.<br />
2. Condensing units integral to the air moving equipment shall be measured at<br />
minimum outside air.<br />
3. Perform all measurements at all stages of cooling.<br />
B. Chillers:<br />
1. Measure, balance and report inlet and outlet chilled water temperatures and<br />
pressures, ambient temperature, water flow rate, oil pressure, refrigerant suction<br />
and discharge pressures, compressor and fan KW, and compressor and fan<br />
amps.<br />
2. Verify proper operation of emergency power OFF switches and refrigerant sensors.<br />
3. Perform all measurements at all stages of cooling.<br />
23 0593 - 10 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
4. Coordinate balance process with equipment manufacturer start-up representative.<br />
C. Cooling Towers:<br />
1. Measure and report tower entering and leaving air wet bulb temperatures.<br />
Compare entering wet bulb temperature against ambient wet bulb temperature to<br />
verify recirculation is not taking place. Report.<br />
2. Measure and report entering and leaving water temperatures. Report ambient wet<br />
bulb temperature that corresponds with these measurements.<br />
3. Measure, balance and report water flow rate.<br />
D. Evaporator Coils:<br />
1. Measure and report temperatures upstream and downstream of evaporator coils<br />
at all stages of cooling at all design air quantities. Calculate and report coil face<br />
velocities.<br />
3.06 GAS-FIRED SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT:<br />
A. General.<br />
1. Record gas pressures downstream of each pressure-reducing valve. Verify that<br />
pressures match those on construction documents, and report.<br />
2. Measure and report flue temperature at all stages of heating.<br />
3. Measure and report temperatures upstream and downstream of gas-fired heat<br />
exchangers at all stages of heating at all design air quantities.<br />
4. Observe and report operation of all radiant gas-fired heaters, at all stages of<br />
heating.<br />
5. Record fan data.<br />
3.07 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ASSOCIATED WITH MECHANICAL SYSTEMS:<br />
A. Electric Resistance Heating Systems and Equipment:<br />
1. Measure full load amperage at full heating and design CFM, and report.<br />
2. Electric heaters in an air stream shall have entering and leaving air temperatures<br />
measured and reported for all stages of heating.<br />
B. Manual and Magnetic Starters:<br />
1. Check all new and existing thermal overloads. Identify improperly protected<br />
equipment in report. Furnish and exchange thermals as required for proper<br />
motor protection.<br />
2. Motor Control Center Magnetic Starters: Check for correct sizing. Notify Electrical<br />
Contractor of discrepancies.<br />
3. Two-speed Starters: In addition to the above, set time delay between change of<br />
speeds for proper operation.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Verify that windings of motor and starter are compatible prior to starting<br />
any equipment.<br />
C. Variable Frequency Drives:<br />
23 0593 - 11 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
1. Coordinate balance process with equipment manufacturer start-up representative.<br />
2. Record nameplate data.<br />
3. Record motor overload setting.<br />
4. Record full load amps.<br />
3.08 CONTROL SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT:<br />
A. General.<br />
1. Operate all temperature control systems with the Temperature Control<br />
Contractor's representative present for proper sequence of operation. Be<br />
responsible for calibration of flow measurement devices used as input to the<br />
temperature control system. All air system flow measurement stations including<br />
VAV terminals shall be calibrated against a pitot tube traverse or air diffuser<br />
capture hood. Balancing Contractor shall assure accuracy of all flow<br />
measurement devices or shall report their failure to be accurate.<br />
2. Work with the Controls Contractor to set minimum outside air damper positions.<br />
3. Work with the Controls Contractor to optimize VAV duct static pressure, VFD pump<br />
hydronic system pressure differential, and building pressure.<br />
3.09 LIFE SAFETY SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT:<br />
A. Smoke Control Pressurization and Exhaust Systems:<br />
1. Balance and report measurements required by Section 3.03 in this operational<br />
mode.<br />
2. Perform smoke pressurization/exhaust tests for all zones. Doors shall be<br />
positioned to simulate normal conditions.<br />
3. Coordinate with the Fire Department/Authority Having Jurisdiction, Owner and<br />
Engineer for witnessing of smoke test.<br />
4. Coordinate with the Fire Department/Authority Having Jurisdiction for any<br />
additional testing requirements. Complete and submit all documentation required<br />
by Fire Department/Authority Having Jurisdiction for final acceptance.<br />
B. Fire/Smoke Dampers and Detection Systems:<br />
1. Verify that each fire/smoke damper closes when the associated duct or space<br />
detector is tripped. Verify that air handlers shut down and outside air dampers<br />
close as dictated by the control sequence.<br />
2. Verify that air supply units shut down when smoke is detected by the associated<br />
duct detector. Verify that outside air dampers and system fire/smoke dampers<br />
close as dictated by the control sequence.<br />
3. Report any detectors or dampers that are malfunctioning. Report any<br />
discrepancies from the control sequence.<br />
C. Emergency Generator Systems and Equipment:<br />
1. For remote radiators, measure and report steady state radiator system flow rate,<br />
supply water temperature and return water temperature.<br />
2. Measure and report generator room steady state temperature with generator and<br />
room ventilation system running. Report outside air temperature at time of test.<br />
3. Record pressure relationship of generator room to adjacent spaces and to outside.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0593 - 12 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
3.10 REPORT OF WORK:<br />
4. Verify correct sequence of operation of all intake and discharge dampers,<br />
supply/exhaust fans, etc.<br />
A. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall submit six (6) bound copies of the final testing<br />
and balancing report at least fifteen (15) calendar days prior to the date for which the<br />
Mechanical Contractor <strong>request</strong>s final inspection.<br />
B. A complete reduced set of mechanical contract drawings (showing each system) shall be<br />
included in the report, with all equipment, flow measuring devices, terminals (inlets,<br />
outlets, coils, fan-coil units, schedules, etc.) clearly marked and all equipment designated.<br />
The Test and Balance Contractor can obtain drawing files from MDP& Associates for<br />
development of these drawings. These drawings shall be developed from the system<br />
schematic drawings submitted in the Preliminary Systematic Procedures.<br />
C. Data shall be reported per Part 3 of this Section on standard NEBB forms. Generate<br />
custom forms that contain the information required by this Section when a standard NEBB<br />
form does not exist for certain types of equipment. All NEBB forms shall be fully filled out<br />
for this report. When additional information is required by this Section, it shall be<br />
provided. Report forms with design columns filled out shall be used from the Preliminary<br />
Systematic Procedure report submitted previously.<br />
D. The report shall include a list of all equipment used in the testing and balancing work.<br />
This list shall closely resemble the list submitted with the Preliminary Systematic Procedures<br />
report, with any discrepancies accounted for.<br />
E. Report systems for excessive sound and vibration per the sound and vibration inspection<br />
and testing portions of this specification.<br />
F. This project will not be considered substantially complete until a satisfactory report is<br />
received. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall respond to and correct all deficiencies<br />
within seven (7) days of receiving the Engineer's written review of the balancing report.<br />
Failure to comply will result in holding retainage of the final payment until all items have<br />
been corrected to the satisfaction of the Engineer.<br />
G. The report shall be signed by the supervising Registered Professional Engineer and affixed<br />
with his registration stamp, signed and dated in accordance with state law.<br />
3.11 GUARANTEE OF WORK:<br />
A. The Testing & Balancing Contractor shall guarantee the accuracy of the testing and<br />
balancing for a period of 90 days from the date of final acceptance of the test and<br />
balance report. During this period, the Testing & Balancing Contractor shall make<br />
personnel available at no cost to the Owner to correct deficiencies that may become<br />
apparent in the system balance.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 0593<br />
23 0593 - 13 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND<br />
BALANCING FOR HVAC
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 0713<br />
MECHANICAL INSULATION<br />
A. The work covered by this Specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment,<br />
materials, accessories, and performance of all operations necessary for the installation of<br />
all insulation on all hot and cold surfaces of plumbing, piping, space heating and air<br />
conditioning systems in strict accordance with the specifications and applicable drawings.<br />
B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following:<br />
1. Piping System Insulation:<br />
a. Fiberglass.<br />
b. Cellular Glass.<br />
c. Calcium Silicate.<br />
d. Thermal Ceramic.<br />
2. Ductwork System Insulation:<br />
a. Fiberglass.<br />
b. Calcium Silicate<br />
3. Equipment Insulation:<br />
a. Fiberglass.<br />
b. Calcium Silicate.<br />
c. 25/50 Rated Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric.<br />
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for requirements related to protection saddles,<br />
protection shields, thermal hanger shields, mechanical identification, and duct linings,<br />
which are not part of the work of this section.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical<br />
insulation products and systems, of the types and sizes required, whose products have<br />
been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.<br />
B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on<br />
projects with mechanical insulation. All insulation shall be installed per manufacturer’s<br />
recommendations by skilled workmen regularly engaged in this type of work.<br />
C. Furnish insulation systems to the project site bearing the manufacturer’s label with product<br />
identification.<br />
23 0713 - 1 MECHANICAL INSULATION
1.03 FIRE HAZARD RATING:<br />
A. All insulation products (including insulation, jacket, and adhesive used to adhere the jacket<br />
to the insulation) shall have composite Fire and Smoke Hazard ratings, as tested under<br />
procedures defined by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 723, not exceeding:<br />
Flame Spread 25<br />
Smoke Developed 50<br />
B. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements and cloth for fittings shall have the same<br />
component ratings as listed above. Paper laminate jackets shall be permanently fire and<br />
smoke resistant. Chemicals used for treating paper in jacket laminates shall not be water<br />
soluble and shall be unaffected by water and humidity.<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, installation instructions and<br />
maintenance requirements for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule<br />
showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, density, and furnished<br />
accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. Submit detailed product<br />
information and installation information for all jacketing systems specified in this section.<br />
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with<br />
manufacturer's stamp or label affixed, showing fire hazard indexes of products.<br />
1.06 PROTECTION:<br />
A. Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical, or mechanical damage before, during, and<br />
after installation. Any such insulation or covering damaged prior to final acceptance of<br />
the work shall be satisfactorily replaced.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
1. Mechanical Insulation: Johns Manville; Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.;<br />
CertainTeed Corp.; Knauf Fiberglass; Manson; Armstrong World Industries Inc.;<br />
Pittsburgh Corning Corp.; PABCO, Inc.; Rubatex Corp.<br />
2. Jacketing & Covering Products: Childers; Ceel-Co; Zeston; Alpha Associates, Inc.<br />
2.02 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS:<br />
A. Specification “A”, Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C-547, Class I or Class II unless<br />
otherwise indicated. “k” factor shall be maximum of 0.24 at 75° F mean temperature.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0713 - 2 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Insulation shall have jacket with tensile strength of 35 lbs/in and factory applied vapor<br />
barrier jacket with permeability of 0.02 perm with adhesive self-sealing lap joint.<br />
B. Specification “B”, Cellular Glass Piping Insulation: ASTM C-552, Type II, Class 2. “k”<br />
factor shall be maximum of 0.29 at 75° F mean temperature.<br />
C. Specification “C”, Calcium Silicate Piping Insulation: ASTM C-533, Type I. “k” factor shall<br />
be maximum of 0.45 at 500° F mean temperature, compression strength of 200 psi for<br />
5% compression, transverse strength of 200 psi for 5% compression, and minimum<br />
flexural strength of 60 psi.<br />
D. Specification “D”, Thermal Ceramic Insulation: “k” factor shall be a maximum of 1.5 at<br />
1500° F mean temperature, 2000° F temperature limit.<br />
E. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C-921, Type I for piping with temperatures below<br />
ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all<br />
piping at Installers option.<br />
1. Fitting Covers: UV-resistant PVC, premolded, with maximum flame spread rating<br />
of 25 and maximum smoke developed rating of 50. Use PVC tape for cold<br />
systems, serrated tacks or PVC tape for hot systems.<br />
2. Aluminum Jacketing: Manufactured from T3003 (or T5005) H14 to H19<br />
aluminum alloy with 3/16” corrugations, and having a factory-attached 1 mil thick<br />
polyethylene moisture barrier continuously laminated across the full width of the<br />
jacketing. Jacketing shall be .016” thick minimum. Provide matching factoryfabricated<br />
covers for 90° and 45° elbows, tee fittings, flange fittings, valve bodies,<br />
blind ends, reducers and other fittings as necessary to make the covering system<br />
complete, waterproof and weatherproof.<br />
3. Cloth Jacketing Material: Not less than 8 oz. per square yard, with adhesives,<br />
cement and sealer as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the intended<br />
application. PVC premolded fitting covers shall not be provided.<br />
F. Piping Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, cements and similar<br />
accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the applications indicated.<br />
G. Piping Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, sealers, protective finishes and similar<br />
compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the applications indicated,<br />
and additional finishes as specified.<br />
2.03 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS:<br />
A. Specification “A”, Rigid Fiberglass Insulation Board, 2” thick: ASTM C-612, Class 1, 450°F<br />
temperature limit, density of 3 lbs. per cu. ft. "k" value shall be maximum of 0.23 at 75°F<br />
mean temperature, facing of 0.7 mil foil reinforced with glass mesh and laminated to 40<br />
lb kraft, with factory applied vapor barrier facing.<br />
B. Specification “B”, Round Surface Semi-Rigid Fiberglass Insulation, 1-1/2” thick: ATSM C-<br />
612, Class 1, 450°F temperature limit, 3 lbs. per cu. ft. density, "k" value of 0.25<br />
maximum at 75° F mean temperature and foil-skrim-kraft facing. Orientation of fibers<br />
shall be perpendicular to facing to facilitate application on round surfaces.<br />
C. Specification “C”, Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation, 1-1/2” thick, factory applied:<br />
ASTM C-553, Type I, 1.0 lb. per cu. ft. density. “k” value shall be maximum of 0.25 at<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0713 - 3 MECHANICAL INSULATION
75° F mean temperature, 250° F temperature limit, vapor transmission rating not to<br />
exceed 0.02 perm, facing of 0.7 mil foil reinforced with glass mesh and laminated to 40<br />
lb kraft, with factory applied vapor barrier facing.<br />
D. Specification “D”, 3” thick calcium silicate: ASTM C-534, Type I.<br />
E. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner<br />
angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the<br />
applications indicated.<br />
F. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers,<br />
protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for<br />
the applications indicated.<br />
2.04 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS:<br />
A. Specification “A”, Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-612, Class 2. “k” factor<br />
shall be a maximum of 0.28 at 200° F mean temperature, 6 lbs. per cu. ft. density, 450° F<br />
temperature limit.<br />
B. Specification “B”, Rigid Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-612, Class 2. “k” factor<br />
shall be a maximum of 0.28 at 200° F mean temperature, 6 lbs.per cu. ft. density, 450° F<br />
temperature limit. The insulation shall have factory applied FSK vapor barrier facing<br />
laminate of aluminum foil and kraft paper with reinforced fiberglass scrim.<br />
C. Specification “C”, Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-553, Type I, 1.5 lb.<br />
per cu. ft. density. “k” factor shall be a maximum of 0.45 at 250° F mean temperature,<br />
450° F temperature limit.<br />
D. Specification “D”, Calcium Silicate Equipment Insulation: ASTM C-533, Type I, block-type.<br />
“k” factor shall be a maximum of 0.87 at 1000° F mean temperature, compression<br />
strength of 200 psi for 5% compression, and minimum transverse strength 60 psi.<br />
E. Specification “E”, Flexible Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation: ASTM C-534, Type I. “k”<br />
value shall be a maximum of 0.27 at 75° F mean temperature, 220° F temperature limit,<br />
and water vapor permeability of 0.10 perm or less.<br />
F. Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide presized glass cloth jacketing<br />
material, not less than 7.8 ounces per square yard, or metal jacket at Installer's option,<br />
except as otherwise indicated.<br />
G. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics and<br />
protective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the applications<br />
indicated.<br />
H. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape, corner<br />
angles, anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for the<br />
applications indicated.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0713 - 4 MECHANICAL INSULATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do<br />
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner<br />
acceptable to Installer.<br />
B. Workmanship shall be first class and of the highest quality. Poor installation or<br />
unacceptable appearance, as determined by the Engineer, shall be due cause to reject the<br />
entire project in whole, and retainage will be withheld until corrective action is completed<br />
to the Engineer's satisfaction.<br />
3.02 PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION:<br />
A. All portions of the following piping systems shall be insulated with Specification “A”<br />
Fiberglass Piping Insulation. See Table 1 for minimum insulation thicknesses required.<br />
1. Piping systems to be insulated:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. HVAC chilled water supply and return.<br />
b. Space heating supply and return.<br />
c. Steam and condensate lines.<br />
d. Cooling tower/condenser water supply to heat exchangers (where below<br />
60°F).<br />
e. Cooling tower water piping exposed to weather.<br />
f. Cooling tower make-up water piping exposed to weather.<br />
g. Refrigerant suction and hot gas lines.<br />
h. Fire protection piping exposed to weather.<br />
2. Piping Systems on which insulation is not required:<br />
Piping System Type<br />
HVAC chilled water supply and<br />
return.<br />
a. Flexible connectors, air chambers, strainer and check valve bodies, drain<br />
lines from water coolers, condensate lines, balancing cocks and flow<br />
regulators located in conditioned spaces maintained above 50°F (chilled<br />
water systems not included).<br />
b. Fire protection piping within conditioned spaces.<br />
c. Heating water piping within radiation enclosures.<br />
d. Chilled water piping within equipment such as air handling units and fancoil<br />
units, provided piping is located over drain pan and/or sloped to<br />
drain location over drain pan. (Rooftop units and other units exposed to<br />
weather are not included.)<br />
e. Indoor condenser/cooling tower water piping (where above 60°F and not<br />
associated with a heat exchanger).<br />
Table 1<br />
Piping Insulation Schedule<br />
Minimum Insulation Thickness (in.) for Pipe Sizes<br />
up to 1" 1-1/4"- 2" 2-1/2"- 4” 5"- 6" 8" & up<br />
1 1 1.5 2 2<br />
23 0713 - 5 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Space heating supply and return. 1 1 1.5 2 2.5<br />
Steam and condensate lines. 2 3 3 4 4<br />
Cooling tower/condenser water<br />
supply to heat exchangers<br />
(where below 60°F).<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1 1 1 1 1<br />
Cooling tower water piping<br />
exposed to weather.<br />
2 2 2 2 2<br />
Cooling tower make-up water<br />
piping exposed to weather.<br />
2 2 2 2 2<br />
Refrigerant suction and hot gas<br />
lines.<br />
1 1 1 1 1<br />
Fire protection piping exposed to<br />
weather.<br />
2 2 2 2 2<br />
Note: For any piping not noted above to be exposed to outdoor ambient<br />
temperatures, increase insulation thickness by 0.5 inches where installed in such<br />
exposed locations.<br />
B. All portions of Exhaust Piping for emergency generators and fire pumps, including fittings<br />
and silencers, shall be insulated as follows:<br />
1. For temperatures up to 1200 deg. F, provide 4” thick calcium silicate insulation,<br />
Specification “C”.<br />
2. For temperatures above 1200 deg. F, provide 4” thick thermal ceramic insulation,<br />
Specification “D”.<br />
3.03 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION:<br />
A. Ductwork on which insulation is not required:<br />
1. Fibrous glass ductwork.<br />
2. Lined ductwork.<br />
3. Exhaust air ductwork, except as specifically noted on drawings.<br />
B. Insulate each ductwork system specified in Table 2 with the type and thickness of insulation shown; omit<br />
insulation where ductwork is specified to be lined.<br />
Table 2<br />
Ductwork Insulation Schedule<br />
System Specification Vapor Seal Required<br />
HVAC Supply – concealed C Yes<br />
HVAC Return – concealed C No<br />
23 0713 - 6 MECHANICAL INSULATION
HVAC Supply – exposed to<br />
view<br />
HVAC Return – exposed to<br />
view<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
N/A N/A<br />
N/A N/A<br />
Outside air intakes A Yes<br />
Supply and Return ducts<br />
exposed to weather<br />
Kitchen hood and range<br />
exhaust ducts.<br />
3.04 EQUIPMENT INSULATION:<br />
A Yes<br />
D No<br />
A. Insulate equipment specified in Table 3 with the type and thickness of insulation shown:<br />
Table 3<br />
Equipment Insulation Schedule<br />
Item Specification Thickness<br />
Chillers, pumps, tanks,<br />
and all cold<br />
equipment not factory<br />
insulated.<br />
Cold water storage<br />
tanks<br />
Vapor Seal<br />
Required<br />
B 2" Yes<br />
B 2" Yes<br />
Air separators B 2"<br />
Boilers not factory<br />
insulated<br />
Hot water storage<br />
tanks<br />
Yes (only on chilled<br />
water)<br />
A 2" No<br />
A 2" No<br />
Heat exchangers A 3" No<br />
Condensate receivers A 2" No<br />
Condensate pumps A 2" No<br />
23 0713 - 7 MECHANICAL INSULATION
Flash tanks A 2" No<br />
Single wall breeching<br />
and stacks<br />
3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
D 4" No<br />
A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions<br />
and in accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that insulation serves its<br />
intended purpose.<br />
B. Install insulation on piping systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, testing, and<br />
acceptance of tests.<br />
C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of<br />
piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use<br />
cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.<br />
D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to<br />
ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.<br />
E. Where factory premolded, one-piece, PVC insulated fitting covers are to be used, the<br />
proper factory precut insulation shall be applied to the fitting using two layers for pipe<br />
temperatures above 250°F or below 35°F, and single-layer insulation for pipe<br />
temperatures between 35°F and 250°F. The ends of the insulation shall be tucked snugly<br />
into the throat of the fitting and the edges adjacent to the pipe covering, tufted and tucked<br />
in, fully insulating the pipe fitting. Covers shall overlap the adjoining pipe insulation and<br />
jackets, and on cold pipes shall be sealed at all seam edges with vapor barrier adhesive.<br />
The circumferential edges of all covers shall be sealed with pressure sensitive tape. The<br />
tape shall overlap the jacket and cover by at least 1”.<br />
F. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier jackets on cold pipe insulation, and protect to prevent<br />
puncture or other damage.<br />
1. Do not use staples or tacks on vapor barrier jackets.<br />
2. Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier finish recommended by the<br />
manufacturer.<br />
3. Seal fitting covers with PVC tape.<br />
4. Cover all unions, check valves, and other in-line devices. Mark outer covering<br />
with indelible marker to identify item covered.<br />
G. Neatly bevel insulation at all exposed edges, and seal with finishing cement.<br />
H. At locations where PVC covers are prohibited, the Contractor shall insulate fittings, etc.,<br />
using one coat of insulation cement, premolded fiberglass fitting covers and/or segments<br />
of pipe insulation. Finish shall be ASJ jacket or glass fabric embedded in fire retardant<br />
mastic. Raw ends shall be coated with vinyl acrylic mastic (CP-10/11) for hot piping or<br />
shall be coated with vapor barrier mastic (CP-30 or Fosters 30-35) for cold piping.<br />
23 0713 - 8 MECHANICAL INSULATION
I. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness and<br />
composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut<br />
or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.<br />
J. Pipe insulation shall be continuous through walls and floor openings except where walls<br />
and floors are required to be firestopped.<br />
K. Insulation on all cold surfaces shall be applied with a continuous, unbroken vapor seal.<br />
Supports, anchors, etc. that are secured directly to cold surfaces shall be adequately<br />
insulated and vapor-sealed to prevent condensation.<br />
L. Piping installed below grade shall be spiral wrapped with 10 mil PVC tape (Scotchwrap<br />
No. 50 or equal) with 50% overlap, and laid in bed of sand with 3” minimum cover on all<br />
sides. Fittings shall be double-wrapped with second layer extended a minimum of 12”<br />
beyond fittings.<br />
M. See Section 230529 for insulation inserts and shields. Butt pipe insulation against pipe<br />
hanger insulation inserts. For all piping, apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on<br />
butt joints and seal all joints and seams with 3” wide vapor barrier tape or band.<br />
N. Cellular Glass Insulation:<br />
1. Apply in a single layer. Secure to pipe with 1/2” wide aluminum bands.<br />
2. For indoor applications, apply all-purpose Kraft paper/aluminum foil/vinyl coating<br />
jacket. Seal all lap and butt joints with self-sealing vapor barrier tape.<br />
O. Calcium Silicate Insulation:<br />
1. Secure 3/4" high rib lath by wire on 16” centers with ribs turned to create 3/4” air<br />
space. Secure metal lath to outstanding ribs by welding or wire on 16” centers to<br />
serve as insulation base. Secure insulation to metal lath with 14-gauge<br />
galvanized wire ties on 16” centers. Stretch 1” hexagonal, 20-gauge mesh<br />
smoothly and securely over insulation. Apply 1/2” thick coat of insulating and<br />
finishing cement to exterior surface, and finish smooth. Allow cement to dry, and<br />
cover with 8-oz. canvas applied with lagging adhesive. Brush with one final coat<br />
of lagging adhesive.<br />
P. Piping Exposed to Weather: All insulation on piping exposed to weather shall have vapor<br />
barrier and shall be protected with weather-proof aluminum jacket.<br />
1. Jacketing shall be secured by 1/2” wide stainless steel bands on 24” centers. All<br />
joints and seams shall be caulked with clear silicone. Locate all longitudinal<br />
seams at the bottom of piping to minimize joint exposure to weather. Contractor<br />
may propose pre-fabricated sealing and fastening systems, for which samples and<br />
product data must be submitted to the Engineer for approval.<br />
3.06 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION:<br />
A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions<br />
and in accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that insulation serves its<br />
intended purpose.<br />
B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0713 - 9 MECHANICAL INSULATION
C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure<br />
complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.<br />
D. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect to prevent puncture<br />
and other damage.<br />
1. Avoid the use of staples on vapor barrier jackets.<br />
2. Seal vapor barrier penetrations with vapor barrier tape recommended by the<br />
manufacturer.<br />
E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork<br />
penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.<br />
F. Flexible Fiberglass Insulation: Cut back insulation to provide a 2” facing overlap at all<br />
seams. Seams shall be stapled at approximately 6” on centers with outward clinching<br />
staples, then sealed with pressure-sensitive tape matching the facing and designed for use<br />
with duct insulation. Insulation on the underside of ductwork 24” and wider shall be<br />
secured with mechanical fasteners and speed clips spaced approximately 18” on centers.<br />
The protruding ends of the fasteners shall be cut off flush after the speed clips are<br />
installed, and then sealed with the same tape as specified above.<br />
G. Corner Angles: Except for oven and kitchen hood exhaust duct insulation, install corner<br />
angles on all external corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before<br />
covering with jacketing.<br />
H. Calcium Silicate Insulation:<br />
1. Secure 3/4" high rib lath by wire on 16” centers with ribs turned to create 3/4” air<br />
space. Secure metal lath to outstanding ribs by welding or wire on 16” centers to<br />
serve as insulation base. Secure insulation to metal lath with 14-gauge<br />
galvanized wire ties on 16” centers. Stretch 1” hexagonal, 20-gauge mesh<br />
smoothly and securely over insulation. Apply 1/2” thick coat of insulating and<br />
finishing cement to exterior surface, and finish smooth. Allow cement to dry, and<br />
cover with 8-oz. canvas applied with lagging adhesive. Brush with one final coat<br />
of lagging adhesive.<br />
I. Installation of external insulation for ductwork exposed to weather:<br />
1. All insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted and fastened to the duct<br />
with mechanical fasteners spaced on 12” to 18” centers or as required to hold<br />
insulation firmly against the duct surface. Insulation shall be tightly secured in<br />
place with washers firmly embedded in the insulation.<br />
2. Apply a heavy brush or trowel coat of weatherproof, fire-retardant, vapor barrier<br />
mastic to completely seal all joints and extend over adjacent insulation. Embed<br />
glass cloth into wet mastic to ensure complete and uniform contact, smoothing out<br />
all wrinkles. Immediately apply a second coat of weatherproof fire-retardant<br />
vapor barrier mastic over entire membrane surface, leaving a large bead over all<br />
joints.<br />
3.07 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0713 - 10 MECHANICAL INSULATION
A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
written instructions and in compliance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that<br />
insulation serves its intended purpose. Complete finishes as specified.<br />
B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces.<br />
Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gaping joints and<br />
excessive voids resulting from poor workmanship.<br />
C. Maintain integrity of vapor barrier on equipment insulation, and protect to prevent<br />
puncture and other damage.<br />
D. Do not apply insulation to equipment, mufflers, breechings, or stacks while hot.<br />
E. Apply insulation using staggered joint method and double layer construction; apply each<br />
layer of insulation separately.<br />
F. Insulation board shall be cut and mitered to fit the contour of the vessel and shall be<br />
applied with edges tightly butted, joints staggered where two or more layers are necessary<br />
(due to available thickness of insulation), and secured with 1/2” x 0.015” galvanized steel<br />
bands on 12” centers or with weld pins or stick clips with washers on 18” centers.<br />
G. Coat insulation surfaces with layer of insulating cement, and cover the insulation with 1”<br />
galvanized wire mesh tightly stretched in place with edges tied together. Finish with two<br />
coats of insulating cement troweled to a hard finish.<br />
H. Do not insulate over ASME stamp or manufacturer's nameplate on hot equipment. Provide<br />
neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation.<br />
I. Cold equipment requiring access: Provide removable section of insulation, fabricated<br />
from flexible elastomeric insulation, adhered to an aluminum jacket, and joined with<br />
velcro strips around entire perimeter. Reinforce removable section and adjoining<br />
insulation at attachment points. Removable insulation shall be provided for all equipment<br />
requiring periodic inspection, access or maintenance, including:<br />
1. Chilled water pump bodies.<br />
2. Strainer basket access.<br />
3. Heat exchanger tube access (including chillers).<br />
4. Handhole/cleanout covers.<br />
J. Hot equipment requiring access: Provide removable section of insulation, fabricated from<br />
rigid fiberglass insulation board, adhered to an aluminum jacket, and fastened to the<br />
equipment with stainless steel bands. At Contractor's option, provide pre-fabricated,<br />
canvas-jacketed, lace-up insulation blankets.<br />
Provide removable insulation for hot equipment requiring access with accessible<br />
components over 100 square inches or any component operating over 200°F, including:<br />
1. Steam condensate receivers and pumps.<br />
2. Steam strainers.<br />
3. Steam pressure regulators.<br />
4. Heat exchanger tube access.<br />
5. Handhole/manhole/cleanout access.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 0713 - 11 MECHANICAL INSULATION
K. Equipment Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of<br />
aluminum jacketing, as recommended by manufacturer. On flexible elastomeric<br />
insulation, apply two (2) coats of manufacturer's approved U.V. resistant finish.<br />
3.08 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR:<br />
A. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, both previously damaged or<br />
damaged during this construction period. Use insulation of same thickness as existing<br />
insulation; install new jacket lapping and seal over existing.<br />
3.09 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT:<br />
A. Replace all damaged insulation which cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units<br />
with vapor barrier damage and moisture saturated units.<br />
B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulation<br />
work during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 0713<br />
23 0713 - 12 MECHANICAL INSULATION
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 1113<br />
FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING<br />
A. This Section includes fuel oil piping system and equipment, including:<br />
1. Piping, fittings and specialties.<br />
2. Oil transfer equipment.<br />
3. Oil storage tanks and accessories.<br />
B. Related Sections; The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:<br />
1.02 DEFINITIONS:<br />
1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavation, trenching and backfilling for<br />
underground piping.<br />
2. Division 3 Section "Concrete Work" for cast-in-place concrete, reinforcing and<br />
formwork for equipment pads.<br />
3. Division 23 Section "Meters and Gauges" for oil supply and return line<br />
thermometers, and pressure and vacuum gauges.<br />
4. Division 25 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identification of<br />
fuel oil piping and transfer equipment.<br />
5. Division 25 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for pipe insulation for underground oil<br />
piping.<br />
A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Product data for the following products.<br />
1. All valves including special duty valves.<br />
2. Fuel oil piping.<br />
3. Oil submersible and transfer pumps. Include performance curves, electrical<br />
characteristics and specified accessories.<br />
4. Oil piping specialties.<br />
B. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation of oil storage tanks and accessories.<br />
Detail equipment assemblies and indicating dimensions, weights, loadings, required<br />
clearances, method of field assembly, components and location and size of each field<br />
connection.<br />
C. Wiring diagrams detailing wiring for power and control systems; differentiating between<br />
manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.<br />
23 1113 - 1 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
D. Welder Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements<br />
specified under "Quality Assurance" article.<br />
E. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems<br />
products; in accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 and 23.<br />
F. Maintenance data for oil transfer equipment, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance<br />
Manual specified in Divisions 1 and 23.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fuel oil systems<br />
products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory<br />
use in similar service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on<br />
projects with fuel oil systems work similar to that required for project.<br />
C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and<br />
Pressure Vessel Code, 11 Section IX, “Welding and Brazing Qualifications."<br />
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:<br />
1. NFPA 31 - Standard for the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment, for oil piping<br />
materials and components, oil piping installations, and inspection and testing of<br />
fuel oil piping systems.<br />
2. NFPA 37 - Standard for the Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines<br />
and Gas Turbines.<br />
3. Uniform Mechanical Code and Denver Building Department Code.<br />
4. BOCA Basic National Mechanical Code.<br />
5. Local fire department authority.<br />
6. EPA guidelines and regulations.<br />
E. UL Compliance: Provide fuel oil piping components which are listed and labeled by UL.<br />
1. UL 343 - "Standard for Pumps for Oil-Burning Appliances,” for oil transfer pumps.<br />
2. UL 567 - "Pipe Connections for Flammable and Combustible Liquids and LP-Gas,”<br />
for pipe connectors for fuel oil piping systems.<br />
3. UL File MH 1316 - "Standard for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Plastic Underground<br />
Storage Tanks for Petroleum Products," for oil storage tanks.<br />
4. American Petroleum Institute Std. 650, Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage<br />
(ANSI/API Std 650-78).<br />
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:<br />
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete ballast pads and fill at sounding boxes for<br />
housekeeping equipment pads for oil transfer pumps. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad.<br />
Concrete reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 1113 - 2 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Special Duty Valves:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Webster Electric Co., Sub. of Sta-Rite Industries, Inc.<br />
2. Vertical Ball Check Valve:<br />
a. Lukenheimer<br />
3. Factory Manufactured Below Grade Fuel Oil Piping:<br />
a. Total Containment<br />
4. Strainers:<br />
a. Armstrong Machine Works<br />
b. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.<br />
c. Metraflex Co.<br />
d. R-P&C Valve; Div. White Consolidated Industries, Inc.<br />
e. Watts Regulator<br />
5. Oil Transfer Pumps:<br />
a. ITT Marlow<br />
b. Roper Pump Co.<br />
c. Viking Pump Div.; Houdaille Industries, Inc.<br />
d. Gordon-Piatt<br />
6. Submersible Pumps:<br />
a. Red Jacket Pumps<br />
7. Oil Piping Specialties:<br />
a. OPW Division; Dover Corp.<br />
8. Fuel Oil Gauges:<br />
2.02 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS:<br />
a. Hersey Products, Inc.<br />
b. Pneumercator Co., Inc.<br />
c. Emco Wheaton<br />
A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types,<br />
pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated,<br />
23 1113 - 3 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation<br />
requirements. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections;<br />
provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in fuel oil systems.<br />
B. Unless noted otherwise copper and steel piping as well as fittings and valves shall be rated<br />
150 psig.<br />
2.03 BASIC IDENTIFICATION:<br />
A. General: Provide identification complying with Division-23 Basic Mechanical Materials<br />
and Methods section "Mechanical Identification", in accordance with the following listing:<br />
1. Fuel Oil Piping Above Ground: Plastic pipe markers.<br />
2. Fuel Oil Piping Underground: Underground-type plastic line markers.<br />
3. Fuel Oil Valves: Brass tags.<br />
2.04 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS:<br />
A. General: Refer to Part 3 below, Article "Pipe Application" for identification of systems<br />
where the below specified pipe and fittings materials are used.<br />
B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, seamless, black steel pipe, with beveled ends.<br />
C. Copper Tubing: ASTM 288, Type L, hard drawn copper tubing and Type K, annealed<br />
copper tubing.<br />
2.05 FITTINGS:<br />
A. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI 316.3, Class 150, standard pattern, for threaded<br />
joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1. No cast iron fittings allowed.<br />
B. Steel Fittings: ASTM A234, seamless or welded, for welded joints. Socket weld fittings for<br />
below grade.<br />
C. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ANSI 316.5, including volts, nuts and gaskets of the<br />
following material group, end connection and facing:<br />
2.06 JOINING MATERIALS:<br />
1. Material Group: 1.1.<br />
2. End Connections: Butt Welding.<br />
3. Facings: Raised face.<br />
A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code<br />
for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe<br />
being welded.<br />
B. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full faced for cast-iron flanges and<br />
raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system in<br />
which installed and which conform to their respective ANSI standard (A21.11, B16.20, or<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 1113 - 4 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
B-15.21). Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and<br />
thermal conditions of the fluid being carried.<br />
C. Brazing filler Metals: AWS A5.8 classification BAgl (silver).<br />
2.07 PIPING SPECIALTIES:<br />
A. Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron; female pattern; brass to iron seat;<br />
ground joint. Threads shall conform to ANSI 31.20.1.<br />
B. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for the pipe<br />
materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged) , which effectively isolate<br />
dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.<br />
C. Y-Pattern Strainers: 125 psig working pressure; cast-iron body conforming to ASTM A126,<br />
Class B; flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger, threaded connections for 2 inch and<br />
smaller, bolted cover, perforated stainless steel screen, and plugged blow-down drain.<br />
D. Flexible Connectors: For 1-1/2 inches and smaller, provide minimum 150 psig working<br />
pressure, maximum 25O degrees F. operating temperature; stainless steel bellows with<br />
woven flexible bronze wire reinforcing protective jacket. Connectors shall have flanged or<br />
threaded end connections to match equipment connected; and shall be capable of 3/4<br />
inch misalignment.<br />
2.08 GENERAL DUTY VALVES:<br />
A. General duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, ball and butterfly valves) are specified in Division 23<br />
Section "General Duty Valves." Special duty valves are specified in this Article by their<br />
generic name. Refer to Part 3 below, Article "Valve Application" for specific uses and<br />
applications for each valve specified.<br />
2.09 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES:<br />
A. Oil Safety Valves: 250 psig maximum working pressure, 550 degrees F. maximum<br />
operation temperature; ASTM B61 bronze body and bronze bases and discs, and field<br />
adjustable cadmium-plated carbon steel springs factory-set at 20 percent above operating<br />
pressure. End connections shall be inside threaded with threads conforming to ANSI<br />
31.20.1. Valve shall be UL listed for flammable or volatile liquids.<br />
B. Vertical Ball Check Valves: Class 200, 400 psig maximum operating pressure, 2-piece<br />
bronze construction with threaded end connections; integral bronze seats and replaceable<br />
stainless steel ball.<br />
2.10 FUEL OIL TRANSFER PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES:<br />
A. General Description: Simplex/Duplex Single-stage, positive displacement rotary type,<br />
/centrifugal type with the following features and accessories: foot-mounted, cast-iron<br />
housing, steel gears, bronze bearings, steel shaft, standard mechanical seals; built-in<br />
pressure relief bypass; steel base and drive coupling. Provide pumps with capacities and<br />
electrical characteristics as scheduled for number 2 or 3 fuel oil. Pumps shall be<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 1113 - 5 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
constructed in accordance with UL 343, and be UL listed and bear the UL label. Pump set<br />
shall be duplex/simplex completely factory pre-piped and mounted on a skid drip pan<br />
ready to install. Each pump shall have the following:<br />
1. Oil pressure relief valve and return to suction piping.<br />
2. Belt/Coupling guard<br />
3. Back pressure regulating valve (shipped loose; installed by M.C.)<br />
4. Discharge check valve<br />
5. Discharge manual valve<br />
6. Suction side manual valve<br />
7. Compound pressure gauge on suction line with gauge cock.<br />
8. Strainer with isolation valves on each side of it.<br />
9. Pressure gauge or discharge with gauge cock.<br />
10. Cross over bridge piping on suction and discharge lines for parallel piping<br />
arrangement on duplex installation.<br />
11. Provide pressure measuring taps or both suction and discharge for pressure<br />
differential switch provided by others, coordinate with temperature control<br />
contractor.<br />
B. Drive: V-belt drive, with belt guard.<br />
C. Drive: Direct drive, close coupled.<br />
D. Motor: Split phase for single-phase motors; capacitor start, induction-run, totally enclosed<br />
for 3-phase motors.<br />
E. Controls: Controls shall include simplex/duplex factory prewired control panel consisting<br />
of H-O-A starter(s), thermal overload protection, auxiliary contacts for remote startstop.<br />
For duplex installation provide alternator and lead-lag control function.<br />
2.11 SUBMERSIBLE FUEL OIL PUMP:<br />
A. Pump shall be complete with the following:<br />
1. Check valve<br />
2. Air eliminator<br />
3. Expansion relief valve<br />
4. Syphon nozzle and venturi<br />
5. Syphon check valve and pressure test screw<br />
6. Accessible capacitor and electrical disconnect<br />
7. Leak detector head<br />
8. Bayonet-type electrical connector with explosion-proof electric disconnect without<br />
separating wires<br />
9. Pressure relief and check valves which can be isolated during a line pressure test.<br />
10. Tank and line test ports<br />
11. All leakage directed into storage tank.<br />
12. Hydraulically balanced Calcon impellers<br />
13. On-winding thermal overcurrent motor protection<br />
14. Permanent split-phase capacitor motor, 208-230 v single phase.<br />
B. Submersible pump(s) shall be as manufactured by Red Jacket Pumps a Marley Company.<br />
Capacity and model designation shall be as scheduled on drawings.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 1113 - 6 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
2.12 SPECIALTIES:<br />
A. Foot Valve: Single/Double poppet constructed of plated cast iron/bronze body and bronze<br />
poppet with replaceable bronze seats and monel/galvanized brass 20/8 screen.<br />
OPW No. [ ]<br />
B. Float Vent Valve: Stainless steel ball with Duragard coated seat length determined by tank<br />
supplier.<br />
OPW No. 53-V series<br />
C. Fill/Spill Containers: Container shall consist of Duratuff lower body, cast iron<br />
cover/aluminum cover, polyethylene gravel guard, epoxy coated cast iron body ring, high<br />
density polyethylene bellows, acetal-polypropylene drain valve, stainless steel clamps,<br />
Buna-N seals with a nominal 3 gallon capacity,<br />
OPW #1.<br />
D. Vent Caps and Flame Arresters: Provide caps and arresters to melt local code and fire<br />
department requirements.<br />
2.13 FUEL OIL LEVEL-INDICATION AND LEAK DETECTION:<br />
A. General: The tank liquid level management system shall be a fully integrated<br />
microprocessor based system for 1 to 8 tanks. The system shall continuously monitor the<br />
liquid inventory of each tank. System shall include an individual selectable display for<br />
product level in inches, product volume in gallons, level of water, and temperature of<br />
product for each tank. The visual alarm condition shall be displayed until the condition is<br />
corrected. The system shall retain in memory the last 3 alarm conditions by tank and last<br />
10 deliveries by tank. The system shall include battery back-up to retain data stored in<br />
memory during loss or interruption of power for up to ten years. System shall monitor<br />
liquid levels and product temperature for tank leak test and/or theft test during tank<br />
quiescent periods. Inventory reports containing product levels, volumes, water level, and<br />
product temperatures, alarm history reports, delivery history reports, theft test results, and<br />
tank leak test results. Reports shall all be presented via a RS-232 data output port built-in<br />
printer. Reports shall include site name/location, date, and time. System shall operate on<br />
110-120 V., 60 hertz, A.C. current.<br />
B. Control Console: Control console shall be constructed in a wall-mountable steel enclosure<br />
complete with a 5 digit, 0.81, high, 7 segment LED display for inches and gallons of<br />
product of inventory, level of water and temperature of product. Control console shall<br />
include individual visual LED light and audible alarm for programmable high level, low<br />
level and water presence alarm conditions for each tank. Two alarm relays, reach rated<br />
SPDT-3 amps, shall be provided standard for external control functions. Provide<br />
additional alarm relays, two per tank (maximum of 16). Audible alarm shall include a<br />
disable switch. Touch key pad shall be splash proof dual purpose, accommodating tank<br />
and function selection as well as system programming functions. Control console<br />
calibration, set-up and diagnostic trouble shooting. The console should provide SPDT<br />
switch contacts rated 3 AMPS at 120 VAC, for each leak sensor, for controlling external<br />
devices. Electrical circuitry to tank mounted sensors should be low current rated<br />
intrinsically safe for hazardous areas.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 1113 - 7 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
C. Leak Sensors: Each leak sensor shall contain a 316 stainless steel capacitance element<br />
bonded to a combination PVC/Epoxy Housing, and a PVC jacketed cable for electrical<br />
connections. The sensor shall pass through a minimum 2 inch NPT monitor fitting on each<br />
tank. The sensor shall be able to differentiate between liquid water and liquid hydrocarbon<br />
to a minimum depth of 0.1 inch and operate from -40° to 130°F and up to 50<br />
PSIG. Wiring to the console shall be standard 3 conductor (shielded not required) ,<br />
provided by others and terminated at the tank monitor fitting using watertight 1/2 inch<br />
NPT fittings.<br />
D. Leak detection shall be as follows:<br />
1. Control Unit(s) shall be Pneumercator model number LDE90OX. X = number of<br />
sensing points.<br />
2. Leak sensors shall be Pneumercator model 9-901 for fiberglass tank annular<br />
spaces, or model 9-902 for steel tank monitor pipes and piping sump areas.<br />
2.14 OVERFILL ALARM SYSTEM:<br />
A. Provide a complete operational working audible and visual alarm system for overfill<br />
condition.<br />
B. The system shell include the following construction features and performance.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
1. NEMA 4 painted steel enclosure<br />
2. Suitable operating temperature range of -40°F to 150°F<br />
3. 120v/1Phase<br />
4. Audible alarm 78dB to 103 dB at 10 feet distance, with adjustable duration time<br />
on from 0 to 60 seconds.<br />
5. Visual alarm using a 25 watt 120 VAC lamp with red polycarbonate lens and a<br />
flashing rate of 75 per minute.<br />
6. Alarm acknowledgment switch with actuating lamp.<br />
7. Programmable overfill alarm limit set for each tank.<br />
8. Auxiliary contacts compatible with building automation system for remote<br />
monitoring.<br />
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which fuel oil systems materials and<br />
products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have<br />
been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION OF BASIC IDENTIFICATION:<br />
A. General: Install mechanical identification in accordance with Division 23 Basic<br />
Mechanical Materials and Methods section “Mechanical Identification.”<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 1113 - 8 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
3.03 PIPE APPLICATIONS:<br />
A. Use steel pipe with welded joints for 3/4 inch and larger.<br />
B. Use Type L, drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints for 2 inch<br />
and smaller, above ground, within building.<br />
3.04 PIPE INSTALLATIONS:<br />
A. General: Refer to Division 23 - "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping<br />
installation instructions.<br />
B. Install supply, return, fill, and vent piping at a uniform grade of 1/4 inch in ten feet<br />
downward in the direction of the storage tank.<br />
C. Make changes in directions and branch connections using fittings.<br />
D. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting install with the level side down.<br />
E. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections<br />
each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged<br />
devices.<br />
F. Install dielectric unions where piping of dissimilar metals are joined.<br />
G. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch and larger<br />
connections.<br />
H. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps and other vibration<br />
producing equipment.<br />
I. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure regulating valve, oil<br />
burner connection, and elsewhere as indicated. Install 3/4 inch NPS nipple and ball valve<br />
in blow down connection of strainers 2 inch and larger. Use same size nipple and valve<br />
as blow-off connection of strainer.<br />
J. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. Install expansion<br />
loops and joints as indicated on the Drawings and specified in Division-23 Section<br />
"Expansion Compensation."<br />
K. Install pipe sleeve seals at foundation and basement wall penetrations, as specified in<br />
Division-23 Section: Basic Piping Materials and Methods."<br />
L. Seal pipe penetrations of fire barriers using fire barrier penetration sealers specified in<br />
Division-7 [079200] Section: "Joint Seallants."<br />
M. Hanger, supports, and anchors are specified in Division-23 Section "SUPPORTS AND<br />
ANCHORS." Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports:<br />
1. Steel Pipe:<br />
SIZE (NPS) SPACING IN FEET MIN. ROD SIZE-<br />
INCHES<br />
1/2 (horizontal) 5 3/8<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 1113 - 9 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
3/4 to 1-1/4 (horizontal) 6 3/8<br />
1-1/2 to 3 (horizontal) 10 1/2<br />
3-1/2 to 5 (horizontal) 12 5/8<br />
All sizes (vertical) every floor level at spacing and not greater than 15 feet.<br />
2. Copper Tubing:<br />
3.05 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION:<br />
SIZE (IN. O.D.) SPACING IN FEET MIN. ROD SIZE-<br />
INCHES<br />
1/2 (horizontal) 4 3/8<br />
5/8 to 1-1/4 (horizontal) 6 3/8<br />
1/2 to 2 (horizontal) 8 1/2<br />
1/2 to 4 (horizontal) 10 5/8<br />
All sizes (vertical) to be supported at every floor level at spacing indicated and not<br />
greater than 10 feet.<br />
A. Welded Joints: Comply with the requirements in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code,<br />
Section IX.<br />
B. Threaded Joints: Conform to ANSI 21.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads.<br />
Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows:<br />
1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of<br />
internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.<br />
2. Align threads at point of assembly.<br />
3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads.<br />
4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves<br />
place the wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.<br />
5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or<br />
damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of<br />
pipe shall not be used.<br />
6. Below grade piping shall be all welded joints, not threaded joints below grade<br />
unless noted otherwise (i.e. , tank bushing connection in sump).<br />
C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt<br />
tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible.<br />
Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to<br />
appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer.<br />
D. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual."<br />
1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic<br />
fumes when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation.<br />
2. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal<br />
parts of piping specialties before brazing.<br />
3. Fill the tubing and fittings during brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or carbon<br />
dioxide) to prevent formation of scale.<br />
4. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature.<br />
23 1113 - 10 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
3.06 VALVE APPLICATIONS:<br />
A. General: The Drawings indicate valve types, locations, and arrangements.<br />
B. General Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where<br />
specific valve types are not indicated the following requirements apply:<br />
1. Shut-off duty: Use gate valves<br />
2. Throttling duty: Use globe valves<br />
3.07 VALVE INSTALLATIONS:<br />
A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a<br />
metal tag attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems supplied.<br />
B. Install shut-off duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and elsewhere as<br />
indicated.<br />
C. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and elsewhere as required<br />
for system drainage.<br />
D. Install swing check valves as required to control flow direction.<br />
3.08 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Sediment Traps: Install a tee fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or capped as close to<br />
the inlet of the oil burning appliance as practical. Drip leg shall be a minimum of 3 pipe<br />
diameters in length.<br />
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Test oil piping in accordance with NFPA 31.<br />
B. Remake leaking joints and connections using new materials.<br />
3.10 COMMISSIONING:<br />
A. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and<br />
equipment.<br />
B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up<br />
and shut-down, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance.<br />
C. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 section 11<br />
Project Closeout."<br />
D. Schedule training with owner through the Architect, with at least 7 days advance notice.<br />
E. Before activating system perform these steps:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 1113 - 11 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
3.11 WIRING:<br />
1. Open valves to full open position. Close bypass valves.<br />
2. Remove and clean strainer screens.<br />
3. Check pump for proper direction of rotation.<br />
4. Fill oil storage tank with proper fuel type.<br />
5. Check operating controls of fuel burner units.<br />
6. Check operation at automatic bypass valves.<br />
7. Check and set operating temperature controls on oil heaters.<br />
8. Check corrosion monitoring systems for proper operation.<br />
9. Check and calibrate fuel oil level gauge.<br />
10. Check and calibrate leak detection system(s).<br />
A. All wiring between level transmitters, sensors and monitoring equipment is by this<br />
contractor. Power wiring for service to equipment will be provided as shown on electrical<br />
drawings (Division 1G). All other wiring not shown or Division 16 drawings is by the<br />
mechanical contractor.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 1113<br />
23 1113 - 12 FACILITY FUEL-OIL PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 1123<br />
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING<br />
A. This Section includes distribution piping systems for natural gas and manufactured gas<br />
within the building and extending from the point of delivery to the connections with gas<br />
utilization devices. Piping materials and equipment specified in this section include:<br />
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.<br />
2. Special duty valves.<br />
B. This Section does not apply to LP-gas piping; industrial gas applications using such gases<br />
as acetylene and acetylenic compounds, hydrogen, ammonia, carbon monoxide, oxygen<br />
and nitrogen; gas piping, meters, gas pressure regulators and other appurtenances used<br />
by the serving gas supplier in distribution of gas.<br />
C. Gas pressures for systems specified in this section are limited to 5 psig.<br />
D. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include gas meters which will be<br />
provided by the utility company, to the site, ready for installation. The following is the<br />
name and address of the utility company:<br />
Company Xcel Energy<br />
Address: 1800 Larimer Street<br />
Denver, CO 80202<br />
Telephone number: (800) 895-4999<br />
E. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:<br />
1.02 DEFINITIONS:<br />
1. Refer to Division 2 for fuel gas service piping, trenching and backfilling which is<br />
underground, outside the building, and connecting the "Gas Distribution Piping" to<br />
public utilities (or connecting groups of buildings on the same site).<br />
2. Refer to other Division 23 sections for materials and methods for trenching and<br />
backfilling; installation of gas piping; sealing pipe penetrations through basement<br />
walls; fire and smoke barriers; piping and fittings; and mechanical identification<br />
of gas piping systems inside and outside the building.<br />
A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).<br />
B. Gas Distribution Piping: A pipe within the building which conveys gas from the point of<br />
delivery to the points of usage.<br />
C. Gas Service Piping: The pipe from the gas main or other source of supply including the<br />
meter, regulating valve, or service valve to the gas distribution system of the building<br />
served.<br />
23 1123 - 1 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
D. Point of Delivery is the outlet of the service meter assembly, or the outlet of the service<br />
regulator (service shutoff valve when no meter is provided).<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Product data for each gas piping specialty and special duty valve. Include rated capacities<br />
of selected models, furnished specialties and accessories, and installation instructions.<br />
B. Shop drawings detailing dimensions, required clearances, for connection to gas meter.<br />
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems<br />
products, in accordance with requirements of Division 23.<br />
D. Maintenance data for gas specialties and special duty valves, for inclusion in the<br />
Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 23.<br />
E. Welders’ qualification certificates, certifying that welders comply with the quality<br />
requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" below.<br />
F. Test reports specified in Part 3 below.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of natural gas<br />
systems products, of types, materials, sizes required, whose products have been in<br />
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: Installation and replacement of gas piping, gas utilization<br />
equipment or accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only<br />
by a qualified installer. The term “qualified” is defined as experienced in such work<br />
(experienced shall mean having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and<br />
scope to this project), familiar with precautions required, and has complied with the<br />
requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon <strong>request</strong>, submit evidence of such<br />
qualifications to the Architect.<br />
C. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of<br />
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, "Welding and Brazing Qualification."<br />
D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes:<br />
1. NFPA 54 – National Fuel Gas Code, for gas piping materials and components,<br />
gas piping installations, and inspection, testing, and purging of gas piping<br />
systems.<br />
2. Local Building Code.<br />
3. Utility Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with<br />
local gas utility company requirements.<br />
4. UMC Compliance: Fabricate and install natural gas systems in accordance with<br />
IAPMO "Uniform Mechanical Code."<br />
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 1123 - 2 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquid from a drip in existing<br />
gas piping and handle cautiously to avoid spillage or ignition. Notify the gas supplier.<br />
Handle flammable liquids used by the installer with proper precautions, and do not leave<br />
on the premises from the end of one working day to the beginning of the next.<br />
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:<br />
A. Notification of Interruption of Service: Except in the case of an emergency, notify all<br />
affected users when the gas supply is to be turned off.<br />
B. Work Interruptions: When interruptions in work occur while repairs or alterations are<br />
being made to an existing piping system, leave the system in safe condition.<br />
C. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations.<br />
1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS:<br />
A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, two (2) valve wrenches for each type of<br />
gas valve installed, requiring same.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Gas Cocks:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Jenkins Bros.<br />
b. Lunkenheimer Co.<br />
c. Nibco, Inc.<br />
d. Powell Co.<br />
e. Stockham.<br />
2.02 PIPE, TUBING AND JOINTING MATERIALS:<br />
A. Provide pipes and pipe fitting complying with Division 23, Section 232113.<br />
2.03 NATURAL GAS PIPING SPECIALTIES:<br />
A. Gas Meters: Diaphragm-type, positive displacement gas meters with aluminum cases,<br />
temperature compensated, with internal corrosion-resistant components; threaded ends<br />
for 2 inch and smaller, flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger; for gas working pressures,<br />
specific gravity, and volume flow indicated.<br />
B. Protective Coating: Provide factory applied polyethylene tape, having the following<br />
properties:<br />
23 1123 - 3 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
1. Overall thickness: 20 mils.<br />
2. Synthetic adhesive.<br />
3. Water vapor transmission rate.<br />
4. Gallons per 100 square inch: 0.10 or less.<br />
5. Water absorption, percent: 0.02 or less.<br />
6. Prime pipe and fittings with a compatible primer prior to application of tape.<br />
7. Pipe wrapping shall conform to the following schedule:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
Scotchwrap No.<br />
Pipe Size Tape Width Standard Cold<br />
¼ - ¾ inch 1 inch 50 40<br />
1 – 1½ inch 2 or 4 inch 50 40<br />
2 inch and larger 4 inch 50 40<br />
Color backing Black Green<br />
8. During application of wrap, if the ambient temperature is 40°F or less, use only<br />
Scotchwrap No. 40 tape. if ambient temperature is 40°F or more, use only<br />
Scotchwrap No. 50.<br />
C. Flexible Connectors: Corrugated type 304 stainless steel flexible pipe with stainless steel<br />
braid and heavy flexible armor shield.<br />
D. Quick Couplers: One way quick coupler with gas rating in cubic feet per hour equal to<br />
equivalent gas appliance rating.<br />
E. Valve cabinets: For gas safety valves, No. 4 stainless steel finish, fully recessed, Series S<br />
construction, style K stainless steel door with key lock, 4 keys per cabinet, all cabinets<br />
keyed alike.<br />
2.04 VALVES:<br />
1. Modify cabinets for 6”, maximum depth for valve sizes ½” to 1-1/2”, and 8”<br />
maximum depth for valve sizes 2” to 3”. Label cabinet.<br />
A. Special duty valves are specified in this section by their generic name. Refer to Part 3,<br />
"VALVE APPLICATION, 11 for specific uses and applications for valve specified.<br />
B. Gas Cocks 2 Inch and Smaller: 150 psi WOG, bronze body, straightaway pattern, square<br />
head, threaded ends.<br />
C. Gas Cocks 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: MSS SP-78; 175 psi, lubricated plug type, semi-steel<br />
body, single gland, wrench operated, flanged ends.<br />
D. Solenoid Valves: Aluminum body, 120 volts AC, 60 Hz, Class B continuous duty molded<br />
coil; NEMA 4 coil enclosure; electrically opened/electrically closed; dual coils; normally<br />
closed; UL and FM approved and labeled.<br />
E. Gas Line Pressure Regulators: Single stage, steel jacketed, corrosion-resistant gas pressure<br />
regulators; with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator; with threaded ends for 2 inch<br />
and smaller, flanged ends for 2-1/2 inch and larger; for inlet and outlet gas pressures,<br />
specific gravity, and volume flow indicated.<br />
23 1123 - 4 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
F. Gas Safety Valves: Gas safety valve latched open when energized, free handle design,<br />
manual reset, and a visual position indicator.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which natural gas systems materials and<br />
products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have<br />
been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.<br />
3.02 PREPARATION:<br />
A. Precautions: Before turning off the gas to the premises or section of piping, turn off all<br />
equipment valves. Perform a leakage test as specified in "FIELD QUALITY CONTROL"<br />
below, to determine that all equipment is turned off in the piping section to be affected.<br />
B. Conform with the requirements in NFPA 54 for the prevention of accidental ignition.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION OF PIPE:<br />
A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with Division 23, Section 232113.<br />
B. Conform to the requirements of NFPA 54, National Fuel Gas Code.<br />
C. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the<br />
general location and arrangement of piping systems. Design locations and arrangements<br />
of piping take into consideration pipe sizing, flow direction, slope of pipe, expansion, and<br />
other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.<br />
D. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in an airtight<br />
conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless black steel with welded joints. Vent<br />
conduit to the outside and terminate with a screened vent cap.<br />
1. Above-Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible above-ceiling<br />
spaces (subject to the approval of the authority having jurisdiction), whether or not<br />
such spaces are used as a plenum. Valves shall not be located in such spaces.<br />
2. In Floors: Piping installed in floors shall have protective wrapping specified in Part<br />
2 above. Piping cast in concrete slabs shall be surrounded with a minimum of 1-<br />
1/2 inches of concrete and shall not be in physical contact with other metallic<br />
structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Piping shall<br />
not be embedded in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder<br />
aggregate.<br />
3. Piping In Partitions: Concealed piping shall not be located in solid partitions.<br />
Tubing shall not be run inside hollow walls or partitions unless protected against<br />
physical damage. This does not apply to tubing passing through walls or<br />
partitions.<br />
4. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through a circulating air duct,<br />
clothes chute, chimney or gas vent, ventilating duct or dumb waiter or elevator<br />
shaft. This does not apply to accessible above-ceiling space specified above.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 1123 - 5 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
E. Install pipe sleeve and seals at foundation and basement wall penetrations, as specified in<br />
Division 23, Section 232113, "Basic Piping Materials and Methods."<br />
F. Seal pipe penetrations of fire barriers using fire barrier penetration sealers specified in<br />
Division 23.<br />
G. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install a drip leg at points where condensate may collect, at<br />
the outlet of the gas meter, and in a location readily accessible to permit cleaning and<br />
emptying. Do not install drips where condensate is likely to freeze.<br />
1. Construct drips and sediment traps using a tee fitting with the bottom outlet<br />
plugged or capped. Use a minimum of 3 pipe diameters in length for the drip<br />
leg. Use same size pipe for drip leg as the connected pipe.<br />
H. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.<br />
I. Install gas piping at a uniform grade upward to risers, and from the risers to the meter, or<br />
service regulator when meter is not provided, or the equipment.<br />
J. Connect branch outlet pipes from the top of horizontal lines, not from the bottom or sides.<br />
3.04 NATURAL GAS PIPING SPECIALTIES:<br />
A. Gas Meters:<br />
1. Install gas meter in accordance with local Utility company's installation<br />
instructions, and comply with requirements.<br />
B. Protective Coating:<br />
1. Provide protective coating on piping and fittings that will be in contact with<br />
material or atmosphere exerting a corrosive action, or piping buried in floors.<br />
C. Flexible Connectors:<br />
1. Provide flexible connectors with full size quick coupler for all kitchen and heavy<br />
moveable gas appliance equipment.<br />
2. Connectors shall be of lengths required to displace equipment for complete<br />
cleaning under and around gas appliance.<br />
D. Quick Couplers:<br />
1. Provide quick coupler at service end of flexible connectors.<br />
E. Valve Cabinets:<br />
3.05 VALVE APPLICATIONS:<br />
1. Provide valve cabinets for gas safety valves, mounted 5’-0” from floor to<br />
centerline. Control panels must be mounted to be visible from entry door of room<br />
or area within which panels are mounted.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 1123 - 6 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
A. General: The Drawings indicate valve types, locations, and arrangements.<br />
B. Shut-off duty: Use gas cocks.<br />
3.06 VALVE INSTALLATIONS:<br />
A. Install valves in accessible locations, protected from physical damage. Tag valves with a<br />
metal tag attached with a metal chain indicating the piping systems supplied.<br />
B. Install a gas cock upstream of each gas pressure regulator. Where two gas pressure<br />
regulators are installed in series in a single gas line, a manual valve is not required at the<br />
second regulator.<br />
C. Install pressure relief or pressure limiting devices so they can be readily operated to<br />
determine if the valve is free, tested to determine the pressure at which they will operate,<br />
and examined for leakage when in the closed position. Pipe atmospheric vent to outdoors.<br />
D. Solenoid valves shall be mounted with the solenoid in the vertical upright position only.<br />
1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16. Coordinate<br />
electrical requirements and connections.<br />
E. Valves shall be installed with unions or other means to facilitate removal or repair without<br />
disassembly of connecting piping.<br />
F. Gas Safety Valves:<br />
1. Install gas safety valves in wall boxes [exposed].<br />
2. Coordinate electrical requirements with Division 16 contractor. Provide neoprene<br />
grommets for all piping and electrical conduit entering and existing cabinets.<br />
3.07 TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Install gas cock upstream and within 6 feet of gas appliance. Install a union or flanged<br />
connection downstream from the gas cock to permit removal of controls.<br />
B. Sediment Traps: Install a tee fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or capped as close to<br />
the inlet of the gas appliance as practical. Drip leg shall be a minimum of 3 pipe<br />
diameters in length.<br />
C. Flexible Hose Gas Connectors: For use connecting to vibrating equipment; corrugated<br />
Type 304 stainless steel flexible pipe with stainless steel braid.<br />
3.08 ELECTRICAL BONDING AND GROUNDING:<br />
A. Install above-ground portions of gas piping systems, upstream from equipment shutoff<br />
valves, electrically continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode in accordance with<br />
NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."<br />
B. Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 1123 - 7 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
C. Conform to NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code," for electrical connections between wiring<br />
and electrically operated control devices.<br />
3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Piping Tests: Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54<br />
and local utility requirements.<br />
B. Test system before covering underground lines.<br />
C. Submit written results of tests to Architect/Engineer.<br />
3.10 SPARE PARTS:<br />
A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, two (2) valve wrenches for each type of<br />
gas valve installed, requiring same.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 1123<br />
23 1123 - 8 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 2113<br />
HYDRONIC PIPING<br />
A. This Section specifies piping materials, testing and installation methods common to<br />
Division 23 and includes joining materials, piping specialties, and basic piping installation<br />
instructions.<br />
B. Related Sections: Refer to other Division 23 sections for fire protection systems, piping<br />
specialties, valves, expansion compensation, supports and anchors, mechanical<br />
identification, mechanical insulation, meters and gauges, and fire barrier penetration<br />
seals.<br />
C. Standards: Piping materials and installation methods shall meet the requirements of the<br />
applicable sections of the latest standards of the following organizations listed below:<br />
Air-conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)<br />
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)<br />
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)<br />
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)<br />
American Welding Society (AWS)<br />
American Water Works Association (AWWA)<br />
Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI)<br />
Commercial Standards, National Bureau of Standards (CS)<br />
Compressed Gas Association (CGA)<br />
Copper Development Association (CDA)<br />
Federal Specifications (FS)<br />
Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS)<br />
National Certified Pipe Welding Bureau (NCPWB)<br />
Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI)<br />
Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI)<br />
D. All piping shall conform to applicable portions of the above standards and as required by<br />
the appropriate national and local codes.<br />
1.02 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Refer to Division 1 and Basic Mechanical Requirements for administrative and procedural<br />
requirements for submittals.<br />
B. Product Data: Submit industry standard and manufacturer’s technical product data,<br />
installation instructions, and dimensioned drawings for each type of pipe and pipe fitting.<br />
C. Submit piping schedule showing pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each<br />
piping system.<br />
D. Submit Welder’s certifications.<br />
23 2113 - 1 HYDRONIC PIPING
E. Submit data on Joining Materials.<br />
F. Submit welding Procedures Specifications.<br />
G. Brazing Certifications: Submit reports as required for piping work.<br />
H. Grooved joint couplings and fittings shall be shown on drawings and product submittals<br />
and shall be specifically identified with the applicable Victaulic style or series number.<br />
1.03 SCHEDULING:<br />
A. Plan the work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other trades. Inform<br />
the General Contractor of openings required in the building structure and coordinate<br />
mechanical equipment locations with the Structural Shop Drawings.<br />
B. Install pipe and duct sleeves and pipe support inserts before concrete is poured.<br />
C. Cutting and patching made necessary by failure to plan the work shall be the responsibility<br />
of this Contractor.<br />
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of pipes and pipe<br />
fittings of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar<br />
service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and<br />
Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.<br />
C. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with the latest revisions of the applicable<br />
sections of B31 of the ANSI/ASME standard codes for pressure piping, noted as follows:<br />
B31.1 – Pressure Piping Code / B31.2 – Fuel Gas Piping Code / B31.5 – Refrigeration<br />
Piping / B31.9 – Building Service Piping Code.<br />
D. Before any welding is performed, the contractor shall submit to the owner, or his<br />
authorized representative, a copy of the Manufacturer's Record of Welder or Welding<br />
Operator Qualification Tests and his Welding Procedure Specification together with the<br />
Procedure Qualification Record as required by Section IX of ASME Boiler and Pressure<br />
Vessel Code.<br />
E. The types and extent of non-destructive examinations required for pipe welds are as shown<br />
in Table 136.4 of the ASME Code for Pressure Piping, ANSI/ASME B31.1 – Power Piping.<br />
If requirements for non-destructive examination are to be other than that stated above, the<br />
degree of examination and basis for rejection shall be a matter of prior written agreement<br />
between the fabricator or contractor and the purchaser.<br />
F. All welding performed on the mechanical systems shall be done following acceptable<br />
procedures by operators qualified for the type of welding and materials being welded.<br />
Each manufacturer or contractor shall be responsible for the quality of welding done by his<br />
organization, whether performed at the job site or in the fabrication shop, and shall repair<br />
or replace any work not in accordance with these specifications.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2113 - 2 HYDRONIC PIPING
G. Soldering and brazing materials and procedures shall conform to applicable sections of<br />
the CDA Copper Tube Handbook and applicable sections of the latest published version of<br />
the ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.<br />
H. To assure uniformity and compatibility of piping components in grooved piping systems,<br />
all grooved products utilized shall be supplied by a single manufacturer including gaskets,<br />
valves, and straining devices. Grooving tools shall be supplied by the same manufacturer<br />
as the grooved components.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 GENERAL:<br />
A. Piping Materials: Provide piping and tubing of type, pressure and temperature ratings,<br />
capacities, joint type, grade, size and weight (wall thickness or class) indicated for each<br />
service. Where type, grade or class is not indicated, provide proper selection as<br />
determined by Installer for installation requirements, and comply with governing<br />
regulations and industry standards.<br />
B. Pipe/Tube Fittings: Provide factory-fabricated fittings of type, materials, grade, class and<br />
pressure rating indicated for each service and pipe size. Provide sizes and types matching<br />
the pipe, tube, valve or equipment connection in each case. Where not otherwise<br />
indicated, comply with governing regulations and industry standards for selections, and<br />
with pipe manufacturer's recommendations where applicable.<br />
2.02 STEEL PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:<br />
A. Black Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B, type E, electric resistance welded.<br />
B. Galvanized Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B.<br />
C. Seamless Steel Pipe: ASTM A-53, Grade B, type S or A106 high temperature.<br />
D. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A-312; Grade TP 304 (high temperature and corrosive service,<br />
1/8” thru 30”).<br />
E. Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Pipe: AWWA C-205.<br />
F. Cast-Iron Flanged Fittings: ANSI B16.1, including bolting (Class 125 and 250).<br />
G. Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.4 (Class 125 and 250).<br />
H. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3; plain or galvanized as indicated (Class<br />
125 and 300).<br />
I. Malleable-Iron Threaded Unions: ANSI B16.30, Class 150, 250 or 300; selected by<br />
Installer for proper piping fabrication and service requirements, including style, end<br />
connections, and metal-to-metal seats (iron, bronze or brass); plain or galvanized as<br />
indicated (Class 150, 250 and 300).<br />
J. Threaded Pipe Plugs: ANSI B16.14.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2113 - 3 HYDRONIC PIPING
K. Steel Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.5, ASTM A-234 (Fire Protection) including bolting and<br />
gasketing of the following material group, end connections and facings, except as<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
Material Group: Group 1.1.<br />
End Connections: Buttwelding.<br />
Facings: Raised-face.<br />
L. Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service: AWWA C-207 (water service piping only).<br />
M. Corrosion-Resistant Cast Flanges/Fittings: MSS SP-51, including bolting and gasketing<br />
(threaded where pressure is not critical).<br />
N. Forged-Steel Socket-Welding and Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.11, except MSS SP-79 for<br />
threaded reducer inserts; rated to match schedule of connected pipe (up to 4” pipe size).<br />
O. Wrought-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: ANSI B16.9, except ANSI B16.28 for short-radius<br />
elbows and returns; rated to match connected pipe.<br />
P. Stainless-Steel Buttwelding Fittings: MSS SP-43.<br />
Q. Stainless-Steel Vic Press 304 Fittings: Use with ½” through 2” Schedule 10S, Type<br />
304/304L stainless steel piping systems up to a maximum 500 psig. Precision cold drawn<br />
stainless steel fittings with Grade “H” HNBR suitable for potable water up to 210 deg. F or<br />
Grade “E” EPDM suitable for hot water up to 250 deg. F and pressure-sealed ends.<br />
R. Stainless-Steel Grooved End Fittings: ANSI /AWWA C606.<br />
S. Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.12.<br />
T. Forged Branch-Connection Fittings: Except as otherwise indicated, provide type as<br />
determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.<br />
U. Pipe Nipples: Fabricated from same pipe as used for connected pipe; except do not use<br />
less than Schedule 80 pipe where length remaining unthreaded is less than 1-1/2” and<br />
where pipe size is less than 1-1/2”, and do not thread nipples full length (no closenipples).<br />
2.03 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS:<br />
A. Copper Tube: ASTM B-88; Type K or L as indicated for each service; hard-drawn<br />
tempered, except as otherwise indicated.<br />
B. DWV Copper Tube: ASTM B-306.<br />
C. ACR Copper Tube: ASTM B-280.<br />
D. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.18.<br />
E. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22.<br />
F. Cast-Copper Solder-joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.23 (drainage and vent with DWV<br />
or tube).<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2113 - 4 HYDRONIC PIPING
G. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Drainage Fittings: ANSI B16.29.<br />
H. Cast-Copper Flared Tube Fittings: ANSI B16.26.<br />
I. Bronze Pipe Flanges/Fittings: ANSI B16.24 (Class 150 and 300).<br />
J. Copper-Tube Unions: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use<br />
in service indicated.<br />
K. Grooved End Copper-Tube Dimensioned Couplings and Fittings: ANSI / AWWA C606.<br />
2.04 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS:<br />
A. Red Brass Pipe: ASTM B-43<br />
B. Cast-Bronze Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.15, Class 125 or 250<br />
C. Cast-Bronze Threadless Fittings: ASTM B-61 or B-62, brazed joints.<br />
2.05 CAST-IRON PRESSURE PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS:<br />
A. Ductile-Iron Pipe: Class 52, ANSI A21.51; AWWA C-151; 350 psi pressure rating.<br />
B. Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water: ANSI<br />
A21.4; AWWA C-104.<br />
C. Polyethylene Encasement for Gray and Ductile Cast-Iron Piping: ANSI A21.5; AWWA C-<br />
105.<br />
D. Cast-Iron Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C-110/A21.10.<br />
E. Gray-Iron Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C-110/A21.10.<br />
F. Ductile-Iron Fittings: ANSI/AWWA C-110/A21.10.<br />
G. Rubber-Gasket Joints: ANSI/AWWA C-111/A21.11.<br />
2.06 GROOVED PIPING PRODUCTS:<br />
A. General: Mechanical grooved pipe couplings and fittings may be used for piping systems<br />
having operating conditions not exceeding 250 deg. F (120 deg. C), excluding steam<br />
piping and any other service not recommended by manufacturer, in lieu of welded,<br />
flanged, or threaded methods.<br />
B. Coupling Housings: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536.<br />
C. Flexible Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages<br />
grooved pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create<br />
seal. Cast in two parts, and secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts.<br />
Permits degree of contraction and expansion as specified in manufacturer's latest<br />
published literature.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2113 - 5 HYDRONIC PIPING
1. Flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors for vibration isolation<br />
at equipment connections. Three couplings, for each connector, shall be placed in<br />
close proximity to the source of vibration.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a) 2” through 8”: Installation Ready, stab-on design, for direct ‘stab’ installation<br />
onto grooved end pipe without prior field disassembly and no loose parts.<br />
Grade “EHP” EPDM gasket suitable for hot water up to 250 deg F. Victaulic<br />
Style 177 QuickVic.<br />
D. Rigid Coupling Housings Description: Grooved mechanical type, which engages grooved<br />
pipe ends, encasing an elastomeric gasket which bridges pipe ends to create seal. Cast in<br />
two parts with angled mating pads which grip the pipe rigidly and force the pipe ends to<br />
their maximum separation. Secured together during assembly with nuts and bolts.<br />
1. Rigid couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors for vibration isolation at<br />
equipment connections. Three couplings, for each connector, shall be placed in<br />
close proximity to the source of vibration.<br />
a) 2” through 8”: Installation Ready, stab-on design, for direct ‘stab’ installation<br />
onto grooved end pipe without prior field disassembly and no loose parts.<br />
Grade “EHP” EPDM gasket suitable for hot water up to 250 deg F. Victaulic<br />
Style 107H QuickVic.<br />
E. Copper-Tube Couplings, 2” through 8”: Installation Ready, stab-on design for direct<br />
‘stab’ installation onto roll grooved copper tube without prior field disassembly and no<br />
loose parts. Housings shall be ASTM A536 ductile iron cast with offsetting, angle-pattern<br />
bolt pads coated with copper-colored enamel, Grade “EHP” EPDM gasket suitable for hot<br />
water up to 250 deg F, and plated steel bolts and nuts. Victaulic Style 607 QuickVic.<br />
F. Stainless Steel Pipe Couplings 2-1/2” to 12”: Two or more segments of cast stainless steel<br />
conforming to ASTM A351, A743, and A744. Gaskets shall be Grade “E” EPDM suitable<br />
for hot water up to 230 deg F, and stainless steel bolts and nuts, Type 316, conforming to<br />
ASTM A193, Grade B8M, Class 2.<br />
1. Rigid Type: Housings cast with key designed to clamp the bottom of the groove to<br />
provide an essentially rigid joint. Victaulic Style 489.<br />
2. Flexible Type: Use in seismic areas and locations where vibration attenuation and<br />
stress relief are required. Victaulic Style 77S.<br />
G. Gaskets: Mechanical grooved coupling design, pressure-responsive so that internal<br />
pressure serves to increase seal's tightness, constructed of elastomers having properties as<br />
designated by ASTM D-2000.<br />
1. Water Services: EDPM Grade E, with green color code identification or Grade<br />
EHP, with red color code identification.<br />
2. Other Services: As recommended by Manufacturer.<br />
H. Bolts and Nuts: Heat-treated carbon steel, ASTM A-183 and A-449, minimum tensile<br />
strength of 110,000 psi. Provide tamper-resistant nuts in exposed locations.<br />
I. Branch Fittings: Similar to coupling, with full circumference gasket and integral branch<br />
outlet in both the housing and gasket.<br />
J. Fittings: Grooved end design to accept grooved mechanical couplings.<br />
23 2113 - 6 HYDRONIC PIPING
1. Ductile Iron: ASTM A-536.<br />
2. Fabricated Steel: ASTM A-53, carbon steel, Schedule 40, Type F, for 3/4” to<br />
4”; Type E or S, Grade B, for 5” to 20”.<br />
3. Steel: ASTM A-234.<br />
4. Wrought Copper and Bronze: ASTM B-75 tube and ASTM B-584 bronze castings<br />
with copper tube dimensioned grooved ends (flaring of tube and fitting ends to IPS<br />
dimensions is not permitted).<br />
5. Galvanized: ASTM A-106, ASTM A-46 or A-536. Couplings for use with AWWAdimensioned<br />
piping shall conform to AWWA C-606. Victaulic Style 31.<br />
6. Stainless Steel Fittings: Fittings shall be manufactured of stainless steel conforming<br />
to ASTM A403, WPW, WPW/S9 or CR/S9, or shall be fabricated from stainless<br />
steel pipe conforming to ASTM A312, with factory grooved ends. Fittings shall be<br />
Type 304/304L or Type 316/316L stainless steel.<br />
K. Grooves: Conform to the following:<br />
1. Standard Steel: Square cut or roll grooved in accordance with manufacturer’s<br />
specifications.<br />
2. Lightweight Steel: Roll grooved.<br />
3. Stainless Steel: Square cut or roll grooved in accordance with manufacturer’s<br />
specifications. Schedule 10 pipe shall be roll grooved only.<br />
4. Cast or Ductile Iron: Radius cut grooved, AWWA C-606.<br />
L. All other pipe products shall conform to the requirements of the Division 15 sections.<br />
Acceptance of grooved pipe systems does not imply acceptance of the coupling<br />
manufacturer’s valves, flow measuring stations, strainers, or other specialties.<br />
M. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grooved piping products<br />
by one of the following:<br />
Anvil International – Gruvlok.<br />
Grinnell Mechanical Products, Div. of Tyco.<br />
Victaulic Company of America (Design Basis).<br />
2.07 JOINING MATERIALS:<br />
A. Welding Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide lead- and zinc-free welding<br />
materials as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.<br />
1. Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding<br />
materials.<br />
B. Soldering Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide silver soldering materials.<br />
1. Above Ground: 95-5 Tin-Antimony, ASTM B-32, Grade 95TA (lead-free type).<br />
2. All refrigeration piping and all below-ground water piping: Silver-Tin-Copper<br />
Alloy, ASTM B-32 (NSF).<br />
C. Brazing Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide brazing materials to comply with<br />
installation requirements.<br />
1. Comply with AWSA 5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for<br />
brazing filler metal materials.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2113 - 7 HYDRONIC PIPING
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Copper phosphorus – BCuP.<br />
b. Silver – BAg<br />
D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: ANSI B16.21; full-faced for cast-iron flanges; raised-face for<br />
steel flanges, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Piping Connectors for Dissimilar Non-Pressure Pipe: Elastomeric annular ring insert, or<br />
elastomeric flexible coupling secured at each end with stainless steel clamps, sized for<br />
exact fit to pipe ends and subject to approval by plumbing code.<br />
F. Pipe Thread Sealant Material: Except as otherwise indicated, provide all pipe threads with<br />
the sealant material as recommended by the manufacturer for the service.<br />
2.08 PIPING APPLICATION:<br />
1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping thread<br />
sealant material. “Tyte-Unyte” for general use and Acorn no. 3500 for cleanouts.<br />
A. Natural Gas Piping:<br />
1. Above Grade:<br />
a. Exposed locations:<br />
i. 2” and smaller: Schedule 40 black steel pipe, beveled ends, with<br />
150 psi malleable iron fittings and threaded joints.<br />
ii. Larger than 2”: Schedule 40 black steel pipe with seamless steel<br />
butt-weld fittings and welded joints.<br />
b. Inaccessible Locations:<br />
2. Below Grade:<br />
i. All sizes: Schedule 40 seamless black steel pipe, beveled ends,<br />
with socket-weld fittings same thickness as pipe, and welded<br />
joints.<br />
a. Within Building: Schedule 40 seamless black steel with 150 psi forged<br />
steel fittings and welded joints. Provide piping with machine-applied<br />
coating and wrapping in accordance with local code and utility company<br />
requirements. Provide cathodic protection as called for on the drawings.<br />
b. Outside of Building: Polyethylene (PE) pipe, as approved by local utility<br />
company and code authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
B. Space Heating Water, Chilled Water, and Condenser Water Piping:<br />
1. 2-1/2” and smaller:<br />
a. Schedule 40 black steel with 150 psi malleable iron threaded fittings; or<br />
Type L copper tube, ASTM B-88, with wrought copper or bronze fittings<br />
per ANSI B16.22, brazed or lead-free soldered.<br />
2. 3” and larger:<br />
23 2113 - 8 HYDRONIC PIPING
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Schedule 40 seamless black steel with flanged or welded joints.<br />
b. Fittings: Standard weight seamless steel, butt-weld type.<br />
c. Flanges: 150 psi forged steel slip-on or welding neck type.<br />
d. Bolting: Regular square head machine bolts with heavy hexagonal nuts.<br />
e. Gaskets: Material, type and thickness suitable for fluid to be handled, at<br />
design temperature and pressures.<br />
C. Equipment Drains, Condensate Drains and Overflows:<br />
1. Type “M” or “DWV” copper.<br />
D. Refrigerant Piping (field installed):<br />
1. Type "K" hard-drawn copper tubing with wrought copper silver soldered fittings<br />
and couplings; or type “L” copper, refrigerant grade, color coded and marked<br />
“ACR” (cleaned, dehydrated, and capped at the factory), using wrought copper<br />
fittings with brazed joints. Soft-annealed copper tubing may be used in sizes up to<br />
1-3/8”, and, when used, shall be enclosed in iron or steel piping or in conduit,<br />
molding or raceway which will protect said tubing against damage.<br />
E. Diesel Generator Exhaust:<br />
1. Schedule 40 black steel with all welded joints.<br />
F. Fuel Oil Piping:<br />
1. Refer to Section 231113 – Fuel Oil Systems.<br />
G. Chemical Treatment or Cooling Tower Bypass Filter Piping:<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION:<br />
1. PVC Class 12454-B, schedule 80, with schedule 80 threaded pressure fittings.<br />
A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all water distribution piping may<br />
be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, original design, and the<br />
referenced standards.<br />
B. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having water<br />
connections in order to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.<br />
C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 PIPING INSTALLATION:<br />
A. General: Install pipes and pipe fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices<br />
which will achieve permanently leak-proof piping systems, capable of performing each<br />
indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with minimum joints and<br />
couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and<br />
23 2113 - 9 HYDRONIC PIPING
maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use<br />
of reducing fittings. Make pipe runs straight and true. Align piping accurately at<br />
connections, within 1/16” misalignment tolerance.<br />
1. Comply with ANSI B31 Code for Pressure Piping.<br />
2. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run piping through transformer vaults and<br />
other electrical or electronic equipment spaces and enclosures. Only piping<br />
serving this type of equipment space shall be allowed.<br />
3. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams)<br />
indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and<br />
arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss,<br />
expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical,<br />
install piping as indicated.<br />
4. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.<br />
5. Install piping at right angles, parallel or at right angles to the building walls, and<br />
as high as possible. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.<br />
6. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings,<br />
and below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.<br />
7. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent<br />
elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation application, with 1”<br />
clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling<br />
panels to allow for panel removal.<br />
8. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit application of<br />
insulation and servicing of valves.<br />
9. Provide for complete drainage of water systems. At all low points in mains, risers,<br />
and branch lines, provide drains consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4” ball valve, and<br />
short 3/4” threaded-end nipple and cap with chain.<br />
10. Install all piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to<br />
permit proper insulation application.<br />
11. Fire and Smoke Wall Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire and smoke<br />
rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire and smoke rated<br />
integrity. Refer to Division 23, Sections 230517 for materials.<br />
12. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using<br />
sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals (see Section 15120). Pipe sleeves smaller<br />
than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal.<br />
13. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction.<br />
14. Coordinate penetrations through foundation and all other structural penetrations<br />
with structural engineer.<br />
15. Install hangers and guides as necessary to provide piping systems which are selfsupporting<br />
and not dependent upon connection to equipment. All piping shall be<br />
adequately supported from the building structure with adjustable hangers to<br />
maintain uniform grading where required and to prevent sagging and pocketing.<br />
16. Allow flexibility in the erection of the piping system in order to prevent excessive<br />
stresses in materials and joints due to thermal expansion or equipment vibration.<br />
Provide sufficient swing joints, anchors, expansion loops, expansion joints, and/or<br />
other devices as necessary, and install so as to permit free expansion and<br />
contraction without causing undue stresses. Make all changes in direction with<br />
fittings. Support piping independently at all equipment so that its weight shall not<br />
be supported by the equipment. Provide bracing where necessary to prevent<br />
swaying.<br />
17. At high points of all piping, install manual air vents consisting of a line size nipple<br />
6 inches long for an air collection chamber, pipe cap on top of nipple with 1/4<br />
inch top, and 1/4 inch copper tubing with gauge cock. Locate gauge cock at<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2113 - 10 HYDRONIC PIPING
accessible location and anchor to adjacent pipe or wall. Provide access panels as<br />
required for access.<br />
18. Provide shutoff valves and unions or flanges to isolate each item of equipment,<br />
branch circuit, or section of piping. Unions shall be provided at each threaded<br />
valve (manual or automatic) and at all equipment having threaded connections.<br />
19. Arrange piping and valves near each piece of equipment to allow for complete<br />
service and maintenance of the equipment without disturbing the shutoff valves.<br />
20. Provide dielectric unions or "Clearflow" fittings at all junctions of dissimilar metals<br />
in fresh water systems.<br />
21. Use full lengths of pipe; short lengths with couplings will not be permitted. All<br />
pipe sections shall be de-burred to full I.D. before joining.<br />
22. Extend chains for valve operators to 6'-3" above the floor or platform. Brace<br />
extension handles and provide a means of indicating open and closed positions.<br />
23. All piping installed below grade (unless factory pre-insulated) shall be spiral<br />
wrapped with 10 mil PVC tape (Scotchwrap No. 50 or equal) with 50% overlap,<br />
and laid in bed of sand with 3” minimum cover on all sides unless otherwise<br />
noted. Compaction per Division 2.<br />
B. Hydronic Piping:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Fittings shall be double-wrapped with second layer extended a minimum<br />
of 12” beyond fittings.<br />
1. Make reductions in hydronic pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with<br />
the level side up.<br />
2. Install hydronic piping branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main with<br />
take-off out the bottom of the main, except for up-feed risers, which shall have<br />
take-off out the top of the main line. Install all hydronic piping level with manual<br />
air vent at all high points in direction of flow.<br />
3. Install hydronic piping level except for gravity flow systems such as condenser<br />
water and condensate drain piping.<br />
C. Refrigerant Piping:<br />
1. General: Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15, "The<br />
Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration."<br />
2. Make joints smooth and unconstricted inside and out, and ream pipe ends<br />
thoroughly to remove all burrs.<br />
3. Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize pressure<br />
drop.<br />
4. Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other fittings<br />
as possible.<br />
5. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and other<br />
equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for<br />
servicing and inspection.<br />
6. Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers, and<br />
between pipes, for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or<br />
ceilings, sized to permit installation of full thickness insulation.<br />
7. Insulate all refrigerant lines.<br />
a. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all<br />
leaks have been eliminated.<br />
8. Install branch tie-in lines to parallel compressors at equal length, and pipe<br />
identically and symmetrically.<br />
23 2113 - 11 HYDRONIC PIPING
9. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing<br />
may be exposed to possible mechanical injury.<br />
10. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Install horizontal hot gas discharge piping with 1/2 inch per 10 feet<br />
downward slope away from the compressor.<br />
b. Install horizontal suction lines with 1/2 inch per 10 feet downward slope<br />
to the compressor, with no long traps or dead ends which may cause oil<br />
to separate from the suction gas and return to the compressor in<br />
damaging slugs.<br />
c. Install traps and double risers where indicated, and where required to<br />
entrain oil in vertical runs.<br />
d. Liquid lines may be installed level.<br />
D. Condensate Drain Piping:<br />
1. Condensate drain piping from air conditioning unit coil condensate drain pans<br />
shall be of the sizes shown on the drawings.<br />
2. Slope condensate lines minimum 1/8 inch per foot.<br />
E. Natural Gas Piping:<br />
1. Provide 6” drip leg for piping trapped by change of grade and at final connection<br />
to equipment.<br />
3.03 PIPING SYSTEM JOINTS:<br />
A. General: Provide joints of type indicated for each piping system.<br />
B. Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.<br />
Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint<br />
compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer,<br />
on male threads at each joint, and tighten joint to leave not more than three threads<br />
exposed.<br />
C. Braze copper tube-and-fitting joints in accordance with ASME B-31.<br />
D. Solder copper tube-and-fitting joints with silver solder or 95-5 tin-antimony solder. Cut<br />
tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and<br />
inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full<br />
depth into fitting, and solder in a manner which will draw solder to full depth and<br />
circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.<br />
E. Welding:<br />
1. All welding on piping, including tack welding, shall be performed by welders currently<br />
qualified and certified for the applicable welding process. A file shall be<br />
maintained, for examination upon <strong>request</strong>, of all qualified welding procedures<br />
and the names of the qualified welders performing this work.<br />
2. Examine the inside of each length of piping to ensure it is free from dirt and<br />
obstructions. If obstructed in any way, the pipe shall be swabbed out before being<br />
incorporated into the system.<br />
23 2113 - 12 HYDRONIC PIPING
3. Before and after piping fabrication, all flanges, threaded connections, and<br />
beveled pipe ends shall be protected with end protectors and suitable grease to<br />
prevent corrosion and damage until installed into the system.<br />
4. Before welding, the end of the pipe and fittings shall be cleaned of rust, scale, dirt,<br />
grease, protective coating, or other foreign matter which might affect the quality of<br />
the welds.<br />
5. When pipes of different wall thicknesses are to be welded together, the end of the<br />
thicker pipe shall be smoothly tapered to the wall thickness of the thinner pipe.<br />
The taper angle shall not be more than 30° from the axis of the pipe.<br />
6. Before welding, the piping shall be aligned as required in ASME Code for Pressure<br />
Piping B-31.<br />
7. Pipe, flanges, and fittings damaged during fabrication or shipment shall be<br />
replaced. Any damaged sections shall be removed from the job site.<br />
8. The necessity of preheating of welds and the temperature used are requirements<br />
of the welding procedure. If the metal temperature is below 32°F, local<br />
preheating to a temperature warm to the hand is required for materials which<br />
otherwise do not require preheating.<br />
9. The preparation of butt-welded ends of pipe, welding neck flanges, pipe fittings,<br />
and any other piping component, including valves which are butt-welded into the<br />
piping system, shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.25 with the following<br />
exceptions:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. No permanent backing rings shall be used.<br />
b. Use of consumable inserts is permitted and encouraged as a means of<br />
obtaining required weld quality.<br />
10. Spacers may be used in fitting up pipe and weld fittings for tack welding to a<br />
proper gap for full penetration welds. Small tack welds which penetrate to the<br />
bottom of the welding groove shall be used. Tack welds lacking full penetration<br />
are not acceptable and shall be removed.<br />
11. All pipe welds that allow visual inspection on the inside and that can be reached<br />
by hand shall be inspected by the welder immediately after welding, and the<br />
following actions shall be taken:<br />
a. Weld spatter, flux, and debris shall be removed.<br />
b. Excessive penetration shall be removed by grinding.<br />
c. Areas without penetration or fusion shall be ground to sound metal and<br />
repair welded.<br />
12. Cleaning of excessive flux shall be performed between welding passes using wire<br />
brushing or grinding.<br />
13. Flanges welded to pipe spools shall be oriented with the bolt-holes straddling the<br />
centerlines established on the piping drawings. Take precautions throughout<br />
fabrication not to mar the gasket face on flanges.<br />
F. Flanged Joints: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and<br />
equipment. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform<br />
compression of gaskets.<br />
G. Hubless Cast-Iron Joints: Comply with coupling manufacturer's installation instructions.<br />
H. Stainless Steel Pressure-Sealed Joints: Install in accordance with manufacturer's latest<br />
recommendations. Follow the instructions listed in the latest Victaulic I-500 assembly<br />
manual. Schedule 10S stainless steel pipe shall be square cut, +/- 0.030", properly<br />
23 2113 - 13 HYDRONIC PIPING
deburred and cleaned. Pipe ends shall be marked at the required location to ensure full<br />
insertion into the coupling or fitting during assembly. Use a Victaulic "PFT" series tool with<br />
the proper sized jaw for pressing.<br />
3.04 GROOVED PIPING SYSTEMS:<br />
A. All changes in direction shall be made with radius type elbows.<br />
1. Use long radius (R=1.5D) fittings wherever possible.<br />
2. Angles less than 22-1/2° may be made with pre-manufactured mitered fittings.<br />
3. Use of the angular deflection capabilities of grooved pipe couplings for intentional<br />
changes of direction shall not be allowed.<br />
B. All changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings, not bushings or reducing<br />
couplings.<br />
C. All branch outlets shall be made with Victaulic Style 920/920N Mechanical-T® bolted<br />
branch outlets for branches more than four pipe sizes smaller than the main, or Victaulic<br />
No. 25 or W25 grooved end reducing tees.<br />
D. Pipe shall be adequately laterally supported to prevent "pipe squirm." Provide a minimum<br />
of one hanger per pipe section. No pipe section shall be left unsupported between any<br />
two couplings.<br />
E. Risers more than 8’ high shall be made with rigid type couplings.<br />
F. Rigid style couplings shall be used in mechanical rooms, except where flexible style<br />
couplings are specifically allowed for thermal expansion compensation and/or vibration<br />
isolation, and to accommodate seismic movement.<br />
G. Flanges shall be standard welded slip-on or weld neck with a spool piece to a grooved<br />
end joint. "Flange adapters" are not allowed.<br />
H. Grooved pipe systems shall not be considered to be electrically conductive.<br />
1. Provide wire jumpers across all couplings where the piping system is required to<br />
be electrically conductive.<br />
I. Flexible couplings may be used for vibration elimination.<br />
1. Follow manufacturer’s recommendations.<br />
2. Provide 3 degrees of freedom by installing sufficient flexible couplings in different<br />
orientations.<br />
3. Use spring hangers for all sections of pipe intended for deflection.<br />
4. Roll-grooved fittings and pipe shall be considered to have 1/2 the deflection of<br />
cut-grooved fittings and pipe.<br />
J. Victaulic Style 177, 77 or W77 flexible couplings may be used in lieu of flexible connectors<br />
for vibration isolation at equipment connections. Three (3) couplings, for each connector,<br />
shall be placed in close proximity to the source of vibration.<br />
K. Grooved joint piping systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's<br />
guidelines and recommendations. All grooved couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2113 - 14 HYDRONIC PIPING
shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same<br />
manufacturer as the grooved components.<br />
L. The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the<br />
intended service as specified. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by Victaulic.<br />
M. Grooved end shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks in the<br />
area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing.<br />
N. A Victaulic factory-trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor's<br />
field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved piping<br />
products. Factory-trained representative shall periodically review the product installation.<br />
Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.<br />
3.05 EXPOSED PIPING IN FINISHED AREAS:<br />
A. Plumbing piping and fittings which are exposed (and uninsulated) in finished areas<br />
generally occupied by people, including, but not limited to, kitchens, animal<br />
cagewash/equipment washing rooms, hospital autoclave or sterilizing rooms, shall be<br />
installed with a smooth, high polish, durable chrome-plated finish.<br />
3.06 PIPING TESTS:<br />
A. General: Provide temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Test<br />
piping system before insulation is installed, wherever feasible; and remove control devices<br />
before testing. Test each natural section of each piping system independently, but do not<br />
use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure<br />
rating. Fill each section with water, and pressurize for indicated pressure and time<br />
duration.<br />
B. Test all piping systems as specified. Correct leaks by remaking joints. Remove equipment<br />
not able to withstand test procedure during test.<br />
C. Work to be installed shall remain uncovered until the required tests have been completed.<br />
D. Piping which is to be concealed shall be tested before being permanently enclosed.<br />
E. When work has been completed, conduct preliminary tests to ascertain compliance with<br />
specified requirements. Make repairs or replacements as required.<br />
F. Give a minimum of twenty-four hours notice to Engineer of dates when acceptance test will<br />
be conducted. Conduct tests as specified for each system in presence of representative of<br />
agency having jurisdiction or his representative.<br />
G. Submit three (3) copies of successful test report to the Engineer for his review. Report shall<br />
state the following: Date of test, lines tested, test medium, length of time, test pressure<br />
held, pressure drop or rise, and extent of venting or repressurizing.<br />
H. Contractor shall obtain certificates of approval, acceptance and compliance with<br />
regulations of agencies having jurisdiction. Work shall not be considered complete until<br />
such certificates have been delivered by the Engineer to the Owner.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2113 - 15 HYDRONIC PIPING
I. All costs involved in these tests shall be borne by Contractor. Should contractor refuse or<br />
neglect to make any test necessary to satisfy the Architect/Engineer, such test may be made<br />
by an independent testing company and Contractor charged for all expenses.<br />
J. System Tests<br />
1. Hydrostatic Test: The test shall be accomplished by hand pumping the system to<br />
the specified water pressure, and maintaining that pressure until the entire system<br />
has been inspected for leaks, but in no case for a time period of less than eight<br />
hours.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Domestic water systems: 100 psig or 150% of system pressure, whichever<br />
is greater.<br />
b. Heating water system: 100 psig or 150% of operating pressure,<br />
whichever is greater.<br />
c. Chilled water system: 100 psig or 150% of system pressure, whichever is<br />
greater.<br />
d. Condenser water system: 100 psig or 150% of system pressure,<br />
whichever is greater.<br />
e. Compressed air system: 150 psig or 150% of system pressure, whichever<br />
is greater.<br />
f. Gas: 100 psig air test.<br />
2. Compressed Air or Nitrogen Test: Compressed air tests may be substituted for<br />
hydrostatic tests only when ambient conditions or existing building conditions or<br />
prohibit safe use of hydrostatic testing and must be reviewed by the Engineer prior<br />
to any testing. For tests of this type, the piping system shall be subjected to the<br />
gas pressure indicated for that specific system. The piping shall be capped or<br />
plugged and water-pumped with oil-free air, or nitrogen from a bottle shall be<br />
introduced into the entire system to the pressure specified. The system shall<br />
maintain that pressure for the duration of a soapy water test of each joint.<br />
3. Waste, Drain and Vent Piping: All waste and vent piping, including building<br />
drain, roof drain and building sewer, shall be subjected to a water test. All<br />
openings in the piping system shall be tightly closed, except the highest opening,<br />
and the system filled with water to the point of overflow. The water shall be kept<br />
in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 15 minutes before inspection<br />
starts; the system shall then be tight to all points. No section shall be tested with<br />
less than a ten foot head of water. Roof drain piping shall be closed at the lowest<br />
point and filled with water to the point of overflow.<br />
4. Sump Pump Discharge: With water in sump and pump running at full capacity,<br />
check for leaks until satisfied that system is tight.<br />
5. Test all refrigerant piping systems with nitrogen at 300 psig pressure on high side<br />
of system, and at 150 psig pressure on low side of system. Maintain pressure<br />
without loss for a time period of not less than 4 hours. After test has been<br />
completed, the piping shall be evacuated by means of a vacuum pump for a<br />
period of not less than 24 hours or until system has been completely evacuated.<br />
6. Repair piping systems sections which fail required piping test, by disassembly and<br />
re-installation, using new materials to extent required to eliminate leakage. Do<br />
not use chemicals, stop-leak compounds, mastics, or other temporary repair<br />
methods.<br />
7. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been<br />
completed.<br />
23 2113 - 16 HYDRONIC PIPING
3.07 UNDERGROUND PIPE INSTALLATION:<br />
A. Clean fittings, nipples and other field joints thoroughly before coating.<br />
B. Protect gray and ductile cast iron pipe installed below grade with polyethylene encasement<br />
applied in strict accordance with ANSI/AWWA C-105/A21.5.<br />
C. Install ductile iron pipe below grade as prescribed by AWWA C-600.<br />
D. Provide concrete thrust block and 3/4” threaded steel tie bar at each change of direction<br />
on underground pressure pipe. Imbed tie bar in thrust block and connect to upstream<br />
fitting. Paint tie bar with two coats of bitumastic #50 paint.<br />
E. Bury all outside domestic water, waste, and storm piping minimum 5’-0” below grade<br />
(earth cover below finish grade) to top of pipe.<br />
3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Preparation for testing: Prepare hydronic piping in accordance with ASME B-31.9 and as<br />
follows:<br />
1. Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during the<br />
test.<br />
2. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints which cannot sustain the<br />
reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate<br />
expansion joints from testing.<br />
3. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers.<br />
4. Isolate equipment that is not to be subjected to the test pressure from the piping.<br />
If a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing<br />
against the test pressure without damage to the valve.<br />
5. Install relief valve set at a pressure not more than 1/3 higher than the test<br />
pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of<br />
overpressurization during the test.<br />
B. Testing: Test hydronic piping as follows:<br />
1. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium, except where there is a risk<br />
of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workmen<br />
and compatible with the piping system components.<br />
2. Use vents, installed at high points in the direction of flow, in the system to release<br />
trapped air while filling the system. Use drains installed at low points for complete<br />
removal of the liquid. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot<br />
withstand test pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure<br />
that it is tight and that low-pressure filling lines are disconnected.<br />
4. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the<br />
system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not<br />
exceed the maximum pressure rating for any vessel, pump, valve, or other<br />
component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to<br />
pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of<br />
specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the “SE” value in Appendix A of<br />
ASME B31.9, Code For Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping.<br />
5. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least four hours,<br />
examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2113 - 17 HYDRONIC PIPING
tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat<br />
hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.<br />
6. “Stop-Leak” compounds shall not be added to the system at any time.<br />
3.09 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. General: Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping systems of superfluous materials, and<br />
prepare for application of specified coatings (if any). Flush out piping systems with clean<br />
water before proceeding with required tests. Inspect each run of each system for<br />
completion of joints, supports and accessory items.<br />
1. Inspect pressure piping in accordance with procedures of ASME B31.<br />
B. Disinfect all potable water mains and water service piping in accordance with local health<br />
department requirements. Submit test results report.<br />
C. Clean and flush hydronic piping systems. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.<br />
After cleaning and flushing hydronic piping system, but before balancing, remove<br />
disposable fine mesh strainers in pump suction diffusers.<br />
D. Mark calibrated nameplates of pump discharge valves after hydronic system balancing<br />
has been completed, to permanently indicate final balanced position.<br />
E. Chemical Treatment: Provide hydronic systems with a water analysis prepared by the<br />
chemical treatment supplier to determine the type and level of chemicals required for<br />
prevention of scale and corrosion. Perform initial treatment after completion of system<br />
testing.<br />
3.10 STERILIZATION:<br />
A. Each unit of domestic water supply and distribution system shall be sterilized with liquid<br />
chlorine or hypochlorite before acceptance for operation, in accordance with American<br />
Water Works Association G601 “Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.” Work shall be<br />
done by contractor, and, unless otherwise required by legally constituted authorities having<br />
jurisdiction, sterilization shall conform to the following:<br />
B. Materials:<br />
1. Liquid Chlorine: U.S. Army Specification No. 4-1.<br />
2. Hypochlorite: Liquid shall conform to FS 0-C-114a, and Int. Amendment 3,<br />
Grade D.<br />
3. Method: Amount of chlorine used shall provide a concentration of not less than<br />
50 parts per million.<br />
4. Introduce chlorination material into lines and distribution system in manner<br />
approved by the Architect/ Engineer.<br />
5. After a contact period of not less than 24 hours, during which period chlorine<br />
residual shall be maintained at not less than five parts per million, flush out<br />
systems with clean water until residual content is not greater than 0.2 parts per<br />
million.<br />
6. Flush entire system, including all hose bibs, fixture outlets, dead ends, and other<br />
points where stagnant water may collect.<br />
7. Open and close valves in lines being sterilized several times during contact period.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2113 - 18 HYDRONIC PIPING
3.11 COMMISSIONING:<br />
8. Furnish a copy of test report of complete and adequate sterilization to the<br />
Architect/Engineer before final acceptance of work. Certificates shall bear<br />
signature of an official of laboratory responsible for test.<br />
A. Fill system and perform initial chemical treatment.<br />
B. Check expansion tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that the system is<br />
completely full of water.<br />
C. Before operating the system, perform the following steps:<br />
1. Open valves to full open position. Close coil bypass valves.<br />
2. Remove and clean strainers.<br />
3. Check pump for proper rotation and proper wiring.<br />
4. Set automatic fill valves for required system pressure.<br />
5. Check air vents at high points of systems and determine if all are installed and<br />
operating freely (automatic type) or able to bleed air completely (manual type).<br />
6. Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.<br />
7. Check operation of automatic bypass valve.<br />
8. Check and set operating temperatures of boilers, chillers, and cooling towers to<br />
design requirements.<br />
9. Lubricate motors and bearings.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 2113<br />
23 2113 - 19 HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 2123<br />
HYDRONIC PUMPS<br />
A. This Section includes the furnishing and installation of HVAC pumps and accessories.<br />
Extent of HVAC pump work required by this Section is indicated on drawings and<br />
schedules, and by requirements of this Section.<br />
B. Types of pumps specified in this Section include the following:<br />
1. Vertical In-Line<br />
2. Frame-Mounted End Suction<br />
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for other work that is not work of this Section.<br />
D. Provide the following electrical work as work of this Section, complying with requirements<br />
of Division 26 sections:<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and pump<br />
control panels.<br />
a. Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic Temperature<br />
Controls is work of that section.<br />
A. Hydraulic Institute Compliance: Design, manufacture and installation of HVAC pumps<br />
shall be in accordance with “Hydraulic Institute Standards.”<br />
B. UL Compliance: Provide HVAC pumps that are listed and labeled by UL and comply with<br />
UL Standard 778 “Motor Operated Water Pumps.”<br />
C. All pump motors shall be NEMA rated and UL listed.<br />
D. Nameplates showing pump manufacturer’s name, model and/or serial number, impeller<br />
size, and motor data shall be clearly visible. If impeller has been trimmed from standard<br />
size, this information shall appear on the nameplate also.<br />
E. Certified performance data including vibration criteria shall be furnished for all custom<br />
and non-cataloged pumps.<br />
F. Standards:<br />
1. Hydraulic Institute (HI)<br />
2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)<br />
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)<br />
4. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)<br />
23 2123 - 1 HYDRONIC PUMPS
5. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)<br />
6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)<br />
7. Electrical Testing Laboratories (ETL)<br />
8. National Electrical Code (NEC)<br />
G. Certification of Pump Performance: Provide pumps whose performance, under specified<br />
operating conditions, is certified by manufacturer.<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up<br />
instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves, including pump<br />
curve and system curves, with selection points clearly indicated. Motors shall be selected<br />
for operation at site altitude.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating<br />
dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of<br />
components. Include manufacturer’s standard pump and motor balance (vibration)<br />
criteria.<br />
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring<br />
to HVAC pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and<br />
control wiring. Diagrams shall clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are<br />
factory-installed and portions to be field-installed.<br />
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems<br />
products in accordance with requirements of Division 23.<br />
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for each type of pump,<br />
control, and accessory, including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data,<br />
product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in the Operating and Maintenance<br />
Manual, in accordance with requirements of Division 23.<br />
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Handle HVAC pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking denting and<br />
scoring. Do not install damaged HVAC pumps or components; replace with new.<br />
B. Store HVAC pumps and components in a clean, dry place. Protect from weather, dirt,<br />
fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.<br />
C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading HVAC<br />
pumps and moving them to final location.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each applicable category:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2123 - 2 HYDRONIC PUMPS
2.02 PUMPS:<br />
1. Vertical In-Line Pumps:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.<br />
b. Taco<br />
c. Bell & Gossett, Inc.<br />
d. Peerless Pumps<br />
e. Paco<br />
2. Frame-Mounted End Suction Pumps:<br />
a. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.<br />
b. Taco<br />
c. Bell & Gossett, Inc.<br />
d. Paco<br />
e. Peerless Pumps<br />
A. General: Provide factory-tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned, and painted with one coat of<br />
machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type, size, and capacity of each pump is listed in<br />
pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by one manufacturer.<br />
B. Pump motor shall be sized so as not to be overloaded at any point along impeller curve<br />
for specified performance.<br />
C. All pump couplers shall be suitable for both constant speed and variable speed operation.<br />
2.03 VERTICAL IN-LINE PUMPS:<br />
A. General: Provide bronze-fitted vertical in-line pumps where indicated, and of capacities as<br />
scheduled.<br />
B. Type: Vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled, single-stage, designed for 175 psi<br />
working pressure.<br />
C. Body: Cast iron, with 125 psi ANSI rated flanges of equal size, and tappings for gauge<br />
and drain fittings.<br />
D. Shaft: Steel with replaceable shaft sleeve.<br />
E. Seal: Mechanical seal with ceramic seal seat.<br />
F. Motor: Pump motor shall be non-overloading at any point on pump curve, open dripproof<br />
type, and shall meet requirements of Section 230513.<br />
G. Impeller: Bronze enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft<br />
and secured with locking screw. Assembly components shall be of type 304 stainless steel.<br />
2.04 FRAME-MOUNTED END SUCTION PUMPS:<br />
23 2123 - 3 HYDRONIC PUMPS
A. General: Provide frame-mounted bronze-fitted end suction pumps where indicated, and<br />
of capacities and characteristics as scheduled.<br />
B. Type: Horizontally mounted, single-stage, vertical split-case with flexible coupling, basemounted,<br />
designed for 175 psi working pressure.<br />
C. Casing: Cast iron, with 125 psi ANSI rated flanges and tappings for gauge and drain<br />
connections.<br />
D. Shaft: Steel with replaceable shaft sleeve.<br />
E. Bearings: Regreaseable ball bearings.<br />
F. Seal: Mechanical, with carbon seal ring and ceramic seat.<br />
G. Motor: Pump motor shall be non-overloading at any point on pump curve and shall meet<br />
requirements of Section 230513.<br />
H. Impeller: Bronze enclosed type, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft<br />
and secured with locking screw. Assembly components shall be type 304 stainless steel.<br />
I. Baseplate: Structural steel with welded cross members and open grouting area.<br />
J. Coupling: Flexible, capable of absorbing torsional vibration, and equipped with coupling<br />
guard.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EQUIPMENT BASES:<br />
A. Supervise construction of concrete equipment pads as follows:<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION:<br />
1. Form concrete pads using framing lumber with form release compounds.<br />
Chamfer top edge and corners of pad.<br />
2. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves using<br />
manufacturer’s installation template.<br />
3. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of pumps. Use Portland<br />
Cement conforming to ASTM C150, 4,000 psi compressive strength, and normal<br />
weight aggregate.<br />
A. General: Comply with the manufacturer’s written installation and alignment instructions.<br />
B. Install pumps in locations and in such an arrangement as to provide access for periodic<br />
maintenance, including removal of motors, impellers, couplings and accessories.<br />
C. Support pumps and piping separately so that the weight of the piping system does not<br />
bear on the pump.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2123 - 4 HYDRONIC PUMPS
D. Suspend in-line pumps using all-thread hanger rods and vibration isolation hangers of<br />
sufficient size to support the weight of the pump independent from the piping system.<br />
Separate suspension is not required for in-line booster and circulating pumps unless<br />
recommended by manufacturer.<br />
E. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling halves before<br />
setting. Do not reconnect couplings until the alignment operations have been completed.<br />
3.03 CONNECTIONS:<br />
1. Support pump baseplate on rectangular metal blocks and shims or on metal<br />
wedges having a small taper at points near the foundation bolts to provide a gap<br />
of 3/4" to 1-1/2” between the pump base and the foundation for grouting.<br />
2. Adjust the metal supports or wedges until the shafts of the pump and driver are<br />
level. Check the coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of the pump to<br />
verify that they are level and plumb.<br />
A. Install suction and discharge pipes of sizes equal to or greater than the diameter of the<br />
pump nozzles.<br />
B. Install a non-slam check valve, balancing valve, and shut-off valve on the discharge side<br />
of all pumps. The check valve shall be installed at a minimum of four pipe diameters from<br />
the pump discharge connection.<br />
C. Install a shut-off valve and strainer on the suction side of all pumps.<br />
D. Install a pump suction diffuser on the suction side of base-mounted, end-suction pumps,<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Install flexible connectors on the suction and discharge sides of each base-mounted pump.<br />
Install flexible connectors between the pump casing and the discharge valves and<br />
upstream of the pump suction diffuser.<br />
F. Install pressure/temperature test plugs on the suction and discharge of each pump housing<br />
using the integral gauge tapings provided.<br />
3.04 ALIGNMENT:<br />
1. Install pressure gauge with shut-offs where shown.<br />
2. Install other pressure/temperature test plugs in piping around pumps as shown.<br />
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundations, after<br />
grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and after other piping<br />
connections have been made.<br />
1. Adjust alignment of pump and motor shafts for angular and parallel alignment by<br />
one of the two methods specified in the Hydraulic Institute guide “Centrifugal<br />
Pumps – Instruction for Installation, Operation, and Maintenance”.<br />
2. Alignment tolerances shall meet manufacturer’s recommendations.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 2123 - 5 HYDRONIC PUMPS
B. After alignment is correct, tighten the foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly. Fill the<br />
baseplate completely with non-shrink, non-metallic grout, with metal blocks and shims or<br />
wedges in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.<br />
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Check suction line connections for tightness to avoid drawing air into the pump.<br />
3.06 START-UP:<br />
A. Final checks before start-up: Perform the following preventative maintenance operations<br />
and checks before start-up:<br />
1. Lubricate oil- and/or grease-lubricated bearings.<br />
2. Check that pump is free to rotate by hand. For pumps handling hot liquids, pump<br />
shall be free to rotate with the pump hot and cold. If the pump is bound or even<br />
drags slightly, do not operate the pump until the cause of the trouble is<br />
determined and corrected.<br />
3. Check motor for proper rotation. Rotation shall match direction of rotation<br />
marked on pump casing.<br />
B. If the pump is to be started against a closed check valve with the discharge gate valve<br />
open, the steps are the same, except that he discharge gate valve is opened some time<br />
before the motor is started.<br />
3.07 CLEANING:<br />
A. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with<br />
manufacturer’s touch-up paint.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 2123<br />
23 2123 - 6 HYDRONIC PUMPS
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 3113<br />
METAL DUCTS<br />
A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements<br />
of this Section.<br />
DUCT SERVICE TYPE/CONSTRUCTION<br />
Supply air between fans and terminal units<br />
(medium and high pressure).<br />
Supply air from discharge of terminal units/fans<br />
to air devices (low pressure).<br />
Galvanized steel; spiral, round, oval, or<br />
rectangular (lined where noted on drawings);<br />
factory fabricated.<br />
Galvanized sheet metal; spiral, round, oval or<br />
rectangular (lined where noted on drawings);<br />
factory or shop fabricated.<br />
Return air ductwork. Galvanized sheet metal (lined where noted on<br />
drawings); factory or shop fabricated.<br />
General building exhaust. Galvanized sheet metal (lined where noted on<br />
drawings); factory or shop fabricated.<br />
Transfer ducts. Galvanized sheet metal, internally lined, as<br />
described above for low-pressure supply;<br />
factory or shop fabricated.<br />
Sound elbows for R.A. grilles Galvanized sheet metal (internally lined).<br />
OR<br />
Fibrous glass ductboard.<br />
Outdoor air intake ductwork. Galvanized sheet metal, rectangular; factory or<br />
shop fabricated.<br />
Exterior uninsulated ductwork. Aluminum, 304 SS, or painted galvanized steel.<br />
Pool room supply/Exhaust, Shower, locker room Aluminum with silicone sealant.<br />
exhaust.<br />
B. Exterior insulation of metal ductwork is specified in other Division 23 sections, and is<br />
included as work of this section.<br />
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork accessories.<br />
D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for fans and air handling units.<br />
E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of metal ductwork<br />
systems.<br />
1.02 DEFINITIONS:<br />
A. Low Pressure Duct: Duct required by the drawings, specifications, or referenced standards<br />
to be constructed to 2” w.g. or less positive or negative pressure class.<br />
23 3113 - 1 METAL DUCTS
B. Medium or High Pressure Duct: Duct required by the drawings, specifications, or<br />
referenced standards to be constructed to greater than 2” w.g. positive or negative<br />
pressure class.<br />
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork<br />
products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory<br />
use in similar service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on<br />
projects with metal ductwork systems similar to those required for this project.<br />
C. References to SMACNA, ASHRAE, and NFPA are minimum requirements. The Contractor<br />
shall fabricate, construct, install, seal and leak test all ductwork as described in this<br />
specification and as shown on the drawings, in addition to the minimum requirements of<br />
these standard references.<br />
D. Codes and Standards:<br />
1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA “HVAC Duct <strong>Construction</strong> Standards,<br />
Metal and Flexible” for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. Comply<br />
with SMACNA “HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual” for testing of duct systems.<br />
2. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A, “Standard for the Installation of Air<br />
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,” and NFPA 90B, “Standard for the<br />
Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.”<br />
E. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of<br />
SMACNA “HVAC Duct <strong>Construction</strong> Standards, Metal and Flexible,” and SMACNA “HVAC<br />
Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.”<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions<br />
for ductwork materials and products. Provide product data for manufactured joining<br />
systems. Include sound attenuation by octave band for sound rated flexible duct.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit ¼” scaled fabrication and layout drawings of metal ductwork and<br />
fittings including, but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of<br />
horizontal runs; wall and floor penetrations; and connections. Show interface and spatial<br />
relationship between ductwork and proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated<br />
requirements, made to conform to local shop practice, and how those modifications<br />
ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not reduced.<br />
C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems, in<br />
accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 and 23.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials<br />
and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in the<br />
Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with requirements of Divisions 1 and<br />
23.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3113 - 2 METAL DUCTS
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated ductwork, accessories and<br />
purchased products from damage during shipping, storage, and handling. Prevent end<br />
damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.<br />
B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where<br />
necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
1. Duct Liner:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. CertainTeed Corp.<br />
b. Johns Manville<br />
c. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.<br />
d. Pittsburgh Corning Corp.<br />
2. Flexible Ducts:<br />
a. Flexmaster<br />
b. Hart & Cooley<br />
c. Hercules Industries<br />
d. Thermaflex<br />
3. Duct Take-Off Fittings:<br />
a. Flexmaster<br />
b. Thermaflex<br />
c. Ominair<br />
d. Hercules Industries<br />
4. Round and Flat Oval Ductwork (low, medium, and high pressure):<br />
2.02 DUCTWORK MATERIALS:<br />
a. Semco Mfg., Inc.<br />
b. United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp.<br />
c. Sheet Metal Products Co.<br />
d. Spiral Pipe of Texas, Inc.<br />
e. Hercules Industries<br />
A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is exposed to view in occupied spaces,<br />
provide materials which are free from visual imperfections, including pitting, seam marks,<br />
roller marks, stains, dents, discolorations, size markings, and other imperfections,<br />
including those which would impair painting.<br />
23 3113 - 3 METAL DUCTS
B. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel<br />
complying with ASTM A-527, lock forming quality; with G-90 zinc coating in accordance<br />
with ASTM A-525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations. Provide flat seam<br />
construction where standing seams are a hazard to the Owner’s operation personnel.<br />
C. Stainless Steel Sheet: Where indicated, provide stainless steel complying with ASTM A-<br />
167; type 304 or 316; and with No. 4 finish where exposed to view in occupied spaces,<br />
No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill-applied adhesive protective<br />
paper, maintained through fabrication and installation.<br />
D. Aluminum Sheet: Where indicated, provide aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B-209,<br />
Alloy 3003, Temper H14.<br />
E. Uncoated carbon steel shall comply with ASTM A-569, hot rolled steel sheet.<br />
2.03 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS:<br />
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated, and,<br />
where not otherwise indicated, provide types and sizes required to comply with ductwork<br />
system requirements, including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.<br />
B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15 deg.<br />
elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 deg. branches are indicated, provide<br />
conical type tees.<br />
C. Duct Liner: Fibrous glass, complying with ASTM C1071; of thickness indicated.<br />
1. Unless otherwise noted, provide 1” thick, 1½ lb/cu.ft. density fiberglass duct liner<br />
meeting ASTM C-1071 Type I, NFPA 90A and 90B, and TIMA AHC-101, with<br />
minimum NRC (noise reduction coefficient) of 0.70 as tested per ASTM C-423<br />
using an “A” mounting with minimum “K” factor of 0.25. Liner shall be U.L.<br />
approved, made from flame attenuated glass fiber bonded with a thermosetting<br />
resin with acrylic smooth surface treatment and factory applied edge coating.<br />
Materials shall conform to revised NFPA 90A standards, with a maximum flame<br />
spread rating of 25 and a maximum smoke development rating of 50.<br />
D. Duct Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C-916, “Specifications for Adhesives for Duct<br />
Thermal Insulation.”<br />
E. Duct Liner Fasteners: Comply with SMACNA HVAC Duct <strong>Construction</strong> Standards, Article<br />
S2.11.<br />
F. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, of type<br />
applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by<br />
manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.<br />
G. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped<br />
galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.<br />
1. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel support<br />
materials.<br />
2. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials, except where<br />
materials are electrolytically separated from ductwork.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3113 - 4 METAL DUCTS
H. Flexible Ducts: Flexible air ducts shall be listed under UL-181 standards as Class I Air Duct<br />
Material and shall comply with NFPA Standards 90A and 90B. Minimum operating<br />
pressure rating shall be 6” W.C. through a temperature range of -20° to 150°F; minimum<br />
working velocity rating shall be 4000 f.p.m. Contractor shall assume responsibility for<br />
supplying material approved by the authority having jurisdiction.<br />
1. All insulated flexible ducts shall be constructed of a metalized ripstop reinforced<br />
laminate inner core; 1-1/2” thick, ¾ lb./cu.ft. density fiberglass insulation with<br />
“C” factor of 0.23 or less; and an outer jacket made exclusively of fire retardant<br />
reinforced aluminized material.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Flexmaster Type 5M.<br />
I. Duct Takeoff Fittings: Provide spin-in fittings at flexible or round sheet metal duct takeoffs<br />
to air devices. Fittings downstream of air terminals shall include butterfly type manual<br />
volume damper with end bearings, regulator, and locking device.<br />
J. See details on drawings for installation requirements.<br />
K. All fasteners and hardware for stainless steel ductwork shall be made of stainless steel.<br />
2.04 FABRICATION:<br />
A. Fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10, or 12-ft lengths, unless otherwise indicated or as required<br />
to complete runs. Pre-assemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize<br />
field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and<br />
handling. Match-mark systems for reassembly and coordinated installation.<br />
B. Fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA “HVAC Duct<br />
<strong>Construction</strong> Standards.” Use minimum 26 ga. where ducts are within corridors.<br />
1. Where the Standard allows the choice of external reinforcing or internal tie rods,<br />
only the external reinforcing options shall be used.<br />
2. If manufacturer flange joining systems are used as part of the reinforcing, the EI<br />
rating and rigidity class shall be equivalent to the reinforcing requirements of the<br />
Standard. Submit manufacturer’s product data.<br />
3. Aluminum duct shall be fabricated using the aluminum thickness equivalence table<br />
in the Standard. Simply increasing the thickness by two gauges is not acceptable.<br />
C. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as<br />
applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line<br />
radius equal to 1.5 times the associated duct width; fabricate to include turning vanes in<br />
elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 deg. for contracting<br />
tapers and 20 deg. for expanding tapers. Divided flow fittings shall be 45° inlet branches,<br />
stationary splitters and elbows, or as shown on drawings.<br />
D. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent<br />
possible. Refer to Division 23 section “Ductwork Accessories” for accessory requirements.<br />
E. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate liner<br />
to internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining and<br />
23 3113 - 5 METAL DUCTS
adhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners. Provide sheet metal nosing on all leading<br />
edges preceded by unlined duct, at duct openings, and at fan or terminal unit connections.<br />
2.05 LOW PRESSURE ROUND DUCTWORK:<br />
A. Material: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A-527, lockforming quality, with<br />
ASTM A-525, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized. Spiral lockseam construction.<br />
Individual runouts to diffusers may be longitudinal seam.<br />
B. Gauge: 28 gauge minimum for round and oval ducts and fittings 4” through 24” in<br />
diameter. Minimum 26 gauge where ducts are within a corridor.<br />
C. Elbows: One-piece construction for 90 deg. and 45 deg. elbows 14” diameter and<br />
smaller. Provide multiple gore construction for larger diameters, with standing seam<br />
circumferential joint. Radius to centerline shall be 1.5 times duct diameter. Spot-welded<br />
D. Divided Flow Fittings: 90 deg. tees, constructed with branch spot-welded and bonded to<br />
duct fitting body.<br />
2.06 MEDIUM AND HIGH PRESSURE ROUND AND FLAT OVAL DUCTWORK:<br />
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings.<br />
B. Duct gauges given below are minimum values; in no case shall the duct gauge be less<br />
than that recommended by SMACNA for the operation pressures of the systems shown on<br />
the drawings (both positive and negative pressures), including proper reinforcement.<br />
C. Elbows: One-piece construction for 90 deg. and 45 deg. elbows 14” diameter and<br />
smaller. Provide multiple gore construction for larger diameters, with standing seam<br />
circumferential joint. Radius to centerline shall be 1.5 times duct diameter. Fully welded<br />
construction.<br />
D. Divided Flow Fittings: Full body fittings with solid welded construction. Provide conical<br />
laterals, conical tees, 45° inlet tees, wye fittings, or as shown on drawings. Straight tap<br />
tees shall not be used.<br />
E. Round Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A-527 by the<br />
following methods and in minimum gauges listed.<br />
Diameter Minimum Gauge Method of Manufacture<br />
3” to 14” 26 Spiral Lockseam<br />
15” to 26” 24 Spiral Lockseam<br />
27” to 36” 22 Spiral Lockseam<br />
37” to 50” 20 Spiral Lockseam<br />
51” to 60” 18 Spiral Lockseam<br />
Over 60”<br />
16<br />
18<br />
Longitudinal Seam<br />
Spiral Lockseam<br />
1. Provide locked seams for spiral duct; fusion-welded butt seam for longitudinal<br />
seam duct. Provide internal stiffener rings and external reinforcement as required<br />
to meet operating static pressures scheduled on drawings.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3113 - 6 METAL DUCTS
2. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous<br />
welds along seams.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
Diameter Minimum Gauge<br />
3” to 14” 24<br />
15” to 26” 22<br />
28” to 50” 20<br />
52” to 60” 18<br />
Over 62” 16<br />
F. Flat-Oval Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A-527,<br />
using spiral lockseam construction, in minimum gauges listed.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
Maximum Width Minimum Gauge<br />
Under 25” 24<br />
25” to 48” 22<br />
49” to 70” 20<br />
Over 70” 18 (or 16 ga. with longitudinal welded seam)<br />
1. Fittings and Couplings: Construct of minimum gauges listed. Provide continuous<br />
weld along seams.<br />
Maximum Width Minimum Gauge<br />
Under 37” 20<br />
37” to 59” 18<br />
Over 59” 16<br />
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed.<br />
Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK:<br />
A. Duct Sealing:<br />
1. Seal all low-pressure ducts to SMACNA Seal Class “B”.<br />
2. Seal all medium and high-pressure ducts to SMACNA Seal Class “A”.<br />
B. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices,<br />
which will achieve airtight and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems capable of<br />
performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align<br />
ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8” misalignment tolerance and with internal<br />
surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of<br />
types that will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling, popping or compressing.<br />
Support vertical ducts at every floor.<br />
C. onstruct ductwork to schedule of operating pressures as shown on drawings.<br />
23 3113 - 7 METAL DUCTS
D. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork, as<br />
required to avoid delays in work.<br />
E. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shopfabricated<br />
work and accommodate installation requirements.<br />
F. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally<br />
and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details<br />
and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not<br />
obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold<br />
ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent<br />
enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to ½” where furring is shown for enclosure<br />
or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate<br />
insulated ductwork for 1” clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished<br />
and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow<br />
wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid<br />
partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and<br />
lighting layouts and similar finished work.<br />
G. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through transformer vaults and their<br />
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.<br />
H. Slope shower, locker room, and high moisture ductwork down to air device.<br />
I. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through fire rated walls and do not contain fire or smoke<br />
dampers, protect with fire stop material installed in accordance with its listing. Where<br />
ducts pass through interior partitions or exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal<br />
space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges<br />
of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on all four sides by at least 1-1/2”, and fasten<br />
flange to duct only. Where ducts penetrate non-fire rated walls which are mechanically,<br />
electrically or acoustically sensitive, provide ½” to ¾” annular space between duct and<br />
wall, pack annular space with mineral wool insulation, and caulk both sides with nonhardening<br />
acoustical sealant.<br />
J. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil<br />
frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.<br />
K. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct <strong>Construction</strong><br />
Standards.<br />
L. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air<br />
distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of<br />
polyethylene film or other covering which will prevent entrance of dust and debris until<br />
time connections are to be completed.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER:<br />
A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct <strong>Construction</strong><br />
Standards.<br />
3.04 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3113 - 8 METAL DUCTS
A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 5’-0”.<br />
B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA’s “HVAC Duct <strong>Construction</strong><br />
Standards, Metal and Flexible.”<br />
3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Leakage Tests: Conduct duct leakage test in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct<br />
Leakage Test Manual. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage is less than the<br />
maximum permissible leakage as specified below.<br />
B. General:<br />
1. Ductwork pressure tests shall be observed by Architect/Engineer prior to<br />
installation of insulation.<br />
2. Ductwork systems in 3” W.G. pressure class and higher shall be tested in their<br />
entirety for leaks. Arbitrary sections of ductwork in 2” W.G. and lower pressure<br />
class shall be tested as required by Architect/Engineer.<br />
3. Test Failures: Duct systems shall be repaired if test pressure and leakage<br />
requirements are not met or if air noise condition is encountered. Repairs and<br />
sealing shall be done with sheet metal, tape, sealant or a combination thereof.<br />
C. Test Equipment:<br />
1. Portable rotary type blower or tank type vacuum cleaner with control damper.<br />
Equipment shall have sufficient capacity to properly test reasonably large duct<br />
system section.<br />
2. Orifice assembly consisting of straightening vanes and calibrated orifice plate<br />
mounted in a straight tube with properly located pressure taps.<br />
3. Two (2) U-tube manometers, one to measure drop across calibrated orifice and<br />
one to measure S.P. in duct being tested. Provide low differential pressure Dwyer<br />
magnehelic gauges for low leak testing in lieu of U-tube manometers.<br />
4. Provide Dwyer magnehelic gauge with 0-.25” W.C. range for testing 0% leakage<br />
ductwork.<br />
D. Testing Pressures and Permissible Leakage:<br />
1. Test pressure shall be equal to the construction class. Negative pressure duct shall<br />
be tested at the equivalent positive pressure.<br />
2. Allowable leakage shall be determined from the following equation (or figure 4-1<br />
in the above referenced Standard):<br />
F = C L (P) .65<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
Where: F = Allowable leakage factor in CFM/100 Sq. Ft.<br />
C L = Leakage Class<br />
P = Test pressure in inches W.C.<br />
3. Leakage class shall be as follows:<br />
a. Seal class A, round or oval duct: C L = 3.<br />
b. Seal class A, rectangular duct: C L = 6.<br />
c. Seal class B, round or oval duct: C L = 6.<br />
23 3113 - 9 METAL DUCTS
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
d. Seal class B, rectangular duct: C L = 12.<br />
e. Seal class C, round or oval duct: C L = 12.<br />
f. Seal class C, rectangular duct: C L = 24.<br />
4. Record all tests using the procedure and forms in the above referenced Standard.<br />
5. All plenums and casings shall be tested by pressurizing to the pressure class<br />
indicated and visually observing leakage and panel deflection.<br />
3.06 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:<br />
a. No noticeable leakage shall be allowed.<br />
b. Deflection shall be less than 1/8” per foot.<br />
A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated; provide flexible connection<br />
for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or<br />
equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors where required for<br />
service, maintenance and inspection of ductwork accessories. See Section 15910.<br />
3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external<br />
surfaces of foreign substances. Where ductwork is to be painted, clean and prepare<br />
surface for painting.<br />
B. Protection:<br />
1. Store duct a minimum of 4” above ground or floor to avoid damage from weather<br />
or spills.<br />
2. Cover all stored ducts to protect from moisture or debris.<br />
3. Cover all ends of installed ductwork at the end of each workday or when dust-<br />
and debris-producing construction (such as fire proofing, drywalling, sanding, or<br />
core drilling) is occurring.<br />
C. Ductwork contaminated or damaged above “shop” or “mill” conditions shall be cleaned,<br />
repaired or replaced to the Engineer’s satisfaction.<br />
1. Ductliner pre-installed in stored duct which has become wet may be installed if<br />
first allowed to completely dry out.<br />
2. Ductliner in installed ductwork which has become wet must be completely<br />
removed and replaced.<br />
3. Torn ductliner may be repaired by coating with adhesive if damage is minor and<br />
isolated. Extensively damaged liner shall be replaced back to a straight cut joint.<br />
D. Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it has<br />
been damaged.<br />
E. Balancing: Refer to Division 23 section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing” for air<br />
distribution balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this Section. Seal any leaks in<br />
ductwork that become apparent during the balancing process.<br />
END OF SECTION 23 3113<br />
23 3113 - 10 METAL DUCTS
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 3300<br />
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following:<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
1. Manual Volume Dampers.<br />
2. Control Dampers.<br />
3. Counterbalanced Relief Dampers.<br />
4. Fire Dampers.<br />
5. Smoke Dampers.<br />
6. Combination Fire/Smoke Dampers<br />
7. Turning Vanes.<br />
8. Duct Hardware.<br />
9. Duct Access Doors.<br />
10. Flexible Connections.<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork<br />
accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in<br />
similar service for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of<br />
ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.<br />
C. UL Compliance: Fire dampers shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance<br />
with UL Standard 555, "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers," and U.L. Standard 555S,<br />
"Motor-Driven Fire/Smoke Dampers."<br />
D. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A, "Air Conditioning<br />
and Ventilating Systems," pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.<br />
E. SMACNA Compliance: All exhaust ducts shall comply with "Fire Damper and Heat Stop<br />
Guide."<br />
F. All fire dampers, smoke dampers, fire/smoke dampers and radiation dampers shall meet<br />
the latest local building code requirements.<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork<br />
accessory, including dimensions, capacities, materials of construction, and installation<br />
instructions.<br />
23 3300 - 1 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type of<br />
ductwork accessory, showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening<br />
or support, and methods of assembly of components. Include details of construction<br />
equipment and accessories being provided.<br />
C. Submittals for all damper types specified in this Section shall include a schedule for each<br />
damper indicating net free area, actual face velocity and pressure drop (at sea level)<br />
based on net free area, and the maximum air quantity which will be passing through the<br />
damper. Submittals without this information will be rejected.<br />
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems<br />
products, in accordance with requirements of Division 23.<br />
E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each<br />
type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in the<br />
Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with requirements of Division 15.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
1. Dampers:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Greenheck<br />
b. AWV<br />
c. Air Balance, Inc.<br />
d. Anemostat<br />
e. Arrow Louver and Damper; Div. of Arrow United Industries, Inc.<br />
f. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.<br />
g. Penn Ventilator Co.<br />
h. Dowco Corp.<br />
i. Airstream Products, Inc.<br />
j. Cesco-Advanced Air<br />
k. Phillips Industries, Inc., Conaire Division<br />
l. Ruskin<br />
m. Vent Products, Inc.<br />
2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers:<br />
a. Greenheck<br />
b. Air Balance, Inc.<br />
c. Phillips Industries, Inc., Conaire Division<br />
d. Ruskin<br />
3. Turning Vanes:<br />
a. Aero Dyne Co.<br />
b. Airsan Corp.<br />
c. Barb-Aire<br />
23 3300 - 2 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
d. Duro Dyne Corp.<br />
e. Environmental Elements Corp., Subs. of Koppers Co., Inc.<br />
f. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co.<br />
4. Duct Hardware:<br />
a. Ventfabrics, Inc.<br />
b. Young Regulator Co.<br />
5. Duct Access Doors:<br />
a. Kess<br />
b. Greenheck<br />
c. Flexmaster (Inspector Series)<br />
d. Cesco-Advanced Air<br />
e. Duro Dyne Corp.<br />
f. Ventfabrics, Inc.<br />
6. Flexible Connections:<br />
a. Duro Dyne Corp.<br />
b. Ventfabrics, Inc.<br />
c. General Rubber Corp. (Process Exhaust Only)<br />
7. Constant Velocity Exhaust Fan Dampers:<br />
2.02 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS:<br />
a. American Warming and Ventilating<br />
A. Low Pressure Rectangular Dampers (less than 2000 FPM and under 4” W.C. S.P.<br />
Differential):<br />
1. For 12” in height or larger, use multiple opposed blade type and close fitted to<br />
ducts. The frame and blades shall be constructed of 16 ga. galvanized steel with<br />
carbon steel shaft mounted with oil-impregnated bronze/stainless steel bearings.<br />
Dampers shall be fitted with aluminum/stainless steel jamb seals and dual<br />
durometer vinyl/silicone blade edge seals. Linkage shall be in-jamb fixed type<br />
located outside the air stream and made of plated steel tie bar and crank plates,<br />
with stainless steel pivots. / on-blade fixed type located within the air stream and<br />
made of galvanized steel interconnected with plated steel brackets and pivots.<br />
Damper panels shall not exceed 48” wide. Provide jack shafting when duct size<br />
required is greater than 48” wide. Provide notched shaft end indicating damper<br />
position, locking quadrant to fix damper position, and handle. For flat oval and<br />
round ductwork, provide type C housing.<br />
2. For ducts less than 12” in height, frame shall be 16 ga. galvanized steel, with 20<br />
ga. galvanized steel blades, steel axle with nylon bearings, locking quadrant<br />
handle, and notched shaft end indicating damper position.<br />
OR<br />
Aluminum frame with stainless steel bearings.<br />
23 3300 - 3 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
B. Low Pressure Round Dampers (less than 1500 FPM and under 1” W.C. S.P. differential):<br />
1. Dampers 4” diameter through 18” diameter shall have 18 ga. galvanized steel<br />
frame and the following blade construction:<br />
4”-12” diameter, 22 ga. galvanized steel; 13”-18” diameter, 20 ga. galvanized<br />
steel.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
Axle shaft shall be carbon steel with retainers mounted on nylon bearings with<br />
notched end shaft indicating damper position, locking quadrant and handle.<br />
C. Medium/High Pressure Rectangular Dampers (less than 4000 FPM and under 6” W.C. S.P.<br />
(48” wide or less) or 8” W.C. S.P. (36” wide or less)):<br />
1. Dampers shall be opposed blade for volume control and parallel blade for<br />
isolation/shut-off service.<br />
2. Frame shall be 16 ga. galvanized steel with welded corners / 1/8 inch thick 6063-<br />
T5 alloy aluminum frame. Blades shall be double skin galvanized steel with<br />
single-lock seam / .081" thick 6060-T5 extruded aluminum, airfoil shape. Blade<br />
edge seals shall be double durometer vinyl and metallic compression seals at the<br />
jambs. Axles shall be solid carbon steel mounted on bronze oilite bearings.<br />
Linkage shall be in-jamb type located outside the airstream. Maximum damper<br />
size shall be 48” wide and 60” high. For fixed position balancing damper, delete<br />
blades to maintain 30% free area with all other damper blades 100% closed. For<br />
isolation or shut-off duty, damper leakage shall not exceed 9.5 CFM/sq.ft. at 4”<br />
W.C. S.P. differential. Provide extended shaft with notched end indicating damper<br />
position, locking quadrant, and handle.<br />
Air Balance Model AC-S15/AC-S16 (steel)<br />
OR<br />
Air Balance Model AC-52S/AC-S26 (aluminum)<br />
D. Medium/High Pressure Round and Flat Oval Dampers (less than 3000 FPM and under 4”<br />
W.C. S.P. differential):<br />
1. Damper frame construction shall be galvanized steel as follows:<br />
ROUND<br />
Under 6” diameter 12 gauge<br />
6” to 18” diameter 14 gauge<br />
20” to 30” diameter 2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel<br />
32” to 42” diameter 2 x 1 x 1/8 channel<br />
FLAT OVAL<br />
6” to 18” wide 2 x 1/2 x 14 gauge channel<br />
19” to 48” wide 2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel<br />
49” to 72 wide ( 6” to 18” high) 2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel<br />
(19” to 26” high) 2 x 1/2 x 1/8 channel<br />
2. Amper blades shall be galvanized steel as follows:<br />
23 3300 - 4 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
ROUND<br />
4” to 12” diameter 14 gauge<br />
14” to 18” diameter 12 gauge<br />
20” to 42” diameter 10 gauge<br />
FLAT OVAL<br />
6” to 12” wide 14 gauge<br />
13” to 18” wide 12 gauge<br />
20” to 42” wide 10 gauge<br />
3. Axles shall be ½” diameter galvanized steel up to 18” diameter and 18” wide flat<br />
oval, and ¾” diameter plated steel sleeve pressed into the frame with stainless<br />
steel thrust washers with nylon/oil impregnated bronze bearings for larger sizes.<br />
4. Provide notched end shaft to indicate damper position, locking quadrant, and<br />
lever handle.<br />
5. For fixed position balancing damper, provide reduced blade area to provide 30%<br />
free area with damper 100% closed.<br />
6. Isolation or shut-off service dampers shall be provided with EPT edge seals with a<br />
leakage rate not to exceed 7 CFM/sq.ft. at 1” W.C. S.P. differential (based on 18”<br />
diameter).<br />
2.03 COUNTERBALANCED PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPERS:<br />
A. For velocities less than 3000 FPM and under 2” W.C. S.P. differential, provide dampers<br />
with parallel blades, counterbalanced and factory-set, field adjustable, to relieve at<br />
indicated static pressure. Construct blades of 16 ga. aluminum, and provide ½” diameter<br />
ball bearings, with ½” diameter steel axles spaced on 9” centers. Construct frame of 2” x<br />
½” x 1/8” steel channel for face areas 25 sq. ft. and under, and 4” x 1-1/4” x 16 ga.<br />
channel for face areas over 25 sq. ft. Provide galvanized steel finish on frame with<br />
aluminum touch-up.<br />
B. For velocities above 3000 FPM and static pressure differential above 2” W.C., provide<br />
dampers with parallel blades, counterbalanced and factory-set, field adjustable to start to<br />
open at indicated pressure. Construct blades of 16 gauge galvanized steel up to 32”<br />
length and 14 gauge over 32” length, ¾” diameter plated steel full length axles,<br />
relubricable ball bearings, heavy duty carbon steel linkage located out of airstream, 10<br />
gauge galvanized steel frame, silicone blade edge seals and silicone jamb seal, full<br />
flanges on both sides, mill finish with touch-up on welds, and prime coat on black steel.<br />
2.04 FIRE DAMPERS:<br />
A. Fabricated Fire Dampers: Provide dampers constructed in accordance with SMACNA "Fire<br />
Damper and Heat Stop Guide."<br />
B. Fire Dampers: Provide dynamic rated type B or C fire dampers except as noted on<br />
drawings. Construct sleeve of galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish,<br />
gauge as required by the listing. All fire dampers shall be UL labeled. Provide fusible link<br />
rated at 160 to 165 deg. F (71 to 74 deg. C) unless otherwise indicated. See architectural<br />
drawings for the separations and listings. Provide horizontal mounted fire damper with<br />
positive lock in closed position, and with the following additional features:<br />
23 3300 - 5 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
1. Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain Type.<br />
2. Blade Material: Galvanized steel.<br />
C. Provide integral sleeve type G fire dampers for sidewall air devices terminating at fire rated<br />
walls. Ruskin DIBD20-G or equivalent.<br />
2.05 SMOKE DAMPERS:<br />
A. Motor-Driven Smoke Dampers: Provide UL labeled, Class II, motor-driven smoke<br />
dampers in sizes indicated, with frame constructed of 16-ga. steel, type 304 stainless steel<br />
side seals, silicone edge seals, bronze oilite or stainless steel sleeve bearings, airfoil<br />
shaped galvanized steel formed interlocking blades, with factory mounted actuator motor,<br />
motor mounting bracket, along with the following features:<br />
1. Temperature Class 350°F.<br />
2. Out-of-airstream in-jamb linkage with stainless steel pivots.<br />
3. Factory sleeve.<br />
4. Factory mounted 24V/120V spring return electric actuator.<br />
B. Where indicated on drawings, or where required by the sequence of controls, provide<br />
factory mounted blade position switches to indicate fully open and fully closed.<br />
C. Damper actuator shall fail open or close (upon coordination with smoke control) upon loss<br />
of power.<br />
D. UL 555S & Class II<br />
E. Leakage not greater than 10 CFM per square foot at 1” W.C. pressure differential.<br />
F. Ruskin Model SD60-II<br />
2.06 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS:<br />
A. Provide UL labeled, Class II minimum, motor-driven combination fire/smoke dampers in<br />
sizes indicated, with type 304 stainless steel side seals, combination silicone/galvanized<br />
steel edge seals, bronze oilite or stainless steel sleeve bearings, airfoil shaped galvanized<br />
steel parallel acting blades along with the following features.<br />
1. Out-of-airstream in-jamb linkage with stainless steel pivots.<br />
2. Factory sleeve, red enamel finish, caulked and attached to damper in accordance<br />
with UL fire damper requirements.<br />
B. Provide factory mounted pneumatic spring return actuator, 120V/24V electro pneumatic<br />
valve, and an automatic reset thermal release device set to close the damper at<br />
165°F/212°F. In addition, provide a second manual reset thermal release device set to<br />
close the damper when the duct temperature is above the damper's degradation<br />
temperature. Provide factory mounted and wired terminal strip to allow field connection of<br />
normal and override circuits. "Normal" circuit shall be through both thermal release<br />
devices; "override" circuit shall bypass first thermal release device but shall include second<br />
high limit device. The damper shall at all times be connected to the actuator. Damper<br />
closure shall be controlled to not less than 7 seconds and not more than 15 seconds.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3300 - 6 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Replaceable fusible elements are not acceptable. Actuator shall be suitable for 20 psi<br />
control air.<br />
C. Where indicated on the drawings or indicated in the sequence of control, provide factory<br />
mounted blade position switches to indicate fully open and fully closed.<br />
D. Damper actuator shall fail closed upon loss of power/control air.<br />
E. 1½-hour or 3-hour rating as required by construction type.<br />
F. UL 555, 555S, Class II, 350°F.<br />
G. Suitable for vertical or horizontal mounting.<br />
H. Leakage not greater than 10 CFM per square foot at 1” W.C. pressure differential.<br />
I. Ruskin FSD60<br />
2.07 TURNING VANES:<br />
A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated 24 gauge double bladed, 4-1/2” radius, 3-<br />
1/4” spacing turning vanes and type 2, 4-1/2” wide runners, constructed in accordance<br />
with SMACNA “HVAC Duct <strong>Construction</strong> Standards," Fig 2.3.<br />
B. Do not use trailing edge turning vanes.<br />
2.08 DUCT HARDWARE:<br />
A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on<br />
project, for the following:<br />
1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as<br />
indicated, duct test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests.<br />
2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each manual volume damper, quadrant lock device<br />
on one end of shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over<br />
12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for<br />
externally insulated ductwork.<br />
2.09 DUCT ACCESS DOORS:<br />
A. Access Doors for Low Pressure Rectangular Duct: Construct of same or greater gauge as<br />
ductwork served; provide double wall insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide flush<br />
frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct. All access<br />
doors shall have gasket and shall be air tight. Provide one side hinged; provide other side<br />
with one handle-type latch for doors 12” high and smaller, two handle-type latches for<br />
larger doors. Where a hinged door cannot be fully opened, a removable door may be<br />
used.<br />
B. Access Doors for Medium and High Pressure Rectangular Duct: Insulated double wall<br />
round door and frame arranged for "Spin-In" installation, with continuous gasket in frame<br />
for door. Leakage of less than 0.5 CFM at 6” W.G.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3300 - 7 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Flexmaster "Inspector Series Spin Door," or equivalent.<br />
C. Access Doors for Round Duct 20” and Less: Sandwich type door, constructed of an<br />
insulated double wall outer door connected to gasketed inner plate carriage bolts with<br />
hand knobs, and formed to fit the radius of the duct.<br />
Ductmate "Sandwich" or equivalent.<br />
D. Access Door for Round Duct Greater Than 20”: 18” round insulated double wall access<br />
door in gasketed frame, attached to duct section similar to tee fitting.<br />
E. Access Doors for Flat Oval Duct: Use door specified for medium and high pressure<br />
rectangular duct in flat portion; use door specified for round duct in curved portion.<br />
2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibrationisolated<br />
equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric<br />
crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint.<br />
Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional<br />
movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment. Shelf life<br />
shall be verified to not exceed six (6) months. Any sign of cracking on interior or exterior<br />
shall be cause for replacement immediately.<br />
B. Use the following product types for each application accordingly:<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
1. Indoor Equipment Non-Corrosive Air Systems: Heavy glass fabric, double-coated<br />
with DuPont's NEOPRENE, noncombustible fabric, fire retardant coating with good<br />
resistance to abrasion and flexing. Fabric shall be 30 oz per square yard, capable<br />
of operating at -10°F to 2000°F, waterproof, air tight, 6 inches wide, compliant<br />
with NFPA 90 and UL Standard #214. “Ventglas" model as manufactured by<br />
VentFabrics, Inc.<br />
2. Outdoor Equipment Non-Corrosive Air Systems (exposed to weather and sun):<br />
Heavy glass fabric, double-coated with DuPont's HYPALON, non-combustible<br />
fabric, fire retardant coating with superb resistance to sunlight, ozone and<br />
weather, and which has documented 20-year-old exposure tests. Fabric shall be<br />
26 oz. per square yard, capable of operating at -10°F to 250°F, waterproof, air<br />
tight, 6 inches wide, and compliant with NFPA 90 and UL Standard #214.<br />
“Ventlon” Model as manufactured by VentFabrics, Inc.<br />
3. High Temperature Non-Corrosive Air Systems: Heavy glass fabric coated with<br />
silicone rubber, non-combustible fabric, fire retardant coating, capable of<br />
operating and maintaining flexibility between temperatures of -25°F to 500°F.<br />
Fabric shall be 16 oz. per square yard, waterproof, air tight, 6 inches wide, and<br />
compliant with NFPA 90, UL Standard #214. “Ventsil” Model as manufactured by<br />
VentFabrics, Inc.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3300 - 8 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not<br />
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner<br />
acceptable to the Engineer.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES:<br />
A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions,<br />
with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in<br />
accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that products serve intended<br />
function.<br />
B. Install turning vanes in square and rectangular 90 deg. elbows in supply, return and<br />
exhaust air systems, and elsewhere as indicated.<br />
C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either<br />
side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.<br />
D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of<br />
ductwork accessories properly with other work.<br />
E. Provide duct access doors, whether shown or not, for inspection and cleaning upstream of<br />
all coils, fans, automatic dampers, fire dampers (minimum 16” x 24” in ducts larger than<br />
18”), fire/smoke dampers, duct smoke detectors and elsewhere as indicated. Review<br />
locations prior to fabrication. Provide multiple access doors for large ductwork to provide<br />
adequate reach to equipment.<br />
F. Install fire dampers and smoke dampers in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.<br />
G. Provide fire dampers and smoke dampers at locations shown where ducts and outlets pass<br />
through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
H. Provide balancing dampers at points on low-pressure supply, return, and exhaust systems<br />
where branches are taken from larger ducts and as required for air balancing.<br />
I. Provide balancing dampers on high-pressure systems where indicated. Use splitter<br />
dampers only where indicated on Drawings.<br />
J. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with<br />
fans and equipment subject to forced vibration. Provide matching flanged backing frame<br />
with flexible connector where flanged fan connections are provided.<br />
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Operate installed ductwork accessories after installation to demonstrate compliance with<br />
requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty<br />
accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.<br />
B. After installation, test all fire and fire/smoke dampers for proper operation. Provide letter<br />
to the Architect/Engineer certifying this work is complete and all dampers are functioning<br />
properly.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3300 - 9 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings. Install fusible links in fire<br />
dampers and adjust for proper action.<br />
B. Label access doors in accordance with Division 15 section "Mechanical Identification.”<br />
C. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 15 section "Testing, Adjusting,<br />
and Balancing."<br />
D. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with<br />
manufacturer's touch-up paint.<br />
3.05 EXTRA STOCK:<br />
A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature<br />
range; obtain receipt.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 3300<br />
23 3300 - 10 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 3413<br />
HVAC FANS<br />
A. Extent of air handling equipment work required by this section is indicated on drawings and<br />
schedules, and by requirements of this section.<br />
B. This Section includes the following types of air-handling equipment:<br />
1. Centrifugal fans.<br />
2. Utility set fans.<br />
3. Tubular centrifugal fans.<br />
4. Inline centrifugal fans.<br />
5. Axial fans.<br />
6. Propeller fans.<br />
7. Pre-fabricated roof curbs.<br />
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for vibration control; control system; sequence of<br />
operation; testing, adjusting and balancing.<br />
D. Refer to Division 16 section for the following work; not work of this section.<br />
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connections at air handling units.<br />
E. Refer to Section 230513 for requirements of sheaves and belts for critical areas.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air handling<br />
equipment of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar<br />
service for not less than 3 years.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1. Fans Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power air density, speed of<br />
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings in accordance with AMCA<br />
Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.<br />
2. UL Compliance: Provide air handling equipment which are listed by UL and have UL<br />
label affixed.<br />
3. UL Compliance: Provide air handling equipment which are designed, manufactured,<br />
and tested in accordance with UL 705 "Power Ventilators."<br />
4. NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with NEMA<br />
standards.<br />
5. Sound Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for<br />
Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from laboratory Test Data." Test fans in accordance<br />
with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating."<br />
23 3413 - 1 HVAC FANS
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
6. Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory and NEMA Compliance (NRTL): Fans and<br />
components shall be NRTL listed and labeled. The term “NRTL” shall be defined in<br />
OSHA Regulation 1910.7.<br />
7. Electrical Component Standards: Components and installation shall comply with<br />
NFPA 70 "National Electrical-Code."<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for air handling equipment including<br />
specifications, capacity ratings, dimensions, weights, materials, operating service/access<br />
clearance accessories furnished, and installation instructions.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings showing unit dimensions, construction<br />
details, methods of assembly of components, and field connection details.<br />
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to<br />
air-handling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and<br />
control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are manufacturer-installed<br />
and portions to be field-installed.<br />
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products; in<br />
accordance with requirements of Division 23.<br />
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of power and gravity<br />
ventilator, accessory, and control. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring<br />
diagrams in maintenance manuals in accordance with requirements of Division 23.<br />
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.<br />
B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
C. Deliver fan units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent allowable by shipping limitations,<br />
with protective crating and covering.<br />
1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:<br />
A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into<br />
pad.<br />
B. Coordinate the installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.<br />
C. Coordinate the size and location of structural steel support members.<br />
1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS:<br />
A. Furnish one additional complete set of belts for each belt-driven fan.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3413 - 2 HVAC FANS
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Centrifugal Fans:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Buffalo Forge Co.<br />
b. Loren Cook Co.<br />
c. New York Blower Co.<br />
d. Trane Co.<br />
e. Twin City Fan and Blower Co.<br />
f. Greenheck<br />
g. York; Division of York International<br />
2. Utility Sets:<br />
a. Buffalo<br />
b. Loren Cook Co.<br />
c. New York Blower Cc.<br />
d. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.<br />
e. Trane Co.<br />
f. Twin City Fan and Blower Co.<br />
g. Greenheck<br />
3. Tubular Centrifugal Fans:<br />
a. Buffalo<br />
b. Loren Cook Co.<br />
c. New York Blower Co.<br />
d. Twin City Fan and Blower Co.<br />
e. Greenheck<br />
4. Inline Centrifugal Fans:<br />
a. Buffalo<br />
b. Loren Cook Co.<br />
c. Penn Ventilator Co.<br />
d. Jenn Industries Inc.<br />
e. New York Blower Co.<br />
f. Greenheck<br />
5. Propeller Fans:<br />
a. Aerovent Inc.<br />
b. Carnes Company, Inc.<br />
c. Loren Cook Co.<br />
d. Jenn Industries, Inc.<br />
e. New York Blower Co.<br />
f. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc.<br />
g. Greenheck<br />
23 3413 - 3 HVAC FANS
2.02 FANS, GENERAL:<br />
6. Vaneaxial Fans:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Aerovent, Inc.<br />
b. New York Blower Co.<br />
c. Trane Co.<br />
d. Twin City Fan and Blower Co.<br />
e. Flakt<br />
f. Greenheck<br />
7. Prefabricated Roof Curbs<br />
a. Greenheck<br />
b. Custom Curb, Inc.<br />
c. Pate Co.<br />
d. S & L Manufacturing Co.<br />
e. ThyCurb Div.; Thybar Corp.<br />
A. General: Provide fans that are factory fabricated and assembled, factory tested, and factory<br />
finished, with indicated capacities and characteristics.<br />
B. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous operation<br />
at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower.<br />
1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no more than<br />
70 percent of the first critical speed at the top of the speed range of the fan's class.<br />
C. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.<br />
1. Service Factor: 1.5.<br />
D. Belts: Oil-resistant, nonsparking, and nonstatic.<br />
E. Motors and Fan Wheel Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 HP; fixed pitch<br />
for use with motors larger than 5 HP. Select pulley so that pitch adjustment is at the middle of<br />
the adjustment range at fan design conditions. Provide energy efficient motor.<br />
1. Belt Guards: Provide steel belt guards for motors mounted on the outside of the fan<br />
cabinet.<br />
F. Shaft Bearings: Provide type indicated, having a median life "Rating Life" AFBMA L50 of<br />
200,000 hours calculated in accordance with AFBMA Standard 9 for ball bearings and<br />
AFBMA Standard 11 for roller bearings.<br />
G. Factory Finish: The following finishes are required:<br />
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coating prior to final assembly.<br />
2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel or electrostatically applied baked polyester powder<br />
finish coat after assembly.<br />
H. Vibration: Provide vibration isolators as specified in Section 230548 and as indicated.<br />
23 3413 - 4 HVAC FANS
2.03 CENTRIFUGAL FANS:<br />
A. General Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,<br />
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and support structure.<br />
B. Housings: Fabricated from formed and reinforced galvanized steel panels to form curved<br />
scroll housings with continuously welded or deep-locked seams and access doors or panels to<br />
allow access to internal parts and components.<br />
1. Inlet Cones: Spun metal.<br />
2. Duct Connections: Flanged.<br />
3. Panel Bracing: Steel angle- or channel-iron member supports for mounting and<br />
supporting fan scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.<br />
C. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single-inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun steel<br />
inlet cone, with hub keyed to the shaft.<br />
D. Fan Wheels: Double-width, double-inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun steel<br />
inlet cone, with hub keyed to the shaft.<br />
1. Blade Materials: Steel.<br />
2. Blade Type: Backward-curved, flat-plate type.<br />
3. Blade Type: Backward-curved, airfoil type.<br />
4. Blade Type: Forward-curved, airfoil type.<br />
E. Shaft Bearings: Prelubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow- block type ball bearings.<br />
F. Accessories: The following accessories are required.<br />
2.04 UTILITY SET FANS:<br />
1. Scroll Bypass Dampers: Aluminum, opposed, airfoil blades with extruded vinyl seals<br />
on blades, low-friction bearings, and positive control linkage for manual or automatic<br />
operation.<br />
2. Scroll Housing Access Doors: Latch-type handles; flush-mounted for uninsulated<br />
housings and raised-mounted for insulated housings.<br />
3. Inlet Vanes: Radial vanes with linkage for manual or automatic operation.<br />
a. Double-Width Fans Inlet Vanes: Connected for single operator.<br />
4. Inlet Screens- Heavy wire mesh screens, mounted inside of shaft bearings.<br />
5. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-gauge steel, opposed blade design, with linkage for<br />
manual or automatic operation.<br />
6. Drain Connections: Threaded, 3/4-inch NPS, capped nipple installed at lowest point<br />
of housing.<br />
7. Shaft Cooler: Metal disc between bearings and fan wheel, designed to dissipate heat<br />
from shaft.<br />
8. Spark-Resistant <strong>Construction</strong>: AMCA construction option A, B, or C as indicated.<br />
9. Shaft Seals: Air-tight seals installed around shaft on drive side of single-width fans.<br />
10. Special Coatings: Provide protective coatings on fans as indicated.<br />
11. Extended Grease Lines: Extend grease lines from bearings to a convenient, visible<br />
location and terminate with grease fitting.<br />
A. General Description: Belt-driven, centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft,<br />
bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3413 - 5 HVAC FANS
B. Housings: Fabricated from heavy-gauge steel with side sheets fastened to scroll sheets by<br />
means of continuously welding seams. Scroll wrapper shall be 14 ga. steel; scroll side panels<br />
shall be 12 ga. steel; bearing support shall be 10 ga. welded steel.<br />
1. Inlet: Round duct collar.<br />
2. Discharge: Slip-joint duct connection.<br />
3. Housings Discharge Arrangement: Adjustable to 8 standard positions.<br />
C. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single-inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun steel<br />
inlet cone, with hub keyed to the shaft.<br />
1. Blade Materials: Steel.<br />
2. Blade Type: Backward-curved, die-formed.<br />
3. Blade Type: Forward-curved, die-formed.<br />
D. Shaft Bearings: Heavy duty regreaseable ball or roller type in a cast iron pillowblock housing.<br />
E. Accessories: The following accessories are required where indicated:<br />
1. Backdraft Dampers: Gravity-actuated with counterweight and interlocking aluminum<br />
blades and felt edges in steel frame installed on fan discharge.<br />
2. Access Doors: Gasketed doors with latch-type handles.<br />
3. Scroll Dampers: Single-blade damper installed at fan scroll top with adjustable<br />
linkage.<br />
4. Spark-Resistant <strong>Construction</strong>: AMCA construction option A, B, or C as indicated.<br />
5. Inlet Screens: Removable, heavy wire mesh.<br />
6. Drain Connections: 3/4-inch, threaded coupling drain connection installed at lowest<br />
point of housing.<br />
7. Weather Hoods: Weather-resistant with stamped vents over motor and drive<br />
compartment.<br />
8. Special Coatings: Provide protective coatings on fans as indicated.<br />
2.05 TUBULAR CENTRIFUGAL FANS:<br />
A. A. General Description: Tubular, inline, belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing,<br />
wheel, outlet guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch,<br />
mounting brackets, and accessories.<br />
B. Housings: Fabricated from formed and reinforced galvanized steel panels with welded seams.<br />
1. Duct Connections: Spun inlet cones with flange removable for access to internal<br />
parts, and an outlet flange.<br />
2. Mounting Brackets: Suitable for horizontal or vertical mounting.<br />
3. Motor Mount: Adjustable for belt tensioning.<br />
4. Fan Wheels: Single-width, single-inlet, welded to cast-iron or cast-steel hub and spun<br />
steel inlet cone, with hub keyed to the shaft.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Blade Materials: Steel.<br />
b. Blade Type: Backward-curved, flat-plate type.<br />
c. Blade Type: Backward-curved, airfoil type.<br />
C. Shaft Bearings: Pre-lubricated and sealed, self-aligning, pillow- block-type ball bearings.<br />
23 3413 - 6 HVAC FANS
D. Accessories: The following accessories are required where indicated:<br />
1. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet connections.<br />
2. Weather Cover: Heavy-gauge, galvanized, sheet steel with ventilation slots, bolted to<br />
housing.<br />
3. Belt Guard: Manufacturer's standard to meet OSHA requirements.<br />
4. Ceiling Brackets: Structural angles welded and drilled for hanger rod attachment.<br />
5. Inlet Vanes: Radial vanes with linkage suitable for manual or automatic operation.<br />
6. Access Doors: Located over wheel in an accessible position, hinged and having latchtype<br />
handles; flush mounted for uninsulated housings, raised-mounted for insulated<br />
housings.<br />
7. Spark-Resistant <strong>Construction</strong>: AMCA construction option A, B, or C as indicated.<br />
8. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Removable, heavy wire mesh.<br />
9. Special Coatings: Provide protective coatings on fans as indicated.<br />
10. Drain Connections: Provide 3/4" threaded coupling drain connection at lowest point<br />
of housing.<br />
2.06 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS:<br />
A. General Description: Inline, belt-driven, centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, outlet<br />
guide vanes, fan shaft, bearings, drive assembly, motor and disconnect switch, mounting<br />
brackets, and accessories.<br />
B. Housing: Split, spun-aluminum housing, with aluminum straightening vanes, inlet and outlet<br />
flanges, and support bracket adaptable to floor, side wall, or ceiling mounting.<br />
C. Direct-Drive Units: Motor encased in housing out of air stream, factory-wired to disconnect<br />
located on outside of fan housing.<br />
D. Belt-Drive Units: Motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustable sheaves, enclosure<br />
around belts within fan housing, and lubricating tubes from fan bearings extended to outside<br />
of fan housing.<br />
E. Wheel: Aluminum, airfoil blades welded to aluminum hub.<br />
F. Bearings: Grease lubricated ball or roller anti-friction type with extended lubrication lines to<br />
outside fan housing.<br />
G. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:<br />
2.07 AXIAL FANS:<br />
1. Volume Control Damper: Manual operated with quadrant lock, located in fan outlet.<br />
2. Companion Flanges: For inlet and outlet duct connections.<br />
3. Fan Guards: Expanded metal in removable frame.<br />
4. Speed Control: Variable speed switch with on-off control and speed control for 100 to<br />
50 percent of fan air delivery.<br />
A. General Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive as indicated, axial fans consisting of housing,<br />
wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, and accessories.<br />
B. Housing: welded steel.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3413 - 7 HVAC FANS
C. Fan Wheel: Steel hub and blades.<br />
D. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following features:<br />
1. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch.<br />
2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball<br />
bearings.<br />
3. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.<br />
E. Accessories: The following items are required as indicated:<br />
2.08 PROPELLER FANS:<br />
1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal overload protection mounted inside<br />
fan housing, factory-wired through an internal aluminum conduit.<br />
2. Dampers: Motor-operated, parallel-blade, volume control dampers mounted in curb<br />
base.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Blades: Die-formed sheet aluminum.<br />
b. Frame: Extruded aluminum, with waterproof, felt blade bumpers.<br />
c. Linkage: Nonferrous metals.<br />
d. Operators: Manufacturer's standard electric motor.<br />
A. General Description: Belt-driven or direct-drive propeller fans as indicated consisting of fan<br />
blades, hub, housing, orifice ring, motor, drive, and accessories.<br />
B. Housings: Galvanized, sheet steel with flanged edges, and integral orifice ring.<br />
C. Fan Wheel: Replaceable, cast-aluminum blades fastened to cast- aluminum hub. Factory set<br />
pitch angle of blades.<br />
D. Drive Assembly: Direct-drive or belt-driven as indicated.<br />
E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing, with the following features:<br />
1. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch.<br />
2. Shaft Bearings: Heavy duty regreaseable ball or roller type in a cast iron pillowblock<br />
housing.<br />
3. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel drive shaft keyed to wheel hub.<br />
4. Motor and Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to the housing.<br />
F. Accessories: The following accessories are required as indicated:<br />
1. Belt Guards: Expanded metal with reinforced edges.<br />
2. Gravity Shutters: Gravity-type shutters with aluminum blades in steel frames, mounted<br />
on discharge side of fan.<br />
2.09 PREFABRICATED ROOF CURBS:<br />
A. Furnish and install roof curbs as scheduled for duct openings through the roof and for exhaust<br />
fan support. The curbs shall be galvanized steel self-flashing type/with integral cant, for<br />
23 3413 - 8 HVAC FANS
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 EXAMINATION:<br />
flashing in the field. If the curbs are to have sound attenuation qualities, they shall be not less<br />
than those catalogued for the equipment specified.<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of<br />
fans.<br />
B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL:<br />
A. Install fans level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Support<br />
units using vibration control devices as indicated. Vibration control devices are specified in<br />
Division 23 Section "Vibration Controls."<br />
1. Secure roof -mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Installation of roof curbs is specified in Division 7.<br />
2. Suspended Units: Suspend units from structural steel support frame using threaded<br />
steel rods and vibration isolation springs.<br />
B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and<br />
maintenance.<br />
3.03 CONNECTIONS:<br />
A. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 23 sections. Make final duct<br />
connections on inlet and outlet duct connections with flexible connections.<br />
B. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be<br />
factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical<br />
Installer.<br />
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal<br />
and installation requirements of Division -26 sections. Ensure that rotation is in<br />
direction indicated and intended for proper performance. Do not proceed with<br />
centrifugal fan start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to centrifugal fan<br />
Installer.<br />
2. Temperature control wiring and interlock wiring are specified in Division 23.<br />
3. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground in accordance with the National<br />
Electrical Code.<br />
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
23 3413 - 9 HVAC FANS
A. Upon completion of installation of air handling equipment, and after motor has been<br />
energized with normal power source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with<br />
requirements. Where possible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to<br />
demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.<br />
B. Manufacturer's Field Inspection: Arrange and pay f or a factory- authorized service<br />
representative to perform the following:<br />
1. Inspect the field assembly of components and installation of fans including ductwork<br />
and electrical connections.<br />
2. Prepare a written report on findings and recommended corrective actions.<br />
3.05 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING:<br />
A. Startup, test and adjust air handling equipment in presence of manufacturer's authorized<br />
representative.<br />
B. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.<br />
C. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust.<br />
Vacuum clean fan wheel and cabinet.<br />
3.06 SPARE PARTS:<br />
A. General: Furnish to Owner with receipt one spare set of belts for each belt driven air handling<br />
equipment.<br />
3.07 COMMISSIONING:<br />
A. Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up:<br />
1. Remove shipping blocking and bracing.<br />
2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for<br />
piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload<br />
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.<br />
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.<br />
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan<br />
wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system,<br />
align belts, and install belt guards.<br />
5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended<br />
lubricants.<br />
6. Verify manual and automatic volume control and that fire and smoke dampers in<br />
connected ductwork systems are in the full-open position.<br />
7. Disable automatic temperature control operators.<br />
B. Starting procedures for fans:<br />
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.<br />
Adjust fan to indicated RPM.<br />
2. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions.<br />
3. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3413 - 10 HVAC FANS
C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.<br />
D. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for airhandling-system<br />
testing, adjusting, and balancing.<br />
3.08 DEMONSTRATION:<br />
A. Demonstration Services: Arrange and pay for a factory-authorized service representative to<br />
train Owner's maintenance personnel on the following:<br />
1. Procedures and schedules related to start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting,<br />
servicing, preventative maintenance, and how to obtain replacement parts.<br />
2. Familiarization with contents of Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in<br />
Division 1 Section "Project Closeout" and Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical<br />
Requirements."<br />
B. Schedule training with at least 7 days, advance notice.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 3413<br />
23 3413 - 11 HVAC FANS
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 3600<br />
AIR TERMINALS<br />
A. Extent of air terminals work required by this Section is indicated on drawings and<br />
schedules, and by requirements of this Section.<br />
B. Types of air terminals specified in this Section include the following:<br />
1. Variable Air Volume Terminals<br />
a. Single-Duct with and without Reheat<br />
2. Fan-Powered Terminals<br />
a. Parallel<br />
b. Series<br />
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for related work in addition to the requirements of this<br />
Section.<br />
D. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work, not work of this Section.<br />
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on air terminals.<br />
Include disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified as<br />
furnished or factory-installed by manufacturer.<br />
E. Provide the following electrical work as work of this Section, complying with requirements<br />
of Division 26 sections:<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
1. Control wiring between field-installed controls and air terminals.<br />
a. Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic Temperature<br />
Controls is work of that section.<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air terminals<br />
with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in<br />
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1. ADC Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in<br />
accordance with ADC standards and bear ADC Seal.<br />
2. ARI Compliance: Provide air terminals which have been tested and rated in<br />
accordance with ARI 880, "Industry Standard for Air Terminals," and bear ARI<br />
23 3600 - 1 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
certification seal. Hot water coils shall have been tested and rated in accordance<br />
with ARI Standard 410.<br />
3. NFPA and UL Compliance: Air terminals shall be constructed using acoustical<br />
and thermal insulations complying with NFPA 90A, "Air Conditioning and<br />
Ventilating Systems," and UL 181.<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including acoustical/thermal<br />
insulation characteristics and performance and sound data, for each size and type of air<br />
terminal furnished; schedule showing drawing designation, room location, quantity<br />
furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished; and installation and start-up<br />
instructions.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating<br />
dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of<br />
components.<br />
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit ladder-type wiring diagrams for electric power and control<br />
components, clearly indicating required field electrical connections.<br />
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems<br />
products, in accordance with requirements of Division 23.<br />
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of air terminal,<br />
including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data, shop<br />
drawings, and maintenance data in the Operating and Maintenance Manual, in<br />
accordance with requirements of Division 23.<br />
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Deliver air terminals wrapped in factory-fabricated fiberboard type containers. Identify on<br />
outside of container the type of air terminal and location of installation. Avoid crushing or<br />
bending, and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in boxes.<br />
B. Store air terminals in original cartons and protect from weather and construction work<br />
traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above<br />
grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Air Terminals:<br />
a. Price<br />
b. Carnes<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3600 - 2 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
2.02 AIR TERMINALS:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
c. Carrier<br />
d. Environmental Technologies<br />
e. Krueger<br />
f. Metal-Aire<br />
g. Titus<br />
h. Trane<br />
A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and tested air terminals as indicated, selected with<br />
performance characteristics which match or exceed those indicated on schedule.<br />
B. Air terminal units shall be of low pressure drop design, single-duct throttling-type,<br />
pressure-independent, and suitable for use in medium pressure variable volume air<br />
distribution systems.<br />
C. Casing shall be of minimum 22-gauge galvanized steel construction, with internal<br />
acoustical, coated, ½” thick, 1-½ lb./cu. ft. density fiberglass insulation and inlet and<br />
outlet duct connections. Gasketed and insulated quick-opening access doors shall be<br />
provided for air terminals with internally mounted serviceable components, including<br />
actuators and fan motors. Access doors shall allow for removal of fan and/or servicing of<br />
unit without disturbing ductwork and piping connections.<br />
D. Internal air volume damper blade shall be of extruded aluminum or 18-gauge steel with<br />
keyed fit shaft and nylon bushing. Damper shall be constructed to prevent air leakage in<br />
excess of 2% of rated air quantity at 4.0” w.g. inlet static pressure. All mechanical parts<br />
shall be galvanized or non-ferrous.<br />
E. Hot water heating coils shall be designed for 200 psig maximum working pressure and<br />
200°F maximum operating temperature. Coils shall be serpentine-type, constructed of ½”<br />
O.D. copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum fins, with galvanized steel casting.<br />
F. Electric heating coils shall be constructed of electric resistance heating elements in a<br />
galvanized steel casing with integral control panel housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure, with<br />
hinged access door and factory wiring. Coils shall include primary automatic reset<br />
thermal cutout, secondary manual reset thermal cutout, line fuses, differential pressure air<br />
flow switch, door interlocking disconnect, magnetic contactors, terminal blocks for power<br />
and control connections, and UL listing as a duct heater. Provide a minimum of two<br />
stages for heaters 3 KW and above, except as otherwise indicated on drawings or<br />
schedules.<br />
G. All terminal units with electrical components shall be provided with a single-point electrical<br />
connection for the entire unit. All electrical components shall be UL listed and installed in<br />
accordance with the National Electrical Code.<br />
1. All line voltage electrical components shall be mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure.<br />
2. The entire assembly shall be UL or ETL listed.<br />
3. Class II, 24V (AC), 40 VA transformer shall be provided for control power.<br />
H. Each terminal unit shall be provided with labeling showing plan designation, unit location,<br />
unit size, cfm range and settings, damper fail position, thermostat action, and calibration<br />
chart.<br />
23 3600 - 3 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
2.03 FAN-POWERED TERMINALS:<br />
A. In addition to the above requirements for Air Terminals (Part 2.02), comply with the<br />
following:<br />
B. Fan section shall include a galvanized steel plenum, acoustically lined, housing a<br />
dynamically balanced fan with forward-curved blades, direct-driven from a permanent<br />
split-capacitor motor with SCR variable speed control, integral thermal overload<br />
protection, permanently-lubricated bearings, and fan contactor factory-wired to power and<br />
control terminal blocks in a sheet metal enclosure. Motor shall be specifically designed for<br />
use with an SCR for fan speed adjustment and shall include an anti-backward rotation<br />
device. Motor and fan shall be internally vibration-isolated from unit casing.<br />
1. For parallel variable air volume terminals, the fan shall be mounted in a separate<br />
compartment. The fan shall operate intermittently, drawing only plenum air. Unit<br />
shall include backdraft damper to prevent primary air from bypassing to the<br />
plenum. Damper shall be constructed of aluminum blades, gasketed to prevent<br />
leakage.<br />
2. For series constant volume terminals, the fan shall be mounted in a common<br />
compartment with the primary air damper. The fan shall operate continuously,<br />
drawing a mixture of plenum air and primary air.<br />
C. Fan controls shall be incorporated in a factory-assembled control panel and shall include<br />
pre-wired manual disconnect switch, a contractor, and a manually adjustable speed<br />
control for the fan, installed and wired by the terminal unit manufacturer.<br />
D. Units shall include filter rack and 1” thick throwaway filter, with side or rear access, on<br />
secondary air inlet. Provide two complete sets of filters.<br />
2.04 CONTROLS:<br />
A. Air terminal unit manufacturer shall mount DDC controller and actuator provided by<br />
temperature controls manufacturer. See Section 230900.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air terminals are to be installed. Do not<br />
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 COORDINATION:<br />
A. The Contractor is responsible for determining the position of controls, actuators, and<br />
access. Coordinate each air terminal’s position with building elements, piping, conduit,<br />
ductwork and other items. Order left/right hand units as required, and inform all other<br />
trades as required. Relocate interfering items or terminal as required to provide proper<br />
access, if not coordinated beforehand.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3600 - 4 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
3.03 INSTALLATION OF AIR TERMINALS:<br />
A. General: Install air terminals as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
installation instructions.<br />
B. Location: Install each unit level and accurately in position indicated in relation to other<br />
work; and maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance, but in no<br />
case less than that recommended by manufacturer.<br />
C. Duct Connections: Connect ductwork to air terminals in accordance with Division 23<br />
ductwork sections.<br />
1. Provide conical taps at medium-pressure branch duct takeoffs from main trunk<br />
duct to terminal units.<br />
2. Arrange medium-pressure branch ducts and takeoffs so that there are no more<br />
than two elbows or bends up to 90 degrees in branch duct to terminal unit inlets;<br />
“U” bends will not be allowed.<br />
3. Inlet branch ducts greater than 20 feet in length shall be increased in size to one<br />
full duct size larger than the terminal inlets to which they are connected. Locate<br />
reducer 3 feet ahead of terminal inlet.<br />
4. Inlet branch ducts shall have a minimum of 3 feet of straight duct ahead of the<br />
unit inlet, including no reducers.<br />
5. Medium-pressure flexible ductwork (with flexible aluminum core), when used, and<br />
where allowed by local Code, shall be limited to a maximum of 6 feet per inlet.<br />
6. Provide a minimum of 4 feet of lined low-pressure ductwork between the terminal<br />
unit outlet and the first spin-in fitting or supply air outlet branch duct takeoff.<br />
D. For fan-powered terminals, provide plenum air inlet sound attenuating boot, as indicated<br />
on drawings, and flexible connector at unit outlet.<br />
3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:<br />
A. Upon completion of installation and prior to initial operation, test and demonstrate that air<br />
terminals, and duct connections to air terminals, are leak-tight.<br />
B. Repair or replace air terminals and duct connections as required to eliminate leaks, and<br />
retest to demonstrate compliance.<br />
3.05 CLEANING:<br />
A. Clean exposed factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with<br />
manufacturer’s touch-up paint.<br />
3.06 BALANCING:<br />
A. See Section 230593. Balancing contractor shall set all air quantity limits, and shall not<br />
rely on any factory calibration. Report air quantity as measured by the air terminal’s<br />
velocity pressure pickup, in addition to pitot traverses and outlet readings.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 3600<br />
23 3600 - 5 AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 3713<br />
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES<br />
A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by<br />
requirements of this Section.<br />
B. Types of air outlets and inlets required for this project include the following:<br />
1. Ceiling air diffusers.<br />
2. Wall registers and grilles.<br />
3. Louvers.<br />
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork, duct accessories, and testing and<br />
balancing, not work of this Section.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and<br />
inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in<br />
similar service for not less than five years.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
1. ARI Compliance: Air outlets and inlets shall be tested and rated in accordance with<br />
ARI 650, "Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets."<br />
2. ASHRAE Compliance: Air outlets and inlets shall be tested and rated in accordance<br />
with ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets<br />
and Inlets."<br />
3. ADC Compliance: Air outlets and inlets shall be tested and rated in certified<br />
laboratories under requirements of ADC 1062, "Certification, Rating and Test<br />
Manual."<br />
4. ADC Seal: Air outlets and inlets shall bear ADC Certified Rating Seal.<br />
5. AMCA Compliance: Louvers shall be tested and rated in accordance with AMCA<br />
500, "Test Method for Louvers, Dampers and Shutters."<br />
6. AMCA Seal: Louvers shall bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal for both air<br />
performance and water penetration.<br />
7. NFPA Compliance: Air outlets and inlets shall be installed in accordance with NFPA<br />
90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets,<br />
including the following:<br />
23 3713 - 1 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND<br />
GRILLES
1. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, indicating drawing designation,<br />
manufacturer and model number, size, materials of construction, finish, accessories<br />
furnished, and mounting details.<br />
2. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including throw<br />
and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.<br />
B. Samples: Submit three samples of each type of finish furnished.<br />
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawing for each type of air<br />
outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.<br />
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems products,<br />
in accordance with requirements of Division 23.<br />
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data, including cleaning instructions for finishes,<br />
and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data and shop drawings in the Operating<br />
and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with requirements of Division 23.<br />
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers.<br />
Identify on outside of container the type of outlet or inlet and location of installation. Avoid<br />
crushing or bending, and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.<br />
B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction<br />
work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above<br />
grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
1. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Carnes<br />
b. Krueger<br />
c. Titus<br />
d. Metal-Aire<br />
2. Louvers:<br />
a. Air Balance<br />
b. American Warming & Ventilating<br />
c. Arrow United Industries<br />
d. Dowco<br />
e. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.<br />
f. Penn Ventilator<br />
g. Ruskin<br />
23 3713 - 2 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND<br />
GRILLES
2.02 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
h. Greenheck<br />
i. Vent Products<br />
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard ceiling air<br />
diffusers where shown; of sizes, shapes, capacities and types indicated; constructed of<br />
materials and components as indicated; and as required for complete installation.<br />
B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, throw and drop, and<br />
noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.<br />
C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with adjacent<br />
ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with<br />
accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and<br />
specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser.<br />
D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of types, capacities, and with accessories and finishes as<br />
listed on air device schedule.<br />
1. All linear slot diffusers shall have air pattern control vanes, capable of 180º air<br />
pattern adjustment, and internally lined plenum boot, except as otherwise indicated<br />
or scheduled.<br />
E. Dampers: Volume dampers shall not be provided at diffuser necks unless otherwise<br />
specifically indicated or scheduled.<br />
2.03 REGISTERS AND GRILLES:<br />
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard registers and<br />
grilles where shown; of sizes, shapes, capacities and types indicated; constructed of<br />
materials and components as indicated; and as required for complete installation.<br />
B. Performance: Provide registers and grilles that have, as minimum, throw and drop, and<br />
noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.<br />
C. Wall/Ceiling/Floor Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are<br />
compatible with adjacent wall/ceiling/floor systems, and that are specifically manufactured<br />
to fit into wall/ceiling/floor construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to<br />
general construction drawings and specifications for types of wall/ceiling/floor construction<br />
which will contain each type of wall/ceiling/floor register and grille.<br />
D. Types: Provide registers and grilles of types, capacities, and with accessories and finishes as<br />
listed on air device schedule.<br />
1. All sidewall-type supply air registers shall be double deflection adjustable blade<br />
type, except as otherwise indicated or scheduled.<br />
2. All sidewall-type return and exhaust registers shall be 35º fixed blade type, except<br />
as otherwise indicated or scheduled.<br />
23 3713 - 3 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND<br />
GRILLES
E. Dampers: Opposed blade volume dampers shall be provided for all sidewall-type supply<br />
air registers, sidewall-type exhaust air registers (installed on wall or in ceiling), and floor<br />
supply air registers, except as otherwise indicated or scheduled.<br />
2.04 LOUVERS:<br />
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard 6” deep,<br />
stationary, drainable blade-type louvers with hidden vertical mullions, frame with integral<br />
caulking slots and sill extension, and aluminum bird screen, where shown; of sizes<br />
indicated; constructed of extruded aluminum; with components as indicated; and as<br />
required for complete installation. Louvers shall be Ruskin model ELF6375DX (extruded<br />
aluminum, 6” deep, 37½° fixed blades) or approved equivalent.<br />
B. Performance: Provide louvers that have a minimum of 50% free area (applicable to 48” x<br />
48” size) and a maximum pressure drop through the free area not exceeding that of those<br />
specified on drawings and schedules for each type as listed in manufacturer's current data.<br />
C. Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with<br />
adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings<br />
with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to general<br />
construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type<br />
of louver.<br />
D. Materials: Louver frames and blades shall be constructed of 0.080” thick aluminum<br />
extrusions, ASTM B-221, Alloy 6063-T5. Units shall be welded or assembled with stainless<br />
steel fasteners.<br />
E. Louver Screens: 3/4” square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screen, mounted in<br />
removable extruded aluminum frame, shall be provided on inside face of exhaust air outlet<br />
louvers and outside face of outside air intake louvers.<br />
F. Finish: Color and finish type shall be as specified by Architect.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not<br />
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION:<br />
A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions<br />
and in accordance with recognized industry practices, to ensure that products serve intended<br />
functions.<br />
B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to<br />
interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 3713 - 4 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND<br />
GRILLES
C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles as indicated on general construction<br />
"Reflected Ceiling Plans." Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical<br />
ceiling modules. All ceiling-mounted air devices shall be installed and supported per<br />
manufacturer’s recommendations and per applicable codes.<br />
D. Louvers shall be installed per architectural details and/or manufacturer’s recommendations.<br />
Frames shall be caulked weather-tight to the structure using approved material from<br />
Division 7.<br />
E. Directional throw patterns for diffusers and registers shall be furnished and/or adjusted to<br />
match those shown and/or scheduled on the drawings.<br />
F. Ductwork visible behind grilles, registers, and diffusers shall be painted flat black.<br />
G. Appropriate A k factors shall be furnished to the Section 230593 Test and Balance<br />
Contractor.<br />
3.03 SPARE PARTS:<br />
A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, three operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that<br />
requires them.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 3713<br />
23 3713 - 5 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND<br />
GRILLES
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 5233.19<br />
BOILERS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions<br />
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes gas fired, finned copper water tube boilers for heating hot water.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 23 Section "Breechings, Chimneys, and Stacks" for connections to breechings,<br />
chimneys, and stacks.<br />
2. Division 23 Section "Feedwater Equipment" for connections to condensate and feedwater<br />
system.<br />
3. Division 23 Sections for control wiring for automatic temperature control.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished<br />
specialties; and accessories for each model indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, required clearances,<br />
method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.<br />
1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate<br />
between manufacturer installed and field installed wiring.<br />
C. Source Quality Control Tests and Inspection Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for<br />
compliance with performance requirements before shipping.<br />
D. Field Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements.<br />
E. Maintenance Data: Include in the maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include parts list,<br />
maintenance guide, and wiring diagrams for each boiler.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are<br />
listed and labeled.<br />
23 5233.19 - 1 BOILERS
1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100.<br />
2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory” as<br />
defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.<br />
B. ASME Compliance: Boilers shall bear ASME "H" stamp and be National Board listed.<br />
C. FM Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of FM.<br />
D. CSD-1 Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of CSD-1.<br />
E. IRI Compliance: Control devices and control sequences according to requirements of IRI.<br />
F. Comply with NFPA 70 for electrical components and installation.<br />
1.5 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork<br />
requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."<br />
1.6 WARRANTY<br />
A. General Warranty: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other<br />
rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in<br />
addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements<br />
of the Contract Documents. Installing contractor shall provide one year of warranty parts and labor.<br />
B. Special Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor for the heat exchanger.<br />
1. Warranty Period: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than 10 years from date of<br />
Substantial Completion on the heat exchanger. Warranty shall be non-prorated and not<br />
limited to thermal shock. Additional 21 year thermal shock warranty on heat exchanger.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Available Manufacturers: Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in manufacturing the<br />
products specified in this section with minimum five (5) years experience. Subject to compliance with<br />
requirements, manufacturers offering boilers that may be incorporated into the Work include, but<br />
are not limited to, the following:<br />
B. Design: Boilers shall be CSA (AGA/CGA) design certified and shall not release any condensate<br />
during operation. Boilers shall be designed for operation with natural gas and have a CSA certified<br />
input rating as noted on the drawings, and a thermal efficiency rating of 81% (8900) and 82%<br />
(8800).<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 5233.19 - 2 BOILERS
C. Service Access: The boilers shall be provided with access covers for easily accessing all serviceable<br />
components. The boilers shall be manufactured with steel frame structures to provide access to<br />
entire combustion chamber, including heat exchanger. Heat exchanger must be a “slide out” design<br />
allowing removal without disturbing the vent system or upper jacketing of the boiler. All gas train<br />
components must be accessible and able to adjust without the removal of covers or cabinet<br />
components.<br />
D. Manufacturers: RBI (a Mestek company) is the basis of design. Listed acceptable manufacturers<br />
shall be subject to compliance with requirements. Provide boilers by one of the following:<br />
1. RBI (a Mestek company) - 8900 / 8800 Series<br />
2. Laars Heating Systems – Mighty Therm Series<br />
3. Lochinvar Corp - Copper Fin Series<br />
4. Raypak Corp – Raytherm W/H Series<br />
2.2 COMPONENTS<br />
A. Combustion Chamber: The combustion chamber shall be enclosed with high temperature ceramic<br />
fiberboard insulation. An access panel shall be provided on right and left hand sides for ease of<br />
service and inspection of the heat exchanger, refractory, and entire burner assembly. The boiler<br />
shall provide a heat exchanger slide-out guide rail to allow removal through the front of the heater<br />
without removal of the chimney, draft diverter, or top jacket panels.<br />
B. Heat Exchanger: The heat exchanger shall be inspected and bear the A.S.M.E. Section IV seal of<br />
approval. The A.S.M.E. Section IV seal of approval will not be provided as standard for jurisdictions<br />
not requiring the A.S.M.E. Section IV seal of approval. The heat exchanger shall be a two-pass<br />
design with maximum working pressure of 160 psi. The water tube shall be of straight 7/8” I.D.,<br />
.064” minimum wall thickness; integral finned copper tube, 7 fins per inch, with a fin height of 3/8”.<br />
The water tubes shall be set horizontally with heavy galvanized steel “V” baffles tightly secured above<br />
the tubes throughout the length of the water tubes. Each end of the water tubes shall be strength<br />
rolled onto a steel tube sheet. The headers shall be secured to the tube sheet by properly placed<br />
stud bolts, flange nuts and with the use of “o” rings. Headers will be of bronze construction for the<br />
8800 series and cast iron for 8900 series. “O” rings must be constructed of EPDM and Silicone,<br />
capable of withstanding temperature of 540° F, 282° C. The use of red “o” rings constructed of<br />
Neoprene and Silicone with temperature ratings of 250° F, 121° C will not be allowed. A pressure<br />
relief valve of 50 lb/sq in shall be equipped with the boiler and factory mounted.<br />
C. Jacket: 18 gauge galvanized steel with factory applied baked enamel.<br />
D. Gas Burners: The burners shall be constructed of Aluminized or Stainless Steel Alloy and fire on a<br />
horizontal plane.<br />
E. Rated Capacity: The boiler shall be capable of operating at rated capacity with pressures as low as<br />
6” W.C. at the inlet to the burner pressure regulator.<br />
F. The burner shall be capable of 81% (8900) and 82% (8800) efficiency.<br />
G. The burner and gas train shall be provided with the following trim and features:<br />
1. Burner Firing: On/Off<br />
2. Burner Firing: 2 Stage<br />
3. Burner Firing: 4 Stage<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 5233.19 - 3 BOILERS
4. Burner Firing: Modulation with motorized gas valves<br />
5. Burner Ignition: Intermittent grounded spark to pilot. Ceramic hot surface ignition will not be<br />
accepted.<br />
6. Safety Controls: Energize ignition, limit time for establishing flame, prevent opening of gas<br />
valve until pilot flame is proven, stop gas flow on ignition failure, and allow gas valve to<br />
open.<br />
7. Flue Gas Collector: Integral diverter<br />
8. Gas Train: Manual gas valves (2), redundant main gas valves (solenoid/diaphragm),<br />
(optional motorized), firing valve, ‘B’ valve, pilot gas pressure regulator, and automatic pilot<br />
gas valve. All components to be factory mounted.<br />
9. Safety Devices: Optional high/low gas pressure switches. All safeties to be factory mounted.<br />
2.3 BOILER TRIM<br />
A. Safety Relief Valve: ASME rated, factory set to protect boiler and piping as per schedule/drawings.<br />
B. Gauge: Combination water pressure and temperature. Inlet/outlet temperature gauges to be an<br />
integral part of the supply/inlet header to allow for consistent easy monitoring of temperatures<br />
factory mounted and wired.<br />
C. Low Water Cutoff and Outlet Flow Switch: Prevent burner operation when water falls below a safe<br />
level or when water flow is low. Flow switch shall be factory mounted. Provision for installation of a<br />
low water cut off shall be provided.<br />
D. Operating Controls: Standard control system will be a Honeywell S8610M spark-to-pilot proven<br />
ignition with full flame monitoring capability. Optional Honeywell RM7800 Series flame safeguard<br />
control with diagnostic readout. For four stage Tekmar control.<br />
E. Operating Temperature Control: Boiler staging will be controlled by Honeywell aquastat<br />
controller(s).<br />
F. High Limit: Temperature control with manual reset limits boiler water temperature in series with the<br />
operating control. High limit shall be factory mounted and sense the outlet temperature of the boiler<br />
through a dry well.<br />
G. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING STANDARD TRIM:<br />
1. Bronze headers (8800), Cast iron headers (8900)<br />
2. Terminal board for all electrical connections<br />
3. Flow switch (factory mounted and wired)<br />
4. Operating control<br />
5. Temperature/pressure gauge<br />
6. Manual reset high limit<br />
7. Field reversible headers<br />
8. Inlet/outlet thermometers (factory mounted and wired)<br />
9. CSD-1 gas train<br />
H. PROVIDE THE FOLLOWING JOB SPECIFIC TRIM AND FEATURES:<br />
1. Bronze fitted circulator provided by the manufacturer (shipped loose)<br />
2. Direct vent inducer and termination hood for sidewall termination of vent pipe (shipped loose)<br />
3. CSD-1 controls<br />
4. FM or IRI controls and gas train.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 5233.19 - 4 BOILERS
2.4 MOTORS<br />
5. Probe type low water cut off, manual reset (shipped loose)<br />
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Test and inspect boilers according to the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV. Boilers<br />
shall be test fired in the factory with a report attached permanently to the exterior cabinet of the<br />
boiler for field reference.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other<br />
conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory<br />
conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and referenced<br />
standards.<br />
B. Install gas fired boilers according to NFPA 54.<br />
C. Support boilers on 4 in (100 mm) thick concrete base, 4 in (100 mm) larger on each side than base<br />
of unit.<br />
D. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory mounted.<br />
E. Install a 1” drain valve on the outlet piping prior to the first shut off valve.<br />
3.3 CONNECTIONS<br />
A. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas train inlet with union.<br />
B. Connect hot water piping to supply and return boiler tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange<br />
at each connection.<br />
C. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.<br />
D. Connect breeching to boiler outlet, full size of outlet. The boiler shall operate on negative stack<br />
pressure and Category I vent material according to ANSI standards (AGA) (standard vertical<br />
venting).<br />
E. Electrical: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 26 Sections.<br />
F. Ground equipment.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 5233.19 - 5 BOILERS
1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening<br />
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in<br />
UL 486A and UL 486B.<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory authorized service representative to supervise the<br />
field assembly of components and installation of boilers, including piping and electrical connections.<br />
Report results in writing.<br />
1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and<br />
equipment.<br />
B. Manufacturer’s representative shall supply a factory authorized service technician to start up the<br />
boilers.<br />
3.5 CLEANING<br />
A. Flush and clean boilers on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's written<br />
instructions.<br />
B. After completing boiler installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish.<br />
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes including chips, scratches,<br />
and abrasions with manufacturer's touchup paint.<br />
3.6 COMMISSIONING<br />
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to provide startup service. Start up to be<br />
performed only after complete boiler room operation is field verified to offer a substantial load, and<br />
complete system circulation. One year warranty shall be handled by factory authorized tech.<br />
B. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.<br />
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and installation<br />
requirements in Division 26 Sections. Do not proceed with boiler startup until wiring<br />
installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.<br />
C. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checklist and verify the following:<br />
1. Boiler is level on concrete base.<br />
2. Flue and chimney are installed without visible damage.<br />
3. No damage is visible to boiler jacket, refractory, or combustion chamber.<br />
4. Pressure reducing valves are checked for correct operation and specified relief pressure.<br />
Adjust as required.<br />
5. Clearances have been provided and piping is flanged for easy removal and servicing.<br />
6. Heating circuit pipes have been connected to correct ports.<br />
7. Labels are clearly visible.<br />
8. Boiler, burner, and flue are clean and free of construction debris.<br />
9. Pressure and temperature gauges are installed.<br />
10. Control installations are completed.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 5233.19 - 6 BOILERS
D. Ensure pumps operate properly.<br />
E. Check operation of pressure reducing valve on gas train, including venting.<br />
F. Check that fluid level, flow switch, and high temperature interlocks are in place.<br />
G. Start pumps and boilers, and adjust burners to maximum operating efficiency.<br />
1. Fill out startup checklist and attach copy with Contractor Startup Report.<br />
2. Check and record performance of factory provided boiler protection devices and firing<br />
sequences.<br />
3. Check and record performance of boiler fluid level, flow switch, and high temperature<br />
interlocks.<br />
4. Run-in boilers as recommended or required by manufacturer.<br />
H. Perform the following tests for each firing rate for high/low burners, four stage and modulating<br />
burners. Adjust boiler combustion efficiency at each firing rate. Measure and record the following:<br />
1. Inlet gas pressure.<br />
2. Gas pressure on manifold.<br />
3. Flue gas temperature at boiler discharge.<br />
4. Flue gas carbon dioxide and oxygen concentration.<br />
5. Natural flue draft.<br />
I. Measure and record temperature rise through each boiler.<br />
3.7 DEMONSTRATION<br />
A. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as<br />
specified below:<br />
1. Operate boiler, including accessories and controls, to demonstrate compliance with<br />
requirements.<br />
2. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and<br />
shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance.<br />
3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout."<br />
4. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Operation and<br />
Maintenance Data."<br />
5. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days advance notice.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 5233.19<br />
23 5233.19 - 7 BOILERS
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 5700<br />
HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes plate heat exchangers.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. TEMA: Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association.<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product.<br />
1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and<br />
accessories.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail equipment<br />
assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field<br />
assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.<br />
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints and for<br />
designing bases.<br />
2. Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure and to<br />
supported equipment.<br />
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: Details and design calculations for seismic restraints for heat<br />
exchangers.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following items are<br />
shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:<br />
1. Tube-removal space.<br />
2. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached.<br />
B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For heat exchanger, accessories, and components, from<br />
manufacturer.<br />
23 5700 - 1 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of<br />
assembled components or on calculation.<br />
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Heat Exchanger: Identify center of gravity and locate<br />
and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.<br />
3. Detailed description of heat exchanger anchorage devices on which certification is based<br />
and their installation requirements.<br />
C. Product Certificates: For each type of shell-and-tube heat exchanger. Documentation that shelland-tube<br />
heat exchangers comply with "TEMA Standards."<br />
D. Source quality-control reports.<br />
E. Field quality-control reports.<br />
F. Sample Warranty: For manufacturer's warranty.<br />
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in emergency, operation, and<br />
maintenance manuals.<br />
1.7 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace components of domestic-water heat exchangers that fail in materials or workmanship<br />
within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Structural failures including heat exchanger, storage tank, and supports.<br />
b. Faulty operation of controls.<br />
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal use.<br />
2. Warranty Periods: From date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
a. Plate, Domestic-Water Heat Exchangers:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
1) Brazed-Plate Type: One.<br />
2) Plate-and-Frame Type: One.<br />
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000<br />
"Quality Requirements," to design seismic restraints for heat exchangers.<br />
2.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on<br />
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
23 5700 - 2 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
1. Alfa Laval Inc.<br />
2. API Heat Transfer Inc.<br />
3. APV; a brand of SPX Corporation.<br />
4. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.<br />
5. Delta T Heat Exchangers.<br />
6. ITT Corporation; Bell & Gossett.<br />
7. Mueller, Paul, Company.<br />
8. Polaris Plate Heat Exchangers.<br />
9. SEC Heat Exchangers.<br />
10. TACO Incorporated.<br />
11. Thermo Dynamics Ltd.<br />
12. Tranter, Inc.<br />
B. STANDARDS<br />
1. ASME Section II - Material Specification<br />
2. ASME Section V - Non-Destructive Testing<br />
3. ANSI B 16.5 - Flanged fittings<br />
4. ASME Section IX - Welding and brazing qualifications<br />
5. ASME Section VIII, Division I - Pressure Vessel Code<br />
6. OSHA<br />
C. CERTIFICATION<br />
1. Plate Heat Exchangers shall be designed, constructed and tested in accordance with<br />
Section VIII, Division I of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code, and shall be code stamped. CRN<br />
numbers are required for all vessels with Canadian destinations.<br />
2.3 MECHANICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General<br />
1. The Plate Heat Exchanger Manufacturer shall not subcontract or purchase the plates for<br />
resale. He shall press his own patterns of plates.<br />
2. The Plate Heat Exchanger Manufacturer shall have an established and on-going<br />
3. QA/QC program including manuals available for inspection at plant.<br />
B. Frame Components<br />
1. Preference will be given to single pass designs with all connections on the fixed cover.<br />
2. The fixed and movable covers shall be of sufficient uniform thickness to withstand all<br />
loadings. Welded reinforcements or stiffeners are not permitted.<br />
3. The movable cover shall be provided with a roller bearing for units greater than 50" in<br />
height. This allows the cover to be moved with greater ease during plate inspection.<br />
4. The carrying and guide bars shall be designed to allow for a plate pack expansion of at<br />
least 10% while still providing maintenance space.<br />
5. The surfaces of the carrying and guide bars that come into contact with the plates shall be<br />
stainless steel. All carbon steel frame components (except bolts) shall be painted or zinc<br />
plated.<br />
6. The heat exchanger frame shall be of bolted construction. Welding of the pressure<br />
retaining components is not permitted.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 5700 - 3 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
7. Tightening bolts shall be equipped with lockwashers at the movable cover to facilitate<br />
opening and closing of the unit from the fixed cover. Bearing Box Washers shall be<br />
supplied at the fixed cover on all units greater than 50" in height.<br />
8. Plate and carrying bar design shall permit the removal of any plate in the plate pack<br />
without the need to remove any other plates.<br />
9. Tightening bolts shall be equipped with captive nuts at the fixed cover and threaded nuts at<br />
the movable cover. Welding of the nut to the tightening bolt is prohibited. Tightening bolts<br />
shall be coated with a rust preventative lubricant. In addition, a protective sleeve shall be<br />
installed on all exposed threads.<br />
10. The bolting system shall be designed such that only four (4) tightening bolts are required<br />
for 80% of the pressure plate travel during opening and closing of the unit. This is required<br />
to minimize maintenance downtime.<br />
11. The plate pack shall be covered with a shroud in accordance with OSHA. Preference shall<br />
be given to stainless steel.<br />
12. The mechanical alignment system of the plates shall be designed to minimize horizontal<br />
(perpendicular to carrying bar) and vertical movement of the plates. This alignment system<br />
shall be built into the carrying and guide bars as well as pressed into the plate pattern. No<br />
alignment with the use of the gaskets is permitted.<br />
13. Lifting devices shall be supplied on all units with 6" ports or larger. These shall be designed<br />
to support one and a half times the unit's weight. Instructions for lifting shall be clearly<br />
visible on the unit.<br />
C. Surface Preparation and Painting<br />
1. The following requirements shall be adhered to for all carbon steel components excluding<br />
tightening bolts and fasteners:<br />
2. Preblast Preparation<br />
a. Rough and/or sharp edges shall be broken with a power grinder.<br />
b. All threaded openings shall be sealed.<br />
c. All surfaces shall be solvent cleaned per SSPC requirement SP-1.<br />
3. Blasting Requirements<br />
a. All steel surfaces to be coated shall be cleaned by blasting metal in accordance with<br />
SSPC requirement SP- IO.<br />
b. The surface anchor profile shall adhere to the painting manufacturer's<br />
recommendations and shall be recorded.<br />
4. Painting Application Requirements<br />
D. Connections<br />
a. Painting shall commence within four hours of blasting.<br />
b. Surfaces shall be clean, free from dust, and dry before painting or application of<br />
any coating.<br />
c. All paints shall be furnished mixed and applied in accordance with the<br />
manufacturer's recommendations.<br />
d. The finish coat shall be inspected for adequate total dry film thickness over its entire<br />
surface.<br />
1. Connections equal to or less than 2" shall be NPT type.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 5700 - 4 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
E. Plates<br />
2. Studded Port Connections. Unless otherwise specified, all plate type heat exchangers with<br />
connections of greater than 2" shall be equipped with studded port type connections with<br />
the following requirements:<br />
a. Each connection shall be equipped with a liner which prevents the process fluids<br />
from coming in contact with the covers.<br />
b. Liners shall be fabricated from materials which are compatible with the process<br />
fluids (generally the same materials as the plate/gaskets).<br />
1. Individual plates shall be pressed from a single metal sheet in one step. No multistage<br />
pressing of one sheet is allowed. Plate inspection shall be performed during production to<br />
ensure uniformity of pressing depth and absence of defects.<br />
2. All plates shall be permanently marked to identify plate material, thickness, raw plate<br />
supplier and heat numbers.<br />
3. The plates should include the following:<br />
F. Gaskets<br />
a. Bridge Zone - The area that connects the port to the distribution area.<br />
b. Drainage Chamber - The area vented to the atmosphere to prevent fluid<br />
interleakage. The drainage chamber should include a drainage channel.<br />
c. Distribution Zone - The top and bottom areas responsible for distributing the fluid<br />
d. The design of plates shall be such that each plate channel can withstand the Design<br />
Pressure with no pressure on the adjacent plate channels (Full Differential Pressure).<br />
e. Plate design shall allow and require plate-to-plate contact for structural integrity and<br />
elimination of vibration.<br />
f. End plates shall be provided and sufficiently gasketed at the fixed and movable<br />
covers to prevent hot and cold medium from coming in contact with these covers.<br />
g. Gasket grooves in the plates shall be designed to contain the gaskets while allowing<br />
for thermal expansion.<br />
h. The Suspension and Guidance method should support the plates uniformly and<br />
should mechanically align the plates during tightening. This area should be<br />
reinforced for all plates greater than 50" in height.<br />
1. Gaskets shall have relieving grooves in the leakage chamber zone to prevent intermixing<br />
of fluids and to cause any leak to be visually evident at the external surface of the plate<br />
pack.<br />
2. One piece molded gaskets are required for all fluid sealing areas.<br />
3. Mixing of gasket materials within fully gasketed units is not preferable.<br />
4. The sealing system should only be used for sealing and not for alignment. Preference shall<br />
be given to non-glued gasketing systems.<br />
5. If an adhesive is used, it shall be compatible with the gasket material and the process<br />
fluids. The standard adhesive shall be a 2 component epoxy glue and heat cured.<br />
2.4 INSPECTION AND TESTING<br />
A. Hydrostatic test shall be in accordance with ASME Section VIII Division 1, paragraph UG-99.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 5700 - 5 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
2.5 PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT<br />
A. All openings shall be protected with suitable covers.<br />
B. A nameplate shall be securely attached to the exchanger In a location that is easily accessible<br />
and visible after installation. The vessel identification number along with other pertinent design<br />
details shall be on the nameplate.<br />
C. Port locations should be clearly marked and correspond with the certified vendor drawings.<br />
2.6 DOCUMENTATION<br />
A. Certified Print<br />
B. ASME U- I or U-3 form<br />
C. Certificate of Compliance to ASME Sec. VIII, Div. I<br />
D. Instruction Manual<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for structural<br />
rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of heat exchangers.<br />
B. Examine roughing-in for heat-exchanger piping to verify actual locations of piping connections<br />
before equipment installation.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 GASKETED-PLATE HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install gasketed-plate heat exchanger on custom-designed wall supports anchored to structure as<br />
indicated on Drawings.<br />
B. Install metal shroud over installed gasketed-plate heat exchanger according to manufacturer's<br />
written instructions.<br />
3.3 CONNECTIONS<br />
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping."<br />
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.<br />
B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for tube removal, service, and maintenance.<br />
C. Install piping adjacent to heat exchangers to allow space for service and maintenance of heat<br />
exchangers. Arrange piping for easy removal of heat exchangers.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 5700 - 6 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
D. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections.<br />
E. Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid connection and install pipe relief valves, full<br />
size of valve connection, to floor drain.<br />
F. Install vacuum breaker at heat-exchanger steam inlet connection.<br />
G. Install hose end valve to drain shell.<br />
H. Install thermometer on heat-exchanger and[ inlet and] outlet piping, and install thermometer on<br />
heating-fluid[ inlet and] outlet piping. Comply with requirements for thermometers specified in<br />
Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."<br />
I. Install pressure gages on heat-exchanger and heating-fluid piping. Comply with requirements<br />
for pressure gages specified in Section 230519 "Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping."<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Perform the following tests and inspections[ with the assistance of a factory-authorized service<br />
representative]:<br />
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until<br />
no leaks exist.<br />
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and<br />
equipment.<br />
B. Heat exchanger will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.<br />
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.<br />
3.5 CLEANING<br />
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect exposed finish.<br />
Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged finishes.<br />
3.6 DEMONSTRATION<br />
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to<br />
adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 5700<br />
23 5700 - 7 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 8219<br />
FAN COIL UNITS<br />
A. Extent of terminal unit work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements<br />
of this Section.<br />
B. Types of terminal units required for project include the following:<br />
1. Fan-coil units.<br />
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for piping; ductwork; testing, adjusting and balancing<br />
of terminal units; not work of this Section.<br />
D. Refer to Division 26 section for the following work; not work of this Section.<br />
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on terminal units.<br />
2. Provide the following electrical work as work of this Section, complying with<br />
requirements of Division 26 sections:<br />
a. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and<br />
terminal unit control panels.<br />
i. Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic<br />
Temperature Controls is work of that Section.<br />
E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for automatic temperature controls not factory installed,<br />
required in conjunction with terminal units; not work of this Section.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of terminal units,<br />
of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service<br />
for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1. ASHRAE Compliance: Test coils in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 33,<br />
"Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Heating Coils."<br />
2. ARI Compliance: Test and rate fan-coil units in accordance with ARI Standard<br />
440, "Room Fan-Coil Air Conditioners."<br />
3. UL Compliance: Construct and install fan-coil units in compliance with UL 883,<br />
"Safety Standards for Fan Coil Units and Room Fan Heater Units."<br />
4. UL Compliance: Provide terminal units with electrical components which have<br />
been listed and labeled by UL.<br />
23 8219 - 1 FAN COIL UNITS
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for terminal units, showing<br />
dimensions, capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gauges and finishes of<br />
materials, and installation/startup instructions.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating terminal<br />
unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection<br />
details, and methods of assembly of components.<br />
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring<br />
to terminal units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and<br />
control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed<br />
and portions to be field-installed.<br />
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems<br />
products in accordance with requirements of Division 23.<br />
E. Samples: Submit three (3) samples of each type of cabinet finish furnished.<br />
F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions,<br />
filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, control, accessories, "trouble-shooting”<br />
maintenance guide, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop<br />
drawings in Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with requirements of<br />
Division 23.<br />
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Handle terminal units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting<br />
and scoring. Do not install damaged terminal units or components; replace with new.<br />
B. Store terminal units and components in a clean, dry location. Protect from weather, dirt,<br />
fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.<br />
C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading terminal<br />
units and moving them to final location.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
1. Fan Coil Units<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. International Environmental Coproration<br />
b. Carrier Corp.<br />
c. McQuay Inc.<br />
d. Trane<br />
e. York; Div. of York International<br />
23 8219 - 2 FAN COIL UNITS
2.02 FAN-COIL UNITS:<br />
A. General: Provide fan-coil units having cabinet sizes, and in locations indicated, and of<br />
capacities, style, and having accessories as scheduled. Include in basic unit chassis, coils,<br />
fanboard, drain pan assembly, fans, housing, motor, filter, and insulation.<br />
B. Chassis: Construct chassis of galvanized steel with flanged edges.<br />
C. Insulation: Faced, heavy density glass fiber.<br />
D. Cabinet: Construct of 18-ga steel removable panels, 16-ga front. Provide insulation over<br />
entire coil section. Clean cabinet parts, bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with<br />
baked-on primer. Standard factory color selected baked enamel finish. / Custom color as<br />
selected by Architect in baked enamel finish.<br />
E. Coils: Construct of ½” seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to configurated<br />
aluminum fins. Design for 250 psi working pressure, and leak tested at 350 psi under<br />
water.<br />
F. Auxiliary Heating Coils: Construct of ½” seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to<br />
configurated aluminum fins. Design for 250 psi working pressure.<br />
G. Drain Pans: Construct of galvanized steel. Insulate with polystyrene or polyurethane<br />
insulation. Provide drain connection.<br />
H. Fans: Provide centrifugal forward curved double width wheels of reinforced fiberglass, in<br />
galvanized steel fan scrolls.<br />
I. Motors: Provide motors with integral thermal overload protection. Run test motors at<br />
factory in assembled unit prior to shipping. Provide quickly detachable motor cords.<br />
J. Filters: Provide ill thick throwaway type filters in fiberboard frames.<br />
K. Dampers: Provide 18-ga steel damper blades with polyurethane stop across entire blade<br />
length. Provide factory-mounted electric operators for 25% open cycle.<br />
L. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated and/or scheduled:<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
1. Wall Boxes: Provide aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect<br />
screen.<br />
2. Discharge Grille Panels: Provide 18-ga galvanized steel, stamped integral grilles,<br />
with access doors.<br />
3. Sub-Bases: Provide 18-ga steel sub-base, height as indicated.<br />
4. Extended Oilers: Provide plastic motor oiler tubes extending to beneath top<br />
discharge grille.<br />
5. Recessing Flanges: Provide 18-ga steel flanges for recessing fan-coil units into<br />
wall or ceiling.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 8219 - 3 FAN COIL UNITS
A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not<br />
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner<br />
acceptable to Installer.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION OF FAN COIL UNITS:<br />
A. General: Install fan-coil units as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
installation instructions.<br />
B. Locate fan-coil units as indicated, coordinate with other trades to assure correct recess size<br />
for recessed units.<br />
C. Provide piping as detailed on the drawings.<br />
D. Provide ¾” condensate drain pipe from unit drain pan connection to nearest adequate<br />
floor drain or drain pipe.<br />
E. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction.<br />
3.03 ELECTRICAL WIRING:<br />
A. General: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be<br />
factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturers wiring diagram submittal to Electrical<br />
Installer.<br />
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer I s<br />
submittal and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed<br />
with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment<br />
installer.<br />
3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed unit surfaces,<br />
and vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets.<br />
B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish<br />
materials furnished by manufacturer.<br />
C. Install new filter units for terminals requiring same.<br />
3.05 START-UP:<br />
A. Start up, test, and adjust terminal units in accordance with manufacturer's published startup<br />
instructions. Adjust for proper air flow where applicable.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 8219<br />
23 8219 - 4 FAN COIL UNITS
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.01 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 23 8239<br />
UNIT HEATERS<br />
A. Extent of terminal unit work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements<br />
of this Section.<br />
B. Types of terminal units required for project include the following:<br />
1. Unit heaters.<br />
2. Cabinet unit heaters.<br />
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for piping; ductwork; testing, adjusting and balancing<br />
of terminal units; not work of this Section.<br />
D. Refer to Division 26 section for the following work; not work of this Section.<br />
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on terminal units.<br />
2. Provide the following electrical work as work of this Section, complying with<br />
requirements of Division 26 sections:<br />
a. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and<br />
terminal unit control panels.<br />
i. Control wiring specified as work of Division 23 for Automatic<br />
Temperature Controls is work of that Section.<br />
E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for automatic temperature controls not factory installed,<br />
required in conjunction with terminal units; not work of this Section.<br />
1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE:<br />
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of terminal units,<br />
of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service<br />
for not less than 5 years.<br />
B. Codes and Standards:<br />
1.03 SUBMITTALS:<br />
1. ASHRAE Compliance: Test coils in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 33,<br />
"Methods of Testing Forced Circulation Air Cooling and Heating Coils."<br />
2. UL Compliance: Provide terminal units with electrical components which have<br />
been listed and labeled by UL.<br />
23 8239 - 1 UNIT HEATERS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for terminal units, showing<br />
dimensions, capacities, ratings, performance characteristics, gauges and finishes of<br />
materials, and installation/startup instructions.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicating terminal<br />
unit dimensions, weight loading, required clearances, construction details, field connection<br />
details, and methods of assembly of components.<br />
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring<br />
to terminal units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and<br />
control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed<br />
and portions to be field-installed.<br />
D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed systems<br />
products in accordance with requirements of Division 23.<br />
E. Samples: Submit three (3) samples of each type of cabinet finish furnished.<br />
F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions,<br />
filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, control, accessories, "trouble-shooting”<br />
maintenance guide, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data, and shop<br />
drawings in Operating and Maintenance Manual, in accordance with requirements of<br />
Division 23.<br />
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:<br />
A. Handle terminal units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting<br />
and scoring. Do not install damaged terminal units or components; replace with new.<br />
B. Store terminal units and components in a clean, dry location. Protect from weather, dirt,<br />
fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage.<br />
C. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading terminal<br />
units and moving them to final location.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS<br />
2.01 MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following in each category:<br />
1. Unit Heaters<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Airtherm Mfg. Co.<br />
b. Buffalo Forge Co.<br />
c. Dunham-Bush, Inc.<br />
d. McQuay Inc.<br />
e. Modine Mfg. Co.<br />
f. Trane<br />
g. Wing (The) Co.; Div. Wing Industries, Inc.<br />
23 8239 - 2 UNIT HEATERS
2.02 UNIT HEATERS:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
h. Young Radiator Co.<br />
i. Chromalox<br />
j. Markel<br />
2. Cabinet Unit Heaters<br />
a. Airtherm Mfg. Co.<br />
b. Dunham-Bush, Inc.<br />
c. McQuay Inc.<br />
d. Trane<br />
e. Young Radiator Co.<br />
A. General: Provide unit heaters in locations as indicated, and of capacities, style, and<br />
having accessories as scheduled.<br />
B. Horizontal Unit Heaters:<br />
1. Casings: Construct of steel, phosphatized inside and out, and finished with<br />
standard color baked enamel finish. Provide motor- mounted panel, minimum of<br />
13-ga steel. Fabricate casing to enclose coil, louvers, and fan blades. Provide<br />
louvers for 4-way air diffusion.<br />
2. Fans: Construct of aluminum, and factory-balance. Provide fan inlet orifice,<br />
smooth, and drawn into casing back panel.<br />
C. Vertical Unit Heaters:<br />
1. Casings: Construct of steel, phosphatized inside and out, and finished with<br />
standard color baked enamel finish. Design casing to enclose fan, motor, and<br />
coil, design fan orifice formed into discharge panel. Provide air diffusers as<br />
scheduled.<br />
2. Fans: Construct of aluminum and factory-balance. Design so motor and fan<br />
assembly is removable through fan outlet panel.<br />
D. Coils: Construct of plate-type aluminum fins, mechanically bonded to copper tubes.<br />
Design coil for use in steam/hot water applications.<br />
E. Motors: Provide totally enclosed motors, with built-in overload protection, having electrical<br />
characteristics as scheduled.<br />
2.03 CABINET UNIT HEATERS:<br />
A. General: Provide hot water cabinet heaters having cabinet sizes and in locations as<br />
indicated, and of capacities, style, and having accessories as scheduled. Include in basic<br />
unit chassis, coil, fanboard, fan wheels, housings, motor, and insulation.<br />
B. Chassis: Galvanized steel wrap-around structural frame with edges flanged.<br />
C. Insulation: Faced, heavy density glass fiber.<br />
23 8239 - 3 UNIT HEATERS
D. Cabinet: 16-ga removable front panel, 18-ga top and side panels. Insulate front panel<br />
over entire coil section. Provide access door on coil connection side. Clean cabinet parts,<br />
bonderize, phosphatize, and flow-coat with baked-on primer. Standard factory color<br />
selected baked enamel finish/Custom color as selected by Architect in baked enamel<br />
finish.<br />
E. Water Coils: Construct of 5/8” seamless copper tubes mechanically bonded to<br />
configurated aluminum fins. Design for 300 psi and leak test at 300 psi under water.<br />
Provide same end connections for supply and return.<br />
F. Fans: Provide centrifugal, forward curved double width fan wheels constructed of noncorrosive,<br />
molded, fiberglass reinforced thermo-plastic material. Construct fan scrolls of<br />
galvanized steel.<br />
G. Motors: Provide shaded pole motors with integral thermal over-load protection, and<br />
motor cords for plug-in to junction box in unit.<br />
H. Filters: Provide 1” thick throwaway type filters in fiberboard frames.<br />
I. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated and/or scheduled:<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.01 INSPECTION:<br />
1. Wall Boxes: Provide aluminum wall boxes with integral eliminators and insect<br />
screen.<br />
2. Recessing Flanges: Provide 18-ga steel flanges for recessing cabinet heaters into<br />
wall or ceiling.<br />
3. Sub-bases: Provide 18-ga steel sub-base for vertical units, height as indicated.<br />
4. Extended Oilers: Provide plastic motor oiler tubes extending to beneath top<br />
discharge grille.<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not<br />
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner<br />
acceptable to Installer.<br />
3.02 INSTALLATION OF UNIT HEATERS:<br />
A. General: Install unit heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
installation instructions.<br />
B. Uncrate units and inspect for damage. Verify that nameplate data corresponds with unit<br />
designation.<br />
C. Hang units from building substrate, not from piping. Mount as high as possible to<br />
maintain greatest headroom possible unless otherwise indicated.<br />
D. Support units with rod-type hangers anchored to building substrate.<br />
E. Install piping as indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 8239 - 4 UNIT HEATERS
F. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction.<br />
3.03 INSTALLATION OF CABINET HEATERS:<br />
A. General: Install cabinet heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
installation instructions.<br />
B. Locate cabinet heaters as indicated, coordinate with other trades to assure correct recess<br />
size for recessed units.<br />
C. Install piping as indicated.<br />
D. Protect units with protective covers during balance of construction.<br />
3.04 ELECTRICAL WIRING:<br />
A. General: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be<br />
factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturers wiring diagram submittal to Electrical<br />
Installer.<br />
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer I s<br />
submittal and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed<br />
with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment<br />
installer.<br />
3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:<br />
A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed unit surfaces,<br />
and vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of cabinets.<br />
B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished cabinets, using finish<br />
materials furnished by manufacturer.<br />
C. Install new filter units for terminals requiring same.<br />
3.06 START-UP:<br />
A. Start up, test, and adjust terminal units in accordance with manufacturer's published startup<br />
instructions. Adjust for proper air flow where applicable.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 8239<br />
23 8239 - 5 UNIT HEATERS
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
SECTION 238416<br />
MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION UNITS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 Description<br />
A. Furnish and install, as shown in plans and schedule and as specified herein, an indoor swimming<br />
pool heat pump dehumidification system with air-to-water and air-to-air heat recovery. The unit<br />
shall be completely factory-assembled, including all internal piping and control wiring. The<br />
system shall include a compressor, a pool water condenser, an evaporator coil, an air side<br />
condenser reheat coil, a circulating fan, and a micro-processor based control system.<br />
B. Units shall be manufactured and tested in the U.S.A. and listed by and carry the label of ETL.<br />
1.3 Intent<br />
A. It is the intent of this Section of the specifications to provide a complete and operable natatorium<br />
dehumidification system as shown and scheduled on the plans.<br />
1.4 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes packaged, factory-assembled and -tested, refrigerant-type, mechanical<br />
dehumidification units designed for indoor installation.<br />
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Seismic Performance: Dehumidification units shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions<br />
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.<br />
1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts<br />
from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified."<br />
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each dehumidification unit indicated. Include rated capacities, operating<br />
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For each dehumidification unit indicated. Include plans, elevations, sections,<br />
details, and attachments to other work.<br />
23 8416 - 1 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION<br />
UNITS
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required<br />
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field<br />
connection.<br />
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.<br />
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Source quality-control reports.<br />
B. Field quality-control reports.<br />
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.<br />
1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For dehumidification units to include in emergency,<br />
operation, and maintenance manuals.<br />
1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective<br />
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
1. Filters: One set(s) of each type of filter specified.<br />
2. Fan Belts: One set(s) for each belt-drive fan.<br />
1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by<br />
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
B. ASHRAE Compliance:<br />
1. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5, "Systems and Equipment" and<br />
Section 7, "<strong>Construction</strong> and Startup."<br />
2. Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 15, "Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems."<br />
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6,<br />
"Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."<br />
1.11 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.<br />
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 8416 - 2 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION<br />
UNITS
1.12 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace components of dehumidification units that fail in materials or workmanship within<br />
specified warranty period.<br />
1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years<br />
from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
2. Warranty Period for Refrigerant Coils: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five<br />
years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on<br />
Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. PoolPak<br />
2. Four Seasons<br />
3. Munters/Des Champs<br />
2.2 PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION<br />
A. The unit shall control space temperature and relative humidity and pool water temperature.<br />
Warm moist air from the natatorium is drawn over an evaporator, and the latent and sensible<br />
heat is removed from the air. The heat captured by this process and the heat generated from the<br />
compressor power consumption are absorbed by a mechanical refrigeration system. The<br />
resulting dryer, cooler air is drawn over a reheat condenser coil and auxiliary heating coil (if<br />
provided) by a supply fan.<br />
B. The refrigeration system is activated if any of the following occur:<br />
1. Relative humidity rises above set point.<br />
2. Space temperature rises above the set point.<br />
C. The unit shall monitor space temperature and relative humidity, pool water temperature and<br />
building surface temperature.<br />
1. The thermal energy absorbed by the refrigeration system is distributed as follows:<br />
2.3 CONSTRUCTION<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. To maintain the natatorium space temperature.<br />
b. To maintain pool water temperature.<br />
c. Rejected to Water Cooled Condenser<br />
A. The cabinet shall be fabricated out of a minimum of 20 gauge G90 galvanized steel. The unit<br />
shall be painted with an electrostatically applied polyamide epoxy powder coating, with a<br />
thickness of 2-3 mils, baked and bonded at 420°F until it forms a hard, textured surface.<br />
23 8416 - 3 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION<br />
UNITS
B. <strong>Construction</strong> shall be modular, consisting of removable panels with permanently affixed<br />
fasteners. Base pans shall be formed out of a minimum of 16 gauge G90 galvanized steel with<br />
floor mounting support channels. The condensate drain pan under the evaporator shall be epoxy<br />
coated galvanized steel. The compressor and controls shall be located in a compartment out of<br />
the air stream. Surfaces adjacent to the coil compartment shall be insulated with insulation to<br />
prevent condensation.<br />
C. The unit shall be of horizontal design. The supply air discharge shall be horizontal.<br />
D. Hinged Access Doors shall be provided at the openings for Compressor, Electrical Panel,<br />
Blowers, Motors and Drives. Doors shall be double-wall, insulated, mounted on a continuous<br />
piano hinge, secured with latches and sealed against a rigid steel frame with hollow-bulb rubber<br />
gasket material.<br />
2.4 COMPRESSOR<br />
A. The compressor shall be high-efficiency scroll type operating at scheduled voltage, phase, and<br />
frequency.<br />
B. The suction gas cooled compressor shall be equipped with thermal overload protection and a<br />
crankcase heater to prevent refrigerant migration to the compressor oil during shutdown.<br />
C. Provide a compressor sound jacket consisting of reinforced vinyl sewn around a 2 pound density<br />
fiberglass blanket to provide acoustical attenuation.<br />
2.5 FILTER RACK AND FILTERS<br />
A. The dehumidification unit shall include a weather tight air filter section with a duct flange and<br />
access door for side loading of filters. The filters shall be Class II, two inch, throw away.<br />
2.6 REFRIGERANT<br />
A. The refrigerant shall be R-410A.<br />
2.7 FAN<br />
A. The fan shall be a forward-curved, centrifugal blower. The wheel shall be dynamically balanced<br />
and installed on a steel shaft. The blower scroll and housing shall be constructed of cold-rolled<br />
steel, coated with an electrostatically applied acrylic enamel paint or G90 galvanized steel.<br />
B. The fan shall operate at the scheduled supply air CFM, outside air CFM (if equipped with this<br />
option) and W.C. external static pressure (ESP).<br />
2.8 FAN MOTOR<br />
A. The class B winding fan motor shall be belt drive. The motor shall comply with the efficiency<br />
requirements of EPACT-92. The belt drive assembly shall include a single “A” or “B” section belt<br />
and an adjustable motor sheave or double “B” section belt and non-adjustable motor sheave<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 8416 - 4 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION<br />
UNITS
depending upon motor horsepower for establishing the specified CFM. Single phase motors shall<br />
be capacitor start. The fan motor horsepower, voltage and frequency shall be as scheduled.<br />
2.9 EVAPORATOR (DEHUMIDIFICATION) COIL<br />
A. The coil shall be of adequate face area and rows to remove the specified amount of moisture<br />
from the air stream at specified conditions.<br />
B. The evaporator coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes.<br />
The fins shall be acrylic-coated for added corrosion protection.<br />
2.10 AIR CONDENSER (AIR REHEAT) COIL<br />
A. The coil shall be of sufficient size to reject the required amount of total heat.<br />
B. The condenser coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes.<br />
The fins shall be acrylic-coated for added corrosion protection.<br />
2.11 AUXILIARY AIR HOT WATER COIL<br />
A. The hot water coil shall be factory mounted after the air reheat condenser coil. The installing<br />
contractor shall install the control valve (by others) and pipe the hot water to the connections on<br />
the outside of the unit. The control device for the valve must be interlocked with the terminal strips<br />
in the unit.<br />
B. Coil shall be constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes. The fins shall<br />
be acrylic-coated for added corrosion protection.<br />
2.12 WATER CONDENSER (POOL HEATING)<br />
A. For recovering heat to pool water, the unit shall be equipped with a vented refrigerant-to-water,<br />
helically wound coaxial vented condenser sized to reject the required amount of heat. The water<br />
side tubing shall be constructed of cupronickel for corrosion protection. The maximum water<br />
pressure drop shall be as scheduled.<br />
2.13 CONTROL PANEL<br />
A. The control panel shall have a 4 line, 20 character LCD display, LED annunciators, and a 6<br />
button operator interface. The controller main board shall have all set points and program<br />
information stored in nonvolatile memory for protection from power failure.<br />
B. The control panel shall be wall or unit mounted. It shall be capable of being mounted up to 1000<br />
feet from the unit. All internal circuit boards shall be conformal coated. The control panel shall be<br />
connected to the unit by standard six wire RJ-25 phone cord. The control panel shall be capable<br />
of being directly connected to the unit for service convenience.<br />
C. The controller shall be micro-processor based. The following set points shall be programmable at<br />
the panel:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 8416 - 5 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION<br />
UNITS
1. Space Air Temperature<br />
2. Space Relative Humidity<br />
D. The following LCD readouts or annunciators shall be provided:<br />
1. Start Up Screen: Power On Screen ; Version No.; Date<br />
2. Setpoints<br />
3. Readouts<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. Space Air Temperature<br />
b. Space Relative Humidity<br />
c. Dewpoint (Space)<br />
d. Water Heating - (Yes/No)<br />
e. Aux. Water Heating - (Yes/No)<br />
f. Water Temp<br />
g. Space (Cooling) - (Yes/No)<br />
h. Aux. Air Heat - (Yes/No)<br />
i. Dehumidify - (Yes/No)<br />
j. Economizer - (Yes/No)<br />
k. Suction Temperature<br />
l. Suction Pressure<br />
m. Discharge Pressure<br />
4. Service Parameters Password Protected Including<br />
a. Degree F or Degree C Selections<br />
b. Economizer Options<br />
c. Deadbands<br />
d. Anti Cycle Timer<br />
e. Offset Selection<br />
f. Fire Trip Action (Open or Close on Alarm)<br />
g. Manual Control<br />
h. Sensor Offsets<br />
5. Service Diagnostic Codes<br />
6. Service Information Including:<br />
a. Surface Temperature<br />
b. Dewpoint Temperature<br />
c. Network Control - (Yes/No)<br />
d. Run Hours<br />
7. Faults – Global<br />
1) Compressor<br />
2) Fan<br />
3) A/C<br />
4) Aux. Air Heat<br />
5) Aux. Water Heat<br />
a. High Discharge Pressure<br />
b. Low Suction Pressure<br />
c. High Compressor Motor Temperature<br />
d. and “Count to Ten” Lockout<br />
23 8416 - 6 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION<br />
UNITS
8. AC Proof Status – Both Air and Water<br />
2.14 CONTROL SENSORS<br />
A. The unit shall be provided with the following factory mounted and wired control devices:<br />
1. Space Dry Bulb Temperature Sensor (field wired with economizer option)<br />
2. Space Relative Humidity Sensor (field wired with economizer option)<br />
3. Pool Water Temperature Sensor Defrost Controller<br />
4. Defrost Controller<br />
B. The unit shall be delivered with the following factory supplied sensors to be installed in the<br />
field:<br />
1. Cold Surface Condensation Prevention Temperature Sensor (Dew Point Reset).<br />
C. An anti-cycle timer shall be provided in the unit control system to prevent short-cycling of the<br />
compressor.<br />
D. Under normal conditions, the unit fan shall operate continuously, to provide air circulation within<br />
the pool enclosure.<br />
E. The compressor shall not operate if the defrost thermostat set point has been reached.<br />
Evaporator coil defrost shall be accomplished by the flow of air drawn across the coil by the unit<br />
fan.<br />
2.15 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION<br />
A. Description<br />
1. All essential operating and logic controls shall be factory mounted and wired in the unit.<br />
Control sequences shall be designed specifically to control swimming pool environmental<br />
conditions.<br />
B. Humidity Control<br />
1. When the humidity is above the set point the controller energizes the compressor and<br />
directs hot gas to air reheat condenser. If the pool water temperature is below the set<br />
point, the recovered heat is directed to the pool water condenser and the air reheat<br />
condenser or the auxiliary air cooling condenser, if so equipped. If the pool water<br />
temperature is at or above the set point, the recovered heat is directed to the air reheat<br />
condenser or the auxiliary air cooling condenser, if so equipped.<br />
C. Pool Water Heating<br />
1. When the dehumidifier is in either the dehumidifying and/or air conditioning mode and<br />
the pool water temperature is below the set point, a portion of the recovered heat is<br />
directed to the pool water condenser. At other times when the pool water requires heat, the<br />
PoolComPak activates the main pool water heater.<br />
D. Space Heating<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 8416 - 7 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION<br />
UNITS
1. When the compressor is running in the dehumidification mode and the pool water<br />
temperature is at or above the set point and the space temperature is below the set point,<br />
the recovered heat is directed to the air reheat condenser. If the space temperature drops<br />
more than 2°F below the set point, the auxiliary space heating system (by others) shall be<br />
activated by a dry contact closure from the controller. A further drop in space temperature<br />
will activate the second stage of auxiliary heat (if available).<br />
E. Space Humidity Reset Control based on Cold Surface Temperature<br />
1. When the temperature of the interior surface at the cold surface sensor drops to within 5ºF<br />
of the absolute humidity set point (dew point), the absolute humidity set point is offset<br />
downward. This condition causes the dehumidifier system to activate humidity control,<br />
lowering the space dew point and hindering the formation of condensate on the cold<br />
surfaces.<br />
F. Air Conditioning<br />
1. Water Cooled Condenser<br />
G. Fire Trip<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
a. In order to achieve space cooling of the natatorium by the rejection of reclaimed<br />
heat, the dehumidifier shall be equipped with an auxiliary water cooled condenser<br />
and shall automatically change over from heating to air conditioning as a function<br />
of dry bulb cooling demand in the natatorium. The sensible and latent heat<br />
recovered in air conditioning mode is rejected to the auxiliary water cooled<br />
condenser if pool water temperature is satisfied. This condenser shall be factorymounted<br />
and refrigerant-piped, non-cleanable, with a head pressure controlled<br />
water regulating valve.<br />
b. The condensing water shall be noncorrosive and non-fouling with a temperature<br />
range of 45°F to 85°F. The condenser shall be a counterflow, helically wound,<br />
coaxial, tube-in-tube heat exchanger for maximum heat transfer from the<br />
refrigerant to the condensing water. The water tube shall be constructed of<br />
corrosion-resistant cupronickel. The water circuit connections shall be MPT. The heat<br />
exchanger shall be UL Listed and/or CSA Certified.<br />
1. Upon receipt of a contact closure from a fire control system (by others) a fire trip cycle shall<br />
be initiated. Compressor and fan motor shall be de-energized. For units equipped with<br />
the optional economizer, the dry contact shall open causing the outside and exhaust air<br />
dampers to close and the return air damper to open. Contact action is programmable.<br />
2.16 PROTECTIVE WRAPPING FOR SHIPPING AND/OR STORAGE<br />
A. Provide a heavy plastic protective wrapping around the top and sides of the unit to protect the<br />
unit from weather or road dirt while being shipped and / or stored. The wrapping shall be<br />
draped over the unit and secured with stretch wrap.<br />
23 8416 - 8 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION<br />
UNITS
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
B. Examine roughing-in for hot-water and chilled water piping systems to verify actual locations of<br />
piping connections before equipment installation.<br />
C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where dehumidification units will be<br />
installed.<br />
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Equipment Mounting: Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in<br />
Section 230548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."<br />
1. Minimum Deflection: 1/4 inch (6 mm).<br />
B. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stop of size required<br />
to support weight of dehumidification unit.<br />
1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section 230548<br />
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Fabricate brackets or<br />
supports as required.<br />
2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports specified in Section 230529 "Hangers<br />
and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."<br />
3.3 CONNECTIONS<br />
A. Where piping is installed adjacent to dehumidification units, allow space for service and<br />
maintenance of dehumidification units.<br />
B. Connect piping to dehumidification units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible connectors.<br />
C. Connect condensate drain pans using minimum NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32) copper tubing. Extend to<br />
nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan, and install<br />
cleanout at changes in direction.<br />
D. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232300 "Refrigerant Piping." Connect to<br />
supply and return coil tappings with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.<br />
E. Hot-Water Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping." Connect to<br />
supply coil tappings with shutoff valve, return coil tappings with balancing valve, and union or<br />
flange at each connection.<br />
F. Steam and Condensate Piping: Comply with requirements in Section 232213 "Steam and<br />
Condensate Heating Piping." Connect with shutoff valve and union or flange.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 8416 - 9 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION<br />
UNITS
G. Duct installation requirements are specified in Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" and Section 233116<br />
"Nonmetal Ducts." Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are<br />
specific connection requirements:<br />
1. Install ducts to termination in roof-mounted frames. Where indicated, terminate return-air<br />
duct through roof structure and insulate the space between roof and bottom of<br />
dehumidification unit.<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test,<br />
and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.<br />
B. Perform tests and inspections.<br />
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect<br />
components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist<br />
in testing.<br />
C. Tests and Inspections:<br />
1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils with water, and test coils and connections for<br />
leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.<br />
2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no<br />
leaks exist.<br />
3. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and<br />
equipment.<br />
D. Dehumidification unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.<br />
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.<br />
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE<br />
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.<br />
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Perform the following final checks before startup:<br />
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.<br />
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to<br />
piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload<br />
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.<br />
3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section.<br />
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify free fan<br />
wheel rotation and smooth bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts,<br />
and install belt guards.<br />
5. Check lubrication of bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts.<br />
6. Set outside- and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside-air setting.<br />
7. Install clean filters.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
23 8416 - 10 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION<br />
UNITS
8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in<br />
connected duct systems are in fully open position.<br />
C. Starting procedures for dehumidification units include the following:<br />
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel. Adjust fan<br />
to indicated rpm. Replace malfunctioning motors, bearings, and fan wheels.<br />
2. Measure and record motor's electrical values for voltage and amperage.<br />
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record fan<br />
performance.<br />
D. Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for<br />
testing, adjusting, and balancing of dehumidification unit.<br />
E. Startup Report: Report findings during startup. Identify startup steps, corrective measures taken,<br />
and final results.<br />
3.6 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.<br />
B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.<br />
3.7 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean dehumidification units internally, on completion of installation, according to<br />
manufacturer's written instructions. Clean fan interiors to remove foreign material and<br />
construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheels, cabinets, and coils' entering-air face.<br />
B. After completing system installation, testing, and startup service of dehumidification units, clean<br />
filter housings and install new filters.<br />
3.8 DEMONSTRATION<br />
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to<br />
adjust, operate, and maintain dehumidification units.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15 th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/16/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 23 8416<br />
23 8416 - 11 MECHANICAL DEHUMIDIFICATION<br />
UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 0519<br />
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less.<br />
2. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. VFC: Variable frequency controller.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division.<br />
2. Alpha Wire.<br />
3. Belden Inc.<br />
4. Encore Wire Corporation.<br />
5. General Cable Technologies Corporation.<br />
6. Southwire Incorporated.<br />
B. Aluminum and Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658.<br />
C. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2 or<br />
Type XHHW-2.<br />
D. Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for armored cable, Type AC<br />
and metal-clad cable, Type MC with ground wire, and Type MCAP cable.<br />
E. VFC Cable:<br />
1. Comply with UL 1277, UL 1685, and NFPA 70 for Type TC-ER cable.<br />
260519 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL<br />
POWER CONDUCTORS AND<br />
CABLES
2. Type TC-ER with oversized crosslinked polyethylene insulation, spiral-wrapped foil plus 85<br />
percent coverage braided shields and insulated full-size ground wire, and sunlight- and<br />
oil-resistant outer PVC jacket.<br />
2.2 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.<br />
2. Gardner Bender.<br />
3. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc.<br />
4. Ideal Industries, Inc.<br />
5. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation.<br />
6. NSi Industries LLC.<br />
7. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group.<br />
8. 3M; Electrical Markets Division.<br />
9. Tyco Electronics.<br />
B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type,<br />
and class for application and service indicated.<br />
2.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by<br />
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
B. Comply with NFPA 70.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS<br />
A. Feeders: Copper for feeders smaller than No. 4 AWG; copper or aluminum for feeders No. 4<br />
AWG and larger. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.<br />
B. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and<br />
larger, except VFC cable, which shall be extra flexible stranded.<br />
3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING<br />
METHODS<br />
A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, XHHW-2 single conductors in raceway.<br />
B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, XHHW-2 single conductors in raceway or Metal-clad<br />
cable, Type MC.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
260519 - 2 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL<br />
POWER CONDUCTORS AND<br />
CABLES
C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2,<br />
single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, Type MCAP and Metal-clad cable,<br />
Type MC.<br />
D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-2-<br />
THWN-2, single conductors in raceway and Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.<br />
E. Exposed Branch Circuits, Including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in<br />
raceway, Armored cable, Type AC and Metal-clad cable, Type MCAP, Type MC.<br />
F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single<br />
conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC and Metal-clad cable, Type MCAP, Type MC.<br />
G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: Type THHN-<br />
2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway or Type XHHW-2, single conductors in raceway.<br />
H. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainlesssteel,<br />
wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application.<br />
I. VFC Output Circuits: Type XHHW-2 in metal conduit or Type TC-ER cable with braided shield.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES<br />
A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to<br />
Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and<br />
cables.<br />
C. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used<br />
must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended<br />
maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.<br />
D. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will<br />
not damage cables or raceway.<br />
E. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and<br />
follow surface contours where possible.<br />
F. Support cables according to Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."<br />
3.4 CONNECTIONS<br />
A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening<br />
values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in<br />
UL 486A-486B.<br />
B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that<br />
possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced<br />
conductors.<br />
1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice, termination, and tap for aluminum conductors.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
260519 - 3 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL<br />
POWER CONDUCTORS AND<br />
CABLES
C. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches of slack.<br />
3.5 IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 0553 "Identification for<br />
Electrical Systems."<br />
B. Identify each spare conductor at each end as spare.<br />
3.6 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS<br />
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with<br />
requirements in Section 26 0544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."<br />
3.7 FIRESTOPPING<br />
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore<br />
original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07 8413 "Penetration<br />
Firestopping."<br />
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Test and Inspection Reports for feeders: Prepare a written report to record the following:<br />
1. Procedures used.<br />
2. Results that comply with requirements.<br />
3. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve<br />
compliance with requirements.<br />
B. Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 0519<br />
260519 - 4 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL<br />
POWER CONDUCTORS AND<br />
CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 0526<br />
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment.<br />
B. Building has existing grounding and bonding systems. Electrical Contractor shall verify conditions<br />
and functionality of the existing electrodes and conductors.<br />
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and<br />
maintenance manuals.<br />
1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data,"<br />
include the following:<br />
1) Include recommended testing intervals.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, for<br />
intended location and application.<br />
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems.<br />
2. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC.<br />
3. ERICO International Corporation.<br />
4. Fushi Copperweld Inc.<br />
5. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC.<br />
260526 - 1 GROUNDING AND BONDING<br />
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
6. Harger Lightning and Grounding.<br />
7. ILSCO.<br />
8. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group.<br />
9. Robbins Lightning, Inc.<br />
10. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.<br />
2.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a<br />
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
B. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.<br />
2.3 CONDUCTORS<br />
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by<br />
applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
B. Bare Copper Conductors:<br />
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.<br />
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.<br />
3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33.<br />
4. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch in diameter.<br />
5. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor.<br />
6. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8<br />
inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.<br />
7. Tinned Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper<br />
ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.<br />
C. Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches in cross section,<br />
with 9/32-inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply<br />
with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be, impulse tested at 5000 V.<br />
2.4 CONNECTORS<br />
A. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in<br />
which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items<br />
connected.<br />
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy.<br />
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for<br />
materials being joined and installation conditions.<br />
D. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless [compression] [exothermic]type<br />
wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
260526 - 2 GROUNDING AND BONDING<br />
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
2.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES<br />
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 APPLICATIONS<br />
A. Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for<br />
No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install barecopper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.<br />
1. Bury at least 24 inches below grade.<br />
C. Isolated Grounding Conductors: Green-colored insulation with continuous yellow stripe. On<br />
feeders with isolated ground, identify grounding conductor where visible to normal inspection,<br />
with alternating bands of green and yellow tape, with at least three bands of green and two<br />
bands of yellow.<br />
D. Conductor Terminations and Connections:<br />
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.<br />
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors except at test wells and as otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.<br />
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.<br />
3.2 GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE<br />
A. Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the<br />
ground bus. Install a main bonding jumper between the neutral and ground buses.<br />
3.3 GROUNDING SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS<br />
A. Generator: Install grounding electrode(s) at the generator location. The electrode shall be<br />
connected to the equipment grounding conductor and to the frame of the generator.<br />
3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING<br />
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.<br />
B. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted<br />
electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers,<br />
humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct<br />
and connected metallic piping.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
260526 - 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING<br />
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
C. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated equipment<br />
grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond conductor to<br />
heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.<br />
D. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor<br />
connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate conductor from raceway and from<br />
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the<br />
applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or<br />
feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply circuit raceway with a nonmetallic raceway<br />
fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate<br />
insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate conductor from raceway and from<br />
panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the<br />
applicable derived system or service unless otherwise indicated.<br />
F. Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding electrode and a separate insulated<br />
equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding conductor installed with branch-circuit<br />
conductors.<br />
G. Metallic Fences: Comply with requirements of IEEE C2.<br />
1. Grounding Conductor: Bare copper, not less than No. 8 AWG.<br />
2. Gates: Shall be bonded to the grounding conductor with a flexible bonding jumper.<br />
3.5 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise<br />
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may<br />
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.<br />
B. Ground Bonding Common with Lightning Protection System: Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96<br />
when interconnecting with lightning protection system. Bond electrical power system ground<br />
directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service<br />
grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode<br />
conductor, and install in conduit.<br />
C. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as<br />
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating if any.<br />
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length<br />
from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes,<br />
and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.<br />
D. Test Wells: Ground rod driven through drilled hole in bottom of handhole. Handholes are<br />
specified in Section 26 0543 "Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems," and shall<br />
be at least 12 inches deep, with cover.<br />
1. Test Wells: Install at least one test well for each service unless otherwise indicated. Install<br />
at the ground rod electrically closest to service entrance. Set top of test well flush with<br />
finished grade or floor.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
260526 - 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING<br />
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
E. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except<br />
where routed through short lengths of conduit.<br />
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate<br />
any adjacent parts.<br />
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install<br />
bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.<br />
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is<br />
required, use a bolted clamp.<br />
F. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:<br />
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from<br />
building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service<br />
entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes;<br />
use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of<br />
the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect<br />
grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or<br />
sleeve to conductor at each end.<br />
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water<br />
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.<br />
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff<br />
valve.<br />
G. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner column<br />
and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.<br />
3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Tests and Inspections:<br />
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been<br />
energized, test for compliance with requirements.<br />
2. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical<br />
connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written<br />
instructions.<br />
3. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance<br />
level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at ground test wells.<br />
Make tests at ground rods before any conductors are connected.<br />
a. Measure ground resistance no fewer than two full days after last trace of<br />
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural<br />
drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of<br />
reducing natural ground resistance.<br />
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.<br />
4. Prepare dimensioned Drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground-rod<br />
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order,<br />
and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and<br />
their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and other phenomena<br />
that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results.<br />
B. Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
260526 - 5 GROUNDING AND BONDING<br />
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.<br />
D. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:<br />
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.<br />
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms.<br />
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms.<br />
E. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect<br />
promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 0526<br />
260526 - 6 GROUNDING AND BONDING<br />
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 0529<br />
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.<br />
2. <strong>Construction</strong> requirements for concrete bases.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.<br />
B. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.<br />
C. RMC: Rigid metal conduit.<br />
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported<br />
systems and its contents.<br />
B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported<br />
equipment and connected systems and components.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Comply with NFPA 70.<br />
1.6 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,<br />
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.<br />
B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items<br />
are specified in Section 07 7200 "Roof Accessories."<br />
260529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS<br />
A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field<br />
assembly.<br />
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Allied Tube & Conduit.<br />
b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.<br />
c. ERICO International Corporation.<br />
d. GS Metals Corp.<br />
e. Thomas & Betts Corporation.<br />
f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.<br />
g. Wesanco, Inc.<br />
3. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA-<br />
4.<br />
4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.<br />
B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.<br />
C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated<br />
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.<br />
D. Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded<br />
body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or cables in<br />
riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces as<br />
required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.<br />
E. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes,<br />
and bars; black and galvanized.<br />
F. Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their<br />
supports to building surfaces include the following:<br />
1. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement<br />
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for<br />
supported loads and building materials where used.<br />
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not<br />
limited to, the following:<br />
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one<br />
of the following:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
1) Hilti Inc.<br />
2) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.<br />
3) MKT Fastening, LLC.<br />
260529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
4) Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.<br />
2. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel, for use in hardened<br />
portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for<br />
supported loads and building materials in which used.<br />
a. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not<br />
limited to, the following:<br />
b. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of<br />
the following:<br />
1) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.<br />
2) Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.<br />
3) Hilti Inc.<br />
4) ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.<br />
5) MKT Fastening, LLC.<br />
3. Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS<br />
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.<br />
4. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached<br />
structural element.<br />
5. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.<br />
6. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.<br />
7. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.<br />
2.2 FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions<br />
of supported equipment.<br />
B. Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes<br />
and plates.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 APPLICATION<br />
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical<br />
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.<br />
B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for<br />
EMT, IMC, and RMC as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter.<br />
C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or<br />
other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without<br />
exceeding specified design load limits.<br />
1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps, single-bolt<br />
conduit clamps, or single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in<br />
support channel.<br />
260529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
D. Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 1-1/2inch<br />
and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended<br />
ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports.<br />
3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this<br />
Article.<br />
B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC<br />
may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70.<br />
C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will<br />
be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum<br />
static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus<br />
200 lb.<br />
D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten<br />
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless<br />
otherwise indicated by code:<br />
1. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.<br />
2. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.<br />
3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor<br />
fasteners on solid masonry units.<br />
4. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.<br />
5. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock<br />
washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches thick or<br />
greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than<br />
4 inches thick.<br />
6. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69 or<br />
Spring-tension clamps.<br />
7. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.<br />
8. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,<br />
panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes,<br />
transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.<br />
E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing<br />
bars.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS<br />
A. Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for site-fabricated<br />
metal supports.<br />
B. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation<br />
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.<br />
C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
260529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
3.4 CONCRETE BASES<br />
A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches larger in both<br />
directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from<br />
edge of the base.<br />
B. Use 3000-psi, 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and<br />
placement requirements are specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."<br />
C. Anchor equipment to concrete base.<br />
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting<br />
drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be<br />
embedded.<br />
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment.<br />
3. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 0529<br />
260529 - 5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 0533<br />
RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings.<br />
2. Nonmetal conduits, tubing, and fittings.<br />
3. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters.<br />
4. Nonmetal wireways and auxiliary gutters.<br />
5. Surface raceways.<br />
6. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.<br />
7. Handholes and boxes for exterior underground cabling.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. ARC: Aluminum rigid conduit.<br />
B. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.<br />
C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.<br />
2. Allied Tube & Conduit.<br />
3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.<br />
4. Electri-Flex Company.<br />
5. O-Z/Gedney.<br />
6. Picoma Industries.<br />
7. Republic Conduit.<br />
8. Robroy Industries.<br />
9. Southwire Company.<br />
26 0533 - 1 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
10. Thomas & Betts Corporation.<br />
11. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation.<br />
12. Wheatland Tube Company.<br />
B. Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in<br />
NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
C. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6.<br />
D. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A.<br />
E. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242.<br />
F. PVC-Coated Steel Conduit: PVC-coated [rigid steel conduit] [IMC].<br />
1. Comply with NEMA RN 1.<br />
2. Coating Thickness: 0.040 inch, minimum.<br />
G. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797.<br />
H. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel or aluminum.<br />
I. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360.<br />
J. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B.<br />
1. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886 and NFPA 70.<br />
2. Fittings for EMT:<br />
a. Material: Steel or die cast.<br />
b. Type: Setscrew or compression.<br />
3. Expansion Fittings: PVC or steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for<br />
environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.<br />
4. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness of 0.040 inch, with<br />
overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.<br />
K. Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having<br />
jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect<br />
threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity.<br />
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.<br />
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.<br />
3. Arnco Corporation.<br />
4. CANTEX Inc.<br />
5. CertainTeed Corporation.<br />
6. Condux International, Inc.<br />
7. Electri-Flex Company.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0533 - 2 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
8. Kraloy.<br />
9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.<br />
10. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.<br />
11. RACO; Hubbell.<br />
12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.<br />
B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as<br />
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and<br />
application.<br />
C. ENT: Comply with NEMA TC 13 and UL 1653.<br />
D. RNC: Type EPC-40-PVC, complying with NEMA TC 2 and UL 651 unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. LFNC: Comply with UL 1660.<br />
F. Rigid HDPE: Comply with UL 651A.<br />
G. Continuous HDPE: Comply with UL 651B.<br />
H. Coilable HDPE: Preassembled with conductors or cables, and complying with ASTM D 3485.<br />
I. RTRC: Comply with UL 1684A and NEMA TC 14.<br />
J. Fittings for ENT and RNC: Comply with NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and<br />
material.<br />
K. Fittings for LFNC: Comply with UL 514B.<br />
L. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,<br />
respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
M. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of<br />
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile<br />
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
2.3 METAL WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.<br />
2. Hoffman.<br />
3. Mono-Systems, Inc.<br />
4. Square D.<br />
B. Description: Sheet metal, complying with UL 870 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R unless<br />
otherwise indicated, and sized according to NFPA 70.<br />
1. Metal wireways installed outdoors shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a<br />
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0533 - 3 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include covers, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters,<br />
hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for<br />
complete system.<br />
D. Wireway Covers: Hinged type or Screw-cover type unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.<br />
2.4 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS AND AUXILIARY GUTTERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Allied Moulded Products, Inc.<br />
2. Hoffman.<br />
3. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.<br />
4. Niedax-Kleinhuis USA, Inc.<br />
B. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic wireways and auxiliary gutters shall be listed and labeled as<br />
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and<br />
application.<br />
C. Description: Fiberglass polyester, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, without<br />
holes or knockouts. Cover shall be gasketed with oil-resistant gasket material and fastened with<br />
captive screws treated for corrosion resistance. Connections shall be flanged and have stainlesssteel<br />
screws and oil-resistant gaskets.<br />
D. Description: PVC, extruded and fabricated to required size and shape, and having snap-on<br />
cover, mechanically coupled connections, and plastic fasteners.<br />
E. Fittings and Accessories: Couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down<br />
straps, end caps, and other fittings shall match and mate with wireways as required for complete<br />
system.<br />
F. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall have a VOC content of 510 and 550 g/L or less,<br />
respectively, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
G. Solvent cements and adhesive primers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of<br />
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile<br />
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
2.5 SURFACE RACEWAYS<br />
A. Listing and Labeling: Surface raceways and tele-power poles shall be listed and labeled as<br />
defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and<br />
application.<br />
B. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers complying with UL 5.<br />
Manufacturer's standard enamel finish in color selected by Architect.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0533 - 4 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
a. Mono-Systems, Inc.<br />
b. Panduit Corp.<br />
c. Wiremold / Legrand.<br />
C. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two- or three-piece construction, complying with UL 5A, and<br />
manufactured of rigid PVC with texture and color selected by Architect from manufacturer's<br />
standard colors. Product shall comply with UL 94 V-0 requirements for self-extinguishing<br />
characteristics.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
D. Tele-Power Poles:<br />
a. Hubbell Incorporated.<br />
b. Mono-Systems, Inc.<br />
c. Panduit Corp.<br />
d. Wiremold / Legrand.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
a. Mono-Systems, Inc.<br />
b. Panduit Corp.<br />
c. Wiremold / Legrand.<br />
2. Material: Galvanized steel with ivory baked-enamel finish.<br />
3. Fittings and Accessories: Dividers, end caps, covers, cutouts, wiring harnesses, devices,<br />
mounting materials, and other fittings shall match and mate with tele-power pole as<br />
required for complete system.<br />
2.6 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Adalet.<br />
2. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds.<br />
3. EGS/Appleton Electric.<br />
4. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company.<br />
5. FSR Inc.<br />
6. Hoffman.<br />
7. Hubbell Incorporated.<br />
8. Kraloy.<br />
9. Milbank Manufacturing Co.<br />
10. Mono-Systems, Inc.<br />
11. O-Z/Gedney.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0533 - 5 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
12. RACO; Hubbell.<br />
13. Robroy Industries.<br />
14. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company.<br />
15. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures.<br />
16. Thomas & Betts Corporation.<br />
17. Wiremold / Legrand.<br />
B. General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets<br />
installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations.<br />
C. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A.<br />
D. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy or aluminum,<br />
Type FD, with gasketed cover.<br />
E. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 2 and UL 514C.<br />
F. Metal Floor Boxes:<br />
1. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal.<br />
2. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,<br />
for intended location and application.<br />
G. Nonmetallic Floor Boxes: Nonadjustable, round or rectangular.<br />
1. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in<br />
NFPA 70, for intended location and application.<br />
H. Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb.<br />
Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb shall be listed and<br />
marked for the maximum allowable weight.<br />
I. Paddle Fan Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of paddle fan weighing 70 lb.<br />
1. Listing and Labeling: Paddle fan outlet boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in<br />
NFPA 70, for intended location and application.<br />
J. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.<br />
K. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773.<br />
L. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed<br />
box.<br />
M. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: Comply with UL 50 and NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R with<br />
continuous-hinge cover with flush latch unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.<br />
2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic.<br />
3. Interior Panels: Steel; all sides finished with manufacturer's standard enamel.<br />
N. Cabinets:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0533 - 6 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1. NEMA 250, Type 1 or Type 3R galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and<br />
removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.<br />
2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge.<br />
3. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.<br />
4. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.<br />
5. Nonmetallic cabinets shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified<br />
testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
2.7 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING<br />
A. General Requirements for Handholes and Boxes:<br />
1. Boxes and handholes for use in underground systems shall be designed and identified as<br />
defined in NFPA 70, for intended location and application.<br />
2. Boxes installed in wet areas shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a<br />
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and<br />
aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel, fiberglass, or a<br />
combination of the two.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
a. Armorcast Products Company.<br />
b. Carson Industries LLC.<br />
c. NewBasis.<br />
d. Oldcastle Precast, Inc.<br />
e. Quazite: Hubbell Power System, Inc.<br />
f. Synertech Moulded Products.<br />
2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.<br />
3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.<br />
4. Cover: Weatherproof, having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and<br />
handhole location.<br />
5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.<br />
6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."<br />
7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts<br />
for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.<br />
8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks<br />
and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.<br />
C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with frame<br />
and covers of polymer concrete.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
a. Armorcast Products Company.<br />
b. Carson Industries LLC.<br />
c. NewBasis.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0533 - 7 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
d. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc.<br />
e. Oldcastle Precast, Inc; Christy Concrete Products.<br />
f. Quazite: Hubbell Power System, Inc; Hubbell Power Systems.<br />
g. Synertech Moulded Products.<br />
2. Standard: Comply with SCTE 77.<br />
3. Configuration: Designed for flush burial with open bottom unless otherwise indicated.<br />
4. Cover: Weatherproof, having structural load rating consistent with enclosure and<br />
handhole location.<br />
5. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.<br />
6. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC."<br />
7. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering ducts<br />
for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.<br />
8. Handholes 12 Inches Wide by 24 Inches Long and Larger: Have inserts for cable racks<br />
and pulling-in irons installed before concrete is poured.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION<br />
A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:<br />
1. Exposed Conduit: GRC, IMC, EMT, PVC.<br />
2. Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC, IMC, EMT, or RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC.<br />
3. Underground Conduit: RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC Type EPC-80-PVC.<br />
4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,<br />
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC or LFNC.<br />
5. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.<br />
B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated:<br />
1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT, ENT or RNC.<br />
2. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT.<br />
3. Exposed and Subject to Severe Physical Damage: GRC or IMC. Raceway locations include<br />
the following:<br />
a. Loading dock.<br />
b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts, and pallet-handling units.<br />
c. Mechanical rooms.<br />
d. Gymnasiums.<br />
4. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT.<br />
5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,<br />
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet<br />
locations.<br />
6. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC or IMC.<br />
7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 4 stainless steel<br />
or nonmetallic in institutional and commercial kitchens and damp or wet locations.<br />
C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size.<br />
D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0533 - 8 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless<br />
otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.<br />
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with this type<br />
of conduit. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing<br />
conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer and apply in<br />
thickness and number of coats recommended by manufacturer.<br />
3. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10.<br />
4. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with<br />
NEMA FB 2.20.<br />
E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum<br />
raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.<br />
F. Do not install aluminum conduits, boxes, or fittings in contact with concrete or earth.<br />
G. Do not install nonmetallic conduit where ambient temperature exceeds 120 deg F.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on<br />
Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply<br />
with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of<br />
floors.<br />
B. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.<br />
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.<br />
C. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for<br />
hangers and supports.<br />
D. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines.<br />
E. Support conduit within 18 inches of enclosures to which attached.<br />
F. Raceways Embedded in Slabs:<br />
1. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel or at right angles to main<br />
reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab<br />
support. Secure raceways to reinforcement at maximum 10-foot intervals.<br />
2. Arrange raceways to cross building expansion joints at right angles with expansion fittings.<br />
3. Arrange raceways to keep a minimum of 2 inches of concrete cover in all directions.<br />
4. Change from ENT to RNC, Type EPC-40-PVC, GRC or IMC before rising above floor.<br />
G. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings:<br />
1. Use EMT, IMC, FMC or RMC for raceways.<br />
2. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or<br />
in an enclosure.<br />
H. Coat field-cut threads on PVC-coated raceway with a corrosion-preventing conductive compound<br />
prior to assembly.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0533 - 9 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
I. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to<br />
protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.<br />
J. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes<br />
or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch trade size and insulated throat metal<br />
bushings on 1-1/2-inch trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated<br />
throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits.<br />
K. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install<br />
locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more.<br />
L. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in<br />
the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path.<br />
M. Surface Raceways:<br />
1. Install surface raceway with a minimum 2-inch radius control at bend points.<br />
2. Secure surface raceway with screws or other anchor-type devices at intervals not exceeding<br />
48 inches and with no less than two supports per straight raceway section. Support<br />
surface raceway according to manufacturer's written instructions. Tape and glue are not<br />
acceptable support methods.<br />
N. Install raceway sealing fittings at accessible locations according to NFPA 70 and fill them with<br />
listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a<br />
blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway<br />
sealing fittings according to NFPA 70.<br />
O. Install devices to seal raceway interiors at accessible locations. Locate seals so no fittings or<br />
boxes are between the seal and the following changes of environments. Seal the interior of all<br />
raceways at the following points:<br />
1. Where required by NFPA 70.<br />
P. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for solvent welding RNC and fittings.<br />
Q. Expansion-Joint Fittings:<br />
1. Install in each run of aboveground RNC that is located where environmental temperature<br />
change may exceed 30 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install<br />
in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental<br />
temperature change may exceed 100 deg F and that has straight-run length that exceeds<br />
100 feet.<br />
2. Install type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for each<br />
of the following locations:<br />
a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 deg F temperature change.<br />
b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 deg F temperature change.<br />
c. Indoor Spaces Connected with Outdoors without Physical Separation: 125 deg F<br />
temperature change.<br />
d. Attics: 135 deg F temperature change.<br />
3. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of<br />
length of straight run per deg F of temperature change for PVC conduits. Install fitting(s)<br />
that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of<br />
straight run per deg F of temperature change for metal conduits.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0533 - 10 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
4. Install expansion fittings at all locations where conduits cross building or structure<br />
expansion joints.<br />
5. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected<br />
according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at time of<br />
installation. Install conduit supports to allow for expansion movement.<br />
R. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches of<br />
flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise<br />
transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors.<br />
1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage.<br />
2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.<br />
S. Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually<br />
indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
T. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block,<br />
and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a<br />
raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box.<br />
U. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same<br />
vertical channel.<br />
V. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes.<br />
W. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing<br />
members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose.<br />
X. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by<br />
conduits.<br />
Y. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.<br />
Z. Set nonmetallic floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT<br />
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:<br />
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare trench<br />
bottom as specified in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving" for pipe less than 6 inches in<br />
nominal diameter.<br />
2. Install backfill as specified in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving."<br />
3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point, and work toward end of<br />
conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as<br />
temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to<br />
provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches<br />
of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling<br />
with normal compaction as specified in Section 31 2000 "Earth Moving."<br />
4. Install manufactured duct elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building<br />
entrances through floor unless otherwise indicated. Encase elbows for stub-up ducts<br />
throughout length of elbow.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0533 - 11 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
5. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at<br />
building entrances through floor.<br />
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and encase<br />
coupling with 3 inches of concrete for a minimum of 12 inches on each side of the<br />
coupling.<br />
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases and where conduits<br />
penetrate building foundations, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of<br />
60 inches from edge of foundation or equipment base. Install insulated grounding<br />
bushings on terminations at equipment.<br />
6. Warning Planks: Bury warning planks approximately 12 inches above direct-buried<br />
conduits but a minimum of 6 inches below grade. Align planks along centerline of<br />
conduit.<br />
7. Underground Warning Tape: Comply with requirements in Section 26 0553 "Identification<br />
for Electrical Systems."<br />
3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES<br />
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with<br />
connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.<br />
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from<br />
1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.<br />
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of<br />
other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.<br />
3.5 SLEEVE AND SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS<br />
A. Install sleeves and sleeve seals at penetrations of exterior floor and wall assemblies. Comply with<br />
requirements in Section 26 0544 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Electrical Raceways and Cabling."<br />
3.6 FIRESTOPPING<br />
A. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Comply with<br />
requirements in Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping."<br />
3.7 PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration.<br />
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.<br />
2. Repair damage to PVC coatings or paint finishes with matching touchup coating<br />
recommended by manufacturer.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 0533<br />
26 0533 - 12 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 0544<br />
SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND CABLING<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Sleeves for raceway and cable penetration of non-fire-rated construction walls and floors.<br />
2. Sleeve-seal systems.<br />
3. Sleeve-seal fittings.<br />
4. Grout.<br />
5. Silicone sealants.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for penetration firestopping installed in fireresistance-rated<br />
walls, horizontal assemblies, and smoke barriers, with and without<br />
penetrating items.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SLEEVES<br />
A. Wall Sleeves:<br />
1. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc coated, plain<br />
ends.<br />
2. Cast-Iron Pipe Sleeves: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe," equivalent to ductile-iron pressure<br />
pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Galvanized-steel<br />
sheet; 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, with<br />
tabs for screw-fastening the sleeve to the board.<br />
C. Sleeves for Rectangular Openings:<br />
1. Material: Galvanized sheet steel.<br />
2. Minimum Metal Thickness:<br />
26 0544 - 1 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND<br />
CABLING
a. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter less than 50 inches and with no side<br />
larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.052 inch.<br />
b. For sleeve cross-section rectangle perimeter 50 inches or more and one or more<br />
sides larger than 16 inches, thickness shall be 0.138 inch.<br />
2.2 SLEEVE-SEAL SYSTEMS<br />
A. Description: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between<br />
sleeve and raceway or cable.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.<br />
b. CALPICO, Inc.<br />
c. Metraflex Company (The).<br />
d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.<br />
e. Proco Products, Inc.<br />
2. Sealing Elements: EPDM rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include<br />
type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.<br />
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel.<br />
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of length<br />
required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.<br />
2.3 SLEEVE-SEAL FITTINGS<br />
A. Description: Manufactured plastic, sleeve-type, waterstop assembly made for embedding in<br />
concrete slab or wall. Unit shall have plastic or rubber waterstop collar with center opening to<br />
match piping OD.<br />
2.4 GROUT<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
a. Presealed Systems.<br />
A. Description: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior sealing openings in non-firerated<br />
walls or floors.<br />
B. Standard: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry,<br />
hydraulic-cement grout.<br />
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.<br />
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0544 - 2 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND<br />
CABLING
2.5 SILICONE SEALANTS<br />
A. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of<br />
grade indicated below.<br />
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal<br />
surfaces that are not fire rated.<br />
B. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand<br />
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR NON-FIRE-RATED ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS<br />
A. Comply with NECA 1.<br />
B. Comply with NEMA VE 2 for cable tray and cable penetrations.<br />
C. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Above-Grade Non-Fire-Rated Concrete and Masonry-Unit<br />
Floors and Walls:<br />
1. Interior Penetrations of Non-Fire-Rated Walls and Floors:<br />
a. Seal annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable, using joint sealant<br />
appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply with requirements in<br />
Section 07 9200 "Joint Sealants."<br />
b. Seal space outside of sleeves with mortar or grout. Pack sealing material solidly<br />
between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth;<br />
protect material while curing.<br />
2. Use pipe sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved opening.<br />
3. Size pipe sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or<br />
cable unless sleeve seal is to be installed.<br />
4. Install sleeves for wall penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used.<br />
Install sleeves during erection of walls. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both<br />
surfaces of walls. Deburr after cutting.<br />
5. Install sleeves for floor penetrations. Extend sleeves installed in floors 2 inches above<br />
finished floor level. Install sleeves during erection of floors.<br />
D. Sleeves for Conduits Penetrating Non-Fire-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies:<br />
1. Use circular metal sleeves unless penetration arrangement requires rectangular sleeved<br />
opening.<br />
2. Seal space outside of sleeves with approved joint compound for gypsum board<br />
assemblies.<br />
E. Roof-Penetration Sleeves: Seal penetration of individual raceways and cables with flexible boottype<br />
flashing units applied in coordination with roofing work.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0544 - 3 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND<br />
CABLING
F. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel pipe sleeves and<br />
mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe<br />
and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.<br />
G. Underground, Exterior-Wall and Floor Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to<br />
allow for 1-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve for installing sleeveseal<br />
system.<br />
3.2 SLEEVE-SEAL-SYSTEM INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install sleeve-seal systems in sleeves in exterior concrete walls and slabs-on-grade at raceway<br />
entries into building.<br />
B. Install type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway or cable<br />
material and size. Position raceway or cable in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve<br />
seals and install in annular space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Tighten bolts against<br />
pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.<br />
3.3 SLEEVE-SEAL-FITTING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install sleeve-seal fittings in new walls and slabs as they are constructed.<br />
B. Assemble fitting components of length to be flush with both surfaces of concrete slabs and walls.<br />
Position waterstop flange to be centered in concrete slab or wall.<br />
C. Secure nailing flanges to concrete forms.<br />
D. Using grout, seal the space around outside of sleeve-seal fittings.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 0544<br />
26 0544 - 4 SLEEVES AND SLEEVE SEALS FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS AND<br />
CABLING
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 0553<br />
IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Identification for raceways.<br />
2. Identification of power and control cables.<br />
3. Identification for conductors.<br />
4. Underground-line warning tape.<br />
5. Warning labels and signs.<br />
6. Instruction signs.<br />
7. Equipment identification labels.<br />
8. Miscellaneous identification products.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Comply with ANSI A13.1.<br />
B. Comply with NFPA 70.<br />
C. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145.<br />
D. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels.<br />
E. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used<br />
by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.<br />
1.4 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in<br />
other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's<br />
wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by<br />
codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project.<br />
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces<br />
where devices are to be applied.<br />
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.<br />
26 0553 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
D. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS<br />
A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.<br />
Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.<br />
B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer<br />
or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch. Overlay shall provide a<br />
weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.<br />
C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white<br />
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.<br />
D. Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White<br />
letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch.<br />
2.2 CABLE TIES<br />
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6<br />
nylon.<br />
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.<br />
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.<br />
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.<br />
4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.<br />
B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior sunlight,<br />
self extinguishing, one piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon.<br />
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.<br />
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 12,000 psi.<br />
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.<br />
4. Color: Black.<br />
C. Plenum-Rated Cable Ties: Self extinguishing, UV stabilized, one piece, self locking.<br />
1. Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.<br />
2. Tensile Strength at 73 deg F, According to ASTM D 638: 7000 psi.<br />
3. UL 94 Flame Rating: 94V-0.<br />
4. Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 284 deg F.<br />
5. Color: Black.<br />
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS<br />
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application<br />
requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or<br />
interior).<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0553 - 2 IDENTIFICATION FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine<br />
screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Verify identity of each item before installing identification products.<br />
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing<br />
without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.<br />
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.<br />
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and<br />
methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.<br />
E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners<br />
appropriate to the location and substrate.<br />
F. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:<br />
1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.<br />
2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.<br />
G. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous undergroundline<br />
warning tape directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Use multiple tapes<br />
where width of multiple lines installed in a common trenchexceeds 16 inches overall.<br />
H. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation<br />
and paint application.<br />
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE<br />
a. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits:<br />
1) Phase A: Black.<br />
2) Phase B: Red.<br />
3) Phase C: Blue.<br />
b. Colors for 480/277-V Circuits:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
1) Phase A: Brown.<br />
2) Phase B: Orange.<br />
3) Phase C: Yellow.<br />
B. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that<br />
is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.<br />
Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control<br />
panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power,<br />
lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is<br />
provided with its own identification.<br />
26 0553 - 3 IDENTIFICATION FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
1. Labeling Instructions:<br />
a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive, engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.<br />
Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- high letters<br />
on 1-1/2-inch- high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches<br />
high.<br />
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.<br />
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for<br />
viewing from the floor.<br />
d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with<br />
appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of<br />
the enclosure.<br />
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:<br />
a. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by<br />
panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be self-adhesive,<br />
engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label.<br />
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.<br />
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.<br />
d. Switchgear.<br />
e. Switchboards.<br />
f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the<br />
transformer, feeder, and panelboards or equipment supplied by the secondary.<br />
g. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.<br />
h. Motor-control centers.<br />
i. Enclosed switches.<br />
j. Enclosed circuit breakers.<br />
k. Enclosed controllers.<br />
l. Variable-speed controllers.<br />
m. Push-button stations.<br />
n. Power transfer equipment.<br />
o. Contactors.<br />
p. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.<br />
q. Monitoring and control equipment.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 0553<br />
26 0553 - 4 IDENTIFICATION FOR<br />
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 0923<br />
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Time switches.<br />
2. Photoelectric switches.<br />
3. Standalone daylight-harvesting switching controls.<br />
4. Indoor occupancy sensors.<br />
5. Outdoor motion sensors.<br />
6. Lighting contactors.<br />
7. Emergency shunt relays.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Section 26 2726 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors,<br />
and manual light switches.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 TIME SWITCHES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Cooper Industries, Inc.<br />
2. Intermatic, Inc.<br />
3. Invensys Controls.<br />
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.<br />
5. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.<br />
6. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.<br />
B. Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with<br />
UL 917.<br />
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for<br />
intended location and application.<br />
2. Contact Configuration: SPST or DPST.<br />
26 0923 - 1 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
3. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac or 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-<br />
V ac.<br />
4. Programs: Two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for<br />
each day of the week and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation<br />
on holidays.<br />
5. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a<br />
program.<br />
6. Astronomic Time: All channels.<br />
7. Automatic daylight savings time changeover.<br />
8. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.<br />
C. Electromechanical-Dial Time Switches: Comply with UL 917.<br />
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for<br />
intended location and application.<br />
2. Contact Configuration: SPST or DPST.<br />
3. Contact Rating: 30-A inductive or resistive, 240-V ac or 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-<br />
V ac.<br />
4. Circuitry: Allows connection of a photoelectric relay as a substitute for the on-off function<br />
of a program.<br />
5. Astronomic time dial.<br />
6. Eight-Day Program: Uniquely programmable for each weekday and holidays.<br />
7. Skip-a-day mode.<br />
8. Wound-spring reserve carryover mechanism to keep time during power failures, minimum<br />
of 24 hours.<br />
2.2 OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Cooper Industries, Inc.<br />
2. Intermatic, Inc.<br />
3. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.<br />
4. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.<br />
B. Description: Solid state, with SPST or DPST dry contacts rated for 1800-VA tungsten or 1000-VA<br />
inductive, to operate connected relay, contactor coils, or microprocessor input; complying with<br />
UL 773A.<br />
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for<br />
intended location and application.<br />
2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off<br />
levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of the photocell to prevent fixed<br />
light sources from causing turn-off.<br />
3. Time Delay: Fifteen second minimum, to prevent false operation.<br />
4. Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor.<br />
5. Mounting: Twist lock complies with NEMA C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or<br />
stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky<br />
exposure.<br />
C. Description: Solid state, with SPST or DPST dry contacts rated for 1800 VA, to operate connected<br />
load, complying with UL 773.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0923 - 2 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for<br />
intended location and application.<br />
2. Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off<br />
levels within that range.<br />
3. Time Delay: Thirty-second minimum, to prevent false operation.<br />
4. Lightning Arrester: Air-gap type.<br />
5. Mounting: Twist lock complying with NEMA C136.10, with base.<br />
2.3 INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company.<br />
2. Cooper Industries, Inc.<br />
3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.<br />
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.<br />
5. Lightolier Controls.<br />
6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.<br />
7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.<br />
8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.<br />
9. RAB Lighting.<br />
10. Sensor Switch, Inc.<br />
11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.<br />
12. Watt Stopper.<br />
B. General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy<br />
sensors with a separate power pack.<br />
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for<br />
intended location and application.<br />
2. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied,<br />
and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable<br />
over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes.<br />
3. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.<br />
Sensor is powered from the power pack.<br />
4. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A<br />
tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2<br />
power source, as defined by NFPA 70.<br />
5. Mounting:<br />
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.<br />
b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical<br />
enclosure.<br />
c. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged<br />
door.<br />
6. Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal<br />
operation of sensor.<br />
7. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure.<br />
8. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc; turn lights off when selected<br />
lighting level is present.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0923 - 3 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
C. PIR Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area by their heat and movement.<br />
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a<br />
human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in..<br />
2. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in a circular area of 1000 sq. ft.<br />
when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.<br />
3. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy within 90 feet when mounted on a 10foot-<br />
high ceiling.<br />
D. Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area through pattern changes<br />
of reflected ultrasonic energy .<br />
1. Detector Sensitivity: Detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12<br />
inches in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.<br />
2. Detection Coverage (Small Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of<br />
600 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.<br />
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area<br />
of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.<br />
4. Detection Coverage (Large Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of<br />
2000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.<br />
5. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy anywhere within 90 feet when mounted<br />
on a 10-foot- high ceiling in a corridor not wider than 14 feet.<br />
E. Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and<br />
ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that<br />
control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit.<br />
1. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.<br />
2. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- minimum movement of any portion of a<br />
human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in., and detect a person of<br />
average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches in either a horizontal or a vertical<br />
manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s.<br />
3. Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area<br />
of 1000 sq. ft. when mounted on a 96-inch- high ceiling.<br />
2.4 SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company.<br />
2. Cooper Industries, Inc.<br />
3. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc.<br />
4. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.<br />
5. Lightolier Controls.<br />
6. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.<br />
7. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc.<br />
8. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products.<br />
9. RAB Lighting.<br />
10. Sensor Switch, Inc.<br />
11. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.<br />
12. Watt Stopper.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0923 - 4 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
B. General Requirements for Sensors: Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for<br />
mounting in a single gang switchbox.<br />
1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for<br />
intended location and application.<br />
2. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F.<br />
3. Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V,<br />
and 800-W incandescent.<br />
C. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag 1:<br />
1. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with<br />
a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft.<br />
2. Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic.<br />
3. Switch Type: SP.<br />
4. Voltage: Dual voltage, 120 and 277 V; dual-technology type.<br />
5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc.<br />
The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set<br />
point of the sensor.<br />
6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.<br />
7. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the<br />
space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.<br />
D. Wall-Switch Sensor Tag 2:<br />
1. Standard Range: 210-degree field of view, with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft..<br />
2. Sensing Technology: PIR.<br />
3. Switch Type: SP.<br />
4. Voltage: Match the circuit voltage; passive-infrared type.<br />
5. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc.<br />
The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set<br />
point of the sensor.<br />
6. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes.<br />
7. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the<br />
space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.<br />
2.5 LIGHTING CONTACTORS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation.<br />
2. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co.<br />
3. Eaton Corporation.<br />
4. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution; Total<br />
Lighting Control.<br />
5. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.<br />
B. Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination-type lighting contactors<br />
with nonfused disconnect, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0923 - 5 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
1. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served,<br />
including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or<br />
less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).<br />
2. Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the<br />
point of installation.<br />
3. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.<br />
4. Provide with control and pilot devices as indicated on Drawings, matching the NEMA type<br />
specified for the enclosure.<br />
2.6 EMERGENCY SHUNT RELAY<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Lighting Control and Design; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc.<br />
2. Watt Stopper.<br />
B. Description: Normally closed, electrically held relay, arranged for wiring in parallel with manual<br />
or automatic switching contacts; complying with UL 924.<br />
1. Coil Rating: 120 or 277 V.<br />
2.7 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES<br />
A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG.<br />
Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and<br />
Cables."<br />
B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not<br />
smaller than No. 18 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage<br />
Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."<br />
C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with stranded-copper conductors not smaller<br />
thanNo. 14 AWG. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power<br />
Conductors and Cables."<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 SENSOR INSTALLATION<br />
A. Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that<br />
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke<br />
detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies.<br />
B. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas<br />
indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0923 - 6 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited<br />
conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction,<br />
pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.<br />
3.3 IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 26 0553 "Identification<br />
for Electrical Systems."<br />
1. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.<br />
2. Identify circuits or luminaires controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each<br />
sensor.<br />
B. Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation.<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service:<br />
1. Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry<br />
has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation.<br />
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and<br />
equipment.<br />
B. Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.<br />
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.<br />
3.5 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When <strong>request</strong>ed within 12 months from date of Substantial<br />
Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit actual occupied conditions.<br />
Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.<br />
1. For occupancy and motion sensors, verify operation at outer limits of detector range. Set<br />
time delay to suit Owner's operations.<br />
2. For daylighting controls, adjust set points and deadband controls to suit Owner's<br />
operations.<br />
3. Align high-bay occupancy sensors using manufacturer's laser aiming tool.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0923 - 7 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
3.6 DEMONSTRATION<br />
A. Coordinate demonstration of products specified in this Section with demonstration requirements<br />
for low-voltage, programmable lighting control systems specified in Section 26 0943.13<br />
"Addressable-Fixture Lighting Controls" and Section 26 0943.23 "Relay-Based Lighting Controls."<br />
B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain lighting control devices.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 0923<br />
26 0923 - 8 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Central dimming control systems.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1.2 REFERENCES<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 0933<br />
CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS<br />
1. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices<br />
2. Section 260923 – Lighting Control Devices: Occupancy sensors.<br />
A. American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE)<br />
(www.ansi.org and www.ieee.org)<br />
1. C62.41-1991 – Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.<br />
B. ASTM International (ASTM) (www.astm.org)<br />
1. D4674 -02a Standard Test Method for Accelerated Testing for Color Stability of Plastics Exposed to<br />
Indoor Fluorescent Lighting and Window-Filtered Daylight.<br />
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) (www.nema.org)<br />
1. WD1 (R2005) - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices.<br />
D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) (www.ul.com):<br />
1. 489 (2002) - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker<br />
Enclosures.<br />
2. 508 (1999) - Standard for Industrial Control Equipment.<br />
3. 1472 (1996) - Solid-State Dimming Controls.<br />
4. 924 (2003) - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment<br />
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Central dimming control system<br />
1. Factory assembled dimming and switching panels and interfaces and modules.<br />
2. Low voltage wall stations and control interfaces.<br />
3. Solid-state high frequency fluorescent dimming ballasts.<br />
26 0933 - 1 CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Sustainable Design Closeout Documentation<br />
1. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide Enhanced Startup documentation that details the<br />
start-up procedure being performed including a process to follow, details on tests performed and<br />
an area that documents any test results.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer: Minimum 10 years of experience in manufacture of architectural lighting controls.<br />
B. Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standards, including in-house<br />
engineering for product design activities.<br />
C. Central dimming control system:<br />
1. Listed by UL specifically for the required loads. Provide evidence of compliance upon <strong>request</strong>.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to receive equipment:<br />
1.7 WARRANTY<br />
1. Ambient temperature: 0 degrees to 40 degrees C (32 degrees to 104 degrees F).<br />
2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.<br />
3. Lighting control system must be protected from dust during installation.<br />
A. Provide Manufacturer’s Warranty:<br />
1. Enhanced 8-year Silver Level limited parts warranty, Includes:<br />
a. Years 1<br />
B. Provide Manufacturer’s Support and Maintenance Plan for 1 years covering 100 percent parts and 100<br />
percent labor after system startup completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. – System: Lutron GRAFIK Eye or equal<br />
2.2 GENERAL<br />
A. Provide system hardware that is designed, tested, manufactured, and warranted by a single<br />
manufacturer.<br />
2.3 POWER PANELS<br />
A. Product: Lutron or equal.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0933 - 2 CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS
B. Electrical:<br />
1. Panels contain branch circuit protection for each input circuit unless the panel is a dedicated feedthrough<br />
type panel or otherwise indicated on the drawings.<br />
2. Branch circuit breakers; meet following performance requirements:<br />
a. Listed to UL 489 as molded case circuit breaker for use on lighting circuits.<br />
b. Contain visual trip indicator; rated at 10,000 AIC, 120 V Dimming, or 14,000 AIC, 277 V<br />
Dimming, or 18,000 AIC, 277 V Switching.<br />
c. Thermal-magnetic construction for overload, short-circuit, and over-temperature protection.<br />
Use of breakers without thermal protection requires dimmers/relays to have integral thermal<br />
protection to prevent failures when overloaded or ambient temperature is above rating of<br />
panel.<br />
d. Accept tag-out/lock-out devices to secure circuit breakers in off position when servicing<br />
loads.<br />
e. Replaceable without moving or replacing dimmer/relay assemblies or other components in<br />
panel.UL listed as switch duty (SWD) so that loads can be switched on and off by breakers.<br />
3. Minimum UL listed Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) of [25,000A] [45,000A] [65,000A].<br />
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Perform full-function testing on 100 percent of all system components and panel assemblies.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.<br />
B. Provide complete installation of system in accordance with Contract Documents.<br />
C. Define each dimmer's/relay’s load type, assign each load to a zone, and set control functions.<br />
D. Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any additional<br />
equipment required to provide control intent.<br />
3.2 SERVICE AND SUPPORT<br />
A. Startup and Programming<br />
1. Provide factory-certified field service engineer to a site visit to ensure proper system installation and<br />
operation under following parameters:<br />
a. Qualifications for factory-certified field service engineer:<br />
1) Minimum experience of 2 years training in the electrical/electronic field.<br />
2) Certified by the equipment manufacturer on the system installed.<br />
b. Make a visit upon completion of installation of central dimming control system:<br />
1) Verify connection of power feeds and load circuits.<br />
2) Verify connection and location of controls.<br />
3) Verify proper connection of panel links (low voltage/data) and address panel.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 0933 - 3 CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS
B. Tech Support<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
4) Check dimming/switching panel load types and currents and remove by-pass<br />
jumpers.<br />
5) Verify system operation control by control, circuit by circuit.<br />
6) Verify proper operation of supplied interfacing equipment to other devices.<br />
7) Obtain sign-off on system functions.<br />
8) User to be trained on system operation.<br />
1. Provide factory direct technical support hotline 24 hours per day, 7 days per week.<br />
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Manufacturer Services<br />
3.4 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES<br />
A. Training Visit<br />
a. Facility Representative to coordinate on-site meeting with Lighting Control System<br />
Manufacturer and Lighting Design Consultant to make required lighting adjustments to the<br />
system for conformance with the Lighting Design Consultant’s original design intent.]<br />
1. Lighting Control System Manufacturer to provide on-site system training to site personnel.<br />
3.5 MAINTENANCE<br />
A. Capable of providing on-site service support within 24 hours anywhere in continental United States and<br />
within 72 hours worldwide except where special visas are required.<br />
B. Offer renewable service contract on yearly basis, to include parts, factory labor, and annual training<br />
visits. Make service contracts available up to ten years after date of system startup.<br />
END OF SECTION 26 0933<br />
26 0933 - 4 CENTRAL DIMMING CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 2200<br />
LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following types of dry-type transformers rated 600 V and less, with<br />
capacities up to 1000 kVA:<br />
1. Distribution transformers.<br />
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformers to include in emergency, operation, and<br />
maintenance manuals.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each transformer type through one source from a single manufacturer.<br />
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,<br />
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for<br />
intended use.<br />
C. Comply with IEEE C57.12.91, "Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers."<br />
1.5 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with actual transformer provided. Concrete,<br />
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete.<br />
B. Coordinate installation of wall-mounting and structure-hanging supports with actual transformer<br />
provided.<br />
262200 - 1 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. ACME Electric Corporation; Power Distribution Products Division.<br />
2. Challenger Electrical Equipment Corp.; a division of Eaton Corp.<br />
3. Controlled Power Company.<br />
4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Products.<br />
5. Federal Pacific Transformer Company; Division of Electro-Mechanical Corp.<br />
6. General Electric Company.<br />
7. Hammond Co.; Matra Electric, Inc.<br />
8. Magnetek Power Electronics Group.<br />
9. Micron Industries Corp.<br />
10. Myers Power Products, Inc.<br />
11. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.<br />
12. Sola/Hevi-Duty.<br />
13. Square D; Schneider Electric.<br />
2.2 GENERAL TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested, air-cooled units for 60-Hz service.<br />
B. Cores: Grain-oriented, non-aging silicon steel.<br />
C. Coils: Continuous windings without splices except for taps.<br />
1. Internal Coil Connections: Brazed or pressure type.<br />
2. Coil Material: Aluminum or Copper.<br />
2.3 DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS<br />
A. Comply with NEMA ST 20 and list and label as complying with UL 1561.<br />
B. Cores: One leg per phase.<br />
C. Enclosure: Ventilated, NEMA 250, Type 2.<br />
1. Core and coil shall be encapsulated within resin compound, sealing out moisture and air.<br />
D. Taps for Transformers Smaller than 3 kVA: None.<br />
E. Taps for Transformers 7.5 to 24 kVA: One 5 percent tap above and one 5 percent tap below<br />
normal full capacity.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262200 - 2 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
F. Taps for Transformers 25 kVA and Larger: Two 2.5 percent taps above and two 2.5 percent taps<br />
below normal full capacity.<br />
G. Insulation Class: 220 deg C, UL-component-recognized insulation system with a maximum of<br />
150 deg C rise above 40 deg C ambient temperature.<br />
H. Energy Efficiency for Transformers Rated 15 kVA and Larger:<br />
1. Complying with NEMA TP 1, Class 1 efficiency levels.<br />
2. Tested according to NEMA TP 2.<br />
I. Wall Brackets: Manufacturer's standard brackets.<br />
2.4 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES<br />
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each distribution transformer,<br />
mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in<br />
Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."<br />
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Test and inspect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.91.<br />
B. Factory Sound-Level Tests: Conduct sound-level tests on equipment for this Project.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine conditions for compliance with enclosure- and ambient-temperature requirements for<br />
each transformer.<br />
B. Verify that field measurements are as needed to maintain working clearances required by<br />
NFPA 70 and manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
C. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and concrete bases for suitable mounting conditions where<br />
transformers will be installed.<br />
D. Verify that ground connections are in place and requirements in Section 26 0526 "Grounding and<br />
Bonding for Electrical Systems" have been met. Maximum ground resistance shall be 5 ohms at<br />
location of transformer.<br />
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install wall-mounting transformers level and plumb.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262200 - 3 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
3.3 CONNECTIONS<br />
A. Ground equipment according to Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."<br />
B. Connect wiring according to Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and<br />
Cables."<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.<br />
B. Tests and Inspections:<br />
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA<br />
Acceptance Testing Specification.<br />
C. Remove and replace units that do not pass tests or inspections and retest as specified above.<br />
3.5 CLEANING<br />
A. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 2200<br />
262200 - 4 LOW-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 2416<br />
PANELBOARDS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Distribution panelboards.<br />
2. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.<br />
3. Load centers.<br />
4. Electronic-grade panelboards.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. SVR: Suppressed voltage rating.<br />
B. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.<br />
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards.<br />
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency,<br />
operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823<br />
"Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:<br />
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices.<br />
2. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective<br />
device that allows adjustments.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and<br />
accessories from single source from single manufacturer.<br />
262416 - 1 PANELBOARDS
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards<br />
including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with<br />
indicated maximum dimensions.<br />
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by<br />
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
D. Comply with NEMA PB 1.<br />
E. Comply with NFPA 70.<br />
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NECA 407.<br />
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations:<br />
1. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise<br />
indicated:<br />
a. Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F to plus 104 deg F.<br />
b. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.<br />
B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by<br />
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to<br />
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:<br />
1. Notify <strong>Construction</strong> Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption<br />
of electric service.<br />
2. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without <strong>Construction</strong> Manager's written<br />
permission.<br />
3. Comply with NFPA 70E.<br />
1.9 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that<br />
penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment,<br />
raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces.<br />
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors<br />
and panels.<br />
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt<br />
inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with<br />
concrete.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262416 - 2 PANELBOARDS
1.10 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within<br />
specified warranty period.<br />
1. Warranty Period: One years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS<br />
A. Fabricate and test panelboards according to IEEE 344 to withstand seismic forces defined in<br />
Section 26 0548 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."<br />
B. Enclosures: Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.<br />
1. Rated for environmental conditions at installed location.<br />
a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.<br />
b. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.<br />
c. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X.<br />
d. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.<br />
2. Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box<br />
dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box.<br />
3. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged<br />
trim cover.<br />
4. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral<br />
with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections.<br />
5. Finishes:<br />
a. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating<br />
with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and<br />
thermosetting topcoat.<br />
b. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel.<br />
6. Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in transparent card holder.<br />
C. Incoming Mains Location: Top and bottom.<br />
D. Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses:<br />
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.<br />
2. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding<br />
conductors; bonded to box.<br />
E. Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes.<br />
1. Material: Tin-plated aluminum or Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity.<br />
2. Main and Neutral Lugs: Compression type.<br />
3. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Compression type.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262416 - 3 PANELBOARDS
4. Feed-Through Lugs: Compression type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate<br />
at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.<br />
5. Subfeed (Double) Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material.<br />
Locate at same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.<br />
6. Gutter-Tap Lugs: Compression type suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at<br />
same end of bus as incoming lugs or main device.<br />
7. Extra-Capacity Neutral Lugs: Rated 200 percent of phase lugs mounted on extra-capacity<br />
neutral bus.<br />
F. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances<br />
required for future installation of devices.<br />
G. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Rated for series-connected system with integral or<br />
remote upstream overcurrent protective devices and labeled by an NRTL. Include size and type<br />
of allowable upstream and branch devices, listed and labeled for series-connected short-circuit<br />
rating by an NRTL.<br />
H. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit current<br />
available at terminals.<br />
2.2 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.<br />
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.<br />
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.<br />
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.<br />
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type.<br />
C. Doors: Secured with vault-type latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.<br />
1. For doors more than 36 inches high, provide two latches, keyed alike.<br />
D. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only.<br />
E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes 125 A and Smaller: Plugin<br />
or Bolt-on circuit breakers.<br />
F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices for Circuit-Breaker Frame Sizes Larger Than 125 A: Bolton<br />
circuit breakers; plug-in circuit breakers where individual positive-locking device requires<br />
mechanical release for removal.<br />
G. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Fused switches.<br />
H. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with<br />
same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.<br />
1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and<br />
secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.<br />
2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262416 - 4 PANELBOARDS
2.3 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.<br />
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.<br />
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.<br />
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.<br />
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type.<br />
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only.<br />
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in or Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without<br />
disturbing adjacent units.<br />
E. Contactors in Main Bus: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, electrically held, general-purpose controller, with<br />
same short-circuit interrupting rating as panelboard.<br />
1. Internal Control-Power Source: Control-power transformer, with fused primary and<br />
secondary terminals, connected to main bus ahead of contactor connection.<br />
2. External Control-Power Source: 120-V branch circuit.<br />
F. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike.<br />
G. Column-Type Panelboards: Narrow gutter extension, with cover, to overhead junction box<br />
equipped with ground and neutral terminal buses.<br />
2.4 LOAD CENTERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.<br />
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.<br />
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.<br />
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.<br />
B. Load Centers: Comply with UL 67.<br />
C. Mains: Circuit breaker or Lugs only.<br />
D. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Plug-in circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing<br />
adjacent units.<br />
E. Conductor Connectors: Mechanical type for main, neutral, and ground lugs and buses.<br />
2.5 DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262416 - 5 PANELBOARDS
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.<br />
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.<br />
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.<br />
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.<br />
B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with series-connected rating to<br />
meet available fault currents.<br />
1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads,<br />
and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting<br />
for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.<br />
2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted,<br />
field-adjustable trip setting.<br />
3. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable<br />
electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings:<br />
a. Instantaneous trip.<br />
b. Long- and short-time pickup levels.<br />
c. Long- and short-time time adjustments.<br />
d. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I 2 t response.<br />
4. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less<br />
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.<br />
5. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault<br />
protection (6-mA trip).<br />
6. Ground-Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: Class B ground-fault<br />
protection (30-mA trip).<br />
7. Arc-Fault Circuit Interrupter (AFCI) Circuit Breakers: Comply with UL 1699; 120/240-V,<br />
single-pole configuration.<br />
8. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories:<br />
a. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.<br />
b. Lugs: Compression style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor<br />
materials.<br />
c. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent<br />
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID)<br />
lighting circuits.<br />
d. Ground-Fault Protection: Remote-mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable<br />
pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator.<br />
e. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at percent of<br />
rated voltage.<br />
f. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without<br />
intentional time delay.<br />
g. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic<br />
circuit-breaker contacts and "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker<br />
contacts.<br />
h. Alarm Switch: Single-pole, normally open contact that actuates only when circuit<br />
breaker trips.<br />
i. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall<br />
be removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.<br />
j. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking<br />
ground-fault protection function with other upstream or downstream devices.<br />
k. Multipole units enclosed in a single housing or factory assembled to operate as a<br />
single unit.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262416 - 6 PANELBOARDS
l. Handle Padlocking Device: Fixed attachment, for locking circuit-breaker handle in<br />
on or off position.<br />
m. Handle Clamp: Loose attachment, for holding circuit-breaker handle in on<br />
position.<br />
C. Fused Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD; clips to accommodate specified fuses; lockable handle.<br />
1. Fuses, and Spare-Fuse Cabinet: Comply with requirements specified in Section 26 2813<br />
"Fuses."<br />
2. Fused Switch Features and Accessories: Standard ampere ratings and number of poles.<br />
3. Auxiliary Contacts: One or Two normally open and normally closed contact(s) that<br />
operate with switch handle operation.<br />
2.6 ACCESSORY COMPONENTS AND FEATURES<br />
A. Accessory Set: Include tools and miscellaneous items required for overcurrent protective device<br />
test, inspection, maintenance, and operation.<br />
B. Portable Test Set: For testing functions of solid-state trip devices without removing from<br />
panelboard. Include relay and meter test plugs suitable for testing panelboard meters and<br />
switchboard class relays.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NECA 407.<br />
B. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or<br />
have been subjected to water saturation.<br />
C. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation<br />
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NECA 407.<br />
B. Equipment Mounting: Install panelboards on concrete bases, 4-inch nominal thickness. Comply<br />
with requirements for concrete base specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."<br />
1. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,<br />
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.<br />
2. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to panelboards.<br />
3. Attach panelboard to the vertical finished or structural surface behind the panelboard.<br />
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and<br />
temporary blocking of moving parts from panelboards.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262416 - 7 PANELBOARDS
D. Mount top of trim 90 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed<br />
panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box.<br />
F. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed.<br />
1. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.<br />
G. Install filler plates in unused spaces.<br />
H. Comply with NECA 1.<br />
3.3 IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning<br />
signs complying with Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."<br />
B. Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations.<br />
Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten<br />
directories are not acceptable.<br />
C. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements<br />
for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."<br />
D. Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a<br />
nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553<br />
"Identification for Electrical Systems."<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Perform tests and inspections.<br />
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:<br />
1. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder,<br />
and control circuit.<br />
2. Test continuity of each circuit.<br />
C. Tests and Inspections:<br />
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA<br />
Acceptance Testing Specification.<br />
2. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate<br />
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.<br />
D. Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262416 - 8 PANELBOARDS
3.5 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as<br />
recommended by manufacturer.<br />
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 2416<br />
262416 - 9 PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 2726<br />
WIRING DEVICES<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates.<br />
2. Twist-locking receptacles.<br />
3. Receptacles with integral surge-suppression units.<br />
4. Tamper-resistant receptacles.<br />
5. Weather-resistant receptacles.<br />
6. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers.<br />
7. Solid-state fan speed controls.<br />
8. Wall-switch and exterior occupancy sensors.<br />
9. Communications outlets.<br />
10. Pendant cord-connector devices.<br />
11. Cord and plug sets.<br />
12. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.<br />
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.<br />
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.<br />
D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.<br />
E. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor.<br />
F. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.<br />
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Coordination:<br />
1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.<br />
2. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.<br />
262726 - 1 WIRING DEVICES
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product.<br />
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel<br />
warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following<br />
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:<br />
1. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper).<br />
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).<br />
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).<br />
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).<br />
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single<br />
source from single manufacturer.<br />
2.2 GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a<br />
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
B. Comply with NFPA 70.<br />
C. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under<br />
the following conditions:<br />
1. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire.<br />
2. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.<br />
2.3 STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES<br />
A. Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6<br />
Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex).<br />
b. Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex).<br />
c. Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex).<br />
d. Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262726 - 2 WIRING DEVICES
B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,<br />
NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; TR8300.<br />
b. Hubbell; HBL8300SGA.<br />
c. Leviton; 8300-SGG.<br />
d. Pass & Seymour; TR63H.<br />
2. Description: Labeled shall comply with NFPA 70.<br />
2.4 GFCI RECEPTACLES<br />
A. General Description:<br />
1. Straight blade, feed-through type.<br />
2. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596.<br />
3. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer<br />
provides proper GFCI protection.<br />
B. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15A or 20 A:<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; VGF20.<br />
b. Hubbell; GFR5352L.<br />
c. Pass & Seymour; 2095.<br />
d. Leviton; 7590.<br />
C. Tamper-Resistant GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15A or 20 A:<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Hubbell; GFTR20.<br />
b. Pass & Seymour; 2095TR.<br />
2.5 TWIST-LOCKING RECEPTACLES<br />
A. Single Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6<br />
Configuration L5-20R, and UL 498.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; CWL520R.<br />
b. Hubbell; HBL2310.<br />
c. Leviton; 2310.<br />
d. Pass & Seymour; L520-R.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262726 - 3 WIRING DEVICES
2.6 PENDANT CORD-CONNECTOR DEVICES<br />
A. Description:<br />
1. Matching, locking-type plug and receptacle body connector.<br />
2. NEMA WD 6 Configurations L5-20P and L5-20R, heavy-duty grade, and FS W-C-596.<br />
3. Body: Nylon, with screw-open, cable-gripping jaws and provision for attaching external<br />
cable grip.<br />
4. External Cable Grip: Woven wire-mesh type made of high-strength, galvanized-steel wire<br />
strand, matched to cable diameter, and with attachment provision designed for<br />
corresponding connector.<br />
2.7 CORD AND PLUG SETS<br />
A. Description:<br />
1. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of<br />
equipment being connected.<br />
2. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with<br />
green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the<br />
equipment rating.<br />
3. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for<br />
connection.<br />
2.8 TOGGLE SWITCHES<br />
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896.<br />
B. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1) Single Pole:<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
2) Cooper; AH1221.<br />
3) Hubbell; HBL1221.<br />
4) Leviton; 1221-2.<br />
5) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC1.<br />
6) Two Pole:<br />
7) Cooper; AH1222.<br />
8) Hubbell; HBL1222.<br />
9) Leviton; 1222-2.<br />
10) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC2.<br />
11) Three Way:<br />
12) Cooper; AH1223.<br />
13) Hubbell; HBL1223.<br />
14) Leviton; 1223-2.<br />
262726 - 4 WIRING DEVICES
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
15) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC3.<br />
16) Four Way:<br />
C. Pilot-Light Switches, 20 A:<br />
17) Cooper; AH1224.<br />
18) Hubbell; HBL1224.<br />
19) Leviton; 1224-2.<br />
20) Pass & Seymour; CSB20AC4.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; AH1221PL for 120 and 277 V.<br />
b. Hubbell; HBL1201PL for 120 and 277 V.<br />
c. Leviton; 1221-LH1.<br />
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1RPL for 120 V, PS20AC1RPL7 for 277 V.<br />
2. Description: Single pole, with neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."<br />
D. Key-Operated Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A:<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; AH1221L.<br />
b. Hubbell; HBL1221L.<br />
c. Leviton; 1221-2L.<br />
d. Pass & Seymour; PS20AC1-L.<br />
2. Description: Single pole, with factory-supplied key in lieu of switch handle.<br />
E. Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches: 120/277 V, 20 A; for use<br />
with mechanically held lighting contactors.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; 1995.<br />
b. Hubbell; HBL1557.<br />
c. Leviton; 1257.<br />
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251.<br />
F. Key-Operated, Single-Pole, Double-Throw, Momentary-Contact, Center-off Switches:<br />
120/277 V, 20 A; for use with mechanically held lighting contactors, with factory-supplied key in<br />
lieu of switch handle.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; 1995L.<br />
b. Hubbell; HBL1557L.<br />
c. Leviton; 1257L.<br />
262726 - 5 WIRING DEVICES
d. Pass & Seymour; 1251L.<br />
2.9 DECORATOR-STYLE DEVICES<br />
A. Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6<br />
Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; 6252.<br />
b. Hubbell; DR15.<br />
c. Leviton; 16252.<br />
d. Pass & Seymour; 26252.<br />
B. Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with<br />
NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; TR6252.<br />
b. Hubbell; DR15TR.<br />
c. Pass & Seymour; TR26252.<br />
2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and<br />
Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section.<br />
C. GFCI, Feed-Through Type, Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with<br />
NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; VGF15.<br />
b. Hubbell; GF15LA.<br />
c. Leviton; 8599.<br />
d. Pass & Seymour; 1594.<br />
D. GFCI, Tamper-Resistant and Weather-Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V,<br />
15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943<br />
Class A.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; TWRVGF15.<br />
b. Hubbell; GFTR15.<br />
c. Pass & Seymour; 1594TRWR.<br />
2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and<br />
Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262726 - 6 WIRING DEVICES
E. Toggle Switches, Square Face, 120/277 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-<br />
S-896.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; 7621 (single pole), 7623 (three way).<br />
b. Hubbell; DS115 (single pole), DS315 (three way).<br />
c. Leviton; 5621-2 (single pole), 5623-2 (three way).<br />
d. Pass & Seymour; 2621 (single pole), 2623 (three way).<br />
F. Lighted Toggle Switches, Square Face, 120 V, 15 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; 7631 (single pole), 7633 (three way).<br />
b. Hubbell; DS120IL (single pole), DS320 (three way).<br />
c. Leviton; 5631-2 (single pole), 5633-2 (three way).<br />
d. Pass & Seymour; 2625 (single pole), 2626 (three way).<br />
2. Description: With neon-lighted handle, illuminated when switch is "off."<br />
2.10 RESIDENTIAL DEVICES<br />
A. Residential-Grade, Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A: Comply with<br />
NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; TR270.<br />
b. Hubbell; RR155TR.<br />
c. Leviton; T5320.<br />
d. Pass & Seymour; TR62.<br />
2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and<br />
Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section.<br />
B. Weather-Resistant and Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 15 A: Comply with<br />
NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, and UL 498.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; TWR270.<br />
b. Hubbell; RR155WRTR.<br />
c. Leviton; TWR15.<br />
d. Pass & Seymour; 3232TRWR.<br />
2. Description: Labeled to comply with NFPA 70, "Receptacles, Cord Connectors, and<br />
Attachment Plugs (Caps)" Article, "Tamper-Resistant Receptacles in Dwelling Units" Section,<br />
when installed in wet and damp locations.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262726 - 7 WIRING DEVICES
C. Fan Speed Controls:<br />
1. Modular, 120-V, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches and audible<br />
frequency and EMI/RFI filters.<br />
2. Comply with UL 1917.<br />
3. Continuously adjustable slider or rotary knob, 1.5 A.<br />
4. Three-speed adjustable slider or rotary knob, 1.5 A.<br />
D. Telephone Outlet:<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; 3560-6.<br />
b. Leviton; 40649.<br />
2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP;<br />
TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.<br />
E. Combination TV and Telephone Outlet:<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Cooper; 3562.<br />
b. Leviton; 40159.<br />
2. Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1;<br />
complying with Category 5e. Comply with UL 1863.<br />
2.11 WALL-BOX DIMMERS<br />
A. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with<br />
audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters.<br />
B. Control: Continuously adjustable slider; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with<br />
UL 1472.<br />
C. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: 120 V; control shall follow square-law dimming curve. On-off<br />
switch positions shall bypass dimmer module.<br />
1. 600 W; dimmers shall require no derating when ganged with other devices<br />
2. Retain "Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches" Paragraph below with compatible dimmingtype<br />
ballasts. Coordinate with Section 26 5100 "Interior Lighting." Use uniform ballast and<br />
lamp types to obtain consistent dimming characteristics.<br />
D. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim<br />
potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent<br />
dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262726 - 8 WIRING DEVICES
2.12 WALL PLATES<br />
A. Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices.<br />
1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.<br />
2. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.<br />
3. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel or Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic.<br />
4. Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and<br />
labeled for use in wet and damp locations.<br />
B. Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weatherresistant,<br />
die-cast aluminum with lockable cover.<br />
2.13 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS<br />
A. Type: Modular, flush-type, dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.<br />
B. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling.<br />
C. Service Plate: Rectangular or Round, die-cast aluminum or solid brass with satin finish.<br />
D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for UTP<br />
cable complying with requirements in Section 27 1500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."<br />
2.14 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.<br />
2. Pass & Seymour/Legrand.<br />
3. Square D/Schneider Electric.<br />
4. Thomas & Betts Corporation.<br />
5. Wiremold/Legrand.<br />
C. Description:<br />
1. Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled,<br />
through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service-outlet assembly.<br />
2. Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements.<br />
3. Service-Outlet Assembly: Flush type with two or four simplex receptacles and space for<br />
two or four RJ-45 jacks complying with requirements in Section 27 1500 "Communications<br />
Horizontal Cabling."<br />
4. Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch or 4-inch cored holes in floor and matched to floor<br />
thickness.<br />
5. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262726 - 9 WIRING DEVICES
6. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3-inch or 4-inch cored openings and reestablish<br />
fire rating of floor.<br />
7. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors<br />
and a minimum of four, four-pair cables that comply with requirements in<br />
Section 27 1500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling."<br />
2.15 FINISHES<br />
A. Device Color:<br />
1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless<br />
otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.<br />
2. Wiring Devices Connected to Emergency Power System: Red.<br />
3. TVSS Devices: Blue.<br />
4. Isolated-Ground Receptacles: Orange.<br />
B. Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Coordination with Other Trades:<br />
1. Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device<br />
boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside<br />
of boxes.<br />
2. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint<br />
unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.<br />
3. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.<br />
C. Conductors:<br />
1. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid<br />
scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.<br />
2. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,<br />
Article 300, without pigtails.<br />
3. Existing Conductors:<br />
a. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.<br />
D. Device Installation:<br />
1. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last<br />
possible moment.<br />
2. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in length.<br />
3. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid<br />
conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw.<br />
4. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer.<br />
5. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice<br />
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262726 - 10 WIRING DEVICES
6. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.<br />
E. Receptacle Orientation:<br />
1. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted<br />
receptacles to the left.<br />
2. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral<br />
blade at the top.<br />
F. Dimmers:<br />
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.<br />
2. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application.<br />
3. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to<br />
manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.<br />
G. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical<br />
and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single,<br />
multigang wall plates.<br />
H. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and<br />
furnishings.<br />
3.2 IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Comply with Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."<br />
B. Identify each receptacle with panelboard identification and circuit number. Use hot, stamped, or<br />
machine printing with black-filled lettering on face of plate, and durable wire markers or tags<br />
inside outlet boxes.<br />
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Perform the following tests and inspections:<br />
1. In healthcare facilities, prepare reports that comply with recommendations in NFPA 99.<br />
2. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.<br />
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:<br />
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.<br />
2. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.<br />
3. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.<br />
4. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit<br />
breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar<br />
problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new<br />
ones, and retest as specified above.<br />
C. Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 2726<br />
262726 - 11 WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 2813<br />
FUSES<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches, enclosed controllers<br />
and motor-control centers.<br />
2. Plug fuses rated 125-V ac and less for use in plug-fuse-type enclosed switches, fuseholders<br />
and panelboards.<br />
3. Spare-fuse cabinets.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source<br />
from single manufacturer.<br />
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by<br />
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
C. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses.<br />
D. Comply with NFPA 70.<br />
E. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses.<br />
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F or more<br />
than 100 deg F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings.<br />
1.5 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size<br />
and with system short-circuit current levels.<br />
262813 - 1 FUSES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.<br />
2. Edison Fuse, Inc.<br />
3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.<br />
4. Littelfuse, Inc.<br />
2.2 CARTRIDGE FUSES<br />
A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with<br />
circuit voltages.<br />
2.3 PLUG FUSES<br />
A. Characteristics: UL 248-11, nonrenewable plug fuses; 125-V ac.<br />
2.4 SPARE-FUSE CABINET<br />
1. Use existing.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine fuses before installation. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically<br />
damaged.<br />
B. Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions<br />
affecting performance, such as rejection features.<br />
C. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and<br />
with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment.<br />
D. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to<br />
fuse ratings.<br />
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 FUSE APPLICATIONS<br />
A. Cartridge Fuses:<br />
1. Service Entrance: Class L, time delay.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262813 - 2 FUSES
2. Feeders: Class L, time delay; Class RK1, time delay; Class RK5, time delay; Class J, fast<br />
acting; Class J, time delay.<br />
3. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1 or Class RK5, time delay.<br />
4. Other Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time delay; Class J, fast acting; Class J, time delay.<br />
5. Control Circuits: Class CC, fast acting or time delay.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install fuses in fusible devices. Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without removing<br />
fuse.<br />
B. Install spare-fuse cabinet(s).<br />
3.4 IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553<br />
"Identification for Electrical Systems".<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 2813<br />
262813 - 3 FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 2816<br />
ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Fusible switches.<br />
2. Nonfusible switches.<br />
3. Receptacle switches.<br />
4. Shunt trip switches.<br />
5. Molded-case circuit breakers (MCCBs).<br />
6. Molded-case switches.<br />
7. Enclosures.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. NC: Normally closed.<br />
B. NO: Normally open.<br />
C. SPDT: Single pole, double throw.<br />
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in<br />
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in<br />
Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:<br />
1. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit<br />
breakers.<br />
2. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent<br />
protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.<br />
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective<br />
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
262816 - 1 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND<br />
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices,<br />
components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single<br />
manufacturer.<br />
B. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed<br />
switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces<br />
and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions.<br />
C. Comply with NFPA 70.<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following<br />
conditions unless otherwise indicated:<br />
1. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.<br />
2. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.<br />
B. Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by<br />
Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to<br />
provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated:<br />
1. Notify <strong>Construction</strong> Manager and Owner no fewer than seven days in advance of<br />
proposed interruption of electric service.<br />
2. Indicate method of providing temporary electric service.<br />
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without <strong>Construction</strong> Manager's written<br />
permission.<br />
4. Comply with NFPA 70E.<br />
1.8 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment<br />
served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances<br />
for equipment access doors and panels.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 FUSIBLE SWITCHES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.<br />
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.<br />
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.<br />
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262816 - 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND<br />
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 240-V ac, 800 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,<br />
horsepower rated, with cartridge or plug fuse interiors to accommodate specified indicated fuses,<br />
lockable handle with capability to accept one padlock, and interlocked with cover in closed<br />
position.<br />
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,<br />
horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified indicated fuses, lockable<br />
handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position.<br />
D. Accessories:<br />
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground<br />
conductors.<br />
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;<br />
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.<br />
3. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified.<br />
4. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate<br />
before switch blades open.<br />
5. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material.<br />
6. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.<br />
7. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 120-V ac.<br />
2.2 NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.<br />
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.<br />
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.<br />
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.<br />
B. Type GD, General Duty, Single Throw, 600 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower<br />
rated, lockable handle with capability to accept one padlock, and interlocked with cover in closed<br />
position.<br />
C. Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 600-V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1,<br />
horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with<br />
cover in closed position.<br />
D. Accessories:<br />
1. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground<br />
conductors.<br />
2. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded;<br />
labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.<br />
3. Auxiliary Contact Kit: One NO/NC (Form "C") auxiliary contact(s), arranged to activate<br />
before switch blades open.<br />
4. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression type, suitable for number, size, and conductor<br />
material.<br />
5. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Remote mounted and powered; 24-V ac or 120-V ac.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262816 - 3 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND<br />
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
2.3 RECEPTACLE SWITCHES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.<br />
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.<br />
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.<br />
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.<br />
B. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Fusible Switch: 240-V ac, 30, 60, or 100 A; UL 98 and<br />
NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate specified indicated fuses;<br />
lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks; interlocked with cover in closed<br />
position.<br />
C. Type HD, Heavy-Duty, Single-Throw Nonfusible Switch: 240-V ac, 30, 60, or 100 A; UL 98 and<br />
NEMA KS 1; horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept one padlock;<br />
interlocked with cover in closed position.<br />
D. Interlocking Linkage: Provided between the receptacle and switch mechanism to prevent<br />
inserting or removing plug while switch is in the on position, inserting any plug other than<br />
specified, and turning switch on if an incorrect plug is inserted or correct plug has not been fully<br />
inserted into the receptacle.<br />
E. Receptacle: Polarized, three-phase, four-wire receptacle (fourth wire connected to enclosure<br />
ground lug).<br />
2.4 SHUNT TRIP SWITCHES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Cooper Bussmann, Inc.<br />
2. Eaton.<br />
3. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc.<br />
4. Littelfuse, Inc.<br />
B. General Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1, UL 50, and UL 98, with 200-kA interrupting<br />
and short-circuit current rating when fitted with Class J fuses.<br />
C. Switches: Three-pole, horsepower rated, with integral shunt trip mechanism and Class J fuse<br />
block; lockable handle with capability to accept one padlock; interlocked with cover in closed<br />
position.<br />
D. Control Circuit: 120-V ac; obtained from integral control power transformer, with primary and<br />
secondary fuses, with a control power transformer of enough capacity to operate shunt trip,<br />
connected pilot, and indicating and control devices.<br />
E. Accessories:<br />
1. Oiltight key switch for key-to-test function.<br />
2. Oiltight green ON pilot light.<br />
3. Isolated neutral lug; 100 percent rating.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262816 - 4 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND<br />
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
4. Mechanically interlocked auxiliary contacts that change state when switch is opened and<br />
closed.<br />
5. Form C alarm contacts that change state when switch is tripped.<br />
6. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-safety and alarm relay; 120-V ac or 24-V dc coil voltage.<br />
7. Three-pole, double-throw, fire-alarm voltage monitoring relay complying with NFPA 72.<br />
2.5 MOLDED-CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.<br />
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.<br />
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.<br />
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.<br />
B. General Requirements: Comply with UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting<br />
capacity to comply with available fault currents.<br />
C. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads and<br />
instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuitbreaker<br />
frame sizes 250 A and larger.<br />
D. Adjustable, Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, fieldadjustable<br />
trip setting.<br />
E. Electronic Trip Circuit Breakers: Field-replaceable rating plug, rms sensing, with the following<br />
field-adjustable settings:<br />
1. Instantaneous trip.<br />
2. Long- and short-time pickup levels.<br />
3. Long- and short-time time adjustments.<br />
4. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I 2 t response.<br />
F. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller, and let-through ratings less<br />
than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.<br />
G. Integrally Fused Circuit Breakers: Thermal-magnetic trip element with integral limiter-style fuse<br />
listed for use with circuit breaker and trip activation on fuse opening or on opening of fuse<br />
compartment door.<br />
H. Ground-Fault, Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations<br />
with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip).<br />
I. Ground-Fault, Equipment-Protection (GFEP) Circuit Breakers: With Class B ground-fault<br />
protection (30-mA trip).<br />
J. Features and Accessories:<br />
1. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.<br />
2. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and<br />
conductor material.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262816 - 5 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND<br />
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
3. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent<br />
lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge lighting<br />
circuits.<br />
4. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; integrally mounted, self-powered type<br />
with mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay<br />
settings, push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zerosequence<br />
current transformer/sensor.<br />
5. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.<br />
6. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional<br />
time delay.<br />
7. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic circuitbreaker<br />
contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of circuit-breaker contacts.<br />
8. Alarm Switch: One NO or NC contact that operates only when circuit breaker has tripped.<br />
9. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit circuit-breaker operation; key shall be<br />
removable only when circuit breaker is in off position.<br />
10. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with electronic trip unit; for interlocking ground-fault<br />
protection function.<br />
11. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.<br />
12. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered; 120-V ac or 24-V dc.<br />
2.6 MOLDED-CASE SWITCHES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.<br />
2. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.<br />
3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.<br />
4. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.<br />
B. General Requirements: MCCB with fixed, high-set instantaneous trip only, and short-circuit<br />
withstand rating equal to equivalent breaker frame size interrupting rating.<br />
C. Features and Accessories:<br />
1. Standard frame sizes and number of poles.<br />
2. Lugs: Mechanical or Compression type, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and<br />
conductor material.<br />
3. Ground-Fault Protection: Comply with UL 1053; remote-mounted and powered type with<br />
mechanical ground-fault indicator; relay with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings,<br />
push-to-test feature, internal memory, and shunt trip unit; and three-phase, zero-sequence<br />
current transformer/sensor.<br />
4. Shunt Trip: Trip coil energized from separate circuit, with coil-clearing contact.<br />
5. Undervoltage Trip: Set to operate at 35 to 75 percent of rated voltage without intentional<br />
time delay.<br />
6. Auxiliary Contacts: One SPDT switch with "a" and "b" contacts; "a" contacts mimic switch<br />
contacts, "b" contacts operate in reverse of switch contacts.<br />
7. Alarm Switch: One NO contact that operates only when switch has tripped.<br />
8. Key Interlock Kit: Externally mounted to prohibit switch operation; key shall be removable<br />
only when switch is in off position.<br />
9. Zone-Selective Interlocking: Integral with ground-fault shunt trip unit; for interlocking<br />
ground-fault protection function.<br />
10. Electrical Operator: Provide remote control for on, off, and reset operations.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262816 - 6 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND<br />
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
11. Accessory Control Power Voltage: Integrally mounted, self-powered; 120-V ac or 24-V dc.<br />
2.7 ENCLOSURES<br />
A. Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to<br />
comply with environmental conditions at installed location.<br />
1. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.<br />
2. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R.<br />
3. Kitchen Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X,.<br />
4. Other Wet or Damp, Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.<br />
5. Indoor Locations Subject to Dust, Falling Dirt, and Dripping Noncorrosive Liquids:<br />
NEMA 250, Type 12.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance<br />
with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Comply with mounting and anchoring requirements specified in Section 26 0548 "Vibration and<br />
Seismic Controls for Electrical Systems."<br />
C. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and<br />
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.<br />
D. Install fuses in fusible devices.<br />
E. Comply with NECA 1.<br />
3.3 IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Comply with requirements in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."<br />
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide<br />
warning signs.<br />
2. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
262816 - 7 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND<br />
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Perform tests and inspections.<br />
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:<br />
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component,<br />
connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit.<br />
2. Test continuity of each circuit.<br />
C. Tests and Inspections:<br />
1. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate<br />
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.<br />
2. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and<br />
malfunctioning controls and equipment.<br />
D. Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and<br />
inspections.<br />
3.5 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as<br />
recommended by manufacturer.<br />
B. Set field-adjustable circuit-breaker trip ranges as specified in Section 26 0573 "Overcurrent<br />
Protective Device Coordination Study."<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 2816<br />
262816 - 8 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND<br />
CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 5100<br />
INTERIOR LIGHTING<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.<br />
2. Emergency lighting units.<br />
3. Exit signs.<br />
4. Lighting fixture supports.<br />
5. Retrofit kits for fluorescent lighting fixtures.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Section 26 0923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time<br />
switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and<br />
contactors.<br />
2. Section 26 0933 "Central Dimming Controls" for architectural dimming systems.<br />
3. Section 26 2726 "Wiring Devices" for manual wall-box dimmers for incandescent lamps.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. BF: Ballast factor.<br />
B. CCT: Correlated color temperature.<br />
C. CRI: Color-rendering index.<br />
D. HID: High-intensity discharge.<br />
E. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.<br />
F. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both.<br />
G. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.<br />
26 5100 - 1 INTERIOR LIGHTING
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include<br />
data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:<br />
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.<br />
2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.<br />
3. Ballast, including BF.<br />
4. Energy-efficiency data.<br />
5. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps.<br />
a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a<br />
manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary<br />
Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Include plans, elevations, sections,<br />
details, and attachments to other work.<br />
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required<br />
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field<br />
connection.<br />
2. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.<br />
C. Installation instructions.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the<br />
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the<br />
items involved:<br />
1. Lighting fixtures.<br />
2. Suspended ceiling components.<br />
3. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches of the<br />
plane of the luminaires.<br />
4. Ceiling-mounted projectors.<br />
5. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached.<br />
6. Other items in finished ceiling including the following:<br />
a. Air outlets and inlets.<br />
b. Speakers.<br />
c. Sprinklers.<br />
d. Smoke and fire detectors.<br />
e. Occupancy sensors.<br />
f. Access panels.<br />
7. Perimeter moldings.<br />
B. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from<br />
manufacturer.<br />
C. Field quality-control reports.<br />
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 5100 - 2 INTERIOR LIGHTING
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency,<br />
operation, and maintenance manuals.<br />
1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by an independent<br />
agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is an NRTL as<br />
defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910, complying with the IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing &<br />
Calculation Guides.<br />
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by<br />
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
C. Comply with NFPA 70.<br />
D. FM Global Compliance: Lighting fixtures for hazardous locations shall be listed and labeled for<br />
indicated class and division of hazard by FM Global.<br />
E. Mockups: Provide interior lighting fixtures for room or module mockups, complete with power<br />
and control connections.<br />
1. Obtain Architect's approval of fixtures for mockups before starting installations.<br />
2. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for<br />
judging the completed Work.<br />
3. Approved fixtures in mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at<br />
time of Substantial Completion.<br />
1.8 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other<br />
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression<br />
system, and partition assemblies.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated<br />
into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.<br />
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS<br />
A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 5100 - 3 INTERIOR LIGHTING
B. Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to<br />
NEMA LE 5A.<br />
C. Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to<br />
NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.<br />
D. HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.<br />
E. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.<br />
F. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent<br />
warping and sagging.<br />
G. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under<br />
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to<br />
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during<br />
relamping and when secured in operating position.<br />
H. Diffusers and Globes:<br />
1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing<br />
and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.<br />
a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated.<br />
b. UV stabilized.<br />
2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated.<br />
I. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.<br />
Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from<br />
normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.<br />
1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:<br />
a. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type.<br />
b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad,<br />
triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent<br />
luminaires.<br />
c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for<br />
HID luminaires.<br />
d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact<br />
fluorescent luminaires.<br />
e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.<br />
f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.<br />
2.3 BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS<br />
A. General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts:<br />
1. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11.<br />
2. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served.<br />
3. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level<br />
control is indicated.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 5100 - 4 INTERIOR LIGHTING
4. Sound Rating: Class A.<br />
5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.<br />
6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.<br />
7. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher.<br />
8. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.<br />
9. BF: 0.88 or higher.<br />
10. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher.<br />
11. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts shall comply with ANSI C82.11 and shall be<br />
connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail.<br />
B. Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts.<br />
C. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5 and T5HO Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and<br />
the following:<br />
1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps.<br />
2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.<br />
D. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1; energy saving, high-power factor, Class P,<br />
and having automatic-reset thermal protection.<br />
1. Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label.<br />
E. Single Ballasts for Multiple Lighting Fixtures: Factory wired with ballast arrangements and<br />
bundled extension wiring to suit final installation conditions without modification or rewiring in<br />
the field.<br />
F. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:<br />
1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and<br />
operating temperature with indicated lamp types.<br />
2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with<br />
indicated lamp types.<br />
G. Ballasts for Residential Applications: Fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low-powerfactor<br />
electronic ballasts having a Class B sound rating and total harmonic distortion of<br />
approximately 30 percent.<br />
H. Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.<br />
1. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens.<br />
2. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal.<br />
3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and<br />
lamp type indicated.<br />
4. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast,<br />
controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.<br />
I. Ballasts for Bi-Level Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.<br />
1. Operating Modes: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light output<br />
of the associated lamp between high- and low-level and off.<br />
a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.<br />
b. Low-Level Operation: 30 percent of rated lamp lumens.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 5100 - 5 INTERIOR LIGHTING
2. Ballast shall provide equal current to each lamp in each operating mode.<br />
3. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control system and<br />
lamp type indicated.<br />
2.4 BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS<br />
A. Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with<br />
ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for<br />
full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated:<br />
1. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.<br />
2. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.<br />
3. Sound Rating: Class A.<br />
4. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.<br />
5. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.<br />
6. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.<br />
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.<br />
8. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated.<br />
9. Power Factor: 0.95, except fixtures designated as "Residential" may use low-power-factor<br />
electronic ballasts or higher.<br />
10. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on<br />
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.<br />
2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS<br />
A. Electromagnetic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029.<br />
Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:<br />
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.<br />
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F for single-lamp ballasts.<br />
3. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.<br />
4. Open-circuit operation that will not reduce average life.<br />
B. Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: Include the following features unless otherwise<br />
indicated:<br />
1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F for single-lamp ballasts.<br />
2. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F.<br />
3. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.<br />
4. Sound Rating: Class A.<br />
5. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.<br />
6. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better.<br />
7. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less.<br />
8. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.<br />
9. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.<br />
10. Bi-Level Dimming Ballast: Ballast circuit and leads provide for remote control of the light<br />
output of the associated fixture between high- and low-level and off.<br />
a. High-Level Operation: 100 percent of rated lamp lumens.<br />
b. Low-Level Operation: 35 percent of rated lamp lumens.<br />
c. Compatibility: Certified by ballast manufacturer for use with specific bi-level control<br />
system and lamp type indicated. Certified by lamp manufacturer that ballast<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 5100 - 6 INTERIOR LIGHTING
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
operating modes are free from negative effect on lamp life and color-rendering<br />
capability.<br />
11. Continuous Dimming Ballast: Dimming range shall be from 100 to 35 percent of rated<br />
lamp lumens without flicker.<br />
a. Ballast Input Watts: Reduced to a maximum of 50 percent of normal at lowest<br />
dimming setting.<br />
C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type, with solid-state igniter/starter.<br />
Igniter/starter shall have an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/startercase<br />
temperature of 90 deg C.<br />
1. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F.<br />
2.6 QUARTZ LAMP LIGHTING CONTROLLER<br />
A. General Requirements for Controllers: Factory installed by lighting fixture manufacturer. Comply<br />
with UL 1598.<br />
B. Standby (Quartz Restrike): Automatically switches quartz lamp on when a HID lamp in the fixture<br />
is initially energized and during the HID lamp restrike period after brief power outages.<br />
C. Connections: Designed for a single branch -circuit connection.<br />
D. Switching Off: Automatically switches quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60<br />
percent light output.<br />
2.7 EXIT SIGNS<br />
A. General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance,<br />
and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
B. Internally Lighted Signs:<br />
1. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life.<br />
2.8 FLUORESCENT LAMPS<br />
A. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800 initial lumens<br />
(minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature as specified on drawings, and average rated<br />
life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches, 1300 initial lumens<br />
(minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature as specified on drawings, and average rated<br />
life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. T5 rapid-start lamps, rated 28 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches, 2900 initial lumens<br />
(minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature as specified on drawings, and average rated<br />
life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.<br />
26 5100 - 7 INTERIOR LIGHTING
D. T5HO rapid-start, high-output lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of 45.2 inches,<br />
5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature as specified on drawings,<br />
and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature as specified on<br />
drawings, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start, and suitable for<br />
use with dimming ballasts unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. 13 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum).<br />
2. 18 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum).<br />
3. 26 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum).<br />
4. 32 W: T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum).<br />
5. 42 W: T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum).<br />
6. 57 W: T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum).<br />
7. 70 W: T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).<br />
2.9 HID LAMPS<br />
A. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.<br />
B. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and color temperature 4000 K.<br />
C. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and color temperature 4000 K.<br />
D. Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI 78.41, CRI 0, and color temperature 1800 K.<br />
2.10 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS<br />
A. Comply with Section 26 0529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and<br />
angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.<br />
B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish<br />
same as fixture.<br />
C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single<br />
fixture. Finish same as fixture.<br />
D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.<br />
E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.<br />
F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with<br />
threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.<br />
2.11 RETROFIT KITS FOR FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES<br />
A. Reflector Kit: UL 1598, Type I. Suitable for two- to four-lamp, surface-mounted or recessed<br />
lighting fixtures by improving reflectivity of fixture surfaces.<br />
B. Ballast and Lamp Change Kit: UL 1598, Type II. Suitable for changing existing ballast, lamps,<br />
and sockets.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 5100 - 8 INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Lighting fixtures:<br />
1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Install lamps in each luminaire.<br />
B. Temporary Lighting: Use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the<br />
minimum number of luminaires necessary.<br />
C. Remote Mounting of Ballasts: Distance between the ballast and fixture shall not exceed that<br />
recommended by ballast manufacturer. Verify, with ballast manufacturers, maximum distance<br />
between ballast and luminaire.<br />
D. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element.<br />
1. Install 2 ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension<br />
devices, for each fixture.<br />
2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each<br />
fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.<br />
3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or<br />
center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch<br />
metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.<br />
4. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting<br />
fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor<br />
of 3.<br />
E. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:<br />
1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging.<br />
2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers.<br />
3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for<br />
suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end.<br />
4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to<br />
building structure.<br />
F. Connect wiring according to Section 26 0519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and<br />
Cables."<br />
3.2 IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply<br />
with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 0553 "Identification for Electrical<br />
Systems."<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
26 5100 - 9 INTERIOR LIGHTING
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE<br />
A. Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by<br />
Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least<br />
100 hours at full voltage.<br />
3.4 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Occupancy Adjustments: When <strong>request</strong>ed within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,<br />
provide on-site assistance in adjusting aimable luminaires to suit actual occupied conditions.<br />
Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.<br />
Some of this work may be required after dark.<br />
1. Adjust aimable luminaires in the presence of Architect.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 5100<br />
26 5100 - 10 INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
SECTION 26 5600<br />
EXTERIOR LIGHTING<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Exterior luminaires with lamps and ballasts.<br />
2. Luminaire-mounted photoelectric relays.<br />
3. Poles and accessories.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Section 26 5100 "Interior Lighting" for exterior luminaires normally mounted on exterior<br />
surfaces of buildings.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. CCT: Correlated color temperature.<br />
B. CRI: Color-rendering index.<br />
C. HID: High-intensity discharge.<br />
D. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating.<br />
E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided.<br />
F. Pole: Luminaire support structure, including tower used for large area illumination.<br />
G. Standard: Same definition as "Pole" above.<br />
1.4 STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS CRITERIA FOR POLE SELECTION<br />
A. Dead Load: Weight of luminaire and its horizontal and vertical supports, lowering devices, and<br />
supporting structure, applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.<br />
B. Wind Load: Pressure of wind on pole and luminaire and banners and banner arms, calculated<br />
and applied as stated in AASHTO LTS-4-M.<br />
265600 - 1 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
1. Basic wind speed for calculating wind load for poles exceeding 49.2 feet in height is 100<br />
mph .<br />
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
a. Wind Importance Factor: 1.0.<br />
b. Minimum Design Life: 50 years.<br />
c. Velocity Conversion Factors: 1.0.<br />
A. Product Data: For each luminaire, pole, and support component, arranged in order of lighting<br />
unit designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:<br />
1. Physical description of luminaire, including materials, dimensions, effective projected area,<br />
and verification of indicated parameters.<br />
2. Details of attaching luminaires and accessories.<br />
3. Details of installation and construction.<br />
4. Luminaire materials.<br />
5. Photometric data based on laboratory tests of each luminaire type, complete with indicated<br />
lamps, ballasts, and accessories.<br />
a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by manufacturer's<br />
laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory<br />
Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.<br />
6. Photoelectric relays.<br />
7. Ballasts, including energy-efficiency data.<br />
8. Lamps, including life, output, CCT, CRI, lumens, and energy-efficiency data.<br />
9. Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.<br />
10. Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for<br />
components involved.<br />
11. Anchor bolts for poles.<br />
12. Manufactured pole foundations.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.<br />
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required<br />
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field<br />
connection.<br />
2. Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.<br />
3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.<br />
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Pole and Support Component Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of poles, certifying that<br />
products are designed for indicated load requirements in AASHTO LTS-4-M and that load<br />
imposed by luminaire and attachments has been included in design. The certification shall be<br />
based on design calculations by a professional engineer.<br />
B. Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures.<br />
C. Field quality-control reports.<br />
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
265600 - 2 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For luminaires and poles to include in emergency, operation,<br />
and maintenance manuals.<br />
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers'<br />
laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program<br />
for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.<br />
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by<br />
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
C. Comply with IEEE C2, "National Electrical Safety Code."<br />
D. Comply with NFPA 70.<br />
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Package aluminum poles for shipping according to ASTM B 660.<br />
B. Store poles on decay-resistant-treated skids at least 12 inches above grade and vegetation.<br />
Support poles to prevent distortion and arrange to provide free air circulation.<br />
C. Handle wood poles so they will not be damaged. Do not use pointed tools that can indent pole<br />
surface more than 1/4 inch deep. Do not apply tools to section of pole to be installed below<br />
ground line.<br />
D. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on fiberglass and laminated wood poles until right before<br />
pole installation. Handle poles with web fabric straps.<br />
E. Retain factory-applied pole wrappings on metal poles until right before pole installation. For<br />
poles with nonmetallic finishes, handle with web fabric straps.<br />
1.10 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace products that fail in materials or workmanship; that corrode; or that fade, stain,<br />
perforate, erode, or chalk due to effects of weather or solar radiation within specified warranty<br />
period. Manufacturer may exclude lightning damage, hail damage, vandalism, abuse, or<br />
unauthorized repairs or alterations from special warranty coverage.<br />
1. Warranty Period for Luminaires: One years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
2. Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: One years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
3. Warranty Period for Color Retention: One years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
4. Warranty Period for Poles: Repair or replace lighting poles and standards that fail in<br />
finish, materials, and workmanship within manufacturer's standard warranty period, but<br />
not less than one years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
265600 - 3 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated<br />
into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings.<br />
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LUMINAIRES<br />
A. Luminaires shall comply with UL 1598 and be listed and labeled for installation in wet locations<br />
by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1. LER Tests Incandescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5A.<br />
2. LER Tests Fluorescent Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5 and<br />
NEMA LE 5A as applicable.<br />
3. LER Tests HID Fixtures: Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B.<br />
B. Lateral Light Distribution Patterns: Comply with IESNA RP-8 for parameters of lateral light<br />
distribution patterns indicated for luminaires.<br />
C. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.<br />
D. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum unless otherwise indicated. Form and<br />
support to prevent warping and sagging.<br />
E. Housings: Rigidly formed, weather- and light-tight enclosures that will not warp, sag, or deform<br />
in use. Provide filter/breather for enclosed luminaires.<br />
F. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under<br />
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to<br />
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during<br />
relamping and when secured in operating position. Doors shall be removable for cleaning or<br />
replacing lenses. Designed to disconnect ballast when door opens.<br />
G. Exposed Hardware Material: Stainless steel.<br />
H. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat,<br />
and UV radiation.<br />
I. Light Shields: Metal baffles, factory installed and field adjustable, arranged to block light<br />
distribution to indicated portion of normally illuminated area or field.<br />
J. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows unless otherwise indicated:<br />
1. White Surfaces: 85 percent.<br />
2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.<br />
3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.<br />
K. Lenses and Refractors Gaskets: Use heat- and aging-resistant resilient gaskets to seal and<br />
cushion lenses and refractors in luminaire doors.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
265600 - 4 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
L. Luminaire Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested<br />
luminaire before shipping. Where indicated, match finish process and color of pole or support<br />
materials.<br />
M. Factory-Applied Finish for Steel Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for<br />
Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to<br />
remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind<br />
welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present,<br />
from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast<br />
Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."<br />
2. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer<br />
and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.<br />
a. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard catalog of colors.<br />
b. Color: Match Architect's sample of manufacturer's standard color.<br />
c. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
N. Factory-Applied Finish for Aluminum Luminaires: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual<br />
for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum<br />
Association for designating aluminum finishes.<br />
2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff<br />
complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.<br />
3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;<br />
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear<br />
coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.<br />
4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;<br />
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally<br />
colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with<br />
AAMA 611.<br />
a. Color: Dark bronze or Black.<br />
O. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts.<br />
Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from<br />
normal viewing angles when lamps are in place.<br />
1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics:<br />
a. "USES ONLY" and include specific lamp type.<br />
b. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple),<br />
base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires.<br />
c. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for<br />
HID luminaires.<br />
d. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent<br />
luminaires.<br />
e. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires.<br />
f. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
265600 - 5 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
2.3 LUMINAIRE-MOUNTED PHOTOELECTRIC RELAYS<br />
A. Comply with UL 773 or UL 773A.<br />
B. Contact Relays: Factory mounted, single throw, designed to fail in the on position, and factory<br />
set to turn light unit on at 1.5 to 3 fc and off at 4.5 to 10 fc with 15-second minimum time<br />
delay. Relay shall have directional lens in front of photocell to prevent artificial light sources from<br />
causing false turnoff.<br />
1. Relay with locking-type receptacle shall comply with ANSI C136.10.<br />
2. Adjustable window slide for adjusting on-off set points.<br />
2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS AND LAMPS<br />
A. Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:<br />
1. Temperatures 0 Deg F and Higher: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and<br />
operating temperature with indicated lamp types.<br />
2. Temperatures Minus 20 Deg F and Higher: Electromagnetic type designed for use with<br />
indicated lamp types.<br />
B. Ballast Characteristics:<br />
1. Power Factor: 90 percent, minimum.<br />
2. Sound Rating: Class A.<br />
3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent.<br />
4. Electromagnetic Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.1, energy-saving, high power factor,<br />
Class P, automatic-reset thermal protection.<br />
5. Case Temperature for Compact Lamp Ballasts: 65 deg C, maximum.<br />
6. Transient-Voltage Protection: Comply with IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A<br />
or better.<br />
C. Low-Temperature Lamp Capability: Rated for reliable starting and operation with ballast<br />
provided at temperatures 0 deg F and higher.<br />
2.5 BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS<br />
A. Comply with ANSI C82.4 and UL 1029 and capable of open-circuit operation without reduction<br />
of average lamp life. Include the following features unless otherwise indicated:<br />
1. Ballast Circuit: Constant-wattage autotransformer or regulating high-power-factor type.<br />
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 22 deg F.<br />
3. Normal Ambient Operating Temperature: 104 deg F.<br />
4. Ballast Fuses: One in each ungrounded power supply conductor. Voltage and current<br />
ratings as recommended by ballast manufacturer.<br />
B. Auxiliary, Instant-On, Quartz System: Factory-installed feature automatically switches quartz<br />
lamp on when fixture is initially energized and when momentary power outages occur. System<br />
automatically turns quartz lamp off when HID lamp reaches approximately 60 percent of light<br />
output.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
265600 - 6 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
C. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Electromagnetic type with solid-state igniter/starter and capable<br />
of open-circuit operation without reduction of average lamp life. Igniter/starter shall have an<br />
average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter-case temperature of 90 deg C.<br />
1. Instant-Restrike Device: Integral with ballast, or solid-state potted module, factory installed<br />
within fixture and compatible with lamps, ballasts, and mogul sockets up to 150 W.<br />
a. Restrike Range: 105- to 130-V ac.<br />
b. Maximum Voltage: 250-V peak or 150-V ac rms.<br />
2. Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 40 deg F.<br />
2.6 HID LAMPS<br />
A. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.42, CRI 21 (minimum), CCT color temperature<br />
1900 K, and average rated life of 24,000 hours, minimum.<br />
1. Dual-Arc Tube Lamp: Arranged so only one of two arc tubes is lighted at one time and,<br />
when power is restored after an outage, the cooler arc tube, with lower internal pressure,<br />
lights instantly, providing an immediate 8 to 15 percent of normal light output.<br />
B. Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps: ANSI C78.43.<br />
C. Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000 K.<br />
D. Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 65, and CCT color temperature 4000 K.<br />
E. Ceramic, Pulse-Start, Metal-Halide Lamps: Minimum CRI 80, and CCT color temperature<br />
4000 K.<br />
2.7 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLES AND SUPPORT COMPONENTS<br />
A. Structural Characteristics: Comply with AASHTO LTS-4-M.<br />
1. Wind-Load Strength of Poles: Adequate at indicated heights above grade without failure,<br />
permanent deflection, or whipping in steady winds of speed indicated in "Structural<br />
Analysis Criteria for Pole Selection" Article.<br />
2. Strength Analysis: For each pole, multiply the actual equivalent projected area of<br />
luminaires and brackets by a factor of 1.1 to obtain the equivalent projected area to be<br />
used in pole selection strength analysis.<br />
B. Luminaire Attachment Provisions: Comply with luminaire manufacturers' mounting requirements.<br />
Use stainless-steel fasteners and mounting bolts unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Mountings, Fasteners, and Appurtenances: Corrosion-resistant items compatible with support<br />
components.<br />
1. Materials: Shall not cause galvanic action at contact points.<br />
2. Anchor Bolts, Leveling Nuts, Bolt Caps, and Washers: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3. Anchor-Bolt Template: Plywood or steel.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
265600 - 7 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
D. Handhole: Oval-shaped, with minimum clear opening of 2-1/2 by 5 inches, with cover secured<br />
by stainless-steel captive screws.<br />
E. Concrete Pole Foundations: Cast in place, with anchor bolts to match pole-base flange.<br />
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork are specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place<br />
Concrete."<br />
F. Power-Installed Screw Foundations: Factory fabricated by pole manufacturer, with structural steel<br />
complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M and hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M;<br />
and with top-plate and mounting bolts to match pole base flange and strength required to<br />
support pole, luminaire, and accessories.<br />
G. Breakaway Supports: Frangible breakaway supports, tested by an independent testing agency<br />
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, according to AASHTO LTS-4-M.<br />
2.8 STEEL POLES<br />
A. Poles: Comply with ASTM A 500, Grade B, carbon steel with a minimum yield of 46,000 psig;<br />
one-piece construction up to 40 feet in height with access handhole in pole wall.<br />
1. Shape: as noted on drawings.<br />
2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway<br />
support.<br />
B. Steel Mast Arms: Single-arm type, continuously welded to pole attachment plate. Material and<br />
finish same as pole.<br />
C. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, cantilever, without underbrace.<br />
1. Adapter fitting welded to pole, allowing the bracket to be bolted to the pole mounted<br />
adapter, then bolted together with galvanized-steel bolts.<br />
2. Cross Section: Tapered oval, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.<br />
3. Match pole material and finish.<br />
D. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and<br />
securely fastened to pole top.<br />
E. Steps: Fixed steel, with nonslip treads, positioned for 15-inch vertical spacing, alternating on<br />
opposite sides of pole; first step at elevation 10 feet above finished grade.<br />
F. Intermediate Handhole and Cable Support: Weathertight, 3-by-5-inch handhole located at<br />
midpoint of pole with cover for access to internal welded attachment lug for electric cable support<br />
grip.<br />
G. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in<br />
Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding<br />
and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.<br />
H. Cable Support Grip: Wire-mesh type with rotating attachment eye, sized for diameter of cable<br />
and rated for a minimum load equal to weight of supported cable times a 5.0 safety factor.<br />
I. Platform for Lamp and Ballast Servicing: Factory fabricated of steel with finish matching that of<br />
pole.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
265600 - 8 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
J. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.<br />
K. Galvanized Finish: After fabrication, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M.<br />
L. Factory-Painted Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and<br />
Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
1. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to<br />
remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Grind<br />
welds and polish surfaces to a smooth, even finish. Remove mill scale and rust, if present,<br />
from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast<br />
Cleaning," or with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."<br />
2. Interior Surfaces of Pole: One coat of bituminous paint, or otherwise treat for equal<br />
corrosion protection.<br />
3. Exterior Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard finish consisting of one or more coats of primer<br />
and two finish coats of high-gloss, high-build polyurethane enamel.<br />
2.9 ALUMINUM POLES<br />
a. Color: As selected by Architect or Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range.<br />
A. Poles: Seamless, extruded structural tube complying with ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6<br />
with access handhole in pole wall.<br />
B. Poles: ASTM B 209, 5052-H34 marine sheet alloy with access handhole in pole wall.<br />
1. Shape: as noted on drawings.<br />
2. Mounting Provisions: Butt flange for bolted mounting on foundation or breakaway<br />
support.<br />
C. Pole-Top Tenons: Fabricated to support luminaire or luminaires and brackets indicated, and<br />
securely fastened to pole top.<br />
D. Grounding and Bonding Lugs: Welded 1/2-inch threaded lug, complying with requirements in<br />
Section 26 0526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems," listed for attaching grounding<br />
and bonding conductors of type and size listed in that Section, and accessible through handhole.<br />
E. Brackets for Luminaires: Detachable, with pole and adapter fittings of cast aluminum. Adapter<br />
fitting welded to pole and bracket, then bolted together with stainless-steel bolts.<br />
1. Tapered oval cross section, with straight tubular end section to accommodate luminaire.<br />
2. Finish: Same as pole.<br />
F. Prime-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.<br />
G. Aluminum Finish: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal<br />
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
1. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum<br />
Association for designating aluminum finishes.<br />
2. Natural Satin Finish: Provide fine, directional, medium satin polish (AA-M32); buff<br />
complying with AA-M20; and seal aluminum surfaces with clear, hard-coat wax.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
265600 - 9 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
3. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;<br />
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear<br />
coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.<br />
4. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M32C22A42/A44 (Mechanical Finish: medium satin;<br />
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally<br />
colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with<br />
AAMA 611.<br />
2.10 FIBERGLASS POLES<br />
a. Color: As selected by Architect or Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range.<br />
A. Poles: Designed specifically for supporting luminaires, with factory-formed cable entrance and<br />
handhole. Not less than 65 percent fiberglass, with resin and pigment making up the remainder.<br />
1. Resin Color: Dark bronze; provide uniform coloration throughout entire wall thickness.<br />
2. Surface Finish: Pigmented polyurethane, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.<br />
Polyurethane may be omitted if the surface layer of pole is inherently UV inhibited.<br />
2.11 DECORATIVE POLES<br />
A. Pole Material:<br />
1. Cast ductile iron.<br />
2. Cast gray iron, according to ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 30.<br />
3. Cast aluminum.<br />
4. Cast concrete.<br />
5. Spun concrete.<br />
6. Steel tube, covered with closed-cell polyurethane foam, with a polyethylene exterior.<br />
B. Mounting Provisions:<br />
1. Bolted to concrete foundation.<br />
2. Embedded.<br />
C. Fixture Brackets:<br />
1. Cast ductile iron.<br />
2. Cast gray iron.<br />
3. Cast aluminum.<br />
D. Pole Finish: As selected by Architect or Interior Designer from manufacturer's full range..<br />
2.12 POLE ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Duplex Receptacle: 120 V, 20 A in a weatherproof assembly complying with Section 26 2726<br />
"Wiring Devices" for ground-fault circuit-interrupter type.<br />
1. Surface mounted, 12 inches above finished grade.<br />
2. Nonmetallic polycarbonate plastic or reinforced fiberglass, weatherproof in use, cover,<br />
that when mounted results in NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosure.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
265600 - 10 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
3. With cord opening.<br />
4. With lockable hasp and latch that complies with OSHA lockout and tag-out requirements.<br />
B. Base Covers: Manufacturers' standard metal units, arranged to cover pole's mounting bolts and<br />
nuts. Finish same as pole.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install lamps in each luminaire.<br />
B. Fasten luminaire to indicated structural supports.<br />
1. Use fastening methods and materials selected to resist seismic forces defined for the<br />
application and approved by manufacturer.<br />
C. Adjust luminaires that require field adjustment or aiming.<br />
3.2 POLE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Alignment: Align pole foundations and poles for optimum directional alignment of luminaires<br />
and their mounting provisions on the pole.<br />
B. Clearances: Maintain the following minimum horizontal distances of poles from surface and<br />
underground features unless otherwise indicated on Drawings:<br />
1. Fire Hydrants and Storm Drainage Piping: 60 inches.<br />
2. Water, Gas, Electric, Communication, and Sewer Lines: 10 feet.<br />
3. Trees: 15 feet from tree trunk.<br />
C. Concrete Pole Foundations: Set anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt templates furnished by<br />
pole manufacturer. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing requirements are specified in<br />
Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."<br />
D. Foundation-Mounted Poles: Mount pole with leveling nuts, and tighten top nuts to torque level<br />
recommended by pole manufacturer.<br />
1. Use anchor bolts and nuts selected to resist seismic forces defined for the application and<br />
approved by manufacturer.<br />
2. Grout void between pole base and foundation. Use nonshrink or expanding concrete<br />
grout firmly packed to fill space.<br />
3. Install base covers unless otherwise indicated.<br />
4. Use a short piece of 1/2-inch- diameter pipe to make a drain hole through grout.<br />
Arrange to drain condensation from interior of pole.<br />
E. Poles and Pole Foundations Set in Concrete Paved Areas: Install poles with minimum of 6-inch-<br />
wide, unpaved gap between the pole or pole foundation and the edge of adjacent concrete slab.<br />
Fill unpaved ring with pea gravel to a level 1 inch below top of concrete slab.<br />
F. Raise and set poles using web fabric slings (not chain or cable).<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
265600 - 11 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
3.3 BOLLARD LUMINAIRE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Align units for optimum directional alignment of light distribution.<br />
B. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at bollard location.<br />
Cast conduit into base, and shape base to match shape of bollard base. Finish by troweling and<br />
rubbing smooth. Concrete materials, installation, and finishing are specified in Section 03 3000<br />
"Cast-in-Place Concrete."<br />
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INDIVIDUAL GROUND-MOUNTING LUMINAIRES<br />
A. Install on concrete base with top 4 inches above finished grade or surface at luminaire location.<br />
Cast conduit into base, and finish by troweling and rubbing smooth. Concrete materials,<br />
installation, and finishing are specified in Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."<br />
3.5 CORROSION PREVENTION<br />
A. Aluminum: Do not use in contact with earth or concrete. When in direct contact with a dissimilar<br />
metal, protect aluminum by insulating fittings or treatment.<br />
B. Steel Conduits: Comply with Section 26 0533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." In<br />
concrete foundations, wrap conduit with 0.010-inch- thick, pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied<br />
with a 50 percent overlap.<br />
3.6 GROUNDING<br />
A. Ground metal poles and support structures according to Section 26 0526 "Grounding and<br />
Bonding for Electrical Systems."<br />
1. Install equipment grounding conductor for each pole unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Install grounding conductor pigtail in the base for connecting luminaire to grounding<br />
system.<br />
B. Ground nonmetallic poles and support structures according to Section 26 0526 "Grounding and<br />
Bonding for Electrical Systems."<br />
1. Install grounding conductor and conductor protector.<br />
2. Ground metallic components of pole accessories and foundations.<br />
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.<br />
B. Illumination Observations: Verify normal operation of lighting units after installing luminaires<br />
and energizing circuits with normal power source.<br />
1. Verify operation of photoelectric controls.<br />
C. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and<br />
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance<br />
with standards.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
265600 - 12 EXTERIOR LIGHTING
3.8 DEMONSTRATION<br />
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain luminaire lowering<br />
devices.<br />
Project No.: 10145<br />
550 15th Street Dual Brand Hotel<br />
03/19/2012<br />
END OF SECTION 26 5600<br />
265600 - 13 EXTERIOR LIGHTING